This document is an excerpt from the EUR-Lex website
Document C2006/303E/03
MINUTES#Thursday, 6 July 2006
MINUTES
Thursday, 6 July 2006
MINUTES
Thursday, 6 July 2006
OJ C 303E, 13.12.2006, p. 124–650
(ES, CS, DA, DE, ET, EL, EN, FR, IT, LV, LT, HU, MT, NL, PL, PT, SK, SL, FI, SV)
|
13.12.2006 |
EN |
Official Journal of the European Union |
CE 303/124 |
MINUTES
(2006/C 303 E/03)
PROCEEDINGS OF THE SITTING
IN THE CHAIR: Josep BORRELL FONTELLES
President
1. Opening of sitting
The sitting opened at 9.05.
2. Presentation of the programme of the Finnish Presidency (debate)
Council statement: Programme of the Finnish Presidency
Matti Vanhanen (President-in-Office of the Council) made the statement.
José Manuel Barroso (President of the Commission) spoke.
The following spoke: Hans-Gert Poettering, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Martin Schulz, on behalf of the PSE Group, Graham Watson, on behalf of the ALDE Group, Daniel Marc Cohn-Bendit, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, Esko Seppänen, on behalf of the GUE/NGL Group, Brian Crowley, on behalf of the UEN Group, Nigel Farage, on behalf of the IND/DEM Group, Martin Schulz, on Nigel Farage's remarks, Frank Vanhecke, Non-attached Member, Piia-Noora Kauppi, Reino Paasilinna and Anneli Jäätteenmäki.
IN THE CHAIR: Antonios TRAKATELLIS
Vice-President
The following spoke: Satu Hassi, Roberto Musacchio, Zbigniew Krzysztof Kuźmiuk, Jens-Peter Bonde, Alessandro Battilocchio, Timothy Kirkhope, Hannes Swoboda, Karin Riis-Jørgensen, Ian Hudghton, Tobias Pflüger, Bastiaan Belder, Ryszard Czarnecki, Françoise Grossetête, Gary Titley, Kyösti Virrankoski, Diamanto Manolakou, Ville Itälä, Poul Nyrup Rasmussen, Alexander Lambsdorff, Othmar Karas, Enrique Barón Crespo, Sarah Ludford, João de Deus Pinheiro, Edite Estrela, József Szájer, Jan Andersson, Antonio Tajani, Dariusz Rosati, Jerzy Buzek, Evelyne Gebhardt, Elmar Brok, Guido Sacconi, Gunnar Hökmark and Lasse Lehtinen.
IN THE CHAIR: Josep BORRELL FONTELLES
President
The following spoke: Francisco José Millán Mon, Alexander Stubb, Matti Vanhanen and José Manuel Barroso.
The debate closed.
IN THE CHAIR: Pierre MOSCOVICI
Vice-President
3. Situation in Palestine (debate)
Council and Commission statements: Situation in Palestine
Paula Lehtomäki (President-in-Office of the Council) and Benita Ferrero-Waldner (Member of the Commission) made the statements.
The following spoke: Elmar Brok, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Pasqualina Napoletano, on behalf of the PSE Group, Annemie Neyts-Uyttebroeck, on behalf of the ALDE Group, Caroline Lucas, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, Francis Wurtz, on behalf of the GUE/NGL Group, Roberta Angelilli, on behalf of the UEN Group, Bastiaan Belder, on behalf of the IND/DEM Group, Marek Aleksander Czarnecki, Non-attached Member, Ioannis Kasoulides, Véronique De Keyser, Chris Davies, Roger Knapman, Mario Borghezio, Charles Tannock, Marek Siwiec, Frédérique Ries, Zbigniew Zaleski, Pierre Schapira, Paula Lehtomäki and Benita Ferrero-Waldner.
The debate closed.
IN THE CHAIR: Edward McMILLAN-SCOTT
Vice-President
The following spoke: Robert Atkins, who asked that the vote should begin at the appointed time.
*
* *
The President and Janusz Lewandowski, Chairman of the BUDG Committee, paid tribute to the work of Terence Wynn, former Chairman of the BUDG Committee, who was retiring that week.
4. Voting time
Details of voting (amendments, separate and split votes, etc.) appear in the ‘Results of votes’ annex to the Minutes.
4.1. Strengthening cross-border police cooperation * (Rule 131) (vote)
Report on the initiative by the Kingdom of the Netherlands with a view to the adoption of a Council decision on strengthening cross-border police cooperation with regard to meetings attended by large numbers of people from more than one Member State, at which policing is primarily aimed at maintaining law and order and security and preventing and combating criminal offences [06930/2005 — C6-0117/2005 — 2005/0804(CNS)] — Committee on Civil Liberties, Justice and Home Affairs
Rapporteur: Frieda Brepoels (A6-0222/2006).
(Simple majority)
(Voting record: ‘Results of votes’, Item 1)
INITIATIVE, AMENDMENTS and DRAFT LEGISLATIVE RESOLUTION
Adopted by single vote (P6_TA(2006)0297)
4.2. Technical requirements for inland waterway vessels ***II (vote)
Recommendation for second reading on the Council common position for adopting a directive of the European Parliament and of the Council laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing Council Directive 82/714/EEC [13274/1/2005 — C6-0091/2006 — 1997/0335(COD)] — Committee on Transport and Tourism
Rapporteur: Renate Sommer (A6-0208/2006).
(Qualified majority)
(Voting record: ‘Results of votes’, Item 2)
COMMON POSITION OF THE COUNCIL
Declared approved as amended (P6_TA(2006)0298)
4.3. Harmonisation of technical requirements and administrative procedures in air transport ***II (vote)
Recommendation for second reading on the Council common position for adopting a regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Council Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91 on the harmonisation of technical requirements and administrative procedures in the field of civil aviation [13376/1/2005 — C6-0090/2006 — 2000/0069(COD)] — Committee on Transport and Tourism
Rapporteur: Ulrich Stockmann (A6-0212/2006).
(Qualified majority)
(Voting record: ‘Results of votes’, Item 3)
COMMON POSITION OF THE COUNCIL
Declared approved as amended (P6_TA(2006)0299)
The following spoke on the vote:
|
— |
Ulrich Stockmann (rapporteur), who pointed out that the English version of amendments 20, 22 and 24 was the authentic text; |
|
— |
Gilles Savary, who recommended that the House vote against amendments 17 and 18 if the compromise block was adopted. |
4.4. Shipments of radioactive waste and nuclear spent fuel * (vote)
Report on the proposal for a Council directive on the supervision and control of shipments of radioactive waste and nuclear spent fuel [COM(2005)0673 — C6-0031/2006 — 2005/0272(CNS)] — Committee on Industry, Research and Energy
Rapporteur: Esko Seppänen (A6-0174/2006).
(Simple majority)
(Voting record: ‘Results of votes’, Item 4)
COMMISSION PROPOSAL
Approved as amended (P6_TA(2006)0300)
DRAFT LEGISLATIVE RESOLUTION
Adopted (P6_TA(2006)0300)
The following spoke on the vote:
|
— |
Carl Schlyter, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, who requested that amendment 23 be subject to a roll-call vote (the President agreed); |
|
— |
Bruno Gollnisch, on the voting procedure; |
|
— |
Rebecca Harms, who expressed her disappointment that the Commission had not given its position on the amendments adopted by Parliament. |
4.5. Investing for growth and employment (vote)
Report on implementing the Community Lisbon Programme: more research and innovation — investing for growth and employment: A common approach (2006/2005(INI)) — Committee on Industry, Research and Energy
Rapporteur: Pilar del Castillo Vera (A6-0204/2006).
(Simple majority)
(Voting record: ‘Results of votes’, Item 5)
MOTION FOR A RESOLUTION
Adopted (P6_TA(2006)0301)
4.6. Towards a more integrated approach for industrial policy (vote)
Report on a policy framework to strengthen EU manufacturing — towards a more integrated approach for industrial policy [2006/2003(INI)] — Committee on Industry, Research and Energy
Rapporteur: Joan Calabuig Rull (A6-0206/2006).
(Simple majority)
(Voting record: ‘Results of votes’, Item 6)
MOTION FOR A RESOLUTION
Adopted (P6_TA(2006)0302)
5. Welcome
On behalf of Parliament, the President welcomed Emma Bonino, the Italian minister for European policy and external trade, who had taken her seat in the distinguished visitors' gallery.
6. Explanations of vote
Written explanations of vote:
Explanations of vote submitted in writing under Rule 163(3) appear in the Verbatim Report of Proceedings for the sitting.
Oral explanations of vote:
Report: Ulrich Stockmann — A6-0212/2006
|
— |
Oldřich Vlasák |
7. Corrections to votes and voting intentions
Corrections to votes:
Corrections to votes appear on the ‘Séance en direct’ website under ‘Votes’/‘Results of votes’/‘Roll-call votes’. They are published in hard copy in the ‘Result of roll-call votes’ annex.
The electronic version on Europarl will be regularly updated for a maximum of two weeks after the day of the vote concerned.
After the two-week deadline has passed, the list of corrections to votes will be finalised so that it can be translated and published in the Official Journal.
Voting intentions:
The Presidency had been notified of the following voting intentions (in respect of votes that had not been cast):
Report: Ulrich Stockmann — A6-0212/2006
|
— |
amendment 11 |
|
— |
against: Manuel Medina Ortega, Hubert Pirker |
Manuel Medina Ortega had informed the Presidency that his voting machine had not worked during the vote on that amendment.
Report: Esko Seppänen — A6-0174/2006
|
— |
amendment 24 |
|
— |
in favour: Jan Andersson |
|
— |
against: Karin Jöns, Rainer Wieland |
(The sitting was suspended at 13.30 and resumed at 15.00.)
IN THE CHAIR: Janusz ONYSZKIEWICZ
Vice-President
8. Approval of Minutes of previous sitting
The Minutes of the previous sitting were approved.
9. Protection preservation of the religious heritage in the northern part of Cyprus (written declaration)
By 03.07.2006, written declaration No 21/2006, by Iles Braghetto and Panayiotis Demetriou on the protection and preservation of the religious heritage in the northern part of Cyprus, had been signed by the majority of Parliament's component Members and would therefore, under Rule 116(4), be forwarded to the institutions named therein and published, together with the names of the signatories, in the Texts Adopted of the sitting of 05.09.2006.
Panayiotis Demetriou spoke.
10. International adoption in Romania (written declaration)
By 03.07.2006, written declaration No 23/2006, by Claire Gibault, Jean-Marie Cavada, Antoine Duquesne, Charles Tannock and Enrique Barón Crespo on international adoption in Romania, had been signed by the majority of Parliament's component Members and would therefore, under Rule 116(4), be forwarded to the institutions named therein and published, together with the names of the signatories, in the Texts Adopted of the sitting of 05.09.2006.
11. Extraordinary rendition (debate)
Interim report on the alleged use of European countries by the CIA for the transportation and illegal detention of prisoners [2006/2027(INI)] — Temporary Committee on the alleged use of European countries by the CIA for the transport and illegal detention of prisoners
Rapporteur: Giovanni Claudio Fava (A6-0213/2006).
Giovanni Claudio Fava introduced the report.
The following spoke: Paula Lehtomäki (President-in-Office of the Council) and Franco Frattini (Vice-President of the Commission).
The following spoke: Jas Gawronski, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Wolfgang Kreissl-Dörfler, on behalf of the PSE Group, Sarah Ludford, on behalf of the ALDE Group, Cem Özdemir, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, Giusto Catania, on behalf of the GUE/NGL Group, Konrad Szymański, on behalf of the UEN Group, Mirosław Mariusz Piotrowski, on behalf of the IND/DEM Group, Philip Claeys, Non-attached Member, Carlos Coelho, Józef Pinior, Ignasi Guardans Cambó, Raül Romeva i Rueda, Sylvia-Yvonne Kaufmann, Eoin Ryan, Bogusław Rogalski and Roger Helmer.
IN THE CHAIR: Alejo VIDAL-QUADRAS
Vice-President
The following spoke: Ewa Klamt, Inger Segelström, Sophia in 't Veld, Jean Lambert, Willy Meyer Pleite, Mogens N.J. Camre, Gerard Batten, Ryszard Czarnecki, Bogdan Klich, Proinsias De Rossa, Alexander Alvaro, Dimitrios Papadimoulis, Seán Ó Neachtain, Kathy Sinnott, Paweł Bartłomiej Piskorski, Hubert Pirker, Jan Marinus Wiersma, Sajjad Karim, Luca Romagnoli, Camiel Eurlings, Hannes Swoboda, Anneli Jäätteenmäki, Antonio Tajani, Martine Roure, Barbara Kudrycka, Antonio Masip Hidalgo, Josef Zieleniec, Ana Maria Gomes, Miroslav Mikolášik and Stavros Lambrinidis.
IN THE CHAIR: Antonios TRAKATELLIS
Vice-President
The following spoke: Panayiotis Demetriou, Claude Moraes, Charles Tannock, Jean Spautz, Simon Coveney and Franco Frattini.
The debate closed.
Vote: Minutes of 06.07.2006, Item 6.14.
12. Interception of bank transfer data from the SWIFT system by the US secret services (debate)
Council and Commission statements: Interception of bank transfer data from the SWIFT system by the US secret services
Paula Lehtomäki (President-in-Office of the Council) and Franco Frattini (Vice-President of the Commission) made the statements.
The following spoke: Ewa Klamt, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Martine Roure, on behalf of the PSE Group, Jean-Marie Cavada, on behalf of the ALDE Group, Giusto Catania, on behalf of the GUE/NGL Group, Carlos Coelho, Jan Marinus Wiersma, Sophia in 't Veld, Mihael Brejc, Stavros Lambrinidis, Giovanni Claudio Fava, Paula Lehtomäki and Franco Frattini.
Motions for resolutions to wind up the debate tabled pursuant to Rule 103(2):
|
— |
Mihael Brejc, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Brian Crowley, Romano Maria La Russa and Roberta Angelilli, on behalf of the UEN Group, on the alleged interception of bank transfer data from the SWIFT system by the US secret services (B6-0385/2006), |
|
— |
Martine Roure, on behalf of the PSE Group, on access to transferred bank data by the US secret services (B6-0386/2006), |
|
— |
Monica Frassoni and Daniel Marc Cohn-Bendit, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, on the interception of bank transfer data from the SWIFT system by the US secret services (B6-0391/2006), |
|
— |
Alexander Alvaro, Sophia in 't Veld and Margarita Starkevičiūtė, on behalf of the ALDE Group, on the interception of bank transfer data from the SWIFT system by the US secret services (B6-0393/2006), |
|
— |
Sahra Wagenknecht, Giusto Catania and Umberto Guidoni, on behalf of the GUE/NGL Group, on violation of data protection rules in the European countries by the use of SWIFT data by the US (B6-0395/2006). |
The debate closed.
Vote: Minutes of 06.07.2006, Item 6.15.
IN THE CHAIR: Manuel António dos SANTOS
Vice-President
13. Question Time (Council)
Parliament considered a number of questions to the Council (B6-0312/2006).
Question 1 (Sarah Ludford): ‘Passerelle’ clause.
Paula Lehtomäki (President-in-Office of the Council) answered the question and a supplementary by Sarah Ludford.
Question 2 (Richard Seeber): Framework Convention on Climate Change.
Paula Lehtomäki answered the question and supplementaries by Richard Seeber and Eija-Riitta Korhola.
Question 3 (Bernd Posselt): Negotiations on the status of Kosovo.
Paula Lehtomäki answered the question and supplementaries by Bernd Posselt, Richard Seeber and Hubert Pirker.
Question 4 (Nicholson of Winterbourne): Recognised operational guidelines when dealing with hostage-takers.
Paula Lehtomäki answered the question and supplementaries by Baroness Nicholson of Winterbourne, Agnes Schierhuber and Bernd Posselt.
Question 5 (Manuel Medina Ortega): Need for an integrated immigration policy.
Paula Lehtomäki answered the question and supplementaries by Manuel Medina Ortega, Piia-Noora Kauppi and Hubert Pirker.
Question 6 (Marie Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou): Measures to promote the acceptance and better integration of immigrants.
Paula Lehtomäki answered the question and supplementaries by Marie Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou and Bogusław Sonik.
Question 7 (Eugenijus Gentvilas): Different taxation systems in EU Member States.
Paula Lehtomäki answered the question and supplementaries by Eugenijus Gentvilas, Josu Ortuondo Larrea and Reinhard Rack.
Question 8 (Jacky Henin): Council measures to tackle the weak US dollar.
Paula Lehtomäki answered the question and supplementaries by Jacky Henin and Paul Rübig.
Question 9 (John Bowis): Questions to the Council.
Paula Lehtomäki answered the question and supplementaries by John Bowis, Richard Corbett and Piia-Noora Kauppi.
Questions which had not been answered for lack of time would receive written answers (see annex to the Verbatim Report of Proceedings).
Council Question Time closed.
(The sitting was suspended at 19.00 and resumed at 21.00.)
IN THE CHAIR: Mario MAURO
Vice-President
14. Visa policy with regard to western Balkan countries — Visa facilitation for the countries of the Western Balkans (debate)
Oral question (O-0063/2006) by Doris Pack, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Gisela Kallenbach, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, Hannes Swoboda, on behalf of the PSE Group, Erik Meijer, Ignasi Guardans Cambó, Jelko Kacin and Henrik Lax, to the Council: Visa policy towards the countries of the Western Balkans (B6-0315/2006)
Oral question (O-0077/2006) by Sarah Ludford, Jelko Kacin, Henrik Lax and Ignasi Guardans Cambó, on behalf of the ALDE Group, to the Council: Visa facilitation for the countries of the Western Balkans (B6-0320/2006)
Oral question (O-0078/2006) by Sarah Ludford, Jelko Kacin, Henrik Lax and Ignasi Guardans Cambó, on behalf of the ALDE Group, to the Commission: Visa facilitation for the countries of the Western Balkans (B6-0321/2006)
Doris Pack, Hannes Swoboda, Jelko Kacin and Gisela Kallenbach (authors) moved the oral questions.
The following spoke: Paula Lehtomäki (President-in-Office of the Council) and Franco Frattini (Vice-President of the Commission).
The following spoke: Panagiotis Beglitis, on behalf of the PSE Group, Henrik Lax, on behalf of the ALDE Group, and Paula Lehtomäki.
The debate closed.
15. Implementing powers conferred on the Commission (Interinstitutional agreement) — Implementing powers conferred on the Commission (procedures) (debate)
Report on the interinstitutional agreement taking the form of a joint statement concerning the draft for a Council decision amending Decision 1999/468/EC laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission. [10126/1/2006 — C6-0208/2006 — 2006/2152(ACI)] — Committee on Constitutional Affairs
Rapporteur: Richard Corbett (A6-0237/2006).
Report on the amended proposal for a Council decision amending Decision 1999/468/EC laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission [10126/1/2006 — C6-0190/2006 — 2002/0298(CNS)] — Committee on Constitutional Affairs
Rapporteur: Richard Corbett (A6-0236/2006).
Margot Wallström (Vice-President of the Commission) spoke.
Richard Corbett introduced the reports.
The following spoke: Alexander Radwan, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Pervenche Berès, on behalf of the PSE Group, Andrew Duff, on behalf of the ALDE Group, Satu Hassi, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, Maria da Assunção Esteves, Friedrich-Wilhelm Graefe zu Baringdorf and Margot Wallström.
The debate closed.
Vote: Minutes of 06.07.2006, Item 6.7 and Minutes of 06.07.2006, Item 6.8.
16. Mutual information procedure * — Integration of immigrants in the European Union — European Union immigration policy
Report on the proposal for a Council decision on the establishment of a mutual information procedure concerning Member States' measures in the areas of asylum and immigration [COM(2005)0480 — C6-0335/2005 — 2005/0204(CNS)] — Committee on Civil Liberties, Justice and Home Affairs
Rapporteur: Patrick Gaubert (A6-0186/2006).
Report on strategies and means for the integration of immigrants in the European Union [2006/2056(INI)] — Committee on Civil Liberties, Justice and Home Affairs
Rapporteur: Stavros Lambrinidis (A6-0190/2006).
Oral question (O-0061/2006) by Martin Schulz and Martine Roure, on behalf of the PSE Group, to the Commission: European Union immigration policy (B6-0311/2006)
Oral question (O-0064/2006) by Ewa Klamt, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, to the Commission: EU policy on immigration (B6-0313/2006)
Oral question (O-0070/2006) by Jean Lambert, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, to the Commission: European Union immigration policy (B6-0318/2006)
Oral question (O-0073/2006) by Jeanine Hennis-Plasschaert, on behalf of the ALDE Group, to the Commission: European Union immigration policy (B6-0319/2006)
Oral question (O-0079/2006) by Roberta Angelilli and Romano Maria La Russa, on behalf of the UEN Group, to the Commission: EU policy on immigration (B6-0322/2006)
Patrick Gaubert introduced the report (A6-0186/2006).
Stavros Lambrinidis introduced the report (A6-0190/2006).
Ewa Klamt moved the oral question (B6-0313/2006).
Manuel Medina Ortega (deputising for the authors) moved the oral question (B6-0311/2006).
Jeanine Hennis-Plasschaert moved the oral question (B6-0319/2006).
Jean Lambert moved the oral question (B6-0318/2006).
Franco Frattini (Vice-President of the Commission) spoke.
IN THE CHAIR: Edward McMILLAN-SCOTT
Vice-President
The following spoke: Dimitrios Papadimoulis (draftsman of the opinion of the EMPL Committee), Barbara Kudrycka, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Claude Moraes, on behalf of the PSE Group, Ona Juknevičienė, on behalf of the ALDE Group, Hélène Flautre, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, Giusto Catania, on behalf of the GUE/NGL Group, Sebastiano (Nello) Musumeci, on behalf of the UEN Group, Johannes Blokland, on behalf of the IND/DEM Group, Carlos Coelho, Józef Pinior, Tatjana Ždanoka, Kyriacos Triantaphyllides, Derek Roland Clark, Jan Tadeusz Masiel, Agustín Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Louis Grech, Miguel Portas, Andrzej Tomasz Zapałowski, James Hugh Allister, Simon Busuttil, Stefano Zappalà, David Casa and Franco Frattini.
The debate closed.
Vote: Minutes of 06.07.2006, Item 6.11 and Minutes of 06.07.2006, Item 6.16.
17. AIDS — Time to deliver (debate)
Commission statement: AIDS — Time to deliver
Louis Michel (Member of the Commission) made the statement.
The following spoke: John Bowis, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, Anne Van Lancker, on behalf of the PSE Group, Fiona Hall, on behalf of the ALDE Group, Karin Scheele and Louis Michel.
Motions for resolutions to wind up the debate tabled pursuant to Rule 103(2):
|
— |
Luisa Morgantini, Feleknas Uca, Vittorio Agnoletto, Eva-Britt Svensson and Adamos Adamou, on behalf of the GUE/NGL Group, on HIV/AIDS: Time to Deliver (B6-0375/2006), |
|
— |
Eoin Ryan, on behalf of the UEN Group, on AIDS — Time to Deliver (B6-0376/2006), |
|
— |
Miguel Angel Martínez Martínez, Anne Van Lancker and Pierre Schapira, on behalf of the PSE Group, on HIV/AIDS: Time to Deliver (B6-0377/2006), |
|
— |
John Bowis and Maria Martens, on behalf of the PPE-DE Group, on AIDS — Time to Deliver (B6-0378/2006), |
|
— |
Fiona Hall, Marios Matsakis and Elizabeth Lynne, on behalf of the ALDE Group, on AIDS — Time to Deliver (B6-0379/2006), |
|
— |
Margrete Auken, on behalf of the Verts/ALE Group, on HIV/AIDS (B6-0380/2006). |
The debate closed.
Vote: Minutes of 06.07.2006, Item 6.19.
18. Agenda for next sitting
The agenda for the next sitting had been established (‘Agenda’ PE 354.650/OJJE).
19. Closure of sitting
The sitting closed at 0.05.
Julian Priestley
Secretary-General
Gérard Onesta
Vice-President
ATTENDANCE REGISTER
The following signed:
Adamou, Agnoletto, Aita, Albertini, Allister, Alvaro, Andersson, Andrejevs, Andria, Andrikienė, Angelilli, Antoniozzi, Arif, Arnaoutakis, Ashworth, Assis, Atkins, Attard-Montalto, Attwooll, Aubert, Audy, Auken, Ayala Sender, Aylward, Ayuso, Bachelot-Narquin, Baco, Badia I Cutchet, Barón Crespo, Barsi-Pataky, Batten, Battilocchio, Batzeli, Bauer, Beaupuy, Beazley, Becsey, Beer, Beglitis, Belder, Belet, Belohorská, Bennahmias, Beňová, Berend, Berès, van den Berg, Berger, Berlato, Berlinguer, Berman, Bielan, Birutis, Blokland, Bloom, Bobošíková, Böge, Bösch, Bonde, Bono, Bonsignore, Booth, Borghezio, Borrell Fontelles, Bourlanges, Bourzai, Bowis, Bowles, Bozkurt, Bradbourn, Braghetto, Brejc, Brepoels, Breyer, Březina, Brie, Brok, Brunetta, Budreikaitė, van Buitenen, Bullmann, van den Burg, Bushill-Matthews, Busk, Busquin, Busuttil, Buzek, Cabrnoch, Calabuig Rull, Callanan, Camre, Capoulas Santos, Cappato, Carlotti, Carnero González, Casa, Casaca, Cashman, Casini, Caspary, Castex, Castiglione, del Castillo Vera, Catania, Cavada, Cederschiöld, Cercas, Chatzimarkakis, Chichester, Chiesa, Chmielewski, Christensen, Chruszcz, Claeys, Clark, Cocilovo, Coelho, Cohn-Bendit, Corbett, Corbey, Correia, Cottigny, Coûteaux, Coveney, Cramer, Crowley, Marek Aleksander Czarnecki, Ryszard Czarnecki, Daul, Davies, de Brún, Degutis, Dehaene, De Keyser, Demetriou, De Michelis, Deprez, De Rossa, Descamps, Désir, Deß, Deva, De Veyrac, De Vits, Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Dičkutė, Didžiokas, Díez González, Dillen, Dimitrakopoulos, Dobolyi, Dombrovskis, Doorn, Douay, Dover, Doyle, Drčar Murko, Duchoň, Dührkop Dührkop, Duff, Duka-Zólyomi, Ebner, El Khadraoui, Elles, Esteves, Estrela, Ettl, Eurlings, Jill Evans, Jonathan Evans, Robert Evans, Fajmon, Falbr, Farage, Fatuzzo, Fava, Fazakas, Ferber, Fernandes, Fernández Martín, Anne Ferreira, Elisa Ferreira, Figueiredo, Fjellner, Flasarová, Flautre, Florenz, Foglietta, Foltyn-Kubicka, Fontaine, Ford, Fourtou, Fraga Estévez, Freitas, Friedrich, Fruteau, Gahler, Gál, Gaľa, Galeote, García-Margallo y Marfil, García Pérez, Gargani, Garriga Polledo, Gaubert, Gauzès, Gawronski, Gebhardt, Gentvilas, Geremek, Geringer de Oedenberg, Gewalt, Gibault, Gierek, Giertych, Gill, Gklavakis, Glattfelder, Goebbels, Goepel, Golik, Gomes, Gomolka, Gottardi, Grabowska, Grabowski, Graça Moura, Graefe zu Baringdorf, Gräßle, Grech, Griesbeck, Gröner, de Groen-Kouwenhoven, Groote, Grosch, Grossetête, Gruber, Guardans Cambó, Guellec, Guerreiro, Guidoni, Gurmai, Gutiérrez-Cortines, Guy-Quint, Gyürk, Hänsch, Hall, Hammerstein Mintz, Hamon, Handzlik, Hannan, Harangozó, Harbour, Harkin, Harms, Hasse Ferreira, Hassi, Hatzidakis, Haug, Hazan, Heaton-Harris, Hedh, Hedkvist Petersen, Helmer, Henin, Hennicot-Schoepges, Hennis-Plasschaert, Herczog, Herranz García, Herrero-Tejedor, Hieronymi, Higgins, Hökmark, Honeyball, Hoppenstedt, Horáček, Howitt, Hudacký, Hudghton, Hughes, Hutchinson, Ibrisagic, Ilves, in 't Veld, Isler Béguin, Itälä, Jackson, Jäätteenmäki, Jałowiecki, Janowski, Járóka, Jarzembowski, Jeggle, Jensen, Joan i Marí, Jöns, Jørgensen, Jonckheer, Jordan Cizelj, Juknevičienė, Kacin, Kaczmarek, Kallenbach, Kamall, Kamiński, Karas, Karim, Kasoulides, Kaufmann, Kauppi, Tunne Kelam, Kilroy-Silk, Kindermann, Kinnock, Kirkhope, Klamt, Klaß, Klich, Klinz, Knapman, Koch, Koch-Mehrin, Kohlíček, Konrad, Korhola, Kósáné Kovács, Koterec, Kozlík, Krahmer, Krarup, Krasts, Kratsa-Tsagaropoulou, Krehl, Kreissl-Dörfler, Kristensen, Kristovskis, Krupa, Kuc, Kudrycka, Kułakowski, Kušķis, Kusstatscher, Kuźmiuk, Lagendijk, Laignel, Lamassoure, Lambert, Lambrinidis, Lambsdorff, Landsbergis, Lang, Langen, Langendries, Laperrouze, La Russa, Lauk, Lax, Lechner, Le Foll, Lehideux, Lehne, Lehtinen, Leichtfried, Leinen, Jean-Marie Le Pen, Marine Le Pen, Le Rachinel, Lewandowski, Liberadzki, Libicki, Lichtenberger, Lienemann, Liotard, Lipietz, López-Istúriz White, Losco, Louis, Lucas, Ludford, Lulling, Lynne, Maaten, McAvan, McGuinness, McMillan-Scott, Madeira, Maldeikis, Manders, Maňka, Erika Mann, Thomas Mann, Manolakou, Mantovani, Markov, Marques, David Martin, Hans-Peter Martin, Martinez, Martínez Martínez, Masiel, Masip Hidalgo, Maštálka, Mastenbroek, Mathieu, Matsakis, Matsouka, Mauro, Mavrommatis, Mayer, Mayor Oreja, Medina Ortega, Meijer, Méndez de Vigo, Menéndez del Valle, Meyer Pleite, Miguélez Ramos, Mikko, Mikolášik, Millán Mon, Mitchell, Mölzer, Mohácsi, Montoro Romero, Moraes, Moreno Sánchez, Morgan, Morgantini, Morillon, Moscovici, Mote, Mulder, Musacchio, Muscardini, Muscat, Musotto, Mussolini, Musumeci, Myller, Napoletano, Nassauer, Nattrass, Navarro, Newton Dunn, Annemie Neyts-Uyttebroeck, Nicholson, Nicholson of Winterbourne, van Nistelrooij, Novak, Obiols i Germà, Achille Occhetto, Öger, Özdemir, Olajos, Olbrycht, Ó Neachtain, Onesta, Onyszkiewicz, Oomen-Ruijten, Ortuondo Larrea, Őry, Ouzký, Oviir, Paasilinna, Pack, Pafilis, Pahor, Paleckis, Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou, Pannella, Panzeri, Papadimoulis, Papastamkos, Parish, Patriciello, Patrie, Peillon, Pęk, Pflüger, Piecyk, Pieper, Pīks, Pinheiro, Pinior, Piotrowski, Pirilli, Pirker, Piskorski, Pistelli, Pittella, Pleguezuelos Aguilar, Pleštinská, Podestà, Podkański, Poettering, Poignant, Polfer, Pomés Ruiz, Portas, Posdorf, Posselt, Prets, Prodi, Protasiewicz, Purvis, Queiró, Quisthoudt-Rowohl, Rack, Radwan, Ransdorf, Rapkay, Rasmussen, Remek, Resetarits, Reul, Reynaud, Ribeiro e Castro, Riera Madurell, Ries, Riis-Jørgensen, Rivera, Rizzo, Rocard, Rogalski, Roithová, Romagnoli, Romeva i Rueda, Rosati, Roszkowski, Rothe, Rouček, Roure, Rudi Ubeda, Rübig, Rühle, Rutowicz, Ryan, Sacconi, Saïfi, Sakalas, Salinas García, Salvini, Samaras, Samuelsen, Sánchez Presedo, dos Santos, Sartori, Saryusz-Wolski, Savary, Savi, Schapira, Scheele, Schenardi, Schierhuber, Schlyter, Frithjof Schmidt, Schmitt, Schnellhardt, Schöpflin, Schroedter, Schulz, Schwab, Seeber, Seeberg, Segelström, Seppänen, Siekierski, Sifunakis, Silva Peneda, Sinnott, Siwiec, Sjöstedt, Skinner, Škottová, Smith, Sommer, Sonik, Sornosa Martínez, Sousa Pinto, Spautz, Speroni, Staes, Staniszewska, Starkevičiūtė, Šťastný, Stauner, Sterckx, Stevenson, Stihler, Stockmann, Strejček, Strož, Stubb, Sturdy, Sudre, Sumberg, Surján, Susta, Svensson, Swoboda, Szájer, Szejna, Szent-Iványi, Szymański, Tabajdi, Takkula, Tannock, Tarabella, Tarand, Tatarella, Thomsen, Thyssen, Titford, Titley, Toia, Tomczak, Toubon, Toussas, Trakatellis, Trautmann, Triantaphyllides, Trüpel, Turmes, Tzampazi, Uca, Ulmer, Väyrynen, Vaidere, Vakalis, Vanhecke, Van Hecke, Van Lancker, Van Orden, Varela Suanzes-Carpegna, Varvitsiotis, Vaugrenard, Ventre, Veraldi, Vergnaud, Vernola, Vidal-Quadras, de Villiers, Vincenzi, Virrankoski, Vlasák, Voggenhuber, Wagenknecht, Wallis, Walter, Watson, Manfred Weber, Weiler, Weisgerber, Westlund, Whittaker, Wieland, Wiersma, Willmott, Wise, von Wogau, Bernard Piotr Wojciechowski, Janusz Wojciechowski, Wortmann-Kool, Wurtz, Wynn, Xenogiannakopoulou, Yañez-Barnuevo García, Záborská, Zaleski, Zani, Zapałowski, Zappalà, Ždanoka, Železný, Zieleniec, Zīle, Zimmer, Zingaretti, Zvěřina, Zwiefka
Observers:
Abadjiev, Anastase, Arabadjiev, Athanasiu, Bărbuleţiu, Bliznashki, Buruiană Aprodu, Ciornei, Cioroianu, Corlăţean, Coşea, Corina Creţu, Gabriela Creţu, Martin Dimitrov, Dîncu, Duca, Dumitrescu, Ganţ, Hogea, Ilchev, Kazak, Kirilov, Kónya-Hamar, Marinescu, Mihăescu, Morţun, Paparizov, Parvanova, Petre, Podgorean, Popa, Popeangă, Severin, Shouleva, Silaghi, Sofianski, Szabó, Ţicău, Tîrle, Vigenin, Zgonea Valeriu Ştefan
ANNEX I
RESULTS OF VOTES
Abbreviations and symbols
|
+ |
adopted |
|
- |
rejected |
|
↓ |
lapsed |
|
W |
withdrawn |
|
RCV (…, …, …) |
roll-call vote (for, against, abstentions) |
|
EV (…, …, …) |
electronic vote (for, against, abstentions) |
|
split |
split vote |
|
sep |
separate vote |
|
am |
amendment |
|
CA |
compromise amendment |
|
CP |
corresponding part |
|
D |
deleting amendment |
|
= |
identical amendments |
|
§ |
paragraph |
|
art |
article |
|
rec |
recital |
|
MOT |
motion for a resolution |
|
JT MOT |
joint motion for a resolution |
|
SEC |
secret ballot |
1. Strengthening cross-border police cooperation *
Report: Frieda BREPOELS (A6-0222/2006)
|
Subject |
RCV, etc. |
Vote |
RCV/EV — remarks |
|
single vote |
|
+ |
|
2. Technical requirements for inland waterway vessels ***II
Recommendation for second reading: (qualified majority)
Renate SOMMER (A6-0208/2006)
|
Subject |
Am. No |
Author |
RCV, etc. |
Vote |
RCV/EV — remarks |
|
After recital 10 |
1 |
Committee |
|
+ |
|
3. Harmonisation of technical requirements and administrative procedures in air transport ***II
Recommendation for second reading: (qualified majority)
Ulrich STOCKMANN (A6-0212/2006)
|
Subject |
Am. No |
Author |
RCV, etc. |
Vote |
RCV/EV — remarks |
|
Block 1 (compromise) |
19rev - 24rev |
Committee |
|
+ |
|
|
Block 2 (Committee) |
1-8 10 |
Committee |
|
↓ |
|
|
Article 1, after § 4 |
11 |
GUE/NGL |
RCV |
- |
138, 494, 15 |
|
Article 8a, § 2 |
16= 25rev = |
SAVARY et al, PPE-DE, PSE, ALDE, Verts/ALE |
|
+ |
|
|
9 |
Committee |
|
↓ |
|
|
|
Article 8a, after §2 |
17 |
SAVARY et al |
|
- |
|
|
Annex 3 |
15 |
GUE/NGL |
|
- |
|
|
12 |
GUE/NGL |
|
- |
|
|
|
18 |
SAVARY ea |
|
- |
|
|
|
13 |
GUE/NGL |
|
- |
|
|
|
14 |
GUE/NGL |
|
- |
|
The compromise block consisted of amendments 19/rev to 25/rev.
Requests for roll-call votes
GUE/NGL am 11
4. Shipments of radioactive waste and nuclear spent fuel *
Report: Esko SEPPÄNEN (A6-0174/2006)
|
Subject |
Am. No |
Author |
RCV, etc. |
Vote |
RCV/EV — remarks |
|
Amendments by the committee responsible — block vote |
1 3-5 9-10 12-14 |
Committee |
|
+ |
|
|
Amendments by the committee responsible — separate vote |
2 |
Committee |
sep/EV |
+ |
597, 48, 9 |
|
6 |
Committee |
sep/EV |
+ |
387, 257, 8 |
|
|
7 |
Committee |
sep |
+ |
|
|
|
8 |
Committee |
split |
|
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2/RCV |
+ |
558, 79, 17 |
|||
|
15 |
Committee |
sep |
+ |
|
|
|
16 |
Committee |
sep |
+ |
|
|
|
17 |
Committee |
sep |
+ |
|
|
|
18 |
Committee |
sep |
+ |
|
|
|
20 |
Committee |
split |
|
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2/RCV |
+ |
626, 23, 10 |
|||
|
Article 6, § 2 |
11 |
Committee |
|
+ |
|
|
22 |
Verts/ALE |
|
- |
|
|
|
Article 7 |
23 |
Verts/ALE |
RCV |
- |
137, 511, 12 |
|
Article 12 |
24 |
Verts/ALE |
RCV |
- |
160, 469, 20 |
|
19 |
Committee |
|
+ |
|
|
|
Article 13 |
25 |
Verts/ALE |
RCV |
- |
166, 471, 23 |
|
Recital 10 |
21 |
Verts/ALE |
|
- |
|
|
vote: amended proposal |
|
+ |
|
||
|
vote: legislative resolution |
EV |
+ |
523, 86, 37 |
||
Requests for roll-call votes
Verts/ALE: ams 23, 24, 25
Requests for separate votes
PSE: am 6
Verts/ALE: ams 2, 7, 15, 16, 17, 18
Requests for split votes
Verts/ALE
am 8
First part: text as a whole without the words ‘and protected against any misuse’
Second part: those words
IND/DEM
am 20
First part: text as a whole without the words ‘with the exception of reshipments’
Second part: those words
5. Investing for growth and employment
Report: Pilar DEL CASTILLO VERA (A6-0204/2006)
|
Subject |
Am. No |
Author |
RCV, etc. |
Vote |
RCV/EV — remarks |
|
§ 8 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2 |
- |
|
|||
|
§ 18 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1/EV |
+ |
524, 92, 10 |
|||
|
2/EV |
+ |
360, 276, 8 |
|||
|
§ 36 |
§ |
original text |
sep |
+ |
|
|
§ 48 |
§ |
original text |
sep/EV |
+ |
312, 312, 18 |
|
§ 54 |
§ |
original text |
sep/EV |
+ |
369, 258, 8 |
|
vote: resolution (as a whole) |
|
+ |
|
||
Requests for separate votes
PPE-DE: §§ 36, 48, 54
Requests for split votes
PPE-DE
§ 8
First part: text as a whole without the words ‘proposal to draft a’
Second part: those words
§ 18
First part:‘Takes note … advanced companies;’
Second part:‘considers that … like GPL and PDL;’
6. Towards a more integrated approach for industrial policy
Report: Joan CALABUIG RULL (A6-0206/2006)
|
Subject |
Am. No |
Author |
RCV, etc. |
Vote |
RCV/EV — remarks |
|
§ 5 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2 |
+ |
|
|||
|
After § 6 |
4 |
Verts/ALE |
|
- |
|
|
§ 7 |
5 |
Verts/ALE |
|
- |
|
|
After § 7 |
6 |
Verts/ALE |
EV |
+ |
339, 274, 9 |
|
7 |
Verts/ALE |
EV |
- |
181, 420, 23 |
|
|
§ 8 |
§ |
original text |
sep |
+ |
|
|
§ 10 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2 |
+ |
|
|||
|
§ 12 |
8 |
Verts/ALE |
|
- |
|
|
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2 |
+ |
|
|||
|
3 |
+ |
|
|||
|
§ 16 |
§ |
original text |
sep |
+ |
|
|
§ 22 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2/EV |
+ |
322, 292, 7 |
|||
|
3 |
+ |
|
|||
|
§ 23 |
§ |
original text |
sep |
+ |
|
|
§ 25 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2 |
+ |
|
|||
|
§ 26 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2 |
+ |
|
|||
|
3 |
+ |
|
|||
|
§ 27 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2/EV |
+ |
304, 295, 26 |
|||
|
3 |
+ |
|
|||
|
4 |
+ |
|
|||
|
§ 28 |
§ |
original text |
sep |
- |
|
|
§ 30 |
§ |
original text |
sep |
+ |
|
|
§ 32 |
9 |
Verts/ALE |
|
- |
|
|
§ |
original text |
sep/EV |
+ |
469, 131, 13 |
|
|
After § 32 |
10 |
Verts/ALE |
|
- |
|
|
§ 33 |
11 |
Verts/ALE |
EV |
+ |
405, 198, 17 |
|
§ |
original text |
sep |
↓ |
|
|
|
After § 34 |
1 |
GUE/NGL |
split |
|
|
|
1/EV |
+ |
346, 267, 8 |
|||
|
2 |
- |
|
|||
|
§ 38 |
§ |
original text |
split |
|
|
|
1 |
+ |
|
|||
|
2 |
+ |
|
|||
|
Recital B |
2 |
Verts/ALE |
|
+ |
|
|
Recital C |
3 |
Verts/ALE |
|
+ |
|
|
vote: resolution (as a whole) |
RCV |
+ |
484, 58, 54 |
||
Requests for roll-call votes
PPE-DE: final vote
Requests for separate votes
PPE-DE: §§ 16, 28
Verts/ALE: §§ 8, 23, 25, 30, 32
Requests for split votes
ALDE, PSE
am 1
First part:‘Calls for the rights of workers … representative bodies,’
Second part:‘especially European Works Councils … honour its commitments;’
PPE-DE
§ 5
First part: text as a whole without the words ‘isolated national policies could hamper … industrial policy and that’
Second part: those words
§ 10
First part:‘Recognises the need … sustainable development;’
Second part:‘calls on the Commission … more and better jobs;’
§ 12
First part:‘Is convinced that … facilitate structural change;’
Second part:‘regrets the fact … learning and training;’
Third part:‘urges the Member States … scientific studies;’
§ 22
First part:‘Welcomes the concept … of the market;’
Second part:‘believes, however … action in R&D;’
Third part:‘encourages the Commission … in practical terms;’
§ 25
First part:‘Considers that it might … sustainability and competitiveness;’
Second part:‘points out that, … manufacturing industries;’
§ 26
First part:‘Points out that … and social players,’
Second part:‘to draw up … by each region;’
Third part:‘calls on Member States … Structural Funds in this respect;’
§ 27
First part:‘Points out that … territorial dimension;’
Second part:‘notes that areas … specific needs;’
Third part:‘calls on the Commission … intensified among regions;’
Fourth part:‘facing similar problems … and economic policies;’
Verts/ALE
§ 38
First part:‘Urges the Commission … intellectual property rights;’
Second part:‘in this regard, considers … goods enter the EU;’
ANNEX II
RESULT OF ROLL-CALL VOTES
1. Recommendation: Stockmann A6-0212/2006
Amendment 11
For: 138
ALDE: Harkin
GUE/NGL: Adamou, Agnoletto, Aita, Brie, Catania, de Brún, Figueiredo, Flasarová, Guerreiro, Guidoni, Henin, Kaufmann, Kohlíček, Krarup, Liotard, Manolakou, Markov, Maštálka, Meijer, Meyer Pleite, Musacchio, Pafilis, Papadimoulis, Pflüger, Portas, Seppänen, Sjöstedt, Strož, Svensson, Toussas, Triantaphyllides, Uca, Wagenknecht, Zimmer
IND/DEM: Batten, Bonde, Booth, Clark, Coûteaux, Farage, Knapman, Louis, Nattrass, Titford, Tomczak, de Villiers, Whittaker, Wise
NI: Bobošíková, Chruszcz, Claeys, Dillen, Giertych, Gollnisch, Lang, Le Pen Jean-Marie, Le Pen Marine, Le Rachinel, Martin Hans-Peter, Martinez, Mölzer, Mussolini, Romagnoli, Schenardi, Vanhecke, Wojciechowski Bernard Piotr
PPE-DE: Ebner, Rübig
PSE: Arif, Arnaoutakis, Bono, Bourzai, Castex, Cottigny, De Keyser, Désir, Douay, Ferreira Anne, Fruteau, Hazan, Hutchinson, Laignel, Lambrinidis, Le Foll, Lienemann, Locatelli, Matsouka, Peillon, Reynaud, Rocard, Roure, Savary, Schapira, Sifunakis, Tarabella, Trautmann, Tzampazi, Vaugrenard, Vergnaud
Verts/ALE: Aubert, Auken, Beer, Bennahmias, Breyer, Cohn-Bendit, Cramer, Evans Jill, Flautre, de Groen-Kouwenhoven, Hammerstein Mintz, Harms, Hassi, Horáček, Hudghton, Isler Béguin, Joan i Marí, Jonckheer, Kallenbach, Kusstatscher, Lagendijk, Lambert, Lichtenberger, Lipietz, Lucas, Özdemir, Onesta, Romeva i Rueda, Rühle, Schlyter, Schmidt, Schroedter, Smith, Staes, Trüpel, Turmes, Voggenhuber, Ždanoka
Against: 494
ALDE: Alvaro, Andrejevs, Andria, Attwooll, Beaupuy, Birutis, Bourlanges, Bowles, Budreikaitė, Busk, Cappato, Cavada, Chatzimarkakis, Cocilovo, Davies, Degutis, Deprez, Dičkutė, Drčar Murko, Duff, Fourtou, Gentvilas, Geremek, Gibault, Griesbeck, Guardans Cambó, Hall, Hennis-Plasschaert, in 't Veld, Jäätteenmäki, Jensen, Juknevičienė, Kacin, Karim, Klinz, Koch-Mehrin, Krahmer, Kułakowski, Lambsdorff, Laperrouze, Lax, Losco, Ludford, Lynne, Maaten, Manders, Matsakis, Mohácsi, Morillon, Mulder, Newton Dunn, Neyts-Uyttebroeck, Nicholson of Winterbourne, Onyszkiewicz, Ortuondo Larrea, Oviir, Pannella, Pistelli, Polfer, Prodi, Resetarits, Ries, Riis-Jørgensen, Samuelsen, Savi, Staniszewska, Starkevičiūtė, Sterckx, Susta, Szent-Iványi, Takkula, Toia, Väyrynen, Van Hecke, Veraldi, Virrankoski, Wallis, Watson
IND/DEM: Belder, Blokland, Sinnott, Železný
NI: Allister, Battilocchio, Belohorská, Czarnecki Ryszard, De Michelis, Helmer, Mote, Piskorski, Rivera, Rutowicz
PPE-DE: Albertini, Andrikienė, Antoniozzi, Ashworth, Atkins, Audy, Ayuso González, Bachelot-Narquin, Barsi-Pataky, Bauer, Beazley, Becsey, Belet, Berend, Böge, Bonsignore, Bowis, Bradbourn, Braghetto, Brejc, Brepoels, Březina, Brok, Brunetta, Bushill-Matthews, Busuttil, Buzek, Cabrnoch, Callanan, Casa, Casini, Caspary, Castiglione, del Castillo Vera, Cederschiöld, Chichester, Chmielewski, Coelho, Coveney, Daul, Dehaene, Demetriou, Descamps, Deß, Deva, De Veyrac, Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Dimitrakopoulos, Dombrovskis, Doorn, Dover, Doyle, Duchoň, Duka-Zólyomi, Elles, Esteves, Eurlings, Fajmon, Fatuzzo, Ferber, Fernández Martín, Fjellner, Florenz, Fontaine, Fraga Estévez, Freitas, Friedrich, Gahler, Gál, Gaľa, Galeote, García-Margallo y Marfil, Gargani, Gaubert, Gauzès, Gawronski, Gewalt, Gklavakis, Glattfelder, Goepel, Gomolka, Graça Moura, Gräßle, Grosch, Grossetête, Guellec, Gutiérrez-Cortines, Gyürk, Handzlik, Hannan, Harbour, Hatzidakis, Heaton-Harris, Hennicot-Schoepges, Herranz García, Herrero-Tejedor, Hieronymi, Higgins, Hökmark, Hoppenstedt, Hudacký, Itälä, Jackson, Jałowiecki, Járóka, Jarzembowski, Jeggle, Jordan Cizelj, Kaczmarek, Kamall, Karas, Kasoulides, Kauppi, Kelam, Kirkhope, Klamt, Klaß, Klich, Koch, Konrad, Korhola, Kratsa-Tsagaropoulou, Kudrycka, Kušķis, Lamassoure, Landsbergis, Langen, Langendries, Lauk, Lechner, Lehne, Lewandowski, López-Istúriz White, Lulling, McGuinness, McMillan-Scott, Mann Thomas, Mantovani, Marques, Mauro, Mavrommatis, Mayer, Mayor Oreja, Mikolášik, Millán Mon, Mitchell, Montoro Romero, Musotto, Nicholson, van Nistelrooij, Novak, Olajos, Olbrycht, Oomen-Ruijten, Őry, Ouzký, Pack, Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou, Papastamkos, Parish, Patriciello, Pieper, Pīks, Pinheiro, Pleštinská, Podestà, Poettering, Pomés Ruiz, Posdorf, Posselt, Protasiewicz, Purvis, Queiró, Quisthoudt-Rowohl, Rack, Radwan, Reul, Ribeiro e Castro, Rudi Ubeda, Saïfi, Samaras, Sartori, Saryusz-Wolski, Schierhuber, Schmitt, Schnellhardt, Schöpflin, Schröder, Schwab, Seeber, Siekierski, Silva Peneda, Škottová, Sommer, Sonik, Spautz, Šťastný, Stauner, Stevenson, Strejček, Stubb, Sturdy, Sudre, Szájer, Tajani, Tannock, Thyssen, Toubon, Trakatellis, Ulmer, Vakalis, Van Orden, Varela Suanzes-Carpegna, Varvitsiotis, Vernola, Vidal-Quadras, Vlasák, Weber Manfred, Weisgerber, Wieland, von Wogau, Wortmann-Kool, Záborská, Zaleski, Zappalà, Zieleniec, Zvěřina, Zwiefka
PSE: Andersson, Attard-Montalto, Ayala Sender, Badia I Cutchet, Barón Crespo, Batzeli, Beglitis, Beňová, Berès, van den Berg, Berger, Berlinguer, Berman, Bösch, Bozkurt, Bullmann, van den Burg, Busquin, Capoulas Santos, Carlotti, Carnero González, Casaca, Cashman, Cercas, Chiesa, Christensen, Corbett, Corbey, Correia, De Rossa, De Vits, Díez González, Dührkop Dührkop, El Khadraoui, Estrela, Ettl, Evans Robert, Falbr, Fava, Fazakas, Fernandes, Ferreira Elisa, García Pérez, Gebhardt, Geringer de Oedenberg, Gierek, Gill, Glante, Goebbels, Golik, Gomes, Gottardi, Grabowska, Grech, Gröner, Groote, Gruber, Gurmai, Guy-Quint, Hänsch, Hamon, Harangozó, Hasse Ferreira, Haug, Hedh, Hedkvist Petersen, Herczog, Honeyball, Hughes, Ilves, Jørgensen, Kindermann, Kinnock, Kósáné Kovács, Koterec, Krehl, Kreissl-Dörfler, Kristensen, Kuc, Leichtfried, Leinen, Liberadzki, McAvan, Madeira, Maňka, Martin David, Martínez Martínez, Masip Hidalgo, Mastenbroek, Miguélez Ramos, Mikko, Moraes, Moreno Sánchez, Morgan, Muscat, Myller, Napoletano, Obiols i Germà, Occhetto, Öger, Paasilinna, Pahor, Paleckis, Panzeri, Patrie, Piecyk, Pinior, Pittella, Pleguezuelos Aguilar, Poignant, Prets, Rapkay, Rasmussen, Riera Madurell, Rosati, Rothe, Rouček, Sacconi, Sakalas, Salinas García, Sánchez Presedo, dos Santos, Scheele, Schulz, Segelström, Siwiec, Skinner, Sornosa Martínez, Sousa Pinto, Stockmann, Swoboda, Szejna, Tabajdi, Tarand, Thomsen, Titley, Van Lancker, Vincenzi, Walter, Weiler, Westlund, Wiersma, Willmott, Wynn, Xenogiannakopoulou, Yañez-Barnuevo García, Zani, Zingaretti
UEN: Angelilli, Aylward, Berlato, Camre, Crowley, Didžiokas, Foglietta, Foltyn-Kubicka, Janowski, Krasts, Kristovskis, Kuźmiuk, Libicki, Maldeikis, Muscardini, Musumeci, Ó Neachtain, Pirilli, Podkański, Roszkowski, Ryan, Szymański, Tatarella, Vaidere, Wojciechowski Janusz, Zīle
Abstention: 15
GUE/NGL: Remek
IND/DEM: Grabowski, Krupa, Pęk, Piotrowski, Rogalski, Zapałowski
NI: Baco, Borghezio, Kilroy-Silk, Kozlík, Salvini, Speroni
PPE-DE: Seeberg
Verts/ALE: van Buitenen
Corrections to votes
For
Benoît Hamon, Katerina Batzeli, Panagiotis Beglitis
Abstention
Paul Rübig
2. Report: Seppänen A6-0174/2006
Amendment 8/2
For: 558
ALDE: Alvaro, Andrejevs, Andria, Attwooll, Beaupuy, Birutis, Bourlanges, Bowles, Budreikaitė, Busk, Cappato, Cavada, Chatzimarkakis, Cocilovo, Davies, Degutis, Deprez, Dičkutė, Drčar Murko, Duff, Fourtou, Gentvilas, Geremek, Gibault, Griesbeck, Guardans Cambó, Hall, Harkin, Hennis-Plasschaert, in 't Veld, Jäätteenmäki, Jensen, Juknevičienė, Kacin, Karim, Klinz, Koch-Mehrin, Krahmer, Kułakowski, Lambsdorff, Laperrouze, Lax, Losco, Ludford, Lynne, Maaten, Manders, Matsakis, Mohácsi, Morillon, Mulder, Newton Dunn, Neyts-Uyttebroeck, Nicholson of Winterbourne, Onyszkiewicz, Ortuondo Larrea, Oviir, Pannella, Pistelli, Polfer, Prodi, Ries, Riis-Jørgensen, Savi, Staniszewska, Starkevičiūtė, Sterckx, Susta, Szent-Iványi, Takkula, Toia, Väyrynen, Van Hecke, Veraldi, Virrankoski, Wallis, Watson
GUE/NGL: Brie, Figueiredo, Flasarová, Guerreiro, Henin, Kaufmann, Kohlíček, Krarup, Liotard, Maštálka, Meijer, Meyer Pleite, Papadimoulis, Pflüger, Portas, Ransdorf, Remek, Seppänen, Sjöstedt, Strož, Svensson, Uca, Wagenknecht, Zimmer
IND/DEM: Belder, Blokland, Bonde, Coûteaux, Grabowski, Krupa, Louis, Pęk, Piotrowski, Sinnott, Tomczak, de Villiers, Zapałowski, Železný
NI: Allister, Battilocchio, Belohorská, Bobošíková, Chruszcz, Claeys, Czarnecki Ryszard, De Michelis, Dillen, Giertych, Gollnisch, Helmer, Lang, Le Pen Jean-Marie, Le Pen Marine, Le Rachinel, Martinez, Mölzer, Mussolini, Piskorski, Rivera, Romagnoli, Rutowicz, Schenardi, Vanhecke, Wojciechowski Bernard Piotr
PPE-DE: Albertini, Andrikienė, Antoniozzi, Ashworth, Atkins, Audy, Ayuso González, Bachelot-Narquin, Barsi-Pataky, Bauer, Beazley, Becsey, Belet, Berend, Böge, Bonsignore, Bowis, Bradbourn, Braghetto, Brejc, Brepoels, Březina, Brunetta, Bushill-Matthews, Busuttil, Buzek, Cabrnoch, Callanan, Casa, Casini, Caspary, Castiglione, del Castillo Vera, Cederschiöld, Chichester, Chmielewski, Coelho, Daul, Dehaene, Demetriou, Descamps, Deß, Deva, De Veyrac, Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Dimitrakopoulos, Dombrovskis, Doorn, Dover, Doyle, Duchoň, Duka-Zólyomi, Ebner, Elles, Esteves, Eurlings, Fajmon, Fatuzzo, Ferber, Fernández Martín, Fjellner, Florenz, Fontaine, Fraga Estévez, Freitas, Friedrich, Gahler, Gál, Gaľa, Galeote, García-Margallo y Marfil, Gargani, Gaubert, Gauzès, Gawronski, Gewalt, Gklavakis, Glattfelder, Goepel, Gomolka, Graça Moura, Gräßle, Grosch, Grossetête, Guellec, Gutiérrez-Cortines, Gyürk, Handzlik, Hannan, Harbour, Hatzidakis, Heaton-Harris, Hennicot-Schoepges, Herranz García, Herrero-Tejedor, Hieronymi, Higgins, Hökmark, Hoppenstedt, Hudacký, Ibrisagic, Itälä, Jackson, Jałowiecki, Járóka, Jarzembowski, Jeggle, Jordan Cizelj, Kaczmarek, Kamall, Karas, Kasoulides, Kauppi, Kelam, Kirkhope, Klamt, Klaß, Klich, Koch, Konrad, Korhola, Kratsa-Tsagaropoulou, Kudrycka, Kušķis, Lamassoure, Landsbergis, Langen, Lauk, Lechner, Lehne, Lewandowski, Liese, López-Istúriz White, Lulling, McGuinness, McMillan-Scott, Mann Thomas, Mantovani, Marques, Mauro, Mavrommatis, Mayer, Mayor Oreja, Mikolášik, Millán Mon, Mitchell, Montoro Romero, Musotto, Nicholson, van Nistelrooij, Novak, Olajos, Olbrycht, Oomen-Ruijten, Őry, Ouzký, Pack, Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou, Papastamkos, Parish, Patriciello, Pieper, Pīks, Pinheiro, Pirker, Pleštinská, Podestà, Poettering, Pomés Ruiz, Posdorf, Posselt, Protasiewicz, Purvis, Queiró, Quisthoudt-Rowohl, Rack, Radwan, Reul, Ribeiro e Castro, Roithová, Rudi Ubeda, Rübig, Saïfi, Samaras, Sartori, Saryusz-Wolski, Schierhuber, Schmitt, Schnellhardt, Schöpflin, Schröder, Schwab, Seeber, Siekierski, Silva Peneda, Škottová, Sommer, Sonik, Spautz, Šťastný, Stauner, Stevenson, Strejček, Stubb, Sturdy, Sudre, Szájer, Tajani, Tannock, Thyssen, Toubon, Trakatellis, Ulmer, Vakalis, Van Orden, Varela Suanzes-Carpegna, Varvitsiotis, Vernola, Vidal-Quadras, Vlasák, Weber Manfred, Weisgerber, Wieland, von Wogau, Wortmann-Kool, Záborská, Zaleski, Zappalà, Zieleniec, Zvěřina, Zwiefka
PSE: Arif, Arnaoutakis, Attard-Montalto, Ayala Sender, Badia I Cutchet, Barón Crespo, Batzeli, Beglitis, Beňová, Berès, van den Berg, Berger, Berlinguer, Berman, Bösch, Bono, Bourzai, Bozkurt, van den Burg, Busquin, Calabuig Rull, Capoulas Santos, Carlotti, Carnero González, Casaca, Cashman, Castex, Cercas, Chiesa, Corbett, Correia, Cottigny, De Keyser, De Rossa, Désir, De Vits, Díez González, Dobolyi, Douay, El Khadraoui, Estrela, Ettl, Evans Robert, Falbr, Fava, Fazakas, Fernandes, Ferreira Anne, Ferreira Elisa, Fruteau, García Pérez, Geringer de Oedenberg, Gierek, Gill, Glante, Goebbels, Golik, Gomes, Gottardi, Grabowska, Grech, Gröner, Gurmai, Guy-Quint, Hänsch, Hamon, Harangozó, Hasse Ferreira, Hazan, Herczog, Honeyball, Hughes, Hutchinson, Ilves, Jöns, Kindermann, Kinnock, Kósáné Kovács, Koterec, Krehl, Kuc, Laignel, Lambrinidis, Le Foll, Leichtfried, Liberadzki, Lienemann, McAvan, Madeira, Maňka, Mann Erika, Martin David, Martínez Martínez, Masip Hidalgo, Mastenbroek, Matsouka, Medina Ortega, Miguélez Ramos, Mikko, Moraes, Morgan, Moscovici, Muscat, Myller, Napoletano, Obiols i Germà, Öger, Paasilinna, Pahor, Paleckis, Panzeri, Patrie, Peillon, Pinior, Pittella, Pleguezuelos Aguilar, Poignant, Prets, Rapkay, Rasmussen, Reynaud, Riera Madurell, Rocard, Rosati, Rouček, Roure, Sacconi, Sakalas, Salinas García, Sánchez Presedo, dos Santos, Savary, Schapira, Scheele, Schulz, Sifunakis, Siwiec, Skinner, Sousa Pinto, Stockmann, Swoboda, Szejna, Tabajdi, Tarabella, Tarand, Titley, Trautmann, Tzampazi, Vaugrenard, Vergnaud, Vincenzi, Walter, Wiersma, Willmott, Wynn, Xenogiannakopoulou, Yañez-Barnuevo García, Zani, Zingaretti
UEN: Angelilli, Aylward, Berlato, Bielan, Camre, Crowley, Didžiokas, Foglietta, Foltyn-Kubicka, Janowski, Krasts, Kristovskis, Kuźmiuk, La Russa, Libicki, Maldeikis, Musumeci, Ó Neachtain, Pirilli, Podkański, Roszkowski, Ryan, Szymański, Tatarella, Vaidere, Wojciechowski Janusz, Zīle
Against: 79
ALDE: Resetarits
GUE/NGL: Adamou, Agnoletto, Aita, Catania, de Brún, Guidoni, Morgantini, Musacchio, Triantaphyllides
IND/DEM: Batten, Booth, Clark, Farage, Knapman, Nattrass, Titford, Whittaker, Wise
NI: Martin Hans-Peter
PSE: Andersson, Bullmann, Christensen, Corbey, Gebhardt, Groote, Gruber, Haug, Hedh, Hedkvist Petersen, Jørgensen, Kreissl-Dörfler, Kristensen, Leinen, Piecyk, Rothe, Segelström, Thomsen, Van Lancker, Weiler, Westlund
Verts/ALE: Aubert, Auken, Beer, Bennahmias, Breyer, Cohn-Bendit, Cramer, Evans Jill, Flautre, de Groen-Kouwenhoven, Hammerstein Mintz, Harms, Hassi, Horáček, Hudghton, Isler Béguin, Joan i Marí, Jonckheer, Kallenbach, Kusstatscher, Lagendijk, Lambert, Lichtenberger, Lipietz, Lucas, Özdemir, Onesta, Romeva i Rueda, Rühle, Schlyter, Schmidt, Schroedter, Smith, Staes, Trüpel, Turmes, Voggenhuber, Ždanoka
Abstention: 17
ALDE: Samuelsen
GUE/NGL: Manolakou, Markov, Pafilis, Toussas
IND/DEM: Rogalski
NI: Baco, Borghezio, Kilroy-Silk, Kozlík, Mote, Salvini, Speroni
PPE-DE: Coveney, Seeberg
UEN: Kamiński
Verts/ALE: van Buitenen
Corrections to votes
Against
Lissy Gröner, Poul Nyrup Rasmussen
3. Report: Seppänen A6-0174/2006
Amendment 20/2
For: 626
ALDE: Alvaro, Andrejevs, Andria, Attwooll, Beaupuy, Birutis, Bourlanges, Bowles, Budreikaitė, Busk, Cappato, Cavada, Chatzimarkakis, Cocilovo, Davies, Degutis, Deprez, Dičkutė, Drčar Murko, Duff, Fourtou, Gentvilas, Geremek, Gibault, Griesbeck, Guardans Cambó, Hall, Harkin, Hennis-Plasschaert, in 't Veld, Jäätteenmäki, Jensen, Juknevičienė, Kacin, Karim, Klinz, Koch-Mehrin, Krahmer, Kułakowski, Laperrouze, Lax, Losco, Ludford, Lynne, Maaten, Manders, Matsakis, Mohácsi, Morillon, Mulder, Newton Dunn, Neyts-Uyttebroeck, Nicholson of Winterbourne, Onyszkiewicz, Ortuondo Larrea, Oviir, Pannella, Pistelli, Polfer, Prodi, Resetarits, Ries, Riis-Jørgensen, Samuelsen, Savi, Staniszewska, Starkevičiūtė, Sterckx, Susta, Szent-Iványi, Takkula, Toia, Väyrynen, Van Hecke, Veraldi, Virrankoski, Wallis, Watson
GUE/NGL: Adamou, Agnoletto, Aita, Brie, Catania, de Brún, Figueiredo, Flasarová, Guerreiro, Guidoni, Henin, Kaufmann, Kohlíček, Krarup, Liotard, Manolakou, Markov, Maštálka, Meijer, Meyer Pleite, Morgantini, Musacchio, Pafilis, Papadimoulis, Pflüger, Portas, Ransdorf, Remek, Seppänen, Sjöstedt, Strož, Svensson, Toussas, Triantaphyllides, Uca, Wagenknecht, Zimmer
IND/DEM: Belder, Blokland, Grabowski, Krupa, Pęk, Piotrowski, Rogalski, Sinnott, Tomczak, Zapałowski
NI: Allister, Battilocchio, Belohorská, Bobošíková, Borghezio, Chruszcz, Czarnecki Ryszard, De Michelis, Giertych, Helmer, Martin Hans-Peter, Mussolini, Piskorski, Rivera, Rutowicz, Salvini, Speroni, Vanhecke, Wojciechowski Bernard Piotr
PPE-DE: Albertini, Andrikienė, Antoniozzi, Ashworth, Atkins, Audy, Ayuso González, Bachelot-Narquin, Barsi-Pataky, Bauer, Beazley, Becsey, Belet, Berend, Böge, Bonsignore, Bowis, Bradbourn, Braghetto, Brejc, Brepoels, Březina, Brok, Brunetta, Bushill-Matthews, Busuttil, Buzek, Cabrnoch, Callanan, Casa, Casini, Caspary, Castiglione, del Castillo Vera, Cederschiöld, Chichester, Chmielewski, Coelho, Daul, Dehaene, Demetriou, Descamps, Deß, Deva, De Veyrac, Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Dimitrakopoulos, Dombrovskis, Doorn, Dover, Doyle, Duchoň, Duka-Zólyomi, Ebner, Elles, Esteves, Eurlings, Fajmon, Fatuzzo, Ferber, Fernández Martín, Fjellner, Florenz, Fontaine, Fraga Estévez, Freitas, Friedrich, Gahler, Gál, Gaľa, Galeote, García-Margallo y Marfil, Gargani, Gaubert, Gauzès, Gawronski, Gewalt, Gklavakis, Glattfelder, Goepel, Gomolka, Graça Moura, Gräßle, Grosch, Grossetête, Guellec, Gutiérrez-Cortines, Gyürk, Handzlik, Hannan, Harbour, Hatzidakis, Heaton-Harris, Hennicot-Schoepges, Herranz García, Herrero-Tejedor, Hieronymi, Higgins, Hökmark, Hoppenstedt, Hudacký, Ibrisagic, Itälä, Jackson, Jałowiecki, Járóka, Jarzembowski, Jeggle, Jordan Cizelj, Kaczmarek, Kamall, Karas, Kasoulides, Kauppi, Kelam, Kirkhope, Klamt, Klaß, Klich, Koch, Konrad, Korhola, Kratsa-Tsagaropoulou, Kudrycka, Kušķis, Lamassoure, Landsbergis, Langen, Langendries, Lauk, Lechner, Lehne, Lewandowski, Liese, López-Istúriz White, Lulling, McGuinness, McMillan-Scott, Mann Thomas, Mantovani, Marques, Mauro, Mavrommatis, Mayer, Mayor Oreja, Mikolášik, Millán Mon, Mitchell, Montoro Romero, Musotto, Nicholson, van Nistelrooij, Novak, Olajos, Olbrycht, Oomen-Ruijten, Őry, Ouzký, Pack, Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou, Papastamkos, Parish, Patriciello, Pieper, Pinheiro, Pirker, Pleštinská, Podestà, Poettering, Pomés Ruiz, Posdorf, Posselt, Protasiewicz, Purvis, Queiró, Quisthoudt-Rowohl, Rack, Radwan, Reul, Ribeiro e Castro, Roithová, Rudi Ubeda, Rübig, Saïfi, Samaras, Sartori, Saryusz-Wolski, Schierhuber, Schmitt, Schnellhardt, Schöpflin, Schröder, Schwab, Seeber, Seeberg, Siekierski, Silva Peneda, Škottová, Sommer, Sonik, Spautz, Šťastný, Stauner, Stevenson, Strejček, Stubb, Sturdy, Sudre, Szájer, Tajani, Tannock, Thyssen, Toubon, Trakatellis, Ulmer, Vakalis, Van Orden, Varela Suanzes-Carpegna, Varvitsiotis, Vernola, Vidal-Quadras, Vlasák, Weber Manfred, Weisgerber, Wieland, von Wogau, Wortmann-Kool, Záborská, Zaleski, Zappalà, Zieleniec, Zvěřina, Zwiefka
PSE: Andersson, Arif, Arnaoutakis, Attard-Montalto, Ayala Sender, Badia I Cutchet, Barón Crespo, Batzeli, Beglitis, Beňová, Berès, van den Berg, Berger, Berlinguer, Berman, Bösch, Bono, Bourzai, Bozkurt, Bullmann, van den Burg, Busquin, Calabuig Rull, Capoulas Santos, Carlotti, Carnero González, Casaca, Cashman, Cercas, Chiesa, Christensen, Corbett, Corbey, Correia, Cottigny, De Keyser, De Rossa, Désir, De Vits, Díez González, Dobolyi, Douay, Dührkop Dührkop, El Khadraoui, Estrela, Ettl, Evans Robert, Falbr, Fava, Fazakas, Fernandes, Ferreira Anne, Ferreira Elisa, Fruteau, García Pérez, Gebhardt, Geringer de Oedenberg, Gierek, Gill, Glante, Goebbels, Golik, Gomes, Gottardi, Grabowska, Grech, Gröner, Groote, Gruber, Gurmai, Guy-Quint, Hänsch, Hamon, Harangozó, Hasse Ferreira, Haug, Hazan, Hedh, Hedkvist Petersen, Herczog, Honeyball, Hughes, Hutchinson, Ilves, Jørgensen, Kindermann, Kinnock, Kósáné Kovács, Koterec, Krehl, Kreissl-Dörfler, Kristensen, Kuc, Laignel, Lambrinidis, Le Foll, Leichtfried, Leinen, Liberadzki, Lienemann, McAvan, Madeira, Maňka, Mann Erika, Martin David, Martínez Martínez, Masip Hidalgo, Mastenbroek, Matsouka, Medina Ortega, Miguélez Ramos, Mikko, Moraes, Morgan, Moscovici, Muscat, Myller, Napoletano, Obiols i Germà, Occhetto, Öger, Paasilinna, Pahor, Paleckis, Panzeri, Patrie, Peillon, Piecyk, Pinior, Pittella, Pleguezuelos Aguilar, Poignant, Prets, Rapkay, Rasmussen, Reynaud, Riera Madurell, Rocard, Rosati, Rothe, Rouček, Roure, Sacconi, Sakalas, Salinas García, Sánchez Presedo, dos Santos, Savary, Schapira, Scheele, Schulz, Segelström, Sifunakis, Siwiec, Skinner, Sornosa Martínez, Sousa Pinto, Stockmann, Swoboda, Szejna, Tabajdi, Tarabella, Tarand, Thomsen, Titley, Trautmann, Tzampazi, Valenciano Martínez-Orozco, Van Lancker, Vaugrenard, Vergnaud, Vincenzi, Walter, Weiler, Westlund, Wiersma, Willmott, Wynn, Xenogiannakopoulou, Yañez-Barnuevo García, Zani, Zingaretti
UEN: Angelilli, Aylward, Berlato, Bielan, Camre, Crowley, Didžiokas, Foglietta, Foltyn-Kubicka, Janowski, Kamiński, Krasts, Kristovskis, Kuźmiuk, La Russa, Libicki, Maldeikis, Muscardini, Musumeci, Ó Neachtain, Pirilli, Podkański, Roszkowski, Ryan, Szymański, Tatarella, Vaidere, Wojciechowski Janusz, Zīle
Verts/ALE: Aubert, Auken, Beer, Bennahmias, Breyer, Cohn-Bendit, Cramer, Evans Jill, Flautre, de Groen-Kouwenhoven, Hammerstein Mintz, Harms, Hassi, Horáček, Hudghton, Isler Béguin, Joan i Marí, Jonckheer, Kallenbach, Kusstatscher, Lagendijk, Lambert, Lichtenberger, Lipietz, Lucas, Özdemir, Onesta, Romeva i Rueda, Rühle, Schlyter, Schmidt, Schroedter, Smith, Staes, Trüpel, Turmes, Voggenhuber, Ždanoka
Against: 23
ALDE: Lambsdorff
IND/DEM: Batten, Bonde, Booth, Clark, Farage, Knapman, Nattrass, Titford, Whittaker, Wise, Železný
NI: Claeys, Dillen, Gollnisch, Lang, Le Pen Jean-Marie, Le Pen Marine, Le Rachinel, Martinez, Mölzer, Romagnoli, Schenardi
Abstention: 10
IND/DEM: Coûteaux, Louis, de Villiers
NI: Baco, Kilroy-Silk, Kozlík, Mote
PPE-DE: Coveney
PSE: Castex
Verts/ALE: van Buitenen
4. Report: Seppänen A6-0174/2006
Amendment 23
For: 137
ALDE: Attwooll, Bourlanges, Bowles, Davies, Duff, Hall, Harkin, Jäätteenmäki, Jensen, Karim, Ludford, Lynne, Matsakis, Newton Dunn, Onyszkiewicz, Ortuondo Larrea, Resetarits, Samuelsen, Wallis, Watson
GUE/NGL: Adamou, Agnoletto, Aita, Brie, Catania, de Brún, Guerreiro, Guidoni, Markov, Meijer, Morgantini, Musacchio, Papadimoulis, Pflüger, Triantaphyllides, Wagenknecht
IND/DEM: Bonde, Grabowski, Krupa, Piotrowski, Sinnott, Tomczak, Zapałowski
NI: Chruszcz, Czarnecki Ryszard, Giertych, Martin Hans-Peter, Rutowicz, Wojciechowski Bernard Piotr
PPE-DE: Eurlings, Karas, Pirker, Protasiewicz, Rack, Rübig, Schierhuber, Seeberg
PSE: Andersson, Berès, Berger, Berman, Bösch, Bozkurt, Bullmann, Christensen, Corbey, De Vits, Ettl, Gebhardt, Grech, Gröner, Groote, Gruber, Hedh, Hedkvist Petersen, Jöns, Jørgensen, Kósáné Kovács, Kreissl-Dörfler, Kristensen, Leichtfried, Leinen, Muscat, Myller, Piecyk, Rapkay, Reynaud, Rothe, Scheele, Segelström, Swoboda, Van Lancker, Walter, Weiler, Westlund
UEN: Camre, Kuźmiuk, Maldeikis
Verts/ALE: Aubert, Auken, Beer, Bennahmias, Breyer, van Buitenen, Cohn-Bendit, Cramer, Evans Jill, Flautre, de Groen-Kouwenhoven, Hammerstein Mintz, Harms, Hassi, Horáček, Hudghton, Isler Béguin, Joan i Marí, Jonckheer, Kallenbach, Kusstatscher, Lagendijk, Lambert, Lichtenberger, Lipietz, Lucas, Özdemir, Onesta, Romeva i Rueda, Rühle, Schlyter, Schmidt, Schroedter, Smith, Staes, Trüpel, Turmes, Voggenhuber, Ždanoka
Against: 511
ALDE: Andrejevs, Andria, Beaupuy, Birutis, Budreikaitė, Busk, Cappato, Cavada, Chatzimarkakis, Cocilovo, Degutis, Deprez, Dičkutė, Drčar Murko, Fourtou, Gentvilas, Geremek, Gibault, Griesbeck, Guardans Cambó, Hennis-Plasschaert, in 't Veld, Juknevičienė, Kacin, Klinz, Koch-Mehrin, Krahmer, Kułakowski, Lambsdorff, Laperrouze, Lax, Losco, Maaten, Manders, Mohácsi, Morillon, Mulder, Neyts-Uyttebroeck, Nicholson of Winterbourne, Oviir, Pannella, Pistelli, Polfer, Prodi, Ries, Riis-Jørgensen, Staniszewska, Starkevičiūtė, Sterckx, Susta, Szent-Iványi, Takkula, Väyrynen, Van Hecke, Veraldi, Virrankoski
GUE/NGL: Flasarová, Henin, Kaufmann, Kohlíček, Krarup, Manolakou, Maštálka, Meyer Pleite, Pafilis, Portas, Ransdorf, Remek, Seppänen, Sjöstedt, Strož, Svensson, Toussas, Uca, Zimmer
IND/DEM: Batten, Belder, Blokland, Booth, Clark, Coûteaux, Farage, Knapman, Louis, Nattrass, Rogalski, Titford, de Villiers, Whittaker, Wise, Železný
NI: Allister, Battilocchio, Bobošíková, Borghezio, Claeys, De Michelis, Dillen, Gollnisch, Helmer, Lang, Le Pen Jean-Marie, Le Pen Marine, Martinez, Masiel, Mölzer, Mote, Mussolini, Piskorski, Rivera, Romagnoli, Salvini, Schenardi, Speroni, Vanhecke
PPE-DE: Albertini, Andrikienė, Antoniozzi, Ashworth, Atkins, Audy, Ayuso González, Bachelot-Narquin, Barsi-Pataky, Bauer, Beazley, Becsey, Belet, Berend, Böge, Bonsignore, Bowis, Bradbourn, Braghetto, Brejc, Brepoels, Březina, Brok, Brunetta, Bushill-Matthews, Busuttil, Buzek, Cabrnoch, Callanan, Casa, Casini, Caspary, Castiglione, del Castillo Vera, Cederschiöld, Chichester, Chmielewski, Coelho, Coveney, Daul, Dehaene, Demetriou, Descamps, Deß, Deva, De Veyrac, Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Dimitrakopoulos, Dombrovskis, Doorn, Dover, Doyle, Duchoň, Duka-Zólyomi, Ebner, Elles, Esteves, Fajmon, Fatuzzo, Ferber, Fernández Martín, Fjellner, Florenz, Fontaine, Fraga Estévez, Freitas, Friedrich, Gahler, Gál, Gaľa, Galeote, García-Margallo y Marfil, Gargani, Gaubert, Gauzès, Gawronski, Gewalt, Gklavakis, Glattfelder, Goepel, Gomolka, Graça Moura, Gräßle, Grosch, Grossetête, Guellec, Gutiérrez-Cortines, Gyürk, Handzlik, Hannan, Harbour, Hatzidakis, Heaton-Harris, Hennicot-Schoepges, Herranz García, Herrero-Tejedor, Hieronymi, Higgins, Hökmark, Hoppenstedt, Hudacký, Ibrisagic, Itälä, Jackson, Jałowiecki, Járóka, Jarzembowski, Jeggle, Jordan Cizelj, Kaczmarek, Kamall, Kasoulides, Kauppi, Kelam, Kirkhope, Klamt, Klaß, Klich, Koch, Konrad, Korhola, Kratsa-Tsagaropoulou, Kudrycka, Kušķis, Lamassoure, Landsbergis, Langen, Langendries, Lauk, Lechner, Lehne, Lewandowski, Liese, López-Istúriz White, Lulling, McGuinness, McMillan-Scott, Mann Thomas, Mantovani, Marques, Mauro, Mavrommatis, Mayer, Mayor Oreja, Mikolášik, Millán Mon, Mitchell, Montoro Romero, Musotto, Nicholson, van Nistelrooij, Novak, Olajos, Olbrycht, Oomen-Ruijten, Őry, Ouzký, Pack, Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou, Papastamkos, Parish, Patriciello, Pieper, Pīks, Pinheiro, Pleštinská, Podestà, Poettering, Pomés Ruiz, Posdorf, Posselt, Purvis, Queiró, Quisthoudt-Rowohl, Radwan, Reul, Ribeiro e Castro, Roithová, Rudi Ubeda, Saïfi, Samaras, Sartori, Saryusz-Wolski, Schmitt, Schnellhardt, Schöpflin, Schröder, Schwab, Seeber, Siekierski, Silva Peneda, Škottová, Sommer, Sonik, Spautz, Šťastný, Stauner, Stevenson, Strejček, Stubb, Sturdy, Sudre, Szájer, Tajani, Tannock, Thyssen, Toubon, Trakatellis, Ulmer, Vakalis, Van Orden, Varela Suanzes-Carpegna, Varvitsiotis, Vernola, Vidal-Quadras, Vlasák, Weber Manfred, Weisgerber, Wieland, von Wogau, Wortmann-Kool, Záborská, Zaleski, Zappalà, Zieleniec, Zvěřina, Zwiefka
PSE: Arif, Arnaoutakis, Attard-Montalto, Ayala Sender, Badia I Cutchet, Barón Crespo, Batzeli, Beglitis, Beňová, van den Berg, Berlinguer, Bono, Bourzai, van den Burg, Busquin, Calabuig Rull, Capoulas Santos, Carlotti, Carnero González, Casaca, Cashman, Castex, Cercas, Chiesa, Corbett, Correia, Cottigny, De Keyser, De Rossa, Désir, Díez González, Dobolyi, Douay, Dührkop Dührkop, El Khadraoui, Estrela, Evans Robert, Falbr, Fava, Fazakas, Fernandes, Ferreira Elisa, Fruteau, García Pérez, Geringer de Oedenberg, Gierek, Gill, Glante, Goebbels, Golik, Gomes, Gottardi, Grabowska, Guy-Quint, Hänsch, Hamon, Harangozó, Hasse Ferreira, Haug, Hazan, Herczog, Honeyball, Hughes, Hutchinson, Ilves, Kindermann, Kinnock, Koterec, Krehl, Kuc, Laignel, Lambrinidis, Le Foll, Liberadzki, Lienemann, Locatelli, McAvan, Madeira, Maňka, Mann Erika, Martin David, Martínez Martínez, Masip Hidalgo, Mastenbroek, Matsouka, Medina Ortega, Miguélez Ramos, Mikko, Moraes, Moreno Sánchez, Morgan, Moscovici, Napoletano, Obiols i Germà, Occhetto, Öger, Paasilinna, Pahor, Paleckis, Panzeri, Patrie, Peillon, Pinior, Pittella, Pleguezuelos Aguilar, Poignant, Prets, Rasmussen, Riera Madurell, Rocard, Rosati, Rouček, Roure, Sacconi, Sakalas, Salinas García, Sánchez Presedo, dos Santos, Savary, Schapira, Schulz, Sifunakis, Siwiec, Skinner, Sornosa Martínez, Sousa Pinto, Stockmann, Szejna, Tabajdi, Tarabella, Tarand, Thomsen, Titley, Trautmann, Tzampazi, Valenciano Martínez-Orozco, Vaugrenard, Vergnaud, Vincenzi, Wiersma, Willmott, Wynn, Xenogiannakopoulou, Yañez-Barnuevo García, Zani, Zingaretti
UEN: Angelilli, Aylward, Berlato, Bielan, Crowley, Didžiokas, Foglietta, Foltyn-Kubicka, Janowski, Kamiński, Krasts, Kristovskis, La Russa, Libicki, Musumeci, Ó Neachtain, Pirilli, Roszkowski, Ryan, Szymański, Tatarella, Wojciechowski Janusz, Zīle
Abstention: 12
ALDE: Alvaro, Savi, Toia
IND/DEM: Pęk
NI: Baco, Belohorská, Kilroy-Silk, Kozlík, Le Rachinel
PSE: Ferreira Anne, Gurmai
UEN: Vaidere
Corrections to votes
For
Saïd El Khadraoui, Eva-Britt Svensson, Jonas Sjöstedt, Poul Nyrup Rasmussen
Against
Jean-Louis Bourlanges
5. Report: Seppänen A6-0174/2006
Amendment 24
For: 160
ALDE: Attwooll, Bowles, Davies, Duff, Hall, Harkin, Karim, Ludford, Lynne, Manders, Nicholson of Winterbourne, Ortuondo Larrea, Resetarits, Samuelsen, Wallis, Watson
GUE/NGL: Adamou, Agnoletto, Aita, Brie, Catania, de Brún, Figueiredo, Flasarová, Guerreiro, Guidoni, Kaufmann, Krarup, Liotard, Manolakou, Markov, Meijer, Meyer Pleite, Morgantini, Musacchio, Pafilis, Papadimoulis, Pflüger, Portas, Ransdorf, Seppänen, Sjöstedt, Strož, Svensson, Toussas, Triantaphyllides, Uca, Wagenknecht, Zimmer
IND/DEM: Batten, Belder, Blokland, Bonde, Booth, Clark, Farage, Grabowski, Knapman, Krupa, Nattrass, Pęk, Piotrowski, Rogalski, Titford, Tomczak, Whittaker, Wise, Zapałowski
NI: Chruszcz, Giertych, Martin Hans-Peter, Rutowicz, Wojciechowski Bernard Piotr
PPE-DE: Itälä, Karas, Pirker, Rack, Rübig, Schierhuber, Seeberg, Silva Peneda, Šťastný
PSE: Berger, Berman, Bösch, Bozkurt, Bullmann, Christensen, Corbey, De Vits, El Khadraoui, Ettl, Gebhardt, Grech, Gröner, Groote, Gruber, Haug, Hedh, Hedkvist Petersen, Jørgensen, Kreissl-Dörfler, Kristensen, Leichtfried, Leinen, Muscat, Piecyk, Rapkay, Reynaud, Rothe, Scheele, Segelström, Thomsen, Van Lancker, Walter, Weiler, Westlund
UEN: Bielan, Camre, Kamiński, Wojciechowski Janusz
Verts/ALE: Aubert, Auken, Beer, Bennahmias, Breyer, van Buitenen, Cohn-Bendit, Cramer, Evans Jill, Flautre, de Groen-Kouwenhoven, Hammerstein Mintz, Harms, Hassi, Horáček, Hudghton, Isler Béguin, Joan i Marí, Jonckheer, Kallenbach, Kusstatscher, Lagendijk, Lambert, Lichtenberger, Lipietz, Lucas, Özdemir, Onesta, Romeva i Rueda, Rühle, Schlyter, Schmidt, Schroedter, Smith, Staes, Trüpel, Turmes, Voggenhuber, Ždanoka
Against: 469
ALDE: Andrejevs, Andria, Beaupuy, Birutis, Bourlanges, Budreikaitė, Busk, Cappato, Cavada, Chatzimarkakis, Cocilovo, Degutis, Deprez, Dičkutė, Drčar Murko, Fourtou, Gentvilas, Geremek, Gibault, Griesbeck, Guardans Cambó, Hennis-Plasschaert, in 't Veld, Jäätteenmäki, Jensen, Juknevičienė, Kacin, Klinz, Koch-Mehrin, Krahmer, Kułakowski, Lambsdorff, Laperrouze, Lax, Losco, Maaten, Mohácsi, Morillon, Mulder, Newton Dunn, Neyts-Uyttebroeck, Onyszkiewicz, Oviir, Pannella, Pistelli, Polfer, Prodi, Ries, Riis-Jørgensen, Savi, Staniszewska, Starkevičiūtė, Sterckx, Susta, Szent-Iványi, Takkula, Väyrynen, Van Hecke, Veraldi, Virrankoski
GUE/NGL: Henin, Kohlíček, Remek
IND/DEM: Coûteaux, Louis, Sinnott, de Villiers, Železný
NI: Allister, Battilocchio, Bobošíková, Claeys, Czarnecki Ryszard, De Michelis, Dillen, Gollnisch, Helmer, Lang, Le Pen Jean-Marie, Le Pen Marine, Le Rachinel, Martinez, Masiel, Mölzer, Mote, Mussolini, Piskorski, Rivera, Romagnoli, Schenardi, Vanhecke
PPE-DE: Albertini, Andrikienė, Antoniozzi, Ashworth, Atkins, Audy, Ayuso González, Bachelot-Narquin, Barsi-Pataky, Bauer, Beazley, Becsey, Belet, Berend, Böge, Bonsignore, Bowis, Bradbourn, Braghetto, Brejc, Brepoels, Březina, Brok, Brunetta, Bushill-Matthews, Busuttil, Buzek, Cabrnoch, Callanan, Casa, Casini, Caspary, Castiglione, del Castillo Vera, Cederschiöld, Chichester, Chmielewski, Coelho, Daul, Dehaene, Demetriou, Descamps, Deß, Deva, De Veyrac, Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Dimitrakopoulos, Dombrovskis, Doorn, Dover, Doyle, Duchoň, Duka-Zólyomi, Ebner, Elles, Esteves, Fajmon, Fatuzzo, Ferber, Fernández Martín, Fjellner, Florenz, Fontaine, Fraga Estévez, Freitas, Friedrich, Gahler, Gál, Gaľa, Galeote, García-Margallo y Marfil, Gargani, Gaubert, Gauzès, Gawronski, Gewalt, Gklavakis, Glattfelder, Goepel, Gomolka, Graça Moura, Gräßle, Grosch, Grossetête, Guellec, Gutiérrez-Cortines, Gyürk, Handzlik, Hannan, Harbour, Hatzidakis, Heaton-Harris, Hennicot-Schoepges, Herranz García, Herrero-Tejedor, Hieronymi, Higgins, Hökmark, Hoppenstedt, Hudacký, Ibrisagic, Jackson, Jałowiecki, Járóka, Jarzembowski, Jeggle, Jordan Cizelj, Kaczmarek, Kamall, Kasoulides, Kauppi, Kelam, Kirkhope, Klamt, Klaß, Klich, Koch, Konrad, Korhola, Kratsa-Tsagaropoulou, Kudrycka, Kušķis, Lamassoure, Landsbergis, Langen, Langendries, Lauk, Lechner, Lehne, Lewandowski, Liese, López-Istúriz White, Lulling, McGuinness, McMillan-Scott, Mann Thomas, Mantovani, Marques, Mauro, Mavrommatis, Mayer, Mayor Oreja, Mikolášik, Millán Mon, Mitchell, Montoro Romero, Musotto, Nicholson, van Nistelrooij, Novak, Olajos, Olbrycht, Oomen-Ruijten, Őry, Ouzký, Pack, Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou, Papastamkos, Parish, Patriciello, Pieper, Pīks, Pinheiro, Pleštinská, Podestà, Poettering, Pomés Ruiz, Posdorf, Posselt, Protasiewicz, Purvis, Queiró, Quisthoudt-Rowohl, Radwan, Reul, Ribeiro e Castro, Roithová, Rudi Ubeda, Saïfi, Samaras, Sartori, Saryusz-Wolski, Schmitt, Schnellhardt, Schöpflin, Schröder, Schwab, Seeber, Siekierski, Škottová, Sommer, Sonik, Spautz, Stauner, Stevenson, Strejček, Stubb, Sturdy, Sudre, Szájer, Tajani, Tannock, Thyssen, Toubon, Trakatellis, Ulmer, Vakalis, Van Orden, Varela Suanzes-Carpegna, Varvitsiotis, Vernola, Vidal-Quadras, Vlasák, Weber Manfred, Weisgerber, von Wogau, Wortmann-Kool, Záborská, Zaleski, Zappalà, Zieleniec, Zvěřina, Zwiefka
PSE: Arif, Arnaoutakis, Attard-Montalto, Ayala Sender, Badia I Cutchet, Barón Crespo, Batzeli, Beglitis, Beňová, van den Berg, Berlinguer, Bono, Bourzai, van den Burg, Calabuig Rull, Capoulas Santos, Carlotti, Carnero González, Casaca, Cashman, Castex, Cercas, Chiesa, Corbett, Correia, Cottigny, De Keyser, De Rossa, Díez González, Dobolyi, Douay, Dührkop Dührkop, Estrela, Evans Robert, Falbr, Fava, Fazakas, Fernandes, Ferreira Elisa, Fruteau, García Pérez, Geringer de Oedenberg, Gierek, Gill, Glante, Goebbels, Gomes, Gottardi, Grabowska, Gurmai, Guy-Quint, Hänsch, Hamon, Harangozó, Hasse Ferreira, Hazan, Herczog, Honeyball, Hughes, Hutchinson, Ilves, Kindermann, Kinnock, Kósáné Kovács, Koterec, Krehl, Kuc, Laignel, Lambrinidis, Le Foll, Liberadzki, Lienemann, McAvan, Madeira, Maňka, Mann Erika, Martin David, Martínez Martínez, Masip Hidalgo, Mastenbroek, Matsouka, Medina Ortega, Miguélez Ramos, Mikko, Moraes, Moreno Sánchez, Morgan, Moscovici, Napoletano, Obiols i Germà, Occhetto, Öger, Paasilinna, Pahor, Paleckis, Panzeri, Pinior, Pittella, Pleguezuelos Aguilar, Poignant, Prets, Rasmussen, Riera Madurell, Rocard, Rosati, Rouček, Roure, Sacconi, Sakalas, Salinas García, Sánchez Presedo, dos Santos, Savary, Schapira, Sifunakis, Siwiec, Skinner, Sornosa Martínez, Sousa Pinto, Stockmann, Szejna, Tabajdi, Tarabella, Tarand, Titley, Trautmann, Tzampazi, Valenciano Martínez-Orozco, Vaugrenard, Vergnaud, Vincenzi, Wiersma, Willmott, Wynn, Xenogiannakopoulou, Yañez-Barnuevo García, Zani
UEN: Angelilli, Aylward, Berlato, Crowley, Didžiokas, Foglietta, Krasts, Kristovskis, La Russa, Maldeikis, Muscardini, Musumeci, Ó Neachtain, Pirilli, Ryan, Tatarella, Vaidere, Zīle
Abstention: 20
ALDE: Alvaro, Matsakis, Toia
NI: Baco, Belohorská, Borghezio, Kilroy-Silk, Kozlík, Salvini, Speroni
PPE-DE: Coveney, Eurlings
PSE: Ferreira Anne
UEN: Foltyn-Kubicka, Janowski, Kuźmiuk, Libicki, Podkański, Roszkowski, Szymański
Corrections to votes
For
John Attard-Montalto, Richard Seeber, Poul Nyrup Rasmussen
6. Report: Seppänen A6-0174/2006
Amendment 25
For: 166
ALDE: Attwooll, Bowles, Davies, Duff, Hall, Harkin, Karim, Lambsdorff, Ludford, Lynne, Ortuondo Larrea, Resetarits, Samuelsen, Wallis, Watson
GUE/NGL: Adamou, Agnoletto, Aita, Brie, Catania, de Brún, Figueiredo, Flasarová, Guerreiro, Guidoni, Kaufmann, Kohlíček, Krarup, Liotard, Manolakou, Markov, Maštálka, Meijer, Meyer Pleite, Morgantini, Musacchio, Pafilis, Papadimoulis, Pflüger, Portas, Ransdorf, Seppänen, Sjöstedt, Strož, Svensson, Toussas, Triantaphyllides, Uca, Wagenknecht, Zimmer
IND/DEM: Batten, Belder, Blokland, Bonde, Booth, Clark, Farage, Grabowski, Knapman, Krupa, Nattrass, Pęk, Piotrowski, Rogalski, Sinnott, Titford, Tomczak, Whittaker, Wise, Zapałowski
NI: Chruszcz, Czarnecki Ryszard, Giertych, Martin Hans-Peter, Rutowicz, Wojciechowski Bernard Piotr
PPE-DE: Dehaene, Karas, Pirker, Rack, Rübig, Schierhuber, Seeberg
PSE: Andersson, Berger, Berman, Bösch, Bozkurt, Bullmann, Christensen, Corbey, De Vits, El Khadraoui, Ettl, Gebhardt, Grech, Gröner, Groote, Gruber, Haug, Hedh, Hedkvist Petersen, Jørgensen, Kreissl-Dörfler, Kristensen, Leichtfried, Leinen, Muscat, Piecyk, Rapkay, Rasmussen, Reynaud, Rothe, Scheele, Segelström, Swoboda, Thomsen, Van Lancker, Walter, Weiler, Westlund
UEN: Bielan, Camre, Didžiokas, Kamiński, La Russa, Maldeikis, Wojciechowski Janusz
Verts/ALE: Aubert, Auken, Beer, Bennahmias, Breyer, Cohn-Bendit, Cramer, Evans Jill, Flautre, de Groen-Kouwenhoven, Hammerstein Mintz, Harms, Hassi, Horáček, Hudghton, Isler Béguin, Joan i Marí, Jonckheer, Kallenbach, Kusstatscher, Lagendijk, Lambert, Lichtenberger, Lipietz, Lucas, Özdemir, Onesta, Romeva i Rueda, Rühle, Schlyter, Schmidt, Schroedter, Smith, Staes, Trüpel, Turmes, Voggenhuber, Ždanoka
Against: 471
ALDE: Andrejevs, Andria, Beaupuy, Birutis, Bourlanges, Budreikaitė, Busk, Cappato, Cavada, Chatzimarkakis, Cocilovo, Degutis, Deprez, Dičkutė, Drčar Murko, Fourtou, Gentvilas, Geremek, Gibault, Griesbeck, Guardans Cambó, Hennis-Plasschaert, in 't Veld, Jäätteenmäki, Jensen, Juknevičienė, Kacin, Klinz, Koch-Mehrin, Krahmer, Kułakowski, Laperrouze, Lax, Losco, Maaten, Manders, Mohácsi, Morillon, Mulder, Newton Dunn, Neyts-Uyttebroeck, Nicholson of Winterbourne, Onyszkiewicz, Oviir, Pannella, Pistelli, Polfer, Prodi, Ries, Riis-Jørgensen, Savi, Staniszewska, Starkevičiūtė, Sterckx, Susta, Szent-Iványi, Takkula, Toia, Väyrynen, Van Hecke, Veraldi, Virrankoski
GUE/NGL: Henin
IND/DEM: Železný
NI: Allister, Battilocchio, Bobošíková, Claeys, De Michelis, Dillen, Gollnisch, Helmer, Lang, Le Pen Jean-Marie, Le Pen Marine, Le Rachinel, Martinez, Masiel, Mölzer, Mote, Mussolini, Piskorski, Rivera, Romagnoli, Schenardi, Speroni, Vanhecke
PPE-DE: Albertini, Andrikienė, Antoniozzi, Ashworth, Atkins, Audy, Ayuso González, Bachelot-Narquin, Barsi-Pataky, Bauer, Beazley, Becsey, Belet, Berend, Böge, Bonsignore, Bowis, Bradbourn, Braghetto, Brejc, Brepoels, Březina, Brok, Brunetta, Bushill-Matthews, Busuttil, Buzek, Cabrnoch, Callanan, Casa, Casini, Caspary, Castiglione, del Castillo Vera, Cederschiöld, Chichester, Chmielewski, Coelho, Daul, Demetriou, Descamps, Deß, Deva, De Veyrac, Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Dimitrakopoulos, Dombrovskis, Doorn, Dover, Doyle, Duchoň, Duka-Zólyomi, Ebner, Elles, Esteves, Fajmon, Fatuzzo, Ferber, Fernández Martín, Fjellner, Fontaine, Fraga Estévez, Freitas, Friedrich, Gahler, Gál, Gaľa, Galeote, García-Margallo y Marfil, Gargani, Gaubert, Gauzès, Gawronski, Gewalt, Gklavakis, Glattfelder, Goepel, Gomolka, Graça Moura, Gräßle, Grosch, Grossetête, Guellec, Gutiérrez-Cortines, Gyürk, Handzlik, Hannan, Harbour, Hatzidakis, Heaton-Harris, Hennicot-Schoepges, Herranz García, Herrero-Tejedor, Hieronymi, Higgins, Hökmark, Hoppenstedt, Hudacký, Ibrisagic, Itälä, Jackson, Jałowiecki, Járóka, Jarzembowski, Jeggle, Jordan Cizelj, Kaczmarek, Kamall, Kasoulides, Kauppi, Kelam, Kirkhope, Klamt, Klaß, Klich, Koch, Konrad, Korhola, Kratsa-Tsagaropoulou, Kudrycka, Kušķis, Lamassoure, Landsbergis, Langen, Langendries, Lauk, Lechner, Lehne, Lewandowski, Liese, López-Istúriz White, Lulling, McGuinness, McMillan-Scott, Mann Thomas, Mantovani, Marques, Mauro, Mavrommatis, Mayer, Mayor Oreja, Mikolášik, Millán Mon, Mitchell, Montoro Romero, Musotto, Nicholson, van Nistelrooij, Novak, Olajos, Olbrycht, Oomen-Ruijten, Őry, Ouzký, Pack, Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou, Papastamkos, Parish, Patriciello, Pieper, Pīks, Pinheiro, Pleštinská, Podestà, Poettering, Pomés Ruiz, Posdorf, Posselt, Protasiewicz, Purvis, Queiró, Quisthoudt-Rowohl, Radwan, Reul, Ribeiro e Castro, Roithová, Rudi Ubeda, Saïfi, Samaras, Sartori, Saryusz-Wolski, Schmitt, Schnellhardt, Schöpflin, Schröder, Schwab, Seeber, Siekierski, Silva Peneda, Škottová, Sommer, Sonik, Spautz, Šťastný, Stauner, Stevenson, Strejček, Stubb, Sturdy, Sudre, Szájer, Tajani, Tannock, Thyssen, Toubon, Trakatellis, Ulmer, Vakalis, Van Orden, Varela Suanzes-Carpegna, Varvitsiotis, Vernola, Vidal-Quadras, Vlasák, Weber Manfred, Weisgerber, Wieland, von Wogau, Wortmann-Kool, Záborská, Zaleski, Zappalà, Zieleniec, Zvěřina, Zwiefka
PSE: Arif, Arnaoutakis, Attard-Montalto, Ayala Sender, Badia I Cutchet, Barón Crespo, Batzeli, Beglitis, Beňová, Berès, van den Berg, Berlinguer, Bono, Bourzai, van den Burg, Busquin, Calabuig Rull, Capoulas Santos, Carlotti, Carnero González, Casaca, Cashman, Castex, Cercas, Chiesa, Corbett, Correia, Cottigny, De Keyser, De Rossa, Désir, Díez González, Dobolyi, Douay, Dührkop Dührkop, Estrela, Evans Robert, Falbr, Fava, Fazakas, Fernandes, Ferreira Elisa, Fruteau, García Pérez, Geringer de Oedenberg, Gierek, Gill, Glante, Goebbels, Golik, Gomes, Gottardi, Grabowska, Gurmai, Guy-Quint, Hänsch, Hamon, Harangozó, Hasse Ferreira, Hazan, Herczog, Honeyball, Hughes, Hutchinson, Ilves, Jöns, Kindermann, Kinnock, Kósáné Kovács, Koterec, Krehl, Kuc, Laignel, Lambrinidis, Le Foll, Liberadzki, Lienemann, Locatelli, McAvan, Madeira, Maňka, Mann Erika, Martin David, Martínez Martínez, Masip Hidalgo, Mastenbroek, Matsouka, Medina Ortega, Miguélez Ramos, Mikko, Moraes, Moreno Sánchez, Morgan, Moscovici, Napoletano, Obiols i Germà, Occhetto, Öger, Paasilinna, Pahor, Paleckis, Panzeri, Patrie, Peillon, Pinior, Pittella, Pleguezuelos Aguilar, Poignant, Prets, Riera Madurell, Rocard, Rosati, Rouček, Roure, Sacconi, Sakalas, Salinas García, Sánchez Presedo, dos Santos, Savary, Schapira, Sifunakis, Siwiec, Skinner, Sornosa Martínez, Sousa Pinto, Stockmann, Szejna, Tabajdi, Tarabella, Tarand, Titley, Trautmann, Tzampazi, Vaugrenard, Vergnaud, Vincenzi, Wiersma, Willmott, Wynn, Xenogiannakopoulou, Yañez-Barnuevo García, Zani, Zingaretti
UEN: Angelilli, Aylward, Berlato, Crowley, Foglietta, Krasts, Kristovskis, Muscardini, Musumeci, Ó Neachtain, Pirilli, Ryan, Tatarella, Vaidere, Zīle
Abstention: 23
ALDE: Alvaro, Matsakis
GUE/NGL: Remek
IND/DEM: Coûteaux, Louis, de Villiers
NI: Baco, Belohorská, Borghezio, Kilroy-Silk, Kozlík, Salvini
PPE-DE: Coveney, Eurlings
PSE: Schulz
UEN: Foltyn-Kubicka, Janowski, Kuźmiuk, Libicki, Podkański, Roszkowski, Szymański
Verts/ALE: van Buitenen
Corrections to votes
For
John Attard-Montalto,Richard Seeber
7. Report: Calabuig Rull A6-0206/2006
Resolution
For: 484
ALDE: Alvaro, Andrejevs, Andria, Attwooll, Beaupuy, Bowles, Budreikaitė, Busk, Cappato, Cavada, Chatzimarkakis, Cocilovo, Degutis, Deprez, Dičkutė, Drčar Murko, Duff, Fourtou, Gentvilas, Geremek, Gibault, Griesbeck, Guardans Cambó, Hall, Harkin, Hennis-Plasschaert, in 't Veld, Jäätteenmäki, Jensen, Juknevičienė, Kacin, Karim, Koch-Mehrin, Kułakowski, Lambsdorff, Laperrouze, Lax, Losco, Ludford, Lynne, Maaten, Manders, Matsakis, Mohácsi, Morillon, Mulder, Newton Dunn, Neyts-Uyttebroeck, Nicholson of Winterbourne, Onyszkiewicz, Ortuondo Larrea, Pannella, Pistelli, Polfer, Prodi, Resetarits, Riis-Jørgensen, Savi, Staniszewska, Starkevičiūtė, Sterckx, Susta, Szent-Iványi, Takkula, Toia, Väyrynen, Van Hecke, Veraldi, Virrankoski, Wallis, Watson
IND/DEM: Bonde
NI: Battilocchio, Belohorská, Borghezio, Czarnecki Ryszard, De Michelis, Kozlík, Masiel, Piskorski, Rivera, Rutowicz, Salvini
PPE-DE: Albertini, Andrikienė, Antoniozzi, Ashworth, Atkins, Audy, Ayuso González, Bachelot-Narquin, Barsi-Pataky, Bauer, Beazley, Becsey, Belet, Berend, Böge, Bonsignore, Bowis, Bradbourn, Braghetto, Brejc, Brepoels, Březina, Brok, Brunetta, Bushill-Matthews, Busuttil, Buzek, Cabrnoch, Casini, Caspary, Castiglione, Cederschiöld, Chichester, Chmielewski, Coelho, Coveney, Daul, Dehaene, Demetriou, Descamps, Díaz de Mera García Consuegra, Dimitrakopoulos, Dombrovskis, Doorn, Dover, Doyle, Duchoň, Duka-Zólyomi, Ebner, Elles, Esteves, Eurlings, Fajmon, Fatuzzo, Ferber, Fernández Martín, Fjellner, Florenz, Fontaine, Fraga Estévez, Freitas, Friedrich, Gahler, Gál, Gaľa, Galeote, García-Margallo y Marfil, Gargani, Gaubert, Gauzès, Gawronski, Gewalt, Gklavakis, Glattfelder, Goepel, Gomolka, Graça Moura, Gräßle, Grosch, Grossetête, Guellec, Gutiérrez-Cortines, Gyürk, Handzlik, Harbour, Hatzidakis, Hennicot-Schoepges, Herranz García, Herrero-Tejedor, Hieronymi, Higgins, Hökmark, Hoppenstedt, Hudacký, Ibrisagic, Itälä, Jackson, Jałowiecki, Járóka, Jarzembowski, Jeggle, Jordan Cizelj, Kaczmarek, Kamall, Karas, Kasoulides, Kauppi, Kelam, Kirkhope, Klamt, Klaß, Klich, Konrad, Korhola, Kratsa-Tsagaropoulou, Kudrycka, Kušķis, Lamassoure, Landsbergis, Langen, Langendries, Lauk, Lehne, Lewandowski, López-Istúriz White, Lulling, McGuinness, McMillan-Scott, Mann Thomas, Mauro, Mavrommatis, Mayer, Mayor Oreja, Mikolášik, Millán Mon, Mitchell, Montoro Romero, Musotto, Nicholson, van Nistelrooij, Novak, Olajos, Olbrycht, Oomen-Ruijten, Őry, Ouzký, Pack, Panayotopoulos-Cassiotou, Papastamkos, Parish, Patriciello, Pieper, Pīks, Pinheiro, Pirker, Pleštinská, Podestà, Poettering, Pomés Ruiz, Posdorf, Posselt, Protasiewicz, Purvis, Queiró, Quisthoudt-Rowohl, Rack, Radwan, Reul, Roithová, Rudi Ubeda, Rübig, Saïfi, Saryusz-Wolski, Schierhuber, Schmitt, Schnellhardt, Schöpflin, Schröder, Schwab, Seeber, Seeberg, Siekierski, Silva Peneda, Škottová, Sonik, Spautz, Šťastný, Stauner, Stevenson, Stubb, Sturdy, Sudre, Szájer, Tajani, Tannock, Thyssen, Toubon, Trakatellis, Ulmer, Vakalis, Van Orden, Varela Suanzes-Carpegna, Varvitsiotis, Vidal-Quadras, Vlasák, Weber Manfred, Weisgerber, Wieland, Wortmann-Kool, Záborská, Zaleski, Zappalà, Zieleniec, Zvěřina, Zwiefka
PSE: Andersson, Arif, Arnaoutakis, Attard-Montalto, Ayala Sender, Badia I Cutchet, Barón Crespo, Batzeli, Beglitis, Berès, van den Berg, Berger, Berlinguer, Berman, Bösch, Bono, Bourzai, Bozkurt, van den Burg, Busquin, Calabuig Rull, Capoulas Santos, Carlotti, Carnero González, Casaca, Cashman, Castex, Cercas, Chiesa, Christensen, Corbett, Corbey, Correia, Cottigny, De Keyser, De Rossa, Désir, De Vits, Díez González, Dobolyi, Douay, Dührkop Dührkop, El Khadraoui, Estrela, Ettl, Evans Robert, Fazakas, Fernandes, Ferreira Anne, Ferreira Elisa, Ford, Fruteau, García Pérez, Gebhardt, Geringer de Oedenberg, Gierek, Gill, Glante, Golik, Gomes, Grabowska, Grech, Gröner, Groote, Gruber, Gurmai, Hänsch, Hamon, Harangozó, Hasse Ferreira, Haug, Hazan, Hedh, Hedkvist Petersen, Herczog, Honeyball, Hughes, Hutchinson, Ilves, Jöns, Jørgensen, Kindermann, Kinnock, Krehl, Kristensen, Kuc, Lambrinidis, Le Foll, Leichtfried, Liberadzki, Lienemann, Locatelli, McAvan, Madeira, Mann Erika, Martin David, Martínez Martínez, Masip Hidalgo, Mastenbroek, Matsouka, Medina Ortega, Miguélez Ramos, Mikko, Moraes, Morgan, Moscovici, Myller, Napoletano, Obiols i Germà, Occhetto, Öger, Paasilinna, Panzeri, Patrie, Piecyk, Pinior, Pleguezuelos Aguilar, Poignant, Prets, Rapkay, Rasmussen, Reynaud, Riera Madurell, Rosati, Rothe, Rouček, Roure, Sacconi, Sakalas, Sánchez Presedo, dos Santos, Savary, Schapira, Scheele, Schulz, Segelström, Sifunakis, Siwiec, Skinner, Sornosa Martínez, Sousa Pinto, Stockmann, Swoboda, Szejna, Tabajdi, Tarabella, Tarand, Thomsen, Titley, Trautmann, Tzampazi, Van Lancker, Vaugrenard, Vergnaud, Vincenzi, Walter, Weiler, Westlund, Wiersma, Willmott, Wynn, Xenogiannakopoulou, Yañez-Barnuevo García, Zani, Zingaretti
UEN: Angelilli, Aylward, Didžiokas, Foglietta, Foltyn-Kubicka, Janowski, Kristovskis, Kuźmiuk, La Russa, Libicki, Maldeikis, Muscardini, Musumeci, Pirilli, Podkański, Roszkowski, Ryan, Tatarella, Vaidere, Wojciechowski Janusz, Zīle
Against: 58
GUE/NGL: Manolakou, Pafilis, Pflüger, Toussas, Wagenknecht
IND/DEM: Batten, Belder, Blokland, Booth, Clark, Knapman, Nattrass, Sinnott, Titford, Whittaker, Wise
NI: Allister, Chruszcz, Giertych, Kilroy-Silk, Martin Hans-Peter, Mote, Wojciechowski Bernard Piotr
Verts/ALE: Aubert, Auken, Beer, Bennahmias, Breyer, Cohn-Bendit, Cramer, Evans Jill, Flautre, de Groen-Kouwenhoven, Hammerstein Mintz, Harms, Hassi, Horáček, Hudghton, Isler Béguin, Jonckheer, Kallenbach, Kusstatscher, Lagendijk, Lambert, Lichtenberger, Lipietz, Özdemir, Onesta, Romeva i Rueda, Rühle, Schlyter, Schmidt, Schroedter, Smith, Trüpel, Turmes, Voggenhuber, Ždanoka
Abstention: 54
GUE/NGL: Adamou, Agnoletto, Aita, Brie, Catania, de Brún, Figueiredo, Flasarová, Guerreiro, Guidoni, Henin, Kaufmann, Kohlíček, Liotard, Markov, Maštálka, Meijer, Meyer Pleite, Morgantini, Musacchio, Papadimoulis, Ransdorf, Remek, Seppänen, Sjöstedt, Strož, Svensson, Triantaphyllides, Uca, Zimmer
IND/DEM: Grabowski, Krupa, Louis, Pęk, Piotrowski, Rogalski, de Villiers, Zapałowski, Železný
NI: Baco, Bobošíková, Claeys, Dillen, Gollnisch, Lang, Le Rachinel, Romagnoli, Schenardi, Vanhecke
PPE-DE: Koch, Sommer, Strejček
PSE: Kreissl-Dörfler
Verts/ALE: van Buitenen
TEXTS ADOPTED
P6_TA(2006)0297
Strengthening cross-border police cooperation *
European Parliament legislative resolution on the initiative by the Kingdom of the Netherlands with a view to the adoption of a Council Decision on strengthening cross-border police cooperation with regard to meetings attended by large numbers of people from more than one Member State, at which policing is primarily aimed at maintaining law and order and security and preventing and combating criminal offences (6930/2005 — C6-0117/2005 — 2005/0804(CNS))
(Consultation procedure)
The European Parliament,
|
— |
having regard to the initiative by the Kingdom of the Netherlands (6930/2005) (1), |
|
— |
having regard to Article 34(2)(c) of the EU Treaty, |
|
— |
having regard to Article 39(1) of the EU Treaty, pursuant to which the Council consulted Parliament (C6-0117/2005), |
|
— |
having regard to Rules 93 and 51 of its Rules of Procedure, |
|
— |
having regard to the report of the Committee on Civil Liberties, Justice and Home Affairs (A6-0222/2006); |
|
1. |
Approves the initiative by the Kingdom of the Netherlands as amended; |
|
2. |
Calls on the Council to amend the text accordingly; |
|
3. |
Calls on the Council to notify Parliament if it intends to depart from the text approved by Parliament; |
|
4. |
Calls on the Council to consult Parliament again if it intends to amend the initiative by the Kingdom of the Netherlands substantially; |
|
5. |
Instructs its President to forward its position to the Council and Commission, and the government of the Kingdom of the Netherlands. |
|
(3a) |
The basis for this Decision is the Council Conclusions of 13 July 2001 on security at European Council meetings and other comparable events. |
|
(3b) |
This Decision builds on the arrangements provided for in Joint Action 97/339/JHA of 26 May 1997 adopted by the Council on the basis of Article K.3 of the Treaty on European Union with regard to cooperation on law and order and security (2) and the Council Resolution of 29 April 2004 on security at European Council meetings and other comparable events (3). |
|
(4) |
In the light of that trend, and following on from earlier initiatives (4), it is necessary to step up international police cooperation in this area. |
|
(4) |
In the light of that trend, and following on from earlier initiatives, it is necessary to step up international police cooperation in this area , in accordance with the principles of proportionality and subsidiarity and in compliance with European rules on the protection of privacy . |
|
(5) |
The possibilities afforded by the Schengen acquis are insufficient to ensure effective cross border assistance, |
deleted
|
1. |
In the last quarter of each calendar year the Presidency of the Council shall present an overview of the international assistance expected to be required in the following calendar year. |
|
1. |
In the last quarter of each calendar year the Presidency of the Council shall present an overview of the international assistance expected to be required in the following calendar year. If, following the expiry of that period, a Member State requests assistance in connection with an unanticipated event, the Presidency shall immediately add that event to the overview and notify the Council thereof in confidence. |
4a. This mechanism shall be complementary to the one established in Joint Action 97/339/JHA.
5. The Presidency shall send the review referred to in paragraph 1 to the Council for confidential perusal.
deleted
1. The General Secretariat of the Council shall assist the Member States by researching existing agreements on cross-border assistance.
1. The General Secretariat of the Council shall assist the Member States by researching existing agreements on cross-border assistance.
2. Member States shall forward the texts of such agreements to the General Secretariat of the Council no later than six months after the entry into force of this Decision .
2. Member States shall forward the texts of existing agreements and of new initiatives or those in the process of being developed to the General Secretariat of the Council.
3. Within one year at the latest, the Council shall discuss , on the basis of the results of the research referred to in the first paragraph, whether the main difficulties observed can be resolved by adapting the relevant European legislation , and in particular the Schengen Convention .
3. On the basis of the information obtained, the Council shall discuss the bottlenecks and difficulties observed and whether it is necessary to adapt the relevant European legislation.
(1) OJ C 101, 27.4.2005, p. 36.
(2) OJ L 147, 5.6.1997, p. 1 .
(3) OJ C 116, 30.4.2004, p. 18 .
(4) Council Resolution of 29 April 2004 on security at European Council meetings and other comparable events ( OJ C 116, 30.4.2004, p. 18 ).
P6_TA(2006)0298
Technical requirements for inland waterway vessels ***II
European Parliament legislative resolution on the Council common position for adopting a directive of the European Parliament and of the Council laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing Council Directive 82/714/EEC (13274/1/2005 — C6-0091/2006 — 1997/0335(COD))
(Codecision procedure: Second reading)
The European Parliament,
|
— |
having regard to the Council common position (13274/1/2005 — C6-0091/2006), |
|
— |
having regard to its position at first reading (1) on the Commission proposal to Parliament and the Council (COM(1997)0644) (2), |
|
— |
having regard to the amended Commission proposal (COM(2000)0419) (3), |
|
— |
having regard to Article 251(2) of the EC Treaty, |
|
— |
having regard to Rule 62 of its Rules of Procedure, |
|
— |
having regard to the recommendation for second reading of the Committee on Transport and Tourism (A6-0208/2006); |
|
1. |
Approves the common position as amended; |
|
2. |
Instructs its President to forward its position to the Council and the Commission. |
(1) OJ C 341, 9.11.1998, p. 34 and OJ C 54, 25.2.2000, p. 79.
(3) Not yet published in OJ.
P6_TC2-COD(1997)0335
Position of the European Parliament adopted at second reading on 5 July 2006 with a view to the adoption of European Parliament and Council Directive 2006/…/EC laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels and repealing Council Directive 82/714/EEC
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 71(1) thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the Opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee (1),
Following consultation of the Committee of the Regions,
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty (2),
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Council Directive 82/714/EEC of 4 October 1982 laying down technical requirements for inland waterway vessels (3) introduced harmonised conditions for issuing technical certificates for inland waterway vessels in all Member States, albeit excluding operations on the Rhine. Nevertheless, at European level, various technical requirements for inland waterway vessels have remained in force. Up to now, the coexistence of various international and national regulations has obstructed efforts to ensure mutual recognition of national navigation certificates without the need for an additional inspection of foreign vessels. Furthermore, the standards contained in Directive 82/714/EEC, in part, no longer reflect current technological developments. |
|
(2) |
Essentially, the technical requirements set out in the annexes to Directive 82/714/EEC incorporate the provisions laid down in the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation, in the version approved by the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine (CCNR) in 1982. The conditions and technical requirements for issuing inland navigation certificates under Article 22 of the Revised Convention for Rhine Navigation have been revised regularly since then and are recognised as reflecting current technological developments. For competition and safety reasons it is desirable, specifically in the interests of promoting harmonisation at European level, to adopt the scope and content of such technical requirements for the whole of the Community's inland waterway network. Account should be taken in this regard of the changes that have occurred in that network. |
|
(3) |
Community inland navigation certificates attesting the full compliance of vessels with the aforementioned revised technical requirements should be valid on all Community inland waterways. |
|
(4) |
It is desirable to ensure a greater degree of harmonisation between the conditions for the issuing of supplementary Community inland navigation certificates by Member States for operations on Zone 1 and 2 waterways (estuaries), as well as for operations on Zone 4 waterways. |
|
(5) |
In the interests of passenger transport safety, it is desirable that the scope of Directive 82/714/EEC be extended to include passenger vessels designed to carry more than 12 passengers, along the lines of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation. |
|
(6) |
In the interests of safety, harmonisation of standards should be at a high level and should be achieved in such a way so as not to result in any reduction in safety standards on any Community inland waterway. |
|
(7) |
It is appropriate to provide for a transitional regime for vessels in service not yet carrying a Community inland navigation certificate when subjected to a first technical inspection under the revised technical requirements established by this Directive. |
|
(8) |
It is appropriate, within certain limits and according to the category of vessel concerned, to determine the period of validity of Community inland navigation certificates in each specific case. |
|
(9) |
The measures necessary for the implementation of this Directive should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission (4). |
|
(10) |
It is necessary that the measures provided for in Council Directive 76/135/EEC of 20 January 1976 on reciprocal recognition of navigability licenses for inland waterway vessels (5) remain in force for those vessels not covered by this Directive. |
|
(11) |
Given that some vessels fall within the scope of Directive 94/25/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 June 1994 on the approximation of the laws, regulations and administrative provisions of the Member States relating to recreational craft (6) as well as of this directive, the annexes of the two directives should be adjusted by the relevant committee procedures as soon as possible if there are any contradictions or inconsistencies between the provisions of those directives. |
|
(12) |
In accordance with point 34 of the Interinstitutional Agreement on better law-making (7), Member States are encouraged to draw up, for themselves and in the interests of the Community, their own tables illustrating, as far as possible, the correlation between this Directive and the transposition measures, and to make them public. |
|
(13) |
Directive 82/714/EEC should be repealed, |
HAVE ADOPTED THIS DIRECTIVE:
Article 1
Classification of waterways
1. For the purposes of this Directive, Community inland waterways shall be classified as follows:
|
(a) |
Zones 1, 2, 3 and 4:
|
|
(b) |
Zone R: those of the waterways referred to in point (a) for which certificates are to be issued in accordance with Article 22 of the Revised Convention for Rhine Navigation as that Article is worded when this Directive enters into force. |
2. Any Member State may, after consulting the Commission, modify the classification of its waterways into the zones listed in Annex I. The Commission shall be notified of these modifications at least six months before their entry into force and shall inform the other Member States.
Article 2
Scope of application
1. This Directive shall, in accordance with Article 1.01 of Annex II, apply to the following craft:
|
(a) |
vessels having a length (L) of 20 metres or more; |
|
(b) |
vessels for which the product of length (L), breadth (B) and draught (T) is a volume of 100 m3 or more. |
2. This Directive shall also apply, in accordance with Article 1.01 of Annex II, to all of the following craft:
|
(a) |
tugs and pushers intended for towing or pushing craft referred to in paragraph 1 or floating equipment or for moving such craft or floating equipment alongside; |
|
(b) |
vessels intended for passenger transport which carry more than 12 passengers in addition to the crew; |
|
(c) |
floating equipment. |
3. The following craft shall be excluded from this Directive:
|
(a) |
ferries; |
|
(b) |
naval vessels; |
|
(c) |
sea-going vessels, including sea-going tugs and pusher craft, which:
|
Article 3
Obligation to carry a certificate
1. Craft operating on the Community inland waterways referred to in Article 1 shall carry:
|
(a) |
when operating on a Zone R waterway:
|
|
(b) |
when operating on other waterways, a Community inland navigation certificate, including, where applicable, the specifications referred to in Article 5. |
2. The Community inland navigation certificate shall be drawn up following the model set out in Part I of Annex V and shall be issued in accordance with this Directive.
Article 4
Supplementary Community inland navigation certificates
1. All craft carrying a valid certificate issued pursuant to Article 22 of the Revised Convention for Rhine Navigation may, subject to the provisions of Article 5(5) of this Directive, navigate on Community waterways carrying that certificate only.
2. However, all craft carrying the certificate referred to in paragraph 1 shall also be provided with a supplementary Community inland navigation certificate:
|
(a) |
when operating on Zone 3 and 4 waterways, if they wish to take advantage of the reduction in technical requirements on those waterways; |
|
(b) |
when operating on Zone 1 and 2 waterways, or, in respect of passenger vessels, when operating on Zone 3 waterways that are not linked to the navigable inland waterways of another Member State, if the Member State concerned has adopted additional technical requirements for those waterways, in accordance with Article 5(1), (2) and (3). |
3. The supplementary Community inland navigation certificate shall be drawn up following the model set out in Part II of Annex V and shall be issued by the competent authorities on production of the certificate referred to in paragraph 1 and under the conditions laid down by the authorities competent for the waterways concerned.
Article 5
Additional or reduced technical requirements for certain zones
1. Each Member State may, after consulting the Commission, and where applicable subject to the requirements of the Revised Convention for Rhine Navigation, adopt technical requirements additional to those in Annex II for craft operating on Zone 1 and 2 waterways within its territory.
2. In respect of passenger vessels operating on Zone 3 waterways within its territory that are not linked to the navigable inland waterways of another Member State, each Member State may maintain technical requirements additional to those in Annex II. Amendments to such technical requirements shall require the prior approval of the Commission.
3. The additional requirements shall be restricted to the subjects listed in Annex III. The Commission shall be notified of these additional requirements at least six months before their entry into force and shall inform the other Member States.
4. Compliance with the additional requirements shall be specified in the Community inland navigation certificate referred to in Article 3 or, where Article 4(2) applies, in the supplementary Community inland navigation certificate. Such proof of compliance shall be recognised on Community waterways of the corresponding zone.
|
5. |
|
6. Craft operating only on Zone 4 waterways shall qualify for the reduced requirements as specified in Chapter 19b of Annex II on all waterways in that zone. Compliance with those reduced requirements shall be specified in the Community inland navigation certificate referred to in Article 3.
7. Each Member State may, after consulting the Commission, allow a reduction of the technical requirements of Annex II for craft operating exclusively on Zone 3 and 4 waterways within its territory.
Such a reduction shall be restricted to the subjects listed in Annex IV. Where the technical characteristics of a craft correspond to the reduced technical requirements, this shall be specified in the Community inland navigation certificate or, where Article 4(2) applies, in the supplementary Community inland navigation certificate.
The Commission shall be notified of the reductions of the technical requirements of Annex II at least six months before they come into force and shall inform the other Member States.
Article 6
Dangerous goods
Any craft carrying a certificate issued pursuant to the Regulation for the transport of dangerous substances on the Rhine (the ‘ADNR’) may carry dangerous goods throughout the territory of the Community under the conditions stated in that certificate.
Any Member State may require that craft which do not carry such a certificate shall only be authorised to carry dangerous goods within its territory if the craft comply with requirements additional to those set out in this Directive. The Commission shall be notified of such requirements and shall inform the other Member States.
Article 7
Derogations
1. Member States may authorise derogations from all or part of this Directive for:
|
(a) |
vessels, tugs, pushers and floating equipment operating on navigable waterways not linked by inland waterway to the waterways of other Member States; |
|
(b) |
craft having a dead weight not exceeding 350 tonnes or craft not intended for the carriage of goods and having a water displacement of less than 100 m3, which were laid down before 1 January 1950 and operate exclusively on a national waterway. |
2. Member States may authorise in respect of navigation on their national waterways derogations from one or more provisions of this Directive for limited journeys of local interest or in harbour areas. These derogations and the journeys or area for which they are valid shall be specified in the vessel's certificate.
3. The Commission shall be notified of derogations authorised in accordance with paragraphs 1 and 2 and shall inform the other Member States.
4. Any Member State which, as a result of derogations authorised in accordance with paragraphs 1 and 2, has no craft subject to the provisions of this Directive operating on its waterways shall not be required to comply with Articles 9, 10 and 12.
Article 8
Issuance of Community inland navigation certificates
1. The Community inland navigation certificate shall be issued to craft laid down as from … (9) following a technical inspection carried out prior to the craft being put into service and intended to check whether the craft complies with the technical requirements laid down in Annex II.
2. The Community inland navigation certificate shall be issued to craft excluded from the scope of Directive 82/714/EEC, but covered by this Directive in accordance with Article 2(1) and (2), following a technical inspection which shall be carried out upon expiry of the craft's current certificate, but in any case no later than … (10), to check whether the craft complies with the technical requirements laid down in Annex II. In Member States where the validity period of the craft's current national certificate is shorter than five years, such certificate may be issued until five years after … (10).
Any failure to meet the technical requirements laid down in Annex II shall be specified in the Community inland navigation certificate. Provided that the competent authorities consider that these shortcomings do not constitute a manifest danger, the craft referred to in the first subparagraph may continue to operate until such time as those components or areas of the craft which have been certified as not meeting those requirements are replaced or altered, whereafter those components or areas shall meet the requirements of Annex II.
3. Manifest danger within the meaning of this Article shall be presumed in particular when requirements concerning the structural soundness of the shipbuilding, the navigation or manoeuvrability or special features of the craft in accordance with Annex II are affected. Derogations as allowed for in Annex II shall not be identified as shortcomings which constitute a manifest danger.
The replacement of existing parts with identical parts or parts of an equivalent technology and design during routine repairs and maintenance shall not be considered as a replacement within the meaning of this Article.
4. Compliance of a craft with the additional requirements referred to in Article 5(1), (2) and (3) shall, where appropriate, be checked during the technical inspections provided for in paragraphs 1 and 2 of this Article, or during a technical inspection carried out at the request of the vessel's owner.
Article 9
Competent authorities
1. Community inland navigation certificates may be issued by the competent authorities of any Member State.
2. Each Member State shall draw up a list indicating which of its authorities are competent for issuing the Community inland navigation certificates and shall notify the Commission thereof. The Commission shall inform the other Member States.
Article 10
Carrying out of technical inspections
1. The technical inspection referred to in Article 8 shall be carried out by the competent authorities which may refrain from subjecting the craft in whole or in part to technical inspection where it is evident from a valid attestation, issued by a recognised classification society in accordance with Article 1.01 of Annex II, that the craft satisfies in whole or in part the technical requirements of Annex II. Classification societies shall only be recognised if they fulfil the criteria listed in Part I of Annex VII.
2. Each Member State shall draw up a list indicating which of its authorities are competent for carrying out technical inspections and shall notify the Commission thereof. The Commission shall inform the other Member States.
Article 11
Validity of Community inland navigation certificates
1. The period of validity of Community inland navigation certificates shall be determined in each specific case by the authority competent for issuing such certificates in accordance with Annex II.
2. Each Member State may, in the cases specified in Articles 12 and 16 and in Annex II, issue provisional Community inland navigation certificates. Provisional Community inland navigation certificates shall be drawn up following the model set out in Part III of Annex V.
Article 12
Replacement of Community inland navigation certificates
Each Member State shall lay down the conditions under which a valid Community inland navigation certificate which has been lost or damaged may be replaced.
Article 13
Renewal of Community inland navigation certificates
1. The Community inland navigation certificate shall be renewed on expiry of its period of validity in accordance with the conditions laid down in Article 8.
2. For the renewal of Community inland navigation certificates issued before … (9), the transitional provisions of Annex II shall apply.
3. For the renewal of Community inland navigation certificates issued after … (9), the transitional provisions of Annex II which have come into force after the issuing of such certificates shall apply.
Article 14
Extension of validity of Community inland navigation certificates
The validity of a Community inland navigation certificate may exceptionally be extended without a technical inspection in accordance with Annex II by the authority which issued or renewed it. Such extension shall be indicated on that certificate.
Article 15
Issuance of new Community inland navigation certificates
In the event of major alterations or repairs which affect the structural soundness of the shipbuilding, the navigation or manoeuvrability or special features of the craft in accordance with Annex II, the latter shall again undergo, prior to any further voyage, the technical inspection provided for in Article 8. Following this inspection, a new Community inland navigation certificate stating the technical characteristics of the craft shall be issued or the existing certificate amended accordingly. If this certificate is issued in a Member State other than that which issued or renewed the initial certificate, the competent authority which issued or renewed the certificate shall be informed accordingly within one month.
Article 16
Refusal to issue or renew, and withdrawal of, Community inland navigation certificates
Any decision to refuse to issue or renew a Community inland navigation certificate shall state the grounds on which it is based. The person concerned shall be notified thereof and of the appeal procedure and its time limits in the Member State concerned.
Any valid Community inland navigation certificate may be withdrawn by the competent authority which issued or renewed it if the craft ceases to comply with the technical requirements specified in its certificate.
Article 17
Additional inspections
The competent authorities of a Member State may, in accordance with Annex VIII, check at any time whether a craft is carrying a certificate valid under the terms of this Directive and satisfies the requirements set out in such certificate or constitutes a manifest danger for the persons on board, the environment or the navigation. The competent authorities shall take the necessary measures in accordance with Annex VIII.
Article 18
Recognition of navigability certificates of craft from third countries
Pending the conclusion of agreements on the mutual recognition of navigability certificates between the Community and third countries, the competent authorities of a Member State may recognise the navigability certificates of craft from third countries for navigation on the waterways of that Member State.
The issuance of Community inland navigation certificates to craft from third countries shall be carried out in accordance with Article 8(1).
Article 19
Committee procedure
1. The Commission shall be assisted by the Committee established under Article 7 of Council Directive 91/672/EEC of 16 December 1991 on the reciprocal recognition of national boatmasters' certificates for the carriage of goods and passengers by inland waterway (11) (hereinafter referred to as ‘the Committee’).
2. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Articles 3 and 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof.
Article 20
Adaptation of the annexes and recommendations on provisional certificates
1. Any amendments which are necessary to adapt the annexes to this Directive to technical progress or to developments in this area arising from the work of other international organisations, in particular that of the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine (CCNR), to ensure that the two certificates referred to in Article 3(1)(a) are issued on the basis of technical requirements which guarantee an equivalent level of safety, or to take account of the cases referred to in Article 5, shall be adopted by the Commission in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2).
Those amendments shall be made rapidly in order to ensure that the technical requirements necessary for the issuing of the Community inland navigation certificate recognised for navigation on the Rhine give a level of safety equivalent to that required for the issuing of the certificate referred to in Article 22 of the Revised Convention for Rhine Navigation.
2. The Commission shall decide on recommendations from the Committee on the issuance of provisional Community inland navigation certificates in accordance with Article 2.19 of Annex II.
Article 21
Continued applicability of Directive 76/135/EEC
For those craft outside the scope of Article 2(1) and (2) of this Directive, but falling within the scope of Article 1(a) of Directive 76/135/EEC, the provisions of that Directive shall apply.
Article 22
National additional or reduced requirements
Additional requirements which were in force in a Member State before … (9) for craft operating within its territory on Zone 1 and 2 waterways or reduced technical requirements for craft operating within its territory on Zone 3 and 4 waterways which were in force in a Member State before that date shall continue to be in force until additional requirements in accordance with Article 5(1) or reductions in accordance with Article 5(7) of the technical prescriptions of Annex II come into force, but only until … (12).
Article 23
Transposition
1. Member States which have inland waterways as referred to in Article 1(1) shall bring into force the laws, regulations and administrative provisions necessary to comply with this Directive with effect from … (9). They shall forthwith inform the Commission thereof.
When Member States adopt these measures, they shall contain a reference to this Directive or shall be accompanied by such reference on the occasion of their official publication. The methods of making such reference shall be laid down by Member States.
2. Member States shall immediately communicate to the Commission the text of the provisions of national law which they adopt in the field covered by this Directive. The Commission shall inform the other Member States thereof.
Article 24
Penalties
Member States shall lay down a system of penalties for breaches of the national provisions adopted pursuant to this Directive and shall take all the measures necessary to ensure that these penalties are applied. The penalties thus provided for shall be effective, proportionate and dissuasive.
Article 25
Repeal of Directive 82/714/EEC
Directive 82/714/EEC shall be repealed with effect from … (9).
Article 26
Entry into force
This Directive shall enter into force on the day of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
Article 27
Addressees
This Directive is addressed to the Member States which have inland waterways as referred to in Article 1(1).
Done at …, on …
For the European Parliament
The President
For the Council
The President
(1) OJ C 157, 25.5.1998, p. 17.
(2) Position of the European Parliament of 16 September 1999 (OJ C 54, 25.2.2000, p. 79), Council Common Position of 23 February 2006 (not yet published in the Official Journal) and Position of the European Parliament of 5 July 2006.
(3) OJ L 301, 28.10.1982, p. 1. Directive as last amended by the 2003 Act of Accession.
(4) OJ L 184, 17.7.1999, p. 23.
(5) OJ L 21, 29.1.1976, p. 10. Directive as last amended by Directive 78/1016/EEC (OJ L 349, 13.12.1978, p. 31).
(6) OJ L 164, 30.6.1994, p. 15. Directive as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 1882/2003 (OJ L 284, 31.10.2003, p. 1).
(7) OJ C 321, 31.12.2003, p. 1.
(8) OJ L 144, 15.5.1998, p. 1. Directive as last amended by Commission Directive 2003/75/EC (OJ L 190, 30.7.2003, p. 6).
(9) 2 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
(10) 12 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
(11) OJ L 373, 31.12.1991, p. 29. Directive as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 1882/2003 of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 284, 31.10.2003, p. 1).
(12) 30 months after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
ANNEX I
LIST OF COMMUNITY INLAND WATERWAYS DIVIDED GEOGRAPHICALLY INTO ZONES 1, 2, 3 AND 4
CHAPTER 1
Zone 1
Federal Republic of Germany
|
Ems: |
from a line linking the former Greetsiel lighthouse and the western pier of the port entrance at Eemshaven seawards as far as latitude 53°30′N and longitude 6°45′E, i.e. slightly seawards of the lightering area for dry-cargo carriers in the Alte Ems (1) |
Republic of Poland
The part of Pomorska Bay southward from the line linking NordPerd on Rugen Island and the lighthouse Niechorze.
The part of Gdańska Bay southward from the line linking the lighthouse Hel and the entrance buoy to the port of Baltijsk.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland
|
SCOTLAND |
|||||||
|
Blue Mull Sound |
Between Gutcher and Belmont. |
||||||
|
Yell Sound |
Between Tofts Voe and Ulsta. |
||||||
|
Sullom Voe |
Within a line from the north-east point of Gluss Island to the northern point of Calback Ness. |
||||||
|
Dales Voe |
In winter:
|
||||||
|
Dales Voe |
In summer:
|
||||||
|
Lerwick |
In winter:
|
||||||
|
Lerwick |
In summer:
|
||||||
|
Kirkwall |
Between Kirkwall and Rousay not east of a line between Point of Graand (Egilsay) and Galt Ness (Shapinsay) or between Head of Work (Mainland) through Helliar Holm light to the shore of Shapinsay; not north west of the south east tip of Eynhallow Island, not to seaward and a line between the shore on Rousay at 59°10,5′N 002°57,1′W and the shore on Egilsay at 59°10,0′N 002°56,4′W. |
||||||
|
Stromness |
To Scapa but not outside Scapa Flow |
||||||
|
Scapa Flow |
Within an area bounded by lines drawn from Point of Cletts on the island of Hoy to Thomson's Hill triangulation point on the island of Fara and thence to Gibraltar Pier on the island of Flotta; from St Vincent Pier on the island of Flotta to the westernmost point of Calf of Flotta; from the easternmost point of the Calf of Flotta to Needle Point on the island of South Ronaldsay and from the Ness on Mainland to Point of Oxan lighthouse on the island of Graemsay and thence to Bu Point on the island of Hoy; and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Balnakiel Bay |
Between Eilean Dubh and A'Chleit |
||||||
|
Cromarty Firth |
Within a line from North Sutor to Nairn Breakwater and seaward of Zone 2 waters |
||||||
|
Inverness |
Within a line from North Sutor to Nairn Breakwater and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Tay — Dundee |
Within a line from Broughty Castle to Tayport and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Firth of Forth and River Forth |
Within a line from Kirkcaldy to River Portobello and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Solway Firth |
Within a line from Southerness Point to Silloth |
||||||
|
Loch Ryan |
Within a line from Finnart's Point to Milleur Point and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
The Clyde |
Outer limit:
Inner limit in winter:
Inner limit in summer:
Note: The above inner summer limit is extended between 5 June and 5 September (both dates inclusive) by a line from a point two miles off the Ayrshire coast at Skelmorlie Castle to Tomont End, Cumbrae, and a line from Portachur Point, Cumbrae to Inner Brigurd Point, Ayrshire |
||||||
|
Oban |
Within an area bounded on the north by a line from Dunollie Point Light to Ard na Chruidh and to the south by a line from Rudha Seanach to Ard na Cuile |
||||||
|
Kyle of Lochalsh |
Through Loch Alsh to the head of Loch Duich |
||||||
|
Loch Gairloch |
In winter:
In summer:
|
||||||
|
NORTHERN IRELAND |
|||||||
|
Belfast Lough |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Loch Neagh |
At a greater distance than 2 miles from the shore |
||||||
|
EAST COAST OF ENGLAND |
|||||||
|
River Humber |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
WALES AND WEST COAST OF ENGLAND |
|||||||
|
River Severn |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Wye |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Newport |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Cardiff |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Barry |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Swansea |
Within a line joining the seaward ends of the breakwaters |
||||||
|
Menai Straits |
Within the Menai Straits from a line joining Llanddwyn Island Light to Dinas Dinlleu and lines joining the south end of Puffin Island to Trwyn DuPoint and Llanfairfechan Railway Station, and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Dee |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Mersey |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Preston and Southport |
Within a line from Southport to Blackpool inside the banks and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Fleetwood |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Lune |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Heysham |
In winter:
In summer:
|
||||||
|
Morecambe |
In winter:
In the summer:
|
||||||
|
Workington |
Within a line from Southerness Point to Silloth and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
SOUTH OF ENGLAND |
|||||||
|
River Colne, Colchester |
In winter:
In summer:
|
||||||
|
River Blackwater |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Crouch and River Roach |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Thames and its tributaries |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Medway and the Swale |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Chichester |
Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Langstone Harbour |
Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Portsmouth |
Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Bembridge, Isle of Wight |
Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Cowes, Isle of Wight |
Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Southampton |
Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Beaulieu River |
Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Keyhaven Lake |
Inside the Isle of Wight within an area bounded by lines drawn between the church spire, West Wittering, to Trinity Church, Bembridge, to the eastward, and the Needles and Hurst Point to the westward and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Weymouth |
Within Portland Harbour and between the River Wey and Portland Harbour |
||||||
|
Plymouth |
Within a line from Cawsand to Breakwater to Staddon and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Falmouth |
In winter:
In summer:
and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Camel |
Within a line from Stepper Point to Trebetherick Point and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
Bridgewater |
Within the bar and seaward of Zone 2 waters. |
||||||
|
River Avon (Avon) |
In winter:
In summer:
|
||||||
Zone 2
Czech Republic
Dam Lake Lipno.
Federal Republic of Germany
|
Ems: |
from a line across the Ems near the entrance to the port of Papenburg between Diemen pumping station and the opening of the dyke at Halte as far as a line linking the former Greetsiel lighthouse and the western pier of the port entrance at Eemshaven. |
||||||
|
Jade: |
inside a line linking the Schillig cross light and Langwarden church tower |
||||||
|
Weser: |
from the north-western edge of the railway bridge in Bremen as far as a line linking Langwarden and Cappel church towers, including the Westergate, Rekumer Loch, Rechter Nebenarm and Schweiburg side branches |
||||||
|
Elbe: |
from the lower limit of the port of Hamburg as far as a line linking the Döse beacon and the western edge of the Friedrichskoog dyke (Dieksand), including the Nebenelbe and the Este, Lühe, Schwinge, Oste, Pinnau, Krückau and Stör tributaries (in each case from the mouth to the barrage) |
||||||
|
Meldorfer Bucht: |
inside a line linking the western edge of the Friedrichskoog dyke (Dieksand) and the western pier head at Büsum |
||||||
|
Eider: |
From the Gieselau Canal to the Eider barrage |
||||||
|
Flensburger Förde: |
inside a line linking Kegnäs lighthouse and Birknack |
||||||
|
Schlei: |
inside a line between the Schleimünde pier heads |
||||||
|
Eckernförder Bucht: |
inside a line linking Boknis-Eck and the north-eastern point of the mainland near Dänisch Nienhof |
||||||
|
Kieler Förde: |
inside a line linking the Bülk lighthouse and the Laboe naval memorial |
||||||
|
Nord-Ostsee-Kanal (Kiel Canal): |
from a line linking the pier heads at Brunsbüttel as far as a line linking the entry lights at Kiel-Holtenau, including Obereidersee and Enge, Audorfer See, Borgstedter See and Enge, Schirnauer See, Flemhuder See and the Achterwehrer Canal |
||||||
|
Trave: |
from the north-western edge of the railway lift bridge and the northern edge of the Holstenbrücke (Stadttrave) in Lübeck as far as a line linking the southern inner and northern outer pier heads at Travemünde, including the Pötenitzer Wiek, Dassower See and the Altarmen at Teerhof island |
||||||
|
Leda: |
From the entrance of the outer harbour of Leer sea lock to the mouth |
||||||
|
Hunte: |
from the port of Oldenburg and from 140 m downstream of the Amalienbrücke in Oldenburg to the mouth |
||||||
|
Lesum: |
From the Bremen-Burg railway bridge to the mouth |
||||||
|
Este: |
From the tail water of Buxtehude lock to the Este barrage |
||||||
|
Lühe: |
From the tail water of the Au-Mühle in Horneburg to the Lühe barrage |
||||||
|
Schwinge: |
From the Salztor lock in Stade to the Schwinge barrage |
||||||
|
Oste: |
from the north-eastern edge of the Bremervörde mill dam to the Oste barrage |
||||||
|
Pinnau: |
from the south-western edge of the railway bridge in Pinneberg to the Pinnau barrage |
||||||
|
Krückau: |
from the south-western edge of the bridge leading to/from the Wedenkamp in Elmshorn to the Krückau barrage |
||||||
|
Stör: |
From Rensing tide gauge to the Stör barrage |
||||||
|
Freiburger Hafenpriel: |
from the eastern edge of the sluice in Freiburg an der Elbe as far as the mouth |
||||||
|
Wismarbucht, Kirchsee, Breitling, Salzhaff and Wismar port area: |
seawards as far as a line between Hoher Wieschendorf Huk and Timmendorf light and a line linking Gollwitz light on the island of Poel and the southern point of the Wustrow peninsula |
||||||
|
Warnow, including the Breitling and side branches: |
downstream of the Mühlendamm from the northern edge of the Geinitzbrücke in Rostock towards the sea as far as a line linking the northern points of the western and eastern piers in Warnemünde |
||||||
|
Waters enclosed by the mainland and the Darß and Zingst pensinsulas and the islands of Hiddensee and Rügen (including Stralsund port area): |
extending seawards between
|
||||||
|
Greifswalder Bodden and Greifswald port area, including the Ryck: |
seawards as far as a line from the eastern point of Thiessower Haken (Südperd) to the eastern point of the island of Ruden and continuing to the northern point of the island of Usedom (54°10′37″N, 13°47′51″E) |
||||||
|
Waters enclosed by the mainland and the island of Usedom (the Peenestrom, including Wolgast port area and Achterwasser, and the Stettiner Haff): |
eastwards as far as the border with the Republic of Poland in the Stettiner Haff |
French Republic
Dordogne: downstream from the stone bridge at Libourne
Garonne: downstream from the stone bridge at Bordeaux
Gironde.
Loire: downstream from the Haudaudine bridge on the Madeleine arm and downstream from the Pirmil bridge on the Pirmil arm.
Rhône: downstream of the Trinquetaille bridge in Arles and beyond towards Marseille
Seine: downstream of the Jeanne-d'Arc bridge in Rouen.
Republic of Hungary
Lake Balaton.
Kingdom of the Netherlands
Dollard.
Eems.
Waddenzee: including the links with the North Sea.
IJsselmeer: including the Markermeer and IJmeer but excluding the Gouwzee.
Nieuwe Waterweg and the Scheur.
Calland Kanaal west from the Benelux harbour.
Hollands Diep.
Breeddiep, Beerkanaal and its connected harbours.
Haringvliet and Vuile Gat: including the waterways between Goeree-Overflakkee on the one hand and Voorne-Putten and Hoeksche Waard on the other.
Hellegat.
Volkerak.
Krammer.
Grevelingenmeer and Brouwerschavensche Gat: including all the waterways between Schouwen-Duiveland and Goeree-Overflakkee.
Keten, Mastgat, Zijpe, Krabbenkreek, Eastern Scheldt and Roompot: including the waterways between Walcheren, Noord-Beveland and Zuid-Beveland on the one hand and Schouwen-Duiveland and Tholen on the other hand, excluding the Scheldt-Rhine Canal.
Scheldt and Western Scheldt and its mouth on the sea: including the waterways between Zeeland Flanders, on the one hand, and Walcheren and Zuid-Beveland, on the other, excluding the Scheldt-Rhine Canal.
Republic of Poland
Lagoon of Szczecin.
Lagoon of Kamień.
Lagoon of Wisła.
Bay of Puck.
Włocławski Reservoir.
Lake Śniardwy.
Lake Niegocin.
Lake Mamry.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland
|
SCOTLAND |
|
|
Scapa Flow |
Within an area bounded by lines drawn from Wharth on the island of Flotta to the Martello Tower on South Walls, and from Point Cletts on the island of Hoy to Thomson's Hill triangulation point on the island of Fara and thence to Gibraltar Pier on the island of Flotta |
|
Kyle of Durness |
South of Eilean Dubh |
|
Cromarty Firth |
Within a line between North Sutor and South Sutor |
|
Inverness |
Within a line from Fort George to Chanonry Point |
|
Findhorn Bay |
Within the spit |
|
Aberdeen |
Within a line from South Jetty to Abercromby Jetty |
|
Montrose Basin |
To the west of a line running north-south across the harbour entrance at Scurdie Ness Lighthouse |
|
River Tay — Dundee |
Within a line from the tidal basin (fish dock), Dundee to Craig Head, East Newport |
|
Firth of Forth and River Forth |
Within the Firth of Forth but not east of the Forth railway bridge |
|
Dumfries |
Within a line from Airds Point to Scar Point |
|
Loch Ryan |
Within a line from Cairn Point to Kircolm Point |
|
Ayr Harbour |
Inside the Bar |
|
The Clyde |
Above Zone 1 waters |
|
Kyles of Bute |
Between Colintraive and Rhubodach |
|
Campbeltown Harbour |
Within a line from Macringan's Point to Ottercharach Point |
|
Loch Etive |
Within Loch Etive above the Falls of Lora |
|
Loch Leven |
Above the bridge at Ballachulish |
|
Loch Linnhe |
North of Corran Point light |
|
Loch Eil |
The whole loch |
|
Caledonian Canal |
Lochs Lochy, Oich and Ness |
|
Kyle of Lochalsh |
Within Kyle Akin not westward of Eilean Ban Light or eastward of Eileanan Dubha |
|
Loch Carron |
Between Stromemore and Strome Ferry |
|
Loch Broom, Ullapool |
Within a line from Ullapool Point Light to Aultnaharrie |
|
Kylesku |
Across Loch Cairnbawn in the area between the easternmost point of Garbh Eilean and the westernmost point of Eilean na Rainich |
|
Stornoway Harbour |
Within a line from Arnish Point to Sandwick Bay Lighthouse, north-west side |
|
The Sound of Scalpay |
Not east of Berry Cove (Scalpay) and not west of Croc a Loin (Harris) |
|
North Harbour, Scalpay and Tarbert Harbour |
Within one mile from the shore of the Island of Harris |
|
Loch Awe |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Katrine |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Lomond |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Tay |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Loyal |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Hope |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Shin |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Assynt |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Glascarnoch |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Fannich |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Maree |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Gairloch |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Monar |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Mullardach |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Cluanie |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Loyne |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Garry |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Quoich |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Arkaig |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Morar |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Shiel |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Earn |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Rannoch |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Tummel |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Ericht |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Fionn |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Glass |
The whole loch |
|
Loch Rimsdale/nan Clar |
The whole loch |
|
NORTHERN IRELAND |
|
|
Strangford Lough |
Within a line from Cloghy Point to Dogtail Point |
|
Belfast Lough |
Within a line from Holywood to Macedon Point |
|
Larne |
Within a line from Larne Pier to the ferry pier on Island Magee |
|
River Bann |
From the seaward ends of the breakwaters to Toome Bridge |
|
Lough Erne |
Upper and Lower Lough Erne |
|
Lough Neagh |
Within two miles of the shore |
|
EAST COAST OF ENGLAND |
|
|
Berwick |
Within the breakwaters |
|
Warkworth |
Within the breakwaters |
|
Blyth |
Within the Outer Pier Heads |
|
River Tyne |
Dunston Staithes to Tyne Pier Heads |
|
River Wear |
Fatfield to Sunderland Pier Heads |
|
Seaham |
Within the breakwaters |
|
Hartlepool |
Within a line from Middleton Jetty to Old Pier Head Within a line joining North Pier Head to South Pier Head |
|
River Tees |
Within a line extending due west from Government Jetty to Tees Barrage |
|
Whitby |
Within Whitby Pier Heads |
|
River Humber |
Within a line from North Ferriby to South Ferriby |
|
Grimsby Dock |
Within a line from the West Pier of the Tidal Basin to the East Pier of the Fish Docks, North Quay |
|
Boston |
Inside the New Cut |
|
Dutch River |
The whole canal |
|
River Hull |
Beverley Beck to River Humber |
|
Kielder Water |
The whole lake |
|
River Ouse |
Below Naburn Lock |
|
River Trent |
Below Cromwell Lock |
|
River Wharfe |
From the junction with River Ouse to Tadcaster Bridge |
|
Scarborough |
Within Scarborough Pier Heads |
|
WALES AND WEST COAST OF ENGLAND |
|
|
River Severn |
North of a line running due west from Sharpness Point (51°43,4′N) to Llanthony and Maisemore Weirs and seaward of Zone 3 waters. |
|
River Wye |
At Chepstow, north of latitude (51°38,0′N) to Monmouth |
|
Newport |
North of the overhead power cables crossing at Fifoots Points |
|
Cardiff |
Within a line from South Jetty to Penarth Head and the enclosed waters to the west of Cardiff Bay Barrage |
|
Barry |
Within a line joining the seaward ends of the breakwaters |
|
Port Talbot |
Within a line joining the seaward ends of the breakwaters on the River Afran outside enclosed docks |
|
Neath |
Within a line running due North from the seaward end of Baglan Bay Tanker Jetty (51°37,2′N, 3°50,5′W) |
|
Llanelli and Burry Port |
Within an area bounded by a line drawn from Burry Port Western Pier to Whiteford Point |
|
Milford Haven |
Within a line from South Hook Point to Thorn Point |
|
Fishguard |
Within a line joining the seaward ends of the north and east breakwaters |
|
Cardigan |
Within the Narrows at Pen-Yr-Ergyd |
|
Aberystwyth |
Within the seaward ends of the breakwaters |
|
Aberdyfi |
Within a line from Aberdyfi Railway Station to Twyni Bach Beacon |
|
Barmouth |
Within a line from Barmouth Railway Station to Penrhyn Point |
|
Portmadoc |
Within a line from Harlech Point to Graig Ddu |
|
Holyhead |
Within an area bounded by the main breakwater and a line drawn from the head of the breakwater to Brynglas Point, Towyn Bay |
|
Menai Straits |
Within the Menai Straits between a line joining Aber Menai Point to Belan Point and a line joining Beaumaris Pier to Pen-y-Coed Point |
|
Conway |
Within a line from Mussel Hill to Tremlyd Point |
|
Llandudno |
Within the breakwater |
|
Rhyl |
Within the breakwater |
|
River Dee |
Above Connah's Quay to Barrelwell Hill water extraction point |
|
River Mersey |
Within a line between the Rock Lighthouse and the North West Seaforth Dock but excluding other docks |
|
Preston and Southport |
Within a line from Lytham to Southport and within Preston Docks |
|
Fleetwood |
Within a line from Low Light to Knott |
|
River Lune |
Within a line from Sunderland Point to Chapel Hill up to and including Glasson Dock |
|
Barrow |
Within a line joining Haws Point, Isle of Walney to Roa Island Slipway |
|
Whitehaven |
Within the breakwater |
|
Workington |
Within the breakwater |
|
Maryport |
Within the breakwater |
|
Carlisle |
Within a line joining Point Carlisle to Torduff |
|
Coniston Water |
The whole lake |
|
Derwentwater |
The whole lake |
|
Ullswater |
The whole lake |
|
Windermere |
The whole lake |
|
SOUTH OF ENGLAND |
|
|
Blakeney and Morston Harbour and approaches |
To the east of a line running south from Blakeney Point to the entrance of the Stiffkey River |
|
River Orwell and River Stour |
River Orwell within a line from Blackmanshead breakwater to Landguard Point and seaward of Zone 3 waters. |
|
River Blackwater |
All waterways within a line from the south-western extremity of Mersea Island to Sales Point |
|
River Crouch and River Roach |
River Crouch within a line from Holliwell Point to Foulness Point, including the River Roach |
|
River Thames and its tributaries |
River Thames above a line drawn north/south through the eastern extremity of Denton Wharf Pier, Gravesend to Teddington Lock |
|
River Medway and the Swale |
River Medway from a line drawn from Garrison Point to the Grain Tower, to Allington Lock; and the Swale from Whitstable to the Medway |
|
River Stour (Kent) |
River Stour above the mouth to the landing at Flagstaff Reach |
|
Dover Harbour |
Within lines drawn across the east and west entrances to the Harbour |
|
River Rother |
River Rother above the Tidal Signal Station at Camber to Scots Float Sluice and to the entrance lock on the River Brede |
|
River Adur and Southwick Canal |
Within a line drawn across Shoreham Harbour entrance to Southwick Canal Lock and to the west end of Tarmac Wharf |
|
River Arun |
River Arun above Littlehampton Pier to Littlehampton Marina |
|
River Ouse (Sussex) Newhaven |
River Ouse from a line drawn across Newhaven Harbour entrance piers to the north end of North Quay |
|
Brighton |
Brighton Marina outer harbour within a line from the southern end of West Quay to the north end of South Quay |
|
Chichester |
Within a line drawn between Eastoke point and the church spire, West Wittering and seaward of Zone 3 waters. |
|
Langstone Harbour |
Within a line drawn between Eastney Point and Gunner Point |
|
Portsmouth |
Within a line drawn across the harbour entrance from Port Blockhouse to the Round Tower |
|
Bembridge, Isle of Wight |
Within Brading Harbour |
|
Cowes, Isle of Wight |
The River Medina within a line from the Breakwater Light on the east bank to the House Light on the west bank |
|
Southampton |
Within a line from Calshot Castle to Hook Beacon |
|
Beaulieu River |
Within Beaulieu River not eastward of a north/south line through Inchmery House |
|
Keyhaven Lake |
Within a line drawn due north from Hurst Point Low Light to Keyhaven Marshes |
|
Christchurch |
The Run |
|
Poole |
Within the line of the Chain Ferry between Sandbanks and South Haven Point |
|
Exeter |
Within an east-west line from Warren Point to the Inshore Lifeboat Station opposite Checkstone Ledge |
|
Teignmouth |
Within the harbour |
|
River Dart |
Within a line from Kettle Point to Battery Point |
|
River Salcombe |
Within a line from Splat Point to Limebury Point |
|
Plymouth |
Within a line from Mount Batten Pier to Raveness Point through Drake's Islands; the River Yealm within a line from Warren Point to Misery Point |
|
Fowey |
Inside the Harbour |
|
Falmouth |
Within a line from St. Anthony Head to Pendennis Point |
|
River Camel |
Within a line from Gun Point to Brea Hill |
|
Rivers Taw and Torridge |
Within a line bearing 200° from the lighthouse on Crow Point to the shore at Skern Point |
|
Bridgewater |
South of a line running due East from Stert Point (51°13,0′N) |
|
River Avon (Avon) |
Within a line from Avonmouth Pier to Wharf Point, to Netham Dam |
CHAPTER 2
Zone 3
Kingdom of Belgium
Maritime Scheldt (downstream of Antwerp open anchorage).
Czech Republic
Labe: from the lock Ústí nad Labem-Střekov to the lock Lovosice.
Dam Lakes: Baška, Brněnská (Kníničky), Horka (Stráž pod Ralskem), Hracholusky, Jesenice, Nechranice, Olešná, Orlík, Pastviny, Plumov, Rozkoš, Seč, Skalka, Slapy, Těrlicko, Žermanice.
Lake Máchovo.
Water Area Velké Žernoseky.
Ponds: Oleksovice, Svět, Velké Dářko.
Mining Gravel Lakes: Dolní Benešov, Ostrožná Nová Ves a Tovačov.
Federal Republic of Germany
|
Danube: |
from Kelheim (km 2 414,72) to the German-Austrian border |
|
Rhine: |
from the German-Swiss border to the German-Netherlands border |
|
Elbe: |
from the mouth of the Elbe-Seiten canal to the lower limit of the port of Hamburg |
|
Müritz |
|
French Republic
Rhine
Republic of Hungary
Danube: from rkm 1 812 to rkm 1 433
Danube Moson: from rkm 14 to rkm 0.
Danube Szentendre: from rkm 32 to rkm 0.
Danube Ráckeve: from rkm 58 to rkm 0.
River Tisza: from rkm 685 to rkm 160.
River Dráva: from rkm 198 to rkm 70.
River Bodrog: from rkm 51 to rkm 0.
River Kettős-Körös: from rkm 23 to rkm 0.
River Hármas-Körös: from rkm 91 to rkm 0.
Channel Sió: from rkm 23 to rkm 0.
Lake Velence.
Lake Fertő.
Kingdom of the Netherlands
Rhine.
Sneekermeer, Koevordermeer, Heegermeer, Fluessen, Slotermeer, Tjeukemeer, Beulakkerwijde, Belterwijde, Ramsdiep, Ketelmeer, Zwartemeer, Veluwemeer, Eemmeer, Alkmaardermeer, Gouwzee, Buiten IJ afgesloten IJ Noordzeekanaal, port of IJmuiden, Rotterdam port area, Nieuwe Maas, Noord, Oude Maas, Beneden Merwede, Nieuwe Merwede, Dordsche Kil, Boven Merwede, Waal, Bijlandsch Canal, Boven Rijn, Pannersdensch Canal, Geldersche IJssel, Neder Rijn, Lek, Amsterdam-Rhine-Canal, Veerse Meer, Schelde-Rhine-Canal as far as the mouth in the Volkerak, Amer, Bergsche Maas, the Meuse below Venlo, Gooimeer, Europort, Calandkanaal (east from the Benelux harbour), Hartelkanaal.
Republic of Austria
Danube: from the border with Germany to the border with Slovakia.
Inn: from the mouth to the Passau-Ingling Power Station.
Traun: from the mouth to km 1,80.
Enns: from the mouth to km 2,70.
March: to km 6,00.
Republic of Poland
River Biebrza from the estuary of the Augustowski Channel to the estuary of the river Narwia
River Brda from the link with the Bydgoski Channel in Bydgoszcz to the estuary of the river Wisła
River Bug from the estuary of the river Muchawiec to the estuary of the river Narwia
Lake Dąbie to the frontier with internal sea waters
The Augustowski Channel from the link with the river Biebrza to the state border, together with the lakes located along the route of this Channel
The Bartnicki Channel from Lake Ruda Woda to Lake Bartężek, together with Lake Bartężek
The Bydgoski Channel
The Elbląski Channel from Lake Druzno to Lake Jeziorak and Lake Szeląg Wielki, together with these lakes and the lakes on the route of the Channel, and a by-way in the direction of Zalewo from Lake Jeziorak to Lake Ewingi, inclusive
The Gliwicki Channel together with the Channel Kędzierzyński
The Jagielloński Channel from the link with the river Elbląg to the river Nogat
The Łączański Channel
The Ślesiński Channel with the lakes located along the route of this Channel and Lake Gopło
The Żerański Channel
River Martwa Wisła from the river Wisła in Przegalina to the frontier with internal sea waters
River Narew from the estuary of the river Biebrza to the estuary of the river Wisła, together with Lake Zegrzyński
River Nogat from the river Wisła to the estuary of the Lagoon of Wisła
River Noteć (upper) from Lake Gopło to the link with the Górnonotecki Channel and the Górnonotecki Channel and River Noteć (lower) from the link of the Bydgoski Channel to the estuary to River Warta
River Nysa Łużycka from Gubin to the estuary to River Odra
River Odra from the town of Racibórz to the link with River Eastern Odra which turns into River Regalica from the Klucz-Ustowo Piercing, together with that river and its side-branches to Lake Dąbie as well as a by-way of River Odra from the Opatowice lock to the lock in Wrocław city
River Western Odra from a weir in Widuchowa (704,1 km of River Odra) to a border with internal sea waters, together with side-branches as well as the Klucz-Ustowo Piercing linking River Eastern Odra with River Western Odra
River Parnica and the Parnicki Piercing from River Western Odra to a border with internal sea waters
River Pisa from Lake Roś to the estuary of River Narew
River Szkarpawa from River Wisła to the estuary of the Lagoon of Wisła
River Warta from the Ślesińskie Lake to the estuary of River Odra
System of Wielkie Jeziora Mazurskie encompassing the lakes linked by the rivers and channels constituting a main route from Lake Roś (inclusive) in Pisz to the Węgorzewski Channel (including that channel) in Węgorzewo, together with Lakes Seksty, Mikołajskie, Tałty, Tałtowisko, Kotek, Szymon, Szymoneckie, Jagodne, Boczne, Tajty, Kisajno, Dargin, Łabap, Kirsajty and Święcajty, together with the Giżycki Channel and the Niegociński Channel and the Piękna Góra Channel, and a by-way of Lake Ryńskie (inclusive) in Ryn to Lake Nidzkie (up to 3 km, constituting a border with the ‘Lake Nidzkie’ nature reserve), together with lakes Bełdany, Guzianka Mała and Guzianka Wielka.
River Wisła from the estuary of River Przemsza to the link with the Łączański Channel as well as from the estuary of that Channel in Skawina to the estuary of River Wisła to the Bay of Gdańsk, excluding the Włocławski Reservoir.
Slovak Republic
Danube: from Devín (rkm 1 880,26) to the Slovak-Hungarian border.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland
|
SCOTLAND |
|
|
Leith (Edinburgh) |
Within the breakwaters |
|
Glasgow |
Strathclyde Loch |
|
Crinan Canal |
Crinan to Ardrishaig |
|
Caledonian Canal |
The canal sections |
|
NORTHERN IRELAND |
|
|
River Lagan |
Lagan Weir to Stranmillis |
|
EAST OF ENGLAND |
|
|
River Wear (non-tidal) |
Old Railway Bridge, Durham to Prebends Bridge, Durham |
|
River Tees |
Upriver from Tees Barrage |
|
Grimsby Dock |
Inside of the locks |
|
Immingham Dock |
Inside of the locks |
|
Hull Docks |
Inside of the locks |
|
Boston Dock |
Inside the lock gates |
|
Aire and Calder Navigation |
Goole Docks to Leeds; junction with Leeds and Liverpool Canal; Bank Dole Junction to Selby (River Ouse Lock); Castleford Junction to Wakefield (Falling Lock) |
|
River Ancholme |
Ferriby Sluice to Brigg |
|
Calder and Hebble Canal |
Wakefield (Falling Lock) to Broadcut Top Lock |
|
River Foss |
From (Blue Bridge) junction with River Ouse to Monk Bridge |
|
Fossdyke Canal |
Junction with River Trent to Brayford Pool |
|
Goole Dock |
Inside the lock gates |
|
Hornsea Mere |
The whole canal |
|
River Hull |
From Struncheon Hill Lock to Beverley Beck |
|
Market Weighton Canal |
River Humber Lock to Sod Houses Lock |
|
New Junction Canal |
The whole canal |
|
River Ouse |
From Naburn Lock to Nun Monkton |
|
Sheffield and South Yorkshire Canal |
Keadby Lock to Tinsley Lock |
|
River Trent |
Cromwell Lock to Shardlow |
|
River Witham |
Boston Sluice to Brayford Poole (Lincoln) |
|
WALES AND WEST OF ENGLAND |
|
|
River Severn |
Above Llanthony and Maisemore Weirs |
|
River Wye |
Above Monmouth |
|
Cardiff |
Roath Park Lake |
|
Port Talbot |
Within the enclosed docks |
|
Swansea |
Within the enclosed docks |
|
River Dee |
Above Barrelwell Hill water extraction point |
|
River Mersey |
The docks (excluding Seaforth Dock) |
|
River Lune |
Above Glasson Dock |
|
River Avon (Midland) |
Tewkesbury Lock to Evesham |
|
Gloucester |
Gloucester City Docks Gloucester/Sharpness Canal |
|
Hollingworth Lake |
The whole lake |
|
Manchester Ship Canal |
The whole canal and Salford Docks including River Irwell |
|
Pickmere Lake |
The whole lake |
|
River Tawe |
Between Sea Barrage/Marina and the Morfa Athletics Stadium |
|
Rudyard Lake |
The whole lake |
|
River Weaver |
Below Northwich |
|
SOUTH OF ENGLAND |
|
|
River Nene |
Wisbech Cut and River Nene to Dog-in-a-Doublet Lock |
|
River Great Ouse |
Kings Lynn Cut and River Great Ouse below West Lynn Road Bridge |
|
Yarmouth |
River Yare Estuary from a line drawn across the ends of the north and south entrance piers, including Breydon Water |
|
Lowestoft |
Lowestoft Harbour below Mutford Lock to a line drawn across the outer harbour entrance piers |
|
Rivers Alde and Ore |
Above the entrance to the River Ore to Westrow Point |
|
River Deben |
Above the entrance of the River Deben to Felixstowe Ferry |
|
River Orwell and River Stour |
From a line drawn from Fagbury Point to Shotley Point on the River Orwell to Ipswich Dock; and from a line drawn north/south through Erwarton Ness on the River Stour to Manningtree |
|
Chelmer & Blackwater Canal |
Eastward of Beeleigh Lock |
|
River Thames and its tributaries |
River Thames above Teddington Lock to Oxford |
|
River Adur and Southwick Canal |
River Adur above the west end of Tarmac Wharf, and within Southwick Canal |
|
River Arun |
River Arun above Littlehampton Marina |
|
River Ouse (Sussex), Newhaven |
River Ouse above the north end of North Quay |
|
Bewl Water |
The whole lake |
|
Grafham Water |
The whole lake |
|
Rutland Water |
The whole lake |
|
Thorpe Park Lake |
The whole lake |
|
Chichester |
East of a line joining Cobnor Point and Chalkdock Point |
|
Christchurch |
Within Christchurch Harbour excluding the Run |
|
Exeter Canal |
The whole canal |
|
River Avon (Avon) |
Bristol City Docks Netham Dam to Pulteney Weir |
CHAPTER 3
Zone 4
Kingdom of Belgium
The entire Belgian network except the waterways in Zone 3.
Czech Republic
All other waterways not listed in Zones 1, 2 and 3.
Federal Republic of Germany
All inland waterways other than those in Zones 1, 2 and 3
French Republic
The entire French network except the waterways in Zones 1, 2 and 3.
Italian Republic
River Po: from Piacenza to the mouth.
Milan-Cremona Canal, River Po: final stretch of 15 km to the Po.
River Mincio: from Mantua, Governolo to the Po.
Ferrara Waterway: from the Po (Pontelagoscuro), Ferrara to Porto Garibaldi.
Brondolo and Valle Canals: from the eastern Po to the Venice lagoon.
Fissero Canal — Tartaro — Canalbianco: from Adria to the eastern Po.
Venetian coastline: from the Venice lagoon to Grado.
Republic of Lithuania
The entire Lithuanian network.
Grand Duchy of Luxembourg
Moselle.
Republic of Hungary
All other waterways not listed in Zones 2 and 3.
Kingdom of the Netherlands
All other rivers, canals and inland seas not listed in Zones 1, 2 and 3.
Republic of Austria
Thaya: up to Bernhardsthal.
March: above km 6,00.
Republic of Poland
All other waterways not listed in Zones 1, 2 and 3.
Slovak Republic
All other waterways not listed in Zone 3.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland
|
SCOTLAND |
|
|
Ratho and Linlithgow Union Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Glasgow |
Forth and Clyde Canal Monkland Canal, Faskine and Drumpellier sections Hogganfield Loch |
|
EAST OF ENGLAND |
|
|
River Ancholme |
Brigg to Harram Hill Lock |
|
Calder and Hebble Canal |
Broadcut Top Lock to Sowerby Bridge |
|
Chesterfield Canal |
West Stockwith to Worksop |
|
Cromford Canal |
The whole canal |
|
River Derwent |
From junction with River Ouse to Stamford Bridge |
|
Driffield Navigation |
From Struncheon Hill Lock to Great Driffield |
|
Erewash Canal |
Trent Lock to Langley Mill Lock |
|
Huddersfield Canal |
Junction with Calder and Hebble at Coopers Bridge to Huddersfield Narrow Canal at Huddersfield Between Ashton-Under-Lyne and Huddersfield |
|
Leeds and Liverpool Canal |
From Leeds River Lock to Skipton Wharf |
|
Light Water Valley Lake |
The whole lake |
|
The Mere, Scarborough |
The whole lake |
|
River Ouse |
Above Nun Monkton Pool |
|
Pocklington Canal |
From the junction with River Derwent to Melbourne Basin |
|
Sheffield and South Yorkshire Canal |
Tinsley Lock to Sheffield |
|
River Soar |
Trent Junction to Loughborough |
|
Trent and Mersey Canal |
Shardlow to Dellow Lane Lock |
|
River Ure and Ripon Canal |
From Junction with River Ouse to Ripon Canal (Ripon Basin) |
|
Ashton Canal |
The whole canal |
|
WALES AND WEST OF ENGLAND |
|
|
River Avon (Midland) |
Above Evesham |
|
Birmingham Canal Navigation |
The whole canal |
|
Birmingham and Fazeley Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Coventry Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Grand Union Canal (from Napton Junction to Birmingham and Fazeley) |
The whole section of the canal |
|
Kennet and Avon Canal (Bath to Newbury) |
The whole section of the canal |
|
Lancaster Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Leeds and Liverpool Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Llangollen Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Caldon Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Peak Forest Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Macclesfield Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Monmouthshire and Brecon Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Montgomery Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Rochdale Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Swansea Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Neath & Tennant Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Shropshire Union Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Staffordshire and Worcester Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Stratford-upon-Avon Canal |
The whole canal |
|
River Trent |
The whole river |
|
Trent and Mersey Canal |
The whole canal |
|
River Weaver |
Above Northwich |
|
Worcester and Birmingham Canal |
The whole canal |
|
SOUTH OF ENGLAND |
|
|
River Nene |
Above Dog-in-a-Doublet Lock |
|
River Great Ouse |
Kings Lynn above West Lynn Road Bridge; River Great Ouse and all connected Fenland Waterways including the River Cam and Middle Level Navigation |
|
The Norfolk and Suffolk Broads |
All navigable tidal and non-tidal rivers, broads, canals and waterways within the Norfolk and Suffolk Broads including Oulton Broad, and Rivers Waveney, Yare, Bure, Ant and Thurne except as specified for Yarmouth and Lowestoft |
|
River Blyth |
River Blyth, entrance to Blythburgh |
|
Rivers Alde and Ore |
On the River Alde above Westrow Point |
|
River Deben |
River Deben above Felixstowe Ferry |
|
River Orwell and River Stour |
All waterways on the River Stour above Manningtree |
|
Chelmer & Blackwater Canal |
Westward of Beeleigh Lock |
|
River Thames and its tributaries |
River Stort and River Lee above Bow Creek; Grand Union Canal above Brentford Lock and Regents Canal above Limehouse Basin and all canals connected therewith; River Wey above Thames Lock; Kennet and Avon Canal; River Thames above Oxford; Oxford Canal |
|
River Medway and the Swale |
River Medway above Allington Lock |
|
River Stour (Kent) |
River Stour above the landing at Flagstaff Reach |
|
Dover Harbour |
The whole harbour |
|
River Rother |
River Rother and the Royal Military Canal above Scots Float Sluice and River Brede above the entrance lock |
|
Brighton |
Brighton Marina inner harbour above the lock |
|
Wickstead Park Lake |
The whole lake |
|
Kennet and Avon Canal |
The whole canal |
|
Grand Union Canal |
The whole canal |
|
River Avon (Avon) |
Above Pulteney Weir |
|
Bridgewater Canal |
The whole canal |
(1) In the case of vessels whose home port is elsewhere, account is to be taken of Article 32 of the Ems-Dollart Treaty of 8 April 1960 (BGBl. 1963 II p. 602).
(2) In the case of vessels whose home port is in another State, account is to be taken of Article 32 of the Ems-Dollart Treaty of 8 April 1960 (BGBl. 1963 II, p. 602).
ANNEX II
MINIMUM TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VESSELS ON INLAND WATERWAYS OF ZONES 1, 2, 3 AND 4
CONTENTS
PART I
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
|
Article 1.01 |
Definitions |
|
Article 1.02 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 1.03 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 1.04 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 1.05 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 1.06 |
Temporary requirements |
|
Article 1.07 |
Administrative instructions |
CHAPTER 2
PROCEDURE
|
Article 2.01 |
Inspection bodies |
|
Article 2.02 |
Request for an inspection |
|
Article 2.03 |
Presentation of the craft for inspection |
|
Article 2.04 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 2.05 |
Provisional Community certificate |
|
Article 2.06 |
Validity of the Community certificate |
|
Article 2.07 |
Particulars in and amendments to the Community certificate |
|
Article 2.08 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 2.09 |
Periodical inspection |
|
Article 2.10 |
Voluntary inspection |
|
Article 2.11 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 2.12 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 2.13 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 2.14 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 2.15 |
Expenses |
|
Article 2.16 |
Information |
|
Article 2.17 |
Register of Community certificates |
|
Article 2.18 |
Official number |
|
Article 2.19 |
Equivalences and derogations |
PART II
CHAPTER 3
SHIPBUILDING REQUIREMENTS
|
Article 3.01 |
Basic requirement |
|
Article 3.02 |
Strength and stability |
|
Article 3.03 |
Hull |
|
Article 3.04 |
Engine and boiler rooms, bunkers |
CHAPTER 4
SAFETY CLEARANCE, FREEBOARD AND DRAUGHT MARKS
|
Article 4.01 |
Safety clearance |
|
Article 4.02 |
Freeboard |
|
Article 4.03 |
Minimum freeboard |
|
Article 4.04 |
Draught marks |
|
Article 4.05 |
Maximum loaded draught of vessels whose holds are not always closed so as to be spray-proof and weathertight |
|
Article 4.06 |
Draught scales |
CHAPTER 5
MANOEUVRABILITY
|
Article 5.01 |
General |
|
Article 5.02 |
Navigation tests |
|
Article 5.03 |
Test area |
|
Article 5.04 |
Degree of loading of vessels and convoys during navigation tests |
|
Article 5.05 |
Use of on-board facilities for navigation test |
|
Article 5.06 |
Prescribed (forward) speed |
|
Article 5.07 |
Stopping capacity |
|
Article 5.08 |
Capacity for going astern |
|
Article 5.09 |
Capacity for taking evasive action |
|
Article 5.10 |
Turning capacity |
CHAPTER 6
STEERING SYSTEM
|
Article 6.01 |
General requirements |
|
Article 6.02 |
Steering apparatus drive unit |
|
Article 6.03 |
Hydraulic steering apparatus drive unit |
|
Article 6.04 |
Power source |
|
Article 6.05 |
Manual drive |
|
Article 6.06 |
Rudder-propeller, water-jet, cycloidal-propeller and bow-thruster systems |
|
Article 6.07 |
Indicators and monitoring devices |
|
Article 6.08 |
Rate-of-turn regulators |
|
Article 6.09 |
Acceptance procedure |
CHAPTER 7
WHEELHOUSE
|
Article 7.01 |
General |
|
Article 7.02 |
Unobstructed view |
|
Article 7.03 |
General requirements concerning control, indicating and monitoring equipment |
|
Article 7.04 |
Specific requirements concerning control, indicating and monitoring equipment of main engines and steering system |
|
Article 7.05 |
Navigation lights, light signals and sound signals |
|
Article 7.06 |
Radar installations and rate-of-turn indicators |
|
Article 7.07 |
Radio telephony systems for vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person |
|
Article 7.08 |
Internal communication facilities on board |
|
Article 7.09 |
Alarm system |
|
Article 7.10 |
Heating and ventilation |
|
Article 7.11 |
Stern-anchor operating equipment |
|
Article 7.12 |
Retractable wheelhouses |
|
Article 7.13 |
Entry in the Community certificate for vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person |
CHAPTER 8
ENGINE DESIGN
|
Article 8.01 |
General |
|
Article 8.02 |
Safety equipment |
|
Article 8.03 |
Power plant |
|
Article 8.04 |
Engine exhaust system |
|
Article 8.05 |
Fuel tanks, pipes and accessories |
|
Article 8.06 |
Storage of lubricating oil, pipes and accessories |
|
Article 8.07 |
Storage of oils used in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems, pipes and accessories |
|
Article 8.08 |
Bilge pumping and drainage systems |
|
Article 8.09 |
Oily water and used oil stores |
|
Article 8.10 |
Noise emitted by vessels |
|
CHAPTER 8a |
(Left void) |
CHAPTER 9
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
|
Article 9.01 |
General |
|
Article 9.02 |
Electricity supply systems |
|
Article 9.03 |
Protection against physical contact, intrusion of solid objects and the ingress of water |
|
Article 9.04 |
Protection from explosion |
|
Article 9.05 |
Earthing |
|
Article 9.06 |
Maximum permissible voltages |
|
Article 9.07 |
Distribution systems |
|
Article 9.08 |
Connection to shore or other external networks |
|
Article 9.09 |
Power supply to other craft |
|
Article 9.10 |
Generators and motors |
|
Article 9.11 |
Accumulators |
|
Article 9.12 |
Switchgear installations |
|
Article 9.13 |
Emergency circuit breakers |
|
Article 9.14 |
Installation fittings |
|
Article 9.15 |
Cables |
|
Article 9.16 |
Lighting installations |
|
Article 9.17 |
Navigation lights |
|
Article 9.18 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 9.19 |
Alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment |
|
Article 9.20 |
Electronic equipment |
|
Article 9.21 |
Electromagnetic compatibility |
CHAPTER 10
EQUIPMENT
|
Article 10.01 |
Anchor equipment |
|
Article 10.02 |
Other equipment |
|
Article10.03 |
Portable fire extinguishers |
|
Article 10.03a |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces |
|
Article 10.03b |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms |
|
Article 10.04 |
Ship's boats |
|
Article 10.05 |
Lifebuoys and lifejackets |
CHAPTER 11
SAFETY AT WORK STATIONS
|
Article 11.01 |
General |
|
Article 11.02 |
Protection against falling |
|
Article 11.03 |
Dimensions of working spaces |
|
Article 11.04 |
Side decks |
|
Article 11.05 |
Access to working spaces |
|
Article 11.06 |
Exits and emergency exits |
|
Article 11.07 |
Ladders, steps and similar devices |
|
Article 11.08 |
Interior spaces |
|
Article 11.09 |
Protection against noise and vibration |
|
Article 11.10 |
Hatch covers |
|
Article 11.11 |
Winches |
|
Article 11.12 |
Cranes |
|
Article 11.13 |
Storing flammable liquids |
CHAPTER 12
ACCOMMODATION
|
Article 12.01 |
General |
|
Article 12.02 |
Special design requirements for accommodation |
|
Article 12.03 |
Sanitary installations |
|
Article 12.04 |
Galleys |
|
Article 12.05 |
Potable water |
|
Article 12.06 |
Heating and ventilation |
|
Article 12.07 |
Other accommodation installations |
CHAPTER 13
FUEL-FIRED HEATING, COOKING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT
|
Article 13.01 |
General |
|
Article 13.02 |
Use of liquid fuels, oil-fired equipment |
|
Article 13.03 |
Vaporising oil burner stoves and atomising oil burner heating appliances |
|
Article 13.04 |
Vaporising oil burner stoves |
|
Article 13.05 |
Atomising oil burner heating appliances |
|
Article 13.06 |
Forced-air heating appliances |
|
Article 13.07 |
Solid fuel heating |
CHAPTER 14
LIQUEFIED GAS INSTALLATIONS FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES
|
Article 14.01 |
General |
|
Article 14.02 |
Installations |
|
Article 14.03 |
Receptacles |
|
Article 14.04 |
Location and arrangement of supply units |
|
Article 14.05 |
Spare and empty receptacles |
|
Article 14.06 |
Pressure regulators |
|
Article 14.07 |
Pressure |
|
Article 14.08 |
Piping and flexible tubes |
|
Article 14.09 |
Distribution system |
|
Article 14.10 |
Gas-consuming appliances and their installation |
|
Article 14.11 |
Ventilation and evacuation of combustion gases |
|
Article 14.12 |
Operating and safety requirements |
|
Article 14.13 |
Acceptance test |
|
Article 14.14 |
Tests |
|
Article 14.15 |
Attestation |
CHAPTER 15
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO PASSENGER VESSELS
|
Article 15.01 |
General provisions |
|
Article 15.02 |
Vessels' hulls |
|
Article 15.03 |
Stability |
|
Article 15.04 |
Safety clearance and freeboard |
|
Article 15.05 |
Maximum permitted number of passengers |
|
Article 15.06 |
Passenger rooms and areas |
|
Article 15.07 |
Propulsion system |
|
Article 15.08 |
Safety devices and equipment |
|
Article 15.09 |
Life-saving equipment |
|
Article 15.10 |
Electrical Equipment |
|
Article 15.11 |
Fire protection |
|
Article 15.12 |
Fire-fighting |
|
Article 15.13 |
Safety organisation |
|
Article 15.14 |
Waste water collection and disposal facilities |
|
Article 15.15 |
Derogations for certain passenger vessels |
CHAPTER 15a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PASSENGER SAILING VESSELS
|
Article 15a.01 |
Application of Part II |
|
Article 15a.02 |
Exceptions for certain passenger sailing vessels |
|
Article 15a.03 |
Stability requirements for vessels under sail |
|
Article 15a.04 |
Shipbuilding and mechanical requirements |
|
Article 15a.05 |
Rigging in general |
|
Article 15a.06 |
Masts and spars in general |
|
Article 15a.07 |
Special provisions for masts |
|
Article 15a.08 |
Special provisions for topmasts |
|
Article 15a.09 |
Special provisions for bowsprits |
|
Article 15a.10 |
Special provisions for jib-booms |
|
Article 15a.11 |
Special provisions for main booms |
|
Article 15a.12 |
Special provisions for gaffs |
|
Article 15a.13 |
General provisions for standing and running rigging |
|
Article 15a.14 |
Special provisions for standing rigging |
|
Article 15a.15 |
Special provisions for running rigging |
|
Article 15a.16 |
Fittings and parts of the rigging |
|
Article 15a.17 |
Sails |
|
Article 15a.18 |
Equipment |
|
Article 15a.19 |
Testing |
CHAPTER 16
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CRAFT INTENDED TO FORM PART OF A PUSHED OR TOWED CONVOY OR OF A SIDE-BY-SIDE FORMATION
|
Article 16.01 |
Craft suitable for pushing |
|
Article 16.02 |
Craft suitable for being pushed |
|
Article 16.03 |
Craft suitable for propelling side-by-side formations |
|
Article 16.04 |
Craft suitable for being propelled in convoys |
|
Article 16.05 |
Craft suitable for towing |
|
Article 16.06 |
Navigation tests on convoys |
|
Article 16.07 |
Entries on the Community certificate |
CHAPTER 17
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO FLOATING EQUIPMENT
|
Article 17.01 |
General |
|
Article 17.02 |
Derogations |
|
Article 17.03 |
Additional requirements |
|
Article 17.04 |
Residual safety clearance |
|
Article 17.05 |
Residual freeboard |
|
Article 17.06 |
Heeling test |
|
Article 17.07 |
Confirmation of stability |
|
Article 17.08 |
Confirmation of stability in the case of reduced residual freeboard |
|
Article 17.09 |
Draught marks and draught scales |
|
Article 17.10 |
Floating equipment without confirmation of stability |
CHAPTER 18
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO WORKSITE CRAFT
|
Article 18.01 |
Operating conditions |
|
Article 18.02 |
Application of Part II |
|
Article 18.03 |
Derogations |
|
Article 18.04 |
Safety clearance and freeboard |
|
Article 18.05 |
Ship's boats |
CHAPTER 19
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO HISTORIC VESSELS (Left void)
CHAPTER 19a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CANAL BARGES (Left void)
CHAPTER 19b
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VESSELS NAVIGATING ON ZONE 4 WATERWAYS
|
Article 19b.01 |
Application of Chapter 4 |
CHAPTER 20
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO SEA-GOING VESSELS (Left void)
CHAPTER 21
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO RECREATIONAL CRAFT
|
Article 21.01 |
General |
|
Article 21.02 |
Application of Part II |
|
Article 21.03 |
(Left void) |
CHAPTER 22
STABILITY OF VESSELS CARRYING CONTAINERS
|
Article 22.01 |
General |
|
Article 22.02 |
Limit conditions and method of calculation for confirmation of stability for the transport of non-secured containers |
|
Article 22.03 |
Limit conditions and method of calculation for confirmation of stability for the transport of secured containers |
|
Article 22.04 |
Procedure for assessing stability on board |
CHAPTER 22a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CRAFT LONGER THAN 110 M
|
Article 22a.01 |
Application of Part I |
|
Article 22a.02 |
Application of Part II |
|
Article 22a.03 |
Strength |
|
Article 22a.04 |
Buoyancy and stability |
|
Article 22a.05 |
Additional requirements |
|
Article 22a.06 |
Application of Part IV in the event of conversion |
CHAPTER 22b
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO HIGH-SPEED VESSELS
|
Article 22b.01 |
General |
|
Article 22b.02 |
Application of Part I |
|
Article 22b.03 |
Application of Part II |
|
Article 22b.04 |
Seats and safety belts |
|
Article 22b.05 |
Freeboard |
|
Article 22b.06 |
Buoyancy, stability and subdivision |
|
Article 22b.07 |
Wheelhouse |
|
Article 22b.08 |
Additional equipment |
|
Article 22b.09 |
Closed areas |
|
Article 22b.10 |
Exits and escape routes |
|
Article 22b.11 |
Fire protection and fire-fighting |
|
Article 22b.12 |
Transitional provisions |
PART III
CHAPTER 23
EQUIPMENT OF VESSELS WITH REGARD TO MANNING
|
Article 23.01 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.02 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.03 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.04 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.05 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.06 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.07 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.08 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.09 |
Vessels' equipment |
|
Article 23.10 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.11 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.12 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.13 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.14 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 23.15 |
(Left void) |
PART IV
CHAPTER 24
TRANSITIONAL AND FINAL PROVISIONS
|
Article 24.01 |
Applicability of transitional provisions to craft which are already in service |
|
Article 24.02 |
Derogations for craft which are already in service |
|
Article 24.03 |
Derogations for craft which were laid down on or before 1 April 1976 |
|
Article 24.04 |
Other derogations |
|
Article 24.05 |
(Left void) |
|
Article 24.06 |
Derogations for craft not covered by Article 24.01 |
|
Article 24.07 |
(Left void) |
CHAPTER 24a
TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS FOR CRAFT NOT NAVIGATING ON ZONE R WATERWAYS
|
Article 24a.01 |
Application of transitional provisions to craft already in service and validity of previous Community certificates |
|
Article 24a.02 |
Derogations for craft already in service |
|
Article 24a.03 |
Derogations for craft the keels of which were laid before 1 January 1985 |
|
Article 24a.04 |
Other derogations |
|
Appendix I |
SAFETY SIGNS |
|
Appendix II |
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTIONS |
PART I
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL
Article 1.01
Definitions
The following definitions shall apply in this Directive:
|
|
Types of craft
|
|
|
Assemblies of craft
|
|
|
Particular areas on board
|
|
|
Marine engineering terms
|
|
|
Steering system
|
|
|
Properties of structural components and materials
|
|
|
Other definitions
|
Article 1.02
(Left void)
Article 1.03
(Left void)
Article 1.04
(Left void)
Article 1.05
(Left void)
Article 1.06
Temporary requirements
Temporary requirements may be adopted, in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive, where it is found urgently necessary, for the purposes of adaptation to technical progress of inland waterway transport, to allow derogations from the provisions of this Directive before an expected amendment of this Directive itself or to allow tests. The requirements shall be published and shall be valid for a maximum of three years. They shall enter into force at the same time and shall be annulled under the same conditions in all Member States.
Article 1.07
Administrative instructions
In order to make the implementation of this Directive easier and uniform, binding administrative instructions for the inspection may be adopted in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive.
CHAPTER 2
PROCEDURE
Article 2.01
Inspection bodies
1. Inspection bodies shall be set up by the Member States.
2. Inspection bodies shall consist of a chairman and experts.
At least the following shall form part of each body as experts:
|
(a) |
an official from the administration that is responsible for inland navigation; |
|
(b) |
an expert on the design of inland waterway vessels and their engines; |
|
(c) |
a nautical expert in possession of a navigation certificate. |
3. The Chairman and the experts within each body shall be designated by the authorities in the State in which the body is set up. On taking up their duties, the Chairman and the experts shall submit a written declaration that they will perform them completely independently. No declaration shall be required from officials.
4. Inspection bodies may be assisted by specialist experts in accordance with the national provisions applying.
Article 2.02
Request for an inspection
1. The procedure for making a request for an inspection and establishing the place and time of that inspection fall within the powers of the authorities issuing the Community certificate. The competent authority shall determine which documents are to be submitted. The procedure shall take place in such a way as to ensure that the inspection may be conducted within a reasonable period following the lodging of the request.
2. The owner of a craft that is not subject to this Directive, or his representative, may request a Community certificate. His request shall be met if the vessel fulfils the requirements of this Directive.
Article 2.03
Presentation of the craft for inspection
1. The owner, or his representative, shall present the craft in an unladen, cleaned and equipped state. He shall provide any assistance needed for the inspection, such as providing an appropriate dinghy and staff, and uncovering any parts of the hull or fittings that are not directly accessible or visible.
2. The inspection body shall demand a dry inspection on the first occasion. That dry inspection may be dispensed with if a classification certificate or a certificate from an approved classification society to the effect that the construction meets its requirements can be produced or if a certificate is produced which shows that a competent authority has already carried out a dry inspection for other purposes. Where there is a periodical inspection or an inspection, as provided for in Article 15 of this Directive, the inspection body may require an inspection out of the water.
The inspection body shall conduct trial runs during an initial inspection of motor vessels or convoys or where major changes are made to the propulsion or steering equipment.
3. The inspection body may require further operational tests and other supporting documents. That provision shall also apply during the building of the craft.
Article 2.04
(Left void)
Article 2.05
Provisional Community certificate
1. The competent authority may issue a provisional Community certificate:
|
(a) |
to craft intended to travel to a certain place with the permission of the competent authority in order to obtain a Community certificate; |
|
(b) |
to craft whose Community certificate has been temporarily withdrawn in one of the instances referred to in Article 2.07 or in Articles 12 and 16 of this Directive; |
|
(c) |
to craft whose Community certificate is in preparation following a successful inspection; |
|
(d) |
to craft where not all of the conditions required for obtaining a Community certificate as set out in Part I of Annex V have been met; |
|
(e) |
to craft so damaged that their state no longer complies with the Community certificate; |
|
(f) |
to floating installations or equipment where the authorities responsible for special transport operations make the authorisation to carry out a special transport operation, as provided for by the applicable navigational authority regulations of the Member States, subject to obtaining such a Community certificate. |
|
(g) |
to craft deviating from the provisions of Part II, as provided for in Article 2.19, section 2. |
2. The provisional Community certificate shall be drawn up using the model set out in Part III of Annex V where the navigability of the craft, floating establishment or floating object seems to have been adequately ensured.
This shall include the conditions considered necessary by the competent authority and shall be valid:
|
(a) |
in the cases referred to in section 1(a), (d) to (f), for a single specific trip to be made within a suitable period that shall not exceed one month; |
|
(b) |
in the cases referred to in section 1(b) and (c), for an appropriate duration; |
|
(c) |
in the cases referred to in section 1(g), for six months. The provisional Community certificate may be extended for six months at a time until the Committee has taken a decision. |
Article 2.06
Validity of the Community certificate
1. The validity period of Community certificates issued to newly built vessels in accordance with the provisions of this Directive shall be determined by the competent authority up to a maximum of:
|
(a) |
five years in the case of passenger vessels; |
|
(b) |
ten years in the case of all other craft. |
The period of validity shall be entered on the Community certificate.
2. In the case of vessels already in operation before the inspection, the competent authority shall set the period of validity of the Community certificate case by case, in the light of the results of the inspection. However, the validity may not exceed the periods specified in section 1.
Article 2.07
Particulars in and amendments to the Community certificate
1. The owner of a craft, or his representative, shall bring to the notice of the competent authority any change in the name or ownership of a craft, any remeasurement, and any change in the official number, registration or home port, and shall send the Community certificate to that authority for amendment.
2. Any competent authority may add any information or change to the Community certificate.
3. Where a competent authority adds any alteration or information to a Community certificate it shall inform the competent authority which issued the Community certificate thereof.
Article 2.08
(Left void)
Article 2.09
Periodical inspection
1. Craft shall be subjected to a periodical inspection before expiry of their Community certificate.
2. Following a justified request by the owner or his representative, the competent authority may, by way of an exception, and without any further inspections, grant an extension of the validity of the Community certificate for not more than six months. That extension shall be granted in writing and shall be kept on board the craft.
3. The competent authority shall again lay down the period of validity of the Community certificate in accordance with the results of that inspection.
The period of validity shall be entered on the Community certificate and brought to the attention of the authority having issued that Community certificate.
4. If, rather than have its period of validity extended, a Community certificate is replaced by a new version, the earlier Community certificate shall be returned to the competent authority which issued it.
Article 2.10
Voluntary inspection
The owner of a craft, or his representative, may voluntarily request an inspection at any time.
That request for an inspection shall be acted upon.
Article 2.11
(Left void)
Article 2.12
(Left void)
Article 2.13
(Left void)
Article 2.14
(Left void)
Article 2.15
Expenses
The owner of a craft, or his representative, shall bear all of the costs arising from the inspection of the vessel and the issue of the Community certificate in accordance with a special set of charges drawn up by each of the Member States.
Article 2.16
Information
The competent authority may allow persons demonstrating a well-founded interest to be informed of the contents of a Community certificate and may issue those persons with extracts or copies of the Community certificates certified as true and designated as such.
Article 2.17
Register of Community certificates
1. Competent authorities shall assign an order number to the Community certificates they issue. They shall keep a register in accordance with the model set out in Annex VI of all the Community certificates they issue.
2. Competent authorities shall keep the original, or a copy of all the Community certificates they have issued, and shall enter on these any information and alterations, together with any Community certificate cancellations and replacements.
Article 2.18
Official number
1. The competent authority having issued a Community certificate shall enter on that Community certificate the official number assigned to that craft by the competent authority of the Member State in which the craft has been registered or has its home port.
As far as craft from non-Member States are concerned the official number to be entered on the Community certificate shall be assigned by the competent authority issuing that Community certificate.
These requirements shall not apply to recreational craft.
2. (Left void)
3. (Left void)
4. The owner of a craft, or his representative, shall apply to the competent authorities for assignment of the official number. The owner or his representative shall also be responsible for affixing the official number entered in the Community certificate and removing it as soon as it is no longer valid.
Article 2.19
Equivalences and derogations
1. Where the provisions of Part II require the use, or presence, on board a craft of certain materials, installations or items of equipment, or the adoption of certain design aspects or certain arrangements, the competent authority may permit the use, or presence, on board the said craft of other materials, installations or items of equipment, or the adoption of other design features or other arrangements where, in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive, these are recognised to be equivalent.
2. If, in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive, the Committee reaches no decision on equivalence, as provided for in section 1, the competent authority may issue a provisional Community certificate.
In accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive, the competent authorities shall report to the Committee within one month of issue of the provisional Community certificate in accordance with Article 2.05, section 1(g), indicating the name and official number of the craft, the nature of the derogation and the State in which the craft is registered or has its home port.
3. In accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive, the competent authority may, on the basis of a recommendation by the Committee, issue a Community certificate for trial purposes and for a limited period to a specific craft incorporating new technical specifications that derogate from the requirements of Part II, provided those specifications offer equivalent safety.
4. The equivalences and derogations referred to in sections 1 and 3 shall be entered in the Community certificate. The Commission shall be informed thereof.
PART II
CHAPTER 3
SHIPBUILDING REQUIREMENTS
Article 3.01
Basic requirement
Vessels shall be built in accordance with good shipbuilding practice.
Article 3.02
Strength and stability
1. The hull shall be sufficiently strong to withstand all of the stresses to which it is normally subjected.
|
(a) |
In the case of newly built vessels or major conversions affecting vessel strength, adequate strength shall be demonstrated by presenting design calculation proof. That proof is not required where a classification certificate or a declaration from an approved classification society is submitted. |
|
(b) |
Where there is an inspection as referred to in Article 2.09 the minimum thicknesses of the bottom, bilge and side plates shall be checked in accordance with the following conditions: For vessels made from steel minimum thickness tmin is given by the highest of the values resulting from the following formulae:
|
|
(c) |
In longitudinally framed vessels with double bottom and wing voids, the minimum value calculated for the plate thickness in accordance with the formulae in paragraph (b) may be reduced to a calculated value certified by an approved classification society for sufficient hull strength (longitudinal, lateral and local strength). Plates shall be renewed if bottom, bilge or side plates are below the permissible value laid down in this way. |
The minimum values calculated in accordance with the method are limit values taking account of normal, uniform wear, and provided that shipbuilding steel is used and that the internal structural components such as frames, frame floor, main longitudinal and transverse structural members are in a good state and that the hull shows no indication of any overloading of the longitudinal strength.
As soon as these values are no longer achieved, the plates in question shall be repaired or replaced. However, lesser thicknesses, of not more than 10 % reduction from calculated values, are acceptable locally for small areas.
2. Where a material other than steel is used for the construction of the hull, it shall be proved by calculation that the hull strength (longitudinal, lateral and local strength) equals at least the strength that would result from the use of steel under the assumption of minimum thickness in accordance with section 1. If a certificate of class or a declaration issued by a recognised classification society is presented, a proof by calculation may be dispensed with.
3. The stability of vessels shall correspond to their intended use.
Article 3.03
Hull
1. Bulkheads rising up to the deck or, where there is no deck, up to the gunwale, shall be installed at the following points:
|
(a) |
A collision bulkhead at a suitable distance from the bow in such a way that the buoyancy of the laden vessel is ensured, with a residual safety clearance of 100 mm if water enters the watertight compartment ahead of the collision bulkhead. As a general rule, the requirement referred to in paragraph 1 shall be considered to have been met if the collision bulkhead has been installed at a distance of between 0,04 L and 0,04 L + 2 m measured from the forward perpendicular in the plane of maximum draught. If this distance exceeds 0,04 L + 2 m, the requirement set out in paragraph 1 shall be proved by calculation. The distance may be reduced to 0,03 L. In that case the requirement referred to in paragraph 1 shall be proved by calculation on the assumption that the compartment ahead of the collision bulkhead and those adjacent have all been filled with water. |
|
(b) |
An aft-peak bulkhead at a suitable distance from the stern where the vessel length L exceeds 25 m. |
2. No accommodation or installations needed for vessel safety or operation may be located ahead of the plane of the collision bulkhead. This requirement shall not apply to anchor gear.
3. The accommodation, engine rooms and boiler rooms, and the workspaces forming part of these shall be separated from the holds by watertight transverse bulkheads that extend up to the deck.
4. The accommodation shall be separated from engine rooms, boiler rooms and holds in a gastight manner and shall be directly accessible from the deck. If no such access has been provided an emergency exit shall also lead directly to the deck.
5. The bulkheads specified in sections 1 and 3 and the separation of areas specified in section 4 shall not contain any openings.
However, doors in the aft-peak bulkhead and penetrations, in particular for shafts and pipework, shall be permitted where they are so designed that the effectiveness of those bulkheads and of the separation of areas is not impaired. Doors in the aft-peak bulkhead shall be permitted only if it can be determined by remote monitoring in the wheelhouse whether they are open or closed and shall bear the following readily legible instruction on both sides:
‘Door to be closed immediately after use’.
6. The water inlets and discharges, and the pipework connected to these, shall be such that no unintentional ingress of water into the vessel is possible.
7. The foresections of vessels shall be built in such a way that the anchors neither wholly nor partly protrude beyond the side plating.
Article 3.04
Engine and boiler rooms, bunkers
1. Engine or boiler rooms shall be arranged in such a way that the equipment therein can be operated, serviced and maintained easily and safely.
2. The liquid-fuel or lubricant bunkers and passenger areas and accommodation may not have any common surfaces which are under the static pressure of the liquid when in normal service.
3. Engine room, boiler room and bunker bulk heads, ceilings and doors shall be made of steel or another equivalent non-combustible material.
Insulation material used in engine rooms shall be protected against the intrusion of fuel and fuel vapours.
All openings in walls, ceilings, and doors of engine rooms, boiler rooms, and bunker rooms shall be such that they can be closed from outside the room. The locking devices shall be made from steel or an equivalently non-combustible material.
4. Engine and boiler rooms and other premises in which flammable or toxic gases are likely to escape shall be capable of being adequately ventilated.
5. Companionways and ladders providing access to engine and boiler rooms and bunkers shall be firmly attached and be made of steel or another shock-resistant and non-combustible material.
6. Engine and boiler rooms shall have two exits of which one may be an emergency exit.
The second exit may be dispensed with if:
|
(a) |
the total floor area (average length × average width at the level of the floor plating) of the engine or boiler room does not exceed 35 m2 and |
|
(b) |
the path between each point where servicing or maintenance operations are to be carried out and the exit, or foot of the companionway near the exit providing access to the outside, is not longer than 5 m and |
|
(c) |
a fire extinguisher is located at the servicing point that is furthest removed from the exit door and also, by way of derogation from Article 10.03, section 1(e), where the installed power of the engines does not exceed 100 kW. |
7. The maximum permissible sound pressure level in the engine rooms shall be 110 dB(A). The measuring points shall be selected as a function of the maintenance work needed during normal operation of the plant located therein.
CHAPTER 4
SAFETY CLEARANCE, FREEBOARD AND DRAUGHT MARKS
Article 4.01
Safety clearance
1. The safety clearance shall be at least 300 mm.
2. The safety clearance in the case of vessels whose openings cannot be closed by spray-proof and weathertight devices, and for vessels sailing with their holds uncovered, shall be increased in such a way that each of those openings shall be at least 500 mm from the plane of maximum draught.
Article 4.02
Freeboard
1. The freeboard of vessels with a continuous deck, without sheer and superstructures, shall be 150 mm.
2. The freeboard of vessels with sheer and superstructures shall be calculated using the following formula:
where:
|
α |
is a correction coefficient that takes account of all of the superstructures involved; |
|
βv |
is a coefficient for correcting the effect of the forward sheer resulting from the presence of superstructures in the forward quarter of length L of the vessel; |
|
βa |
is a coefficient correcting the effect of the aft sheer resulting from the presence of superstructures in the aft quarter of length L of the vessel; |
|
Sev |
is the effective forward sheer in mm; |
|
Sea |
is the effective aft sheer in mm. |
3. The coefficient α is calculated using the following formula:
where:
|
lem |
is the effective length, in m, of a superstructure located in the median part corresponding to half of length L of the vessel; |
|
lev |
is the effective length, in m, of a superstructure in the forward quarter of vessel length L; |
|
lea |
is the effective length, in m, of a superstructure in the aft quarter of vessel length L. |
The effective length of a superstructure is calculated using the following formulae:
where:
|
l |
is the effective length, in m, of the superstructure involved; |
|
b |
is the width, in m, of the superstructure involved; |
|
B1 |
is the width of the vessel, in m, measured on the outside of the vertical sideplates at deck level halfway along the superstructure involved; |
|
h |
is the height, in m, of the superstructure involved. However, in the case of hatches, h is obtained by reducing the height of the coamings by half of the safety distance according to Article 4.01, sections 1 and 2. In no case will a value exceeding 0,36 m be taken for h. |
4. Coefficients βv and βa are calculated using the following formulae:
5. The effective aft/forward sheers Sev/Sea are calculated using the following formulae:
|
|
Sev = Sv · p |
|
|
Sea = Sa · p |
where:
|
Sv |
is the actual forward sheer, in mm; however Sv shall not be taken to be more than 1 000 mm; |
|
Sa |
is the actual aft sheer, in mm; however Sa may not be taken to be more than 500 mm; |
|
p |
is a coefficient calculated using the following formula: 
|
|
x |
is the abscissa, measured from the extremity of the point where the sheer is 0,25 Sv or 0,25 Sa (see figure).
|
However, coefficient p will not be taken to be more than 1.
6. If βa · Sea is greater than βv · Sev, the value of βv · Sev will be taken as being the value for βa · Sea.
Article 4.03
Minimum freeboard
In view of the reductions referred to in Article 4.02 the minimum freeboard shall be not less than 0 mm.
Article 4.04
Draught marks
1. The plane of maximum draught shall be determined in such a way that the specifications concerning minimum freeboard and minimum safety clearance are both met. However, for safety reasons, the inspection body may lay down a greater value for the safety clearance or freeboard. The plane of maximum draught shall be determined at least for Zone 3.
2. The plane of maximum draught shall be indicated by means of highly visible, indelible draught marks.
3. The draught marks for Zone 3 shall consist of a rectangle 300 mm long and 40 mm deep, the base of which is horizontal and coincides with the plane of the maximum authorised draught. Any differing draught marks shall include such a rectangle.
4. Vessels shall have at least three pairs of draught marks, of which one pair shall be centrally located and the two others located, respectively, at a distance from the bow and stern that is equal to roughly one-sixth of the length.
However,
|
(a) |
where a vessel is less than 40 m in length it will suffice to affix two pairs of marks at a distance from the bow and stern, respectively, that is equal to a quarter of the length; |
|
(b) |
where vessels are not intended for the carriage of goods, a pair of marks located roughly half way along the vessel will suffice. |
5. Marks or indications which cease to be valid following a further inspection shall be deleted or marked as being no longer valid under the supervision of the inspection body. If a draught mark should disappear, it may only be replaced under the supervision of an inspection body.
6. Where a vessel has been measured in implementation of the 1966 Convention on the Measurement of Inland Navigation Vessels and the plane of the measurement marks meets the requirements of this Directive, those measurement marks shall take the place of the draught marks; this shall be mentioned in the Community certificate.
7. For vessels operating on zones of inland waterways other than Zone 3 (Zones 1, 2 or 4) the bow and stern pairs of draught marks provided for in section 4 shall be supplemented by adding a vertical line to which one or, in the case of several zones, several additional draught lines 150 mm long shall be affixed towards the bow, in relation to the draught mark for Zone 3.
This vertical line and the horizontal line shall be 30 mm thick. In addition to the draught mark towards the bow of the vessel, the relevant zone numbers shall be indicated in lettering 60 mm high × 40 mm deep (see Figure 1).
Figure 1
Article 4.05
Maximum loaded draught of vessels whose holds are not always closed so as to be spray-proof and weathertight
If the plane of maximum draught for Zone 3 of a vessel is determined by assuming that the holds may be closed in such a way as to make them spray-proof and weathertight, and if the distance between the plane of maximum draught and the upper edge of the coamings is less than 500 mm, the maximum draught for sailing with uncovered holds shall be determined.
The following statement shall be entered on the Community certificate:
‘Where the hold hatches are totally or partly uncovered the vessel may only be loaded up to … mm below the draught marks for Zone 3.’
Article 4.06
Draught scales
1. Vessels whose draught may exceed 1 m shall bear a draught scale on each of their sides towards the stern; they may bear additional draught scales.
2. The zero points on each draught scale shall be taken vertically to this within the plane running parallel to the plane of maximum draught passing through the lowest point of the hull or of the keel where such exists. The vertical distance above the zero point shall be graduated in decimetres. That graduation shall be located on each scale, from the unladen water line up to 100 mm above the maximum draught by means of punched or chiselled marks, and shall be painted in the form of a highly-visible band in two alternating colours. That graduation shall be identified by figures at a distance of every five decimetres marked next to the scale as well as at the top of the scale.
3. The two stern measurement scales affixed pursuant to the Convention referred to in Article 4.04, section 6, may replace the draught scales, provided that they include a graduation that meets the requirements plus, where appropriate, figures indicating the draught.
CHAPTER 5
MANOEUVRABILITY
Article 5.01
General
Vessels and convoys shall display adequate navigability and manoeuvrability.
Unpowered vessels intended to be towed shall meet the specific requirements laid down by the inspection body.
Powered vessels and convoys shall meet the requirements set out in Articles 5.02 to 5.10.
Article 5.02
Navigation tests
1. Navigability and manoeuvrability shall be checked by means of navigation tests. Compliance with the requirements of Articles 5.06 to 5.10 shall, in particular, be examined.
2. The inspection body may dispense with all or part of the tests where compliance with the navigability and manoeuvrability requirements is proven in another manner.
Article 5.03
Test area
1. The navigation tests referred to in Article 5.02 shall be carried out on areas of inland waterways that have been designated by the competent authorities.
2. Those test areas shall be situated on a stretch of flowing or standing water that is if possible straight, at least 2 km long and sufficiently wide and is equipped with highly-distinctive marks for determining the position of the vessel.
3. It shall be possible for the inspection body to plot the hydrological data such as depth of water, width of navigable channel and average speed of the current in the navigation area as a function of the various water levels.
Article 5.04
Degree of loading of vessels and convoys during navigation tests
During navigation tests, vessels and convoys intended to carry goods shall be loaded to at least 70 % of their tonnage and loading, distributed in such a way as to ensure a horizontal attitude as far as possible. If the tests are carried out with a lesser load the approval for downstream navigation shall be restricted to that loading.
Article 5.05
Use of on-board facilities for navigation test
1. During the navigation test, all of the equipment referred to in items 34 and 52 of the Community certificate which may be actuated from the wheelhouse may be used, apart from anchors.
2. However, during the test involving turning into the current referred to in Article 5.10, bow anchors may be used.
Article 5.06
Prescribed (forward) speed
1. Vessels and convoys shall achieve a speed in relation to the water of at least 13 km/h. That condition is not mandatory where pusher tugs are operating solo.
2. The inspection body may grant exemptions to vessels and convoys operating solely in estuaries and ports.
3. The inspection body shall check if the unladen vessel is capable of exceeding a speed of 40 km/h in relation to water. If this can be confirmed, the following entry shall be made in item 52 of the Community certificate:
‘The vessel is capable of exceeding a speed of 40 km/h in relation to water.’
Article 5.07
Stopping capacity
1. Vessels and convoys shall be able to stop facing downstream in good time while remaining adequately manoeuvrable.
2. Where vessels and convoys are not longer than 86 m and not wider than 22,90 m the stopping capacity mentioned above may be replaced by turning capacity.
3. The stopping capacity shall be proved by means of stopping manoeuvres carried out within a test area as referred to in Article 5.03 and the turning capacity by turning manoeuvres in accordance with Article 5.10.
Article 5.08
Capacity for going astern
Where the stopping manoeuvre required by Article 5.07 is carried out in standing water it shall be followed by a navigation test while going astern.
Article 5.09
Capacity for taking evasive action
Vessels and convoys shall be able to take evasive action in good time. That capacity shall be proven by means of evasive manoeuvres carried out within a test area as referred to in Article 5.03.
Article 5.10
Turning capacity
Vessels and convoys not exceeding 86 m in length or 22,90 m in breadth shall be able to turn in good time.
That turning capacity may be replaced by the stopping capacity referred to in Article 5.07.
The turning capacity shall be proven by means of turning manoeuvres against the current.
CHAPTER 6
STEERING SYSTEM
Article 6.01
General requirements
1. Vessels shall be fitted with a reliable steering system which provides at least the manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5.
2. Powered steering systems shall be designed in such a way that the rudder cannot change position unintentionally.
3. The steering system as a whole shall be designed for permanent lists of up to 15° and ambient temperatures from – 20 °C to + 50 °C.
4. The component parts of the steering system shall be rugged enough to always be able to withstand the stresses to which they may be subjected during normal operation. No external forces applied to the rudder shall impair the operating capacity of the steering apparatus and its drive unit.
5. The steering system shall incorporate a powered drive unit if so required by the forces needed to actuate the rudder.
6. A steering apparatus with powered drive unit shall be protected against overloads by means of a system that restricts the torque applied by the drive unit.
7. The penetrations for the rudder stocks shall be so designed as to prevent the spread of water-polluting lubricants.
Article 6.02
Steering apparatus drive unit
1. If the steering apparatus has a powered drive unit, it shall be possible to bring a second independent drive unit, or manual drive, into use within five seconds if the steering apparatus drive unit fails or malfunctions.
2. If the second drive unit or manual drive is not placed in service automatically, it shall be possible to do so immediately by means of a single operation by the helmsman that is both simple and quick.
3. The second drive unit or manual drive shall ensure the manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 as well.
Article 6.03
Hydraulic steering apparatus drive unit
1. No other power consumers may be connected to the hydraulic steering apparatus drive unit. Where there are two independent drive units, such a connection to one of the units is however acceptable if the consumers are connected to the return line and may be disconnected from the drive unit by means of an isolating device.
2. Where there are two hydraulic drive units, a separate hydraulic reservoir is needed for each of the two units. However, double reservoirs are acceptable. Hydraulic reservoirs shall be fitted with a warning system that monitors any drop in the oil level below the lowest content level needed for reliable operation.
3. The pilot valve does not have to be duplicated if this can be actuated manually or by manually-controlled hydraulic actuation from the wheelhouse.
4. The dimensions, design and arrangement of the pipework shall as far as possible exclude mechanical damage or damage resulting from fire.
5. As far as hydraulic drive units are concerned, no separate pipework system shall be required for the second unit if independent operation of the two units is guaranteed and if the pipework system is able to withstand a pressure of at least 1,5 times that of the maximum service pressure.
6. Flexible piping is only permitted where its use is essential in order to damp vibrations or to allow freedom of movement of components. It shall be designed for a pressure that is at least equal to the maximum service pressure.
Article 6.04
Power source
1. Steering systems fitted with two powered drive units shall have at least two power sources.
2. If the second power source for the powered steering apparatus is not constantly available while the vessel is under way, a buffer device carrying adequate capacity shall provide back-up during the period needed for start-up.
3. In the case of electrical power sources, no other power consumers may be supplied by the main power source for the steering system.
Article 6.05
Manual drive
1. The manual wheel shall not be driven by a powered drive unit.
2. Regardless of rudder position, a kick-back of the wheel shall be prevented when the manual drive is engaged automatically.
Article 6.06
Rudder-propeller, water-jet, cycloidal-propeller and bow-thruster systems
1. Where the thrust vectoring of rudder-propeller, water-jet, cycloidal-propeller or bow-thruster installations is remotely actuated by electric, hydraulic or pneumatic means, there shall be two actuation systems, each independent of the other, between the wheelhouse and the propeller- or thruster-installation which, mutatis mutandis, meet the requirements of Articles 6.01 to 6.05.
Such systems are not subject to this section if they are not needed in order to achieve the manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 or if they are only needed for the stopping test.
2. Where there are two or more rudder-propeller, water-jet or cycloidal-propeller installations that are independent of each other the second actuation system is not necessary if the vessel retains the manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 if one of the systems fails.
Article 6.07
Indicators and monitoring devices
1. The rudder position shall be clearly displayed at the steering position. If the rudder-position indicator is electric it shall have its own power supply.
2. There shall be at least the following indicators and monitoring devices at the steering position:
|
(a) |
oil level in the hydraulic reservoirs in accordance with Article 6.03, section 2, and service pressure of the hydraulic system; |
|
(b) |
failure of the electrical supply for the steering control; |
|
(c) |
failure of the electrical supply for the drive units; |
|
(d) |
failure of the rate-of-turn regulator; |
|
(e) |
failure of the required buffer devices. |
Article 6.08
Rate-of-turn regulators
1. Rate-of-turn regulators and their components shall meet the requirements laid down in Article 9.20.
2. The proper functioning of the rate-of-turn regulator shall be displayed at the steering position by means of a green indicating light.
Any lack of or unacceptable variations in the supply voltage and an unacceptable decrease in the speed of rotation of the gyroscope shall be monitored.
3. Where, in addition to the rate-of-turn regulator, there are other steering systems, it shall be possible to clearly distinguish at the steering position which of these systems has been activated. It shall be possible to shift from one system to another immediately. The rate-of-turn regulator shall not have any influence on these other steering systems.
4. The electricity supply to the rate-of-turn regulator shall be independent of other power consumers.
5. The gyroscopes, detectors and rate-of-turn indicators used in the rate-of-turn regulators shall meet the minimum requirements of the minimum specifications and test conditions concerning rate-of-turn displays for inland waterways, as laid down in Annex IX.
Article 6.09
Acceptance procedure
1. The compliance of the installed steering system shall be checked by an inspection body. It may, for this purpose, request the following documents:
|
(a) |
description of the steering system; |
|
(b) |
drawings and information on the drive units and the steering controls; |
|
(c) |
information concerning the steering apparatus; |
|
(d) |
electrical wiring diagram; |
|
(e) |
description of the rate-of-turn regulator; |
|
(f) |
operating instructions for the steering system. |
2. Operation of the entire steering system shall be checked by means of a navigation test. If a rate-of-turn regulator is installed it shall be checked that a predetermined course can be reliably maintained and that bends can be negotiated safely.
CHAPTER 7
WHEELHOUSE
Article 7.01
General
1. Wheelhouses shall be arranged in such a way that the helmsman may at all times perform his task while the vessel is under way.
2. Under normal operating conditions, sound pressure generated by the vessel and measured at the level of the helmsman's head at the steering position shall not exceed 70 dB(A).
3. Where a wheelhouse has been designed for radar navigation by one person, the helmsman shall be able to accomplish his task while seated and all of the display or monitoring instruments and all of the controls needed for operation of the vessel shall be arranged in such a way that the helmsman may use them comfortably while the vessel is under way without leaving his position or losing sight of the radar screen.
Article 7.02
Unobstructed view
1. There shall be an adequately unobstructed view in all directions from the steering position.
2. The area of obstructed vision for the helmsman ahead of the vessel in an unladen state with half of its supplies but without ballast shall not exceed two vessel lengths or 250 m, whichever is less, to the surface of the water over an arc from abeam on either side through right ahead of the vessel.
Optical and electronic means for reducing the area of obstructed vision may not be taken into account during the inspection.
To further reduce any area of obstructed vision, only suitable electronic devices shall be used.
3. The helmsman's field of unobstructed vision at his normal position shall be at least 240° of the horizon and at least 140° within the forward semicircle.
No window frame, post or superstructure shall lie within the helmsman's usual axis of vision.
Even in the case where a field of unobstructed vision of at least 240° of the horizon is provided, the inspection body may require other measures and in particular the installation of suitable auxiliary optical or electronic devices if no sufficiently unobstructed view is provided towards the rear.
The height of the lower edge of the side windows shall be kept as low as possible and the height of the upper edge of the side and rear windows shall be kept as high as possible.
In determining whether the requirements in this Article for visibility from the wheelhouse are met, the helmsman shall be assumed to have a height of eye of 1 650 mm above the deck at the steering position.
4. The upper edge of the forward facing windows of the wheelhouse shall be high enough to allow a person at the steering position with height of eye of 1 800 mm a clear forward view to at least 10 degrees above the horizontal at height of eye level.
5. There shall in all weathers be suitable means of providing a clear view through the windscreen.
6. The glazing used in wheelhouses shall be made of safety glass and have a light transmission of at least 75 %.
To avoid reflections, the bridge front windows shall be glare-free and inclined from the vertical plane, so as to form an outward angle of not less than 10° and not more than 25°.
Article 7.03
General requirements concerning control, indicating and monitoring equipment
1. Control equipment needed to operate the vessel shall be brought into its operating position easily. That position shall be unambiguously clear.
2. Monitoring instruments shall be easily legible. It shall be possible to adjust their lighting steplessly down to their extinction. Light sources shall be neither intrusive nor impair the legibility of the monitoring instruments.
3. There shall be a system for testing the warning and indicating lights.
4. It shall be possible to clearly establish whether a system is in operation. If its functioning is indicated by means of an indicating light, this shall be green.
5. Any malfunctioning or failure of systems that require monitoring shall be indicated by means of red warning lights.
6. An audible warning shall sound at the same time that a red warning light lights up. Audible warnings may be given by a single, collective signal. The sound pressure level of that signal shall exceed the maximum sound pressure level of the ambient noise at the steering position by at least 3 dB(A).
7. The audible warning shall be capable of being switched off after a malfunction or failure has been acknowledged. Such shutdown shall not prevent the alarm signal from being triggered by other malfunctions. The red warning lights shall only go out when the malfunction has been corrected.
8. The monitoring and indicating devices shall be automatically switched to an alternative power supply if their own power supply fails.
Article 7.04
Specific requirements concerning control, indicating and monitoring equipment of main engines and steering system
1. It shall be possible to control and monitor the main engines and steering systems from the steering position. Main engines fitted with a clutch which can be actuated from the steering position, or driving a controllable pitch propeller which can be controlled from the steering position, need only to be capable of being started up and shut down from the engine room.
2. The control for each main engine shall take the form of a single lever which prescribes an arc within a vertical plane that is approximately parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vessel. Movement of that lever towards the bow of the vessel shall cause forward motion, whereas movement of the lever towards the stern shall cause the vessel to go astern. Clutch engagement and reversal of the direction of motion shall take place about the neutral position of that lever. The lever shall catch in the neutral position.
3. The direction of the propulsion thrust imparted to the vessel and the rotational speed of the propeller or main engines shall be displayed inside wheelhouses that have been designed for radar navigation by one person.
4. The indicating and monitoring devices required by Article 6.07, section 2, Article 8.03, section 2, and Article 8.05, section 13, shall be located at the steering position.
5. Vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person shall be steered by means of a lever. It shall be possible to move that lever easily by hand. The position of the lever in relation to the longitudinal axis of the vessel shall correspond precisely to the position of the rudder blades. It shall be possible to release hold of the lever in any given position without that of the rudder blades changing. The neutral position of the lever shall be clearly perceptible.
6. Where the vessel is fitted with bow rudders or special rudders, particularly for going astern, these shall be actuated in wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person by special levers which, mutatis mutandis, meet the requirements set out in section 5.
That requirement shall also apply where, in convoys, the steering system fitted to craft other than those powering the convoy is used.
7. Where rate-of-turn regulators are used, it shall be possible for the rate-of-turn control to be released in any given position without altering the speed selected.
The control shall turn through a wide enough arc to guarantee adequately precise positioning. The neutral position shall be clearly perceptible from the other positions. The scale illumination shall be steplessly variable.
8. The remote-control equipment for the entire steering system shall be installed in a permanent manner and be arranged in such a way that the course selected is clearly visible. If the remote control equipment can be disengaged, it shall be equipped with an indicating device displaying the respective operational conditions ‘in service’ or ‘out of service’. The disposition and manipulation of the controls shall be functional.
For systems that are subsidiary to the steering system, such as active bow thrusters, remote-control equipment not permanently installed shall be acceptable provided that such a subsidiary installation can be activated by means of an override at any time within the wheelhouse.
9. In the case of rudder-propeller, water-jet, cycloidal-propeller and bow-thruster systems, equivalent devices shall be acceptable as control, indicating and monitoring devices.
The requirements set out in sections 1 to 8 shall apply, mutatis mutandis, in view of the specific characteristics and arrangements selected for the abovementioned active steering and propulsion units. The position of the indicating device shall clearly show for each installation the direction of the thrust acting on the vessel or the direction of the jet.
Article 7.05
Navigation lights, light signals and sound signals
1. In this Article the term:
|
(a) |
‘navigation lights’ means the masthead, side and stern lights, and the lights visible from all sides, the blue scintillating lights, yellow rapidly scintillating strong lights for high-speed vessels and blue lights for the carriage of dangerous goods; |
|
(b) |
‘light signals’ means the lights accompanying the sound signals and assigned to the blue panel. |
2. Current indicating lights or other equivalent devices, such as repeater lights, for monitoring the navigation lights shall be installed in the wheelhouse unless that monitoring can be performed direct from the wheelhouse.
3. In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person, repeater lights shall be installed on the control panel in order to monitor the navigation lights and the light signals. Switches of navigation lights shall be included in the repeater lights or be adjacent to these and shall be clearly assigned to them.
The arrangement and colour of the repeater lights for the navigation lights and light signals shall correspond to the actual position and colour of those lights and signals.
The failure of a navigation light or light signal to function shall cause the corresponding repeater light either to go out or to provide a signal in another manner.
4. In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person it shall be possible to activate the sound signals by a foot operated switch. That requirement shall not apply to the ‘do not approach’ signal in accordance with the applicable navigational authority regulations of the Member States.
5. Navigation lights shall meet the requirements set out in Annex IX, Part I.
Article 7.06
Radar installations and rate-of-turn indicators
1. The radar equipment and rate-of-turn indicators shall be of a type that has been approved by the competent authority. The requirements concerning installation and operational testing of radar equipment and rate-of-turn indicators, as laid down in Annex IX, shall be met. Inland ECDIS equipment which can be operated in navigation mode shall be regarded as radar equipment. In addition the requirements of the Inland ECDIS standard shall be met.
The rate-of-turn indicator shall be located ahead of the helmsman and within his field of vision.
2. In wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person:
|
(a) |
the radar screen shall not be shifted significantly out of the helmsman's axis of view in its normal position; |
|
(b) |
the radar image shall continue to be perfectly visible, without a mask or screen, whatever the lighting conditions outside the wheelhouse; |
|
(c) |
the rate-of-turn indicator shall be installed directly above or below the radar image or be incorporated into this. |
Article 7.07
Radio telephony systems for vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person
1. Where vessel wheelhouses have been designed for radar navigation by one person, reception from the vessel-vessel networks and that of nautical information shall be via a loudspeaker, and outgoing communications via a fixed microphone. Send/receive shall be selected by means of a push-button.
It shall not be possible to use the microphones of those networks for the public correspondence network.
2. Where vessel wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person are equipped with a radio telephone system for the public correspondence network, reception shall be possible from the helmsman's seat.
Article 7.08
Internal communication facilities on board
There shall be internal communication facilities on board vessels with a wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by one person.
It shall be possible to establish communication links from the steering position:
|
(a) |
with the bow of the vessel or convoy; |
|
(b) |
with the stern of the vessel or convoy if no direct communication is possible from the steering position; |
|
(c) |
with the crew accommodation; |
|
(d) |
with the boatmaster's cabin. |
Reception at all positions of these internal communication links shall be via loudspeaker, and transmission shall be via a fixed microphone. The link with the bow and stern of the vessel or convoy may be of the radio-telephone type.
Article 7.09
Alarm system
1. There shall be an independent alarm system enabling the accommodation, engine rooms and, where appropriate, the separate pump rooms to be reached.
2. The helmsman shall have within reach an on/off switch controlling the alarm signal; switches which automatically return to the off position when released are not acceptable.
3. The sound pressure level for the alarm signal shall be at least 75 dB(A) within the accommodation area.
In engine rooms and pump rooms the alarm signal shall take the form of a flashing light that is visible on all sides and clearly perceptible at all points.
Article 7.10
Heating and ventilation
Wheelhouses shall be equipped with an effective heating and ventilation system that can be regulated.
Article 7.11
Stern-anchor operating equipment
On board vessels and convoys whose wheelhouse has been designed for radar navigation by one person and exceeding 86 m in length or 22,90 m in breadth it shall be possible for the helmsman to drop the stern anchors from his position.
Article 7.12
Retractable wheelhouses
Retractable wheelhouses shall be fitted with an emergency lowering system.
All lowering operations shall automatically trigger a clearly audible acoustic warning signal. That requirement shall not apply if the risk of injury which may result from the lowering is prevented by appropriate design features.
It shall be possible to leave the wheelhouse safely whatever its position.
Article 7.13
Entry in the Community certificate for vessels with wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person
Where a vessel complies with the special provisions for wheelhouses designed for radar navigation by one person as set out in Articles 7.01, 7.04 to 7.08 and 7.11, the following entry shall be made in the Community certificate:
‘The vessel has a wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by one person’.
CHAPTER 8
ENGINE DESIGN
Article 8.01
General
1. Engines and their ancillaries shall be designed, built and installed in accordance with best practice.
2. Installations requiring regular inspection, particularly steam boilers, other pressure vessels and their accessories, and lifts, shall meet the regulations applying in one of the Member States of the Community.
3. Only internal-combustion engines burning fuels having a flashpoint of more than 55 °C may be installed.
Article 8.02
Safety equipment
1. Engines shall be installed and fitted in such a way as to be adequately accessible for operation and maintenance and shall not endanger the persons assigned to those tasks. It shall be possible to make them secure against unintentional starting.
2. Main engines, auxiliaries, boilers and pressure vessels, and their accessories, shall be fitted with safety devices.
3. In case of emergency, it shall also be possible to shut down the motors driving the blower and suction fans from outside the space in which they are located, and from outside the engine room.
4. Where necessary, connections of pipes which carry fuel oil, lubricating oil, and oils used in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems shall be screened or otherwise suitably protected to avoid oil spray or leakages onto hot surfaces, into machinery air intakes, or other sources of ignition. The number of connections in such piping systems shall be kept to a minimum.
5. External high pressure fuel delivery pipes of diesel engines, between the high pressure fuel pumps and fuel injectors, shall be protected with a jacketed piping system capable of containing fuel from a high pressure pipe failure. The jacketed piping system shall include a means for collection of leakages and arrangements shall be provided for an alarm to be given of a fuel pipe failure, except that an alarm is not required for engines with no more than two cylinders. Jacketed piping systems need not be applied to engines on open decks operating windlasses and capstans.
6. Insulation of engine parts shall meet the requirements of Article 3.04, section 3, second paragraph.
Article 8.03
Power plant
1. It shall be possible to start, stop or reverse the ship's propulsion reliably and quickly.
2. The following shall be monitored by suitable devices which trigger an alarm once a critical level has been reached:
|
(a) |
the temperature of the main-engine cooling water; |
|
(b) |
the lubricating-oil pressure for the main engines and transmissions; |
|
(c) |
the oil and air pressure of the main engine reversing units, reversible transmissions or propellers. |
3. Where vessels have only one main engine, that engine shall not be shut down automatically except in order to protect against overspeed.
4. Where vessels have only one main engine, that engine may be equipped with an automatic device for the reduction of the engine speed only if an automatic reduction of the engine speed is indicated both optically and acoustically in the wheelhouse and the device for the reduction of the engine speed can be switched off from the helmsman's position.
5. Shaft bushings shall be designed in such a way as to prevent the spread of water-polluting lubricants.
Article 8.04
Engine exhaust system
1. The exhaust gases shall be completely ducted out of the vessel.
2. All suitable measures shall be taken to avoid ingress of the exhaust gases into the various compartments. Exhaust pipes passing through accommodation or the wheelhouse shall, within these, be covered by protective gas-tight sheathing. The gap between the exhaust pipe and this sheathing shall be open to the outside air.
3. The exhaust pipes shall be arranged and protected in such a way that they cannot cause a fire.
4. The exhaust pipes shall be suitably insulated or cooled in the engine rooms. Protection against physical contact may suffice outside the engine rooms.
Article 8.05
Fuel tanks, pipes and accessories
1. Liquid fuels shall be stored in steel tanks which are either an integral part of the hull or which are firmly attached to the hull. If so required by the design of the vessel, an equivalent material in terms of fire-resistance may be used. These requirements shall not apply to tanks having a capacity of no more than 12 litres that have been incorporated in auxiliaries during their manufacture. Fuel tanks shall not have common partitions with drinking-water tanks.
2. Tanks and their pipework and other accessories shall be laid out and arranged in such a way that neither fuel nor fuel vapours may accidentally reach the inside of the vessel. Tank valves intended for fuel sampling or water drainage shall close automatically.
3. No fuel tanks may be located forward of the collision bulkhead.
4. Fuel tanks and their fittings shall not be located directly above engines or exhaust pipes.
5. The filler orifices for fuel tanks shall be marked distinctly.
6. The orifice for the fuel tank filler necks shall be on the deck, except for the daily-supply tanks. The filler neck shall be fitted with a connection piece in accordance with European standard EN 12827:1999.
Such tanks shall be fitted with a breather pipe terminating in the open air above the deck and arranged in such a way that no water ingress is possible. The cross-section of the breather pipe shall be at least 1,25 times the cross-section of the filler neck.
If tanks are interconnected, the cross-section of the connecting pipe shall be at least 1,25 times the cross-section of the filler neck.
7. Directly at tank outlets the pipework for the distribution of fuels shall be fitted with a shutoff device that can be operated from the deck
This requirement shall not apply to tanks mounted directly on the engine.
8. Fuel pipes, their connections, seals and fittings shall be made of materials that are able to withstand the mechanical, chemical and thermal stresses to which they are likely to be subjected. The fuel pipes shall not be subjected to any adverse influence of heat and it shall be possible to inspect them throughout their length.
9. Fuel tanks shall be provided with a suitable capacity-gauging device. Capacity-gauging devices shall be legible right up to the maximum filling level. Glass gauges shall be effectively protected against impacts, shall be fitted with an automatic closing device at their base and their upper end shall be connected to the tanks above their maximum filling level. The material used for glass gauges shall not deform under normal ambient temperatures. Sounding pipes shall not terminate in accommodation spaces. Sounding pipes terminating in an engine or boiler room shall be fitted with suitable self-closing devices.
|
10. |
|
11. If fuel tanks are fitted with an automatic shut-off device, the sensors shall stop fuelling when the tank is 97 % full; this equipment shall meet the ‘failsafe’ requirements.
If the sensor activates an electrical contact, which can break the circuit provided by the bunkering station by a binary signal, it shall be possible to transmit the signal to the bunkering station by means of a watertight connection plug meeting the requirements of IEC publication 60309-1:1999 for 40 to 50 V DC, housing colour white, earthing contact position ten o'clock.
12. Fuel tanks shall be provided with openings having leak-proof closures that are intended to permit cleaning and inspection.
13. Fuel tanks directly supplying the main engines and engines needed for safe operation of the vessel shall be fitted with a device emitting both visual and audible signals in the wheelhouse if their level of filling is not sufficient to ensure further safe operation.
Article 8.06
Storage of lubricating oil, pipes and accessories
1. Lubricating oil shall be stored in steel tanks which are either an integral part of the hull or which are firmly attached to the hull. If so required by the design of the vessel, an equivalent material in terms of fire-resistance may be used. These requirements shall not apply to tanks having a capacity of no more than 25 litres. Lubricating oil tanks shall not have common partitions with drinking-water tanks.
2. Lubricating oil tanks and their pipework and other accessories shall be laid out and arranged in such a way that neither lubricating oil nor lubricating oil vapour may accidentally reach the inside of the vessel.
3. No lubricating oil tanks may be located forward of the collision bulkhead.
4. Lubricating oil tanks and their fittings shall not be located directly above engines or exhaust pipes.
5. The filler orifices for lubricating oil tanks shall be marked distinctly.
6. Lubricating oil pipes, their connections, seals and fittings shall be made of materials that are able to withstand the mechanical, chemical and thermal stresses to which they are likely to be subjected. The pipes shall not be subjected to any adverse influence of heat and it shall be possible to inspect them throughout their length.
7. Lubricating oil tanks shall be provided with a suitable capacity-gauging device. Capacity-gauging devices shall be legible right up to the maximum filling level. Glass gauges shall be effectively protected against impacts, shall be fitted with an automatic closing device at their base and their upper end shall be connected to the tanks above their maximum filling level. The material used for glass gauges shall not deform under normal ambient temperatures. Sounding pipes shall not terminate in accommodation spaces. Sounding pipes terminating in an engine or boiler room shall be fitted with suitable self-closing devices.
Article 8.07
Storage of oils used in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems, pipes and accessories
1. Oils used in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems shall be stored in steel tanks which are either an integral part of the hull or which are firmly attached to the hull. If so required by the design of the vessel, an equivalent material in terms of fire-resistance may be used. These requirements shall not apply to tanks having a capacity of no more than 25 litres. Such oil tanks shall not have common partitions with drinking-water tanks.
2. Such oil tanks and their pipework and other accessories shall be laid out and arranged in such a way that neither such oil nor such oil vapour may accidentally reach the inside of the vessel.
3. No such oil tanks may be located forward of the collision bulkhead.
4. Such oil tanks and their fittings shall not be located directly above engines or exhaust pipes.
5. The filler orifices for such oil tanks shall be marked distinctly.
6. Such oil pipes, their connections, seals and fittings shall be made of materials that are able to withstand the mechanical, chemical and thermal stresses to which they are likely to be subjected. The pipes shall not be subjected to any adverse influence of heat and it shall be possible to inspect them throughout their length.
7. Such oil tanks shall be provided with a suitable capacity-gauging device. Capacity-gauging devices shall be legible right up to the maximum filling level. Glass gauges shall be effectively protected against impacts, shall be fitted with an automatic closing device at their base and their upper end shall be connected to the tanks above their maximum filling level. The material used for glass gauges shall not deform under normal ambient temperatures. Sounding pipes shall not terminate in accommodation spaces. Sounding pipes terminating in an engine or boiler room shall be fitted with suitable self-closing devices.
Article 8.08
Bilge pumping and drainage systems
1. It shall be possible to pump out each watertight compartment separately. However, that requirement shall not apply to watertight compartments that are normally sealed hermetically during operation.
2. Vessels requiring a crew shall be equipped with two independent bilge pumps which shall not be installed within the same space. At least one of these shall be motor driven. However, for vessels with a power of less than 225 kW or with a deadweight of less than 350 t, or where vessels not intended for the carriage of goods have a displacement of less than 250 m3, one pump will suffice which can be either manually-operated or motor-driven.
Each of the required pumps shall be capable of use on each watertight compartment.
3. The minimum pumping capacity Q1 of the first bilge pump shall be calculated using the following formula:
|
|
Q1 = 0,1 · d1 2 [l/min] |
d1 is calculated via the formula:
The minimum pumping capacity Q2 of the second bilge pump shall be calculated using the following formula:
|
|
Q2 = 0,1 · d2 2 [l/min] |
d2 is calculated using the formula:
However, the value d2 need not exceed value d1.
For the calculation of Q2 l shall be taken to be the length of the longest watertight compartment.
In these formulae:
|
l |
is the length of the watertight compartment in question, in [m]; |
|
d1 |
is the calculated internal diameter of the main drainage pipe, in [mm]; |
|
d2 |
is the calculated internal diameter of the branch pipe, in [mm]. |
4. Where the bilge pumps are connected to a drainage system the drainage pipes shall have an internal diameter of at least d1, in mm, and the branch pipes an internal diameter of at least d2, in mm.
Where vessels are less than 25 m in length the values d1 and d2 may be reduced to 35 mm.
5. Only self-priming bilge pumps are permitted.
6. There shall be at least one suction on both the starboard and port sides of all flat-bottomed, drainable compartments that are wider than 5 m.
7. It may be possible to drain the aft peak via the main engine room by means of an easily accessible, automatically closable fitting.
8. Branch pipes of single compartments shall be connected to the main drainage pipe by means of a lockable non-return valve.
Compartments or other spaces that are capable of carrying ballast need to be connected to the drainage system only by means of a simple closing device. That requirement shall not apply to holds that are capable of carrying ballast. Such holds shall be filled with ballast water by means of ballast piping that is permanently installed and independent of the drainage pipes, or by means of branch pipes that can be connected to the main drainage pipe by flexible pipes or flexible adaptors. Water intake valves located in the bottom of the hold shall not be permitted for this purpose.
9. Hold bilges shall be fitted with gauging devices.
10. Where a drainage system incorporates permanently installed pipework the bilge-bottom drainage pipes intended to extract oily water shall be equipped with closures that have been sealed in position by an inspection body. The number and position of those closures shall be entered on the Community certificate.
11. Locking the closures in position shall be regarded as equivalent to sealing in accordance with section 10. The key or keys for the locking of the closures shall be indicated accordingly and kept in a marked and easily accessible location in the engine room.
Article 8.09
Oily water and used oil stores
1. It shall be possible to store on board oily water accumulated during operation. The engine-room bilge is considered to be a store for this purpose.
2. In order to store used oils there shall, in the engine room, be one or several specific receptacles whose capacity corresponds to at least 1,5 times the quantity of the used oils from the sumps of all of the internal combustion engines and transmissions installed, together with the hydraulic fluids from the hydraulic-fluid tanks.
The connections used in order to empty the receptacles referred to above shall comply with European standard EN 1305:1996.
3. Where vessels are only used on short-haul operation the inspection body may grant exceptions from the requirements of section 2.
Article 8.10
Noise emitted by vessels
1. The noise produced by a vessel under way, and in particular the engine air intake and exhaust noises, shall be damped by using appropriate means.
2. The noise generated by a vessel under way shall not exceed 75 dB(A) at a lateral distance of 25 m from the ship's side.
3. Apart from transhipment operations the noise generated by a stationary vessel shall not exceed 65 dB(A) at a lateral distance of 25 m from the ship's side.
CHAPTER 8a
(Left void)
CHAPTER 9
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
Article 9.01
General
1. Where there are no specific requirements concerning certain parts of an installation the safety level shall be considered satisfactory where those parts have been produced in accordance with a European standard in force or in accordance with the requirements of an approved classification society.
The relevant documents shall be submitted to the inspection body.
2. Documents containing the following, and duly stamped by the inspection body, shall be kept on board:
|
(a) |
general drawings concerning the entire electrical installation; |
|
(b) |
switching diagrams for the main switchboard, the emergency switchboard and the distribution switchboard, together with the most important technical data such as the amperage and rated current of the protection and control devices; |
|
(c) |
power data concerning the electrical machinery and equipment; |
|
(d) |
types of cable and information on conductor cross-sections. |
It is not necessary to keep such documents on board unmanned craft, but they shall be available at all times with the owner.
3. The equipment shall be designed for permanent lists of up to 15° and ambient inside temperatures of between 0 °C and + 40 °C, and on the deck between – 20 °C and + 40 °C. It shall function perfectly within those limits.
4. The electrical and electronic equipment and appliances shall be fully accessible and easy to maintain.
Article 9.02
Electricity supply systems
1. Where craft are fitted with an electrical system, that system shall in principle have at least two power sources in such a way that where one power source fails the remaining source is able to supply the power consumers needed for safe navigation for at least 30 minutes.
2. Adequate rating of the power supply shall be demonstrated by means of a power balance. An appropriate simultaneity factor may be taken into account.
3. Independently of section 1, Article 6.04 shall apply to the power source for the steering system (rudder installations).
Article 9.03
Protection against physical contact, intrusion of solid objects and the ingress of water
The type of minimum protection for permanently installed parts of an installation shall be as set out in the following table:
|
Location |
Type of minimum protection (in accordance with IEC publ. 60529:1992) |
|||||
|
Generators |
Motors |
Trans-formers |
Panels Distributors Switches |
Fittings |
Lighting equipment |
|
|
Operation rooms, engine rooms, steering-gear compartments |
IP 22 |
IP 22 |
(2)IP 22 |
IP 44 |
IP 22 |
|
|
Holds |
|
|
|
|
IP 55 |
IP 55 |
|
Battery and paint lockers |
|
|
|
|
|
IP 44 u. (Ex) (3) |
|
Free decks and open steering positions |
|
IP 55 |
|
IP 55 |
IP 55 |
IP 55 |
|
Wheelhouse |
|
IP 22 |
IP 22 |
IP 22 |
IP 22 |
IP 22 |
|
Accommodation apart from sanitary facilities and wash rooms |
|
|
|
IP 22 |
IP 20 |
IP 20 |
|
Sanitary facilities and wash rooms |
|
IP 44 |
IP 44 |
IP 44 |
IP 55 |
IP 44 |
Article 9.04
Protection from explosion
Only explosion-proof electrical equipment (certified safety) may be installed in spaces where potentially explosive gases or mixtures of gases are likely to accumulate, such as compartments dedicated for accumulators or the storage of highly inflammable products. No light switches or switches for other electrical appliances shall be installed in these spaces. The protection from explosion shall take account of the characteristics of the potentially explosive gases or mixtures of gases that are likely to arise (explosion-potential group, temperature class).
Article 9.05
Earthing
1. Systems under a voltage of more than 50 V need to be earthed.
2. Metal parts that are open to physical contact and which, during normal operation, are not electrically live, such as engine frames and casings, appliances and lighting equipment, shall be earthed separately where they are not in electrical contact with the hull as a result of their installation.
3. The casings of mobile power consumers and portable devices shall, during normal use, be earthed by means of an additional earthing conductor that is incorporated into the power cable.
That provision shall not apply where a protective circuit-separation transformer is used, nor to appliances fitted with protective insulation (double insulation).
4. The cross-sections of the earthing conductors shall be not less than given in the following table:
|
Cross-section of outside conductors [mm2] |
Minimum cross-section of earthing conductors |
|
|
within insulated cables [mm2] |
fitted separately [mm2] |
|
|
from 0,5 to 4 |
same cross-section as that of the outside conductor |
4 |
|
more than 4 to 16 |
same cross-section as that of the outside conductor |
same cross-section as that of the outside conductor |
|
more than 16 to 35 |
16 |
16 |
|
more than 35 to 120 |
half of the cross-section of the outside conductor |
half of the cross-section of the outside conductor |
|
more than 120 |
70 |
70 |
Article 9.06
Maximum permissible voltages
1. The following voltages shall not be exceeded:
|
Type of installation |
Maximum permissible voltage |
||||
|
Direct current |
Single-phase alternating current |
Three-phase alternating current |
|||
|
250 V |
250 V |
500 V |
||
|
250 V |
250 V |
— |
||
|
|
|
|
||
|
50 V (4) |
50 V (4) |
— |
||
|
— |
250 V (5) |
— |
||
|
250 V |
250 V |
— |
||
|
— |
250 V |
500 V |
||
|
250 V |
250 V |
500 V |
||
|
50 V (4) |
50 V (4) |
— |
||
2. By way of derogation from section 1, if the necessary protective measures are applied higher voltages shall be acceptable:
|
(a) |
for power installations where their power so requires; |
|
(b) |
for special on-board installations such as radio and ignition systems. |
Article 9.07
Distribution systems
1. The following distribution systems are allowed for direct current and single-phase alternating current:
|
(a) |
two-conductor systems of which one is earthed (L1/N/PE); |
|
(b) |
single-conductor systems using the hull return principle, only for local installations (for example, starting gear for combustion engines, cathodic protection) (L1/PEN); |
|
(c) |
two-conductor systems that are insulated from the hull (L1/L2/PE). |
2. The following distribution systems are allowed for three-phase alternating current:
|
(a) |
four-conductor systems with earthing of the neutral point, not using the hull return principle (L1/L2/L3/N/PE) = (network TN-S) or (network TT); |
|
(b) |
three-conductor systems insulated from the hull (Ll/L2/L3/PE) = (network IT); |
|
(c) |
three-conductor systems with earthing of the neutral point using the hull return principle, however, that shall not be allowed for terminal circuits (L1/L2/L3/PEN). |
3. The inspection body may allow the use of other systems.
Article 9.08
Connection to shore or other external networks
1. Incoming supply lines from shore networks or other external networks to the installations of the onboard network shall have a permanent connection on board in the form of fixed terminals or fixed plug sockets. The cable connections shall not be subjected to any pulling load.
2. The hull shall be capable of being earthed effectively when the connection voltage exceeds 50 V. The earthing connection shall be specially marked.
3. The switching devices for the connection shall be arranged such as to prevent the concurrent operation of the onboard network generators and the shore network or another external network. A brief period of concurrent operation shall be permitted when changing from one system to another without a break in voltage.
4. The connection shall be protected against short circuiting and overload.
5. The main switchboard shall indicate whether the connection is live.
6. Indicator devices shall be installed to enable comparison of polarity in the case of direct current and phase sequence in the case of three-phase alternating current, between the connection and the onboard network.
7. A panel adjacent to the connection shall indicate:
|
(a) |
the measures required to establish the connection; |
|
(b) |
the type of current and the nominal voltage and, for alternating current, the frequency. |
Article 9.09
Power supply to other craft
1. When power is supplied to other craft, a separate connection shall be used. If power sockets rated at more than 16 A are used to supply current to other craft, devices (such as switches or interlocks) shall be provided to ensure that connection and disconnection can take place only when the line is dead.
2. Cable connections shall not be subjected to any pulling load.
3. Article 9.08, sections 3 to 7, shall apply mutatis mutandis.
Article 9.10
Generators and motors
1. Generators, motors and their terminal boxes shall be accessible for inspections, measurements and repairs. The type of protection shall correspond to their location (see Article 9.03).
2. Generators driven by the main engine, the propeller shaft or by an auxiliary set intended for other purposes shall be designed with respect to the range of rotational speeds which can occur during normal operation.
Article 9.11
Accumulators
1. Accumulators shall be accessible and so arranged as not to shift due to movements of the craft. They shall not be placed where they will be exposed to excessive heat, extreme cold, spray, steam or vapour.
They shall not be installed in the wheelhouse, accommodation or holds. This requirement shall not apply to accumulators for portable appliances, or to accumulators requiring a charging power of less than 0,2 kW.
2. Accumulators requiring a charging power of more than 2,0 kW (calculated on the basis of the maximum charging current and the nominal voltage of the accumulator and taking into account the characteristic charging curve of the charging appliance) shall be installed in a special room. If placed on deck enclosing them in a cabinet will suffice.
Accumulators requiring a charging power not exceeding 2,0 kW may be installed in a cabinet or chest not only if placed on deck but also below decks. They may also be installed in an engine room or any other well-ventilated space provided that they are protected against falling objects and dripping water.
3. The interior surfaces of all rooms, cabinets or boxes, shelving or other built-in features intended for accumulators shall be protected against the harmful effects of electrolytes.
4. Provision shall be made for effective ventilation when accumulators are installed in a closed compartment, cabinet or chest. Forced-draught ventilation shall be provided for nickel-cadmium accumulators requiring a charging power of more than 2 kW and for lead-acid accumulators requiring more than 3 kW.
The air shall enter at the bottom and be discharged at the top so as to ensure total gas extraction.
Ventilation ducts shall not include any devices which obstruct the air flow, such as stop valves.
5. The required air throughput (Q) shall be calculated using the following formula:
|
|
Q = 0,11 · I · n [m3/h] |
where:
|
I |
= |
|
|
n |
= |
the number of cells. |
of the maximum current, in A, provided by the charging device;In the case of buffer accumulators within the onboard network other methods of calculation taking into account the characteristic charging curve of the charging device may be accepted by the inspection body, provided that these methods are based on the provisions of approved classification societies or on relevant standards.
6. Where natural ventilation is used the cross-section of the ducts shall be sufficient for the required air throughput on the basis of an air-flow velocity of 0,5 m/sec. However, the cross-section shall be at least 80 cm2 for lead-acid accumulators and 120 cm2 for nickel-cadmium accumulators.
7. Where forced-draught ventilation is used a fan shall be provided — preferably of the suction type — whose motor shall be clear of the gas or air stream.
Fans shall be so designed as to preclude the generation of sparks through contact between a blade and the fan casing and to avoid any electrostatic charges.
8. ‘Fire, naked flame and smoking prohibited’ signs according to Fig. 2 of Appendix I having a minimum diameter of 10 cm shall be affixed to the doors or covers of compartments, cabinets and chests containing accumulators.
Article 9.12
Switchgear installations
1. Electrical switchboards
|
(a) |
Appliances, switches, fuses and switchboard instruments shall be clearly arranged and shall be accessible for maintenance and repair. Terminals for voltages up to 50 V, and those for voltages higher than 50 V, shall be kept separate and marked appropriately. |
|
(b) |
For all switches and appliances marker plates identifying the circuit shall be affixed to the switchboards. The nominal amperage and the circuit for fuses shall be identified. |
|
(c) |
When appliances with an operating voltage greater than 50 V are installed behind doors the live components of those appliances shall be protected against accidental contact while the doors are open. |
|
(d) |
The materials of switchboards shall have suitable mechanical strength and be durable, flame-retardant and self-extinguishing; they shall not be hygroscopic. |
|
(e) |
If high rupture capacity (HRC)-fuses are installed in electrical switchboards, accessories and personal protective equipment shall be available for installing and removing such fuses. |
2. Switches, protective devices
|
(a) |
Generator circuits and power consumer circuits shall be protected against short circuiting and overload on all non-earthed conductors. Switching devices triggered by short-circuiting and overload or fuses may be used for this purpose. Circuits supplying electric motors of drive units (steering system) and their control circuits shall only be protected against short circuiting. Where circuits include thermal circuit-breakers these shall be neutralised or set at not less than twice the nominal amperage. |
|
(b) |
Outputs from the main switchboard to power consumers operating at more than 16 A shall include a load or power switch. |
|
(c) |
Power consumers for the propulsion of the craft, the steering system, the rudder position indicator, navigation or safety systems, and power consumers with a nominal amperage greater than 16 A shall be supplied by separate circuits. |
|
(d) |
The circuits of power consumers required for propelling and manoeuvring the vessel shall be supplied directly by the main switchboard. |
|
(e) |
Circuit-breaking equipment shall be selected on the basis of nominal amperage, thermal or dynamic strength, and breaking capacity. Switches shall simultaneously cut off all live conductors. The switching position shall be identifiable. |
|
(f) |
Fuses shall be of the enclosed-melt type and be made of ceramic or an equivalent material. It shall be possible to change them without any danger of physical contact for the operator. |
3. Measuring and monitoring devices
|
(a) |
Generator, accumulator and distribution circuits shall be equipped with measuring and monitoring devices where the safe operation of the installation so requires. |
|
(b) |
Non-earthed networks with a voltage of more than 50 V shall be equipped with an earthing detection device capable of giving both visual and audible alarm. In secondary installations such as control circuits, this device may be dispensed with. |
4. Location of electrical switchboards
|
(a) |
Switchboards shall be located in accessible and well-ventilated spaces and be protected against water and mechanical damage. Piping and air ducts shall be so arranged that in the event of leakage the switchboards cannot be damaged. If their installation near electrical switchboards is inevitable, pipes shall not have detachable connections nearby. |
|
(b) |
Cabinets and wall recesses in which unprotected switching devices are installed shall be of a flame-retardant material or be protected by a metal or other flame-retardant sheathing. |
|
(c) |
When the voltage is greater than 50 V, insulating gratings or mats shall be placed at the operator's position in front of the main switchboard. |
Article 9.13
Emergency circuit breakers
Emergency circuit breakers for oil burners, fuel pumps, fuel separators and engine-room ventilators shall be installed centrally outside the spaces containing the equipment.
Article 9.14
Installation fittings
1. Cable entries shall be sized as a function of the cables to be connected and be appropriate to the types of cable used.
2. Sockets for distribution circuits at different voltages or frequencies shall be impossible to confuse.
3. Switches shall simultaneously switch all non-earthed conductors within a circuit. However, single-pole switches within non-earthed circuitry shall be permitted in accommodation-lighting circuits apart from in laundries, bathrooms, washrooms and other rooms with wet facilities.
4. Where amperage exceeds 16 A it shall be possible to lock the sockets by means of a switch in such a way that the plug can only be inserted and withdrawn with the power switched off.
Article 9.15
Cables
1. Cables shall be flame-retardant, self-extinguishing and resistant to water and oil.
In accommodation, other types of cable may be used, provided that they are effectively protected, have flame-retardant characteristics and are self-extinguishing.
Flame-retardant standards of electric cables shall be in accordance with:
|
(a) |
IEC publications 60332-1:1993, 60332-3:2000, or |
|
(b) |
equivalent regulations recognised by one of the Member States. |
2. Conductors of cables used for power and lighting circuits shall have a minimum cross-section of 1,5 mm2.
3. Metal armouring, shielding and sheathing of cables shall not, under normal operating conditions, be used as conductors or for earthing.
4. Metal shielding and sheathing of cables in power and lighting installations shall be earthed at least at one end.
5. The cross-section of conductors shall take account of their maximum permissible end-temperature (current-carrying capacity) and of the permissible voltage drop. The voltage drop between the main switchboard and the least favourable point of the installation shall not be more than 5 % for lighting or more than 7 % for power or heating circuits, referred to the nominal voltage.
6. Cables shall be protected against mechanical damage.
7. The means of fixing the cables shall ensure that any pulling load remains within the permissible limits.
8. When cables pass through bulkheads or decks, the mechanical strength, watertightness and fire resistance of these bulkheads and decks shall not be affected by the penetrations.
9. Terminations and joints in all conductors shall be so made as to retain the original electrical, mechanical, flame-retardant and, where necessary, fire resistant properties.
10. Cables connected to retractable wheelhouses shall be sufficiently flexible and shall have insulation with sufficient flexibility down to – 20 °C and resistance to steam and vapour, ultraviolet rays and ozone.
Article 9.16
Lighting installations
1. Lighting appliances shall be so installed that the heat they emit cannot set fire to nearby inflammable objects or components.
2. Lighting appliances on open decks shall be so installed as not to impede the recognition of navigation lights.
3. When two or more lighting appliances are installed in an engine room or boiler room, they shall be supplied by at least two different circuits. This requirement shall also apply to spaces where cooling machinery, hydraulic machinery, or electric motors are installed.
Article 9.17
Navigation lights
1. Switchboards for navigation lights shall be installed in the wheelhouse. They shall be supplied by a separate feeder from the main switchboard or by two independent secondary distributions.
2. Navigation lights shall be supplied, protected and switched separately from the navigation lights switchboard.
3. No fault in the monitoring installation, as provided for in Article 7.05, section 2, shall affect the operation of the light which it monitors.
4. Several lights forming a functional unit and installed together at the same point may be jointly supplied, switched and monitored. The monitoring installation shall be capable of identifying the failure of any one of these lights. However, it shall not be possible to use both light sources in a double light (two lights mounted one above the other or in the same housing) simultaneously.
Article 9.18
(Left void)
Article 9.19
Alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment
The alarm and safety systems for monitoring and protecting mechanical equipment shall meet the following requirements:
|
(a) |
Alarm systems The alarm systems shall be so designed that no failure in the alarm system can result in failure of the apparatus or installation being monitored. Binary transmitters shall be designed on the quiescent-current principle or on the monitored load-current principle. Visual alarms shall remain visible until the fault has been remedied; an alarm that has been acknowledged shall be distinguishable from an alarm that has not yet been acknowledged. Each alarm shall also comprise an audible warning. It shall be possible to switch off acoustic alarms. Switching off one acoustic alarm shall not prevent another signal from being set off by another cause. Exceptions can be permitted in the case of alarm systems comprising less than five measurement points. |
|
(b) |
Safety systems Safety systems shall be designed to halt or slow down the operation of the affected equipment, or to warn a permanently-manned station to do so before a critical state is reached. Binary transmitters shall be designed according to the load-current principle. If safety systems are not designed to be self-monitoring it shall be possible to check that they are operating correctly. Safety systems shall be independent of other systems. |
Article 9.20
Electronic equipment
1. General
The test conditions in section 2 below shall apply only to electronic devices that are necessary for the steering system and the craft's power plants, including their ancillaries.
2. Test conditions
|
(a) |
The stresses arising from the following tests shall not cause electronic devices to be damaged or to malfunction. The tests in accordance with relevant international standards, such as IEC publication 60092-504:2001, apart from the cold-condition test, shall be carried out with the device switched on. These tests shall include checking of proper operation. |
|
(b) |
Variations in voltage and frequency
|
|||||||||||||||||
|
(c) |
Heating test The sample is brought up to a temperature of 55 °C within a half-hour period. After that temperature has been reached it is maintained for 16 hours. An operating test is then carried out. |
|
(d) |
Cold-condition test The sample is switched off and cooled to – 25 °C and held at that temperature for two hours. The temperature is then raised to 0 °C and an operating test is carried out. |
|
(e) |
Vibration test The vibration test shall be carried out along the three axes at the resonance frequency of the devices or of components for the period of 90 minutes in each case. If no clear resonance emerges the vibration test shall be carried out at 30 Hz. The vibration test shall be carried out by sinusoidal oscillation within the following limits: General: f = 2,0 to 13,2 Hz; a = ± 1 mm (amplitude a = f = 13,2 Hz to 100 Hz: acceleration ± 0,7 g. Equipment intended to be fitted to diesel engines or steering apparatus shall be tested as follows: f = 2,0 to 25 Hz; a = ± 1,6 mm (amplitude a = f = 25 Hz to 100 Hz; acceleration ± 4 g. The sensors intended to be installed in diesel-engine exhaust pipes may be exposed to considerably higher stresses. Account shall be taken of this during the tests. |
the vibration width)
the vibration width)|
(f) |
The electromagnetic compatibility test shall be carried out on the basis of IEC publications 61000-4-2:1995, 61000-4-3:2002, 61000-4-4:1995, at test degree number 3. |
|
(g) |
Proof that the electronic equipment is adequate for these test conditions shall be provided by their manufacturer. A certificate by an approved classification society shall likewise be considered to be proof. |
Article 9.21
Electromagnetic compatibility
The operation of the electric and electronic systems shall not be impaired by electromagnetic interference. General measures shall, with equal importance, extend to:
|
(a) |
disconnection of the transmission paths between the source of interference and affected devices; |
|
(b) |
reducing the causes of disturbance at their source; |
|
(c) |
reducing the sensitivity of affected devices to interference. |
CHAPTER 10
EQUIPMENT
Article 10.01
Anchor equipment
1. Vessels intended for the carriage of goods, apart from ship-borne lighters whose length L does not exceed 40 m, shall be equipped with bow anchors whose total mass P is obtained using the following formula:
|
|
P = k · B · T [kg] |
where
|
k |
is a coefficient that takes account of the relationship between length L and beam B, and of the type of vessel: 
for lighters, however, k = c will be taken; |
|
c |
is an empirical coefficient given in the following table:
|
On vessels whose deadweight tonnage is not greater than 400 t and which, owing to their design and intended purpose, are used only on predetermined short-haul sections, the inspection body may accept that only two-thirds of total mass P is required for the bow anchors.
2. Passenger vessels and vessels not intended for the carriage of goods, apart from pushers, shall be fitted with bow anchors whose total mass P is obtained using the following formula:
|
|
P = k · B · T [kg] |
where:
|
k |
is the coefficient corresponding to section 1, but where in order to obtain the value of the empirical coefficient (c) the water displacement in m3 entered in the Community certificate shall be taken instead of the deadweight tonnage. |
3. Vessels referred to in section 1 whose maximum length does not exceed 86 m shall be equipped with stern anchors whose total mass is equal to 25 % of mass P.
Vessels whose maximum length exceeds 86 m shall be equipped with stern anchors whose total mass is equal to 50 % of mass P calculated in accordance with section 1 or section 2.
Stern anchors are not required for:
|
(a) |
vessels for which the stern anchor mass will be less than 150 kg; in the case of vessels referred to in section 1, final paragraph, the reduced mass of the bow anchors shall be taken into account; |
|
(b) |
lighters. |
4. Vessels intended to propel rigid convoys which do not exceed 86 m in length shall be equipped with stern anchors whose total mass is equal to 25 % of maximum mass P calculated in accordance with section 1 for the formations (considered to be a nautical unit) permitted and entered in the Community certificate.
Vessels intended to propel rigid convoys which exceed 86 m in length downstream shall be equipped with stern anchors whose total mass is equal to 50 % of the maximum mass P calculated in accordance with section 1 for the formations (considered to be a nautical unit) permitted and entered in the Community certificate.
5. The anchor masses established in accordance with sections 1 to 4 may be reduced for certain special anchors.
6. The total mass P specified for bow anchors may be distributed between one or two anchors. It may be reduced by 15 % where the vessel is equipped with only a single bow anchor and the hawse pipe is located amidships.
The total mass required for stern anchors for pushers and vessels whose maximum length exceeds 86 m may be distributed between one or two anchors.
The mass of the lightest anchor shall not be less than 45 % of that total mass.
7. Cast iron anchors shall not be permitted.
8. On anchors their mass shall be indicated in characters which stand out in relief in a durable manner.
9. Anchors having a mass in excess of 50 kg shall be equipped with windlasses.
10. Each bow anchor chain shall have a minimum length of:
|
(a) |
40 m for vessels not exceeding 30 m in length; |
|
(b) |
10 m longer than the vessel where this is more than 30 m and up to 50 m in length; |
|
(c) |
60 m where vessels are more than 50 m in length. |
Each of the stern anchor chains shall be at least 40 m long. However, where vessels need to stop facing downstream they shall have stern anchor chains that are each at least 60 m in length.
11. The minimum tensile strength R of the anchor chains shall be calculated using the following formulae:
|
(a) |
anchors having a mass up to 500 kg: R = 0,35 · P' [kN]; |
|
(b) |
anchors having a mass of more than 500 kg and not exceeding 2 000 kg:
|
;|
(c) |
anchors having a mass of more than 2 000 kg: R = 0,25 · P' [kN]. |
where
|
P' |
is the theoretical mass of each anchor determined in accordance with sections 1 to 4 and 6. |
The tensile strength of anchor chains shall be stated according to a standard in force in a Member State.
Where the anchors have a mass greater than that required by sections 1 to 6, the tensile strength of the anchor chain shall be determined as a function of the actual anchor mass.
12. In cases where heavier anchors with correspondingly stronger anchor chains are aboard, only the minimum masses and minimum tensile strengths required according to sections 1 to 6 and 11 shall be entered in the Community certificate.
13. Connecting pieces (swivels) between anchor and chain shall withstand a tensile load 20 % higher than the tensile strength of the corresponding chain.
14. The use of cables instead of anchor chains is permitted. The cables shall have the same tensile strength as that required for chains, but shall be 20 % longer.
Article 10.02
Other equipment
1. According to the applicable navigational authority regulations in force in the Member States, at least the following equipment shall be on board:
|
(a) |
radio-telephone system; |
|
(b) |
appliances and devices for giving visual and audible signals as well as daytime and night-time vessel marking; |
|
(c) |
stand-alone back-up lights for the prescribed mooring lights; |
|
(d) |
a fire-proof, marked receptacle, with cover, to receive oily cleaning cloths; |
|
(e) |
a fire-proof, marked receptacle, with cover, to receive hazardous or pollutant solid wastes and a fire-proof, marked receptacle, with cover, to receive hazardous or pollutant liquid wastes according to the relevant applicable navigational authority regulations; |
|
(f) |
a fire-proof, marked receptacle, with cover, to receive slops. |
2. In addition, the equipment shall include at least:
|
(a) |
Mooring cables: Vessels shall be equipped with three mooring cables. Their minimum lengths shall be at least the following:
The shortest cable is not required on board vessels whose L is less than 20 m. The cables shall have a tensile strength Rs that is calculated using the following formulae; for L · B · T up to 1 000 m3: for L · B · T exceeding 1 000 m3: For the required cables a certificate in accordance with European standard EN 10 204:1991, under No 3.1, shall be on board. These cables may be replaced by ropes having the same length and tensile strength. The minimum tensile strength of these ropes shall be indicated in a certificate. |
;
.|
(b) |
Towing cables:
|
|
(c) |
A heaving line; |
|
(d) |
A boarding gangway at least 0,4 m wide and 4 m long whose side edges are defined by a brightly-coloured strip; that gangway shall be equipped with a handrail. The inspection body may permit shorter gangways for small vessels; |
|
(e) |
A gaff hook; |
|
(f) |
An appropriate first-aid kit with a content in accordance with a relevant standard of a Member State. The first-aid kit shall be kept in an accommodation room or in the wheelhouse and be stored in such a way that it is easily and safely accessible if necessary. If first-aid kits are stored under cover, the cover shall be marked by a symbol for first-aid kit according to Fig. 8 of Appendix I, having a side length of at least 10 cm; |
|
(g) |
A pair of binoculars, 7 × 50 or with larger lens diameter; |
|
(h) |
A notice concerning the rescue and revival of persons overboard; |
|
(i) |
A searchlight that can be operated from the wheelhouse. |
3. There shall be an embarkation stairway or ladder on vessels whose side height above the unladen waterline exceeds 1,50 m.
Article 10.03
Portable fire extinguishers
1. There shall be at least one portable fire extinguisher in accordance with European standard EN 3:1996 at each of the following places:
|
(a) |
in the wheelhouse; |
|
(b) |
close to each entrance from the deck to accommodation spaces; |
|
(c) |
close to each entrance to service spaces which are not accessible from the accommodation spaces and which contain heating, cooking or refrigeration equipment using solid or liquid fuels or liquefied gas; |
|
(d) |
at each entrance to engine rooms and boiler rooms; |
|
(e) |
at suitable points below deck in engine rooms and boiler rooms such that no position in the space is more than 10 metres walking distance away from an extinguisher. |
2. For the portable fire extinguishers required by section 1, only powder-type extinguishers with a content of at least 6 kg or other portable fire extinguishers with the same extinguishing capacity may be used. They shall be suitable for Class A, B and C fires and for fires in electrical systems of up to 1 000 V.
3. In addition powder, water or foam fire extinguishers may be used which are suitable at least for the class of fire most likely to occur in the room for which they are intended.
4. Portable fire extinguishers with CO2 as the extinguishing agent may be used only for extinguishing fires in galleys and electrical installations. The content of these fire extinguishers shall be no more than 1 kg per 15 m3 of the room in which they are made available for use.
5. Portable fire extinguishers shall be checked at least every two years. An inspection certificate shall be issued, signed by the inspector and showing the date of inspection.
6. If portable fire extinguishers are installed in such a way that they are out of sight the panel covering them shall be identified by a symbol for fire extinguishers as shown in Fig. 3 of Appendix I, and having a side length of at least 10 cm.
Article 10.03a
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces
1. Fire protection in accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces is to be provided only by suitable automatic pressurised water sprinklers as permanently installed fire-fighting systems.
2. Installation or conversion of the systems shall be carried out only by specialised firms.
3. The systems shall be made of steel or equivalent non-combustible materials.
4. The systems shall be able to spray water at a rate of at least 5 l/m2 per minute over the area of the largest room to be protected.
5. Systems spraying smaller quantities of water shall have a type-approval pursuant to IMO Resolution A 800(19) or another standard recognised in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive. Type-approval shall be carried out by an approved classification society or an accredited testing institution. The accredited testing institution shall comply with the European standard for general requirements for the competence of testing and calibrating laboratories (EN ISO/IEC 17025:2000).
6. The systems shall be checked by an expert:
|
(a) |
before being put into service; |
|
(b) |
before being put back into service after they have been triggered; |
|
(c) |
after any modification or repair; |
|
(d) |
regularly at least every two years. |
7. When carrying out the check in accordance with section 6, the expert shall verify whether the systems meet the requirements of this section.
The check shall at least include:
|
(a) |
external inspection of the entire system; |
|
(b) |
functional testing of the safety systems and nozzles; |
|
(c) |
functional testing of the pressure tanks and pumping system. |
8. An inspection certificate, signed by the inspector, shall be issued, showing the date of inspection.
9. The number of installed systems shall be entered in the Community certificate.
10. For protecting objects in accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces, permanently installed fire-fighting systems shall be permissible only on the basis of recommendations from the Committee.
Article 10.03b
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms
1. Extinguishing agents
For protecting engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms, the following extinguishing agents may be used in permanently installed fire-fighting systems:
|
(a) |
CO2 (carbon dioxide); |
|
(b) |
HFC 227ea (heptafluoropropane); |
|
(c) |
IG-541 (52 % nitrogen, 40 % argon, 8 % carbon dioxide). |
Other extinguishing agents shall be permissible only in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive.
2. Ventilation, air intake
|
(a) |
Combustion air for the propulsion engines shall not be extracted from rooms that are to be protected by permanently installed fire-fighting systems. This shall not apply where there are two mutually independent and hermetically separated main engine rooms or if next to the main engine room there is a separate engine room with a bow thruster, ensuring that the vessel is able to make way under its own power in the event of fire in the main engine room. |
|
(b) |
Any forced ventilation present in the room to be protected shall switch off automatically if the fire-fighting system is triggered. |
|
(c) |
There shall be devices available with which all apertures which can allow air to enter or gas to escape from the room to be protected can be quickly closed. It shall be clearly recognisable whether they are open or closed. |
|
(d) |
The air escaping from relief valves in the compressed-air tanks installed in engine rooms shall be conveyed to the open air. |
|
(e) |
Over- or underpressure resulting from the inflow of extinguishing agent shall not destroy the components of the surrounding partitions of the room to be protected. It shall be possible for the pressure to equalise without danger. |
|
(f) |
Protected rooms shall have a facility for extracting the extinguishing agent and the combustion gases. Such facilities shall be capable of being operated from positions outside the protected rooms and which would not be made inaccessible by a fire within such spaces. If there are permanently installed extractors, it shall not be possible for these to be switched on while the fire is being extinguished. |
3. Fire alarm system
The room to be protected shall be monitored by means of an appropriate fire alarm system. The alarm shall be noticeable in the wheelhouse, the accommodation spaces and the room to be protected.
4. Piping system
|
(a) |
The extinguishing agent shall be conveyed to the room to be protected and distributed there by means of a fixed piping system. Inside the room to be protected the piping and associated fittings shall made of steel. Tank connecting pipes and expansion joints shall be exempt from this provided the materials used have equivalent properties in case of fire. Pipes shall be both internally and externally protected against corrosion. |
|
(b) |
Outlet nozzles shall be dimensioned and fitted such that the extinguishing agent is evenly distributed. |
5. Triggering device
|
(a) |
Fire-fighting systems with automatic triggering shall not be permissible. |
|
(b) |
It shall be possible to trigger the fire-fighting system from a suitable place outside the room to be protected. |
|
(c) |
Triggering devices shall be installed in such a way that they can be operated even in case of a fire and in the event of damage by fire or explosion in the room to be protected the necessary quantity of extinguishing agent can still be conveyed. Non-mechanical triggering devices shall be powered from two different mutually independent energy sources. These energy sources shall be located outside the room to be protected. Control lines in the room to be protected shall be designed so as to remain functional for at least 30 minutes in the event of fire. This requirement shall be fulfilled in the case of electric wiring if it complies with the standard IEC 60331-21:1999. If triggering devices are installed in such a way that they are out of sight the panel covering them shall be identified by the ‘fire-fighting installation’ symbol as shown in Fig. 6 of Appendix I, having a side length of at least 10 cm, and the following text in red lettering on a white background: ‘Feuerlöscheinrichtung Installation dextinction Brandblusinstallatie Fire-fighting installation’. |
|
(d) |
If the fire-fighting system is intended for the protection of several rooms, the triggering devices for each room have to be separate and clearly identified. |
|
(e) |
Next to each triggering device operating instructions in one of the languages of the Member States shall be posted up visibly and indelibly. They shall contain, in particular, instructions regarding:
|
|
(f) |
The operating instructions shall point out that before the fire-fighting system is triggered combustion engines drawing air from the room to be protected are to be shut down. |
6. Warning system
|
(a) |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems shall be provided with acoustic and optical warning systems. |
|
(b) |
The warning system shall be set off automatically as soon as the fire-fighting system is first triggered. The warning signal shall sound for an appropriate time before the extinguishing agent is released and it shall not be possible to switch it off. |
|
(c) |
Warning signals shall be clearly visible in the rooms to be protected and outside the accesses to them and clearly audible even under operating conditions producing the loudest inherent noise. They shall be clearly distinct from all other acoustic and optical signals in the room to be protected. |
|
(d) |
The acoustic warning signals shall be clearly audible in the adjacent rooms even when connecting doors are closed and under operating conditions producing the loudest inherent noise. |
|
(e) |
If the warning system is not self-monitoring as regards short-circuits, wire breaks and voltage drops, it shall be possible to check that it is working properly. |
|
(f) |
At every entrance to a room that can be supplied with extinguishing agent, a clearly visible notice shall be put up bearing the following text in red lettering on a white background: ‘Vorsicht, Feuerlöscheinrichtung! Bei Ertönen des Warnsignals (Beschreibung des Signals) den Raum sofort verlassen! Attention, installation d'extinction d'incendie Quitter immédiatement ce local au signal (description du signal)! Let op, brandblusinstallatie! Bij het in werking treden van het alarmsignaal (omschrijving van het signaal) deze ruimte onmiddellijk verlaten! Warning, fire-fighting installation! Leave the room as soon as the warning signal sounds (description of signal)’ |
7. Pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes
|
(a) |
Pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes shall comply with the provisions in force in one of the Member States. |
|
(b) |
Pressure tanks shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. |
|
(c) |
Pressure tanks, fittings and pressure pipes are not to be installed in accommodation spaces. |
|
(d) |
The temperature in cabinets and installation spaces containing pressure tanks shall not exceed 50 °C. |
|
(e) |
Cabinets or installation spaces on deck shall be firmly fixed in place and have air vents which are to be arranged in such a way that in the event of a leak in the pressure tank no gas can escape into the interior of the vessel. Direct connections to other rooms are not permitted. |
8. Quantity of extinguishing agent
If the quantity of extinguishing agent is intended for protecting more than one room, the total amount of extinguishing agent available does not need to be greater than the quantity necessary for the largest room to be protected.
9. Installation, inspection and documentation
|
(a) |
The system shall be installed or converted only by a firm specialising in fire-fighting systems. The requirements specified by the extinguishing agent manufacturer and the system manufacturer (product data sheet, safety data sheet) are to be complied with. |
|
(b) |
The system shall be checked by an expert:
|
|
(c) |
In the inspection the expert shall check whether the system meets the requirements of this chapter. |
|
(d) |
The inspection shall cover at least the following:
|
|
(e) |
An inspection certificate shall be issued, signed by the inspector and showing the date of the inspection. |
|
(f) |
The number of permanently installed fire-fighting systems shall be entered in the Community certificate. |
10. CO2-fire-fighting systems
Fire-fighting systems using CO2 as the extinguishing agent shall comply with the following provisions in addition to the requirements under sections 1 to 9:
|
(a) |
CO2 containers shall be housed outside the room to be protected in a space or cabinet hermetically separated from other rooms. The doors to these installation spaces and cabinets shall open outwards, be lockable and bear on the outside a symbol for ‘General danger warning’ in accordance with Fig. 4 of Appendix I, at least 5 cm in height, together with the marking ‘CO2’ in the same colour and with the same height. |
|
(b) |
Installation spaces below decks for CO2 containers shall be accessible only from the open air. These spaces shall have their own adequate artificial ventilation system with extraction ducts, completely separate from other ventilation systems on board. |
|
(c) |
The CO2 containers shall not be filled to more than 0,75 kg/l. The specific volume of unpressurised CO2 gas is to be taken as 0,56 m3/kg. |
|
(d) |
The volume of CO2 for the room to be protected shall be at least 40 % of its gross volume. It shall be possible to supply this volume within 120 seconds, and to check whether supply has been completed. |
|
(e) |
Opening the container valves and operating the flood valve shall be separate control operations. |
|
(f) |
The appropriate time mentioned under section 6(b) shall be at least 20 seconds. There shall be a reliable device to ensure the delay before delivery of the CO2 gas. |
11. HFC-227ea — fire-fighting systems
Fire-fighting systems using HFC-227ea as the extinguishing agent shall comply with the following provisions in addition to the requirements under sections 1 to 9:
|
(a) |
If there are several rooms to be protected, each with a different gross volume, each room shall be provided with its own fire-fighting system. |
|
(b) |
Each container of HFC-227ea that is installed in the room to be protected shall be equipped with an overpressure relief valve. This shall harmlessly release the contents of the container into the room to be protected if the container is exposed to the effects of fire and the fire-fighting system has not been triggered. |
|
(c) |
Each container shall be fitted with a device for checking the gas pressure. |
|
(d) |
The containers shall not be filled to more than 1,15 kg/l. The specific volume of the unpressurised HFC-227ea is to be taken as 0,1374 m3/kg. |
|
(e) |
The volume of HFC-227ea for the room to be protected shall be at least 8 % of the room's gross volume. This volume shall be supplied within 10 seconds. |
|
(f) |
The HFC-227ea containers shall be provided with a pressure monitor which triggers an acoustic and optical alarm signal in the wheelhouse in the event of an unauthorised loss of propellant. If there is no wheelhouse, this alarm signal shall be given outside the room to be protected. |
|
(g) |
After flooding, the concentration in the room to be protected shall not exceed 10,5 %. |
|
(h) |
The fire-fighting system shall not contain any parts made of aluminium. |
12. IG-541 — fire-fighting systems
Fire-fighting systems using IG-541 as the extinguishing agent shall comply with the following provisions in addition to the requirements under sections 1 to 9:
|
(a) |
If there are several rooms to be protected, each with a different gross volume, each room shall be provided with its own fire-fighting system. |
|
(b) |
Each container of IG-541 that is installed in the room to be protected shall be equipped with an overpressure relief valve. This shall harmlessly release the contents of the container into the room to be protected if the container is exposed to the effects of fire and the fire-fighting system has not been triggered. |
|
(c) |
Each container shall be fitted with a device for checking the contents. |
|
(d) |
The filling pressure of the container shall not exceed 200 bar at + 15 °C. |
|
(e) |
The volume of IG-541 for the room to be protected shall be at least 44 % and no more than 50 % of the room's gross volume. This volume shall be supplied within 120 seconds. |
13. Fire-fighting systems for protecting objects
For protecting objects in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms, permanently installed fire-fighting systems shall be permissible only on the basis of recommendations from the Committee.
Article 10.04
Ship's boats
1. The following craft shall carry a ship's boat according to European standard EN 1914:1997:
|
(a) |
motor vessels and barges exceeding 150 t deadweight; |
|
(b) |
tugs and pushers with a water displacement of more than 150 m3; |
|
(c) |
floating equipment; |
|
(d) |
passenger vessels. |
2. It shall be possible for one person to launch such ship's boats safely within 5 minutes from the first manual action necessary. If a powered launching device is used this shall be such that safe, quick launching shall not be impaired if its power supply fails.
3. Inflatable ship's boats shall be inspected according to manufacturer's instructions.
Article 10.05
Lifebuoys and lifejackets
1. On board craft there shall be at least three lifebuoys in accordance with European standard EN 14144:2002. They shall be ready for use and attached to the deck at appropriate points without being attached to their mounting. At least one lifebuoy shall be in the immediate vicinity of the wheelhouse and shall be equipped with a self-igniting, battery-powered light that will not be extinguished in water.
2. A personalised, automatically inflatable lifejacket in accordance with European standards EN 395:1998 or EN 396:1998 shall be within reach of every person who is regularly on board a craft.
Non-inflatable lifejackets in accordance with these standards shall also be admissible for children.
3. Lifejackets shall be inspected in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
CHAPTER 11
SAFETY AT WORK STATIONS
Article 11.01
General
1. Vessels shall be built, arranged and equipped in such a way as to enable persons to work and move about in safety.
2. Permanently installed facilities that are necessary for working on board shall be arranged, laid out and secured in such a way as to permit safe and easy operation, use and maintenance. If necessary, mobile or high-temperature components shall be fitted with protective devices.
Article 11.02
Protection against falling
1. Decks and side decks shall be flat and at no point be likely to cause tripping; it shall be impossible for puddles to form.
2. Decks, side decks, engine-room floors, landings, stairways and the tops of side deck bollards shall have non-slip surfaces.
3. The tops of side deck bollards and obstacles in passageways, such as the edges of steps, shall be painted in a colour contrasting with the surrounding deck.
4. The outer edges of decks, as well as work stations where persons might fall more than 1 m, shall be fitted with bulwarks or coamings that are at least 0,70 m high or with a guard rail in accordance with European standard EN 711:1995, which shall comprise a handrail, a rail at knee height and a foot-rail. Side decks shall be fitted with a foot-rail and a continuous hand-rail that is secured to the coaming. Coaming hand-rails shall not be required where side decks are fitted with non-retractable shipside guard rails.
5. At work stations where there is danger of falling more than 1 m the inspection body may require appropriate fittings and equipment to ensure safe working.
Article 11.03
Dimensions of working spaces
Working spaces shall be large enough to provide every person working in them with adequate freedom of movement.
Article 11.04
Side decks
1. The clear width of a side deck shall be at least 0,60 m. That figure may be reduced to 0,50 m at certain points that are necessary for the operation of the vessel such as deck-washing valves. It may be reduced to 0,40 m at bollards and cleats.
2. Up to a height of 0,90 m above the side deck, the clear width of the side deck may be reduced to 0,54 m provided that the clear width above, between the outer edge of the hull and the inner edge of the hold, is not less than 0,65 m. In this case, the clear width of the side deck may be reduced to 0,50 m if the outer edge of the side deck is fitted with a guard rail in accordance with European standard EN 711:1995 to prevent falling. On vessels 55 m or less in length with only aft accommodation, the guard rail may be dispensed with.
3. The requirements of sections 1 and 2 shall apply up to a height of 2,00 m above the side deck.
Article 11.05
Access to working spaces
1. Points of access and passageways for the movement of persons and objects shall be of sufficient size and so arranged that:
|
(a) |
in front of the access opening, there is sufficient room not to impede movement; |
|
(b) |
the clear width of the passageway shall be appropriate for the intended use of the working space and shall be not less than 0,60 m, except in the case of craft less than 8 m wide, where it may be reduced to 0,50 m; |
|
(c) |
the clear height of the passageway including the sill is not less than 1,90 m. |
2. Doors shall be so arranged that they can be opened and closed safely from either side. They shall be protected against accidental opening or closing.
3. Appropriate stairs, ladders or steps shall be installed in accesses, exits and passageways where there is more than a 0,50 m difference in floor level.
4. Working spaces which are manned continuously shall be fitted with stairs if there is a difference in floor level of more than 1,00 m. This requirement shall not apply to emergency exits.
5. Vessels with holds shall have at least one permanently installed means of access at each end of each hold.
By way of derogation from the first sentence the permanently installed means of access may be dispensed with if at least two movable ladders are provided which reach at least 3 rungs over the hatch coaming at an angle of inclination of 60°.
Article 11.06
Exits and emergency exits
1 The number, arrangement and dimensions of exits, including emergency exits, shall be in keeping with the purpose and dimensions of the relevant space. Where one of the exits is an emergency exit, it shall be clearly marked as such.
2. Emergency exits or windows or the covers of skylights to be used as emergency exits shall have a clear opening of not less than 0,36 m2, and the smallest dimension shall be not less than 0,50 m.
Article 11.07
Ladders, steps and similar devices
1. Stairs and ladders shall be securely fixed. Stairs shall be not less than 0,60 m wide and the clear width between hand-rails shall be not less than 0,60 m; steps shall be not less than 0,15 m deep; steps shall have non-slip surfaces and stairs with more than three steps shall be fitted with hand-rails.
2. Ladders and separately attached rungs shall have a clear width of not less than 0,30 m; rungs shall be not more than 0,30 m apart and the distance between rungs and structures shall be not less than 0,15 m.
3. Ladders and separately attached rungs shall be clearly recognisable from above and shall be equipped with safety handles above exit openings.
4. Movable ladders shall be at least 0,40 m wide, and at least 0,50 m wide at the base; it shall be possible to ensure that they will not topple or skid; the rungs shall be securely fixed in the uprights.
Article 11.08
Interior spaces
1. The dimensions, arrangement and layout of interior working spaces shall be in keeping with the work to be carried out and shall meet the health and safety requirements. They shall be equipped with sufficient non-dazzle lighting and with sufficient ventilation arrangements. If necessary, they shall be fitted with heating appliances capable of maintaining an adequate temperature.
2. The floors of interior working spaces shall be solid and durable, and shall be designed not to cause tripping or slipping. Openings in decks and floors shall, when open, be secured against the danger of falling, and windows and skylights shall be so arranged and fitted that they can be operated and cleaned safely.
Article 11.09
Protection against noise and vibration
1. Working spaces shall be so situated, equipped and designed that crew members are not exposed to harmful vibrations.
2. Permanent working spaces shall, in addition, be so constructed and soundproofed that the health and safety of crew members are not affected by noise.
3. For crew members who are likely to be exposed to noise levels exceeding 85 dB(A) every day individual acoustic protection devices shall be available. In working spaces where noise levels exceed 90 dB(A) it shall be indicated that wearing of acoustic protection devices is mandatory by a symbol ‘Wear acoustic protection device’ with a diameter of at least 10 cm in accordance with Fig. 7 of Appendix I.
Article 11.10
Hatch covers
1. Hatch covers shall be easily accessible and safe to handle. Hatch-cover components weighing more than 40 kg shall be designed to slide or pivot or be fitted with mechanical opening devices. Hatch covers operated by lifting gear shall be fitted with adequate and easily accessible attachment devices. Non-interchangeable hatch covers and upper sills shall be clearly marked to show the hatches to which they belong and their correct position on those hatches.
2. Hatch covers shall be secured against being tilted by the wind or by loading gear. Sliding covers shall be fitted with catches to prevent accidental horizontal movement of more than 0,40 m; they shall be capable of being locked in their final position. Appropriate devices shall be fitted to hold stacked hatch covers in position.
3. The power supply for mechanically operated hatch covers shall be cut off automatically when the control switch is released.
4. Hatch covers shall be capable of bearing the loads to which they are likely to be subjected: Hatch covers designed to be walked on shall be capable of bearing concentrated loads of at least 75 kg. Hatch covers not designed to be walked on shall be marked as such. Hatch covers designed to receive deck cargo shall have the permissible load in t/m2 marked on them. Where supports are needed to achieve the maximum permissible load this shall be indicated in an appropriate place; in this case the relevant drawings shall be kept on board.
Article 11.11
Winches
1. Winches shall be designed in such a way as to enable work to be carried out safely. They shall be fitted with devices that prevent unintentional load release. Winches that do not lock automatically shall be fitted with a brake that is adequate to deal with their tractive force.
2. Hand-operated winches shall be fitted with devices to prevent kick-back of the crank. Winches that are both power- and manually driven shall be designed in such a way that the motive-power control cannot actuate the manual control.
Article 11.12
Cranes
1. Cranes shall be built in accordance with best practice. The forces arising during their operation shall be safely transmitted into the vessel's structure; they shall not impair its stability.
2. A manufacturer's plate containing the following information shall be affixed to cranes:
|
(a) |
manufacturer's name and address; |
|
(b) |
the CE marking, together with the year of manufacture; |
|
(c) |
series or type reference; |
|
(d) |
where applicable, serial number. |
3. The maximum permissible loadings shall be permanently marked in a clearly legible manner on cranes.
Where a crane's safe working load does not exceed 2 000 kg it will be sufficient if the safe working load at the maximum reach is permanently marked in a clearly legible manner on the crane.
4. There shall be devices to protect against crushing or shearing accidents. The outer parts of the crane shall leave a safety clearance of 0,5 m upwards, downwards and to the sides, between them and all surrounding objects. The safety clearance to the sides shall not be required outside work stations and passageways.
5. It shall be possible to protect power driven cranes against unauthorised use. It shall only be possible to start these up from the crane's driving position. The control shall be of the automatic-return type (buttons without stops); their operating direction shall be unambiguously clear.
If the motive power fails it shall not be possible for the load to drop uncontrolled. Unintentional crane movements shall be prevented.
Any upward movement of the hoisting device and any exceeding of the safe working load shall be limited by an appropriate device. Any downward movement of the hoisting device shall be limited if under any envisaged operating conditions at the moment of attaching the hook there can be less than two cable windings on the drum. The corresponding counter movement shall still be possible after the automatic limiting devices have been actuated.
The tensile strength of the cables for running rigging shall correspond to five times the cable's permissible loading. The cable construction shall be faultless and the design shall be suitable for use on cranes.
6. Before putting into service for the first time or before putting back into service following major alteration, calculations and a load test shall provide proof of adequate strength and stability.
Where a crane's safe working load does not exceed 2 000 kg the expert may decide that the proof by calculation may be fully or partly replaced by a test with a load 1,25 times the safe working load carried out over the full working range.
The acceptance test according to the first or second paragraph shall be carried out by an expert recognised by the inspection body.
7. Cranes shall be checked regularly and in any case at least every 12 months, by an expert. During that inspection the safe working condition of the crane shall be determined by a visual check and an operating check.
8. Every ten years, at the latest, after the acceptance test the crane shall again be inspected by an expert recognised by the inspection body.
9. Cranes with a safe working load exceeding 2 000 kg, or which are used for transhipment of cargo, or which are mounted on board lifting jacks, pontoons and other floating equipment or worksite craft shall in addition meet the requirements of one of the Member States.
10. For all cranes at least the following documents shall be kept on board:
|
(a) |
the crane manufacturer's operating instructions, including at least the following information:
|
|
(b) |
certificates concerning the checks carried out in accordance with sections 6 to 8 or 9. |
Article 11.13
Storing flammable liquids
To store flammable liquids with a flash point of less than 55 °C there shall be a ventilated cupboard made of non-combustible material on deck. On its outside there shall be a symbol ‘Fire, naked flame and smoking prohibited’ with a diameter of at least 10 cm in accordance with Fig. 2 of Appendix I.
CHAPTER 12
ACCOMMODATION
Article 12.01
General
1. Vessels shall have accommodation for the persons lodging habitually on board, and at least for the minimum crew.
2. Accommodation shall be so designed, arranged and fitted out as to meet the health, safety and comfort needs of those on board. It shall be of safe and easy access and adequately insulated against heat and cold.
3. The inspection body may authorise exceptions to the provisions of this Chapter if the health and safety of those on board are ensured by other means.
4. The inspection body shall enter on the Community certificate any restrictions on the vessel's daily operating periods and its operating mode resulting from the exceptions referred to in section 3.
Article 12.02
Special design requirements for accommodation
1. It shall be possible to ventilate accommodation adequately even when the doors are closed; in addition, communal living quarters shall receive adequate daylight and, as far as possible, provide a view out.
2. Where there is no deck-level access to the accommodation and the difference in level is 0,30 m or more the accommodation shall be accessible by means of stairs.
3. In the foresection of the vessel no floor shall be more than 1,20 m below the plane of maximum draught.
4. Living and sleeping quarters shall have at least two exits which are as far apart from each other as possible and which serve as escape routes. One exit may be designed as an emergency exit. This does not apply to rooms with an exit leading directly onto the deck or into a corridor which serves as an escape route, provided the corridor has two exits apart from each other leading to port and starboard. Emergency exits, which may include skylights and windows, shall have a clear opening of at least 0,36 m2 and a shortest side no less than 0,50 m and permit rapid evacuation in an emergency. Insulation and cladding of escape routes shall be made of flame-retardant materials and the usability of escape routes shall be guaranteed at all times by appropriate means such as ladders or separately attached rungs.
5. Accommodation shall be protected against inadmissible noise and vibration. Sound pressure levels shall not exceed:
|
(a) |
70 dB(A) in communal living quarters; |
|
(b) |
60 dB(A) in sleeping quarters. This provision shall not apply to vessels operating exclusively outside the rest periods of the crew as laid down by the national legislation of the Member States. The restriction of the daily operating period shall be entered on the Community certificate. |
6. Headroom in the accommodation shall be not less than 2,00 m.
7. As a general rule, vessels shall have at least one communal living room partitioned off from the sleeping quarters.
8. The free floor area of communal living quarters shall be not less than 2 m2 per person, and in any event not less than 8 m2 in total (not counting furniture, except tables and chairs).
9. The cubic capacity of private living and sleeping rooms shall be not less than 7 m3 each.
10. The volume of airspace per person shall be at least 3,5 m3 in private living quarters. In sleeping quarters it shall be at least 5 m3 for the first occupant and at least 3 m3 for each additional occupant (not counting volume of furniture). Sleeping cabins shall, as far as possible, be intended for no more than two persons. Berths shall be not less than 0,30 m above the floor. Where one berth is placed over another, the headroom above each berth shall be not less than 0,60 m.
11. Doors shall have an opening whose upper edge is at least 1,90 m above deck or above the floor and a clear width of at least 0,60 m. The prescribed height may be achieved by means of sliding or hinged covers or flaps. Doors shall open to the outside and it shall be possible to open them from either side. Sills shall not be more than 0,40 m high, but shall nonetheless comply with the provisions of other safety regulations.
12. Stairways shall be permanently fixed and safely negotiable. They shall be deemed to be so when:
|
(a) |
they are at least 0,60 m wide; |
|
(b) |
the tread is at least 0,15 m deep; |
|
(c) |
the steps are non-slip; |
|
(d) |
stairways with more than three steps are fitted with at least one handrail or handle. |
13. Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids, and particularly those under such a high pressure that a leak could pose a danger to persons, shall not be located in the accommodation or in corridors leading to the accommodation. This does not apply to steam pipes and hydraulic system pipes, provided they are fitted in metal sleeves, and for the pipes of liquefied gas installations for domestic purposes.
Article 12.03
Sanitary installations
1. At least the following sanitary installations shall be provided in vessels with accommodation:
|
(a) |
one toilet per accommodation unit or per six crew members; it shall be possible to ventilate these with fresh air; |
|
(b) |
one wash basin with waste pipe and connected up to hot and cold potable water per accommodation unit or per four crew members; |
|
(c) |
one shower or bath connected up to hot and cold potable water per accommodation unit or per six crew members. |
2. The sanitary installations shall be in close proximity to the accommodation. Toilets shall not have direct access to galleys, mess rooms or combined communal living quarters/galleys.
3. Toilet compartments shall have a floor space of at least 1 m2, not less than 0,75 m wide and not less than 1,10 m long. Toilet compartments in cabins for no more than two persons may be smaller. Where a toilet contains a wash basin and/or shower, the floor space shall be increased at least by the floor space occupied by the wash basin and/or shower (or bath).
Article 12.04
Galleys
1. Galleys may be combined with communal living quarters.
2. Galleys shall comprise:
|
(a) |
a cooker; |
|
(b) |
a sink with waste connection; |
|
(c) |
a supply of potable water; |
|
(d) |
a refrigerator; |
|
(e) |
sufficient storage and working space. |
3. The eating area of combined galleys/communal living quarters shall be large enough to accommodate the number of crew normally using it at the same time. Seats shall be not less than 0,60 m wide.
Article 12.05
Potable water
1. Vessels with accommodation shall have a potable water installation. Potable water tank filling apertures and potable water hoses shall be marked as being intended exclusively for potable water. Potable water filler necks shall be installed above the deck.
2. Potable water installations shall:
|
(a) |
on their inner surfaces be made of a material which resists corrosion and poses no physiological danger; |
|
(b) |
be free of pipe sections where a regular flow of water is not guaranteed, and |
|
(c) |
be protected against excessive heating. |
3. In addition to section 2 potable water tanks shall:
|
(a) |
have a capacity of at least 150 l per person normally living on board, and at least per member of the minimum crew; |
|
(b) |
have a suitable, lockable opening to enable the inside to be cleaned; |
|
(c) |
have a water level indicator; |
|
(d) |
have ventilation pipes which lead to the open air or are fitted with appropriate filters. |
4. Potable water tanks shall not share walls with other tanks. Potable water pipes shall not pass through tanks containing other liquids. Connections are not permitted between the potable water supply system and other pipes. Pipes carrying gas or liquids other than potable water shall not pass through potable water tanks.
5. Potable water pressure vessels shall operate only on uncontaminated compressed air. Where it is produced by means of compressors, appropriate air filters and oil separators shall be installed directly in front of the pressure vessel unless the water and the air are separated by a diaphragm.
Article 12.06
Heating and ventilation
1. It shall be possible to heat accommodation in accordance with its intended use. Heating installations shall be appropriate for the weather conditions which may arise.
2. It shall be possible to ventilate the living and sleeping quarters adequately even when the doors are closed. Ventilation shall ensure adequate air circulation in all climatic conditions.
3. The accommodation shall be so designed and arranged as to prevent as far as possible the entry of foul air from other areas of the vessel such as engine rooms or holds; where forced-air ventilation is used, the intake vents shall be so placed as to satisfy the above requirements.
Article 12.07
Other accommodation installations
1. Each crew member living on board shall have an individual berth and an individual clothes locker fitted with a lock. The internal measurements of the berth shall be not less than 2,00 × 0,90 m.
2. Suitable places for storing and drying work clothes shall be provided, but not in the sleeping quarters.
3. All accommodation areas shall be fitted with electric lighting. Additional lamps using gas or liquid fuel may only be used in communal living quarters. Lighting devices using liquid fuel shall be made of metal and shall burn only fuels with a flash point above 55 °C or commercial paraffin oil. They shall be placed or attached so as not to constitute a fire hazard.
CHAPTER 13
FUEL-FIRED HEATING, COOKING AND REFRIGERATING EQUIPMENT
Article 13.01
General
1. Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment running on liquefied gas shall meet the requirements of Chapter 14.
2. Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment, together with its accessories, shall be so designed and installed that it is not dangerous even in the event of overheating. It shall be so installed that it cannot overturn or be moved accidentally.
3. The equipment referred to in section 2 shall not be installed in areas in which substances with a flash point below 55 °C are used or stored. No flues from these installations may pass through such areas.
4. The supply of air necessary for combustion shall be ensured.
5. Heating appliances shall be securely connected to flues, which shall be fitted with suitable cowls or devices affording protection against the wind. They shall be arranged in such a manner as to permit cleaning.
Article 13.02
Use of liquid fuels, oil-fired equipment
1. Heating, cooking and refrigeration equipment which uses liquid fuel may be operated only with fuels whose flash point is above 55 °C.
2. By way of derogation from section 1, cooking appliances and heating and refrigeration appliances fitted with burners with wicks and running on commercial paraffin oil may be permitted in the accommodation and wheelhouse provided the capacity of the fuel tank does not exceed 12 litres.
3. Appliances fitted with burners with wicks shall be:
|
(a) |
fitted with a metal fuel tank whose filling aperture may be locked and which has no soft-solder joints below the maximum filling level, and shall be designed and installed in such a way that the fuel tank cannot be opened or emptied accidentally; |
|
(b) |
capable of being lit without the aid of another liquid fuel; |
|
(c) |
so installed as to ensure the safe evacuation of combustion gases. |
Article 13.03
Vaporising oil burner stoves and atomising oil burner heating appliances
1. Vaporising oil burner stoves and atomising oil burner heating appliances shall be built in accordance with best practice.
2. Where a vaporising oil burner stove or an atomising oil burner heating appliance is installed in an engine room, the air supply to the heating appliance and the engines shall be so designed that the heating appliance and the engines can operate properly and safely independently of one another. Where necessary, there shall be a separate air supply. The equipment shall be installed in such a way that no flame from the burner can reach other parts of the engine room installations.
Article 13.04
Vaporising oil burner stoves
1. It shall be possible to light vaporising oil burner stoves without the aid of another combustible liquid. They shall be fixed above a metal drip pan which encompasses all the fuel-carrying parts, whose sides are at least 20 mm high and which has a capacity of at least 2 litres.
2. For vaporising oil burner stoves installed in an engine room, the sides of the metal drip pan prescribed in section 1 shall be at least 200 mm high. The lower edge of the vaporising burner shall be located above the edge of the drip pan. In addition, the upper edge of the drip pan shall extend at least 100 mm above the floor.
3. Vaporising oil burner stoves shall be fitted with a suitable regulator which, at all settings, ensures a virtually constant flow of fuel to the burner and which prevents any fuel leak should the flame go out. Regulators shall be considered suitable which function properly even when exposed to vibration and inclined up to 12° and which, in addition to a level-regulating float, have
|
(a) |
a second float which closes off the fuel supply safely and reliably when the permitted level is exceeded, or |
|
(b) |
an overflow pipe, but only if the drip pan has sufficient capacity to accommodate at least the contents of the fuel tank. |
4. Where the fuel tank of a vaporising oil burner stove is installed separately:
|
(a) |
the drop between the tank and the burner feed may not exceed that laid down in the manufacturer's operating instructions; |
|
(b) |
it shall be so installed as to be protected from unacceptable heating; |
|
(c) |
it shall be possible to interrupt the fuel supply from the deck. |
5. The flues of vaporising oil burner stoves shall be fitted with a device to prevent draught inversion.
Article 13.05
Atomising oil burner heating appliances
Atomising oil burner heating appliances shall in particular meet the following requirements:
|
(a) |
adequate ventilation of the burner shall be ensured before the fuel is supplied; |
|
(b) |
the fuel supply shall be regulated by a thermostat; |
|
(c) |
the fuel shall be ignited by an electric device or by a pilot flame; |
|
(d) |
a flame monitoring device shall cut off the fuel supply when the flame goes out; |
|
(e) |
the main switch shall be placed at an easily accessible point outside the installation room. |
Article 13.06
Forced-air heating appliances
Forced-air heating appliances consisting of a combustion chamber around which the heating air is conducted under pressure to a distribution system or to a room shall meet the following requirements:
|
(a) |
If the fuel is atomised under pressure the combustion air shall be supplied by a blower. |
|
(b) |
The combustion chamber shall be well ventilated before the burner can be lit. Ventilation may be considered complete when the combustion air blower continues to operate after the flame has gone out. |
|
(c) |
The fuel supply shall be automatically cut off if:
|
|
(d) |
It shall be possible to switch off the combustion air and heating air blowers from outside the room where the heating appliance is located. |
|
(e) |
Where heating air is drawn from outside, the intake vents shall be located as far as possible above the deck. They shall be installed in such a manner that rain and spray water cannot enter. |
|
(f) |
Heating air pipes shall be made of metal. |
|
(g) |
It shall not be possible to close the heating air outlet apertures completely. |
|
(h) |
It shall not be possible for any leaking fuel to reach the heating air pipes. |
|
(i) |
It shall not be possible for forced-air heating appliances to draw their heating air from an engine room. |
Article 13.07
Solid fuel heating
1. Solid fuel heating appliances shall be placed on a metal plate with raised edges such that no burning fuel or hot cinders fall outside the plate.
This requirement does not apply to appliances installed in compartments built of non-combustible materials and intended solely to house boilers.
2. Solid fuel boilers shall be fitted with thermostatic controls to regulate the flow of combustion air.
3. A means by which cinders can be quickly doused shall be placed in the vicinity of each heating appliance.
CHAPTER 14
LIQUEFIED GAS INSTALLATIONS FOR DOMESTIC PURPOSES
Article 14.01
General
1. Liquefied gas installations consist essentially of a supply unit comprising one or more gas receptacles, and of one or more pressure regulators, a distribution system and a number of gas-consuming appliances.
Spare and empty receptacles not in the supply unit shall not be considered part of the installation. Article 14.05 shall apply to them mutatis mutandis.
2. Installations may be operated only with commercial propane.
Article 14.02
Installations
1. Liquefied gas installations shall be suitable throughout for use with propane and shall be built and installed in accordance with best practice.
2. Liquefied gas installations may be used only for domestic purposes in the accommodation and the wheelhouse, and for corresponding purposes on passenger vessels.
3. There may be a number of separate installations on board. A single installation shall not be used to serve accommodation areas separated by a hold or a fixed tank.
4. No part of a liquefied gas installation shall be located in the engine room.
Article 14.03
Receptacles
1. Only receptacles with an approved content of between 5 and 35 kg are permitted. In the case of passenger vessels, the inspection body may approve the use of receptacles with a larger content.
2. Receptacles shall bear the official stamp certifying that they have been accepted following the required tests.
Article 14.04
Location and arrangement of supply units
1. Supply units shall be installed on deck in a freestanding or wall cupboard located outside the accommodation in a position such that it does not interfere with movement on board. They shall not, however, be installed against the fore or aft bulwark. The cupboard may be a wall cupboard set into the superstructure provided that it is gastight and can only be opened from outside the superstructure. It shall be so located that the distribution pipes leading to the gas consumption points are as short as possible.
No more receptacles may be in operation simultaneously than are necessary for the functioning of the installation. Several receptacles may be connected only if a reversing coupler is used. Up to four receptacles may be connected per supply unit. The number of receptacles on board, including spare receptacles, shall not exceed six per installation.
Up to six receptacles may be connected on passenger vessels with galleys or canteens for passengers. The number of receptacles on board, including spare receptacles, shall not exceed nine per installation.
Pressure regulators, or in case of two-stage regulation the first pressure regulator, shall be fitted to a wall in the same cupboard as the receptacles.
2. Supply units shall be so installed that any leaking gas can escape from the cupboard into the open without any risk of it penetrating inside the vessel or coming into contact with a source of ignition.
3. Cupboards shall be constructed of flame-retardant materials and shall be sufficiently ventilated by apertures in the top and bottom. Receptacles shall be placed upright in the cupboards in such a way that they cannot overturn.
4. Cupboards shall be so built and placed that the temperature of the receptacles cannot exceed 50 °C.
5. The words ‘Liquefied gas’ and a ‘Fire, naked flame and smoking prohibited’ symbol at least 10 cm in diameter in accordance with Fig. 2 of Appendix I shall be affixed to the outer wall of the cupboard.
Article 14.05
Spare and empty receptacles
Spare and empty receptacles not located in the supply unit shall be stored outside the accommodation and the wheelhouse in a cupboard built in accordance with Article 14.04.
Article 14.06
Pressure regulators
1. Gas-consuming appliances may be connected to receptacles only through a distribution system fitted with one or more pressure regulators to bring the gas pressure down to the utilisation pressure. The pressure may be reduced in one or two stages. All pressure regulators shall be set permanently at a pressure determined in accordance with Article 14.07.
2. The final pressure regulators shall be either fitted with or immediately followed by a device to protect the pipe automatically against excess pressure in the event of a malfunctioning of the pressure regulator. It shall be ensured that in the event of a leak in the protection device any leaking gas can escape into the open without any risk of it penetrating inside the vessel or coming into contact with a source of ignition; if necessary, a special pipe shall be fitted for this purpose.
3. The protection devices and vents shall be protected against the entry of water.
Article 14.07
Pressure
1. Where two-stage regulating systems are used, the mean pressure shall be not more than 2,5 bar above atmospheric pressure.
2. The pressure at the outlet from the last pressure regulator shall be not more than 0,05 bar above atmospheric pressure, with a tolerance of 10 %.
Article 14.08
Piping and flexible tubes
1. Pipes shall consist of permanently installed steel or copper tubing.
However, pipes connecting with the receptacles shall be high-pressure flexible tubes or spiral tubes suitable for propane. Gas-consuming appliances may, if not permanently installed, be connected by means of suitable flexible tubes not more than 1 m long.
2. Pipes shall be able to withstand any stresses, in particular regarding corrosion and strength, which may occur under normal operating conditions on board and their characteristics and layout shall be such that they ensure a satisfactory flow of gas at the appropriate pressure to the gas-consuming appliances.
3. Pipes shall have as few joints as possible. Both pipes and joints shall be gastight and shall remain gastight despite any vibration or expansion to which they may be subjected.
4. Pipes shall be readily accessible, properly fixed and protected at every point where they might be subject to impact or friction, particularly where they pass through steel bulkheads or metal walls. The entire surface of steel pipes shall be treated against corrosion.
5. Flexible pipes and their joints shall be able to withstand any stresses which may occur under normal operating conditions on board. They shall be installed in such a way that they are free of tension, cannot be heated excessively and can be inspected over their entire length.
Article 14.09
Distribution system
1. It shall be possible to shut off the entire distribution system by means of a main valve which is at all times easily and rapidly accessible.
2. Each gas-consuming appliance shall be supplied by a separate branch of the distribution system, and each branch shall be controlled by a separate closing device.
3. Valves shall be fitted at points where they are protected from the weather and from impact.
4. An inspection connection shall be fitted after each pressure regulator. It shall be ensured using a closing device that in pressure tests the pressure regulator is not exposed to the test pressure.
Article 14.10
Gas-consuming appliances and their installation
1. The only appliances that may be installed are propane-consuming appliances approved in one of the Member States and equipped with devices that effectively prevent the escape of gas in the event of either the flame or the pilot light being extinguished.
2. Appliances shall be so placed and connected that they cannot overturn or be accidentally moved and any risk of accidental wrenching of the connecting pipes is avoided.
3. Heating and water-heating appliances and refrigerators shall be connected to a flue for evacuating combustion gases into the open air.
4. The installation of gas-consuming appliances in the wheelhouse is permitted only if the wheelhouse is so constructed that no leaking gas can escape into the lower parts of the craft, in particular through the penetrations for control lines to the engine room.
5. Gas-consuming appliances may be installed in sleeping quarters only if combustion is independent of ambient air in the quarters.
6. Gas-consuming appliances in which combustion depends on ambient air shall be installed in rooms which are sufficiently large.
Article 14.11
Ventilation and evacuation of combustion gases
1. In rooms containing gas-consuming appliances in which combustion depends on ambient air, fresh air shall be supplied and combustion gases evacuated by means of ventilation apertures of adequate dimensions, with a clear section of at least 150 cm2 per aperture.
2. Ventilation apertures shall not have any closing device and shall not lead to sleeping quarters.
3. Evacuation devices shall be so designed as to ensure the safe evacuation of combustion gases. They shall be reliable in operation and made of non-combustible materials. Their operation shall not be affected by forced ventilation.
Article 14.12
Operating and safety requirements
An operating instruction shall be affixed on board in a suitable place. It shall contain at least the following:
‘The valves of receptacles not connected to the distribution system shall be closed, even if the receptacles are presumed empty.’
‘Flexible pipes shall be replaced as soon as their condition so requires.’
‘All gas-consuming appliances shall be connected or the corresponding connecting pipes shall be sealed.’
Article 14.13
Acceptance test
Before a liquefied gas installation is put into service, after any modification or repair and on every renewal of the attestation referred to in Article 14.15, the entire installation shall be accepted by an expert recognised by the inspection body. During the acceptance test the expert shall verify whether the installation conforms to the requirements of this Chapter. He shall submit an acceptance report to the inspection body.
Article 14.14
Tests
Tests on the installation shall be carried out under the following conditions:
|
1. |
Medium-pressure pipes between the closing device, referred to in Article 14.09, section 4, of the first pressure regulator and the valves fitted before the final pressure regulator:
|
|
2. |
Pipes at the service pressure between the closing device, referred to in Article 14.09, section 4, of the only pressure regulator or the final pressure regulator and the valves fitted before the gas-consuming appliances:
|
|
3. |
Pipes situated between the closing device, referred to in Article 14.09, section 4, of the only pressure regulator or the final pressure regulator and the controls of gas-consuming appliances:
|
|
4. |
In the tests referred to in sections 1(b), 2 and 3, the pipes are deemed gastight if, after sufficient time to allow for equalisation with ambient temperature, no decrease in the test pressure is observed during a further 10 minute test period. |
|
5. |
Receptacle connectors, pipe joints and other fittings subjected to the pressure in the receptacles, and joints between pressure regulators and the distribution pipe:
|
|
6. |
All gas-consuming appliances shall be brought into service at the nominal capacity and shall be tested for satisfactory and undisturbed combustion at different capacity settings. Flame failure devices shall be checked to ensure that they operate satisfactorily. |
|
7. |
After the test referred to in section 6, it shall be verified for each gas-consuming appliance connected to a flue, whether, after five minutes' operation at the nominal capacity, with windows and doors closed and the ventilation devices in operation, any combustion gases are escaping into the room through the air intake. If there is a more than momentary escape of such gases, the cause shall immediately be detected and remedied. The appliance shall not be approved for use until all defects have been eliminated. |
Article 14.15
Attestation
1. The Community certificate shall include an attestation to the effect that all liquefied gas installations conform to the requirements of this Chapter.
2. The attestation will be issued by the inspection body following the acceptance test referred to in Article 14.13.
3. The attestation shall be valid for a period not exceeding three years. It may be renewed only after a further acceptance test carried out in accordance with Article 14.13.
Exceptionally, where the owner of a vessel or his representative submits a reasoned request, the inspection body may extend the validity of the attestation for not more than three months without carrying out the acceptance test referred to in Article 14.13. Such extension shall be entered in the Community certificate.
CHAPTER 15
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO PASSENGER VESSELS
Article 15.01
General provisions
1. The following provisions shall not apply:
|
(a) |
Article 3.02, section 1(b); |
|
(b) |
Articles 4.01 to 4.03; |
|
(c) |
Article 8.08, section 2, second sentence, and section 7; |
|
(d) |
Article 9.14, section 3, second sentence, for rated voltages of over 50 V. |
2. The following items of equipment are prohibited on passenger vessels:
|
(a) |
lamps powered by liquefied gas or liquid fuel according to Article 12.07, section 3; |
|
(b) |
vaporising oil-burner stoves according to Article 13.04; |
|
(c) |
solid fuel heaters according to Article 13.07; |
|
(d) |
devices fitted with wick burners according to Article 13.02, sections 2 and 3, and |
|
(e) |
liquefied gas devices according to Chapter 14. |
3. Vessels without their own power cannot be licensed for passenger transport.
4. On passenger vessels, areas shall be provided for use by persons with reduced mobility, according to the provisions of this Chapter. If the application of provisions of this Chapter which take into account the specific safety needs of persons with reduced mobility is difficult in practice or incurs unreasonable costs, the inspection body may allow derogations from these provisions on the basis of recommendations in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive. These derogations shall be mentioned in the Community certificate.
Article 15.02
Vessels' hulls
1. In the course of the inspections referred to in Article 2.09, the thickness of the outside plating of steel passenger vessels shall be determined as follows:
|
(a) |
The minimum thickness tmin of the bottom, bilge and side plating of the outer hull of passenger vessels is determined in accordance with the larger value of the following formulae:
In these formulae:
|
;
.|
(b) |
It is permissible to fall short of the minimum value determined in accordance with (a) above for the plate thickness in cases where the permitted value has been determined and certified on the basis of a mathematical proof for the sufficient strength (longitudinal, transverse and local) of the vessel's hull. |
|
(c) |
At no point of the outside plating shall the thickness calculated in accordance with (a) or (b) above be less than 3 mm. |
|
(d) |
Plate renewals shall be carried out when bottom, bilge or side plate thicknesses have fallen short of the minimum value determined in accordance with (a) or (b), in conjunction with (c) above. |
2. The number and position of bulkheads shall be selected such that, in the event of flooding, the vessel remains buoyant according to Article 15.03, sections 7 to 13. Every portion of the internal structure which affects the efficiency of the subdivision of such vessels shall be watertight, and shall be of a design which will maintain the integrity of the subdivision.
3. The distance between the collision bulkhead and the forward perpendicular shall be at least 0,04 LWL and not more than 0,04 LWL + 2 m.
4. A transverse bulkhead may be fitted with a bulkhead recess, if all parts of this offset lie within the safe area.
5. The bulkheads, which are taken into account in the damaged stability calculation according to Article 15.03, sections 7 to 13, shall be watertight and be installed up to the bulkhead deck. Where there is no bulkhead deck, these bulkheads shall extend to a height at least 20 cm above the margin line.
6. The number of openings in these bulkheads shall be kept as low as is consistent with the type of construction and normal operation of the vessel. Openings and penetrations shall not have a detrimental effect on the watertight function of the bulkheads.
7. Collision bulkheads shall have no openings and no doors.
8. Bulkheads according to section 5 separating the engine rooms from passenger areas or crew and shipboard personnel accommodation shall have no doors.
9. Manually operated doors without remote control in bulkheads referred to in section 5, are permitted only in areas not accessible to passengers. They shall:
|
(a) |
remain closed at all times and be opened only temporarily to allow access; |
|
(b) |
be fitted with suitable devices to enable them to be closed quickly and safely; |
|
(c) |
display the following notice on both sides of the doors: ‘Close door immediately after passing through’. |
10. Doors in bulkheads referred to in section 5 that are open for long periods shall comply with the following requirements:
|
(a) |
They shall be capable of being closed from both sides of the bulkhead and from an easily accessible point above the bulkhead deck. |
|
(b) |
After being closed by remote control the door shall be such that it can be opened again locally and closed safely. Closure shall not be impeded by carpeting, foot rails or other obstructions. |
|
(c) |
The time taken for the remote-controlled closure process shall be at least 30 seconds but not more than 60 seconds. |
|
(d) |
During the closure procedure an automatic acoustic alarm shall sound by the door. |
|
(e) |
The door drive and alarm shall also be capable of operating independently of the on-board power supply. There shall be a device at the location of the remote control that displays whether the door is open or closed. |
11. Doors in bulkheads referred to in section 5, and their actuators shall be located in the safe area.
12. There shall be a warning system in the wheelhouse to indicate which of the doors in bulkheads referred to in section 5 are open.
13. Open-ended piping and ventilation ducts shall be offset in such a way that, in any conceivable flooding, no additional spaces or tanks are flooded through them.
|
(a) |
If several compartments are openly connected by piping or ventilation ducts, such piping and ducts shall, in an appropriate place, be lead above the waterline corresponding to the worst possible flooding. |
|
(b) |
Piping need not meet the requirement under (a) if shut-off devices are fitted in the piping where it passes through the bulkheads and which can be remotely controlled from a point above the bulkhead deck. |
|
(c) |
Where a pipework system has no open outlet in a compartment, the pipework shall be regarded as intact in the event of this compartment being damaged, if it runs within the safe area and is more than 0,50 m from the bottom of the vessel. |
14. Remote controls of bulkhead doors according to section 10 and shut-off devices according to section 13(b) above the bulkhead deck shall be clearly indicated as such.
15. Where double bottoms are fitted, their height shall be at least 0,60 m, and where wing voids are fitted, their width shall be at least 0,60 m.
16. Windows may be situated below the margin line if they are watertight, cannot be opened, possess sufficient strength and conform to Article 15.06, section 14.
Article 15.03
Stability
1. The applicant shall prove by a calculation based on the results from the application of a standard for intact stability that the intact stability of the vessel is appropriate. All calculations shall be carried out free to trim and sinkage.
2. The intact stability shall be proven for the following standard load conditions:
|
(a) |
at the start of the voyage: 100 % passengers, 98 % fuel and fresh water, 10 % waste water; |
|
(b) |
during the voyage: 100 % passengers, 50 % fuel and fresh water, 50 % waste water; |
|
(c) |
at the end of the voyage: 100 % passengers, 10 % fuel and fresh water, 98 % waste water; |
|
(d) |
unladen vessel: no passengers, 10 % fuel and fresh water, no waste water. |
For all standard load conditions, the ballast tanks shall be considered as either empty or full in accordance with normal operational conditions.
As a precondition for changing the ballast whilst under way, the requirement of section 3(d) shall be proved for the following load condition:
100 % passengers, 50 % fuel and fresh water, 50 % waste water, all other liquid (including ballast) tanks are considered filled to 50 %.
If this condition cannot be met, an entry shall be made in item 52 of the Community certificate to the effect that, whilst under way, the ballast tanks can only be empty or full and that, whilst under way, the ballast conditions must not be changed.
3. The proof of adequate intact stability by means of a calculation shall be produced using the following definitions for the intact stability and for the standard load conditions mentioned in section 2(a) to (d):
|
(a) |
the maximum righting lever hmax shall occur at a heeling angle of φmax ≥ 15° and shall not be less than 0,20 m. However, in case φf < φmax the righting lever at the downflooding angle φf shall not be less than 0,20 m; |
|
(b) |
the downflooding angle φf shall not be less than 15°; |
|
(c) |
the area A under the curve of the righting lever shall, depending on the position of φf and φmax, reach at least the following values:
Where
|
|
(d) |
the initial metacentric height, GMo, corrected by the effect of the free surfaces in liquid tanks, shall not be less than 0,15 m; |
|
(e) |
in each of the following two cases the heeling angle shall not exceed 12°:
|
|
(f) |
for a heeling moment resulting from moments due to passengers, wind and turning according to sections 4, 5 and 6, the residual freeboard shall be not less than 200 mm; |
|
(g) |
for vessels with windows or other openings in the hull located below the bulkhead decks and not closed watertight, the residual safety clearance shall be at least 100 mm on the application of the three heeling moments resulting from subsection (f). |
4. The heeling moment due to one-sided accumulation of persons shall be calculated according to the following formula:
Mp = g · P · y = g · ΣPi · yi [kNm]
where:
|
P |
= |
total mass of persons on board in [t], calculated by adding up the maximum permitted number of passengers and the maximum number of shipboard personnel and crew under normal operating conditions, assuming an average mass per person of 0,075 t |
|||||||||||
|
y |
= |
lateral distance of centre of gravity of total mass of persons P from centre line in [m] |
|||||||||||
|
g |
= |
acceleration of gravity (g = 9,81 m/s2) |
|||||||||||
|
Pi |
= |
mass of persons accumulated on area Ai in [t]
|
|||||||||||
|
yi |
= |
lateral distance of geometrical centre of area Ai from centre line in [m] |
The calculation shall be carried out for an accumulation of persons both to starboard and to port.
The distribution of persons shall correspond to the most unfavourable one from the point of view of stability. Cabins shall be assumed unoccupied for the calculation of the persons' moment.
For the calculation of the loading cases, the centre of gravity of a person shall be taken as 1 m above the lowest point of the deck at 0,5 LWL, ignoring any deck curvature and assuming a mass of 0,075 t per person.
A detailed calculation of deck areas which are occupied by persons may be dispensed with if the following values are used:
|
P |
= |
where
|
|||||||
|
y |
= |
B/2 in [m] |
5. The moment due to wind pressure (Mw) shall be calculated as follows:
|
|
Mw = pw · Aw · (lw + T/2) [kNm] |
where
|
pw |
= |
the specific wind pressure of 0,25 kN/m2; |
|
Aw |
= |
lateral plane of the vessel above the plane of draught according to the considered loading condition in m2; |
|
lw |
= |
distance of the centre of gravity of the lateral plane AW from the plane of draught according to the considered loading condition in m. |
6. The moment due to centrifugal force (Mdr), caused by the turning of the vessel, shall be calculated as follows:
|
|
Mdr = cdr · CB · v2 · D/LWL · (KG – T/2) [kNm] |
where
|
cdr |
= |
a coefficient of 0,45; |
|
CB |
= |
block coefficient (if not known, taken as 1,0); |
|
v |
= |
maximum speed of the vessel in m/s; |
|
KG |
= |
distance between the centre of gravity and the keel line in m. |
For passenger vessels with propulsion systems according to Article 6.06, Mdr shall be derived from full-scale or model tests or else from corresponding calculations.
7. The applicant shall prove, by means of a calculation based on the method of lost buoyancy, that the damaged stability of the vessel is appropriate in the event of flooding. All calculations shall be carried out free to trim and sinkage.
8. Buoyancy of the vessel in the event of flooding shall be proven for the standard load conditions specified in section 2. Accordingly, mathematical proof of sufficient stability shall be determined for the three intermediate stages of flooding (25 %, 50 % and 75 % of flood build-up) and for the final stage of flooding.
9. Passenger vessels shall comply with the 1-compartment status and the 2-compartment status.
The following assumptions concerning the extent of damage shall be taken into account in the event of flooding:
|
|
1-compartment status |
2-compartment status |
|
Dimension of the side damage |
|
|
|
longitudinal l [m] |
1,20 + 0,07 · LWL |
|
|
transverse b [m] |
B/5 |
0,59 |
|
vertical h [m] |
from vessel bottom to top without delimitation |
|
|
Dimension of the bottom damage |
|
|
|
longitudinal l [m] |
1,20 + 0,07 · LWL |
|
|
transverse b [m] |
B/5 |
|
|
vertical h [m] |
0,59; pipework installed according to Article 15.02, section 13(c), shall be deemed intact |
|
|
(a) |
For 1-compartment status the bulkheads can be assumed to be intact if the distance between two adjacent bulkheads is greater than the damage length. Longitudinal bulkheads at a distance of less than B/3 from the outer plating measured perpendicular to centre line from the shell plating at the maximum draught shall not be taken into account for calculation purposes. |
|
(b) |
For 2-compartment status each bulkhead within the extent of damage will be assumed to be damaged. This means that the position of the bulkheads shall be selected in such a way as to ensure that the passenger vessel remains buoyant after flooding of two or more adjacent compartments in the longitudinal direction. |
|
(c) |
The lowest point of every non-watertight opening (e.g. doors, windows, access hatchways) shall lie at least 0,10 m above the damaged waterline. The bulkhead deck shall not be immersed in the final stage of flooding. |
|
(d) |
Permeability is assumed to be 95 %. If it is proven by a calculation that the average permeability of any compartment is less than 95 %, the calculated value can be used instead. The values to be adopted shall not be less than:
The calculation of free surface effect in intermediate stages of flooding shall be based on the gross surface area of the damaged compartments. |
|
(e) |
If damage of a smaller dimension than specified above produces more detrimental effects with respect to heeling or loss of metacentric height, such damage shall be taken into account for calculation purposes. |
10. For all intermediate stages of flooding referred to in section 8, the following criteria shall be met:
|
(a) |
the heeling angle φ at the equilibrium position of the intermediate stage in question shall not exceed 15°; |
|
(b) |
beyond the heel in the equilibrium position of the intermediate stage in question, the positive part of the righting lever curve shall display a righting lever value of GZ ≥ 0,02 m before the first unprotected opening becomes immersed or a heeling angle φ of 25° is reached; |
|
(c) |
non-watertight openings shall not be immersed before the heel in the equilibrium position of the intermediate stage in question has been reached. |
11. During the final stage of flooding, the following criteria shall be met taking into account the heeling moment due to persons in accordance with section 4:
|
(a) |
the heeling angle φE shall not exceed 10°; |
|
(b) |
beyond the equilibrium position the positive part of the righting lever curve shall display a righting lever value of GZR ≥ 0,05 m with an area A ≥ 0,0065 mrad. These minimum values for stability shall be met until the immersion of the first unprotected opening or in any case before reaching a heeling angle φm ≤ 25°; 
|
|
(c) |
non-watertight openings shall not be immersed before the equilibrium position has been reached; if such openings are immersed before this point, the rooms affording access are deemed to be flooded for damaged stability calculation purposes. |
12. The shut-off devices which shall be able to be closed watertight shall be marked accordingly.
13. If cross-flood openings to reduce asymmetrical flooding are provided, they shall meet the following conditions:
|
(a) |
for the calculation of cross-flooding, IMO Resolution A.266 (VIII) shall be applied; |
|
(b) |
they shall be self-acting; |
|
(c) |
they shall not be equipped with shut-off devices; |
|
(d) |
the total time allowed for compensation shall not exceed 15 minutes. |
Article 15.04
Safety clearance and freeboard
1. The safety clearance shall be at least equal to the sum of:
|
(a) |
the additional lateral immersion, which, measured on the outside plating, is produced by the permissible heeling angle according to Article 15.03, section 3(e), and |
|
(b) |
the residual safety clearance according to Article 15.03, section 3(g). |
For vessels without a bulkhead deck, the safety clearance shall be at least 500 mm.
2. The freeboard shall be at least equal to the sum of:
|
(a) |
the additional lateral immersion, which, measured on the outside plating, is produced by the heeling angle according to Article 15.03, section 3(e), and |
|
(b) |
the residual freeboard according to Article 15.03, section 3(f). |
However, the freeboard shall be at least 300 mm.
3. The plane of maximum draught is to be set so as to ensure compliance with the safety clearance according to section 1, and the freeboard according to section 2 and Articles 15.02 and 15.03.
4. For safety reasons, the inspection body may stipulate a greater safety clearance or a greater freeboard.
Article 15.05
Maximum permitted number of passengers
1. The inspection body shall set the maximum permitted number of passengers and shall enter this number on the Community certificate.
2. The maximum permitted number of passengers shall not exceed any of the following values:
|
(a) |
number of passengers for whom the existence of an evacuation area according to Article 15.06, section 8, has been proven; |
|
(b) |
number of passengers that has been taken into account for the stability calculation according to Article 15.03; |
|
(c) |
number of available berths for passengers on cabin vessels used for voyages including overnight stays. |
3. For cabin vessels which are also used as day trip vessels, the number of passengers shall be calculated for use both as a day trip vessel and as a cabin vessel and entered on the Community certificate.
4. The maximum permitted number of passengers shall be displayed on clearly legible and prominently positioned notices on board the vessel.
Article 15.06
Passenger rooms and areas
1. Passenger rooms shall:
|
(a) |
on all decks, be located aft of the level of the collision bulkhead and, as long as they are below the bulkhead deck, forward of the level of the aft-peak bulkhead, and |
|
(b) |
be separated from the engine and boiler rooms in a gas-tight manner; |
|
(c) |
be so arranged, that sight lines in accordance with Article 7.02 do not pass through them. |
2. Cupboards and rooms referred to in Article 11.13 and intended for the storage of flammable liquids shall be outside the passenger area.
3. The number and width of the exits of passenger rooms shall comply with the following requirements:
|
(a) |
Rooms or groups of rooms designed or arranged for 30 or more passengers or including berths for 12 or more passengers shall have at least two exits. On day trip vessels one of these two exits can be replaced by two emergency exits. |
|
(b) |
If rooms are located below the bulkhead deck, one of the exits can be a watertight bulkhead door, according to Article 15.02, section 10, leading into an adjacent compartment from which the upper deck can be reached directly. The other exit shall lead directly or, if permitted in accordance with (a), as an emergency exit into the open air, or to the bulkhead deck. This requirement does not apply to individual cabins. |
|
(c) |
Exits according to (a) and (b) shall be suitably arranged and shall have a clear width of at least 0,80 m and also a clear height of at least 2,00 m. For doors of passenger cabins and other small rooms, the clear width can be reduced to 0,70 m. |
|
(d) |
In the case of rooms or groups of rooms intended for more than 80 passengers the sum of the widths of all exits intended for passengers and which shall be used by them in an emergency shall be at least 0,01 m per passenger. |
|
(e) |
If the total width of the exits is determined by the number of passengers, the width of each exit shall be at least 0,005 m per passenger. |
|
(f) |
Emergency exits shall have a shortest side at least 0,60 m long or a minimum diameter of 0,70 m. They shall open in the direction of escape and be marked on both sides. |
|
(g) |
Exits of rooms intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall have a clear width of at least 0,90 m. Exits normally used for embarking and disembarking people with reduced mobility shall have a clear width of at least 1,50 m. |
4. Doors of passenger rooms shall comply with the following requirements:
|
(a) |
With the exception of doors leading to connecting corridors, they shall be capable of opening outwards or be constructed as sliding doors. |
|
(b) |
Cabin doors shall be made in such a way that they can also be unlocked from the outside at any time. |
|
(c) |
Powered doors shall open easily in the event of failure of the power supply to this mechanism. |
|
(d) |
For doors intended for use by persons with reduced mobility, there shall be from the direction from which the door opens, a minimum clearance of 0,60 m between the inner edge of the doorframe on the lock side and an adjacent perpendicular wall. |
5. Connecting corridors shall comply with the following requirements:
|
(a) |
They shall have a clear width of at least 0,80 m or, if they lead to rooms used by more than 80 passengers, at least 0,01 m per passenger. |
|
(b) |
Their clear height shall be not less than 2,00 m. |
|
(c) |
Connecting corridors intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall have a clear width of 1,30 m. Connecting corridors more than 1,50 m wide shall have hand rails on either side. |
|
(d) |
Where a part of the vessel or a room intended for passengers is served by a single connecting corridor, the clear width thereof shall be at least 1,00 m. |
|
(e) |
Connecting corridors shall be free of steps. |
|
(f) |
They shall lead only to open decks, rooms or staircases. |
|
(g) |
Dead ends in connecting corridors shall be not longer than two meters. |
6. In addition to the provisions of section 5, escape routes shall also comply with the following requirements:
|
(a) |
Stairways, exits and emergency exits shall be so disposed that, in the event of a fire in any given area, the other areas may be evacuated safely. |
|
(b) |
The escape routes shall lead by the shortest route to evacuation areas according to section 8. |
|
(c) |
Escape routes shall not lead through engine rooms or galleys. |
|
(d) |
There shall be no rungs, ladders or the like installed at any point along the escape routes. |
|
(e) |
Doors to escape routes shall be constructed in such a way as not to reduce the minimum width of the escape route referred to in section 5(a) or (d). |
|
(f) |
Escape routes and emergency exits shall be clearly signed. The signs shall be lit by the emergency lighting system. |
7. Escape routes and emergency exits shall have a suitable safety guidance system.
8. For all persons on board, there shall be muster areas available which satisfy the following requirements:
|
(a) |
The total area of the muster areas in m2 shall correspond to at least the value produced by the following formulae:
In these formulae the following definition applies:
|
|
(b) |
Each individual muster or evacuation area shall be larger than 10 m2. |
|
(c) |
The muster areas shall be clear of furniture, whether movable or fixed. |
|
(d) |
If movable furniture is located in a room in which muster areas are defined, it shall be secured appropriately to avoid slipping. |
|
(e) |
Life-saving appliances shall be easily accessible from the evacuation areas. |
|
(f) |
It shall be possible to evacuate people safely from these evacuation areas, using either side of the vessel. |
|
(g) |
The muster areas shall lie above the margin line. |
|
(h) |
The muster and evacuation areas are to be shown as such in the safety plan and signposted on board the vessel. |
|
(i) |
If fixed seats or benches are located in a room in which muster areas are defined the corresponding number of persons need not be taken into account when calculating the total area of muster areas according to (a). However, the number of persons for whom fixed seats or benches in a certain room are taken into account must not exceed the number of persons for whom muster areas are available in this room. |
|
(j) |
The provisions of (d) and (i) shall also apply to free decks on which muster areas are defined. |
|
(k) |
If collective life-saving appliances complying with Article 15.09, section 5, are available on board, the number of persons for whom such appliances are available may be disregarded when calculating the total surface area of the muster areas referred to in (a). |
|
(l) |
However, in all cases where reductions according to (i) to (k) are applied, the total area according to (a) shall be sufficient for at least 50 % of the maximum permitted number of passengers. |
9. Stairs and their landings in the passenger areas shall comply with the following requirements:
|
(a) |
They shall be constructed in accordance with European standard EN 13056:2000. |
|
(b) |
They shall have a clear width of at least 0,80 m or, if they lead to connecting corridors or areas used by more than 80 passengers, at least 0,01 m per passenger. |
|
(c) |
They shall have a clear width of at least 1,00 m if they provide the only means of access to a room intended for passengers. |
|
(d) |
Where there is not at least one staircase on each side of the vessel in the same room, they shall lie in the safe area. |
|
(e) |
In addition, stairs intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall comply with the following requirements:
|
Lifts intended for persons with reduced mobility, and lifting equipment, like stairlifts or lifting platforms, shall be constructed according to a relevant standard or a regulation of a Member State.
10. Parts of the deck intended for passengers, and which are not enclosed, shall comply with the following requirements:
|
(a) |
They shall be surrounded by a fixed bulwark or guard rail at least 1,00 m high or a railing according to the European standard EN 711:1995, construction type PF, PG or PZ. Bulwarks and railings of decks intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall be at least 1,10 m high. |
|
(b) |
Openings and equipment for embarking or disembarking and also openings for loading or unloading shall be such that they can be secured and have a clear width of at least 1,00 m. Openings, used normally for the embarking or disembarking of persons with reduced mobility, shall have a clear width of at least 1,50 m. |
|
(c) |
If the openings and equipment for embarking or disembarking cannot be observed from the wheelhouse, optical or electronic aids shall be provided. |
|
(d) |
Passengers sitting down shall not interrupt sight lines in accordance with Article 7.02. |
11. The parts of the vessel not intended for passengers, in particular access to the wheelhouse, to the winches and to the engine rooms, shall be such that they can be secured against unauthorised entry. At any such access, a symbol corresponding to Fig. 1 in Appendix I shall be displayed in a prominent position.
12. Gangways shall be constructed in accordance with European standard EN 14206:2003. By way of derogation from Article 10.02, section 2(d), their length can be less than 4 m.
13. Traffic areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall have a clear width of 1,30 m and be free of doorsteps and sills more than 0,025 m high. Walls in traffic areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility shall be equipped with handrails at a height of 0,90 m above the floor.
14. Glass doors and walls in traffic areas and also window panes shall be manufactured from pre-stressed glass or laminated glass. They may also be made from a synthetic material, provided this is authorised for use in a fire-protection context.
Transparent doors and transparent walls extending as far as the floor in traffic areas shall be prominently marked.
15. Superstructures or their roofs consisting completely of panoramic panes shall only be manufactured from materials which, in the event of an accident, reduce as much as possible the risks of injury to the persons on board.
16. Potable water systems shall, at least, comply with the requirements of Article 12.05.
17. There shall be toilets available for passengers. At least one toilet shall be fitted for use by persons with reduced mobility according to a relevant standard or a regulation of a Member State and shall be accessible from areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility.
18. Cabins without an opening window shall be connected to a ventilation system.
19. By analogy, rooms in which crew members or shipboard personnel are accommodated shall comply with the provisions of this Article.
Article 15.07
Propulsion system
In addition to the main propulsion system, vessels shall be equipped with a second independent propulsion system so as to ensure that, in the event of a breakdown affecting the main propulsion system, the vessel can continue to make steerageway under its own power.
The second independent propulsion system shall be placed in a separate engine room. If both engine rooms have common partitions, these shall be built according to Article 15.11, section 2.
Article 15.08
Safety devices and equipment
1. All passenger vessels shall have internal communication facilities according to Article 7.08. Such facilities shall also be available in the operation rooms and — where there is no direct communication from the wheelhouse — in the access and evacuation areas for passengers as referred to in Article 15.06, section 8.
2. All passenger areas shall be reachable via a loudspeaker system. The system shall be designed in such a way as to ensure that the information transmitted can be clearly distinguished from background noise. Loudspeakers are optional where direct communication between the wheelhouse and the passenger area is possible.
3. The vessel shall be equipped with an alarm system. The system shall include:
|
(a) |
An alarm system enabling passengers, crew members and shipboard personnel to alert the vessel's command and crew. This alarm should be given only in areas assigned to the vessel's command and to the crew; it should only be possible for the vessel's command to stop the alarm. The alarm shall be capable of being triggered from at least the following places:
The alarm triggers shall be installed at a height above the floor of 0,85 m to 1,10 m. |
|
(b) |
An alarm system enabling the vessel's command to alert passengers. This alarm shall be clearly and unmistakably audible in all rooms accessible to passengers. It shall be capable of being triggered from the wheelhouse and from a location that is permanently staffed. |
|
(c) |
An alarm system enabling the vessel's command to alert the crew and shipboard personnel. The alarm system referred to in Article 7.09, section 1, shall also reach the recreation rooms for the shipboard personnel, the cold-storage rooms and other store rooms. |
Alarm triggers shall be protected against unintentional use.
4. Each watertight compartment shall be fitted with a bilge level alarm.
5. Two motor-driven bilge pumps shall be provided.
6. A permanently installed drainage system according to Article 8.08, section 4, shall be provided on board.
7. Cold-storage room doors, even when locked, shall also be capable of being opened from the inside.
8. Where CO2 bar-systems are situated in rooms below deck these rooms shall be fitted with an automatic ventilation system which turns itself on automatically when the door or hatch to the room is opened. The ventilation ducts shall run down to 0,05 m from the floor of this room.
9. In addition to the first-aid kit according to Article 10.02, section 2(f), further first-aid kits shall be provided in sufficient number. The first-aid kits and their storage shall comply with the requirements set out in Article 10.02, section 2(f).
Article 15.09
Life-saving equipment
1. In addition to the lifebuoys specified in Article 10.05, section 1, all parts of the deck intended for passengers and not enclosed shall be equipped with lifebuoys in accordance with the European standard EN 14144:2003 on both sides of the vessel, positioned not more than 20 m apart.
Half of all the prescribed lifebuoys shall be fitted with a buoyant cord at least 30 m long with a diameter of 8 to 11 mm. The other half of the prescribed lifebuoys shall be fitted with a self-igniting, battery-powered light which will not be extinguished in water.
2. In addition to the lifebuoys referred to in section 1, the following equipment shall be available and ready for use:
|
(a) |
individual life-saving equipment according to Article 10.05, section 2, for shipboard personnel responsible for undertaking duties according to the safety rota; |
|
(b) |
individual life-saving equipment according to European standard EN 395:1998 or EN 396:1998 for other shipboard personnel. |
3. Passenger vessels shall have appropriate equipment to enable persons to be transferred safely to shallow water, to the bank or to another craft.
4. In addition to the life-saving equipment referred to in sections 1 and 2, individual life-saving equipment according to European standard EN 395:1998 or EN 396:1998 shall be available for 100 % of the maximum permitted number of passengers.
Where individual life-saving equipment as referred to in the first paragraph is not also suitable for children, individual life-saving equipment according to European standard EN 395:1998 for children weighing not more than 30 kg shall be available for 10 % of the maximum number of permitted passengers.
5. The term ‘collective life-saving equipment’ covers ship's boats according to Article 10.04, and life rafts.
Life rafts shall:
|
(a) |
bear a notice indicating their purpose and the number of persons for whom they are approved; |
|
(b) |
offer adequate seating space for the permitted number of persons; |
|
(c) |
provide a buoyancy of at least 750 N per person in fresh water; |
|
(d) |
be provided with a rope linked to the passenger vessel to prevent them drifting away; |
|
(e) |
be made of suitable materials and be resistant to oil, oil products and temperatures up to 50 °C; |
|
(f) |
assume and maintain a stable trim and, in this respect, be fitted with appropriate devices enabling them to be grabbed by the indicated number of persons; |
|
(g) |
be fluorescent orange in colour or have fluorescent surfaces, visible from all sides, of at least 100 cm2; |
|
(h) |
be such that they can be released from their stowed position and put overboard quickly and safely by one person, or can float free from their stowed position; |
|
(i) |
be provided with appropriate means of evacuation from the evacuation areas referred to in Article 15.06, section 8, onto the life rafts if the vertical distance between the deck of the evacuation areas and the plane of maximum draught is greater than 1 m. |
6. Additional collective life-saving appliances are items of life-saving equipment which ensure the buoyancy of several persons in the water. These shall:
|
(a) |
bear a notice indicating their purpose and the number of persons for whom they are approved; |
|
(b) |
provide a buoyancy of at least 100 N per person in fresh water; |
|
(c) |
be made of suitable materials and be resistant to oil, oil products and to temperatures of up to 50 °C; |
|
(d) |
assume and maintain a stable trim and, in this respect, be fitted with appropriate devices enabling them to be grabbed by the indicated number of persons; |
|
(e) |
be fluorescent orange in colour or have fluorescent surfaces, visible from all sides, of at least 100 cm2; |
|
(f) |
be such that they can be released from their stowed position and put overboard quickly and safely by one person, or can float free from their stowed position. |
7. Inflatable collective life-saving appliances shall in addition:
|
(a) |
comprise at least two separate air compartments; |
|
(b) |
inflate automatically or by manual command when launched; |
|
(c) |
assume and maintain a stable trim irrespective of the load to be supported, even when only half the air compartments are inflated. |
8. The life-saving appliances shall be stowed on board in such a way that they can be reached easily and safely when required. Concealed storage places shall be clearly marked.
9. Life-saving equipment shall be checked according to the manufacturer's instructions.
10. The ship's boat shall be equipped with an engine and a searchlight.
11. A suitable stretcher shall be available.
Article 15.10
Electrical Equipment
1. Only electrical equipment shall be permitted for lighting.
2. Article 9.16, section 3, shall also apply additionally for passageways and recreation rooms for passengers.
3. For the following rooms and locations, adequate lighting and emergency lighting shall be provided:
|
(a) |
locations where life-saving equipment is stored and where such equipment is normally prepared for use; |
|
(b) |
escape routes, access for passengers, including gangways, entrances and exits, connecting corridors, lifts and accommodation area companionways, cabin areas and accommodation areas; |
|
(c) |
markings on the escape routes and emergency exits; |
|
(d) |
in other areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility; |
|
(e) |
operation rooms, engine rooms, steering equipment rooms and their exits; |
|
(f) |
wheelhouse; |
|
(g) |
emergency power supply room; |
|
(h) |
points at which extinguishers and fire extinguishing equipment controls are located; |
|
(i) |
areas in which passengers, shipboard personnel and crew muster in the event of danger. |
4. There shall be an emergency power plant, consisting of an emergency power source and emergency switchboard, which, in the event of a failure of the supply to the following electrical equipment, can immediately take over as their replacement supply, where the equipment does not have its own power source:
|
(a) |
signal lights; |
|
(b) |
audible warning devices; |
|
(c) |
emergency lighting in accordance with section 3; |
|
(d) |
radiotelephone installations; |
|
(e) |
alarm, loudspeaker and on-board message communications systems; |
|
(f) |
searchlights according to Article 10.02, section 2(i); |
|
(g) |
fire alarm system; |
|
(h) |
other safety equipment such as automatic pressurised sprinkler systems or fire extinguishing pumps; |
|
(i) |
lifts and lifting equipment within the meaning of Article 15.06, section 9, second sentence. |
5. The light fittings for the emergency lighting shall be marked as such.
6. The emergency power plant shall be installed outside the main engine room, outside the rooms housing the power sources referred to in Article 9.02, section 1, and outside the room where the main switchboard is located; it shall be separated from these rooms by partitions according to Article 15.11, section 2.
Cables feeding the electrical installations in the event of an emergency shall be installed and routed in such a way as to maintain the continuity of supply of these installations in the event of fire or flooding. These cables shall never be routed through the main engine room, galleys or rooms where the main power source and its connected equipment is installed, except insofar as it is necessary to provide emergency equipment in such areas.
The emergency power plant shall be installed above the margin line.
7. The following are admissible for use as an emergency power source:
|
(a) |
auxiliary generator sets with their own independent fuel supply and independent cooling system which, in the event of a power failure, turn on and take over the supply of power within 30 seconds automatically or, if they are located in the immediate vicinity of the wheelhouse or any other location permanently manned by crew members, can be turned on manually, or |
|
(b) |
accumulator batteries, which, in the event of a power failure, turn on automatically or, if they are located in the immediate vicinity of the wheelhouse or any other location permanently manned by crew members, can be turned on manually. They shall be capable of powering the abovementioned power consumers throughout the prescribed period without recharging and without an unacceptable voltage reduction. |
8. The projected operating period for the emergency power supply is to be defined according to the defined purpose of the passenger vessel. It shall not be less than 30 minutes.
9. The insulation resistances and the earthing for electrical systems shall be tested on the occasion of inspections according to Article 2.09.
10. The power sources according to Article 9.02, section 1, shall be independent of each other.
11. A failure of the main or emergency power equipment shall not mutually affect the operational safety of the installations.
Article 15.11
Fire protection
1. The suitability for fire protection of materials and components shall be established by an accredited test institution on the basis of appropriate test methods.
|
(a) |
The test institution shall satisfy:
|
|
(b) |
The recognised test methods for determining the non-flammability of materials are:
|
|
(c) |
The recognised test methods for determining that a material is flame-retardant are:
|
|
(d) |
The recognised test methods for determining fire resistance are:
|
2. Partitions between rooms shall be designed in accordance with the following tables:
Table for partitions between rooms, in which no pressurised sprinkler systems according to Article 10.03a are installed
|
Rooms |
Control centres |
Stairwells |
Muster areas |
Lounges |
Engine rooms |
Galleys |
Store rooms |
|
Control centres |
— |
A0 |
A0/B15 (6) |
A30 |
A60 |
A60 |
A60 |
|
Stairwells |
|
— |
A0 |
A30 |
A60 |
A60 |
A60 |
|
Muster areas |
|
|
— |
A30/B15 (7) |
A60 |
A60 |
A60 |
|
Lounges |
|
|
|
—/B15 (8) |
A60 |
A60 |
A60 |
|
Engine rooms |
|
|
|
|
A60/A0 (9) |
A60 |
A60 |
|
Galleys |
|
|
|
|
|
A0 |
A60/B15 (10) |
|
Store rooms |
|
|
|
|
|
|
— |
Table for partitions between rooms, in which pressurised sprinkler systems according to Article 10.03a are installed
|
Rooms |
Control centres |
Stairwells |
Muster areas |
Lounges |
Engine rooms |
Galleys |
Store rooms |
|
Control centres |
— |
A0 |
A0/B15 (11) |
A0 |
A60 |
A60 |
A30 |
|
Stairwells |
|
— |
A0 |
A0 |
A60 |
A30 |
A0 |
|
Muster areas |
|
|
— |
A30/B15 (12) |
A60 |
A60 |
A60 |
|
Lounges |
|
|
|
—/B0 (13) |
A60 |
A30 |
A0 |
|
Engine rooms |
|
|
|
|
A60/A0 (14) |
A60 |
A60 |
|
Galleys |
|
|
|
|
|
— |
B15 |
|
Store rooms |
|
|
|
|
|
|
— |
|
(a) |
Type A partitions are bulkheads, walls and decks which satisfy the following requirements:
|
|
(b) |
Type B partitions are bulkheads, walls, decks, ceilings or facings that meet the following requirements:
|
|
(c) |
The inspection body may, in accordance with the Code for Fire Test Procedures, prescribe a test on a sample partition in order to ensure compliance with the above provisions on resistivity and temperature increase. |
3. Paints, lacquers and other surface treatment products as well as deck coverings used in rooms except engine rooms and store rooms shall be flame-retardant. Carpets, fabrics, curtains and other hanging textile materials as well as upholstered furniture and components of bedding shall be flame-retardant if the rooms in which they are located are not equipped with a pressurised sprinkler system according to Article 10.03a.
4. Lounge ceilings and wall claddings, including their substructures, shall, where these lounges do not have a pressurised sprinkler system according to Article 10.03a, be manufactured from non-combustible materials with the exception of their surfaces, which shall be at least flame-retardant.
5. Furniture and fittings in lounges which serve as muster areas shall, where the rooms do not have a pressurised sprinkler system according to Article 10.03a, be manufactured from non-combustible materials.
6. Paints, lacquers and other materials used on exposed internal areas shall not produce excessive amounts of smoke or toxic substances. This shall be proven in accordance with the Code for Fire Test Procedures.
7. Insulation materials in lounges shall be non-combustible. This does not apply to insulations used on coolant-carrying pipes. The surfaces of the insulation materials used on these pipes shall be at least flame-retardant.
8. Doors in partitions according to section 2 shall satisfy the following requirements:
|
(a) |
They shall satisfy the same requirements set out in section 2 as the partitions themselves. |
|
(b) |
They shall be self-closing in the case of doors in partition walls according to section 10 or in the case of enclosures around engine rooms, galleys and stairwells. |
|
(c) |
Self-closing doors which remain open in normal operation shall be such that they can be closed from a location permanently manned by shipboard personnel or crew members. Once a door has been remotely closed, it shall be possible to reopen and close it safely on the spot. |
|
(d) |
Watertight doors according to Article 15.02 need not be insulated. |
9. Walls according to section 2 shall be continuous from deck to deck or end at continuous ceilings, which satisfy the same requirements as referred to in section 2.
10. The following passenger areas shall be divided by vertical partitions as referred to in section 2:
|
(a) |
passenger areas with a total surface area of more than 800 m2; |
|
(b) |
passenger areas in which there are cabins, at intervals of not more than 40 m. |
The vertical partitions shall be smoke-tight under normal operating conditions and shall be continuous from deck to deck.
11. Hollows above ceilings, beneath floors and behind wall claddings shall be separated at intervals of not more than 14 m by non-combustible draught stops which, even in the event of fire, provide an effective fireproof seal.
12. Stairs shall be made of steel or another equivalent non-combustible material.
13. Internal stairs and lifts shall be encapsulated at all levels by walls according to section 2. The following exceptions are permissible:
|
(a) |
a staircase connecting only two decks does not need to be encapsulated, if on one of the decks the staircase is enclosed according to section 2; |
|
(b) |
in a lounge, stairs need not be encapsulated if they are located entirely within the interior of this room, and
|
14. Ventilation systems and air supply systems shall satisfy the following requirements:
|
(a) |
They shall be designed in such a way as to ensure that they themselves do not cause the spread of fire and smoke. |
|
(b) |
Openings for air intake and extraction and air supply systems shall be such that they can be closed off. |
|
(c) |
Ventilation ducts shall be made from steel or an equivalent non-combustible material and be securely connected to each other and to the superstructure of the vessel. |
|
(d) |
When ventilation ducts with a cross-section of more than 0,02 m2 are passed through partitions according to section 2 of Type A or partitions according to section 10, they shall be fitted with automatic fire dampers which can be operated from a location permanently manned by shipboard personnel or crew members. |
|
(e) |
Ventilation systems for galleys and engine rooms shall be separated from ventilation systems which supply other areas. |
|
(f) |
Air extraction ducts shall be provided with lockable openings for inspection and cleaning. These openings shall be located close to the fire dampers. |
|
(g) |
Built-in ventilators shall be such that they can be switched off from a central location outside the engine room. |
15. Galleys shall be fitted with ventilation systems and stoves with extractors. The air extraction ducts of the extractors shall satisfy the requirements according to section 14 and, additionally, be fitted with manually operated fire dampers at the inlet openings.
16. Control centres, stairwells and internal evacuation areas shall be fitted with natural or mechanical smoke extraction systems. Smoke extraction systems shall satisfy the following requirements:
|
(a) |
They shall offer sufficient capacity and reliability. |
|
(b) |
They shall comply with the operating conditions for passenger vessels. |
|
(c) |
If smoke extraction systems also serve as general ventilators for the rooms, this shall not hinder their function as smoke extraction systems in the event of a fire. |
|
(d) |
Smoke extraction systems shall have a manually operated triggering device. |
|
(e) |
Mechanical smoke extraction systems shall additionally be such that they can be operated from a location permanently manned by shipboard personnel or crew members. |
|
(f) |
Natural smoke extraction systems shall be fitted with an opening mechanism, operated either manually or by a power source inside the extraction system. |
|
(g) |
Manually operated triggering devices and opening mechanisms shall be accessible from inside or outside the room being protected. |
17. Lounges not constantly supervised by shipboard personnel or crew members, galleys, engine rooms and other rooms presenting a fire risk shall be connected to an appropriate fire alarm system. The existence of a fire and its exact whereabouts shall be automatically displayed at a location permanently manned by shipboard personnel or crew members.
Article 15.12
Fire-fighting
1. In addition to the portable extinguishers according to Article 10.03, at least the following portable extinguishers shall be available on board:
|
(a) |
one portable extinguisher for every 120 m2 of gross floor area in passenger areas; |
|
(b) |
one portable extinguisher per group of 10 cabins, rounded upwards; |
|
(c) |
one portable extinguisher in each galley and in the vicinity of any room in which flammable liquids are stored or used. In galleys the extinguishing agent shall also be suitable for fighting fat fires. |
These additional fire extinguishers shall meet the requirements laid down in Article 10.03, section 2, and be installed and distributed on the vessel so that, in the event of a fire starting at any point and at any time, a fire extinguisher can be reached immediately. In every galley and also in hairdressing salons and perfumeries, there shall be a fire blanket to hand.
2. Passenger vessels shall be provided with a hydrant system consisting of:
|
(a) |
two motor-driven fire extinguishing pumps of sufficient capacity, at least one of which is permanently installed; |
|
(b) |
one fire extinguisher line with a sufficient number of hydrants with permanently connected fire hoses at least 20 m in length and fitted with a nozzle capable of producing both a mist and a jet of water and incorporating a shut-off facility. |
3. Hydrant systems shall be designed and dimensioned in such a way that:
|
(a) |
any point of the vessel can be reached from at least two hydrants in different places, each with a single hose length of not more than 20 m; |
|
(b) |
the pressure at the hydrants is at least 300 kPa, and |
|
(c) |
on all decks a water jet length of at least 6 m can be attained. |
If a hydrant chest is provided, an ‘extinguisher hose’ symbol similar to that shown in Fig. 5 in Appendix I, of at least 10 cm side length, shall be affixed to the outside of the chest.
4. Hydrant valves with screw threads or cocks shall be such that they can be set so that each of the fire hoses can be separated and removed during operation of the fire extinguishing pumps.
5. Fire extinguisher hoses in the internal area shall be rolled up on an axially connected reel.
6. Materials for fire-fighting equipment shall either be heat-resistant or shall be suitably protected against failure to work when subjected to high temperatures.
7. Pipes and hydrants shall be arranged in such a way that the possibility of freezing is avoided.
8. The fire extinguishing pumps shall:
|
(a) |
be installed or housed in separate rooms; |
|
(b) |
be such that they can be operated independently of each other; |
|
(c) |
each be capable, on all decks, of maintaining the necessary pressure at the hydrants and achieving the requisite length of water jet; |
|
(d) |
be installed forward of the aft bulkhead. |
Fire extinguishing pumps may also be used for general purposes.
9. Engine rooms shall be fitted with a permanently fitted fire extinguishing system according to Article 10.03b.
10. On cabin vessels there shall be:
|
(a) |
two self-contained breathing apparatus sets corresponding to European standard EN 137:1993 with full-face masks corresponding to European standard EN 136:1998; |
|
(b) |
two sets of equipment consisting of at least a protective suit, helmet, boots, gloves, axe, crowbar, torch and safety-line, and |
|
(c) |
four smoke hoods. |
Article 15.13
Safety organisation
1. A safety rota shall be provided on board passenger vessels. The safety rota describes the duties of the crew and the shipboard personnel in the following eventualities:
|
(a) |
breakdown, |
|
(b) |
fire on board, |
|
(c) |
evacuation of passengers, |
|
(d) |
person overboard. |
Specific safety measures for persons with reduced mobility shall be taken into consideration.
The crew members and shipboard personnel designated in the safety rota should be assigned their various duties, depending on the posts they occupy. Special instructions to the crew shall ensure that, in the event of danger, all doors and openings in the watertight bulkheads referred to in Article 15.02 will be hermetically closed immediately.
2. The safety rota includes a safety plan, in which at least the following are clearly and precisely designated:
|
(a) |
areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility; |
|
(b) |
escape routes, emergency exits and muster and evacuation areas as referred to in Article 15.06, section 8; |
|
(c) |
life-saving equipment and ship's boats; |
|
(d) |
fire extinguishers and fire extinguishing and pressurised sprinkler systems; |
|
(e) |
other safety equipment; |
|
(f) |
the alarm system referred to in Article 15.08, section 3(a); |
|
(g) |
the alarm system referred to in Article 15.08, section 3(b) and (c); |
|
(h) |
the bulkhead doors referred to in Article 15.02, section 5, and the position of their controls, as well as the other openings referred to in Article 15.02, sections 9, 10 and 13, and Article 15.03, section 12; |
|
(i) |
doors referred to in Article 15.11, section 8; |
|
(j) |
fire dampers; |
|
(k) |
fire alarm system; |
|
(l) |
emergency power plant; |
|
(m) |
ventilation system control units; |
|
(n) |
shore connections; |
|
(o) |
fuel line shut-offs; |
|
(p) |
liquefied gas installations; |
|
(q) |
public address systems; |
|
(r) |
radiotelephone equipment; |
|
(s) |
first-aid kits. |
3. The safety rota according to section 1 and the safety plan according to section 2 shall:
|
(a) |
be duly stamped by the inspection body, and |
|
(b) |
be prominently displayed at an appropriate point on each deck. |
4. A code of conduct for passengers shall be posted up in each cabin and also a simplified safety plan containing only the information referred to in section 2(a) to (f).
This code of conduct shall include at least:
|
(a) |
designation of emergencies
|
|
(b) |
description of the various alarm signals; |
|
(c) |
instructions concerning the following:
|
|
(d) |
instructions concerning the following:
|
These details shall be posted up in Dutch, English, French and German.
Article 15.14
Waste water collection and disposal facilities
1. Passenger vessels shall be equipped with waste water collecting tanks or appropriate on-board sewage treatment systems.
2. Waste water collection tanks shall have sufficient capacity. Tanks shall be fitted with a device to indicate their content level. There shall be on-board pumps and pipes for emptying the tanks, whereby waste water can be passed from both sides of the vessel. It shall be possible to pass waste water from other vessels through.
The pipes shall be fitted with a discharge connection according to European standard EN 1306:1996.
Article 15.15
Derogations for certain passenger vessels
1. As an alternative to proving adequate stability after damage according to Article 15.03, sections 7 to 13, passenger vessels with a length of not more than 25 m and authorised to carry up to a maximum of 50 passengers shall comply with the following criteria:
|
(a) |
after symmetrical flooding, the immersion of the vessel shall not exceed the margin line, and |
|
(b) |
the metacentric height GMR shall not be less than 0,10 m. |
The necessary residual buoyancy shall be assured through the appropriate choice of material used for the construction of the hull or by means of highly cellular foam floats, solidly attached to the hull. In the case of vessels with a length of more than 15 m, residual buoyancy can be ensured by a combination of floats and subdivision complying with the 1-compartment status according to in Article 15.03.
2. For passenger vessels in accordance with section 1 the inspection body may permit minor derogations from the clear height required in Article 15.06, section 3(c) and section 5(b). The derogation shall not be more than 5 %. In the case of derogations the relevant parts shall be indicated by colour.
3. By way of derogation from Article 15.03, section 9, passenger vessels not exceeding 45 m in length and authorised to carry up to a maximum of 250 passengers do not need to have 2-compartment status.
4. (Left void)
5. The inspection body may waive the application of Article 10.04 in the case of passenger vessels authorised to carry up to a maximum of 250 passengers and with a length of not more than 25 m, provided they are equipped with a platform, accessible from each side of the vessel, directly above the waterline, so as to enable persons to be recovered safely from the water. Passenger vessels may be equipped with a comparable installation, subject to the following conditions:
|
(a) |
one person alone shall be able to operate the installation; |
|
(b) |
mobile installations are allowed; |
|
(c) |
the installations shall be outside the danger area of the propulsion systems, and |
|
(d) |
effective communication shall be possible between the boatmaster and the person in charge of the installation. |
6. The inspection body may waive the application of Article 10.04 in the case of passenger vessels authorised to carry up to a maximum of 600 passengers and with a length of not more than 45 m, provided they are equipped with a platform according to section 5, first sentence, or with an equivalent installation according to section 5, second sentence. In addition, the passenger vessel shall have:
|
(a) |
a rudder propeller, a cycloidal propeller or a water jet as main propulsion, or |
|
(b) |
a main propulsion system with 2 propulsion units, or |
|
(c) |
a main propulsion system and a bow-thruster. |
7. By way of derogation from Article 15.02, section 9, passenger vessels not exceeding 45 m in length and authorised to carry at most a number of passengers corresponding to the length of the vessel in metres are allowed to have on board, in the passenger area, a manually controlled bulkhead door without remote control according to Article 15.02, section 5, if:
|
(a) |
the vessel has only one deck; |
|
(b) |
this door is accessible directly from the deck and is not more than 10 m away from the deck; |
|
(c) |
the lower edge of the door opening lies at least 30 cm above the floor of the passenger area, and |
|
(d) |
each of the compartments divided by the door is fitted with a bilge level alarm. |
8. On passenger vessels in accordance with section 7, by way of derogation from Article 15.06, section 6(c), one escape route may lead through a galley, as long as there is a second escape route available.
9. For passenger vessels with a length not exceeding 45 m the following shall not apply: Article 15.01, section 2(e), when the liquefied gas installations are fitted with appropriate alarm systems for CO concentrations posing a health risk and for potentially explosive mixtures of gas and air.
10. The following provisions shall not apply to passenger vessels not exceeding 25 m in length:
|
(a) |
Article 15.04, section 1, last sentence; |
|
(b) |
Article 15.06, section 6(c), for the galleys, as long as a second escape route is available; |
|
(c) |
Article 15.07. |
11. For cabin vessels not exceeding 45 m in length, Article 15.12, section 10, shall not apply, provided smoke-hoods in a number corresponding to the number of berths are readily accessible in each cabin.
CHAPTER 15a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PASSENGER SAILING VESSELS
Article 15a.01
Application of Part II
In addition to the provisions of Part II, the requirements in this Chapter shall apply to passenger sailing vessels.
Article 15a.02
Exceptions for certain passenger sailing vessels
1. For passenger sailing vessels having an LWL not exceeding 45 m and a maximum permissible number of passengers not exceeding LWL in whole meters, the following provisions shall not apply:
|
(a) |
Article 3.03, section 7, provided that anchors are not transported in hawse pipes; |
|
(b) |
Article 10.02, section 2(d), with regard to length; |
|
(c) |
Article 15.08, section 3(a); |
|
(d) |
Article 15.15, section 9(a). |
2. By way of derogation from section 1, the number of passengers may be raised to 1,5 times the LWL in whole meters, if sails, rigging and deck fittings so permit.
Article 15a.03
Stability requirements for vessels under sail
1. For the calculation of the heeling moment according to Article 15.03, section 3, the furled sails shall be taken into account when determining the centre of gravity of the vessel.
2. Taking into consideration all load conditions according to Article 15.03, section 2, and using a standard arrangement of sails, the heeling moment caused by wind pressure shall not be so high as to exceed a heeling angle of 20°. At the same time
|
(a) |
a constant wind pressure of 0,07 kN/m2 shall be applied for the calculation, |
|
(b) |
the residual safety clearance shall be at least 100 mm, and |
|
(c) |
the residual freeboard shall not be negative. |
3. The righting lever of static stability shall
|
(a) |
reach its maximum value at a heeling angle of 25° or over, |
|
(b) |
amount to at least 200 mm at a heeling angle of 30° or over, |
|
(c) |
be positive at a heeling angle of up to 60°. |
4. The area under the righting lever curve shall not be less than
|
(a) |
0,055 mrad up to 30°; |
|
(b) |
0,09 mrad up to 40° or at the angle at which an unprotected opening reaches the water surface and which is less than 40°. |
Between
|
(c) |
30° and 40°, or |
|
(d) |
30° and the angle at which an unprotected opening reaches the water surface and which is less than 40°, |
this area shall not be less than 0,03 mrad.
Article 15a.04
Shipbuilding and mechanical requirements
1. By way of derogation from Article 6.01, section 3, and Article 9.01, section 3, the equipment must be designed for permanent lists of up to 20°.
2. By way of derogation from Article 15.15, section 7(c), the height of the lower edge of the door opening may be reduced to 200 mm above the floor of the passenger area. Once opened, the door shall close and lock automatically.
3. By way of derogation from Article 15.06, section 10(a), the inspection body may, in specific cases, authorise the use of removable guard rails in areas where this is necessary for controlling the sails.
4. By way of derogation from Article 15.06, section 5(a) and Article 15.06, section 9(b), the inspection body may, in the case of passenger sailing vessels not more than 25 m long, authorise a clear width of less than 800 mm for connecting corridors and companionways. However, the clear width shall be at least 600 mm.
5. Within the meaning of Article 15.07, sails rank as a main propulsion system.
6. If there is a possibility of the propeller idling while the vessel is under sail, any endangered parts of the propulsion system shall be protected against potential damage.
Article 15a.05
Rigging in general
1. The parts of the rigging shall be arranged in such a way as to prevent unacceptable chafing.
2. If a material other than wood is used or if special types of rigging are used, such a design shall guarantee equivalent levels of safety with the dimensions and strength values laid down in this Chapter. As evidence of the strength
|
(a) |
a strength calculation shall be carried out, or |
|
(b) |
confirmation of sufficient strength shall have been obtained from an approved classification society, or |
|
(c) |
dimensioning shall be based on the procedures set out in a recognised regulatory framework (e.g. Middendorf, Kusk-Jensen). |
The evidence shall be presented to the inspection body.
Article 15a.06
Masts and spars in general
1. All spars shall be made of high-quality material.
2. Wood for masts shall:
|
(a) |
be free of knot concentrations; |
|
(b) |
be free of sapwood within the required dimensions; |
|
(c) |
as far as possible be straight-grained; |
|
(d) |
contain as little as possible twisted growth. |
3. If the chosen timber is either pitch pine or Oregon pine of quality level ‘clear and better’ the diameters in the tables reproduced in Articles 15a.07 to 15a.12 can be reduced by 5 %.
4. If the timbers used for masts, topmasts, yardarms, booms and bowsprits are not round in cross-section, such timbers must be of equivalent strength.
5. Mast pedestals, mast trunks and fastenings on deck, on floor-plates and on stem or stern shall be constructed in such a way that they can either absorb the forces they are subjected to or transfer them to other connected parts of the structure.
6. Depending on the stability of the vessel and the external forces it is subjected to and also the distribution of the available sail area, the inspection body may, on the basis of the dimensions laid down in Articles 15a.07 to 15a.12, allow reductions in the cross-sections of the spars and, where appropriate, of the rigging. Evidence shall be submitted in accordance with Article 15a.05, section 2.
7. If the vessel's period of oscillation/period of roll, in seconds, is less than three quarters of its breadth, in metres, the dimensions set out in Articles 15a.07 to 15a.12 shall be increased. Evidence shall be submitted in accordance with Article 15a.05, section 2.
8. In the tables reproduced in Articles 15a.07 to 15a.12 and 15a.14, possible intermediate values shall be interpolated.
Article 15a.07
Special provisions for masts
1. Wooden masts shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Length (15) (m) |
Diameter on deck (cm) |
Diameter on the cross-tree (cm) |
Diameter on the mast cap (cm) |
|
10 |
20 |
17 |
15 |
|
11 |
22 |
17 |
15 |
|
12 |
24 |
19 |
17 |
|
13 |
26 |
21 |
18 |
|
14 |
28 |
23 |
19 |
|
15 |
30 |
25 |
21 |
|
16 |
32 |
26 |
22 |
|
17 |
34 |
28 |
23 |
|
18 |
36 |
29 |
24 |
|
19 |
39 |
31 |
25 |
|
20 |
41 |
33 |
26 |
|
21 |
43 |
34 |
28 |
|
22 |
44 |
35 |
29 |
|
23 |
46 |
37 |
30 |
|
24 |
49 |
39 |
32 |
|
25 |
51 |
41 |
33 |
If a mast has two yards, the diameters shall be increased by at least 10 %.
If a mast has more than two yards, the diameters shall be increased by at least 15 %.
In the case of masts fitted through the deck, the diameter at the mast foot shall be at least 75 % of the diameter of the mast at deck level.
2. Mast fittings, mast bands, cross-trees and mast caps shall be sufficiently strongly dimensioned and attached.
Article 15a.08
Special provisions for topmasts
1. Wooden topmasts shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Length (16) (m) |
Diameter at the foot (cm) |
Half-length diameter (cm) |
Diameter at fitting (17) (cm) |
|
4 |
8 |
7 |
6 |
|
5 |
10 |
9 |
7 |
|
6 |
13 |
11 |
8 |
|
7 |
14 |
13 |
10 |
|
8 |
16 |
15 |
11 |
|
9 |
18 |
16 |
13 |
|
10 |
20 |
18 |
15 |
|
11 |
23 |
20 |
16 |
|
12 |
25 |
22 |
17 |
|
13 |
26 |
24 |
18 |
|
14 |
28 |
25 |
20 |
|
15 |
31 |
27 |
21 |
If square sails are attached to a topmast, the dimensions set out in the table shall be increased by 10 %.
2. The overlap between the topmast and the mast shall be at least 10 times the required foot diameter of the topmast.
Article 15a.09
Special provisions for bowsprits
1. Wooden bowsprits shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Length (18) (m) |
Diameter at stem (cm) |
Half-length diameter (cm) |
|
4 |
14,5 |
12,5 |
|
5 |
18 |
16 |
|
6 |
22 |
19 |
|
7 |
25 |
23 |
|
8 |
29 |
25 |
|
9 |
32 |
29 |
|
10 |
36 |
32 |
|
11 |
39 |
35 |
|
12 |
43 |
39 |
2. The inboard section of the bowsprit shall have a length of at least four times the diameter of the bowsprit at the stem.
3. The diameter of the bowsprit at its head shall be at least 60 % of the diameter of the bowsprit at the stem.
Article 15a.10
Special provisions for jib-booms
1. Wooden jib-booms shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Length (19)(m) |
2 |
3 |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8 |
9 |
10 |
|
Diameter at the stem (cm) |
7 |
10 |
14 |
17 |
21 |
24 |
28 |
31 |
35 |
2. The diameter of the jib-boom at its head shall be at least 60 % of the diameter at the stem.
Article 15a.11
Special provisions for main booms
1. Wooden main booms shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Length (20)(m) |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8 |
9 |
10 |
11 |
12 |
13 |
14 |
15 |
16 |
|
Diameter (cm) |
14 |
15 |
16 |
17 |
18 |
20 |
21 |
23 |
24 |
25 |
26 |
27 |
2. The diameter at the swivel pin shall be at least 72 % of the diameter specified in the table.
3. The diameter at the clew shall be at least 85 % of the diameter specified in the table.
4. Measured from the mast, the greatest diameter shall be at two thirds of the length.
5. Where:
|
(a) |
there is an angle of less than 65° between the main boom and the after leech and the main sheet is attached to the end of the boom, or |
|
(b) |
the attachment point of the sheet is not abreast of the clew, |
the inspection body may, according to Article 15a.05, section 2, require a greater diameter.
6. For sail areas of less than 50 m2, the inspection body may authorise reductions in the dimensions set out in the table.
Article 15a.12
Special provisions for gaffs
1. Wooden gaffs shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Length (21)(m) |
4 |
5 |
6 |
7 |
8 |
9 |
10 |
|
Diameter (cm) |
10 |
12 |
14 |
16 |
17 |
18 |
20 |
2. The unsupported length of the gaff shall be not more than 75 %.
3. The breaking strength of the crowfoot shall be at least equal to 1,2 times the breaking strength of the peak halyard.
4. The top angle of the crowfoot shall be a maximum of 60°.
5. If, by way of derogation from section 4, the top angle of the crowfoot is greater than 60°, the tensile strength shall be adjusted to accommodate the forces that will then occur.
6. For sail areas of less than 50 m2, the inspection body may authorise reductions in the dimensions set out in the table.
Article 15a.13
General provisions for standing and running rigging
1. Standing and running rigging shall comply with the strength requirements set out in Articles 15a.14 and 15a.15.
2. Wire cable connections may take the form of:
|
(a) |
splicings, |
|
(b) |
compression sleeves, or |
|
(c) |
sealing sleeves. |
Splicings shall be marled and ends shall be whipped.
3. Eye splices shall be provided with thimbles.
4. Ropes shall be routed in such a way as not to obstruct entrances and companionways.
Article 15a.14
Special provisions for standing rigging
1. Forestays and shrouds shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Mast length (22)(m) |
11 |
12 |
13 |
14 |
15 |
16 |
17 |
18 |
|
Tensile strength of the forestay (kN) |
160 |
172 |
185 |
200 |
220 |
244 |
269 |
294 |
|
Tensile strength of the shrouds (kN) |
355 |
415 |
450 |
485 |
525 |
540 |
630 |
720 |
|
Number of shroud cables and ropes per side |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
3 |
4 |
4 |
2. Backstays, topmasts, flying jib-stays, jib-booms and bowsprit shrouds shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Mast length (23)(m) |
< 13 |
13-18 |
> 18 |
|
Tensile strength of the backstay (kN) |
89 |
119 |
159 |
|
Tensile strength of the topmast (kN) |
89 |
119 |
159 |
|
Length of topmast (m) |
< 6 |
6-8 |
> 8 |
|
Tensile strength of the flying jib-stay (kN) |
58 |
89 |
119 |
|
Length of jib-boom (m) |
< 5 |
5-7 |
> 7 |
|
Tensile strength of the bow sprit shrouds (kN) |
58 |
89 |
119 |
3. The preferred rope design shall be based on Rope Construction Method 6 × 7 FE in the strength class 1 550 N/mm2. Alternatively, at the same strength class, Construction Method 6 × 36 SE or 6 × 19 FE may be used. Because of the higher elasticity of Construction Method 6 × 19, the tensile strengths given in the table shall be increased by 10 %. Use of a different rope design shall be permitted provided it has comparable properties.
4. If rigid rigging is used, the tensile strengths shown in the table shall be increased by 30 %.
5. For rigging, only approved forks, round eyes and bolts may be used.
6. Bolts, forks, round eyes and turnbuckles shall be capable of being properly secured.
7. The tensile strength of the bobstay shall be at least 1,2 times the tensile strength of the respective jib-stay and flying jib-stay.
8. For vessels with less than 30 m3 water displacement, the inspection body may permit the reductions in tensile strengths shown in the table set out below:
|
Water displacement divided by the number of masts (m3) |
Reduction (%) |
|
> 20 to 30 |
20 |
|
10 to 20 |
35 |
|
< 10 |
60 |
Article 15a.15
Special provisions for running rigging
1. For running rigging, fibre ropes or steel wire ropes shall be used. The minimum tensile strength and the diameter for running rigging shall, in relation to the sail area, meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Type of running rigging |
Rope material |
Sail area (m2) |
Minimum tensile strength (KN) |
Diameter of rope (mm) |
|
Staysail halyards |
Steel wire |
up to 35 |
20 |
6 |
|
> 35 |
38 |
8 |
||
|
Fibre (polypropylene-PP) |
Rope diameter of at least 14 mm and one rope sheave for every 25 m2 or part thereof |
|||
|
Gaff sail halyards Top sail halyards |
Steel wire |
up to 50 |
20 |
6 |
|
> 50 to 80 |
30 |
8 |
||
|
> 80 to 120 |
60 |
10 |
||
|
> 120 to 160 |
80 |
12 |
||
|
Fibre (PP) |
Rope diameter of at least 18 mm and one rope sheave for every 30 m2 or part thereof |
|||
|
Staysail sheets |
Fibre (PP) |
up to 40 |
14 |
|
|
> 40 |
18 |
|||
|
For sail areas of more than 30 m2, the sheet shall take the form of a tackle or shall be capable of being operated by a winch |
||||
|
Gaff-/Top- sail sheets |
Steel wire |
< 100 |
60 |
10 |
|
100 to 150 |
85 |
12 |
||
|
> 150 |
116 |
14 |
||
|
For top sail sheets, elastic connection elements (fore runners) are necessary. |
||||
|
Fibre (PP) |
Rope diameter of at least 18 mm and at least three rope sheaves. Where the sail area is greater than 60 m2, one rope sheave per 20 m2 |
|||
2. Running rigging forming part of the staying shall have a tensile strength which corresponds to that of the respective stay or shrouds.
3. If materials other than those stated in section 1 are used, the strength values given in the table in section 1 shall be complied with.
Fibre ropes of polyethylene shall not be used.
Article 15a.16
Fittings and parts of the rigging
1. If steel wire ropes or fibre ropes are used, the diameters of the rope sheaves (measured from centre of rope to centre of rope) shall meet the following minimum requirements:
|
Steel wire (mm) |
6 |
7 |
8 |
9 |
10 |
11 |
12 |
|
Fibre (mm) |
16 |
18 |
20 |
22 |
24 |
26 |
28 |
|
Rope sheave (mm) |
100 |
110 |
120 |
130 |
145 |
155 |
165 |
2. By way of derogation from section 1, the diameter of the rope sheaves may be equal to six times the diameter of the steel wire, provided that the steel wire does not constantly run over sheaves.
3. The tensile strength of the fittings (e.g. forks, round eyes, turnbuckles, eye-plates, bolts, rings and shackles) shall be compatible with the tensile strength of the standing or running rigging that is attached to them.
4. The fastenings of stay and shroud futtocks shall be designed to take up the forces they are subjected to.
5. Only one shackle, along with the relevant stay or shroud, may be attached to each eye.
6. Blocks of halyards and topping lifts shall be securely fastened to the mast, and the revolving crowfeet used for this purpose shall be in good condition.
7. Attachments of eye-bolts, cleats, belaying pins and fife-rails shall be designed to cope with the forces they are subjected to.
Article 15a.17
Sails
1. It shall be ensured that sails can be taken in simply, swiftly and safely.
2. The sail area shall be appropriate for the type of vessel and the water displacement.
Article 15a.18
Equipment
1. Vessels that are fitted with a jib-boom or a bowsprit shall have a jib-net and an adequate number of appropriate holding and tensioning devices.
2. The equipment according to section 1 may be dispensed with if the jib-boom or bowsprit is equipped with a hand becket and a foot rope adequately dimensioned to allow for the attachment of a safety harness to be carried on board.
3. For work on the rigging, a boatswain's chair shall be provided.
Article 15a.19
Testing
1. The rigging shall be tested by the inspection body every 2,5 years. As a minimum, the test shall cover the following:
|
(a) |
the sails, including leeches, clews and reef eyes; |
|
(b) |
the state of the masts and spars; |
|
(c) |
the state of the standing and running rigging together with cable wire connections; |
|
(d) |
facilities for taking in the sail swiftly and safely; |
|
(e) |
the secure fastening of blocks of halyards and topping lifts; |
|
(f) |
the fastening of mast trunks and other fastening points for standing and running rigging that are attached to the vessel; |
|
(g) |
the winches for operating the sails; |
|
(h) |
other facilities fitted for the purposes of sailing, such as lee-boards and the fittings for operating them; |
|
(i) |
the measures taken to prevent the chafing of the spars, the running and standing rigging and the sails; |
|
(j) |
the equipment according to Article 15a.18. |
2. That part of the wooden mast passing through the deck and located below the deck shall be re-examined at intervals to be determined by the inspection body, but at the very least on the occasion of each periodical inspection according to Article 2.09. The mast shall be extracted for this purpose.
3. A certificate of the last inspection carried out in accordance with section 1 and issued, dated and signed by the inspection body, shall be carried on board.
CHAPTER 16
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CRAFT INTENDED TO FORM PART OF A PUSHED OR TOWED CONVOY OR OF A SIDE-BY-SIDE FORMATION
Article 16.01
Craft suitable for pushing
1. Craft which are to be used for pushing purposes shall incorporate a suitable pushing device. They shall be designed and equipped in such a way as to:
|
(a) |
enable crews easily and safely to cross over to the pushed craft with the coupling devices connected; |
|
(b) |
enable them to occupy a fixed position in relation to the coupled craft; |
|
(c) |
prevent relative movement between the craft themselves. |
2. If the craft are joined together with cables the pusher craft shall be equipped with at least two special winches or equivalent coupling devices for tensioning the cables.
3. The coupling devices shall enable a rigid assembly to be formed with the pushed craft.
Where convoys consist of a pusher craft and a single pushed craft the coupling devices may permit controlled articulation. The necessary drive units shall easily absorb the forces to be transmitted and shall be capable of being controlled easily and safely. Articles 6.02 to 6.04 shall apply mutatis mutandis to such drive units.
4. The collision bulkhead referred to in Article 3.03, section 1(a), can be dispensed with for pushers.
Article 16.02
Craft suitable for being pushed
1. The following shall not apply to lighters without steering system, accommodation, engine or boiler rooms:
|
(a) |
Chapters 5 to 7 and 12; |
|
(b) |
Article 8.08, sections 2 to 8, Article 10.02 and Article 10.05, section 1. |
If steering systems, accommodation, engine or boiler rooms are present the relevant requirements of this Annex shall apply to them.
2. In addition, ship-borne lighters whose length L does not exceed 40 m shall meet the following requirements:
|
(a) |
Collision bulkheads referred to in Article 3.03, section 1, can be dispensed with if their front faces are able to bear a load at least 2,5 times that set for the collision bulkheads on inland waterway vessels with the same draught and built in accordance with the requirements of an approved classification society. |
|
(b) |
By way of derogation from Article 8.08, section 1, compartments of the double bottom to which access is difficult do not have to be drainable unless their volume exceeds 5 % of the water displacement of the ship-borne lighter at the maximum authorised loaded draught. |
3. Craft intended for being pushed shall be fitted with coupling devices ensuring a safe connection to other craft.
Article 16.03
Craft suitable for propelling side-by-side formations
Craft intended to propel side-by-side formations shall be equipped with bollards or equivalent devices which, as a result of their number and arrangement, enable the formation to be coupled in a safe manner.
Article 16.04
Craft suitable for being propelled in convoys
Craft intended to be propelled in convoys shall be equipped with coupling devices, bollards or equivalent devices which, as a result of their number and arrangement, ensure a safe connection to other craft in the convoy.
Article 16.05
Craft suitable for towing
1. Craft intended for towing shall meet the following requirements:
|
(a) |
The towing devices shall be arranged in such a way that their use does not compromise the safety of the craft, crew or cargo. |
|
(b) |
Tugging and towing craft shall be fitted with a tow hook which shall be capable of being released safely from the wheelhouse; this shall not apply if the design or other fittings prevent capsizing. |
|
(c) |
Towing devices shall consist of winches or a tow hook. The towing devices shall be located ahead of the propeller plane. This requirement shall not apply to craft that are steered by their propulsion units such as rudder propellers or cycloidal propellers. |
|
(d) |
By way of derogation from the requirements of (c), for craft solely giving — in accordance with applicable navigational authority regulations of the Member States — towing assistance to motorised craft, a towing device such as a bollard or an equivalent device shall suffice. Point (b) shall apply mutatis mutandis. |
|
(e) |
Where the towing cables could snag on the stern of the vessel, deflector hoops with cable catchers shall be provided. |
2. Craft of length L exceeding 86 m shall not be authorised for towing downstream.
Article 16.06
Navigation tests on convoys
1. In order to authorise a pusher or motor vessel to propel a rigid convoy, and to enter this on the Community certificate, the inspection body shall decide which formations are to be presented and shall conduct the navigation tests referred to in Article 5.02 with the convoy in the formation(s) applied for, which the inspection body regards to be the least favourable one(s). The requirements set out in Articles 5.02 to 5.10 shall be met by this convoy.
The inspection body shall check that the rigid connection of all craft in the convoy is maintained during the manoeuvres required by Chapter 5.
2. If during the navigation tests referred to in section 1 there are specific installations on board the craft that are being either pushed or propelled side-by-side, such as the steering system, propulsion units or manoeuvring equipment, or articulated couplings in order to meet the requirements set out in Articles 5.02 to 5.10, the following shall be entered on the Community certificate for the craft propelling the convoy: formation, position, name and official number of those craft which are fitted with the specific installations used.
Article 16.07
Entries on the Community certificate
1. If a craft is intended to propel a convoy, or be propelled in a convoy, its compliance with the relevant requirements as set out in Articles 16.01 to 16.06 shall be entered on the Community certificate.
2. The following information shall be entered on the Community certificate for the propelling craft:
|
(a) |
the convoys and formations that have been accepted; |
|
(b) |
the types of coupling; |
|
(c) |
the maximum coupling forces determined, and |
|
(d) |
where appropriate, the minimum tensile strength of the coupling cables for the longitudinal connection and also the number of cable windings. |
CHAPTER 17
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO FLOATING EQUIPMENT
Article 17.01
General
For construction and equipment of floating equipment Chapters 3, 7 to 14 and 16 shall apply. Floating equipment with its own means of propulsion shall also meet the requirements of Chapters 5 and 6. Propulsion units permitting only short-haul operation shall not constitute own means of propulsion.
Article 17.02
Derogations
1. The inspection body may grant derogations from the following requirements:
|
(a) |
Article 3.03, sections 1 and 2, shall apply mutatis mutandis; |
|
(b) |
Article 7.02 shall apply mutatis mutandis; |
|
(c) |
the maximum sound pressure levels prescribed by Article 12.02, section 5, second sentence, may be exceeded while the floating equipment's working gear is operating, provided that, during service, nobody sleeps on board at night; |
|
(d) |
derogations may be granted from other requirements concerning structure, working gear or equipment provided that equal safety is ensured in each case. |
2. The inspection body may dispense with the application of the following requirements:
|
(a) |
Article 10.01, section 1, shall not apply if during operation of floating equipment that equipment can be securely anchored by means of a working anchor or piles. However, floating equipment with its own means of propulsion shall have at least one anchor meeting the requirements in Article 10.01, section 1, where an empirical coefficient k is taken to be equal to 45, and the smallest height is taken for T. |
|
(b) |
Article 12.02, section 1, second part of sentence, if the accommodation can be adequately lit by means of electricity. |
3. In addition, the following shall apply:
|
(a) |
for Article 8.08, section 2, second sentence, the bilge pump shall be motor driven; |
|
(b) |
for Article 8.10, section 3, the noise may exceed 65 dB(A) at a lateral distance of 25 m from the ship's side of any stationary floating equipment while its working gear is operating; |
|
(c) |
for Article 10.03, section 1, at least one further portable extinguisher is required if working gear not permanently attached to the craft is placed on the deck; |
|
(d) |
for Article 14.02, section 2, in addition to the liquefied-gas equipment for domestic use, there may also be other liquefied-gas facilities. Those facilities and their accessories shall meet the requirements of one of the Member States. |
Article 17.03
Additional requirements
1. Floating equipment on which persons are present during operation shall be fitted with a general alarm system. The alarm signal shall be clearly distinguishable from other signals and, within accommodation and at all work stations, shall produce a sound pressure level that is at least 5 dB(A) higher than the maximum local sound pressure level. It shall be possible to actuate the alarm system from the wheelhouse and the main work stations.
2. Working equipment shall have sufficient strength to withstand the loads it is subjected to and shall meet the requirements of Directive 98/37/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 22 June 1998 on the approximation of the laws of the Member States relating to machinery (24).
3. The stability (resistance to overbalancing) and strength of working equipment, and where appropriate its attachments, shall be such that it may withstand the forces resulting from the expected heel, trim and movement of the floating equipment.
4. If loads are lifted by means of hoists the maximum authorised load deriving from stability and strength shall be prominently displayed on panels on deck and at the control stations. If the lifting capacity can be increased by connecting additional floats the values authorised both with and without these additional floats shall be clearly stated.
Article 17.04
Residual safety clearance
1. For the purposes of this Chapter and by way of derogation from Article 1.01 of this Annex, residual safety clearance means the shortest vertical distance between surface of the water and the lowest part of the floating equipment beyond which it is no longer watertight, taking into account trim and heel resulting from the moments referred to in Article 17.07, section 4.
2. The residual safety clearance is sufficient according to Article 17.07, section 1, for any spray-proof and weathertight aperture if it is at least 300 mm.
3. At an aperture that is not spray-proof and weathertight the residual safety clearance shall be at least 400 mm.
Article 17.05
Residual freeboard
1. For the purposes of this Chapter and by way of derogation from Article 1.01 of this Annex, residual freeboard means the smallest vertical distance between the surface of the water and the upper surface of the deck at its edge taking into account trim and heel resulting from the moments referred to in Article 17.07, section 4.
2. The residual freeboard is sufficient according to Article 17.07, section 1, if it is at least 300 mm.
3. The residual freeboard may be reduced if it is proven that the requirements of Article 17.08 have been met.
4. Where the shape of a float differs perceptibly from that of a pontoon, as in the case of a cylindrical float, or where the cross-section of a float has more than four sides, the inspection body may require or authorise a residual freeboard that differs from section 2. This shall also apply to floating equipment consisting of several floats.
Article 17.06
Heeling test
1. Confirmation of stability according to Articles 17.07 and 17.08 shall be based on a heeling test that has been carried out in a proper manner.
2. If during a heeling test it is not possible to achieve adequate heeling angles, or if the heeling test causes unreasonable technical difficulties, this may be replaced by a calculation of the craft's centre of gravity and weight. The result of the weight calculation shall be checked by measuring the draught, and the difference shall not exceed ± 5 %.
Article 17.07
Confirmation of stability
1. It shall be confirmed that, when taking into account the loads applied during operation of the working gear and whilst under way, the residual freeboard and the residual safety clearance are sufficient. For that purpose the sum of the trim and heeling angles shall not exceed 10° and the bottom of the float shall not emerge.
2. Confirmation of stability shall include the following data and documents:
|
(a) |
scale drawings of floats and working gear and the detailed data relating to these that are needed to confirm stability, such as content of the tanks, openings providing access to the inside of the vessel; |
|
(b) |
hydrostatic data or curves; |
|
(c) |
righting lever curves for static-stability to the extent required in accordance with section 5 below or Article 17.08; |
|
(d) |
description of the operating conditions together with the corresponding data concerning weight and centre of gravity, including its unladen state and the equipment situation as regards transport; |
|
(e) |
calculation of the heeling, trimming and righting moments, with a specification of the trim and heeling angles and the corresponding residual freeboard and residual safety clearances; |
|
(f) |
a compilation of the results of the calculation with a specification of the limits for operation and the maximum loads. |
3. Confirmation of stability shall be based on at least the following load assumptions:
|
(a) |
specific mass of the dredging products for dredgers:
|
|
(b) |
for clamshell dredgers, the values given under point (a) shall be increased by 15 %; |
|
(c) |
for hydraulic dredgers the maximum lifting power shall be considered. |
4.1 Confirmation of stability shall take account of the moments resulting from:
|
(a) |
load; |
|
(b) |
asymmetric structure; |
|
(c) |
wind pressure; |
|
(d) |
turning whilst under way of self-propelled floating equipment; |
|
(e) |
cross current, if necessary; |
|
(f) |
ballast and provisions; |
|
(g) |
deck loads and, where appropriate, cargo; |
|
(h) |
free surfaces of liquids; |
|
(i) |
inertia forces; |
|
(j) |
other mechanical equipment. |
The moments which may act simultaneously shall be added up.
4.2 The moment caused by the wind pressure shall be calculated in accordance with the following formula:
where:
|
c |
= |
shape-dependent coefficient of resistance For frameworks c = 1,2 and for solid-section beams c = 1,6. Both values take account of gusts of wind. The whole area encompassed by the contour line of the framework shall be taken to be the surface area exposed to the wind. |
|
pw |
= |
specific wind pressure; this shall uniformly be taken to be 0,25 kN/m2; |
|
A |
= |
lateral plane above the plane of maximum draught in m2; |
|
lw |
= |
distance from the centre of area of the lateral plane A from the plane of maximum draught, in m. |
4.3 In order to determine the moments due to turning whilst under way according to section 4.1(d) for self-propelled floating equipment, the formula set out in Article 15.03, section 6 shall be used.
4.4 The moment resulting from cross current according to section 4.1(e) shall be taken into account only for floating equipment which is anchored or moored across the current while operating.
4.5 The least favourable extent of tank filling from the point of view of stability shall be determined and the corresponding moment introduced into the calculation when calculating the moments resulting from liquid ballast and liquid provisions according to section 4.1(f).
4.6 The moment resulting from inertia forces according to section 4.1(i) shall be given due consideration if the movements of the load and the working gear are likely to affect stability.
5. The righting moments for floats with vertical side walls may be calculated using the following formula
|
|
Ma = 10 · D · |
· sinφ [kNm]where:
|
|
= |
metacentric height, in m; |
|
φ |
= |
heeling angle in degrees. |
That formula shall apply up to heeling angles of 10° or up to a heeling angle corresponding to immersion of the edge of the deck or emergence of the edge of the bottom; the smallest angle shall be decisive. The formula may be applied to slanting side walls up to heeling angles of 5°; the limit conditions set out in sections 3 and 4 shall also apply.
If the particular shape of the float(s) does not permit such simplification the righting lever curves according to section 2(c) shall be required.
Article 17.08
Confirmation of stability in the case of reduced residual freeboard
If a reduced residual freeboard according to Article 17.05, section 3, is used, it shall be proven for all operating conditions that:
|
(a) |
after correction for the free surfaces of liquids, the metacentric height is not less than 0,15 m; |
|
(b) |
for heeling angles between 0 and 30°, there is a righting lever of at least h = 0,30 – 0,28 · φn [m] φn being the heeling angle from which the righting lever curve displays negative values (range of stability); it shall not be less than 20° or 0,35 rad and shall not be introduced into the formula for more than 30° or 0,52 rad, taking the radian (rad) (1° = 0,01745 rad) for the unit of φn; |
|
(c) |
the sum of the trim and heeling angles does not exceed 10°; |
|
(d) |
a residual safety clearance meeting the requirements in Article 17.04 remains; |
|
(e) |
a residual freeboard of at least 0,05 m remains; |
|
(f) |
for heeling angles between 0 and 30°, a residual righting lever of at least h = 0,20 – 0,23 · φn [m] remains, where φn is the heeling angle from which the righting lever curve displays negative values; it shall not be introduced into the formula for more than 30° or 0,52 rad. |
Residual righting lever means the maximum difference existing between 0° and 30° of heel between the righting lever curve and the heeling lever curve. If an opening towards the inside of the vessel is reached by the water at a heeling angle less than that corresponding to the maximum difference between the lever curves, the lever corresponding to that heeling angle shall be taken into account.
Article 17.09
Draught marks and draught scales
Draught marks and draught scales shall be affixed in accordance with Articles 4.04 and 4.06.
Article 17.10
Floating equipment without confirmation of stability
1. The application of Articles 17.04 to 17.08 may be dispensed with for floating equipment:
|
(a) |
whose working gear can in no way alter their heeling or trim, and |
|
(b) |
where any displacement of the centre of gravity can be reasonably excluded. |
2. However,
|
(a) |
at maximum load the safety clearance shall be at least 300 mm and the freeboard at least 150 mm; |
|
(b) |
for apertures which cannot be closed spray-proof and weathertight the safety clearance shall be at least 500 mm. |
CHAPTER 18
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO WORKSITE CRAFT
Article 18.01
Operating conditions
Worksite craft designated as such in the Community certificate set out in Part I or II of Annex V may navigate outside worksites only when unladen. That restriction shall be entered on the Community certificate.
For this purpose worksite craft shall have a certificate issued by the competent authority indicating the duration of works and the geographical boundaries of the worksite in which the craft may be operated.
Article 18.02
Application of Part II
Unless otherwise specified in this Chapter the construction and equipment of worksite craft shall be in line with Chapters 3 to 14 of Part II.
Article 18.03
Derogations
|
1. |
|
2. The inspection body may dispense with the following provisions:
|
(a) |
Article 8.08, sections 2 to 8, if no crew is required; |
|
(b) |
Article 10.01, sections 1 and 3, if the worksite craft can be securely anchored by means of working anchors or piles. However, self-propelled worksite craft shall be equipped with at least one anchor meeting the requirements set out in Article 10.01, section 1, where coefficient k is taken to be 45 and T is taken to be the lowest height; |
|
(c) |
Article 10.02, section 1(c), if the worksite craft is not self-propelled. |
Article 18.04
Safety clearance and freeboard
1. If a worksite craft is used as a reclamation barge or a hopper barge the safety clearance outside the hold area shall be at least 300 mm and the freeboard at least 150 mm. The inspection body may permit a smaller freeboard if proof by calculation is provided that stability is sufficient for a cargo having a specific mass of 1,5 t/m3 and that no side of the deck reaches the water. The effect of liquefied cargo shall be taken into account.
2. The provisions of Articles 4.01 and 4.02 shall apply mutatis mutandis to worksite craft not covered by section 1. The inspection body may determine values departing from the above for safety clearance and freeboard.
Article 18.05
Ship's boats
Worksite craft shall not be required to have a ship's boat where:
|
(a) |
they are not self-propelled or |
|
(b) |
a ship's boat is available elsewhere on the worksite. |
That derogation shall be entered on the Community certificate.
CHAPTER 19
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO HISTORIC VESSELS
(Left void)
CHAPTER 19a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CANAL BARGES
(Left void)
CHAPTER 19b
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VESSELS NAVIGATING ON ZONE 4 WATERWAYS
Article 19b.01
Application of Chapter 4
1. By way of derogation from Article 4.01, sections 1 and 2, the safety clearance of doors and openings other than hold hatches for vessels navigating on Zone 4 waterways is reduced as follows:
|
(a) |
for openings which can be closed spray-proof and weathertight, to 150 mm; |
|
(b) |
for openings which cannot be closed spray-proof and weathertight, to 200 mm. |
2. By way of derogation from Article 4.02, the minimum freeboard of vessels navigating on Zone 4 waterways is 0 mm, if the safety clearance according to section 1 is respected.
CHAPTER 20
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO SEA-GOING VESSELS
(Left void)
CHAPTER 21
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO RECREATIONAL CRAFT
Article 21.01
General
Only Articles 21.02 and 21.03 shall apply to the construction and equipment of recreational craft.
Article 21.02
Application of Part II
1. Recreational craft shall meet the following requirements.:
|
(a) |
from Chapter 3:
|
|
(b) |
Chapter 5; |
|
(c) |
from Chapter 6:
|
|
(d) |
from Chapter 7:
|
|
(e) |
from Chapter 8:
|
|
(f) |
from Chapter 9:
|
|
(g) |
from Chapter 10:
|
|
(h) |
Chapter 13; |
|
(i) |
Chapter 14. |
2. For recreational craft subject to Directive 94/25/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 16 June 1994 on the approximation of laws, regulations and administrative provisions of the Member States relating to recreational craft (25), first inspection and periodical inspections only extend to:
|
(a) |
Article 6.08, if there is a rate-of-turn indicator; |
|
(b) |
Article 7.01, section 2, Article 7.02, Article 7.03, section 1, and Article 7.13, if there is a wheelhouse designed for radar navigation by one person; |
|
(c) |
Article 8.01, section 2, Article 8.02, section 1, Article 8.03, section 3, Article 8.05, section 5, Article 8.08, section 2, and Article 8.10; |
|
(d) |
Article 10.01, sections 2, 3, 6 and 14, Article 10.02, sections 1(b) and (c), 2(a) and (e) to (h), Article 10.03, sections 1(b) and (d)and 2 to 6, and Article 10.07; |
|
(e) |
Chapter 13; |
|
(f) |
from Chapter 14:
|
Article 21.03
(Left void)
CHAPTER 22
STABILITY OF VESSELS CARRYING CONTAINERS
Article 22.01
General
1. The provisions of this Chapter shall apply to vessels carrying containers where stability documents are required according to the applicable navigational authority regulations in force in the Member States.
Stability documents shall be checked, or submitted elsewhere for checking, and duly stamped by an inspection body.
2. Stability documents shall provide the boatmaster with comprehensible information on vessel stability for each loading condition.
Stability documents shall include at least the following:
|
(a) |
information on the permissible stability coefficients, the permissible
|
|
(b) |
data concerning spaces that can be filled with ballast water; |
|
(c) |
forms for checking stability; |
|
(d) |
instructions for use or an example of a calculation for use by the boatmaster. |
3. For vessels where it is optional whether containers are carried non-secured or secured, separate calculation methods shall be provided for confirmation of stability both for transport of non-secured and secured cargoes of containers.
4. A cargo of containers shall only be considered to be secured if each individual container is firmly attached to the hull of the vessel by means of container guides or securing equipment and its position cannot alter during the voyage.
Article 22.02
Limit conditions and method of calculation for confirmation of stability for the transport of non-secured containers
1. All methods of calculating vessel stability in the case of non-secured containers shall meet the following limit conditions:
|
(a) |
Metacentric height
|
|
(b) |
Under the joint action of the centrifugal force resulting from the vessel's turning, wind pressure and the free surfaces of liquids the heeling angle shall not exceed 5° and the edge of the deck shall not be immersed. |
|
(c) |
The heeling lever resulting from the centrifugal force caused by the vessel's turning shall be determined in accordance with the following formula: 
where:
|
|
(d) |
The heeling lever resulting from the wind pressure shall be determined in accordance with the following formula: 
where:
|
|
(e) |
The heeling lever resulting from the free surfaces of rainwater and residual water within the hold or the double bottom shall be determined in accordance with the following formula: 
where:
|
|
(f) |
Half of the fuel and fresh water supply shall be taken into account for each load condition. |
2. The stability of a vessel carrying non-secured containers shall be considered to be sufficient if the effective 
does not exceed the 
zul resulting from the following formulae. The 
zul shall be calculated for various displacements covering the entire range of draughts.
|
(a) |
No value less than 11,5 (11,5 = 1/tan5°) shall be taken for |
.|
(b) |
|
Within the formulae:
|
|
maximum permissible height of the laden vessel's centre of gravity above its base [m]; |
|
|
height of the metacentre above the base [m] in accordance with the approximation formula in section 3; |
|
F |
respective effective freeboard at 1/2 L [m]; |
|
Z |
parameter for the centrifugal force resulting from turning 
|
|
v |
maximum speed of the vessel in relation to the water [m/s]; |
|
Tm |
respective average draught [m]; |
|
hKW |
heeling lever resulting from lateral wind pressure according to section 1(d) [m]; |
|
hKfO |
sum of the heeling levers resulting from the free surfaces of liquids according to section 1(e) [m]. |
Where no sheet of hydrostatic curves is available the value 
for the calculation in accordance with section 2 and Article 22.03, section 2, may be determined by the following approximation formulae:
|
(a) |
for vessels in the shape of a pontoon 
|
|
(b) |
for other vessels 
|
Article 22.03
Limit conditions and method of calculation for confirmation of stability for the transport of secured containers
1. All methods of calculating vessel stability in the case of secured containers shall meet the following limit conditions:
|
(a) |
Metacentric height
|
|
(b) |
No hull opening shall be immersed by the joint action of the centrifugal force resulting from the turning of the vessel, the wind pressure and the free surfaces of liquids. |
|
(c) |
The heeling levers resulting from the centrifugal force due to the vessel's turning, the wind pressure and the free surfaces of liquids shall be determined in accordance with the formulae referred to in Article 22.02, section 1(c) to (e). |
|
(d) |
Half of the fuel and fresh water supply shall be taken into account for each load condition. |
2. The stability of a vessel carrying secured containers shall be considered to be sufficient if the effective 
does not exceed the 
zul resulting from the following formulae that has been calculated for various displacements covering the entire range of draughts.
|
(a) |
No value less than 6,6 shall be taken for no value less than 0 for |
and
.|
(b) |
|
Within these formulae, apart from the terms defined previously:
|
I |
transverse moment of inertia of water line area at Tm [m4] (for the approximation formula see section 3); |
|
i |
transverse moment of inertia of the water line area parallel to the base, at height 
|
|
|
water displacement of the vessel at Tm [m3]; |
|
F' |
ideal freeboard F' = H' – Tm [m] or |
|
a |
the vertical distance between the lower edge of the opening that is first immersed in the event of heeling and the water line in the vessel's upright position [m]; |
|
b |
distance from that same opening from the centre of the vessel [m]; |
|
H' |
ideal side height |
|
q |
sum of the volumes of the deckhouses, hatches, trunk decks and other superstructures up to a maximum height of 1,0 m above H or up to the lowest aperture in the volume under consideration, the lowest value being decisive. Parts of volumes located within a range of 0,05 L from the extremities of the vessel shall not be taken into account [m3]. |
[m], the lowest value shall be decisive;
;3. Approximation formula for I
Where there is no sheet of hydrostatic curves available the value for the transverse moment of inertia I of the water line area may be calculated by the following approximation formulae:
|
(a) |
for vessels in the shape of a pontoon 
|
|
(b) |
for other vessels 
|
Article 22.04
Procedure for assessing stability on board
The procedure for assessing stability may be determined by the documents referred to in Article 22.01, section 2.
CHAPTER 22a
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO CRAFT LONGER THAN 110 M
Article 22a.01
Application of Part I
In addition to the requirements set out in Article 2.03, section 3, the inspection body which is subsequently to issue the Community certificate shall be informed by the owner or his representative before building of craft longer than 110 m, except sea-going ships, begins (building of a new vessel or extension of a vessel already in service). That inspection body shall conduct inspections during the building stage. It may dispense with inspections during the building stage if a certificate is produced before building begins to show that an approved classification society declares that it is to supervise that building.
Article 22a.02
Application of Part II
In addition to Part II, Articles 22a.03 to 22a.05 shall apply to craft that are longer than 110 m.
Article 22a.03
Strength
Sufficient hull strength in accordance with Article 3.02, section 1(a) (longitudinal, lateral and local strength) shall be verified by a certificate issued by an approved classification society.
Article 22a.04
Buoyancy and stability
1. Sections 2 to 9 shall apply to craft that are longer than 110 m, with the exception of passenger vessels.
2. The proof of sufficient stability, including stability after damage, shall be verified for the most unfavourable loading condition.
The basic values for the stability calculation — the vessel's lightweight and the location of the centre of gravity — shall be determined:
|
— |
either by means of a heeling experiment, or |
|
— |
by detailed mass and moment calculation, in which case the lightweight of the vessel shall be verified by checking the draught, with a tolerance limit of +/– 5 % between the mass determined by calculation and the displacement determined by the draught readings. |
3. The proof of buoyancy after damage shall be verified for the fully laden craft.
For this purpose, calculated proof of sufficient stability shall be established for the critical intermediate stages of flooding and for the final stage of flooding. Negative values of stability in intermediate stages of flooding may be accepted by the competent authority if sufficient stability in subsequent intermediate stages is verified.
4. The following assumptions shall be taken into consideration for the damaged condition:
|
(a) |
Extent of side damage:
|
|
(b) |
Extent of bottom damage:
|
|
(c) |
Any bulkheads within the damaged area shall be assumed damaged, which means that the subdivision shall be chosen so that the vessel remains afloat after the flooding of two or more adjacent compartments in the longitudinal direction. For the main engine room only the one-compartment standard need be taken into account, i.e. the end bulkheads of the engine room shall be assumed as not damaged. For bottom damage, adjacent athwartship compartments shall also be assumed as flooded. |
|
(d) |
Permeability Permeability shall be assumed to be 95 %. By way of derogation from this assumption, the following permeability may be assumed:
If a calculation proves that the average permeability of any compartment is lower, the calculated value may be used. |
|
(e) |
The lower edge of any non-watertight openings (e.g. doors, windows, access hatches) shall, at the final stage of flooding, be not less than 100 mm above the damaged waterline. |
5. The stability after damage shall be sufficient if, on the basis of the assumptions in section 4:
|
(a) |
at the final stage of flooding a safety clearance of not less than 100 mm remains and the heeling angle of the craft does not exceed 5°; or |
|
(b) |
calculations in accordance with the procedure for calculation of damaged stability specified in Part 9 of the ADNR produce a positive result. |
6. When cross- or down-flooding openings are provided for reduction of asymmetrical flooding, the time for equalisation shall not exceed 15 minutes, if during the intermediate stages of flooding sufficient damaged stability has been verified.
7. If openings through which undamaged compartments may additionally become flooded are capable of being closed watertight, the closing appliances shall be marked according to their operating instructions.
8. The proof by calculation in accordance with sections 2 to 5 shall be considered to have been provided if damaged stability calculations in accordance with Part 9 of the ADNR, are produced with a positive result.
9. Where necessary in order to meet the requirements in sections 2 or 3, the plane of maximum draught shall be re-established.
Article 22a.05
Additional requirements
1. Craft longer than 110 m shall:
|
(a) |
be fitted with a multi-propeller propulsion system, with at least two independent engines of equal power and a bow thruster that is controlled from the wheelhouse and is also effective when the craft is in an unladen state; or have a single-propeller propulsion system and a bow thruster that is controlled from the wheelhouse with its own power supply and which is also effective when the craft is in an unladen state and makes it possible for the craft to proceed under its own power in the event of a breakdown of the main propulsion system; |
|
(b) |
be fitted with a radar navigation system, together with a rate-of-turn indicator in accordance with Article 7.06, section 1; |
|
(c) |
have a permanently-installed bilge pumping system in accordance with Article 8.08; |
|
(d) |
meet the requirements of Article 23.09, section 1.1. |
2. For craft, except passenger ships, with a length of more than 110 m, which in addition to section 1
|
(a) |
are capable of being separated, in the event of an accident, in the middle third of the vessel without the use of heavy salvage equipment while the separated parts of the vessel shall remain afloat after separation; |
|
(b) |
are provided with a certificate that shall be carried on board and which is issued by an approved classification society regarding the buoyancy, trim position and stability of the separate parts of the vessel, indicating the degree of loading above which buoyancy of the two parts is no longer ensured; |
|
(c) |
are built as double-hull vessels in accordance with the ADNR, where for motor vessels sections 9.1.0.91 to 9.1.0.95, and for tank vessels sections 9.3.2.11.7 and 9.3.2.13 to 9.3.2.15 of Part 9 of the ADNR shall apply; |
|
(d) |
are fitted with a multi-screw propulsion system in accordance with section 1(a), first half sentence; |
it shall be entered in item 52 of the Community certificate that they comply with all the requirements of points (a) to (d).
3. For passenger vessels with a length of more than 110 m which in addition to section 1
|
(a) |
are built or converted for their highest class under the supervision of an approved classification society, in which case compliance shall be confirmed by means of a certificate issued by the classification society while current class is not necessary; |
|
(b) |
either have a double bottom with a height of at least 600 mm and subdivision to ensure that, in the event of flooding of any two adjacent watertight compartments, the vessel does not immerse lower than the margin line and a residual safety clearance of 100 mm remains or have a double bottom with a height of at least 600 mm and a double hull with a distance of at least 800 mm between the side wall of the vessel and the longitudinal bulkhead; |
|
(c) |
be fitted with a multi-screw propulsion system with at least two independent engines of equal power and a bow thruster system which can be operated from the wheelhouse and which operates longitudinally as well as transversely; |
|
(d) |
allow the stern anchor to be operated directly from the wheelhouse; |
it shall be entered in item 52 of the Community certificate that they comply with all the requirements of points (a) to (d).
Article 22a.06
Application of Part IV in the event of conversion
The inspection body may apply Chapter 24 to craft converted to a length of more than 110 m only on the basis of specific recommendations by the Committee.
CHAPTER 22b
SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO HIGH-SPEED VESSELS
Article 22b.01
General
1. High-speed vessels shall not be constructed as cabin vessels.
2. The following installations are prohibited on board high-speed vessels:
|
(a) |
appliances fitted with wick burners according to Article 13.02; |
|
(b) |
vaporising oil burner stoves according to Articles 13.03 and 13.04; |
|
(c) |
solid-fuel heating appliances according Article 13.07; |
|
(d) |
liquefied gas installations according to Chapter 14. |
Article 22b.02
Application of Part I
1. In addition to the provisions of Article 2.03, high-speed vessels shall be constructed and classified under the supervision and in accordance with the applicable rules of an approved classification society which has special rules for high-speed vessels. The class shall be maintained.
2. By way of derogation from Article 2.06, Community certificates issued in accordance with the provisions of this Chapter shall be valid for a maximum of five years.
Article 22b.03
Application of Part II
1. Notwithstanding section 2 and Article 22b.02, section 2, Chapters 3 to 15 shall apply to high-speed vessels, with the exception of the following provisions:
|
(a) |
Article 3.04, section 6, second paragraph; |
|
(b) |
Article 8.08, section 2, second sentence; |
|
(c) |
Article 11.02, section 4, second and third sentences; |
|
(d) |
Article 12.02, section 4, second sentence; |
|
(e) |
Article 15.06, section 3(a), second sentence. |
2. By way of derogation from Article 15.02, section 9, and Article 15.15, section 7, all doors in watertight bulkheads shall be capable of being remote controlled.
3. By way of derogation from Article 6.02, section 1, in case of failure or malfunctioning of the steering apparatus drive unit a second independent steering apparatus drive unit or a manually operated drive unit shall come into operation without time delay.
4. In addition to the requirements of Part II, high-speed vessels shall meet the requirements of Articles 22b.04 to 22b.12.
Article 22b.04
Seats and safety belts
Seats shall be available for the maximum number of passengers permitted on board. Seats shall be fitted with safety belts. Safety belts may be dispensed with where suitable impact protection is provided or where they are not required under Chapter 4, part 6, of the HSC Code 2000.
Article 22b.05
Freeboard
By way of derogation from Articles 4.02 and 4.03, the freeboard shall be at least 500 mm.
Article 22b.06
Buoyancy, stability and subdivision
For high-speed vessels, proper documentation shall be provided for:
|
(a) |
buoyancy and stability characteristics adequate for safety where the craft is operated in the displacement mode, both when intact and when damaged; |
|
(b) |
stability characteristics and stabilising systems ensuring the safety of the craft when used in the dynamic buoyancy phase and the transition phase; |
|
(c) |
stability characteristics in the non-displacement and transitional modes adequate to transfer the craft safely to displacement mode in case of any system malfunction. |
Article 22b.07
Wheelhouse
1. Arrangement
|
(a) |
By way of derogation from Article 7.01, section 1, wheelhouses shall be arranged in such a way that the helmsman and a second member of the crew may at all times perform their tasks while the vessel is under way. |
|
(b) |
The steering position shall be arranged so as to accommodate workstations for the persons mentioned in (a). The instruments for navigation, manoeuvring, monitoring and communication and other important operating controls shall be sufficiently close together to allow a second member of the crew as well as the helmsman to obtain the necessary information and to operate the controls and installations as necessary while seated. The following requirements shall apply in all cases:
|
|
(c) |
The persons mentioned in (a) shall be able to operate the installations mentioned in (b) without any hindrance, including when safety belts are properly worn. |
2. Unobstructed view
|
(a) |
By way of derogation from Article 7.02, section 2, the area of obstructed view forward of the bow for the helmsman in a seated position shall not be more than one vessel length irrespective of the amount of cargo. |
|
(b) |
By way of derogation from Article 7.02, section 3, the total arc of blind sectors from right ahead to 22,5° abaft the beam on either side shall not exceed 20°. Each individual blind sector shall not exceed 5°. The clear sector between two blind sectors shall not be less than 10°. |
3. Instruments
Instrument panels for operating and monitoring the installations mentioned in Article 22b.11 shall be in separate and clearly marked positions in the wheelhouse. This shall also apply, where appropriate, to controls for launching collective lifesaving equipment.
4. Lighting
Red light shall be used for areas or pieces of equipment which shall be lit during use.
5. Windows
Reflections shall be avoided. A means for avoiding dazzle by sunlight shall be provided.
6. Surface materials
The use of reflective surface materials in the wheelhouse shall be avoided.
Article 22b.08
Additional equipment
High-speed craft shall have the following equipment:
|
(a) |
a radar installation and rate-of-turn indicator according to Article 7.06, section 1, |
|
(b) |
readily accessible individual lifesaving equipment conforming to European Standard EN 395:1998 for the maximum number of persons permitted on board. |
Article 22b.09
Closed areas
1. General
Public spaces and accommodation and the equipment they contain shall be designed so that any person making proper use of those facilities will not suffer injury during a normal and emergency start or stop, or during manoeuvring in normal cruise and in failure or malfunction conditions.
2. Communication
|
(a) |
For the purpose of informing passengers of safety measures, all passenger vessels shall be fitted with acoustic and visual installations visible and audible to everyone on board. |
|
(b) |
The installations described under (a) shall enable the boatmaster to give instructions to passengers. |
|
(c) |
Every passenger shall have access to instructions for emergency situations close to their seat, including a plan of the vessel showing all exits, escape routes, emergency equipment, lifesaving equipment and instructions for the use of lifejackets. |
Article 22b.10
Exits and escape routes
Escape and evacuation routes shall satisfy the following requirements:
|
(a) |
there shall be easy, safe and quick access from the steering position to spaces and accommodation accessible to the public; |
|
(b) |
escape routes leading to emergency exits shall be clearly and permanently marked; |
|
(c) |
all exits shall be properly marked. The operation of the opening mechanism shall be obvious from the outside and the inside; |
|
(d) |
the escape routes and emergency exits shall have a suitable safety guidance system; |
|
(e) |
sufficient space for a member of the crew shall be left next to exits. |
Article 22b.11
Fire protection and fire-fighting
1. Corridors, rooms and accommodation accessible to the public and also galleys and engine rooms shall be connected to an appropriate fire alarm system. Any fire and its location shall be indicated automatically in a place permanently manned by crew.
2. Engine rooms shall be equipped with a permanently installed fire-fighting system according to Article 10.03b.
3. Rooms and accommodation accessible to the public and their escape routes shall be equipped with a pressurised water sprinkler system according to Article 10.03a. It shall be possible to drain the used water rapidly and directly to the outside.
Article 22b.12
Transitional provisions
High-speed vessels according to Article 1.01, section 22 which have a valid Community certificate on 31 March 2003 shall meet the following provisions of this Chapter:
|
(a) |
Articles 22b.01, 22b.04, 22b.08, 22b.09, 22b.10, 22b.11, section 1 when the Community certificate is renewed; |
|
(b) |
on 1 April 2013, Article 22b.07, sections 1, 3, 4, 5 and 6; |
|
(c) |
on 1 January 2023 all other provisions. |
PART III
CHAPTER 23
EQUIPMENT OF VESSELS WITH REGARD TO MANNING
Article 23.01
(Left void)
Article 23.02
(Left void)
Article 23.03
(Left void)
Article 23.04
(Left void)
Article 23.05
(Left void)
Article 23.06
(Left void)
Article 23.07
(Left void)
Article 23.08
(Left void)
Article 23.09
Vessels' equipment
1. For motor vessels, pushers, pushed convoys and passenger vessels, compliance with, or failure to comply with, the provisions of sections 1.1 or 1.2 shall be entered in item 47 of the Community certificate by the inspection body.
1.1 Standard S1
|
(a) |
The propulsion systems shall be arranged in such a way that speed can be changed and the direction of the propeller thrust reversed from the steering position. It shall be possible for the auxiliary engines needed for operational purposes to be switched on or off from the steering position, unless this is done automatically or the engines run continuously during each voyage. |
|
(b) |
In the danger areas of
there shall be monitoring by means of instruments which set off acoustic and visual signals in the wheelhouse in the event of malfunction. The acoustic alarm signals may be combined in one audible warning device. They may be switched off as soon as the malfunction has been acknowledged. The visual alarm signals may only be switched off when the malfunctions which set them off have been corrected. |
|
(c) |
The fuel shall be supplied and the main engine cooled automatically. |
|
(d) |
The steering system shall be able to be operated by one person, even in maximum draught, without requiring particular force. |
|
(e) |
It shall be possible to give the visual and acoustic signals required under national or international navigational authority regulations, as appropriate, from the steering position. |
|
(f) |
Where there is no direct communication between the steering position and the foresection, the aft, the accommodation and the engine rooms, a voice communication system shall be provided. For communication with the engine rooms, this may be in the form of an optical or acoustic signal. |
|
(g) |
The required ship's boat shall be capable of being released by one crew member alone and in an appropriate amount of time. |
|
(h) |
There shall be a searchlight which can be operated from the steering position. |
|
(i) |
The operation of cranks and similar revolving parts of lifting devices shall not require a force of more than 160 N. |
|
(k) |
The towing winches entered in the Community certificate shall be motorised. |
|
(l) |
The bilge and deck-wash pumps shall be motorised. |
|
(m) |
The principal control units and monitoring instruments shall be ergonomically arranged. |
|
(n) |
The equipment required under Article 6.01, section 1, shall be capable of being remotely operated from the steering position. |
1.2 Standard S2
|
(a) |
For motor vessels operating seperately:
|
|
(b) |
For motor vessels propelling in side-by-side formation:
|
|
(c) |
For motor vessels propelling pushed convoys made up of the motor vessel itself and a craft in front:
|
|
(d) |
For pushers propelling a pushed convoy:
|
|
(e) |
For passenger vessels:
|
Article 23.10
(Left void)
Article 23.11
(Left void)
Article 23.12
(Left void)
Article 23.13
(Left void)
Article 23.14
(Left void)
Article 23.15
(Left void)
PART IV
CHAPTER 24
TRANSITIONAL AND FINAL PROVISIONS
Article 24.01
Applicability of transitional provisions to craft which are already in service
1. The provisions of Articles 24.02 to 24.04 apply only to craft carrying on … (27) a valid vessel certificate according to the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994, or which were under construction or undergoing conversion on 31 December 1994.
2. For craft not covered by section 1, the provisions of Article 24.06 apply.
Article 24.02
Derogations for craft which are already in service
1. Without prejudice to Articles 24.03 and 24.04, craft which do not fully comply with the provisions of this Directive must
|
(a) |
be adapted to comply with those provisions in accordance with the transitional provisions listed in the table below, and |
|
(b) |
until their adaptation, comply with the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994. |
2. The following definitions apply in the table below:
|
— |
‘N.R.C.’: The provision does not apply to craft which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or converted, i.e. the provision applies only to Newly-built craft and to the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning of the transitional provisions. |
|
— |
‘Issue or renewal of the Community certificate’: The provision must be complied with the time of the next issue or renewal of the Community certificate after the date indicated. |
|
Article and Section |
Content |
Deadline and comments |
||
|
CHAPTER 3 |
||||
|
3.03 sec. 1(a) |
Situation of collision bulkhead |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Accommodations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
Safety equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|||
|
sec. 4 |
Gastight separation of accommodations from engine rooms, boiler rooms and holds |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 5, 2nd par. |
Monitoring of doors in aft-peak bulkheads |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 7 |
Anchors not protruding in foresections of vessels |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2041 |
||
|
3.04 sec. 3, 2nd sentence |
Insulation material used in engine rooms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
sec. 3, 3rd and 4th sentences |
Openings and locking devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
3.04 sec. 6 |
Exits of engine rooms |
Engine rooms which were not considered as engine rooms according to Article 1.01 before 1995 must be equipped with a second exit at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
CHAPTER 5 |
||||
|
5.06 sec. 1, 1st sentence |
Minimum speed |
For craft laid down before 1996 at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
CHAPTER 6 |
||||
|
6.01 sec. 1 |
Manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Permanent lists and ambient temperatures |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 7 |
Design of rudder stocks |
For craft laid down before 1996: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
6.02 sec. 2 |
Single operation sufficient to operate second driving unit |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 ensured by second drive unit/manual drive |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
6.03 sec. 1 |
Connection of other consumers to hydraulic steering apparatus drive unit |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Separate hydraulic reservoirs |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
6.05 sec. 1 |
Wheel of manual drive not driven by powered drive unit |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
6.06 sec. 1 |
Two independent actuation systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
6.07 sec. 2(a) |
Monitoring devices for level of hydraulic reservoir and service pressure |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 2(e) |
Monitoring of buffer devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
6.08 sec. 1 |
Requirements for electrical equipment according to Article 9.20 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
CHAPTER 7 |
||||
|
7.02 sec. 3, 2nd par. |
Unobstructed view in the helmsman's usual axis of vision |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Minimal light transmission |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
7.03 sec. 7 |
Shutdown of alarms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate, unless the wheelhouse has been designed for radar navigation by one person |
||
|
sec. 8 |
Automatic switch to another power supply |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
7.04 sec. 1 |
Control of main engines and steering systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Control of main engine |
Unless wheelhouses have been designed for radar navigation by one person: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 if the direction of motion can be achieved directly; 1.1.2010 for other engines |
||
|
7.09 |
Alarm system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
7.12 1st par. |
Retractable wheelhouses |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate Non-hydraulic lowering system: at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
2nd and 3rd pars. |
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
CHAPTER 8 |
||||
|
8.01 sec. 3 |
Only internal-combustion engines burning fuels having a flashpoint of more than 55 °C |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
8.02 sec. 1 |
Securing of engines against unintentional starting |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Automatic protection of engine parts |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
8.03 sec. 2 |
Monitoring devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Automatic protection against overspeed |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Design of shaft bushings |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
8.05 sec. 1 |
Steel tanks for liquid fuels |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Automatic closing of tank valves |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
sec. 3 |
No fuel tanks located forward of the collision bulkhead |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
No fuel tanks and their fittings above engines or exhaust pipes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010. Until then, appropriate devices must ensure the safe evacuation of fuels. |
||
|
sec. 6, 3rd to 5th sentences |
Installation and measurements of breather pipes and connection pipes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
8.05 sec. 7 |
Shutoff device to be operated from the deck |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 9, 1st sentence |
Capacity-gauging devices to be legible up to maximum filling level |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 13 |
Filling level control not only for main engines but also other engines needed for safe operation of the vessel |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
8.08 sec. 8 |
Simple closing device not sufficient for connection of ballast spaces to drainage pipes for holds capable of carrying ballast |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Gauging devices in hold bilges |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
8.09 sec. 2 |
Installations for the collection of oily water and used oil stores |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
8.10 sec. 3 |
Emission limit of 65 dB(A) for stationary vessels |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
CHAPTER 8a |
||||
|
|
The transitional provisions on Chapter 8a of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation apply |
|
||
|
CHAPTER 9 |
||||
|
9.01 sec. 1, 2nd sentence |
Relevant documents to be submitted to the inspection body |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 2, 2nd indent |
Switching diagrams for main, emergency and distribution switchboard to be kept on board |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Ambient inside and deck temperatures |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
9.02 secs. 1 to 3 |
Electricity supply systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
9.05 sec. 4 |
Cross-section of the earthing conductors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
9.11 sec. 4 |
Effective ventilation when accumulators are installed in a closed compartment, cabinet or chest |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
9.12 sec. 2(d) |
Switch-gear installations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 3(b) |
Earth detection device capable of giving both visual and audible alarm |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
9.13 |
Emergency circuit breakers |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
9.14 sec. 3, 2nd sentence |
Prohibition of single-pole switches in laundries, bathrooms, washrooms and other rooms with wet facilities |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
9.15 sec. 2 |
Minimum cross-section of 1,5 mm2 per cable |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Cables connected to retractable wheelhouses |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
9.16 sec. 3, 2nd sentence |
Second circuit |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
9.19 |
Alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
9.20 |
Electronic equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
9.21 |
Electromagnetic compatibility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
CHAPTER 10 |
||||
|
10.01 |
Anchor equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
10.02 sec. 2(a) |
Certificate for mooring and other cables |
First cable to be replaced on the vessel: N.R.C., at the latest 1.1.2008 Second and third cables: 1.1.2013 |
||
|
10.03 sec. 1 |
European standard |
For replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Suitability for Class A, B and C fires |
For replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Relation of CO2 content and size of room |
For replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 |
||
|
10.03a |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
10.03b |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms |
|||
|
10.04 |
Application of the European standard to dinghies |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
10.05 sec. 2 |
Inflatable life jackets |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010. Life jackets which have been on board on 30.9.2003 may be used until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010. |
||
|
CHAPTER 11 |
||||
|
11.02 sec. 4 |
Equipment of outer edges of decks, side decks and work stations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
11.04 |
Side decks |
(29)First issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035, when larger than 7,30 m |
||
|
11.05 sec. 1 |
Access to workplaces |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
secs. 2 and 3 |
Doors and accesses, exits and passageways where there is more than a 0,50 m difference in floor level |
Issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Stairs in working spaces which are manned continuously |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
11.06 sec. 2 |
Exits and emergency exits |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
11.07 sec. 1, 2nd sentence |
Ladders, steps and similar devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
secs. 2 and 3 |
|
Issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
11.10 |
Hatch covers |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
11.11 |
Winches |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
11.12 secs. 2 to 6 and 8 to 10 |
Cranes: manufacturer's plate, maximum permissible loadings, protection devices, calculation test, inspection by experts, certificates on board |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
11.13 |
Storing of flammable liquids |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
CHAPTER 12 |
||||
|
12.01 sec. 1 |
Accommodation for the persons lodging habitually on board |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
12.02 sec. 3 |
Situation of floors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Living and sleeping quarters |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Headroom in the accommodation |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 8 |
Free floor area of communal living quarters |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Cubic capacity of rooms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 10 |
Volume of airspace per person |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 11 |
Size of doors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 12(a) and (b) |
Situation of stairs |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
sec. 13 |
Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
12.03 |
Sanitary installations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
12.04 |
Galleys |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
12.05 |
Potable water |
N.R.C., at the latest on 31.12.2006 |
||
|
12.06 |
Heating and ventilation |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
12.07 sec. 1, 2nd sentence |
Other accommodation installations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
CHAPTER 15 |
||||
|
15.01 sec. 1(d) |
Non-application of Article 9.14 sec. 3 2nd sentence for rated voltages of over 50 V |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 2(c) |
Prohibition of solid fuel heaters according to Article 13.07 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 The provision does not apply to craft with solid fuel engines (steam engines). |
||
|
(e) |
Prohibition of liquefied gas devices according to Chapter 14 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.02 sec. 2 |
Number and position of bulkheads |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 5, 2nd sentence |
Margin line if no bulkhead deck |
For passenger vessels which have been laid down before 1.1.1996, the requirement applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 10(c) |
Time for closure process |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 12 |
Optical warning system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
sec. 15 |
Minimum height of double bottoms, width of wing voids |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.03 secs. 1 to 6 |
Intact stability |
N.R.C., and when the maximum number of passengers is raised, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
secs. 7 and 8 |
Damaged stability |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
2-compartment status |
N.R.C. |
||
|
secs. 10 to 13 |
Damaged stability |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.05 sec. 2(a) |
Number of passengers for whom the existence of an evacuation area according to Article 15.06 sec. 8 has been proven |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
(b) |
Number of passengers that has been taken into account for the stability calculation according to Article 15.03 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.06 sec. 1(a) |
Passenger rooms on all decks aft of the collision bulkhead and forward of the level of the aft-peak bulkhead |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 3(c), 1st sentence |
Clear height of exits |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
2nd sentence |
Clear width of doors of passenger cabins and other small rooms |
For the measurement of 0,7 m, N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045, applies |
||
|
15.06 sec. 3(f), 1st sentence |
Size of emergency exits |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
(g) |
Exits of rooms intended for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 4(d) |
Doors intended for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Requirements for connecting corridors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 6(b) |
Escape routes to evacuation areas |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
(d) |
No rungs, ladders or the like installed along the escape routes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 7 |
Suitable safety guidance system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 8 |
Requirements for muster areas |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Requirements for stairs and their landings in the passenger areas |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 10(a), 1st sentence |
Railing according to European standard EN 711:1995 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
2nd sentence |
Height of bulwarks and railings of decks intended for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.06 sec. 10(b), 2nd sentence |
Clear width of openings used normally for the embarking or disembarking of persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 13 |
Traffic areas and walls in traffic areas intended for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 14, 1st sentence |
Design of glass doors and walls in traffic areas and window panes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 15 |
Requirements for superstructures or their roofs consisting completely of panoramic panes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 16 |
Potable water systems in accordance with Article 12.05 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 31.12.2006 |
||
|
sec. 17, 2nd sentence |
Requirements for toilets fitted for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 18 |
Ventilation system for cabins without an opening window |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 19 |
Requirements of Article 15.06 for rooms in which crew members or shipboard personnel are accommodated |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.07 |
Requirements for the propulsion system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.08 sec. 2 |
Requirements for loudspeaker systems in passenger areas |
For passenger vessels with LWL of less than 40 m or for not more than 75 persons the provision applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Requirements for the alarm system |
For day-trip vessels the provision applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Bilge level alarm for each watertight compartment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Two motor-driven bilge pumps |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Permanently installed bilge system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 8 |
Ventilation system for CO2 bar-systems in rooms below deck |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
15.09 sec. 3 |
Appropriate transfer equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
15.09 sec. 4 |
Individual life-saving equipment for children |
Until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 this equipment is considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment |
||
|
|
Life-saving equipment |
For passenger vessels which were equipped with collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09 sec. 5 before 1.1.2005, these appliances are considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment. For passenger vessels which were equipped with collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09 sec. 6 before 1.1.2005, these are considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010. |
||
|
sec. 5(b) and (c) |
Adequate seating space, buoyancy of at least 750 N |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
(f) |
Stable trim and appropriate grabbing devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
(i) |
Appropriate means of evacuation from evacuation areas on to life rafts |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 10 |
Ship's boat equipped with engine and searchlight |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
15.10 sec. 2 |
Article 9.16 sec. 3 also applicable to passageways and recreation rooms for passengers |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Adequate emergency lighting |
Emergency lighting N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
15.10 sec. 4 |
Emergency power plant |
For day-trip vessels with LWL of 25 m or less, the provision applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
(f) |
Emergency supply for searchlights according to Article 10.02 sec. 2(i) |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
(i) |
Emergency supply for lifts and lifting equipment according to Article 15.06, sec. 9, 2nd sentence |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Requirements for the emergency power plant: |
|
||
|
|
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
|
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
|
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
15.11 sec. 1 |
Fire protection Suitability for fire protection of materials and components |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Design of partitions |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Paints, lacquers and other surface treatment products as well as deck coverings used in rooms except engine rooms and store rooms shall be flame-retardant |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Lounge ceilings and wall claddings manufactured from non-combustible material |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Furniture and fittings in muster areas manufactured from non-combustible material |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Tested according to Code |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 7 |
Insulation materials in lounges |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 8 |
Requirements for doors in partitions |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Walls |
On cabin vessels without automatic pressurised-water spraying systems, ends of walls between cabins: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 10 |
Partitions |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.11 sec. 11 |
Draught stops |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 12, 2nd sentence |
Stairs made of steel or another equivalent non-combustible material |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 13 |
Encapsulation of internal stairs |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 14 |
Ventilation systems and air supply systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 15 |
Ventilation systems in galleys and stoves with extractors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 16 |
Control centres, stairwells, muster areas and smoke extraction systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 17 |
Fire alarm system |
For day-trip vessels: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
15.12 sec. 1 |
Portable extinguishers |
Extinguisher and quenching material in galleys, hairdressing salons and perfumeries: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Hydrant system |
2nd fire extinguishing pump: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Requirements for hydrant systems |
Pressure and water jet length: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Materials, protection against failure |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
15.12 sec. 7 |
Avoidance of the possibility of freezing of pipes and hydrants |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 8(b) |
Independent operation of fire extinguishing pumps |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
(c) |
Water jet length on all decks |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
(d) |
Installation of fire extinguishing pumps |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Fire extinguishing system in engine rooms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.14 sec. 1 |
Waste water collection and disposal facilities |
For cabin vessels with no more than 50 berths and for day-trip vessels: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Requirements for waste water collection tanks |
For cabin vessels with no more than 50 berths and for day-trip vessels with no more than 50 passengers: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
15.15 sec. 1 |
Damage stability |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
(Left void) |
|
||
|
sec. 5 |
Equipped with a ship's boat, a platform or an equivalent installation |
For passenger vessels licensed for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 berths: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
15.15 sec. 6 |
Equipped with a ship's boat, a platform or an equivalent installation |
For passenger vessels licensed for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 berths: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
sec. 9(a) |
Alarm systems for liquefied gas installations |
N.R.C., at the latest on renewal of the certificate according to Article 14.15 |
||
|
(b) |
Collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09 sec. 5 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
||
|
CHAPTER 16 |
||||
|
16.01 sec. 2 |
Special winches or equivalent coupling devices |
The requirement applies to craft licensed before 1.1.1995 for pushing without proper securing equipment, only at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035. |
||
|
16.01 sec. 3, last sentence |
Requirements for drive units |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
||
|
CHAPTER 17 |
||||
|
17.02 sec. 3 |
Additional requirements |
The same transitional provisions as those indicated under the relevant article apply. |
||
|
17.03 sec. 1 |
General alarm system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Maximum authorised load |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
17.04 secs. 2 and 3 |
Residual safety clearance |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
17.05 secs. 2 and 3 |
Residual freeboard |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
17.06, 17.07 and 17.08 |
Heeling test and confirmation of stability |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
17.09 |
Draught marks and draught scales |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
||
|
CHAPTER 20 |
||||
|
|
The transitional provisions on Chapter 20 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation apply |
|
||
|
CHAPTER 21 |
||||
|
21.01 to 21.02 |
|
The requirements apply to recreational craft built before 1.1.1995, only at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035. |
||
Article 24.03
Derogations for craft which were laid down on or before 1 April 1976
1. In addition to the provisions of Article 24.02, the following provisions may be applied to craft which were laid down on or before 1 April 1976.
The following definitions apply in the table below:
|
— |
‘R.C.’: The provision does not apply to craft which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or converted, i.e. the provision applies only to the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning of the transitional provisions. |
|
— |
‘Issue or renewal of the Community certificate’: The provision must be complied with by the time of the next issue or renewal of the Community certificate after the date indicated. |
|
Article and Section |
Content |
Deadline and comments |
|
CHAPTER 3 |
||
|
3.03 sec. 1(a) |
Situation of collision bulkhead |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
|
3.04 sec. 2 |
Common surfaces of bunkers and accommodation and passenger areas |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
|
sec. 7 |
Maximum permissible sound pressure level |
Issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
CHAPTER 4 |
||
|
4.01 sec. 2, 4.02 and 4.03 |
Safety clearance, freeboard, minimum freeboard |
Issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
CHAPTER 7 |
||
|
7.01 sec. 2 |
Sound pressure generated by the vessel |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
7.05 sec. 2 |
Monitoring of navigation lights |
Issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
CHAPTER 8 |
||
|
8.08 secs. 3 and 4 |
Minimum pumping capacity and internal diameter of drainage pipes |
Issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
8.10 sec. 2 |
Noise generated by a vessel under way |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
CHAPTER 9 |
||
|
9.01 |
Requirements for electrical equipment |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
9.03 |
Protection against physical contact, intrusion of solid objects and the ingress of water |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
9.06 |
Maximum permissible voltages |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
9.10 |
Generators and motors |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
9.11 sec. 2 |
Installation of accumulators |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
9.12 |
Switch-gear installations |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
9.14 |
Installation fittings |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
9.15 |
Cables |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
9.17 |
Navigation lights |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
CHAPTER 12 |
||
|
12.02 sec. 5 |
Noise and vibration in accommodations |
Issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
CHAPTER 15 |
||
|
15.02 sec. 5, sec. 6, 1st sentence, secs. 7 to sec. 11 and sec. 13 |
Margin line if no bulkhead deck |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
|
15.02 sec. 16 |
Watertight windows |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
|
15.04 |
Safety clearance, freeboard, immersion measures |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
|
15.05 |
Number of passengers |
Issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
|
15.10 sec. 4, sec. 6, sec. 7, sec. 8 and sec. 11 |
Emergency power plant |
R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
2. Article 15.11, section 3(a), applies to day-trip vessels laid down on or before 1 April 1976 until the first issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045, with the proviso that only paints, varnishes, coatings and other materials used on surfaces facing escape routes and other materials for the surface treatment of panels must be fire-resistant and that smoke or toxic vapours may not develop to any dangerous extent.
3. Article 15.11, section 12, applies to day-trip vessels laid down on or before 1 April 1976 until the first issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045, with the proviso that it is sufficient if, instead of stairs in the form of a load-bearing steel assembly, the stairs serving as an escape route are designed in such a way that they remain useable, in the event of a fire, for about the same time as stairs in the form of a load-bearing steel assembly.
Article 24.04
Other derogations
1. For craft the minimum freeboard of which was determined in accordance with Article 4.04 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 1983, the inspection body may, at the request of the owner, determine the freeboard in accordance with Article 4.03 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 1 January 1995.
2. Craft laid down before 1 July 1983 do not need to conform to Chapter 9, but must at least conform to Chapter 6 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 1983.
3. Article 15.06, section 3, (a) to (e), and Article 15.12, section 3 (a), with regard to the rule concerning a single hose length apply only to craft laid down after 30 September 1984, and to conversions of the areas concerned, at the latest when the Community certificate is renewed after 1 January 2045.
4. If it is difficult in practical terms to apply the provisions set out in this Chapter following the expiry of the transitional provisions, or if their application gives rise to unreasonably high costs, the inspection body may allow derogations from these provisions subject to recommendations by the Committee. These derogations must be entered in the Community certificate.
5. Where this provision refers, with regard to equipment design requirements, to a European or an international standard, such equipment may, after any revision of the standard, continue to be used for a further 20 years following the revision of the standard.
Article 24.05
(Left void)
Article 24.06
Derogations for craft not covered by Article 24.01
1. The following provisions apply
|
(a) |
to craft for which a vessel certificate in accordance with the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation was issued for the first time between 1 January 1995 and … (27), provided they were not under construction or undergoing conversion on 31 December 1994 |
|
(b) |
to craft which have obtained another traffic licence between 1 January 1995 and … (27). |
2. It must be proved that those craft comply with the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on the date on which the vessel certificate or the other traffic licence is granted.
3. The craft must be adapted to comply with provisions which enter into force following the first issue of the vessel certificate or other traffic licence in accordance with the transitional provisions set out in the table below.
4. Article 24.04, sections 4 and 5, apply mutatis mutandis.
5. The following definitions apply in the table below:
|
— |
‘N.R.C.’: The provision does not apply to craft which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or converted, i.e. the provision applies only to Newly-built craft and to the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning of the transitional provisions. |
|
— |
‘Issue or renewal of the Community certificate’: The provision must be complied with by the time of the next issue or renewal of the Community certificate after the date indicated. |
|
Article and Section |
Content |
Deadline and comments |
Valid for craft with vessel certificate or traffic licence before |
||
|
CHAPTER 3 |
|||||
|
3.03 sec. 7 |
Anchors not protruding in foresections of vessels |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2041 |
1.10.1999 |
||
|
3.04 sec. 3, 2nd sentence |
Insulation in engine rooms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.4.2003 |
||
|
sec. 3, 3rd and 4th sentences |
Openings and closing devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.10.2003 |
||
|
CHAPTER 8 |
|||||
|
8.02 sec. 4 |
Protection of engine parts |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.4.2003 |
||
|
8.03 sec. 3 |
Protection against overspeed |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.4.2004 |
||
|
8.05 sec. 9, 1st sentence |
Sounding devices must be readable up to the maximum filling level |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.4.1999 |
||
|
sec. 13 |
Filling level control not only for main engines but also other engines needed for safe operation of the vessel |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.4.1999 |
||
|
CHAPTER 8a |
|||||
|
|
The transitional provisions on Chapter 8a of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation apply. |
|
|
||
|
CHAPTER 10 |
|||||
|
10.02 sec. 2(a) |
Certification of wire ropes and other ropes |
The first rope replaced on the vessel: NR.C., at the latest 1.1.2008. Second and third ropes: 1.1.2013. |
1.4.2003 |
||
|
10.03 sec. 1 |
European standard |
On replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 |
1.4.2002 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Suitable for fire category A, B and C |
On replacement, at the latest 1.1.2010 |
1.4.2002 |
||
|
10.03a |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in cabins, wheelhouses and passenger areas |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
1.4.2002 |
||
|
10.03b |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms |
(30)at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 |
1.4.2002 |
||
|
10.04 |
Application of the European standard to dinghies |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.10.2003 |
||
|
10.05 sec. 2 |
Inflatable life-jackets |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010. Life jackets which have been on board on 30.9.2003 may be used until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010. |
1.10.2003 |
||
|
CHAPTER 11 |
|||||
|
11.13 |
Storage of flammable liquids |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.10.2002 |
||
|
CHAPTER 15 |
|||||
|
15.01 sec. 1(c) |
Non-application of Article 8.06 sec. 2, 2nd sentence |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(d) |
Non-application of Article 9.14 sec. 3, 2nd sentence for rated voltages of over 50 V |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 2(b) |
Prohibition of vaporising oil-burner stoves according to Article 13.04 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(c) |
Prohibition of solid fuel heaters according to Article 13.07 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(e) |
Prohibition of liquefied gas devices according to Chapter 14 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.02 sec. 2 |
Number and position of bulkheads |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 5, 2nd sentence |
Margin line if no bulkhead deck |
For passenger vessels laid down before 1.1.1996, the requirement applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 15 |
Minimum height of double bottoms, width of wing voids |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.03 secs. 1 to 6 |
Intact stability |
N.R.C., and when the maximum number of passengers is raised, at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.03 secs. 7 and 8 |
Damaged stability |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
2-compartment status |
N.R.C. |
1.1.2007 |
||
|
secs. 10 to 13 |
Damaged stability |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.05 sec. 2(a) |
Number of passengers for whom the existence of an evacuation area according to Article 15.06 sec. 8 has been proven |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(b) |
Number of passengers that has been taken into account for the stability calculation according to Article 15.03 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.06 sec. 1 |
Passenger rooms on all decks forward of the level of the aft-peak bulkhead |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Cupboards and rooms referred to in Article 11.13 and intended for the storage of flammable liquids |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 3(c), 1st sentence |
Clear height of exits |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
2nd sentence |
Clear width of doors of passenger cabins and other small rooms |
For the measurement of 0,7 m, N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045, applies |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.06 sec. 3(f), 1st sentence |
Size of emergency exits |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(g) |
Exits intended for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 4(d) |
Doors intended for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Requirements for connecting corridors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 6(b) |
Escape routes to evacuation areas |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(c) |
No escape routes through engine rooms and galleys |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(d) |
No rungs, ladders or the like installed along the escape routes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 7 |
Suitable safety guidance system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 8 |
Requirements for muster areas |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 9(a) to (c), (e), and last sentence |
Requirements for stairs and their landings in the passenger areas |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 10(a), 1st sentence |
Railing according to European standard EN 711:1995 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
2nd sentence |
Height of bulwarks and railings of decks intended for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(b), 2nd sentence |
Clear width of openings used for the embarking or disembarking of persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 12 |
Gangways in accordance with European standard EN 14206:2003 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 13 |
Traffic areas and walls in traffic areas, intended for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 14, 1st sentence |
Design of glass doors and walls in traffic areas and window panes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 15 |
Requirements for superstructures or their roofs consisting completely of panoramic panes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 16 |
Potable water systems according to Article 12.05 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 17, 2nd sentence |
Requirements for toilets fitted for use by persons with reduced mobility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 18 |
Ventilation system for cabins without an opening window |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.07 |
Requirements for the propulsion system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2007 |
||
|
15.08 sec. 2 |
Requirements for loudspeaker systems in passenger areas |
For passenger vessels with LWL of less than 40 m or for not more than 75 persons the provision applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Requirements for the alarm system |
For day-trip vessels the provision applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 3(c) |
Alarm system enabling the vessel's command to alert the crew and shipboard personnel |
For cabin vessels the provision applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Bilge level alarm for each watertight compartment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Two motor-driven bilge pumps |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Permanently installed bilge system according to Article 8.06 sec. 4 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 7 |
Inside opening of cold-storage rooms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 8 |
Ventilation system for CO2 bar-systems in rooms below deck |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
First-aid kits |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.09 sec. 1, 1st sentence |
Life buoys |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Individual life-saving equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Appropriate transfer equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.09 sec. 4 |
Individual life-saving equipment according to European standard EN 395:1998 or EN 396:1998 available for 100 % of passengers |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
|
Individual life-saving equipment for children |
Until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 this equipment is considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment. |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
|
Life-saving equipment |
For passenger vessels which were equipped with collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09 sec. 5 before 1.1.2005, these appliances are considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment. For passenger vessels which were equipped with collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09 sec. 6 before 1.1.2005, these are considered an alternative to individual life-saving equipment until issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010. |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 5(b) and (c) |
Adequate seating space, buoyancy of at least 750 N |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(f) |
Stable trim and appropriate grabbing devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(i) |
Appropriate means of evacuation from the evacuation areas onto the life rafts |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Check on life-saving equipment according to the manufacturer's instructions |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 10 |
Ship's boat equipped with engine and searchlight |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 11 |
Stretcher |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
|
Electrical Equipment |
|
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.10 sec. 2 |
Article 9.16 sec. 3 also applicable to passageways and recreation rooms for passengers |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Adequate emergency lighting |
Emergency lighting N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Emergency power plant |
For day-trip vessels with LWL of 25 m or less, the provision applies at N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(f) |
Emergency supply for searchlights according to Article 10.02 sec. 2 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(i) |
Emergency supply for lifts and lifting equipment according to Article 15.06, sec. 9, 2nd sentence |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Requirements for the emergency power plant: |
|
1.1.2006 |
||
|
|
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
|
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
|
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.11 |
Fire protection |
|
1.1.2007 |
||
|
sec. 1 |
Suitability for fire protection of materials and components |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.11 sec. 2 |
Design of partitions |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 3 |
Paints, lacquers and other surface treatment products as well as deck coverings used in rooms except engine rooms and store rooms shall be flame-retardant |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2015 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Lounge ceilings and wall claddings manufactured from non-combustible material |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Furniture and fittings in muster areas manufactured from non-combustible material |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Tested according to Code |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 7 |
Insulation materials in lounges non-combustible |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 8, (a), (b), (c), 2nd sentence and (d) |
Requirements for doors in partitions |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Walls |
On cabin vessels without automatic pressurised-water spraying systems, ends of walls between cabins: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 10 |
Partitions |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 12, 2nd sentence |
Stairs made of steel or another equivalent non-combustible material |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 13 |
Encapsulation of internal stairs by walls according to section 2 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 14 |
Ventilation systems and air supply systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 15 |
Ventilation systems in galleys and stoves with extractors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 16 |
Control centres, stairwells, muster areas and smoke extraction systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 17 |
Fire alarm system |
For day-trip vessels: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.12 sec. 1 |
Portable extinguishers |
Fire extinguisher and fire blanket in galleys, hairdressing salons and perfumeries: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Hydrant system |
2nd fire extinguishing pump: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
Hydrant valves |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 5 |
Axially connected reel |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Materials, protection against failure |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 7 |
Avoidance of the possibility of freezing of pipes and hydrants |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 8(b) |
Independent operation of fire extinguishing pumps |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(d) |
Installation of fire extinguishing pumps |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 9 |
Fire extinguishing system in engine rooms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.12 sec. 9 |
Fire extinguishing system in engine rooms made from steel or with equivalent properties |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045. The transitional period does not apply to passenger vessels which have been laid down after 31.12.1995, the hull of which is made of wood, aluminium or plastic and the engine rooms of which are not made of a material according to Article 3.04 secs. 3 and 4. |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.13 |
Safety organisation |
For day-trip vessels: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.14 sec. 1 |
Waste water collection and disposal facilities |
For cabin vessels with 50 or fewer berths, and for day-trip vessels: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 2 |
Requirements for waste water collection tanks |
For cabin vessels with 50 or fewer berths, and for day-trip vessels with 50 or fewer passengers: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.15 |
Derogations for certain passenger vessels |
|
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 1 |
Damage stability |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2045 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 4 |
(Left void) |
|
|
||
|
sec. 5 |
Equipped with a ship's boat, a platform or an equivalent installation |
For passenger vessels licensed for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 berths: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
sec. 6 |
Equipped with a ship's boat, a platform or an equivalent installation |
For passenger vessels licensed for a maximum of 250 passengers or 50 berths: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
15.15 sec. 9(a) |
Alarm systems for liquefied gas installations |
N.R.C., at the latest on renewal of the attestation according to Article 14.15 |
1.1.2006 |
||
|
(b) |
Collective life-saving appliances according to Article 15.09 sec. 5 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2010 |
1.1.2006 |
||
Article 24.07
(Left void)
CHAPTER 24a
ADDITIONAL TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS FOR CRAFT NOT NAVIGATING ON ZONE R WATERWAYS
Article 24a.01
Application of transitional provisions to craft already in service and validity of previous Community certificates
1. The following provisions apply
|
(a) |
to craft for which a Community certificate was issued for the first time before … (27), and |
|
(b) |
to craft which obtained another traffic licence before … (27) |
not navigating a Zone R waterway.
2. It must be proved that those craft comply with the provisions of Chapters 1 to 12 of Annex II of Directive 82/714/EEC on the date on which the Community certificate or the other traffic licence is issued.
3. Community certificates delivered before … (27) remain valid until the date of expiry indicated on the certificate. Article 2.09 section 2, remains applicable.
Article 24a.02
Derogations for craft already in service
1. Without prejudice to Articles 24a.03 and 24a.04, craft which do not fully comply with the provisions of this Directive must be adapted to comply with provisions which enter into force after the first issue of their Community certificate or other traffic licence in accordance with the transitional provisions listed in the table below.
2. The following definitions apply in the table below:
|
— |
‘N.R.C.’: The provision does not apply to craft which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or converted, i.e. the provision applies only to Newly-built craft and to the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning of the transitional provisions. |
|
— |
‘Issue or renewal of the Community certificate’: The provision must be complied with by the time of the issue or next renewal of the Community certificate after … (27). If the certificate expires between … (27) and the day before … (31), that requirement is, however, only mandatory from … (31). |
|
Article and Section |
Content |
Deadline and comments |
|
CHAPTER 3 |
||
|
3.03 sec. 1(a) |
Location of collision bulkhead |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
3.03 sec. 2 |
Accommodations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
3.03 sec. 2 |
Safety equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
3.03 sec. 4 |
Gastight separation |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
3.03 sec. 5, 2nd paragraph |
Monitoring of doors in the aft-peak bulkhead |
|
|
3.03 sec. 7 |
Anchors not protruding in foresections of vessels |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
3.04 sec. 3, 2nd sentence |
Insulation in engine rooms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
3.04 sec. 3, 3rd and 4th sentences |
Openings and locking devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
3.04 sec. 6 |
Exits from spaces classified as engine rooms as a result of this Directive |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
CHAPTER 4 |
||
|
4.04 |
Draught marks |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
CHAPTER 5 |
||
|
5.06 sec. 1, 1st sentence |
Minimum speed |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
CHAPTER 6 |
||
|
6.01 sec. 1 |
Manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 3 |
Permanent lists and ambient temperatures |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
6.01 sec. 7 |
Design of rudder stocks |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
6.02 sec. 2 |
Placing in service of 2nd drive unit by means of a single operation |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 3 |
Manoeuvrability required by Chapter 5 ensured by second drive unit/manual service |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
6.03 sec. 1 |
Connection of other power consumers to the hydraulic steering apparatus drive unit |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 2 |
Separate hydraulic reservoirs |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
6.05 sec. 1 |
Wheel of manual drive not driven by powered drive unit |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
6.06 sec. 1 |
Two independent actuation systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
6.07 sec. 2(a) |
Monitoring devices for level of hydraulic reservoir and service pressure |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
(e) |
Monitoring of buffer devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
6.08 sec. 1 |
Requirements for electronic equipment according to Article 9.20 |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
CHAPTER 7 |
||
|
7.02 secs. 2 to 7 |
Unobstructed view from the wheelhouse, except the following sections: |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
7.02 sec. 3, 2nd par. |
Unobstructed view in the sightline of the helmsman |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
sec. 5 |
Minimal light transmission of glazing |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
7.03 sec. 7 |
Shutdown of alarms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
sec. 8 |
Automatic switch to alternative power supply |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
7.04 sec. 1 |
Control of main engines and steering devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
7.04 sec. 2 |
Control of main engines |
If wheelhouses have not been designed for radar navigation by one person: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32)if the direction of motion can be achieved directly; at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33)for other engines |
|
7.09 |
Alarm system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
7.12 1st par. |
Retractable wheelhouses |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate Without automatic retraction: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
2nd and 3rd pars. |
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
CHAPTER 8 |
||
|
8.01 sec. 3 |
Only internal-combustion engines burning fuels having a flashpoint of more than 55 °C |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
8.02 sec. 1 |
Securing of engines against unintentional starting |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 4 |
Protection of machinery parts |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
8.03 sec. 2 |
Monitoring devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 3 |
Automatic protection against overspeed |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 5 |
Design of shaft bushings |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
8.05 sec. 1 |
Steel tanks for liquid fuels |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
8.05 sec. 2 |
Automatic closing of tank valves |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
sec. 3 |
No fuel tanks forward of the collision bulkhead |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 4 |
No fuel tanks and their fittings above engines or exhaust pipes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33). Until then, appropriate devices must ensure the safe evacuation of fuels. |
|
sec. 6 3rd to 5th sentences |
Installation and measurements of breather pipes and connection pipes |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 7 |
Shutoff device to be operated from the deck |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
sec. 9, 1st sentence |
Capacity-gauging devices to be legible up to maximum filling level |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 13 |
Filling level control not only for main engines but also other engines needed for safe operation of the vessel |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
8.06 |
Storage of lubricating oil, pipes and accessories |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
8.07 |
Storage of oils used in power transmission systems, control and activating systems and heating systems, pipes and accessories |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
8.08 sec. 8 |
Simple closing device not sufficient for connection of ballast spaces to drainage pipes for holds capable of carrying ballast |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
8.08 sec. 9 |
Gauging devices in hold bilges |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
8.09 sec. 2 |
Installations for the collection of oily water and used oil stores |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
8.10 sec. 3 |
Emission limit of 65 dB(A) for stationary craft |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
CHAPTER 9 |
||
|
9.01 sec. 1, 2nd sentence |
Relevant documents to be submitted to the inspection body |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
9.01 sec. 2, 2nd indent |
Switching diagrams for main, emergency and distribution switchboard to be kept on board |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 3 |
Ambient inside and deck temperatures |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
9.02 secs. 1 to 3 |
Electricity supply systems |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
9.03 |
Protection against physical contact, intrusion of solid objects and the ingress of water |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
9.05 sec. 4 |
Cross-section of the earthing conductors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
9.11 sec. 4 |
Effective ventilation when accumulators are installed in a closed compartment, cabinet or chest |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
9.12 |
Switch-gear installations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
9.12 sec. 3(b) |
Earth detection device capable of giving both visual and audible alarm |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
9.13 |
Emergency circuit breakers |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
9.14 |
Installation fittings |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
9.14 sec. 3, 2nd sentence |
Prohibition of single-pole switches in laundries, bathrooms, washrooms and other rooms with wet facilities |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
9.15 sec. 2 |
Minimum cross-section of 1,5 mm2 per cable |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
sec. 10 |
Cables connected to retractable wheelhouses |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
9.16 sec. 3, 2nd sentence |
Second circuit |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
9.19 |
Alarm and safety systems for mechanical equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
9.20 |
Electronic equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
9.21 |
Electromagnetic compatibility |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
CHAPTER 10 |
||
|
10.01 |
Anchor equipment |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
10.02 sec. 2(a) |
Certificate for mooring and other cables |
First cable to be replaced on the vessel: N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) Second and third cables: … (34) |
|
10.03 sec. 1 |
European standard |
At replacement, at the latest … (33) |
|
sec. 2 |
Suitability for Class A, B and C fires |
At replacement, at the latest … (33) |
|
sec. 4 |
Relation of CO2 content and size of room |
At replacement, at the latest … (33) |
|
10.03a |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in accommodation spaces, wheelhouses and passenger spaces |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
10.03b |
Permanently installed fire-fighting systems in engine rooms, boiler rooms and pump rooms |
CO2-fire-fighting systems permanently installed before 1 October 1985 may remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32)if they comply with the requirements of Article 13.03 of Annex II of Directive 82/714/EEC. |
|
10.04 |
Application of the European standard to dinghies |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
10.05 sec. 2 |
Inflatable life jackets |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) Life jackets which are on board on the day before (35)can be used until renewal of the Community certificate after… (33). |
|
CHAPTER 11 |
||
|
11.02 sec. 4 |
Equipment of outer edges of decks, side decks and work stations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
11.04 |
Side decks |
(36)First issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32)where width exceeds 7,30 m |
|
11.05 sec. 1 |
Access to workplaces |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
secs. 2 and 3 |
Doors and accesses, exits and passageways where there is more than a 0,50 m difference in floor level |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
sec. 4 |
Stairs in working spaces which are manned continuously |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
11.06 sec. 2 |
Exits and emergency exits |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
11.07 sec. 1, 2nd sentence |
Ladders, steps and similar devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
secs. 2 and 3 |
|
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
11.10 |
Hatch covers |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
11.11 |
Winches |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (33) |
|
11.12 sec. 2 to 6 and 8 to 10 |
Cranes: manufacturer's plate, maximum permissible loadings, protection devices, calculation test, inspection by experts, certificates on board |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (34) |
|
11.13 |
Storing of flammable liquids |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
CHAPTER 12 |
||
|
12.01 sec. 1 |
Accommodation for the persons lodging habitually on board |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
12.02 sec. 3 |
Situation of floors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 4 |
Living and sleeping quarters |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
12.02 sec. 5 |
Noise and vibration in accommodations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after (34) |
|
sec. 6 |
Headroom in accommodations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 8 |
Free floor area of communal living quarters |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 9 |
Cubic capacity of rooms |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 10 |
Volume of airspace per person |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 11 |
Size of doors |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 12(a) and (b) |
Situation of stairs |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 13 |
Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
12.03 |
Sanitary installations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
12.04 |
Galleys |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
12.05 |
Potable water |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
12.06 |
Heating and ventilation |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
12.07 sec. 1, 2nd sentence |
Other accommodation installations |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
CHAPTER 15 |
||
|
|
Passenger vessels |
see Art. 8 of this Directive |
|
CHAPTER 15a |
||
|
|
Passenger sailing vessels |
see Art. 8 of this Directive |
|
CHAPTER 16 |
||
|
16.01 sec. 2 |
Special winches or equivalent coupling devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
sec. 3, last sentence |
Requirements for drive units |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (32) |
|
CHAPTER 17 |
||
|
|
Floating equipment |
see Art. 8 of this Directive |
|
CHAPTER 21 |
||
|
|
Recreational craft |
see Art. 8 of this Directive |
|
CHAPTER 22b |
||
|
22b.03 |
Second independent steering apparatus drive unit |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after (34) |
Article 24a.03
Derogations for craft which were laid down before 1 January 1985
1. In addition to the provisions in Article 24a.02, craft which were laid down before 1 January 1985 may be exempted from the following provisions, under the conditions described in column 3 of the table below, provided the safety of the vessel and its crew is ensured in an appropriate manner:
2. The following definitions apply in the table below:
|
— |
‘N.R.C.’: The provision does not apply to craft which are already operating, unless the parts concerned are replaced or converted, i.e. the provision only applies to Newly-built craft and to the Replacement or Conversion of the parts or areas concerned. If existing parts are replaced by replacement parts using the same technology and of the same type, this does not constitute replacement (‘R’) within the meaning of these transitional provisions. |
|
— |
‘Issue or renewal of the Community certificate’: The provision must be complied with by the time of the first issue or next renewal of the Community certificate after … (27). If the certificate expires between … (27) and the day before … (31), that requirement is, however, only mandatory from … (31). |
|
Article and Section |
Content |
Deadline and comments |
|
CHAPTER 3 |
||
|
3.03 sec. 1 |
Watertight collision bulkheads |
N.R.C. |
|
3.03 sec. 2 |
Accommodations, safety installations |
N.R.C. |
|
3.03 sec. 5 |
Openings in watertight bulkheads |
N.R.C |
|
3.04 sec. 2 |
Surfaces of bunkers |
N.R.C. |
|
3.04 sec. 7 |
Maximum permissible sound pressure level in engine rooms |
N.R.C. |
|
CHAPTER 4 |
||
|
4.01 |
Safety clearance |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (37) |
|
4.02 |
Freeboard |
N.R.C. |
|
CHAPTER 6 |
||
|
6.01 sec. 3 |
Requirements of steering system |
N.R.C. |
|
CHAPTER 7 |
||
|
7.01 sec. 2 |
Maximum permissible sound pressure level in wheelhouse |
N.R.C. |
|
7.05 sec. 2 |
Monitoring of navigation lights |
N.R.C. |
|
7.12 |
Retractable wheelhouses |
N.R.C. |
|
CHAPTER 8 |
||
|
8.01 sec. 3 |
Prohibition of certain liquid fuels |
N.R.C. |
|
8.04 |
Engine exhaust system |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate |
|
8.05 sec. 13 |
Alarm device for level of fuel filling |
N.R.C. |
|
8.08 sec. 2 |
Equipment with bilge pumps |
N.R.C. |
|
8.08 secs. 3 and 4 |
Diameter and minimum pumping capacity of bilge pumps |
N.R.C. |
|
8.08 sec. 5 |
Self-priming bilge pumps |
N.R.C. |
|
8.08 sec. 6 |
Equipment with strainers |
N.R.C. |
|
8.08 sec. 7 |
Automatically closable fitting for aft peak |
N.R.C. |
|
8.10 sec. 2 |
Noise emitted by craft |
N.R.C. |
|
CHAPTER 9 |
||
|
9.01 sec. 2 |
Certificates for electrical equipment |
N.R.C. |
|
9.01 sec. 3 |
Installation of electrical equipment |
N.R.C. |
|
9.06 |
Maximum permissible voltages |
N.R.C. |
|
9.10 |
Generators and motors |
N.R.C. |
|
9.11 sec. 2 |
Accumulators |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (38) |
|
9.12 sec. 2 |
Switches, protective devices |
N.R.C., at the latest on issue or renewal of the Community certificate after … (38) |
|
9.14 sec. 3 |
Simultaneous switching |
N.R.C. |
|
9.15 |
Cables |
N.R.C. |
|
9.16 sec. 3 |
Lighting in engine rooms |
N.R.C. |
|
9.17 sec. 1 |
Switchboards for navigation lights |
N.R.C. |
|
9.17 sec. 2 |
Power supply for navigation lights |
N.R.C. |
|
CHAPTER 10 |
||
|
10.01 sec. 9 |
Anchor windlasses |
N.R.C. |
|
10.04 sec. 1 |
Dinghies according to standard |
N.R.C. |
|
10.05 sec. 1 |
Life buoys according to standard |
N.R.C. |
|
10.05 sec. 2 |
Life jackets according to standard |
N.R.C. |
|
CHAPTER 11 |
||
|
11.11 sec. 2 |
Safety of winches |
N.R.C. |
|
CHAPTER 12 |
||
|
12.02 sec. 13 |
Pipes carrying dangerous gases or liquids |
N.R.C. |
Article 24a.04
Other derogations
If it is difficult in practical terms to apply the provisions set out in this Chapter following the expiry of the transitional provisions, or if their application gives rise to unreasonably high costs, the inspection body may allow derogations from these provisions subject to recommendations by the Committee. These derogations must be entered in the Community certificate.
(1) Where appliances release large amounts of heat: IP 12.
(2) Where appliances or panels do not have this type of protection their location shall meet the conditions applying to that type of protection.
(3) Electrical equipment of the certified safety type as in accordance with
|
(a) |
European standards EN 50014:1997; 50015:1998; 50016:2002; 50017:1998; 50018:2000; 50019:2000 and 50020:2002 or |
|
(b) |
IEC publication 60079 as of 1 October 2003. |
(4) Where that voltage comes from higher-voltage networks galvanic separation shall be used (safety transformer).
(5) All of the poles of the secondary circuit shall be insulated from the earth.
(6) Partitions between control centres and internal muster areas shall correspond to Type A0, but external muster areas only to Type B15.
(7) Partitions between lounges and internal muster areas shall correspond to Type A30, but external muster areas only to Type B15.
(8) Partitions between cabins, partitions between cabins and corridors and vertical partitions separating lounges according to section 10 shall comply with Type B15, for rooms fitted with pressurised sprinkler systems B0.
(9) Partitions between engine rooms according to Articles 15.07 and 15.10, section 6, shall comply with Type A60 ; in other cases they shall comply with Type A0.
(10) B15 is sufficient for partitions between galleys, on the one hand, and cold-storage rooms and food store rooms, on the other.
(11) Partitions between control centres and internal muster areas shall correspond to Type A0, but external muster areas only to Type B15.
(12) Partitions between lounges and internal muster areas shall correspond to Type A30, but external muster areas only to Type B15.
(13) Partitions between cabins, partitions between cabins and corridors and vertical partitions separating lounges according to section 10 shall comply with Type B15, for rooms fitted with pressurised sprinkler systems B0.
(14) Partitions between engine rooms according to Articles 15.07 and 15.10, section 6, shall comply with Type A60 ; in other cases they shall comply with Type A0.
(15) Distance from the cross-tree to the deck.
(16) Total length of the topmast, without the masthead.
(17) Diameter of the topmast at the level of the masthead fitting.
(18) Total length of the bowsprit.
(19) Total length of the jib-boom.
(20) Total length of the main boom.
(21) Total length of the gaff.
(22) Distance from the top or cross-tree to the deck.
(23) Distance from the top or cross-tree to the deck.
(24) OJ L 207, 23.7.1998, p. 1. Directive as amended by Directive 98/79/EC (OJ L 331, 7.12.1998, p. 1).
(25) OJ L 164, 30.6.1994, p. 15. Directive as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 1882/2003.
(26) The hold sections providing free surfaces that are exposed to water arise from the longitudinal and/or transverse water-tight compartmentalisation that forms independent sections.
(27) 2 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
|
1. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed before 1 October 1980 may remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035, if they comply with the requirements of Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation (1975-I-23), in force on 1 April 1976. |
|
2. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed between 1 April 1992 and 31 December 1994 may remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035, if they comply with the requirements of Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994. |
|
3. |
Recommendations of the CCNR issued between 1 April 1992 and 31 December 1994 with regard to Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994 remain valid until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035. |
|
1. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed before 1 October 1980 may remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035, if they comply with the requirements of Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation (1975-I-23), in force on 1 April 1976. |
|
2. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed between 1 April 1992 and 31 December 1994 may remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035, if they comply with the requirements of Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994. |
|
3. |
Recommendations of the CCNR issued between 1 April 1992 and 31 December 1994 with regard to Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994 remain valid until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035. |
|
4. |
Article 10.03b, sec. 2(a) is only applicable until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035 if those installations have been installed in vessels laid down after 1 October 1992. |
|
1. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed before 1 October 1980 may remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035, if they comply with the requirements of Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation (1975-I-23), in force on 1 April 1976. |
|
2. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed between 1 April 1992 and 31 December 1994 may remain in use until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035, if they comply with the requirements of Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994. |
|
3. |
Recommendations of the CCNR issued between 1 April 1992 and 31 December 1994 with regard to Article 7.03 sec. 5 of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation in force on 31 December 1994 remain valid until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035. |
|
4. |
Article 10.03b, sec. 2(a) is only applicable until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1 January 2035 if those installations have been installed in vessels laid down after 1 October 1992. |
(29) The provision applies to vessels laid down after 31.12.1994 and to vessels in service with the following proviso:
The requirements of Article 11.04 must be complied with where the entire hold area is renewed.
Where a conversion modifying the clear width of the side deck covers the entire length of the side decks,
|
a) |
Article 11.04 must be complied with, if the clear width of the side deck before the conversion to a height of 0,90 m, or if the clear width above that height is to be reduced, |
|
b) |
the clear width of the side deck before the conversion to a height of 0,90 m, or the clear width above that height must not be lower than the measurements indicated in Article 11.04. |
|
1. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed between 1 January 1995 and 31 March 2003 remain authorised until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 if they comply with Article 10.03, section 5, of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 2002. |
|
2. |
Recommendations of the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine issued between 1 January 1995 and 31 March 2002 regarding Article 10.03, section 5, of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 2002 remain valid until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035. |
|
1. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed between 1 January 1995 and 31 March 2003 remain authorised until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 if they comply with Article 10.03, section 5, of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 2002. |
|
2. |
Recommendations of the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine issued between 1 January 1995 and 31 March 2002 regarding Article 10.03, section 5, of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 2002 remain valid until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035. |
|
3. |
Article 10.05, section 2(a), is applicable until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 only if those systems have been installed in vessels laid down after 1 October 1992. |
|
1. |
Permanent CO2-fire-fighting systems installed between 1 January 1995 and 31 March 2003 remain authorised until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 if they comply with Article 10.03, section 5, of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 2002. |
|
2. |
Recommendations of the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine issued between 1 January 1995 and 31 March 2002 regarding Article 10.03, section 5, of the Rhine Vessel Inspection Regulation as applicable on 31 March 2002 remain valid until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035. |
|
3. |
Article 10.05, section 2(a), is applicable until the issue or renewal of the Community certificate after 1.1.2035 only if those systems have been installed in vessels laid down after 1 October 1992. |
(31) 3 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
(32) 23 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
(33) 18 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
(34) 43 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
(35) 2 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
(36) The provision applies to vessels laid down 2 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive and to vessels in service with the following proviso:
The requirements of Article 11.04 must be complied with where the entire hold area is renewed.
Where a conversion modifying the clear width of the side deck covers the entire length of the side decks,
|
(a) |
Article 11.04 must be complied with if the clear width of the side deck before the conversion to a height of 0,90 m, or the clear width above that height is to be reduced, |
|
(b) |
the clear width of the side deck before the conversion, to a height of 0,90 m, or the clear width above that height must not be lower than the measurements indicated in Article 11.04. |
(37) 13 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
(38) 23 years after the date of entry into force of this Directive.
Appendix I
SAFETY SIGNS
|
Figure 1 No entry for unauthorised persons |
|
Colour: red/white/black |
|
Figure 2 Fire, naked flame and smoking prohibited |
|
Colour: red/white/black |
|
Figure 3 Fire extinguisher |
|
Colour: red/white |
|
Figure 4 General danger warning |
|
Colour: black/yellow |
|
Figure 5 Extinguisher hose |
|
Colour: red/white |
|
Figure 6 Fire-fighting installation |
|
Colour: red/white |
|
Figure 7 Wear acoustic protection device |
|
Colour: blue/white |
|
Figure 8 First-aid kit |
|
Colour: green/white |
The symbols actually used may slightly differ from or be more detailed than the graphical representations in this Appendix, provided the meaning is not changed and differences and modifications do not render the meaning incomprehensible.
Appendix II
ADMINISTRATIVE INSTRUCTIONS
|
No 1 |
: |
Requirements relating to the capacity for evasive action and turning |
|
No 2 |
: |
Requirements concerning prescribed minimum speed, stopping capacity and capacity for going astern |
|
No 3 |
: |
Requirements for coupling systems and coupling devices for craft pushing or being pushed in a rigid assembly |
|
No 4 |
: |
Noise measurements |
|
No 5 |
: |
Special reduced mass anchors |
|
No 6 |
: |
Strength of watertight side-scuttles |
|
No 7 |
: |
Requirements for automatic pressurised-water spraying systems |
|
No 8 |
: |
Issue of the ship certificate |
|
No 9 |
: |
Fuel tanks on floating craft |
|
No 10 |
: |
Minimum hull thickness for barges |
|
No 11 |
: |
Used-oil collection facilities |
|
No 12 |
: |
Vessel movement under its own power |
|
No 13 |
: |
Appropriate fire alarm system |
|
No 14 |
: |
Proof of buoyancy, trim and stability of the separate parts of a vessel |
|
No 15 |
: |
Equipment for vessels which are to be operated with a minimum crew |
|
No 16 |
: |
Electric Cables |
|
No 17 |
: |
Wheelhouse visibility |
ANNEX III
SUBJECTS FOR POSSIBLE ADDITIONAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VESSELS ON INLAND WATERWAYS OF ZONES 1 AND 2
Any additional technical requirements adopted by a Member State under Article 5(1) of this Directive for vessels operating on Zones 1 and/or 2 of that Member State's territory are limited to the following subjects:
|
1. |
Definitions
|
|
2. |
Stability
|
|
3. |
Safety clearance and freeboard
|
|
4. |
Watertightness of hull openings and superstructures
|
|
5. |
Equipment
|
|
6. |
Additional provisions for passenger vessels
|
|
7. |
Convoys and container transport
|
ANNEX IV
SUBJECTS FOR POSSIBLE REDUCTIONS OF THE TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO VESSELS ON INLAND WATERWAYS OF ZONES 3 AND 4
Any reduced technical requirements allowed by a Member State under Article 5(7) of this Directive for vessels operating exclusively on Zone 3 or Zone 4 waterways on the territory of that Member State are restricted to the following subjects:
|
|
Zone 3
|
|
|
Zone 4
|
ANNEX V
MODEL COMMUNITY INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATES
PART I
MODEL COMMUNITY INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATE
PART II
MODEL SUPPLEMENTARY COMMUNITY INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATE
PART III
MODEL PROVISIONAL COMMUNITY INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATE
ANNEX VI
MODEL REGISTER OF COMMUNITY INLAND NAVIGATION CERTIFICATES
ANNEX VII
CLASSIFICATION SOCIETIES
CONTENTS
|
Part I: |
Criteria for the approval of classification societies |
|
Part II: |
Procedure for the approval of classification societies |
|
Part III: |
List of approved classification societies |
PART I
CRITERIA FOR THE APPROVAL OF CLASSIFICATION SOCIETIES
Classification societies seeking approval under Article 10 of this Directive shall meet all the following criteria:
|
(1) |
The classification society shall be able to document extensive experience in assessing the design and construction of inland waterway vessels, including vessels for the carriage of dangerous goods. The classification society shall have comprehensive rules and regulations for the design, construction and periodic inspection of inland waterway vessels, including vessels for the carriage of dangerous goods, which shall be published at least in Dutch, English, French or German and shall be continuously updated and improved through research and development programmes. The rules and regulations must not conflict with the provisions of Community law or with international agreements in force. |
|
(2) |
The classification society shall publish its register of vessels annually. |
|
(3) |
The classification society shall not be controlled by shipowners or shipbuilders or by others engaged commercially in the design, manufacture, fitting-out, repair, operation or insurance of ships. The classification society shall not be dependent on a single commercial enterprise for its revenue. |
|
(4) |
The headquarters of the classification society or a branch authorised to give a ruling and to act in all areas incumbent on it under the regulations governing inland waterway transport shall be located in one of the Member States. |
|
(5) |
The classification society and its experts shall have a good reputation in inland waterway transport; the experts shall be able to provide proof of their professional abilities. They shall act on the responsibility of the classification society. |
|
(6) |
The classification society shall have a significant technical, managerial, support, inspection and research staff, in proportion to the tasks and the vessels classified and catering also for developing capability and updating the regulations. It shall have inspectors in at least one Member State. |
|
(7) |
The classification society shall be governed by a Code of Ethics. |
|
(8) |
The classification society shall be managed and administered in such a way as to ensure the confidentiality of information required by a Member State. |
|
(9) |
The classification society shall be prepared to provide relevant information to a Member State. |
|
(10) |
The classification society's management shall have defined and documented its policy and objectives for, and commitment to, quality and ensured that this policy is understood, implemented and maintained at all levels in the classification society. |
|
(11) |
The classification society shall have prepared and implemented and shall maintain an effective internal quality system based on the relevant parts of internationally recognised quality standards and complying with the EN 45004 (inspection bodies) and EN 29001 standards, as interpreted by the IACS Quality System Certification Scheme Requirements. The quality system must be certified by an independent body of auditors recognised by the administration of the State in which the classification society has its headquarters or branch, as provided for in paragraph 4, and which, inter alia, ensures that:
|
|
(12) |
The quality system must be certified by an independent body of auditors recognised by the administration of the State in which the classification society has its headquarters or branch, as provided for in section 4. |
|
(13) |
The classification society shall undertake to bring its requirements into line with the appropriate European Union directives and to provide the Committee with all relevant information in good time. |
|
(14) |
The classification society shall undertake periodically to consult with the classification societies already approved in order to guarantee the equivalence of their technical standards and of implementation thereof, and should allow participation in the development of its rules and regulations by representatives of a Member State and other parties concerned. |
PART II
PROCEDURE FOR THE APPROVAL OF CLASSIFICATION SOCIETIES
A decision to approve a classification society under Article 10 of this Directive is to be taken by the Commission according to the procedure referred to in Article 19(2) of this Directive. In addition, the following procedure must be observed:
|
(1) |
An application for approval shall be submitted to the Commission by the representatives of the State in which the classification society has its headquarters or a branch authorised to give a ruling and act in all areas incumbent on it under the regulations governing inland waterway vessels. Furthermore, the representatives of this State shall send all information and documentation needed to check that the criteria for approval are met. |
|
(2) |
Any Committee member can demand a hearing with the classification society concerned or that further information or documentation be provided. |
|
(3) |
Approval shall be withdrawn in a similar way. Any Committee member can ask for approval to be withdrawn. The representatives of the State asking for the withdrawal shall submit the information and documentation supporting their application. |
|
(4) |
When making its decisions, the Commission shall take account of decisions made by the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine regarding approval of the classification society concerned. Before approving a classification society which has not been approved by the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine, the Commission shall consult the Secretariat of the Central Commission. |
|
(5) |
Following each decision on approval of a classification society or the withdrawal of approval, the list of approved societies shall be amended. |
|
(6) |
The Commission shall inform the classification societies concerned of the Commission's decisions. |
PART III
LIST OF APPROVED CLASSIFICATION SOCIETIES
On the basis of the criteria set out in Parts I and II, the following classification societies are currently approved under Article 10 of this Directive:
|
(1) |
Bureau Veritas |
|
(2) |
Germanischer Lloyd |
|
(3) |
Lloyd's Register of Shipping. |
Until their approval under Parts I and II, classification societies which are recognised and approved and authorised by a Member State in accordance with Council Directive 94/57/EC of 22 November 1994 on common rules and standards for ship inspection and survey organisations and for the relevant activities of maritime administrations (1) are currently approved in accordance with Article 10 of this Directive only in respect of vessels which operate exclusively on waterways of that Member State.
(1) OJ L 319, 12.12.1994, p. 20. Directive as last amended by Directive 2002/84/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council (OJ L 324, 29.11.2002, p. 53).
ANNEX VIII
RULES OF PROCEDURE FOR THE CARRYING OUT OF INSPECTIONS
Article 1
If the authorities find upon inspection that the certificate carried on the vessel is invalid, or that the vessel does not satisfy the requirements set out in the certificate, but that such invalidity or failure to satisfy the requirements does not constitute a manifest danger, the owner of the vessel or his representative shall take all necessary measures to remedy the situation. The authority which issued the certificate or which last renewed it shall be informed within seven days.
Article 2
If, upon making the inspection referred to in Article 1, the authorities find that the certificate is not being carried or that the vessel constitutes a manifest danger, they may prevent the vessel from proceeding until the necessary steps have been taken to remedy the situation.
They may also prescribe measures which will enable the vessel to proceed safely, where appropriate on termination of its transport operations, to a place where it will be either inspected or repaired. The authority which issued or last renewed the certificate shall be informed within seven days.
Article 3
A Member State which has prevented a vessel from proceeding, or has notified the owner of its intention to do so if the defects found are not corrected, shall inform the authority in the Member State which issued or last renewed the certificate, within seven days, of the decision which it has taken or intends to take.
Article 4
Any decision to interrupt the passage of a vessel taken pursuant to measures adopted in implementation of this Directive shall state in detail the reasons on which it is based. It shall be notified without delay to the party concerned, who shall at the same time be informed of the appeal procedures available to him under the laws in force in the Member States and of their time limits.
ANNEX IX
REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO SIGNAL LIGHTS, RADAR INSTALLATIONS AND RATE-OF-TURN INDICATORS
|
Part I: |
Requirements concerning the colour and intensity of lights and the approval of signal lanterns for inland waterway vessels |
|
Part II: |
Requirements concerning the conditions for testing and approval of signal lanterns for inland waterway vessels |
|
Part III: |
Minimum requirements and test conditions for radar installations used for navigation in inland waterway vessels |
|
Part IV: |
Minimum requirements and test conditions for rate-of-turn indicators used in inland waterway vessels |
|
Part V: |
Requirements for installation and performance tests for radar equipment and rate-of-turn indicators used in inland waterway vessels |
|
Part VI: |
Model list of test institutes, approved equipment and approved installation firms |
PART I
REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE COLOUR AND INTENSITY OF LIGHTS AND THE APPROVAL OF SIGNAL LANTERNS FOR INLAND WATERWAY VESSELS
Contents
|
Chapter 1 |
Definitions |
|
Article 1.01 |
Signal lanterns |
|
1.02 |
Signal lights |
|
1.03 |
Light sources |
|
1.04 |
Optic |
|
1.05 |
Filter |
|
1.06 |
Relation between IO, IB and t |
|
Chapter 2 |
Requirements for signal lights |
|
Article 2.01 |
Colour of signal lights |
|
2.02 |
Luminous intensity and range of signal lights |
|
2.03 |
Signal light dispersion |
|
Chapter 3 |
Requirements for signal lanterns |
|
Article 3.01 |
Technical requirements |
|
Chapter 4 |
Tests, approval and markings |
|
Article 4.01 |
Type tests |
|
4.02 |
Test procedure |
|
4.03 |
Approval certificate |
|
4.04 |
Spot checks |
|
4.05 |
Markings |
|
Appendix |
Model approval certificate for signal lanterns for inland waterway vessels |
Chapter 1
Definitions
Article 1.01
Signal lanterns
|
1. |
‘Lantern’ means a device for distributing the flux from an artificial light source; it also includes the components needed to filter, refract or reflect the light, and to hold or operate the light source. |
|
2. |
Lanterns intended to give signals on board a vessel are called signal lanterns. |
Article 1.02
Signal lights
|
1. |
‘Signal lights’ means the light signals emitted by signal lanterns. |
|
2. |
‘Mast-head light’ means a white light, visible throughout a horizontal arc of 225° and projecting a uniform uninterrupted beam over 112°30′ on each side, i.e. from the bow to 22°30′ abaft the beam on each side. |
|
3. |
‘Side lights’ means a green light to starboard and a red light to port; each of these lights shall be visible throughout a horizontal arc of 112°30′ and project a uniform uninterrupted beam, i.e. from the bow to 22°30′ abaft the beam. |
|
4. |
‘Stern light’ means a white light, visible throughout a horizontal arc of 135° and projecting a uniform uninterrupted beam over a sector of 67°30′ along each side from the stern. |
|
5. |
‘Yellow stern light’ means a yellow light, visible throughout a horizontal arc of 135° and projecting a uniform uninterrupted beam over a sector of 67°30′ along each side from the stern. |
|
6. |
‘Light visible from all directions’ means a light visible throughout a horizontal arc of 360° and projecting a uniform uninterrupted beam. |
|
7. |
A scintillating light is a series of regular light periods per unit time. |
|
8. |
Signal lights are classified according to their luminous intensity as:
|
Article 1.03
Light sources
‘Light sources’ means electrical or non-electrical devices designed to produce light fluxes in signal lanterns.
Article 1.04
Optic
|
1. |
‘Optic’ means a device comprising refracting, reflecting, or refracting and reflecting components, including their holders. The function of these components is to direct the rays from a light source in new specific directions. |
|
2. |
‘Coloured optic’ means an optic which modifies the colour and intensity of the light transmitted. |
|
3. |
‘Neutral optic’ means an optic which modifies the intensity of the light transmitted. |
Article 1.05
Filter
|
1. |
‘Coloured filter’ means a selective filter which modifies the colour and intensity of the light transmitted. |
|
2. |
‘Neutral filter’ means a non-selective component which modifies the intensity of the light transmitted. |
Article 1.06
Relation between IO, IB and t
|
IO |
means the photometric luminous intensity in candelas (cd) measured at normal voltage for electric lights. |
|
IB |
means the operational luminous intensity in candelas (cd). |
|
t |
means the range in kilometres (km). |
Taking into account, for example, the ageing of the light source, the degree of dirtiness of the optic and variations in the voltage of the on-board grid, IB is taken as 25 per cent less than IO.
Consequently:
|
|
IB = 0,75 · IO |
The relation between IB and t of signal lights is given by the following equation:
|
|
IB = 0,2 · t2 · q– t |
The atmospheric transmission coefficient q is taken as 0,76, corresponding to a meteorological visibility of 14,3 km.
Chapter 2
Requirements for signal lights
Article 2.01
Colour of signal lights
|
1. |
A five-colour signal system shall apply to the lights, comprising the following colours:
This system shall conform to the recommendations of the International Commission on Illumination, ‘Colours of Signal Lights’, IEC publication No 2.2. (TC-1.6) 1975. The colours shall apply to the light fluxes emitted by the signal lantern. |
|
2. |
The colour boundaries of signal lights shall be demarcated by the coordinates of the intersecting points of the chromatic diagram in IEC publication No 2.2 (TC-1.6) 1975 (see chromaticity diagram) as follows:
IEC chromaticity diagram
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Article 2.02
Intensity and range of the signal lights
The table set out below contains the permitted limits for IO, IB and t (daytime and nighttime use) according to the nature of the signal lights. The values indicated shall apply to the light flux emitted by the signal lanterns.
IO and IB are given in cd and t in km.
Maximum and minimum values
|
Nature of the signal lights |
Colour of signal light |
||||||||
|
White |
Green/red |
Yellow |
Blue |
||||||
|
min. |
max. |
min. |
max. |
min. |
max. |
min. |
max. |
||
|
ordinary |
IO |
2,7 |
10,0 |
1,2 |
4,7 |
1,1 |
3,2 |
0,9 |
2,7 |
|
IB |
2,0 |
7,5 |
0,9 |
3,5 |
0,8 |
2,4 |
0,7 |
2,0 |
|
|
t |
2,3 |
3,7 |
1,7 |
2,8 |
1,6 |
2,5 |
1,5 |
2,3 |
|
|
bright |
IO |
12,0 |
33,0 |
6,7 |
27,0 |
4,8 |
20,0 |
6,7 |
27,0 |
|
IB |
9,0 |
25,0 |
5,0 |
20,0 |
3,6 |
15,0 |
5,0 |
20,0 |
|
|
t |
3,9 |
5,3 |
3,2 |
5,0 |
2,9 |
4,6 |
3,2 |
5,0 |
|
|
strong |
IO |
47,0 |
133,0 |
— |
— |
47,0 |
133,0 |
— |
— |
|
IB |
35,0 |
100,0 |
— |
— |
35,0 |
100,0 |
— |
— |
|
|
t |
5,9 |
8,0 |
— |
— |
5,9 |
8,0 |
— |
— |
|
However, for daytime use of the yellow scintillating lights a minimum luminous intensity (IO) of 900 cd shall apply.
Article 2.03
Signal light dispersion
|
1. |
Horizontal dispersion of the luminous intensity
|
|
2. |
Vertical dispersion of the luminous intensity In the event of heeling of up to ± 5° or ± 7,5° from the horizontal, the luminous intensity shall remain at least equal to 80 % in the first case, and 60 % in the second case, of the luminous intensity corresponding to 0° heeling, although it shall not exceed it by more than 1,2 times. |
Chapter 3
Requirements for signal lanterns
Article 3.01
Technical requirements
|
1. |
The construction of and materials of signal lanterns and light sources shall be such as to ensure their safety and durability. |
|
2. |
The components of the lanterns (for example, the cross braces) shall not impair the intensity, colours or dispersion of the light. |
|
3. |
It shall be possible to install the signal lanterns on board simply and in the correct position. |
|
4. |
It shall be easy to replace the light source. |
Chapter 4
Tests, approval and markings
Article 4.01
Type tests
The type test according to the ‘Conditions for testing and approval of signal lanterns in inland waterway vessels’ is intended to ascertain whether the signal lanterns and their light source meet these requirements.
Article 4.02
Test procedure
|
1. |
An application for a type test shall be submitted to the competent testing authority, with at least two copies of the plans and two specimens of the lantern as well as the light sources required. |
|
2. |
If the test does not give rise to objections, one copy of the plans accompanying the application, with the approval entered on it, and one of the approved specimen lanterns shall be returned to the applicant. The second copy and second specimen lantern shall be kept by the testing authority. |
|
3. |
The manufacturer shall declare to the testing authority that all the components of the series-produced lantern conform to those of the type-tested lantern. |
Article 4.03
Approval certificate
|
1. |
If the type test shows that these requirements have been met, the signal lantern type shall be approved and an approval certificate based on the model in the Appendix and bearing the markings referred to in Article 4.05 shall be issued to the applicant. |
|
2. |
The holder of the approval certificate:
|
Article 4.04
Spot checks
|
1. |
The testing authority shall be empowered to take samples of signal lanterns from the production series for testing. |
|
2. |
If the test reveals serious shortcomings, the approval may be withdrawn. |
Article 4.05
Markings
|
1. |
Approved signal lanterns, optics and light sources shall be marked as indicated below:
where ‘ ‘X’ indicates the country of approval, where:
|
e . X . YY . nnn
e’ is the approval mark,|
2. |
The markings shall be clearly legible and shall be indelibly affixed. |
|
3. |
Markings on the housing shall be such that the signal lantern does not need to be dismantled in order to find them on board. If the optic and housing are inseparable, a marking on the housing shall suffice. |
|
4. |
Only approved signal lanterns, optics and light sources may bear the markings indicated in paragraph 1 above. |
|
5. |
The testing authority shall immediately inform the Committee of the marking assigned. Appendix
|
PART II
REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING THE CONDITIONS FOR TESTING AND APPROVAL OF SIGNAL LANTERNS FOR INLAND WATERWAY VESSELS
Contents
|
Chapter 1 |
General provisions |
|
Article 1.01 |
Standard voltages |
|
1.02 |
Operating requirements |
|
1.03 |
Mounting |
|
1.04 |
Photometric requirements |
|
1.05 |
Components |
|
1.06 |
Maintenance |
|
1.07 |
Safety requirements |
|
1.08 |
Accessories |
|
1.09 |
Non-electric signal lanterns |
|
1.10 |
Double lanterns |
|
Chapter 2 |
Photometric and colorimetric requirements |
|
Article 2.01 |
Photometric requirements |
|
2.02 |
Colorimetric requirements |
|
Chapter 3 |
Manufacturing requirements |
|
Article 3.01 |
Electric lanterns |
|
3.02 |
Filters and optical glasses |
|
3.03 |
Electric light sources |
|
Chapter 4 |
Test and approval procedure |
|
Article 4.01 |
General rules of procedure |
|
4.02 |
Application |
|
4.03 |
Test |
|
4.04 |
Approval |
|
4.05 |
Cessation of validity of the approval |
|
Appendix |
Environment tests |
|
1. |
Test concerning protection against splashing water and dust |
|
2. |
Humid atmosphere test |
|
3. |
Cold test |
|
4. |
Heat test |
|
5. |
Vibration test |
|
6. |
Accelerated weather resistance test |
|
7. |
Salt water and weather-resistance test (sea-fog test). |
Chapter 1
General provisions
Article 1.01
Standard voltages
The standard voltages for signal lanterns for inland waterway vessels shall be 230 V, 115 V, 110 V, 24 V and 12 V. Wherever possible, 24 V appliances should be used.
Article 1.02
Operating requirements
The normal operation of signal lanterns and their accessories shall not be hindered by routine on-board operations. In particular, all the optical components used and major parts for mounting and adjusting them shall be so manufactured that their position, once established, cannot be modified during operation.
Article 1.03
Mounting
The parts for mounting signal lanterns on board shall be so made that, once they have been adjusted, the position of the lanterns, when fixed, cannot be modified during operation.
Article 1.04
Photometric requirements
Signal lanterns shall produce the prescribed dispersion of luminous intensity; the identifying colour of the light and the prescribed intensity shall be obtained as soon as the light is turned on.
Article 1.05
Components
Only components manufactured for the purpose shall be used in signal lanterns.
Article 1.06
Maintenance
The method of construction of signal lanterns and their accessories shall permit their regular maintenance and, if necessary, enable light sources to be changed easily, even in darkness.
Article 1.07
Safety requirements
Signal lanterns and their accessories shall be so manufactured and proportioned that they can be operated, controlled and monitored without danger to persons.
Article 1.08
Accessories
Lantern accessories shall be so designed and manufactured that their arrangement, mounting and connection shall not hinder the normal use and proper functioning of the lanterns.
Article 1.09
Non-electric signal lanterns
Non-electric lanterns shall be designed and manufactured in conformity with Articles 1.02 to 1.08 of this Chapter and so as to meet the requirements of Chapter 3. The requirements contained in Chapter 2 of these testing and approval conditions shall apply mutatis mutandis.
Article 1.10
Double lanterns
It shall be possible to use two lanterns mounted one above the other in one housing (double lantern) as a single lantern. Under no circumstances shall the two light sources of a double lantern be used simultaneously.
Chapter 2
Photometric and colorimetric requirements
Article 2.01
Photometric requirements
|
1. |
The photometric specifications for signal lanterns are set out in Part I. |
|
2. |
The construction of signal lanterns shall guarantee that the light cannot be reflected or interrupted. The use of reflectors shall not be permitted. |
|
3. |
In the case of two-colour or three-colour lights, the projection of light of a colour beyond the sector limits prescribed for that colour shall be effectively prevented, including inside the glass. |
|
4. |
These requirements shall apply mutatis mutandis to non-electric lights. |
Article 2.02
Colorimetric requirements
|
1. |
The colorimetric specifications for signal lanterns are set out in Part I. |
|
2. |
The colour of the light emitted by signal lanterns shall be situated, for the temperature of the colour used by the light source, in the appropriate chromatic position established in Part I. |
|
3. |
The colour of signal lights shall come only from filters (optics, glasses) and optical glasses coloured throughout if the chromatic points of the transmitted light do not diverge by more than 0,01 from their coordinates in the IEC chromaticity diagram. Coloured bulbs shall not be permitted. |
|
4. |
The transparency of coloured glasses (filters) shall be such that, at the temperature of the light source colour used, the luminous intensity prescribed shall be reached. |
|
5. |
The reflection of the source light on the parts of the signal lantern shall not be selective, i.e. the trichromatic coordinates x and y of the source used in the signal lantern shall, at the temperature of the colour used, not deviate by more than 0,01 following reflection. |
|
6. |
Colourless glass shall not, at the temperature of the colour used, selectively influence the light emitted. Similarly, following an extensive operating period, the trichromatic coordinates x and y of the light source used in the signal lantern shall not deviate by more than 0,01, once the light has passed through the glass. |
|
7. |
The colour of the light of non-electric signal lanterns, at the temperature of the light source used, shall be located in the appropriate chromatic position established in Part I. |
|
8. |
The colour of the light from non-electric coloured signal lanterns shall come only from silicate glass, coloured throughout. For coloured non-electric lanterns, all the coloured silicate glass shall be such that at the colour temperature nearest the non-electric light source the prescribed luminous intensity shall be reached. |
Chapter 3
Manufacturing requirements
Article 3.01
Electric signal lanterns
|
1. |
All the parts of the lanterns shall withstand the particular operational stresses resulting from movement of the vessel, vibrations, corrosion, temperature variations, impacts during loading and navigation in ice and other influences which may be exerted on board. |
|
2. |
The construction, the materials and the workmanship of the lantern shall guarantee stability and ensure that, after mechanical and thermal stresses and exposure to ultraviolet rays in accordance with these requirements, its performance is unchanged; in particular, the photometric and colorimetric properties shall be preserved. |
|
3. |
The components exposed to corrosion shall be made of corrosion-resistant materials or be provided with effective protection against corrosion. |
|
4. |
The materials used shall not be hygroscopic where this would be detrimental to the operation of the installations, appliances and accessories. |
|
5. |
The materials used shall be highly fire-resistant. |
|
6. |
The testing authority may grant exemptions concerning the properties of the materials used provided that safety is guaranteed by the manufacture. |
|
7. |
Signal lanterns shall be tested to ensure their suitability for use on board. The tests shall be divided between environmental and operating requirements. |
|
8. |
Environmental requirements:
|
|
9. |
Suitability for operation
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
10. |
Ambient conditions on board vessels The normal, extreme and transport ambient conditions referred to in paragraph 8(a) are based on the proposed additions to IEC publications 92-101 and 92-504. Other values deviating from them are marked with *.
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
11. |
Signal lanterns must pass the environment tests set out in the Appendix. |
|
12. |
Lantern components made of organic materials shall not be sensitive to ultraviolet radiation. After testing for 720 hours in conformity with section 6 of the Appendix, there shall be no deterioration in quality and the trichromatic coordinates x and y shall not deviate by more than 0,01 from those for transparent parts which have been exposed neither to radiation nor to water. |
|
13. |
The transparent parts and screens of the lanterns shall be so designed and manufactured that, given normal on-board requirements, extended operation with an excess voltage of 10 % and an ambient temperature of + 45 °C, they are not deformed, altered or destroyed. |
|
14. |
With extended operation and an excess voltage of 10 % and an ambient temperature of + 60 °C, lanterns shall remain intact on their holders when subjected to a force of 1 000 N (Newton) for eight hours. |
|
15. |
Lanterns shall be resistant to temporary submersion. During extended operation with an excess voltage of 10 % and an ambient temperature of + 45 °C, they shall not be affected by drenching with the contents of a receptacle containing 10 litres of water at a temperature of + 15° to + 20 °C. |
|
16. |
The durability of the materials used shall be ensured under operating conditions; in particular, the materials shall be capable of withstanding, during operation, their highest continuous use temperatures. |
|
17. |
If the lanterns include non-metallic components, their continuous use temperature under on-board conditions at an ambient temperature of + 45 °C shall be determined. If the continuous use temperature of the non-metallic materials as so determined exceeds the maximum temperatures indicated in Tables X and XI in IEC publication 598, part 1, special examinations shall be carried out to determine the resistance to continuous mechanical, thermal and climatic stresses on these parts of the lanterns. |
|
18. |
For the non-deformability tests of parts at continuous use temperature, the lantern shall be placed in operating position in a slight constant air flow (v = approximately 0,5 m/s) in an ambient temperature of + 45 °C and under on-board conditions. While they are being brought to temperature, and once the operating temperature is reached, the non-metallic parts shall be subjected to a mechanical stress in keeping with their purpose or with possible manipulation thereof. The transparent parts of the lanterns of materials other than silicate glass shall be subjected to the action of a 5 mm × 6 mm metallic punch exerting a continuous force of 6,5 N (equivalent to finger pressure) half way between the upper and lower sides of the transparent part. The part shall not suffer any permanent deformation as a result of such mechanical stresses. |
|
19. |
For the test of the resistance of the components to atmospheric agents, lanterns with non-metallic components exposed to the elements shall be placed in a climatic chamber, for 12 consecutive hours alternately in an atmosphere of 45 °C and 95 % relative humidity and an atmosphere of – 20 °C, and operated intermittently under on-board conditions, so that they are exposed to hot-humid and cold cycles and to changes from low to high temperatures for periods corresponding to their operating times. The total duration of this test shall be at least 720 hours. The test shall not affect the operational capacity of the non-metallic parts of the lantern. |
|
20. |
The parts of lanterns within easy reach shall not, in an ambient temperature of + 45 °C, reach temperatures higher than + 70 °C when they are made of metal or + 85 °C if they are not made of metal. |
|
21. |
Lanterns shall be designed and manufactured according to accepted standards and comply, in particular, with IEC publication 598, part 1, ‘Ships, lights — General specifications and tests’. The requirements of the following sections shall be met:
|
|
22. |
Electric wiring shall normally have a cross-section of not less than 1,5 mm2. The wire used for the connection shall be at least of type HO 7 RN-F or equivalent. |
|
23. |
The type of lantern protection for explosion danger zones shall be established and certified for the purpose by the competent testing authorities. |
|
24. |
The method of manufacture of the lanterns shall make provision for:
|
|
25. |
All lanterns to be installed shall be accompanied by positioning and installation instructions indicating where the light is to be mounted, and the purpose and the type of interchangeable parts. It shall be possible to position movable lanterns easily and safely. |
|
26. |
The required mounts shall be such that, in its intended position, the horizontal plane of symmetry of the lantern is parallel to the water line of the vessel. |
|
27. |
The following marks shall be placed clearly and durably on each lantern, at a point remaining visible after installation on board:
|
Article 3.02
Filters and optical glasses
|
1. |
Filters (optics and glasses) and optical glasses may be made of organic glass (synthetic glass) or inorganic glass (silicate glass). Filters and optical glasses of silicate glass shall be made of a glass at least of the class IV hydrolytic type referred to in ISO standard 719 guaranteeing durable resistance to water. Filters and optical glasses of synthetic glass shall have a durable resistance to water comparable with those made of silicate glass. Optical glasses shall be manufactured in glass with low internal stress. |
|
2. |
Filters and optical glasses shall as far as possible be free of blisters, bubbles and impurities. There shall be no surface defects such as unpolished (matt) sections, deep scratches, etc. |
|
3. |
Filters and optical glasses shall meet the requirements of Article 3.01. Their photometric and colorimetric properties shall not be affected by those conditions. |
|
4. |
The red and green optical glasses of the side lights shall not be interchangeable. |
|
5. |
In addition to the manufacturer's mark, the approval number and the type description shall be legibly and durably marked on filters and optical glasses at a point remaining visible once they have been placed in the lanterns. These markings shall not result in values below the minimum photometric and colorimetric requirements. |
Article 3.03
Electric light sources
|
1. |
Only filament lamps manufactured for the purpose shall be used in signal lanterns. They shall be available in the standard voltages. Exceptions may be permitted in special cases. |
|
2. |
It shall be possible to install filament lamps only in the intended position in signal lanterns. A maximum of two unequivocal positions shall be permitted in signal lanterns. Incorrect and intermediate positions shall not be possible. For the test, the less favourable position shall be selected. |
|
3. |
Filament lamps shall have no special features which adversely affect their efficiency, such as scratches or stains on the bulk or faulty positioning of the filament. |
|
4. |
The operating colour temperature of filament lamps shall not be less than 2 360 K. |
|
5. |
The mountings and lamp holders used shall meet the special requirements of the optical system and withstand the mechanical stresses of on-board operations. |
|
6. |
The cap of the filament lamp shall be strong and solidly attached to the bulk so that after operating for 100 hours at an excess voltage of 10 % it withstands uniform rotation with a moment of 25 kgcm. |
|
7. |
The trademark, the rated voltage and the power rating and/or the rated luminous intensity as well as the approval number shall be marked legibly and durably on the bulk or on the cap of filament lamps. |
|
8. |
Filament lamps shall meet the following tolerances:
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Chapter 4
Test and approval procedure
Article 4.01
General rules of procedure
Part I shall be applicable for the test and approval procedure.
Article 4.02
Application
|
1. |
The following data and documents as well as samples of the lanterns and of their accessories, if any, shall be attached to the application for approval submitted by the manufacturer or his authorised representative:
|
|
2. |
Two samples ready for use shall be supplied with the application, each with ten light sources of each rated voltage and, where relevant, five coloured filters of each signal colour, together with the mounting or positioning device. The specific additional accessories required for the approval tests shall also be made available on request. |
|
3. |
The sample shall correspond in all respects to the production models envisaged. It shall be fitted with all the accessories required for mounting and positioning it in the normal operating position in which it is to be used on board in accordance with its purpose. Some accessories may be omitted if the competent testing authority agrees. |
|
4. |
Additional samples, documents and data shall be supplied on request. |
|
5. |
The documents shall be submitted in the language of the country of the testing and approval authority. |
|
6. |
If an application for approval is submitted for an additional device, paragraphs 1 to 5 shall apply mutatis mutandis, on the understanding that the additional parts may be approved only in combination with the approved lanterns. |
|
7. |
Sector lights shall in principle be submitted as a complete set. |
Article 4.03
Test
|
1. |
For tests on a new or amended version of an approved lantern or accessory, it shall be ascertained whether the sample meets the requirements of these test and approval conditions and corresponds to the documents referred to in Article 4.02(1)(f). |
|
2. |
The approval test shall be based on the conditions occurring on board the vessels. The test shall cover all light sources, optical glasses and accessories which must be provided and which are intended for the signal lanterns. |
|
3. |
The photometric and colorimetric test shall be carried out at the rated voltage. The evaluation of the lantern shall take into account the horizontal operating luminous intensity IB and the operating colour temperature. |
|
4. |
Parts or accessories shall be tested only with the type of lantern for which they are intended. |
|
5. |
Tests done by other competent authorities may be accepted as proof of conformity with the requirements of Chapter 3, provided that they have been confirmed as equivalent to the tests set out in the Appendix. |
Article 4.04
Approval
|
1. |
Approval of signal lanterns shall be based on Articles 4.01 to 4.05 of Part I. |
|
2. |
For lanterns and accessories which are or will be mass-produced, the approval may be issued to the applicant following a test at the applicant's expense if the applicant guarantees that proper use will be made of the rights resulting from the approval. |
|
3. |
In the event of approval, the approval certificate referred to in Article 4.03 of Part I shall be issued for the corresponding lantern type and an approval marking in accordance with Article 4.05 of Part I shall be allocated. The approval marking and the serial number shall be legibly and durably affixed to each lantern manufactured in accordance with the sample, at a point which remains fully visible after installation on board. Original markings and type descriptions shall be clearly legible and shall be indelibly affixed. Marks liable to be confused with approval markings shall not be affixed to lanterns. |
|
4. |
Approval may be granted for a limited period and subject to conditions. |
|
5. |
Modifications of an approved lantern and additions to approved lanterns shall be subject to the agreement of the testing authority. |
|
6. |
If approval of a lantern is withdrawn, the applicant shall be informed directly. |
|
7. |
One sample of each type of lantern approved shall be left with the testing authority which approved it. |
Article 4.05
Cessation of validity of the approval
|
1. |
The approval shall cease to be valid on the expiry of the prescribed period, or if it is revoked or withdrawn. |
|
2. |
The approval may be revoked if:
It shall be withdrawn if the conditions laid down when it was issued have not been met. |
|
3. |
If manufacture of an approved signal lantern type is discontinued, the testing authority which issued the approval shall be informed immediately. |
|
4. |
Withdrawal or revocation of approval shall mean that use of the approval number allocated is prohibited. |
|
5. |
Once the approval ceases to be valid the certificate shall be submitted for annulment to the testing authority which issued it. |
Appendix
Environment tests
1. Test concerning protection against splashing water and dust
|
1.1. |
The type of lantern protection shall be guaranteed in accordance with classification IP 55 of the IEC publication — Part 598-1. The test concerning protection of the sample against splashing water and against dust, and the evaluation of the results, shall be carried out in conformity with IEC publication 529, classification IP 55. The first ‘5’ stands for protection against dust. This means: full dust-proof protection of live components and protection against harmful deposits of dust. The penetration of dust is not completely prevented. The second ‘5’ stands for protection against splashing water. This means that a water jet aimed at the lantern from all directions shall have no damaging effect. |
|
1.2. |
The protection of the sample against water is evaluated as follows: the protection is considered to be adequate if any water which has entered has no detrimental effect on operation of the sample. No water deposits shall have formed on the insulating materials, if this means that minimum vanishing point values could not be achieved. Live components shall not be wetted and shall not be affected by any water accumulating inside the lantern. |
2. Humid atmosphere test
2.1. Purpose and application
This test is to determine the action of humid heat and of humidity during a change of temperature, as described in Article 3.01(10)(b), during operation or during transport or storage, on nautical installations, appliances and instruments, given that they could experience surface humidity from condensation.
This condensation is similar in the case of non-enclosed components to the action of a dust deposit or of a hygroscopic salt film forming during operation.
The following specification is based on IEC publication 68, Part 2-30 in conjunction with Article 3.01(10)(a) and (b). Additional information can be found in the publication.
Components and groups of components submitted non-enclosed for approval as type models shall be tested in that non-enclosed state or, if this is not possible given the nature of the components, by providing them with the minimum protection devices which the applicant considers necessary for use on board.
2.2. Execution
|
(1) |
The test is conducted in a test chamber in which, if necessary by means of an air circulation device, the temperature and level of humidity are practically the same at all points. The movement of the air shall not noticeably cool the sample being tested, but should be sufficient to ensure that the prescribed values for air temperature and humidity are maintained in its immediate vicinity. Condensate shall be continuously evacuated from the test chamber. No condensate shall drip on to the sample. Condensate may only be reused for humidification following reprocessing, in particular once chemicals from the sample have been eliminated. |
|
(2) |
The sample shall not be exposed to heat radiation from the heating of the chamber. |
|
(3) |
The sample shall have been out of service immediately prior to the test long enough for all its parts to be at ambient temperature. |
|
(4) |
The sample is placed in a test chamber at an ambient temperature of + 25 ± 10 °C corresponding to its normal use on board. |
|
(5) |
The chamber is closed. The air temperature is set at – 25 ± 3 °C and the relative humidity at 45 % to 75 % and those conditions are maintained until the sample has reached the same temperature. |
|
(6) |
The relative humidity of the air is raised to not less than 95 % in a maximum time of one hour, the air temperature remaining unchanged. This increase may take place during the last hour of temperature conditioning of the sample. |
|
(7) |
The air temperature in the chamber is increased progressively to + 40 ± 2 °C over a period of 3 h ± 0,5 h. As the temperature rises, the relative humidity of the air is maintained at not less than 95 %, and at not less than 90 % during the last 15 minutes. During this temperature rise, the sample becomes damp. |
|
(8) |
The air temperature is maintained at + 40 ± 2 °C for a time period of 12 h ± 0,5 h measured from the start of phase (7), with a relative air humidity of 93 % ± 3 %. During the first 15 and the last 15 minutes of the period during which the temperature is + 40 ± 2 °C, relative air humidity may be between 90 % and 100 %. |
|
(9) |
The air temperature is reduced to + 25 ± 3 °C over a period of three to six hours. The relative humidity of the air must be constantly maintained at over 80 %. |
|
(10) |
The air temperature is maintained at + 25 ± 3 °C for a period of 24 hours from the start of phase (7), relative air humidity remaining constantly above 95 %. |
|
(11) |
Phase (7) is repeated. |
|
(12) |
Phase (8) is repeated. |
|
(13) |
Not earlier than 10 hours after the start of phase (12) the air conditioning equipment of the sample is switched on. When the climatic data indicated by the manufacturer for the sample have been obtained, the sample is put into operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and at the rated voltage of the on-board network, with a tolerance of ± 3 %. |
|
(14) |
After the time necessary to achieve normal operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions has elapsed, the functions are checked and the operating data of importance for use on board recorded and noted. If the chamber needs to be opened for this purpose, it shall be reclosed as quickly as possible. If more than 30 minutes are required to reach normal operation, this phase shall be extended sufficiently so that, once the operating state has been reached, at least 30 minutes are available to monitor the functions and measure the operating data. |
|
(15) |
Within a period of 1 to 3 hours, with the sample again in service, the air temperature is lowered to ambient temperature, with a tolerance of ± 3 °C, and the relative humidity of the air to under 75 %. |
|
(16) |
The chamber is opened and the sample exposed to the normal temperature and humidity of the ambient air. |
|
(17) |
After 3 hours, and when all humidity visible on the sample has evaporated, the functions of the sample are monitored again, and operating data of importance for use on board recorded and noted. |
|
(18) |
The sample is subjected to a visual inspection. The body of the lantern is opened and the interior examined for any effects of the climatic test and for residual condensate. |
2.3. Results to be obtained
|
2.3.1. |
The sample shall function normally under the conditions stipulated in phases (12) to (18). No deterioration shall be observed. |
|
2.3.2. |
The operating data for phases (12) and (18) shall be within the tolerances permitted for the sample on the basis of these test and approval conditions. |
|
2.3.3. |
There shall be no corrosion or no residual condensate inside the lantern which, as a result of the long-term action of high atmospheric humidity, might cause it to malfunction. |
3. Cold test
3.1. Purpose
This test is to determine the action of cold during operation or during transport and storage, in accordance with Article 3.01(8) and (10). Additional information may be found in IEC publication 68, Part 3-1.
3.2. Execution
|
(1) |
The test is carried out in a test chamber in which, if necessary by means of an air circulation device, the temperature is practically the same at all points. The air humidity must be low enough to ensure that the sample is not wetted by condensation during any of the phases. |
|
(2) |
The sample is placed in a test chamber at an ambient temperature of + 25 ± 10 °C corresponding to its normal use on board. |
|
(3) |
The temperature in the chamber is lowered to – 25 ± 3 °C at a rate of not more than 45 °C/h. |
|
(4) |
The temperature in the chamber is maintained at – 25 ± 3 °C until the sample has reached temperature equilibrium, plus at least a further 2 hours. |
|
(5) |
The temperature in the chamber is raised to 0 ± 2 °C at a rate of not more than 45 °C/h. |
For all samples referred to in Article 3.01(10)(a), the following also applies:
|
(6) |
During the last hour of phase (4) in climate class X, the sample is put into operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, at the rated voltage of the on-board network, with a tolerance of ± 3 %. The heat sources contained in the sample must be in operation. After the time necessary to achieve normal operation has elapsed, the functions are checked and the operating data of importance for use on board recorded and noted. |
|
(7) |
The temperature in the chamber is raised to ambient temperature at a rate of not more than 45 °C/h. |
|
(8) |
Once the sample has reached temperature equilibrium, the chamber is opened. |
|
(9) |
The functions of the sample are checked again and the operating data of importance for use on board recorded and noted. |
3.3. Results to be obtained
The sample shall function normally under the conditions stipulated in phases (7), (8) and (9). No deterioration shall be observed.
The operating data for phases (7) and (9) shall be within the tolerances permitted for the sample on the basis of these test and approval conditions.
4. Heat test
4.1. Purpose and application
This test is to determine the action of heat during operation, transport and storage, in accordance with Article 3.01(8)(a) and (10)(a). The following specification is based on IEC publication 68, Part 2-2 in conjunction with Article 3.01(10)(a). Additional information can be found in the IEC publication.
|
|
Normal |
Extreme |
|
Environment tests |
||
|
Climate classes X and S |
+ 55 °C |
+ 70 °C |
|
Permissible tolerance ± 2 °C |
||
The test under extreme ambient conditions shall, in principle, be performed first. If the operating data are within the tolerances applicable under normal ambient conditions, the normal ambient test may be dispensed with.
4.2. Execution
|
(1) |
The test is conducted in a test chamber in which, if necessary by means of an air circulation device, the temperature is practically the same at all points. The movement of the air shall not noticeably cool the sample being tested. The sample shall not be exposed to heat radiation from the heating of the chamber. The air humidity must be low enough to ensure that the sample is not wetted by condensation during any of the phases. |
|
(2) |
The sample is placed in a test chamber at a temperature of + 25 ± 10 °C corresponding to its normal use on board. The sample is put into operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at the rated voltage of the on-board network with a tolerance of ± 3 %. After the time necessary to achieve normal operation has elapsed, the functions are checked and the operating data of importance for use on board recorded and noted. |
|
(3) |
The air temperature in the chamber is raised to the test temperature referred to in Article 3.01(10)(a) at a rate of not more than 45 °C/h. |
|
(4) |
The air temperature is maintained at the test temperature until the sample reaches temperature equilibrium plus a further two hours. During the last two hours, the functions are checked again and the operating data recorded and noted. |
|
(5) |
The temperature is lowered to ambient temperature over a period of not less than one hour. The chamber is then opened. After bringing the sample to ambient temperature, the functions are again checked and the operating data of importance for use on board recorded and noted. |
4.3. Results to be obtained
The sample shall function normally under the conditions stipulated in all phases of the test. No deterioration shall be observed. The operating data for phases (2), (4) and (5) shall be within the tolerances permitted for the sample for normal ambient environment tests on the basis of these test and approval conditions.
5. Vibration test
5.1. Purpose and application
This test is to determine the functional and structural effects of the vibrations referred to in Article 3.01(10)(e). Structural effects concern the performance of the mechanical components, particularly vibrations by resonance and stress on materials leading to fatigue without necessarily producing direct effects on operation or changes in operating data.
The functional effects directly concern the operation and operating data of the sample. They may be linked to structural effects.
The following specification is based on IEC publication 68, Part 2-6 in conjunction with Article 3.01(10)(e). Values deviating from those in the abovementioned provisions are indicated by *. Additional information may be found in IEC publication 68, Part 2-6.
Test requirements:
The test shall be conducted with sinusoidal vibrations using the following frequencies with the amplitudes indicated:
|
|
Normal |
Extreme |
|
Environment tests |
||
|
Vibration class V: |
|
|
|
Frequencies |
2 to 10 Hz |
2 to 13,2 Hz* |
|
Amplitude |
± 1,6 mm |
± 1,6 mm |
|
Frequencies |
10 to 100 Hz |
13,2 to 100 Hz* |
|
Acceleration amplitude |
± 7 m/s2 |
± 11 m/s2 |
The test under extreme ambient conditions shall, in principle, be performed first. If the operating data are within the tolerances applicable under normal ambient conditions, the normal ambient test may be dispensed with. Samples intended to be used with shock-absorbing devices shall be tested with those devices. If, in exceptional cases, it is not possible to test with the shock-absorbers intended for normal operation, the appliances shall be tested without shock-absorbers and the stress modified to take account of the action of the shock-absorber.
A test without shock-absorbers is also acceptable for the determination of characteristic frequencies.
The vibration test shall be conducted in three main directions perpendicular to each other. For samples which on account of their construction may be subject to special stresses from vibrations at an oblique angle to the main directions, the test shall also be performed in the directions of special sensitivity.
5.2. Execution
|
(1) |
Test apparatus The test is conducted using a vibrating device known as a vibrating table, which enables the sample to be subjected to mechanical vibrations in accordance with the following conditions:
|
(in %)|
(2) |
First inspection, mounting and putting into service The sample is inspected visually to verify that it is in impeccable condition as far as is apparent, and that the assembly is impeccable from the point of view of the construction of all the components and groups of components. The sample is mounted on the vibrating table in accordance with the type of mount provided for on-board installation. Samples, the operation and performance of which under the influence of vibrations depend on their position in relation to the vertical, shall be tested in their normal operating position. The mounts and devices used for the mounting shall not noticeably modify the amplitude and the movements of the sample in the range of frequencies used in the test. The sample is put into operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at the rated voltage of the on-board network with a tolerance of ± 3 %. After the time necessary to achieve normal operation has elapsed, the functions are checked and the operating data of importance for use on board recorded and noted. |
|
(3) |
Preliminary inspection of performance when subjected to vibrations This test phase shall be conducted for all samples. For samples which may be used for different purposes with varying vibratory effects, the test shall be conducted for all or some of the various uses. A frequency cycle is effected with the vibrating table so that the frequency range indicated in section 5.1, with its corresponding amplitudes, is covered from the lowest frequency to the highest and conversely, at a rate of one octave per minute. The sample is observed during this operation using the appropriate means of measurement and visually, if necessary using a stroboscope, to check thoroughly for any operating problems, modifications of operating data and mechanical phenomena such as vibrations by resonance and rattling noises occurring in specific frequencies. These frequencies are described as ‘characteristic’. If necessary, in order to determine characteristic frequencies and vibration effects, the frequency variation is slowed down, stopped or reversed and the amplitude of the vibrations reduced. During the gradual modification of the operating data, it is necessary to wait until the final value is reached while maintaining the vibration frequency, although not more than five minutes. During the frequency scan, at least the frequencies and operating data of importance for use on board are recorded, and all characteristic frequencies are noted, with their effects, for subsequent comparison during phase (7). If the response of the sample to mechanical vibrations cannot be adequately determined during operation, an additional vibration response test shall be performed without connecting the sample. If during the frequency scan the operational data noticeably exceed the permissible tolerances, the operation is unacceptably disrupted or if the structural resonance vibrations are likely to cause destruction should the vibration test be continued, the test may be interrupted. |
|
(4) |
Test of switching functions This test phase shall be conducted for all samples where vibratory stress may influence switching functions, for example relays. The sample is subjected to vibrations in the frequency ranges indicated in section 5.1 with frequency variation steps in accordance with the E-12 series (8) and the corresponding amplitudes. At each frequency step, all switching functions which may be sensitive to vibration, if necessary including switching-on and switching-off, are carried out at least twice. Switching functions may also be tested at frequencies occurring between the E-12 series values. |
|
(5) |
Extended test This test phase shall be conducted for all samples. For samples which may be used for different purposes with varying vibratory effects, the first part of this phase (when the sample is in service) may be conducted several times, for all or some of the various uses. When the sample is in service as described in phase (2) above, it is subjected to five cycles during which the frequency range indicated as stress producing in section 5.1, with the corresponding amplitudes, is covered each time from the lowest to the highest frequency and conversely, at a rate of one octave per minute. After the fifth cycle, the vibrating table may be stopped, the functions are tested and the operating data of importance for on-board use recorded and noted. |
|
(6) |
Fixed frequency extended test This test phase shall be conducted if, on examining vibratory performance during phase (3) above, mechanical resonances are observed during the scan of the frequency range above 5 Hz, which are acceptable for extended use on board according to the manufacturer or his authorised representative, but for which the strength of the parts concerned cannot be taken for granted. In particular, this phase concerns appliances fitted with shock absorbers with a resonance frequency within the frequency range indicated in section 5.1 and higher than 5 Hz. When the sample is in service as described in phase (2) above, for each resonance frequency concerned, it is subjected for two hours to vibrations at the amplitude provided for in the extreme ambient test and at the corresponding frequency as referred to in section 5.1, the direction of vibration being that which in normal use exerts the maximum stress on the parts in question. If necessary, the frequency applied must be rectified so that the resonance vibrations continue at not less than 70 % of their maximum amplitude, or the frequency must be made to vary continuously between two values 2 % below and 2 % above the resonance frequency initially observed, at a rate of at least 0,1 but not more than 1 octave per minute. During the vibratory stress, the functions of the sample are monitored until malfunctions begin to occur, as a result of mechanical parts becoming detached or displaced or of a break in the electrical connection or of a short-circuit. Samples for which the execution of this test phase is relevant when switched off may be tested in that state, provided the mechanical stress on the parts concerned is not less than in normal use. |
|
(7) |
Final inspection of performance when subjected to vibration This test phase must be effected as necessary. The inspection of performance when subjected to vibrations referred to in phase (3) is repeated using the frequencies and amplitudes applied in that phase. The characteristic frequencies observed and the observed effects of vibration stress are compared with the results of phase (3) in order to determine any changes which occurred during the vibration test. |
|
(8) |
Conclusions of the inspection Once the vibrating table has stopped and the time necessary to arrive at an operating state without vibratory stress has elapsed, the functions are tested and the operating data of importance for on-board use recorded and noted. Lastly, the sample is inspected visually to verify that it is in impeccable condition. |
5.3. Results to be obtained
The sample and its components and groups of components should not show any mechanical resonance vibrations in the frequency ranges indicated in section 5.1. When resonance vibrations of this type are unavoidable, construction measures must be taken to ensure that the sample, its components and groups of components suffer no damage.
During and following the vibration test, no perceptible effect of vibratory stress shall occur, and in particular no difference between the characteristic frequencies observed in phase (7) and the values determined in phase (3) and no damage or malfunction as a result of extended vibration shall be observed.
In the case of the normal ambient test, the operating data recorded in phases (3) to (8) shall remain within the tolerances permitted on the basis of these test and approval conditions.
During the switching functions test in phase (4), no switching malfunction or breakdown shall occur.
6. Accelerated weather resistance test
6.1. Purpose and application
The accelerated weather resistance test (simulation of exposure to the elements through exposure to radiation from xenon lamps with filters and by sprinkling) is conducted in accordance with Parts 2-3, 2-5 and 2-9 of IEC publication 68 plus the following additions:
According to this publication, the accelerated weather resistance test aims at simulating natural weather conditions by means of a test apparatus under specific reproducible conditions, so as to provoke rapid changes in the properties of the materials.
The accelerated test is carried out in a test apparatus with filtered radiation from xenon lamps and intermittent sprinkling. Following exposure to the elements, measured by the product of the intensity of radiation and its duration, the agreed properties of the samples are compared with those of samples of the same origin which have not been exposed to the elements. First to be specified are the properties crucial for practical use, such as colour, surface quality, shock resistance, tensile strength and solidity.
In order to compare the results with those of exposure to natural weather conditions, it is assumed that the alteration of properties by the elements is caused in particular by natural radiation and the simultaneous action of oxygen, water and heat on the materials.
For the accelerated test, particular account must be taken of the fact that the radiation in the appliance is very close to natural radiation (see the IEC publication).
The radiation from the xenon lamp with a special filter simulates natural radiation.
Experience has shown that, under the test conditions indicated, there is a strong correlation between resistance to weather in the accelerated test and resistance to natural weather conditions. The accelerated test, which is independent of place, climate and season, has the advantage over natural weather conditions of being reproducible and of making it possible to shorten the duration of the test as it is independent of the alternation of day and night and of the seasons.
6.2. Number of samples
For the weather-resistance test, unless otherwise agreed, an adequate number of samples is used. An adequate number of samples not subjected to weather conditions is required for the purposes of comparison.
6.3. Preparation of samples
The samples are subjected to the tests in the state in which they are delivered, unless otherwise agreed. The samples to be used for comparison are kept in the dark at ambient temperature throughout the tests.
6.4. Test apparatus
The test apparatus consists basically of a ventilated test chamber with the radiation source in the centre. Optical filters are placed round the radiation source. The sample mounts are rotated around the longitudinal axis of the system at the required distance from the source and the filters to reach the intensity of radiation prescribed in section 6.4.1.
The intensity of the radiation on any component of the total sample surfaces exposed shall not differ by more than ± 10 % from the arithmetical mean of radiation intensity on the various surfaces.
6.4.1. Radiation source
A xenon lamp is used as the radiation source. The radiation flux shall be selected so that the intensity of radiation on the sample surface is 1 000 ± 200 W · m– 2 in the 300 to 830 nm waveband (see section 6.9 for the apparatus for measuring irradiation).
If air-cooled xenon lamps are used, the air already used containing ozone must not enter the test chamber and must be evacuated separately.
The experimental values show that the radiation flux from xenon lamps drops to 80 % of its initial value after approximately 1 500 hours of operation; after this period, the proportion of ultra-violet radiation is also reduced noticeably compared with other forms of radiation. The xenon lamp must therefore be replaced after this period (see also the data supplied by the xenon lamp manufacturer).
6.4.2. Optical filters
Optical filters must be positioned between the radiation source and the sample mounts so that the filtered radiation from the xenon lamps is as close as possible to natural radiation (see IEC publication 68, Parts 2 to 9).
All glass filters must be cleaned regularly to avoid any undesirable decrease in radiation intensity. The filters must be replaced if the similarity to natural radiation can no longer be achieved.
With regard to appropriate optical filters, the data supplied by the manufacturer of the test apparatus must be complied with. On delivery of test apparatus, the manufacturer must guarantee that it meets the requirements set out in section 6.4.
6.5. Sprinkling and air humidifying device
The sample shall be wetted in such a way that the action is the same as that of natural rain and dew. The sample sprinkling device shall be so constructed that during sprinkling all the external surfaces of the samples are wetted. It must be controlled in such a way that the sprinkling/dry-period cycle prescribed in section 6.10.3 is complied with. The air in the test chamber must be humidified so as to maintain the relative humidity prescribed in section 6.10.3. The water used for sprinkling and for humidifying the air must be distilled water or fully desalinated water (conductivity ≤ 5 μS/cm).
The tanks, pipes and sprayers for distilled or fully desalinated water must be of corrosion-resistant materials. The relative humidity of the air in the test chamber is measured using a hygrometer protected against sprinkling and direct radiation and is adjusted by means of the hygrometer.
When fully desalinated water or water in a closed circuit is used the risk exists (as in the varnish test) of the formation of a deposit on the surface of the samples or of wear on the surface by substances in suspension.
6.6. Ventilation device
The temperature of the black panel prescribed in section 6.10.2 is maintained in the test chamber by the circulation of clean, filtered, humidified and, if necessary, temperature-controlled air over the samples. The flow and speed of the air shall be selected so as to ensure uniform tempering of all external surfaces of the mounts of the samples in the system.
6.7. Sample mounts
Any mounts in stainless steel enabling the samples to be mounted as set out in section 6.10.1 may be used.
6.8. Blackpanel thermometer
In order to measure the temperature of the black panel during the dry period of the cycle, a blackpanel thermometer is used. This thermometer consists of a stainless steel panel thermally insulated from its mounts, the same size as the sample mounts and 0,9 ± 0,1 mm thick. The two sides of the panel are covered with shiny black varnish which is highly weather-resistant and has a maximum reflecting power of 5 % at wave-lengths of more than 780 nm. The temperature of the panel is measured using a bimetallic thermometer the sensor of which is placed in the middle of the panel with a good thermal contact.
It is not advisable to leave the thermometer in the apparatus throughout the test referred to in section 6.10. It is sufficient for it to be inserted into the test apparatus every 250 hours, for 30 minutes or so, and for the temperature of the black panel to be taken during the dry period.
6.9. Irradiation measuring apparatus
Irradiation (unit of measurement: W · s m– 2) is the product of the intensity of irradiation (unit: W · m– 2) and duration of irradiation (unit: s). The irradiation of the surfaces of the sample in the test apparatus is measured with an appropriate irradiation measuring apparatus, adapted to the radiation function of the system consisting of the radiation source and the filter. The irradiation measuring apparatus shall be graduated or calibrated so that infra-red radiation over 830 nm is not taken into account.
The capacity of the irradiation measuring apparatus depends basically on whether its sensor is highly resistant to weather and to ageing and has adequate spectral sensitivity to natural radiation.
The irradiation measuring apparatus may include the following parts, for example:
|
(a) |
a silicon photo-electric cell as radiation sensor; |
|
(b) |
an optical filter placed in front of the photo-electric cell; and |
|
(c) |
a coulometer which measures the product (unit: C = A · s) of the intensity of the current produced in the photo-electric cell in proportion to radiation intensity (unit: A) and the duration of radiation (unit: s). |
The scale of the irradiation measuring apparatus shall be calibrated. The calibration shall be checked after being used for a year and corrected if necessary.
The intensity of irradiation on the surface of samples depends on the distance from the radiation source. Sample surfaces shall therefore, as far as possible, be at the same distance from the source as the sensor of the irradiation measuring apparatus. If this is not possible, the irradiation reading on the measuring apparatus shall be multiplied by a correction factor.
6.10. Execution
|
6.10.1. |
The samples are placed in mounts so that water cannot collect on the rear surface. The sample mounts must cause only the smallest possible amount of mechanical stress. In order to ensure irradiation and sprinkling are as evenly distributed as possible, the samples are rotated during the test at a rate of one to five revolutions per minute round the source-filter system and the sprinkling device. Normally, a single side of the sample is exposed to the weather conditions. Depending on the applicable provisions of the IEC publication, or as otherwise agreed, the front and back surfaces of a single sample may also be exposed. In this case, each surface is exposed to the same radiation and the same sprinkling. The exposure of the front and back surfaces of a given sample to the same radiation and sprinkling may be produced by the periodic rotation of the sample. This can be done automatically using rotating appliances if the mount is in the form of an open frame. |
|
6.10.2. |
The temperature of the black panel at the point where the samples are placed during the dry period is set and regulated in accordance with the IEC publications applicable to the equipment in question. Unless otherwise agreed, the average temperature of the black panel must be kept at + 45 °C. Average temperature of the black panel means the arithmetic mean of the black panel temperature reached at the end of the dry period. During the dry period, a local difference of ± 5 °C is permissible, and ± 3 °C in borderline cases. In order to maintain the required temperature of the black panel and, when necessary, ensure radiation of equal intensity on the front and back surfaces of the sample (see section 6.10.1), the samples may be turned automatically through 180° after each revolution. In this case, the blackpanel thermometer and the irradiation measuring apparatus shall be included in the rotation movement. |
|
6.10.3. |
Samples installed in mounts and the sensor of the irradiation measuring apparatus referred to in section 6.9 are evenly exposed to radiation and sprinkled according to the cycle defined below, which is repeated successively:
The relative humidity of the air must be 60 to 80 % during the dry period. |
6.11. Test duration and procedure
The test follows procedure B in IEC publication 68, Part 2-9. The test duration is 720 hours, with the sprinkling cycle defined in section 6.10.3.
It is recommended that the weather-resistance test should be carried out with one and the same sample (in the case of a non-destructive test of the modification of the properties to be considered, such as the weather-resistance test, for example) or with several samples (in the case of a destructive test, as for shock-resistance, for example) at various degrees of irradiation, to be agreed upon. The development of the modification of the properties of a piece of equipment throughout the weather test can therefore be determined.
6.12. Assessment
After the exposure to bad weather is completed, the sample is kept for at least 24 hours in darkness in an air temperature of + 23 °C, a dew point of + 12 °C, a relative air humidity of 50 %, an air circulation speed of 1 m/s and an atmospheric pressure of 860 to 1 060 hPa. (The permissible difference may be ± 2 °C for the air temperature and ± 6 % for the relative humidity.)
These samples and those used for the comparison referred to in sections 6.2 and 6.3 are inspected to determine properties in accordance with the requirements indicated in Article 2.01(1) and (2) and in Article 3.01(12).
7. Salt water and weather-resistance test
(sea-fog test)
7.1. Purpose and application
This test is to determine the action of salt water and a saline atmosphere during operation and during transport and storage in accordance with Article 3.01.
It may be restricted to the sample or to specimens of the materials used.
The following specifications are based on IEC publication 68, Part 2-52. Additional information can be found in the publication.
7.2. Execution
|
(1) |
Test apparatus The test is conducted in a test chamber using an atomiser and a saline solution meeting the following conditions:
|
|
(2) |
Preliminary inspection The sample is inspected visually to verify that it is in impeccable condition, and in particular that it is correctly assembled and that all openings close properly. External surfaces soiled with grease, oil or mud are cleaned. All controls and moving parts are manipulated and checked for proper operation. The mobility of all closures, covers and moving parts intended to be detached or moved during operation or maintenance must be inspected for mobility and correctly replaced. The sample is put into operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at the rated voltage of the on-board network with a tolerance of ± 3 %. After the time required to reach normal operation has elapsed, the functions are tested and the operating data of importance for on-board use and for assessing the action of the salt mist atmosphere are recorded and noted. The sample is then disconnected for exposure to spraying. |
|
(3) |
Spraying phase The sample is put into the salt mist chamber and exposed to the salt mist for two hours at a temperature of + 15 °C to + 35 °C. |
|
(4) |
Humidity period The sample is placed in the air-conditioned chamber so that the least possible amount of saline solution drips from it. It is kept in the air-conditioned chamber for seven days, at an air temperature of + 40 ± 2 °C and a relative humidity of 93 ± 3 %. It must not come into contact with any other sample or metal object. Several samples may be so arranged as to preclude any mutual influence. |
|
(5) |
Repetition of the test cycle The test cycle, including phases (3) and (4), is repeated three times. |
|
(6) |
Subsequent treatment Following the fourth test cycle, the sample is taken out of the air-conditioned chamber and immediately washed for five minutes in running tap water and rinsed in distilled or desalinated water. Drops adhering to the sample are removed by an air jet or shaken off. The sample is exposed to the normal ambient atmosphere for at least three hours, and in any case long enough for any visible humidity to have evaporated, before being subjected to a final inspection. The sample is dried for an hour at + 55 ± 2 °C after rinsing. |
|
(7) |
Conclusions of the inspection The external appearance of the sample is inspected visually. The nature and extent of deterioration from its initial state are recorded in the test report, with supporting photographs if necessary. The sample is put into operation in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions at the rated voltage of the on-board network with a tolerance of ± 3 %. After the time required to reach normal operation has elapsed, the functions are tested and the operating data of importance for on-board use and for assessing the action of the salt mist atmosphere are recorded and noted. All controls and moving parts are manipulated and checked for proper operation. The mobility of all closures, covers and moving parts intended to be detached or moved during operation or maintenance is checked. |
7.3. Results to be obtained
The sample must not show any change which could:
|
— |
hinder its use and operation; |
|
— |
prevent to any considerable extent the detachment of closures and covers, or the movement of moving parts in so far as this is necessary for use or maintenance; |
|
— |
impair the waterproofness of the housing; |
|
— |
be expected to cause malfunctions in the long run. |
The operating data recorded in phases (3) and (7) must remain within the tolerances laid down in these test and approval conditions.
PART III
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS AND TEST CONDITIONS FOR RADAR EQUIPMENT USED FOR NAVIGATION IN INLAND WATERWAY VESSELS
Contents
|
Chapter 1 |
General |
|
Article 1.01 |
Scope |
|
Article 1.02 |
Purpose of the radar equipment |
|
Article 1.03 |
Approval testing |
|
Article 1.04 |
Application for approval testing |
|
Article 1.05 |
Type-approval |
|
Article 1.06 |
Marking of the equipment and approval number |
|
Article 1.07 |
Manufacturer's declaration |
|
Article 1.08 |
Modifications to approved equipment |
|
Chapter 2 |
General minimum requirements for radar equipment |
|
Article 2.01 |
Construction, design |
|
Article 2.02 |
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility |
|
Article 2.03 |
Operation |
|
Article 2.04 |
Operating instructions |
|
Article 2.05 |
Installation and operating tests |
|
Chapter 3 |
Minimum operational requirements for radar equipment |
|
Article 3.01 |
Operational readiness of radar equipment |
|
Article 3.02 |
Resolution |
|
Article 3.03 |
Range scales |
|
Article 3.04 |
Variable range marker |
|
Article 3.05 |
Lubber line |
|
Article 3.06 |
Off-centring |
|
Article 3.07 |
Bearing scale |
|
Article 3.08 |
Bearing facilities |
|
Article 3.09 |
Facilities for reducing sea and rain clutter |
|
Article 3.10 |
Reduction of interference from other radar equipment |
|
Article 3.11 |
Compatibility with radar beacons |
|
Article 3.12 |
Gain control |
|
Article 3.13 |
Frequency tuning |
|
Article 3.14 |
Nautical orientation lines and information on the screen |
|
Article 3.15 |
System sensitivity |
|
Article 3.16 |
Target trail |
|
Article 3.17 |
Slave indicators |
|
Chapter 4 |
Minimum technical requirements for radar equipment |
|
Article 4.01 |
Operation |
|
Article 4.02 |
Display |
|
Article 4.03 |
Radar picture characteristics |
|
Article 4.04 |
Colour of the display |
|
Article 4.05 |
Picture refreshment rate and persistence |
|
Article 4.06 |
Display linearity |
|
Article 4.07 |
Accuracy of range and azimuthal measurements |
|
Article 4.08 |
Antenna characteristics and emission spectrum |
|
Chapter 5 |
Test conditions and test methods for radar equipment |
|
Article 5.01 |
Safety, load capacity and interference diffusion |
|
Article 5.02 |
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility |
|
Article 5.03 |
Test procedure |
|
Article 5.04 |
Antenna measurements |
|
Appendix 1 |
Angular resolution in ranges up to and including 1 200 m |
|
Appendix 2 |
Test field for determination of the resolution of radar equipment |
Chapter 1
General
Article 1.01
Scope
These provisions set out the minimum technical and operational requirements for radar equipment used for navigation in inland waterway vessels as well as the conditions for testing conformity with these minimum requirements. Inland ECDIS equipment that can be used in navigation mode counts as navigational radar equipment within the meaning of these provisions.
Article 1.02
Purpose of the radar equipment
The radar equipment shall facilitate the navigation of the vessel by providing an intelligible radar picture of its position in relation to buoys, shorelines and navigational structures, as well as permitting the reliable and timely recognition of other vessels and obstructions protruding above the water surface.
Article 1.03
Approval testing
Radar equipment may not be installed on board vessels until it has been established by means of a type test that the equipment meets the minimum requirements laid down in these provisions.
Article 1.04
Application for approval testing
|
1. |
Applications for a type-test of radar equipment shall be submitted to a competent testing authority in one of the Member States. The competent testing authorities shall be made known to the Committee. |
|
2. |
Each application shall be accompanied by the following documents:
|
|
3. |
By means of tests, the applicant shall establish or have it established that the radar equipment meets the minimum requirements of these provisions. The results of the test and the measurement reports on the horizontal and vertical radiation pattern of the antenna shall be attached to the application. These documents and the information obtained during testing shall be kept by the competent testing authority. |
|
4. |
For approval testing purposes, ‘applicant’ means any legal or natural person under whose name, trademark or any other form of identification the equipment submitted for testing is manufactured or marketed. |
Article 1.05
Type-approval
|
1. |
If the equipment passes the type test, the competent testing authority shall issue a certificate of conformity. If the equipment fails to meet the minimum requirements, the applicant shall be notified in writing of the reasons for its rejection. Approval shall be granted by the competent authority. The competent authority shall inform the Committee of the equipment it has approved. |
|
2. |
Each testing authority shall be entitled to select equipment from the production series at any time for inspection. If this inspection reveals defects in the equipment, type-approval may be withdrawn. The type-approval shall be withdrawn by the authority that issued it. |
|
3. |
The type-approval shall be valid for a period of 10 years and may be renewed on request. |
Article 1.06
Marking of the equipment and approval number
|
1. |
Each component of the equipment shall be marked indelibly with the name of the manufacturer, the trade designation of the equipment, the type of equipment and the serial number. |
|
2. |
The approval number assigned by the competent authority shall be affixed indelibly to the display unit in such a way that it remains clearly visible after the equipment has been installed. Composition of an approval number: e-NN-NNN
|
|
3. |
The approval number shall be used only in conjunction with the associated approval. It shall be the responsibility of the applicant to produce and affix the approval number. |
|
4. |
The competent authority shall immediately inform the Committee of the approval number assigned. |
Article 1.07
Manufacturer's declaration
Each unit of equipment shall be accompanied by a manufacturer's declaration to the effect that it meets the prevailing minimum requirements and that is identical in every respect to the equipment submitted for testing.
Article 1.08
Modifications to approved equipment
|
1. |
Any modification made to equipment already approved shall cause the type-approval to be withdrawn. Whenever modifications are planned, details shall be sent in writing to the competent testing authority. |
|
2. |
The competent testing authority shall decide whether the approval still applies or whether an inspection or new type-test is necessary. If a new approval is granted, a new approval number shall be assigned. |
Chapter 2
General minimum requirements for radar equipment
Article 2.01
Construction, design
|
1. |
Radar equipment shall be suitable for operation on board inland waterway vessels. |
|
2. |
The construction and design of the equipment shall be in accordance with the state of the art, both mechanically and electrically. |
|
3. |
In the absence of any specific provision in Annex II to this Directive or in these provisions, the requirements and test methods contained in IEC publication 945 ‘Marine Navigational Equipment General Requirements’ shall apply to power supply, safety, mutual interference of shipborne equipment, compass safe distance, resistance to climatic influences, mechanical strength, environmental influences, audible noise emission and equipment markings. Additionally, the requirements of the ITU Radio Regulations shall apply. The equipment shall satisfy all requirements of these provisions for radar display ambient temperatures between 0 °C and 40 °C. |
Article 2.02
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility
|
1. |
In the frequency range of 30 to 2 000 MHz, the field strength of spurious emissions shall not exceed 500 μV/m. In the frequency ranges of 156 to 165 MHz, 450 to 470 MHz and 1,53 to 1,544 GHz the field strength shall not exceed a value of 15 μV/m. These field strengths shall apply at a test distance of 3 metres from the equipment under test. |
|
2. |
The equipment shall satisfy the minimum requirements at electromagnetic field strengths of up to 15 V/m in the immediate vicinity of the equipment under test in the frequency range of 30 to 2 000 MHz. |
Article 2.03
Operation
|
1. |
The equipment shall not have more controls than are necessary for its correct operation. The design, markings and manipulation of the controls shall be such as to permit their simple, unambiguous and fast operation. Their arrangement shall be such as to prevent operating mistakes as far as possible. Controls not necessary for normal operation shall not be immediately accessible. |
|
2. |
All controls and indicators shall be provided with symbols and/or markings in English. Symbols shall meet the requirements of IMO Recommendation No A.278 (VIII) ‘Symbols for controls on marine navigational radar equipment’ or the requirements contained in IEC publication No 417; all numerals and letters shall be at least 4 mm high. If it can be demonstrated that, for technical reasons, numerals and letters 4 mm high are not possible and if for the purposes of operation smaller numerals and letters are acceptable, a reduction to 3 mm shall be allowed. |
|
3. |
The equipment shall be designed in such a way that operating mistakes cannot cause its failure. |
|
4. |
Any functions over and above the minimum requirements, such as facilities for connection to other equipment, shall be provided in such a way that the equipment meets the minimum requirements under all conditions. |
Article 2.04
Operating instructions
|
1. |
A detailed operator's manual shall be supplied with each unit. It shall be available in Dutch, English, French and German and shall contain at least the following information:
|
|
2. |
A summarised operator's manual in a durable form shall be supplied with each unit. It shall be available in Dutch, English, French and German. |
Article 2.05
Installation and operating tests
Installation, replacement and operating tests shall be in accordance with the requirements of Part V.
Chapter 3
Minimum operational requirements for radar equipment
Article 3.01
Operational readiness of radar equipment
|
1. |
From a cold start, radar equipment shall be fully operational within four minutes. After this period, it shall be possible to interrupt and activate transmission instantaneously. |
|
2. |
It shall be possible for a single person to operate the radar equipment and watch the display simultaneously. If the control panel is a separate unit, it shall contain all controls used directly for radar navigation. Cordless remote controls shall not be permitted. |
|
3. |
It shall be possible to read the display also when there is considerable ambient brightness. When necessary, appropriate vision aids shall be available and shall be attachable and removable simply and easily. Vision aids shall be usable by wearers of spectacles. |
Article 3.02
Resolution
|
1. |
Angular resolution Angular resolution is related to range scale and distance. The required minimum resolution for shorter ranges up to and including 1 200 m is shown in Appendix 1. Minimum resolution is understood to be the minimum azimuthal distance between two standard reflectors (see Article 5.03(2)) at which they are shown clearly separated on the radar picture. |
|
2. |
Minimum range and range resolution At all distances between 15 and 1 200 m in range scales up to and including 1 200 m, standard reflectors located 15 m apart on the same bearing shall be shown clearly separated on the radar screen. |
|
3. |
Functions that can cause a deterioration of resolution shall not be switchable in range scales up to 2 000 m. |
Article 3.03
Range scales
|
1. |
The radar equipment shall be provided with the following sequentially-switchable range scales and circles:
|
|
2. |
Further sequentially-switchable range scales shall be permitted. |
|
3. |
The selected range scale, the distance between range circles and the distance of the variable range marker shall be indicated in metres or kilometres. |
|
4. |
The width of the range circles and the variable range marker shall, at the normal brightness setting, not exceed 2 mm. |
|
5. |
Subsector display and enlargements shall not be permitted. |
Article 3.04
Variable range marker
|
1. |
The radar equipment shall have a variable range marker. |
|
2. |
Within eight seconds, it shall be possible to set the range marker to any distance. |
|
3. |
The distance at which the variable range marker is set shall not change even after switchover to other range scales. |
|
4. |
The range shall be displayed as a three- or four-digit number. The accuracy for ranges up to 2 000 m shall be within 10 metres. The radius of the range marker shall correspond to the digital display. |
Article 3.05
Lubber line
|
1. |
A lubber line shall extend from the position on the radar display that corresponds to the antenna position up to the edge of the radar screen. |
|
2. |
The width of the lubber line at the edge of the screen shall not be more than 0,5°. |
|
3. |
The radar unit shall have an adjusting device for correcting any azimuthal angular error in the antenna mounting. |
|
4. |
Following correction of the angular error and activation of the radar unit, the deviation of the lubber line from the keel line shall not exceed 0,5°. |
Article 3.06
Off-centring
|
1. |
To permit an extended forward view, off-centring of the radar picture shall be possible at all the range scales specified in Article 3.03(1). Off-centring shall result exclusively in an extension of the forward view and shall be adjustable to at least 0,25, and at most 0,33, of the effective screen diameter. |
|
2. |
In the range with extended forward view, the range circles shall be extended and the variable range marker shall be adjustable and readable up to the maximum of the displayed range. |
|
3. |
A fixed forward extension of the range displayed in accordance with paragraph 1 is permitted provided that, for the central part of the picture, the effective diameter is not less than that specified in Article 4.03(1), and that the bearing scale is designed in such a way that a bearing can be taken in accordance with Article 3.08. In that case the off-centring facility referred to in paragraph 1 shall not be required. |
Article 3.07
Bearing scale
|
1. |
The radar equipment shall have a bearing scale at the edge of the screen. |
|
2. |
The bearing scale shall be divided into at least 72 parts each representing 5 degrees. The graduation marks representing 10 degrees must be clearly longer than those representing 5 degrees. The 000 mark on the bearing scale shall be positioned in the middle of the upper edge of the screen. |
|
3. |
The bearing scale shall be marked in three-figure numbers from 000 to 360 degrees in a clockwise direction. Numbering shall be in Arabic numerals every 10 or every 30 degrees. The figure 000 may be replaced by a clearly visible arrow. |
Article 3.08
Bearing facilities
|
1. |
Facilities for taking bearings of targets shall be allowed. |
|
2. |
If such facilities are provided, they shall be capable of taking a bearing of any target within approximately 5 seconds, with a maximum error of ± 1 degree. |
|
3. |
If an electronic bearing line is used, it shall:
|
|
4. |
If a mechanical bearing line is used, it shall:
|
Article 3.09
Facilities for reducing sea and rain clutter
|
1. |
The radar equipment shall have facilities with manual controls for reducing clutter from sea and rain. |
|
2. |
The sea-clutter control (sensitivity time control — STC) shall, at its maximum setting, be effective up to a distance of approximately 1 200 m. |
|
3. |
The radar equipment shall not be provided with automatic facilities for reducing sea and rain clutter. |
Article 3.10
Reduction of interference from other radar equipment
|
1. |
There shall be a switchable facility for the reduction of interference caused by other radar equipment. |
|
2. |
The operation of this facility shall not suppress the display of useful targets. |
Article 3.11
Compatibility with radar beacons
Signals from radar beacons in accordance with IMO resolution A.423 (XI) shall be displayed clearly with the rain clutter suppression (fast time constant — FTC) switched off.
Article 3.12
Gain control
The range of the gain control shall be such that, at minimum sea-clutter suppression setting, surface movement of the water is clearly visible and that powerful radar echoes with an echo area equivalent to 10 000 m2 may be cut out at any distance.
Article 3.13
Frequency tuning
The display unit shall be provided with a tuning indicator. The tuning scale shall have a length of at least 30 mm. The indicator shall function in all ranges, even without radar echoes. The indicator shall function equally well when the gain or suppression of close proximity echoes is activated.
A manual control to correct the tuning shall be available.
Article 3.14
Nautical orientation lines and information on the screen
|
1. |
Only the lubber line, bearing lines and range circles may be superimposed on the radar screen. |
|
2. |
Apart from the radar picture and in addition to information on the operation of the radar equipment, only nautical information such as that listed below may be displayed:
|
|
3. |
All screen information besides the radar picture shall be displayed quasi-statically and the refreshing rate shall satisfy the operational requirements. |
|
4. |
The requirements regarding the display and accuracy of nautical information shall be the same as those applicable to the main equipment. |
Article 3.15
System sensitivity
The system sensitivity shall be such that a standard reflector at a distance of 1 200 m appears clearly on the radar picture on every revolution of the antenna. In the case of a 1 m2 reflector at the same distance, the quotient of the number of antenna revolutions with radar echo during a specific period and the total number of antenna revolutions in that same period based on 100 revolutions (blip-scan rate) shall not be less than 0,8.
Article 3.16
Target trail
Previous positions of targets shall be shown by means of a trail.
The representation of the target trail shall be quasi-continuous and the brightness shall be less than that of the associated target; the target trail and the radar picture shall have the same colour.
The persistence of the trail shall be adjustable to operational requirements, but shall not last longer than 2 antenna revolutions. The target trail shall not impair the radar picture.
Article 3.17
Slave indicators
Slave indicators shall comply with all requirements applicable to navigational radar equipment.
Chapter 4
Minimum technical requirements for radar equipment
Article 4.01
Operation
|
1. |
All controls shall be so arranged that during their operation no information is concealed from view and radar navigation remains unimpaired. |
|
2. |
Controls which can be used to switch off the equipment or, if activated, could lead to a malfunction must be protected against accidental operation. |
|
3. |
All controls and indicators shall be provided with a dazzle-free source of lighting appropriate for all ambient lighting conditions and adjustable down to zero by means of an independent control. |
|
4. |
The following functions must have their own controls with direct access:
If rotary controls are used for the abovementioned functions, concentric arrangement of the controls one above the other shall be prohibited. |
|
5. |
At least the controls for gain, sea clutter and rain clutter must be adjustable by means of a rotary control with an effect proportional to the angle of rotation. |
|
6. |
Adjustment of controls shall be such that movements to the right or upwards have a positive effect on the variable and movements to the left or downwards a negative effect. |
|
7. |
If push-buttons are used, it shall be possible to locate and operate them by touch. They shall also have clearly perceptible contact release. |
|
8. |
It must be possible to adjust the brightness of the following variables separately from zero to the value required for operational purposes:
|
|
9. |
Provided that the difference in brightness of some of the displayed values is only slight and the fixed range circle, the variable range circle and the bearing line can be switched off independently of each other, there may be four brightness controls, one for each of the following groups of values:
|
|
10. |
The brightness of the lubber line shall be adjustable but shall not be reducible to zero. |
|
11. |
To switch off the lubber line, there shall be a control with automatic reset. |
|
12. |
From zero, the anti-clutter devices shall be continuously adjustable. |
Article 4.02
Display
|
1. |
‘Radar picture’ means the scaled representation of radar echoes of the surroundings and their motion relative to the vessel on the display unit's screen from one antenna revolution with the vessel's keel line and the lubber line coinciding at all times. |
|
2. |
‘Display unit’ means that part of the equipment that contains the screen. |
|
3. |
‘Screen’ means the low-reflection part of the display unit on which either the radar picture alone, or the radar picture together with additional nautical information, is shown. |
|
4. |
‘Effective diameter of the radar picture’ means the diameter of the largest completely circular radar picture which can be shown within the bearing scale. |
|
5. |
‘Raster scan representation’ means the quasi-static representation of the radar picture from a complete revolution of the antenna, in the form of a television picture. |
Article 4.03
Radar picture characteristics
|
1. |
The effective diameter of the radar picture shall be not less than 270 mm. |
|
2. |
The diameter of the outer range circle in the range scales specified in Article 3.03 shall be at least 90 % of the effective radar picture diameter. For all range scales, the antenna position shall be visible in the radar picture. |
Article 4.04
Colour of the display
The display colour shall be chosen on the basis of physiological factors. If various colours can be reproduced on the screen, the actual radar picture shall be monochrome. The reproduction of different colours shall not result in mixed colours, by superimposition, on any part of the screen.
Article 4.05
Picture refreshment rate and persistence
|
1. |
The radar picture shown by the display shall be replaced by the up-to-date radar picture within 2,5 seconds. |
|
2. |
Each echo on the screen shall persist for at least the duration of one antenna revolution, but not longer than two antenna revolutions. The persistence of the radar picture may be achieved in two fashions: either by a continuous display or by periodical picture refreshment. This periodical picture refreshment shall be effected at not less than 50 Hz. |
|
3. |
The difference in brightness between the writing of an echo and its afterglow during one antenna revolution shall be as small as possible. |
Article 4.06
Display linearity
|
1. |
The linearity error of the radar picture shall not exceed 5 %. |
|
2. |
In all ranges up to 2 000 m a fixed straight shore line at a distance of 30 m from the radar antenna shall be displayed as a straight continuous echo structure without observable distortions. |
Article 4.07
Accuracy of range and azimuthal measurements
|
1. |
The determination of the distance to a target by means of variable or fixed range circles shall be accurate to ± 10 m or ± 1,5 %, whichever is the larger. |
|
2. |
The angular value of the bearing of an object shall not differ by more than 1 degree from the real value. |
Article 4.08
Antenna characteristics and emission spectrum
|
1. |
The antenna drive system and the antenna shall be such as to allow correct operation at wind speeds of up to 100 km per hour. |
|
2. |
The antenna drive system shall have a safety switch by means of which the transmitter and the rotator drive can be switched off. |
|
3. |
The horizontal radiation pattern of the antenna, measured in one direction, shall meet the following requirements:
|
|
4. |
The vertical radiation pattern of the antenna, measured in one direction, shall meet the following requirements:
|
|
5. |
The radiated high-frequency energy shall be horizontally polarised. |
|
6. |
The operating frequency of the equipment shall be in a range above 9 GHz which is allocated under prevailing ITU Radio Regulations to navigational radar equipment. |
|
7. |
The frequency spectrum of the high-frequency energy radiated by the antenna shall be in conformity with ITU Radio Regulations. |
Chapter 5
Test conditions and test methods for radar equipment
Article 5.01
Safety, load capacity and interference diffusion
Power supply, safety, mutual interference of shipborne equipment, compass safe distance, resistance to climatic influences, mechanical strength, environmental impact and audible noise emission shall be tested in accordance with IEC publication 945 ‘Marine Navigational Equipment General Requirements’.
Article 5.02
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility
|
1. |
Spurious emissions shall be measured in accordance with IEC publication 945 ‘Marine Navigational Equipment Interference’ in the frequency range of 30 to 2 000 MHz. The requirements of Article 2.02(1) shall be met. |
|
2. |
The electromagnetic compatibility requirements of Article 2.02(2) shall be met. |
Article 5.03
Test procedure
|
1. |
The test field shown in Appendix 2 for the testing of radar equipment shall be arranged on a calm water surface at least 1,5 km long and 0,3 km wide, or on terrain with equivalent reflection properties. |
|
2. |
A standard reflector shall be a radar reflector which, at a wavelength of 3,2 cm, has an equivalent radar cross-section of 10 m2. The equivalent radar cross-section (sigma) of a three-axis radar reflector with triangular surfaces for a frequency of 9 GHz (3,2 cm) shall be calculated according to the following formula: 
For a standard reflector with triangular surfaces, the edge length a = 0,222 m. The dimensions of the reflectors used for the testing of range and discrimination at a wavelength of 3,2 cm shall also be used when the radar equipment under test has a wavelength other than 3,2 cm. |
|
3. |
Standard reflectors shall be set up at distances of 15 m, 30 m, 45 m, 60 m, 85 m, 300 m, 800 m, 1 170 m, 1 185 m and 1 200 m from the antenna position. Beside the standard reflector at 85 m, standard reflectors shall be set up at a distance of 5 m on both sides, at right angles to the bearing line. Beside the standard reflector at 300 m, a reflector with an equivalent radar cross-section of 300 m2 shall be set up at a distance of 18 m, at right angles to the bearing line. Further reflectors with an equivalent radar cross-section of 1 m2 and 1 000 m2 shall be set up at an azimuthal angle to each other of at least 15 degrees, at the same distance of 300 m from the antenna. Beside the standard reflector at 1 200 m, standard reflectors and a reflector with a radar cross-section of 1 m2 shall be set up at a distance of 30 m on both sides, at right angles to the bearing line. |
|
4. |
The radar equipment shall be adjusted to the best quality of picture. The gain must be adjusted in such a way that, in the area immediately beyond the range of operation of the anti-clutter control, noise can no longer be seen. The sea-clutter suppression control (STC) shall be set at minimum, while the rain-clutter suppression control (FTC) shall be switched off. All controls that influence picture quality shall be left unchanged for the duration of the test at a specific antenna height and be fixed in an appropriate way. |
|
5. |
The antenna shall be set up at any desired height between 5 and 10 m above the surface of the water or the ground. The reflectors shall be set up at such a height above the surface of the water or of the ground that their effective radar return corresponds to the value specified in paragraph 2. |
|
6. |
All reflectors set up within the selected range shall, at all distances up to and including 1 200 m, be shown on the screen simultaneously as clearly separated targets, regardless of the azimuthal position of the test field in relation to the lubber line. Signals from radar beacons as described in Article 3.11 shall be displayed clearly. All requirements specified in these provisions shall be met at any antenna height between 5 and 10 m, with only essential adjustments of the controls being authorised. |
Article 5.04
Antenna measurements
The antenna characteristics shall be measured in accordance with IEC publication 936 ‘Shipborne Radar’.
Appendix 1
Angular resolution in ranges up to and including 1 200 m
Appendix 2
Test field for determination of the resolution of radar equipment
PART IV
MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS AND TEST CONDITIONS FOR RATE-OF-TURN INDICATORS USED IN INLAND WATERWAY VESSELS
Contents
|
Chapter 1 |
General |
|
Article 1.01 |
Scope |
|
Article 1.02 |
Purpose of the rate-of-turn indicator |
|
Article 1.03 |
Approval testing |
|
Article 1.04 |
Application for approval testing |
|
Article 1.05 |
Type-approval |
|
Article 1.06 |
Marking of the equipment and approval number |
|
Article 1.07 |
Manufacturer's declaration |
|
Article 1.08 |
Modifications to approved equipment |
|
Chapter 2 |
General minimum requirements for rate-of-turn indicators |
|
Article 2.01 |
Construction, design |
|
Article 2.02 |
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility |
|
Article 2.03 |
Operation |
|
Article 2.04 |
Operating instructions |
|
Article 2.05 |
Installation and operating tests |
|
Chapter 3 |
Minimum operational requirements for rate-of-turn indicators |
|
Article 3.01 |
Operational readiness of the rate-of-turn indicator |
|
Article 3.02 |
Indication of the rate of turn |
|
Article 3.03 |
Measuring ranges |
|
Article 3.04 |
Accuracy of the indicated rate of turn |
|
Article 3.05 |
Sensitivity |
|
Article 3.06 |
Monitoring of operation |
|
Article 3.07 |
Insensitivity to other normal movements of the vessel |
|
Article 3.08 |
Insensitivity to magnetic fields |
|
Article 3.09 |
Slave indicators |
|
Chapter 4 |
Minimum technical requirements for rate-of-turn indicators |
|
Article 4.01 |
Operation |
|
Article 4.02 |
Damping devices |
|
Article 4.03 |
Connection of additional equipment |
|
Chapter 5 |
Test conditions and procedures for rate-of-turn indicators |
|
Article 5.01 |
Safety, load capacity and interference diffusion |
|
Article 5.02 |
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility |
|
Article 5.03 |
Test procedure |
|
Appendix |
Maximum tolerances for indication errors of rate-of-turn indicators |
Chapter 1
General
Article 1.01
Scope
These provisions set out the minimum technical and operational requirements for rate-of-turn indicators used in inland waterway vessels, as well as the conditions for testing conformity with these minimum requirements.
Article 1.02
Purpose of the rate-of-turn indicator
The rate-of-turn indicator is intended to facilitate radar navigation, and to measure and indicate the rate of turn of the vessel to port or starboard.
Article 1.03
Approval testing
Rate-of-turn indicators may not be installed on board vessels until it has been established by means of a type test that they meet the minimum requirements laid down in these provisions.
Article 1.04
Application for approval testing
|
1. |
Applications for a type-test of rate-of-turn indicators shall be submitted to a competent testing authority in one of the Member States. The competent testing authorities shall be made known to the Committee. |
|
2. |
Each application shall be accompanied by the following documents:
|
|
3. |
By means of tests, the applicant shall establish or have it established that the radar equipment meets the minimum requirements of these provisions. The results of the test and the measurement reports shall be attached to the application. These documents and the information obtained during testing shall be kept by the competent testing authority. |
|
4. |
For approval testing purposes, ‘applicant’ means any legal or natural person under whose name, trademark or any other form of identification the equipment submitted for testing is manufactured or marketed. |
Article 1.05
Type-approval
|
1. |
If the equipment passes the type test, the competent testing authority shall issue a certificate of conformity. If the equipment fails to meet the minimum requirements, the applicant shall be notified in writing of the reasons for its rejection. Approval shall be granted by the competent authority. The competent authority shall inform the Committee of the equipment it has approved. |
|
2. |
Each testing authority shall be entitled to select equipment from the production series at any time for inspection. If this inspection reveals defects in the equipment, type-approval may be withdrawn. The type-approval shall be withdrawn by the authority that issued it. |
|
3. |
The type-approval shall be valid for a period of 10 years and may be renewed on request. |
Article 1.06
Marking of the equipment and approval number
|
1. |
Each component of the equipment shall be marked indelibly with the name of the manufacturer, the trade designation of the equipment, the type of equipment and the serial number. |
|
2. |
The approval number assigned by the competent authority shall be affixed indelibly to the control unit in such a way that it remains clearly visible after the equipment has been installed. Composition of an approval number: e-NN-NNN (e= European Union NN= code for the country of approval, where
NNN= three-digit number, to be determined by the competent authority.) |
|
3. |
The approval number shall be used only in conjunction with the associated approval. It shall be the responsibility of the applicant to produce and affix the approval number. |
|
4. |
The competent authority shall immediately inform the Committee of the approval number assigned. |
Article 1.07
Manufacturer's declaration
Each unit of equipment shall be accompanied by a manufacturer's declaration to the effect that it meets the prevailing minimum requirements and that is identical in every respect to the equipment submitted for testing.
Article 1.08
Modifications to approved equipment
|
1. |
Any modification made to equipment already approved shall cause the type-approval to be withdrawn. Whenever modifications are planned, details shall be sent in writing to the competent testing authority. |
|
2. |
The competent testing authority shall decide whether the approval still applies or whether an inspection or new type-test is necessary. If a new approval is granted, a new approval number shall be assigned. |
Chapter 2
General minimum requirements for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 2.01
Construction, design
|
1. |
Rate-of-turn indicators shall be suitable for operation on board inland waterway vessels. |
|
2. |
The construction and design of the equipment shall be in accordance with the state of the art, both mechanically and electrically. |
|
3. |
In the absence of any specific provision in Annex II to this Directive or in these provisions, the requirements and test methods contained in IEC publication 945 ‘Marine Navigational Equipment General Requirements’ shall apply to power supply, safety, mutual interference of shipborne equipment, compass safe distance, resistance to climatic influences, mechanical strength, environmental influences, audible noise emission and equipment markings. Additionally, the equipment shall satisfy all requirements of these provisions at ambient temperatures between 0 °C and 40 °C. |
Article 2.02
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility
|
1. |
In the frequency range of 30 to 2000 MHz, the field strength of spurious emissions shall not exceed 500 μV/m. In the frequency ranges of 156 to 165 MHz, 450 to 470 MHz and 1,53 to 1,544 GHz the field strength shall not exceed a value of 15 μV/m. These field strengths shall apply at a test distance of 3 metres from the equipment under test. |
|
2. |
The equipment shall satisfy the minimum requirements at electromagnetic field strengths of up to 15 V/m in the immediate vicinity of the equipment under test in the frequency range of 30 to 2 000 MHz. |
Article 2.03
Operation
|
1. |
The equipment shall not have more controls than are necessary for its correct operation. The design, markings and manipulation of the controls shall be such as to permit their simple, unambiguous and fast operation. Their arrangement shall be such as to prevent operating mistakes as far as possible. Controls not necessary for normal operation shall not be immediately accessible. |
|
2. |
All controls and indicators shall be provided with symbols and/or markings in English. Symbols shall meet the requirements contained in IEC publication No 417. All numerals and letters shall be at least 4 mm high. If it can be demonstrated that, for technical reasons, numerals and letters 4 mm high are not possible and if for the purposes of operation smaller numerals and letters are acceptable, a reduction to 3 mm shall be allowed. |
|
3. |
The equipment shall be designed in such a way that operating mistakes cannot cause its failure. |
|
4. |
Any functions over and above the minimum requirements, such as facilities for connection to other equipment, shall be provided in such a way that the equipment meets the minimum requirements under all conditions. |
Article 2.04
Operating instructions
A detailed operator's manual shall be supplied with each unit. It shall be available in Dutch, English, French and German and shall contain at least the following information:
|
(a) |
activation and operation; |
|
(b) |
maintenance and servicing; |
|
(c) |
general safety instructions. |
Article 2.05
Installation and operating tests
|
1. |
Installation, replacement and operating tests shall be in accordance with the requirements of Part V. |
|
2. |
The direction of installation in relation to the keel line shall be indicated on the rate-of-turn indicator's sensor unit. Installation instructions to ensure maximum insensitivity to other normal movements of the vessel shall be provided. |
Chapter 3
Minimum operational requirements for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 3.01
Operational readiness of the rate-of-turn indicator
|
1. |
From a cold start, the rate-of-turn indicator shall be fully operational within four minutes and shall operate to within the required accuracy tolerances. |
|
2. |
A warning signal shall indicate that the indicator is switched on. It shall be possible to observe and operate the rate-of-turn indicator simultaneously. |
|
3. |
Cordless remote controls shall not be permitted. |
Article 3.02
Indication of the rate of turn
|
1. |
The rate of turn shall be indicated on a linear graduated scale having the zero point situated in the middle. It shall be possible to read the direction and extent of the rate of turn with the necessary accuracy. Needle indicators and bar-graphs shall be permitted. |
|
2. |
The indicator scale shall be at least 20 cm long and may be circular or rectilinear. Rectilinear scales may be arranged horizontally only. |
|
3. |
Solely digital indicators shall not be permitted. |
Article 3.03
Measuring ranges
Rate-of-turn indicators may be provided with one or more measuring ranges. The following measuring ranges are recommended:
|
|
30°/minute |
|
|
60°/minute |
|
|
90°/minute |
|
|
180°/minute |
|
|
300°/minute. |
Article 3.04
Accuracy of the indicated rate of turn
The indicated rate of turn shall not differ by more than 2 % from the measurable maximum value or by more than 10 % from the actual value, whichever is the greater (see Appendix).
Article 3.05
Sensitivity
The operating threshold shall be less than or equal to a change in angular speed equivalent to l % of the indicated value.
Article 3.06
Monitoring of operation
|
1. |
If the rate-of-turn indicator does not operate within the required accuracy range, this shall be indicated. |
|
2. |
If a gyroscope is used, any critical fall in the rate of rotation of the gyroscope shall be signalled by an indicator. A critical fall in the rate of rotation of the gyroscope is one which lowers accuracy by 10 %. |
Article 3.07
Insensitivity to other normal movements of the vessel
|
1. |
Rolling of the vessel of up to 10° at a rate of turn of up to 4° per second shall not give rise to measurement errors in excess of the stipulated tolerances. |
|
2. |
Impacts such as those that may occur during berthing shall not give rise to measurement errors in excess of the stipulated tolerances. |
Article 3.08
Insensitivity to magnetic fields
The rate-of-turn indicator shall be insensitive to magnetic fields which typically occur on board the vessel.
Article 3.09
Slave indicators
Slave indicators shall comply with all requirements applicable to rate-of-turn indicators.
Chapter 4
Minimum technical requirements for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 4.01
Operation
|
1. |
All controls shall be so arranged that during their operation no information is concealed from view and radar navigation remains unimpaired. |
|
2. |
All controls and indicators shall be provided with a dazzle-free source of lighting appropriate for all ambient lighting conditions and adjustable down to zero by means of an independent control. |
|
3. |
Adjustment of controls shall be such that movements to the right or upwards have a positive effect on the variable and movements to the left or downwards a negative effect. |
|
4. |
If push-buttons are used, it shall be possible to locate and operate them by touch. They shall also have clearly perceptible contact release. |
Article 4.02
Damping devices
|
1. |
The sensor system shall be damped for critical values. The damping constant (63 % of the limit value) shall not exceed 0,4 seconds. |
|
2. |
The indicator shall be damped for critical values. Controls for increasing damping shall be permitted. Under no circumstances may the damping constant exceed five seconds. |
Article 4.03
Connection of additional equipment
|
1. |
If the rate-of-turn indicator can be connected to slave indicators or similar equipment, the rate-of-turn indication shall remain usable as an electric signal. The rate of turn shall continue to be indicated with galvanic earth insulation and the equivalent to an analogue voltage of 20 mV/degree ± 5 % and a maximum internal resistance of 100 ohms. Polarity shall be positive when the vessel is turning to starboard and negative when it is turning to port. The operating threshold shall not exceed 0,3°/minute. Zero error shall not exceed 1°/minute at temperatures from 0 °C to 40 °C. With the indicator switched on and the sensor not exposed to the effects of movement, the spurious voltage at the output signal measured with a 10 Hz pass-band low-pass filter shall not exceed 10 mV. The rate-of-turn signal shall be received without additional damping beyond the limits referred to in Article 4.02(1). |
|
2. |
An external alarm switch shall be provided. The switch shall be installed as a galvanic insulation break-switch for the indicator. The external alarm shall be triggered by contact closure:
|
Chapter 5
Test conditions and procedures for rate-of-turn indicators
Article 5.01
Safety, load capacity and interference diffusion
Power supply, safety, mutual interference of shipborne equipment, compass safe distance, resistance to climatic influences, mechanical strength, environmental impact and audible noise emission shall be tested in accordance with IEC publication 945 ‘Marine Navigational Equipment General Requirements’.
Article 5.02
Spurious emissions and electromagnetic compatibility
|
1. |
Spurious emissions shall be measured in accordance with IEC publication 945 ‘Marine Navigational Equipment Interference’ in the frequency range of 30 to 2 000 MHz. The requirements of Article 2.02(1) shall be met. |
|
2. |
The electromagnetic compatibility requirements of Article 2.02(2) shall be met. |
Article 5.03
Test procedure
|
1. |
Rate-of-turn indicators shall be brought into operation and tested under nominal and boundary conditions. In this regard, the influence of the operating voltage and of the ambient temperature shall be tested as far as the prescribed limit value. In addition, radio transmitters shall be used to set up the maximum magnetic fields in the vicinity of the indicators. |
|
2. |
Under the conditions described in paragraph 1, indicator errors shall remain within the tolerances indicated in the Appendix. All other requirements shall be met. |
Appendix
Maximum tolerances for indication errors of rate-of-turn indicators
PART V
REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION AND PERFORMANCE TESTS FOR RADAR EQUIPMENT AND RATE-OF-TURN INDICATORS USED IN INLAND WATERWAY VESSELS
Contents
|
Article 1 |
Scope |
|
Article 2 |
Approval of equipment |
|
Article 3 |
Approved specialised firms |
|
Article 4 |
Requirements for on-board power supply |
|
Article 5 |
Installation of the radar antenna |
|
Article 6 |
Installation of the display unit and the control unit |
|
Article 7 |
Installation of the rate-of-turn indicator |
|
Article 8 |
Installation of the position sensor |
|
Article 9 |
Installation and performance test |
|
Article 10 |
Installation and performance certificate |
|
Appendix |
Model installation and performance certificate for radar equipment and rate-of-turn indicators |
Article 1
Scope
The purpose of these requirements is to ensure that in the interest of safety and orderly radar navigation on inland waterways in the Community, navigational radar equipment and rate-of-turn indicators are installed according to optimum technical and ergonomic standards and that installation is followed by a performance test. Inland ECDIS equipment that can be used in navigation mode counts as navigational radar equipment within the meaning of these provisions.
Article 2
Approval of equipment
For radar navigation on inland waterways in the Community, only equipment approved according to the applicable provisions of this Directive or of the Central Commission for Navigation on the Rhine and bearing an approval number shall be authorised for installation.
Article 3
Approved specialised firms
|
1. |
The installation, replacement, repair or maintenance of radar equipment and rate-of-turn indicators shall be carried out only by specialised firms approved by the competent authority in accordance with Article 1. |
|
2. |
Approval may be granted by the competent authority for a limited period and may be withdrawn by the competent authority at any time if the conditions in Article 1 are no longer met. |
|
3. |
The competent authority shall immediately notify the Committee of the specialised firms which it has approved. |
Article 4
Requirements for on-board power supply
All power supply leads for radar equipment and rate-of-turn indicators shall have their own separate safety devices and if possible be fail-safe.
Article 5
Installation of the radar antenna
|
1. |
The radar antenna shall be installed as close as possible to the fore-and-aft-line. There shall be no obstruction in the vicinity of the antenna causing false echoes or unwanted shadows; if necessary, the antenna shall be mounted on the forecastle. The mounting and attachment of the radar antenna in its operational position shall be sufficiently stable to enable the radar equipment to perform within the required accuracy limits. |
|
2. |
After the angular error in the mounting has been corrected and the equipment has been switched on, the difference between lubber line and fore-and-aft-line shall not be greater than 1 degree. |
Article 6
Installation of the display unit and the control unit
|
1. |
The display unit and control unit shall be installed in the wheelhouse in such a way that the evaluation of the radar picture and the operation of the equipment present no difficulty. The azimuthal orientation of the radar picture shall be in accordance with the normal situation of the surroundings. Clamps and adjustable consoles are to be constructed in such a way that they can be locked in any position free of vibration. |
|
2. |
During radar navigation, artificial lighting shall not be reflected in the direction of the radar operator. |
|
3. |
When the control unit is not part of the display unit, it shall be located in a housing within 1 metre of the display unit. Cordless remote controls shall not be permitted. |
|
4. |
If slave indicators are installed, they shall satisfy the requirements which apply to navigational radar equipment. |
Article 7
Installation of the rate-of-turn indicator
|
1. |
The sensor system shall be installed as far as possible amidships, horizontal and aligned with the ship's fore-and-aft-line. The installation site shall as far as possible be free of vibration and be liable to modest temperature variations. The indicator unit shall if possible be installed above the radar display. |
|
2. |
If slave indicators are installed, they shall satisfy the requirements which apply to rate-of-turn indicators. |
Article 8
Installation of the position sensor
The position sensor (e.g. DGPS antenna) must be installed in such a way as to ensure that it operates with the greatest possible degree of accuracy and is not adversely affected by superstructures and transmitting equipment on board ship.
Article 9
Installation and performance test
Before the equipment is switched on for the first time after installation or after renewals or extensions of the ship's survey certificate (except according to Article 2.09(2) of Annex II) as well as after each modification of the vessel likely to affect the operating conditions of the equipment, an installation and performance test shall be carried out by the competent authority or by a firm authorised in accordance with Article 3. For this purpose, the following conditions shall be fulfilled:
|
(a) |
the power supply shall have a separate safety device; |
|
(b) |
the operating voltage shall be within the tolerance (Article 2.01 of Part III); |
|
(c) |
the cabling and its installation shall satisfy the provisions of Annex II and, if necessary, the ADNR; |
|
(d) |
the number of antenna revolutions shall reach at least 24 per minute; |
|
(e) |
there shall be no obstruction in the vicinity of the antenna which impairs navigation; |
|
(f) |
the safety switch of the antenna shall be in good working order; |
|
(g) |
the arrangement of display units, rate-of-turn indicators and control units shall be ergonomic and user-friendly; |
|
(h) |
the lubber line of the radar equipment shall not deviate from the ship's fore-and-aft-line by more than 1 degree; |
|
(i) |
the accuracy of the range and azimuthal displays shall satisfy the requirements (measurements using known targets); |
|
(k) |
linearity in short ranges shall be correct (pushing and pulling); |
|
(l) |
the displayed minimum range shall be 15 metres or less; |
|
(m) |
the centre of the picture shall be visible and its diameter shall not exceed 1 mm; |
|
(n) |
False echoes caused by reflections and unwanted shadows on the lubber line shall not occur or shall not impair the safety of navigation; |
|
(o) |
Sea-clutter and rain-clutter suppressors (STC and FTC preset) and the associated controls shall perform correctly; |
|
(p) |
the gain adjustment shall be in proper working order; |
|
(q) |
focus and picture definition shall be correct; |
|
(r) |
the ship's turning direction shall be as indicated on the rate-of-turn indicator and the zero position at dead ahead shall be correct; |
|
(s) |
the radar equipment shall not be sensitive to transmissions by the ship's radio equipment or to interference from other on-board sources; |
|
(t) |
the radar equipment and/or rate-of-turn indicator shall not interfere with other on-board equipment. |
Furthermore, in the case of inland ECDIS equipment:
|
(u) |
the statistical positional error affecting the chart shall not exceed 2 m; |
|
(v) |
the statistical phase angle error affecting the chart shall not exceed 1 degree. |
Article 10
Installation and performance certificate
After successful completion of a test in accordance with Article 8, the competent authority or the approved firm shall issue a certificate based on the model in the Appendix. This certificate shall be kept permanently on board.
If the test conditions have not been met, a list of defects shall be drawn up. Any existing certificate shall be withdrawn or sent to the competent authority by the approved firm.
Appendix
PART VI
MODEL LIST OF TEST INSTITUTES, APPROVED EQUIPMENT AND APPROVED INSTALLATION FIRMS
as provided for in Part IV and Part V
A. COMPETENT TESTING AUTHORITIES
pursuant to Article 1.04(1) of Part I
B. APPROVED RADAR EQUIPMENT
pursuant to Article 1.06(4) of Part IV
C. APPROVED RATE-OF-TURN INDICATORS
pursuant to Article 1.06(4) of Part IV
D. APPROVED SPECIALISED FIRMS FOR THE INSTALLATION OR REPLACEMENT OF RADAR EQUIPMENT AND RATE-OF-TURN INDICATORS
pursuant to Article 3 of Part V
The letters in column 4 refer to the designations in column 1 of points B (radar equipment) and C (rate-of-turn indicators).
(1) The rated voltage and frequency are those indicated by the manufacturer. Ranges of voltage and/or frequency may also be indicated.
(2) Light-centre-length tolerance of the 24 V/40 W lamp: ± 1,5 mm.
(3) L: the broad lug of the P 28 S cap is on the left when the lamp is upright, seen against the direction of emission.
(4) Before measurement of the values at the start of the test, filament lamps shall have already been in service at the rated voltage for 60 minutes.
(5) These limits shall be respected in an area extending ± 10° on either side of the horizontal line passing through the median point of the body of the lantern when the lamp is rotated through 360° on its axis.
(6) Before measurement of the values at the start of the test, filament lamps shall have already been in service at the rated voltage for 60 minutes.
(7) These limits shall be respected in an area extending ± 30° on either side of the horizontal line passing through the median point of the body of the lantern when the lamp is rotated through 360° on its axis.
(8) Fundamental values of the E-12 IEC series: 1,0; 1,2; 1,5; 1,8; 2,2; 2,7; 3,3; 3,9; 4,7; 5,6; 6,8; 8,2.
P6_TA(2006)0299
Harmonisation of technical requirements and administrative procedures in air transport ***II
European Parliament legislative resolution on the Council common position for adopting a regulation of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Council Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91 on the harmonisation of technical requirements and administrative procedures in the field of civil aviation (13376/1/2005 — C6-0090/2006 — 2000/0069 (COD))
(Codecision procedure: second reading)
The European Parliament,
|
— |
having regard to the Council common position (13376/1/2005 — C6-0090/2006), |
|
— |
having regard to its positions at first reading (1) on the Commission proposal to Parliament and the Council (COM(2000)0121) (2) and on the amended proposal (COM(2002)0030) (3) |
|
— |
having regard to the amended Commission proposal (COM(2004)0073) (4), |
|
— |
having regard to Article 251(2) of the EC Treaty, |
|
— |
having regard to Rule 62 of its Rules of Procedure, |
|
— |
having regard to the recommendation for second reading of the Committee on Transport and Tourism (A6-0212/2006); |
|
1. |
Approves the common position as amended; |
|
2. |
Instructs its President to forward its position to the Council and Commission. |
(1) OJ C 262, 18.9.2001, p. 224 and OJ C 272 E, 13.11.2003, p. 103.
(2) OJ C 311 E, 31.10.2000, p. 13.
(3) OJ C 227 E, 24.9.2002, p. 1.
(4) Not yet published in OJ.
P6_TC2-COD(2000)0069
Position of the European Parliament adopted at second reading on 5 July 2006 with a view to the adoption of Regulation (EC) No …/2006 of the European Parliament and of the Council amending Council Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91 on the harmonisation of technical requirements and administrative procedures in the field of civil aviation
(Text with EEA relevance)
THE EUROPEAN PARLIAMENT AND THE COUNCIL OF THE EUROPEAN UNION,
Having regard to the Treaty establishing the European Community, and in particular Article 80(2) thereof,
Having regard to the proposal from the Commission,
Having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee (1),
After consulting the Committee of the Regions,
Acting in accordance with the procedure laid down in Article 251 of the Treaty (2),
Whereas:
|
(1) |
Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91 (3) provided for common safety standards listed in Annex II to that Regulation with respect, in particular, to the design, manufacture, operation and maintenance of aircraft, as well as persons and organisations involved in those tasks. Those harmonised safety standards applied to all aircraft operated by Community operators, whether such aircraft are registered in a Member State or in a third country. |
|
(2) |
Article 4(1) of that Regulation requires the adoption of common technical requirements and administrative procedures, on the basis of Article 80(2) of the Treaty, for the fields that are not listed in Annex II to that Regulation. |
|
(3) |
Article 9 of Council Regulation (EEC) No 2407/92 of 23 July 1992 on licensing of air carriers (4) provides that the granting and validity at any time of an operating licence shall be dependent upon the possession of a valid air operator's certificate specifying the activities covered by the operating licence and complying with the criteria to be established in a prospective regulation. It is now appropriate to establish such criteria. |
|
(4) |
The Joint Aviation Authorities (JAA) have adopted a set of harmonised rules for commercial air transportation by aeroplane, called Joint Aviation Requirements for Commercial Air Transportation (Aeroplanes) (JAR-OPS 1), as amended. Those rules (Amendment 8 of 1 January 2005) provide for a minimum level of safety requirements and therefore constitute a good basis for Community legislation covering the operation of aeroplanes. Changes had to be made to JAR-OPS 1 in order to bring it into conformity with Community legislation and policies, account being taken of its numerous implications in the economic and social field. That new text cannot be introduced into Community law by simple reference to JAR-OPS 1 in Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91. A new Annex containing the common rules should therefore be added to that Regulation. |
|
(5) |
Air operators should be given sufficient flexibility to address unforeseen urgent operational circumstances, or operational needs of a limited duration, or to demonstrate that they can achieve an equivalent level of safety by means other than the application of the common rules set out in the Annex (hereinafter referred to as Annex III). Member States should therefore be empowered to grant exemptions or introduce variations to the common technical requirements and administrative procedures. Because such exemptions and variations could, in certain cases, undermine the common safety standards or create distortions on the market, their scope should be strictly limited and their grant should be subject to appropriate Community control. In that respect, the Commission should be empowered to take safeguard measures. |
|
(6) |
There exist well identified cases where Member States should be permitted to adopt or maintain national provisions regarding flight and duty time limitations and rest requirements, provided that commonly established procedures are complied with and until Community rules based on scientific knowledge and best practices are established. |
|
(7) |
The aim of this Regulation is to provide harmonised safety standards of a high level, including in the field of flight and duty time limitations and rest periods. In some Member States collective labour agreements and/or legislation exists which provides for better conditions as regards flight and duty time limitations and as regards working conditions for cabin crew. Nothing in this Regulation should be interpreted as limiting the possibility of concluding or retaining such agreements. Member States are allowed to maintain legislation which contains more favourable provisions than those laid down in this Regulation. |
|
(8) |
The provisions of Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91 concerning the committee procedure should be adapted to take account of Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission (5). |
|
(9) |
The provisions of Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91 relating to its scope should be adapted to take account of Regulation (EC) No 1592/2002 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 July 2002 on common rules in the field of civil aviation and establishing a European Aviation Safety Agency (6), as well as its implementation rules established by Commission Regulation (EC) No 1702/2003 of 24 September 2003 laying down implementing rules for the airworthiness and environmental certification of aircraft and related products, parts and appliances, as well as for the certification of design and production organisations (7), and Commission Regulation (EC) No 2042/2003 of 20 November 2003 on the continuing airworthiness of aircraft and aeronautical products, parts and appliances, and on the approval of organisations and personnel involved in these tasks (8). |
|
(10) |
This Regulation, in particular the provisions on flight and duty time limitations and rest requirements as set out in Subpart Q of Annex III, takes into account the limits and minimum standards already established in Directive 2000/79/EC (9). The limits set out in that Directive should always be respected for mobile workers in civil aviation. The provisions of Subpart Q of Annex III and other provisions approved pursuant to this Regulation should in no circumstances be broader and thereby provide those workers with less protection. |
|
(11) |
Member States should be able to continue to apply national provisions on flight and duty time limitations and rest requirements for crew members, provided that the limits established by such national provisions are below the maximum limits and above the minimum limits laid down in Subpart Q of Annex III. |
|
(12) |
Member States should be able to continue to apply national provisions on flight and duty time limitations and rest requirements for crew members in areas that are at present not covered by Subpart Q of Annex III, e.g., the maximum daily flight duty period for single pilot operations and emergency medical operations, provisions regarding the reduction of flight duty periods, or the augmentation of rest periods when crossing multiple time zones. |
|
(13) |
A scientific and medical evaluation of the provisions on flight and duty time limitations and rest requirements and, where relevant , of the provisions on cabin crews should be made within a period of two years following the entry into force of this Regulation. |
|
(14) |
This Regulation should not affect the application of provisions on inspections as laid down in the 1944 Chicago Convention on International Civil Aviation and in Directive 2004/36/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 21 April 2004 on the safety of third-country aircraft using Community airports (10). |
|
(15) |
Arrangements for greater cooperation over the use of Gibraltar airport were agreed in London on 2 December 1987 by the Kingdom of Spain and the United Kingdom in a joint declaration by the Ministers of Foreign Affairs of the two countries. Such arrangements have yet to enter into operation. |
|
(16) |
Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91 should therefore be amended accordingly, |
HAVE ADOPTED THIS REGULATION:
Article 1
Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91 is hereby amended as follows:
|
1) |
The following recital shall be inserted after recital 9: ‘The application of provisions regarding flight and duty time limitations can result in significant disruption of rosters for undertakings the operating models of which are exclusively based on night-time operation; whereas, the Commission should, on the basis of evidence to be provided by the parties concerned, carry out an assessment and propose an adjustment of the provisions regarding flight and duty time limitations to take account of these special operating models.’; |
|
2) |
The following recitals shall be inserted after recital 10: ‘By …, (11) the European Aviation Safety Agency should complete a scientific and medical evaluation of Subpart Q and, where relevant, of Subpart O of Annex III. On the basis of the results of this evaluation, and in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 12(2), the Commission should, if necessary, draw up and submit proposals without delay to amend the relevant technical provisions. In the review of certain provisions referred to in Article 8a the course towards further harmonisation of cabin crew training requirements hitherto adopted should be maintained, in order to facilitate the free movement of cabin crew personnel within the Community; in this context, the possibility of further harmonisation of cabin crew qualifications should be re-examined. |
|
3) |
The last recital shall be replaced by the following recital: ‘The measures necessary for the implementation of this Regulation should be adopted in accordance with Council Decision 1999/468/EC of 28 June 1999 laying down the procedures for the exercise of implementing powers conferred on the Commission (12), |
|
4) |
Article 1 is hereby amended as follows:
|
|
5) |
the following definition shall be added in Article 2: ‘(i) “the Authority” in Annex III means: the competent authority that has granted the air operator's certificate (AOC).’; |
|
6) |
Article 3 shall be replaced by the following: ‘Article 3 1. Without prejudice to Article 11, the common technical requirements and administrative procedures applicable in the Community with regard to commercial transportation by aeroplane shall be those specified in Annex III. 2. References made to Subpart M of Annex III or any of its provisions shall refer to Part-M of Commission Regulation (EC) No 2042/2003 of 20 November 2003 on the continuing airworthiness of aircraft and aeronautical products, parts and appliances, and on the approval of organisations and personnel involved in these tasks (13) or its relevant provisions. |
|
7) |
Article 4(1) shall be replaced by the following: ‘1. With regard to the fields not covered by Annex III, common technical requirements and administrative procedures shall be adopted on the basis of Article 80(2) of the Treaty. The Commission shall, where appropriate and as soon as possible, submit suitable proposals in these fields.’; |
|
8) |
Article 6 shall be replaced by the following: ‘Article 6 Aircraft operated under an authorisation granted by a Member State in compliance with the common technical requirements and administrative procedures may be operated under the same conditions in other Member States, without further technical requirements or evaluation by those other Member States.’; |
|
9) |
Article 7 shall be replaced by the following: ‘Article 7 Member States shall recognise the certification granted pursuant to this Regulation by another Member State or by a body acting on its behalf, to bodies or persons placed under its jurisdiction and under its authority, who are concerned with the maintenance of products and the operation of aircraft.’; |
|
10) |
Article 8 shall be replaced by the following: ‘Article 8 1. The provisions of Articles 3 to 7 shall not prevent a Member State from reacting immediately to a safety problem which involves a product, person or organisation subject to this Regulation. If the safety problem results from an inadequate level of safety provided for by the common technical requirements and administrative procedures, or shortcomings in these requirements and procedures, the Member State shall immediately inform the Commission and the other Member States of the measures taken and the reasons therefor. The Commission shall decide, in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 12(2), whether an inadequate level of safety or a shortcoming in the common technical requirements and administrative procedures justifies the continued application of the measures adopted pursuant to the first subparagraph of this paragraph. In such a case, the Commission shall also take the necessary steps to amend the common technical requirements and administrative procedures concerned in accordance with Article 4 or Article 11. If the Member State's measures are found not to be justified, it shall revoke the measures in question. 2. A Member State may grant exemptions from the technical requirements and administrative procedures specified by this Regulation in the case of unforeseen urgent operational circumstances or operational needs of a limited duration. The Commission and the other Member States shall be informed of any exemptions granted repeatedly or for a period of more than two months. When the Commission and other Member States are informed of exemptions granted by a Member State in accordance with the second subparagraph, the Commission shall examine whether the exemptions comply with the safety objectives of this Regulation or any other relevant rule of Community legislation. If the Commission finds that the exemptions granted do not comply with the safety objectives of this Regulation or any other relevant rule of Community legislation, the Commission shall decide on safeguard measures in accordance with the procedure referred to in Article 12a. In such a case, the Member State concerned shall revoke the exemption. 3. In cases where a safety level equivalent to that attained by the application of the common technical requirements and administrative procedures set out in Annex III can be achieved by other means, Member States may, without discrimination on grounds of the nationality of the applicants and having regard to the need not to distort competition, grant approval derogating from these provisions. In such cases the Member State concerned shall notify the Commission of its intention to grant such approval, the reasons therefor and the conditions laid down in order to ensure that an equivalent level of safety is achieved. The Commission shall, within a period of 3 months following notification by a Member State, initiate the procedure referred to in Article 12(2) in order to decide whether the proposed approval of the measure can be granted. In such a case, the Commission shall notify its decision to all Member States, which shall be entitled to apply that measure. The relevant provisions of Annex III may also be amended to reflect such a measure. Articles 6 and 7 shall apply to the measure in question. 4. Notwithstanding the provisions of paragraphs 1, 2 and 3, a Member State may adopt or maintain provisions relating to OPS 1.1105 point 6, OPS 1.1110 points 1.3 and 1.4.1, OPS 1.1115, and OPS 1.1125 point 2.1 of Subpart Q in Annex III until Community rules based on scientific knowledge and best practices are established. A Member State shall inform the Commission of the provisions that it decides to maintain. For national provisions derogating from the OPS 1 provisions referred to in the first subparagraph, which Member States intend to adopt after the date of application of Annex III, the Commission shall, within a period of three months following the notification by a Member State, initiate the procedure referred to in Article 12(2) in order to decide whether these provisions comply with the safety objectives of this Regulation and other rules of Community law, and if they may be made applicable. If so, the Commission shall notify its decision to approve the measure to all Member States, which shall be entitled to apply the measure. The relevant provisions of Annex III may also be amended to reflect such a measure. Articles 6 and 7 shall apply to the measure in question.’; |
|
11) |
the following Article shall be inserted: ‘Article 8a 1. By … (14), the European Aviation Safety Agency shall conclude a scientific and medical evaluation of the provisions of Subpart Q and, where relevant , of Subpart O of Annex III. 2. Without prejudice to Article 7 of Regulation (EC) No 1592/2002 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 July 2002 on common rules in the field of civil aviation and establishing a European Aviation Safety Agency (15), the European Aviation Safety Agency shall assist the Commission in the preparation of proposals for the modification of the applicable technical provisions of Subpart O and Subpart Q of Annex III.’; |
|
12) |
Article 11(1) shall be replaced by the following: ‘1. The Commission, following the procedure referred to in Article 12(2), shall make the amendments necessitated by scientific and technical progress to the common technical requirements and administrative procedures listed in Annex III.’; |
|
13) |
Article 12 shall be replaced by the following: ‘Article 12 1. The Commission shall be assisted by the Air Safety Committee, hereinafter referred to as the Committee. 2. Where reference is made to this paragraph, Articles 5 and 7 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply, having regard to the provisions of Article 8 thereof. The period laid down in Article 5(6) of Decision 1999/468/EC shall be set at three months. 3. The Committee shall adopt its Rules of Procedure.’; |
|
14) |
the following Article shall be inserted: ‘Article 12a Where reference is made to this Article, the safeguard procedure laid down in Article 6 of Decision 1999/468/EC shall apply. Before adopting its decision, the Commission shall consult the Committee. The period provided for in Article 6(b) of Decision 1999/468/EC shall be three months. When a Commission decision is referred to the Council by a Member State, the Council, acting by a qualified majority, may take a different decision within a period of three months.’; |
|
15) |
The text appearing in the Annex to this Regulation shall be added as Annex III. |
Article 2
This Regulation shall enter into force on the twentieth day following that of its publication in the Official Journal of the European Union.
Without prejudice to the provisions of Article 11 of Regulation (EEC) No 3922/91, Annex III shall apply with effect from … (16).
This Regulation shall be binding in its entirety and directly applicable in all Member States.
Done at …, on …
For the European Parliament
The President
For the Council
The President
(1) OJ C 14, 16.1.2001, p. 33.
(2) Position of the European Parliament of 3 September 2002 (OJ C 272 E, 13.11.2003, p. 103), Council Common Position of 9 March 2006 (not yet published in the Official Journal) and Position of the European Parliament of 5 July 2006.
(3) OJ L 373, 31.12.1991, p. 4. Regulation as last amended by Regulation (EC) No 1592/2002 (OJ L 240, 7.9.2002, p. 1).
(4) OJ L 240, 24.8.1992, p. 1.
(5) OJ L 184, 17.7.1999, p. 23.
(6) OJ L 240, 7.9.2002, p. 1. Regulation as last amended by Commission Regulation (EC) No 1701/2003 (OJ L 243, 27.9.2003, p. 5).
(7) OJ L 243, 27.9.2003, p. 6. Regulation as amended by Regulation (EC) No 706/2006 (OJ L 122, 9.5.2006, p. 16).
(8) OJ L 315, 28.11.2003, p. 1. Regulation as amended by Regulation (EC) No 707/2006 (OJ L 122, 9.5.2006, p. 17).
(9) Council Directive 2000/79/EC of 27 November 2000 concerning the European Agreement on the Organisation of Working Time of Mobile Workers in Civil Aviation concluded by the Association of European Airlines (AEA), the European Transport Workers' Federation (ETF), the European Cockpit Association (ECA), the European Regions Airline Association (ERA) and the International Air Carrier Association (IACA) (OJ L 302, 1.12.2000, p. 57).
(10) OJ L 143, 30.4.2004, p. 76. Directive as amended by Regulation (EC) No 211/2005 (OJ L 344, 27.12.2005, p. 15).
(11) Two years after the entry into force of this Regulation.’;
(12) OJ L 184, 17.7.1999, p. 23.’;
(13) OJ L 315, 28.11.2003, p. 1.’;
(14) Two years after the entry into force of this Regulation.
(15) OJ L 240, 7.9.2002, p. 1. Regulation as last amended by Commission Regulation (EC) No 1701/2003 (OJ L 243, 27.9.2003, p. 5).
(16) 18 months after entry into force of this Regulation.
ANNEX
‘ANNEX III
COMMON TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS AND ADMINISTRATIVE PROCEDURES APPLICABLE TO COMMERCIAL TRANSPORTATION BY AIRCRAFT
OPS 1: Commercial Air Transportation (Aeroplanes)
Contents (General layout)
|
SUBPART A |
|
||
|
SUBPART B |
|
||
|
SUBPART C |
|
||
|
SUBPART D |
|
||
|
SUBPART E |
|
||
|
SUBPART F |
|
||
|
SUBPART G |
|
||
|
SUBPART H |
|
||
|
SUBPART I |
|
||
|
SUBPART J |
|
||
|
SUBPART K |
|
||
|
SUBPART L |
|
||
|
SUBPART M |
|
||
|
SUBPART N |
|
||
|
SUBPART O |
|
||
|
SUBPART P |
|
||
|
SUBPART Q |
|
||
|
SUBPART R |
|
||
|
SUBPART S |
|
SUBPART A
APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
OPS 1.001
Applicability
OPS Part 1 prescribes requirements applicable to the operation of any civil aeroplane for the purpose of commercial air transportation by any operator whose principal place of business and, if any, registered office is in a Member State, hereafter called operator. OPS 1 does not apply:
|
(1) |
to aeroplanes when used in military, customs and police services; nor |
|
(2) |
to parachute dropping and fire-fighting flights, and to associated positioning and return flights in which the persons carried are those who would normally be carried on parachute dropping or fire-fighting; nor |
|
(3) |
to flights immediately before, during, or immediately after an aerial work activity provided these flights are connected with that aerial work activity and in which, excluding crew members, no more than 6 persons indispensable to the aerial work activity are carried. |
OPS 1.003
Definitions
|
(a) |
For the purpose of this Annex:
|
|
(b) |
Part M and Part 145 as referred to in this Annex are those of Regulation (EC) No 2042/2003 of 20 November 2003. |
SUBPART B
GENERAL
OPS 1.005
General
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane for the purpose of commercial air transportation other than in accordance with OPS Part 1. For operations of Performance Class B aeroplanes, alleviated requirements can be found in Appendix 1 to OPS 1.005 (a). |
|
(b) |
An operator shall comply with the applicable retroactive airworthiness requirements for aeroplanes operated for the purpose of commercial air transportation. |
|
(c) |
Each aeroplane shall be operated in compliance with the terms of its Certificate of Airworthiness and within the approved limitations contained in its Aeroplane Flight Manual. |
|
(d) |
All Synthetic Training Devices (STD), such as Flight Simulators or Flight Training Devices (FTD), replacing an aeroplane for training and/or checking purposes are to be qualified in accordance with the requirements applicable to Synthetic Training Devices. An operator intending to use such STD must obtain approval from the Authority. |
OPS 1.020
Laws, Regulations and Procedures — Operator's Responsibilities
An operator must ensure that:
|
(1) |
All employees are made aware that they shall comply with the laws, regulations and procedures of those States in which operations are conducted and which are pertinent to the performance of their duties; and |
|
(2) |
All crew members are familiar with the laws, regulations and procedures pertinent to the performance of their duties. |
OPS 1.025
Common Language
|
(a) |
An operator must ensure that all crew members can communicate in a common language. |
|
(b) |
An operator must ensure that all operations personnel are able to understand the language in which those parts of the Operations Manual which pertain to their duties and responsibilities are written. |
OPS 1.030
Minimum Equipment Lists — Operator's Responsibilities
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish, for each aeroplane, a Minimum Equipment List (MEL) approved by the Authority. This shall be based upon, but no less restrictive than, the relevant Master Minimum Equipment List (MMEL) (if this exists) accepted by the Authority. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane other than in accordance with the MEL unless permitted by the Authority. Any such permission will in no circumstances permit operation outside the constraints of the MMEL. |
OPS 1.035
Quality system
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish one Quality System and designate one Quality Manager to monitor compliance with, and adequacy of, procedures required to ensure safe operational practices and airworthy aeroplanes. Compliance monitoring must include a feed-back system to the Accountable Manager (See also OPS 1.175 (h)) to ensure corrective action as necessary. |
|
(b) |
The Quality System must include a Quality Assurance Programme that contains procedures designed to verify that all operations are being conducted in accordance with all applicable requirements, standards and procedures. |
|
(c) |
The Quality System and the Quality Manager must be acceptable to the Authority. |
|
(d) |
The Quality System must be described in relevant documentation. |
|
(e) |
Notwithstanding sub-paragraph (a) above, the Authority may accept the nomination of two Quality Managers, one for operations and one for maintenance provided that the operator has designated one Quality Management Unit to ensure that the Quality System is applied uniformly throughout the entire operation. |
OPS 1.037
Accident prevention and flight safety programme
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish and maintain an accident prevention and flight safety programme, which may be integrated with the Quality System, including:
|
|
(b) |
Proposals for corrective action resulting from the accident prevention and flight safety programme shall be the responsibility of the person accountable for managing the programme. |
|
(c) |
The effectiveness of changes resulting from proposals for corrective action identified by the accident and flight safety programme shall be monitored by the Quality Manager. |
OPS 1.040
Crew members
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that all operating flight and cabin crew members have been trained in, and are proficient to perform, their assigned duties. |
|
(b) |
Where there are crew members, other than cabin crew members, who carry out their duties in the passenger compartment of an aeroplane, an operator shall ensure that these
|
OPS 1.050
Search and rescue information
An operator shall ensure that essential information pertinent to the intended flight concerning search and rescue services is easily accessible on the flight deck.
OPS 1.055
Information on emergency and survival equipment carried
An operator shall ensure that there are available for immediate communication to rescue coordination centres, lists containing information on the emergency and survival equipment carried on board all of his aeroplanes. The information shall include, as applicable, the number, colour and type of life-rafts and pyrotechnics, details of emergency medical supplies, water supplies and the type and frequencies of emergency portable radio equipment.
OPS 1.060
Ditching
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with an approved passenger seating configuration of more than 30 passengers on overwater flights at a distance from land suitable for making an emergency landing, greater than 120 minutes at cruising speed, or 400 nautical miles, whichever is the lesser, unless the aeroplane complies with the ditching requirements prescribed in the applicable airworthiness code.
OPS 1.065
Carriage of weapons of war and munitions of war
|
(a) |
An operator shall not transport weapons of war and munitions of war by air unless an approval to do so has been granted by all States concerned. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that weapons of war and munitions of war are:
|
|
(c) |
An operator shall ensure that the commander is notified before a flight begins of the details and location on board the aeroplane of any weapons of war and munitions of war intended to be carried. |
OPS 1.070
Carriage of sporting weapons and ammunition
|
(a) |
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that any sporting weapons intended to be carried by air are reported to him. |
|
(b) |
An operator accepting the carriage of sporting weapons shall ensure that they are:
|
|
(c) |
Ammunition for sporting weapons may be carried in passengers' checked baggage, subject to certain limitations, in accordance with the Technical Instructions (see OPS 1.1160 (b)(5)) as defined in OPS 1.1150 (a)(15). |
OPS 1.075
Method of carriage of persons
An operator shall take all measures to ensure that no person is in any part of an aeroplane in flight which is not a part designed for the accommodation of persons unless temporary access has been granted by the commander to any part of the aeroplane:
|
(1) |
For the purpose of taking action necessary for the safety of the aeroplane or of any person, animal or goods therein; or |
|
(2) |
In which cargo or stores are carried, being a part which is designed to enable a person to have access thereto while the aeroplane is in flight. |
OPS 1.080
Offering dangerous goods for transport by air
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that no person offers or accepts dangerous goods for transport by air unless the person has been trained and the goods are properly classified, documented, certificated, described, packaged, marked, labelled and in a fit condition for transport as required by the Technical Instructions and relevant Community legislation.
OPS 1.085
Crew responsibilities
|
(a) |
A crew member shall be responsible for the proper execution of his/her duties that:
|
|
(b) |
A crew member shall:
|
|
(c) |
Nothing in paragraph (b) above shall oblige a crew member to report an occurrence which has already been reported by another crew member. |
|
(d) |
A crew member shall not perform duties on an aeroplane:
|
|
(e) |
A crew member shall be subject to appropriate requirements on the consumption of alcohol which shall be established by the operator and acceptable by the Authority, and which shall not be less restrictive than the following:
|
|
(f) |
The commander shall:
|
|
(g) |
The commander shall, in an emergency situation that requires immediate decision and action, take any action he/she considers necessary under the circumstances. In such cases he/she may deviate from rules, operational procedures and methods in the interest of safety. |
OPS 1.090
Authority of the commander
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that all persons carried in the aeroplane obey all lawful commands given by the commander for the purpose of securing the safety of the aeroplane and of persons or property carried therein.
OPS 1.095
Authority to taxi an aeroplane
An operator shall take all reasonable steps to ensure that an aeroplane in his charge is not taxied on the movement area of an aerodrome by a person other than a flight crew member, unless that person, seated at the controls:
|
(1) |
Has been duly authorised by the operator or a designated agent and is competent to;
|
|
(2) |
Has received instruction in respect of aerodrome layout, routes, signs, marking, lights, air traffic control signals and instructions, phraseology and procedures, and is able to conform to the operational standards required for safe aeroplane movement at the aerodrome. |
OPS 1.100
Admission to flight deck
|
(a) |
An operator must ensure that no person, other than a flight crew member assigned to a flight, is admitted to, or carried in, the flight deck unless that person is:
|
|
(b) |
The commander shall ensure that:
|
|
(c) |
The final decision regarding the admission to the flight deck shall be the responsibility of the commander. |
OPS 1.105
Unauthorised carriage
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that no person secretes himself/herself or secretes cargo on board an aeroplane.
OPS 1.110
Portable electronic devices
An operator shall not permit any person to use, and take all reasonable measures to ensure that no person does use, on board an aeroplane a portable electronic device that can adversely affect the performance of the aeroplane's systems and equipment.
OPS 1.115
Alcohol and drugs
An operator shall not permit any person to enter or be in, and take all reasonable measures to ensure that no person enters or is in, an aeroplane when under the influence of alcohol or drugs to the extent that the safety of the aeroplane or its occupants is likely to be endangered.
OPS 1.120
Endangering safety
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that no person recklessly or negligently acts or omits to act:
|
(1) |
so as to endanger an aeroplane or person therein; |
|
(2) |
so as to cause or permit an aeroplane to endanger any person or property. |
OPS 1.125
Documents to be carried
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the following documents or copies thereof are carried on each flight:
|
|
(b) |
Each flight crew member shall, on each flight, carry a valid flight crew licence with appropriate rating(s) for the purpose of the flight. |
OPS 1.130
Manuals to be carried
An operator shall ensure that:
|
(1) |
The current parts of the Operations Manual relevant to the duties of the crew are carried on each flight; |
|
(2) |
Those parts of the Operations Manual which are required for the conduct of a flight are easily accessible to the crew on board the aeroplane; and |
|
(3) |
The current Aeroplane Flight Manual is carried in the aeroplane unless the Authority has accepted that the Operations Manual prescribed in OPS 1.1045, Appendix 1, Part B contains relevant information for that aeroplane. |
OPS 1.135
Additional information and forms to be carried
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that, in addition to the documents and manuals prescribed in OPS 1.125 and OPS 1.130, the following information and forms, relevant to the type and area of operation, are carried on each flight:
|
|
(b) |
The Authority may permit the information detailed in sub-paragraph (a) above, or parts thereof, to be presented in a form other than on printed paper. An acceptable standard of accessibility, usability and reliability must be assured. |
OPS 1.140
Information retained on the ground
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that: At least for the duration of each flight or series of flights;
|
|
(b) |
The information referred to in subparagraph (a) above includes:
|
OPS 1.145
Power to inspect
An operator shall ensure that any person authorised by the Authority is permitted at any time to board and fly in any aeroplane operated in accordance with an AOC issued by that Authority and to enter and remain on the flight deck provided that the commander may refuse access to the flight deck if, in his/her opinion, the safety of the aeroplane would thereby be endangered.
OPS 1.150
Production of documentation and records
|
(a) |
An operator shall:
|
|
(b) |
The commander shall, within a reasonable time of being requested to do so by a person authorised by an Authority, produce to that person the documentation required to be carried on board. |
OPS 1.155
Preservation of documentation
An operator shall ensure that:
|
(1) |
Any original documentation, or copies thereof, that he is required to preserve is preserved for the required retention period even if he ceases to be the operator of the aeroplane; and |
|
(2) |
Where a crew member, in respect of whom an operator has kept flight duty, duty and rest period records, becomes a crew member for another operator, that record is made available to the new operator. |
OPS 1.160
Preservation, production and use of flight recorder recordings
|
(a) |
Preservation of recordings:
|
|
(b) |
Production of recordings The operator of an aeroplane on which a flight recorder is carried shall, within a reasonable time after being requested to do so by the Authority, produce any recording made by a flight recorder which is available or has been preserved. |
|
(c) |
Use of recordings
|
OPS 1.165
Leasing
|
(a) |
Terminology Terms used in this paragraph have the following meaning:
|
|
(b) |
Leasing of aeroplanes between Community operators
|
|
(c) |
Leasing of aeroplanes between a Community operator and any entity other than a Community operator:
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.005(a)
Operations of performance class B aeroplanes
|
(a) |
Terminology
|
|
(b) |
Operations, to which this Appendix is applicable, may be conducted in accordance with the following alleviations.
|
SUBPART C
OPERATOR CERTIFICATION AND SUPERVISION
OPS 1.175
General rules for Air Operator Certification
Note 1: Appendix 1 to this paragraph specifies the contents and conditions of the AOC.
Note 2: Appendix 2 to this paragraph specifies the management and organisation requirements.
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane for the purpose of commercial air transportation otherwise than under, and in accordance with, the terms and conditions of an Air Operator Certificate (AOC). |
|
(b) |
An applicant for an AOC, or variation of an AOC, shall allow the Authority to examine all safety aspects of the proposed operation. |
|
(c) |
An applicant for an AOC must:
|
|
(d) |
If an operator has aeroplanes registered in different Member States, appropriate arrangements shall be made to ensure appropriate safety oversight. |
|
(e) |
An operator shall grant the Authority access to his organisation and aeroplanes and shall ensure that, with respect to maintenance, access is granted to any associated Part-145 maintenance organisation, to determine continued compliance with OPS 1. |
|
(f) |
An AOC will be varied, suspended or revoked if the Authority is no longer satisfied that the operator can maintain safe operations. |
|
(g) |
The operator must satisfy the Authority that;
|
|
(h) |
The operator must have nominated an accountable manager acceptable to the Authority who has corporate authority for ensuring that all operations and maintenance activities can be financed and carried out to the standard required by the Authority. |
|
(i) |
The operator must have nominated post holders, acceptable to the Authority, who are responsible for the management and supervision of the following areas,
|
|
(j) |
A Person may hold more than one of the nominated posts if acceptable to the Authority but, for operators who employ 21 or more full time staff, a minimum of two persons are required to cover the four areas of responsibility. |
|
(k) |
For operators who employ 20 or less full time staff, one or more of the nominated posts may be filled by the accountable manager if acceptable to the Authority. |
|
(l) |
The operator must ensure that every flight is conducted in accordance with the provisions of the Operations Manual. |
|
(m) |
The operator must arrange appropriate ground handling facilities to ensure the safe handling of its flights. |
|
(n) |
The operator must ensure that its aeroplanes are equipped and its crews are qualified, as required for the area and type of operation. |
|
(o) |
The operator must comply with the maintenance requirements, in accordance with Part M, for all aeroplanes operated under the terms of its AOC. |
|
(p) |
The operator must provide the Authority with a copy of the Operations Manual, as specified in Subpart P and all amendments or revisions to it. |
|
(q) |
The operator must maintain operational support facilities at the main operating base, appropriate for the area and type of operation. |
OPS 1.180
Issue, variation and continued validity of an AOC
|
(a) |
An operator will not be granted an AOC, or a variation to an AOC, and that AOC will not remain valid unless:
|
|
(b) |
Notwithstanding the provisions of OPS 1.185 (f), the operator must notify the Authority as soon as practicable of any changes to the information submitted in accordance with OPS 1.185(a) below. |
|
(c) |
If the Authority is not satisfied that the requirements of subparagraph (a) above have been met, the Authority may require the conduct of one or more demonstration flights, operated as if they were commercial air transport flights. |
OPS 1.185
Administrative requirements
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the following information is included in the initial application for an AOC and, when applicable, any variation or renewal applied for:
|
|
(b) |
In respect of the operator's maintenance system only, the following information must be included in the initial application for an AOC and, when applicable, any variation or renewal applied for, and for each aeroplane type to be operated:
|
|
(c) |
The application for an initial issue of an AOC must be submitted at least 90 days before the date of intended operation except that the Operations Manual may be submitted later but not less than 60 days before the date of intended operation. |
|
(d) |
The application for the variation of an AOC must be submitted at least 30 days, or as otherwise agreed, before the date of intended operation. |
|
(e) |
The application for the renewal of an AOC must be submitted at least 30 days, or as otherwise agreed, before the end of the existing period of validity. |
|
(f) |
Other than in exceptional circumstances, the Authority must be given at least 10 days prior notice of a proposed change of a nominated post holder. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.175
Contents and conditions of the Air Operator Certificate
An AOC specifies the:
|
(a) |
Name and location (principal place of business) of the operator; |
|
(b) |
Date of issue and period of validity; |
|
(c) |
Description of the type of operations authorised; |
|
(d) |
Type(s) of aeroplane(s) authorised for use; |
|
(e) |
Registration markings of the authorised aeroplane(s) except that operators may obtain approval for a system to inform the Authority about the registration markings for aeroplanes operated under its AOC; |
|
(f) |
Authorised areas of operation; |
|
(g) |
Special limitations; and |
|
(h) |
Special authorisations/approvals e.g.:
|
Appendix 2 to OPS 1.175
The management and organisation of an AOC holder
|
(a) |
General An operator must have a sound and effective management structure in order to ensure the safe conduct of air operations. Nominated post holders must have managerial competency together with appropriate technical/operational qualifications in aviation. |
|
(b) |
Nominated post holders:
|
|
(c) |
Adequacy and supervision of staff:
|
|
(d) |
Accommodation facilities
|
|
(e) |
Documentation The operator must make arrangements for the production of manuals, amendments and other documentation. |
SUBPART D
OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES
OPS 1.195
Operational Control
An operator shall:
|
(a) |
Establish and maintain a method of exercising operational control approved by the Authority; and |
|
(b) |
Exercise operational control over any flight operated under the terms of his AOC. |
OPS 1.200
Operations manual
An operator shall provide an Operations Manual in accordance with Subpart P for the use and guidance of operations personnel.
OPS 1.205
Competence of operations personnel
An operator shall ensure that all personnel assigned to, or directly involved in, ground and flight operations are properly instructed, have demonstrated their abilities in their particular duties and are aware of their responsibilities and the relationship of such duties to the operation as a whole.
OPS 1.210
Establishment of procedures
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish procedures and instructions, for each aeroplane type, containing ground staff and crew members' duties for all types of operation on the ground and in flight. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall establish a check-list system to be used by crew members for all phases of operation of the aeroplane under normal, abnormal and emergency conditions as applicable, to ensure that the operating procedures in the Operations Manual are followed. |
|
(c) |
An operator shall not require a crew member to perform any activities during critical phases of the flight other than those required for the safe operation of the aeroplane. |
OPS 1.215
Use of Air Traffic Services
An operator shall ensure that Air Traffic Services are used for all flights whenever available.
OPS 1.216
In-Flight Operational Instructions
An operator shall ensure that his in-flight operational instructions involving a change to the air traffic flight plan shall, when practicable, be coordinated with the appropriate Air Traffic Service Unit before transmission to an aeroplane.
OPS 1.220
Authorisation of Aerodromes by the Operator
An operator shall only authorise use of aerodromes that are adequate for the type(s) of aeroplane and operation(s) concerned.
OPS 1.225
Aerodrome Operating Minima
|
(a) |
An operator shall specify aerodrome operating minima, established in accordance with OPS 1.430 for each departure, destination or alternate aerodrome authorised to be used in accordance with OPS 1.220. |
|
(b) |
Any increment imposed by the Authority must be added to the minima specified in accordance with sub-paragraph (a) above. |
|
(c) |
The minima for a specific type of approach and landing procedure are considered applicable if:
|
OPS 1.230
Instrument departure and approach procedures
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that instrument departure and approach procedures established by the State in which the aerodrome is located are used. |
|
(b) |
Notwithstanding sub-paragraph (a) above, a commander may accept an ATC clearance to deviate from a published departure or arrival route, provided obstacle clearance criteria are observed and full account is taken of the operating conditions. The final approach must be flown visually or in accordance with the established instrument approach procedure. |
|
(c) |
Different procedures to those required to be used in accordance with sub-paragraph (a) above may only be implemented by an operator provided they have been approved by the State in which the aerodrome is located, if required, and accepted by the Authority. |
OPS 1.235
Noise abatement procedures
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish operating procedures for noise abatement during instrument flight operations in compliance with ICAO PANS OPS Volume 1 (Doc 8168-OPS/611). |
|
(b) |
Take-off climb procedures for noise abatement specified by an operator for any one aeroplane type should be the same for all aerodromes. |
OPS 1.240
Routes and areas of operation
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that operations are only conducted along such routes or within such areas, for which:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that operations are conducted in accordance with any restriction on the routes or the areas of operation, imposed by the Authority. |
OPS 1.241
Operation in defined airspace with Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM)
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in defined portions of airspace where, based on Regional Air Navigation Agreement, a vertical separation minimum of 300 m (1 000 ft) applies unless approved to do so by the Authority (RVSM Approval). (See also OPS 1.872).
OPS 1.243
Operation in areas with specific navigation performance requirements
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in defined areas, or a defined portion of specified airspace, based on Regional Air Navigation Agreements where minimum navigation performance specifications are prescribed unless approved to do so by the Authority (MNPS/RNP/RNAV Approval). (See also OPS 1.865 (c)(2) and OPS 1.870).
OPS 1.245
Maximum distance from an adequate aerodrome for two-engined aeroplanes without an ETOPS Approval
|
(a) |
Unless specifically approved by the Authority in accordance with OPS 1.246 (a) (ETOPS approval), an operator shall not operate a two-engined aeroplane over a route which contains a point further from an adequate aerodrome than, in the case of:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall determine a speed for the calculation of the maximum distance to an adequate aerodrome for each two-engined aeroplane type or variant operated, not exceeding VMO, based upon the true airspeed that the aeroplane can maintain with one-engine-inoperative under the following conditions:
|
|
(c) |
An operator must ensure that the following data, specific to each type or variant, is included in the Operations Manual:
|
Note: The speeds and altitudes (flight levels) specified above are only intended to be used for establishing the maximum distance from an adequate aerodrome.
OPS 1.246
Extended range operations with two-engined aeroplanes (ETOPS)
|
(a) |
An operator shall not conduct operations beyond the threshold distance determined in accordance with OPS 1.245 unless approved to do so by the Authority (ETOPS approval). |
|
(b) |
Prior to conducting an ETOPS flight, an operator shall ensure that a suitable ETOPS en-route alternate is available, within either the approved diversion time, or a diversion time based on the MEL generated serviceability status of the aeroplane, whichever is shorter. (See also OPS 1.297 (d)). |
OPS 1.250
Establishment of minimum flight altitudes
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish minimum flight altitudes and the methods to determine those altitudes for all route segments to be flown which provide the required terrain clearance taking into account the requirements of Subparts F to I. |
|
(b) |
Every method for establishing minimum flight altitudes must be approved by the Authority. |
|
(c) |
Where minimum flight altitudes established by States overflown are higher than those established by the operator, the higher values shall apply. |
|
(d) |
An operator shall take into account the following factors when establishing minimum flight altitudes:
|
|
(e) |
In fulfilling the requirements prescribed in sub-paragraph (d) above due consideration shall be given to:
|
OPS 1.255
Fuel policy
|
(a) |
An operator must establish a fuel policy for the purpose of flight planning and in-flight replanning to ensure that every flight carries sufficient fuel for the planned operation and reserves to cover deviations from the planned operation. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that the planning of flights is at least based upon (1) and (2) below:
|
|
(c) |
An operator shall ensure that the pre-flight calculation of usable fuel required for a flight includes:
|
|
(d) |
An operator shall ensure that in-flight replanning procedures for calculating usable fuel required when a flight has to proceed along a route or to a destination other than originally planned includes:
|
OPS 1.260
Carriage of Persons with Reduced Mobility
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish procedures for the carriage of Persons with Reduced Mobility (PRMs). |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that PRMs are not allocated, nor occupy, seats where their presence could:
|
|
(c) |
The commander must be notified when PRMs are to be carried on board. |
OPS 1.265
Carriage of inadmissible passengers, deportees or persons in custody
An operator shall establish procedures for the transportation of inadmissible passengers, deportees or persons in custody to ensure the safety of the aeroplane and its occupants. The commander must be notified when the above-mentioned persons are to be carried on board.
OPS 1.270
Stowage of baggage and cargo
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.270)
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that only such hand baggage is taken into the passenger cabin as can be adequately and securely stowed. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that all baggage and cargo on board, which might cause injury or damage, or obstruct aisles and exits if displaced, is placed in stowages designed to prevent movement. |
OPS 1.275
Intentionally blank
OPS 1.280
Passenger Seating
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that passengers are seated where, in the event that an emergency evacuation is required, they may best assist and not hinder evacuation from the aeroplane.
OPS 1.285
Passenger briefing
An operator shall ensure that:
|
(a) |
General
|
|
(b) |
Before take-off
|
|
(c) |
After take-off
|
|
(d) |
Before landing
|
|
(e) |
After landing
|
|
(f) |
In an emergency during flight, passengers are instructed in such emergency action as may be appropriate to the circumstances. |
OPS 1.290
Flight preparation
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that an operational flight plan is completed for each intended flight. |
|
(b) |
The commander shall not commence a flight unless he/she is satisfied that:
|
OPS 1.295
Selection of aerodromes
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish procedures for the selection of destination and/or alternate aerodromes in accordance with OPS 1.220 when planning a flight. |
|
(b) |
An operator must select and specify in the operational flight plan a take-off alternate if it would not be possible to return to the aerodrome of departure for meteorological or performance reasons. The take-off alternate shall be located within:
|
|
(c) |
An operator must select at least one destination alternate for each IFR flight unless:
|
|
(d) |
An operator must select two destination alternates when:
|
|
(e) |
An operator shall specify any required alternate(s) in the operational flight plan. |
OPS 1.297
Planning minima for IFR flights
|
(a) |
Planning minima for take-off alternates. An operator shall not select an aerodrome as a take-off alternate aerodrome unless the appropriate weather reports or forecasts or any combination thereof indicate that, during a period commencing 1 hour before and ending 1 hour after the estimated time of arrival at the aerodrome, the weather conditions will be at or above the applicable landing minima specified in accordance with OPS 1.225. The ceiling must be taken into account when the only approaches available are non-precision and/or circling approaches. Any limitation related to one-engine-inoperative operations must be taken into account. |
|
(b) |
Planning minima for destination and destination alternate aerodromes. An operator shall only select the destination aerodrome and/or destination alternate aerodrome(s) when the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or any combination thereof, indicate that, during a period commencing 1 hour before and ending 1 hour after the estimated time of arrival at the aerodrome, the weather conditions will be at or above the applicable planning minima as follows:
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(c) |
Planning minima for an en-route alternate aerodrome. An operator shall not select an aerodrome as an en-route alternate aerodrome unless the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or any combination thereof, indicate that, during a period commencing 1 hour before and ending 1 hour after the expected time of arrival at the aerodrome, the weather conditions will be at or above the planning minima in accordance with Table 1 above. |
|
(d) |
Planning minima for an ETOPS en-route alternate. An operator shall not select an aerodrome as an ETOPS en-route alternate aerodrome unless the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or any combination thereof, indicate that, during a period commencing 1 hour before and ending 1 hour after the expected time of arrival at the aerodrome, the weather conditions will be at or above the planning minima prescribed in Table 2 below, and in accordance with the operator's ETOPS approval. Table 2 Planning minima — ETOPS
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||
OPS 1.300
Submission of ATS Flight Plan
An operator shall ensure that a flight is not commenced unless an ATS flight plan has been submitted, or adequate information has been deposited in order to permit alerting services to be activated if required.
OPS 1.305
Refuelling/defuelling with passengers embarking, on board or disembarking
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.305)
An operator shall ensure that no aeroplane is refuelled/defuelled with Avgas or wide cut type fuel (e.g. Jet-B or equivalent) or when a mixture of these types of fuel might occur, when passengers are embarking, on board or disembarking. In all other cases necessary precautions must be taken and the aeroplane must be properly manned by qualified personnel ready to initiate and direct an evacuation of the aeroplane by the most practical and expeditious means available.
OPS 1.307
Refuelling/Defuelling with wide-cut fuel
An operator shall establish procedures for refuelling/defuelling with wide-cut fuel (e.g. Jet-B or equivalent) if this is required.
OPS 1.308
Push Back and Towing
|
(a) |
The operator shall ensure that all push back and towing procedures comply with appropriate aviation standards and procedures. |
|
(b) |
The operator shall ensure that pre- or post-taxi positioning of the aeroplanes is not executed by towbarless towing unless:
|
OPS 1.310
Crew Members at stations
|
(a) |
Flight crew members
|
|
(b) |
Cabin crew members. On all the decks of the aeroplane that are occupied by passengers, required cabin crew members shall be seated at their assigned stations during critical phases of flight. |
OPS 1.315
Assisting means for emergency evacuation
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that before taxiing, take-off and landing, and when safe and practicable to do so, an assisting means for emergency evacuation that deploys automatically, is armed.
OPS 1.320
Seats, safety belts and harnesses
|
(a) |
Crew members
|
|
(b) |
Passengers
|
OPS 1.325
Securing of passenger cabin and galley(s)
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that before taxiing, take-off and landing all exits and escape paths are unobstructed. |
|
(b) |
The commander shall ensure that before take-off and landing, and whenever deemed necessary in the interest of safety, all equipment and baggage is properly secured. |
OPS 1.330
Accessibility of emergency equipment
The commander shall ensure that relevant emergency equipment remains easily accessible for immediate use.
OPS 1.335
Smoking on board
|
(a) |
The commander shall ensure that no person on board is allowed to smoke:
|
OPS 1.340
Meteorological Conditions
|
(a) |
On an IFR flight a commander shall not:
|
|
(b) |
On an IFR flight a commander shall not continue beyond:
|
|
(c) |
On an IFR flight, a commander shall not continue towards the planned destination aerodrome unless the latest information available indicates that, at the expected time of arrival, the weather conditions at the destination, or at least one destination alternate aerodrome, are at or above the planning applicable aerodrome operating minima. |
|
(d) |
On a VFR flight a commander shall not commence take-off unless current meteorological reports or a combination of current reports and forecasts indicate that the meteorological conditions along the route or that part of the route to be flown under VFR will, at the appropriate time, be such as to render compliance with these rules possible. |
OPS 1.345
Ice and other contaminants — ground procedures
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish procedures to be followed when ground de-icing and anti-icing and related inspections of the aeroplane(s) are necessary. |
|
(b) |
A commander shall not commence take-off unless the external surfaces are clear of any deposit which might adversely affect the performance and/or controllability of the aeroplane except as permitted in the Aeroplane Flight Manual. |
OPS 1.346
Ice and other contaminants — flight procedures
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish procedures for flights in expected or actual icing conditions. |
|
(b) |
A commander shall not commence a flight nor intentionally fly into expected or actual icing conditions unless the aeroplane is certificated and equipped to cope with such conditions. |
OPS 1.350
Fuel and oil supply
A commander shall not commence a flight unless he/she is satisfied that the aeroplane carries at least the planned amount of fuel and oil to complete the flight safely, taking into account the expected operating conditions.
OPS 1.355
Take-off conditions
Before commencing take-off, a commander must satisfy himself/herself that, according to the information available to him/her, the weather at the aerodrome and the condition of the runway intended to be used should not prevent a safe take-off and departure.
OPS 1.360
Application of take-off minima
Before commencing take-off, a commander must satisfy himself/herself that the RVR or visibility in the take-off direction of the aeroplane is equal to or better than the applicable minimum.
OPS 1.365
Minimum flight altitudes
The commander or the pilot to whom conduct of the flight has been delegated shall not fly below specified minimum altitudes except when necessary for take-off or landing.
OPS 1.370
Simulated abnormal situations in flight
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that abnormal or emergency situations requiring the application of part or all of abnormal or emergency procedures and simulation of IMC by artificial means are not simulated during commercial air transportation flights.
OPS 1.375
In-flight fuel management
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.375)
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish a procedure to ensure that in-flight fuel checks and fuel management are carried out. |
|
(b) |
A commander shall ensure that the amount of usable fuel remaining in flight is not less than the fuel required to proceed to an aerodrome where a safe landing can be made, with final reserve fuel remaining. |
|
(c) |
The commander shall declare an emergency when calculated usable fuel on landing is less than final reserve fuel. |
OPS 1.380
Intentionally blank
OPS 1.385
Use of supplemental oxygen
A commander shall ensure that flight crew members engaged in performing duties essential to the safe operation of an aeroplane in flight use supplemental oxygen continuously whenever cabin altitude exceeds 10 000 ft for a period in excess of 30 minutes and whenever the cabin altitude exceeds 13 000 ft.
OPS 1.390
Cosmic radiation
|
(a) |
An operator shall take account of the in-flight exposure to cosmic radiation of all crew members while on duty (including positioning) and shall take the following measures for those crew liable to be subject to exposure of more than 1 mSv per year;
|
|
(b) |
|
OPS 1.395
Ground proximity detection
When undue proximity to the ground is detected by any flight crew member or by a ground proximity warning system, the commander or the pilot to whom conduct of the flight has been delegated shall ensure that corrective action is initiated immediately to establish safe flight conditions.
OPS 1.398
Use of Airborne Collision Avoidance System (ACAS)
An operator shall establish procedures to ensure that:
|
(a) |
When ACAS is installed and serviceable, it shall be used in flight in a mode that enables Resolution Advisories (RA) to be produced unless to do so would not be appropriate for conditions existing at the time. |
|
(b) |
When undue proximity to another aircraft (RA) is detected by ACAS, the commander or the pilot to whom conduct of the flight has been delegated shall ensure that corrective action is initiated immediately to establish safe separation unless the intruder has been visually identified and has been determined not to be a threat. |
OPS 1.400
Approach and landing conditions
Before commencing an approach to land, the commander must satisfy himself/herself that, according to the information available to him/her, the weather at the aerodrome and the condition of the runway intended to be used should not prevent a safe approach, landing or missed approach, having regard to the performance information contained in the Operations Manual.
OPS 1.405
Commencement and continuation of approach
|
(a) |
The commander or the pilot to whom conduct of the flight has been delegated may commence an instrument approach regardless of the reported RVR/Visibility but the approach shall not be continued beyond the outer marker, or equivalent position, if the reported RVR/visibility is less than the applicable minima. |
|
(b) |
Where RVR is not available, RVR values may be derived by converting the reported visibility in accordance with Appendix 1 to OPS 1.430, sub-paragraph (h). |
|
(c) |
If, after passing the outer marker or equivalent position in accordance with (a) above, the reported RVR/visibility falls below the applicable minimum, the approach may be continued to DA/H or MDA/H. |
|
(d) |
Where no outer marker or equivalent position exists, the commander or the pilot to whom conduct of the flight has been delegated shall make the decision to continue or abandon the approach before descending below 1 000 ft above the aerodrome on the final approach segment. If the MDA/H is at or above 1 000 ft above the aerodrome, the operator shall establish a height, for each approach procedure, below which the approach shall not be continued if RVR/visibility is less than applicable minima. |
|
(e) |
The approach may be continued below DA/H or MDA/H and the landing may be completed provided that the required visual reference is established at the DA/H or MDA/H and is maintained. |
|
(f) |
The touch-down zone RVR is always controlling. If reported and relevant, the mid point and stop end RVR are also controlling. The minimum RVR value for the mid-point is 125 m or the RVR required for the touch-down zone if less, and 75 m for the stop-end. For aeroplanes equipped with a roll-out guidance or control system, the minimum RVR value for the mid-point is 75 m. |
Note. “Relevant”, in this context, means that part of the runway used during the high speed phase of the landing down to a speed of approximately 60 knots.
OPS 1.410
Operating procedures — Threshold crossing height
An operator must establish operational procedures designed to ensure that an aeroplane being used to conduct precision approaches crosses the threshold by a safe margin, with the aeroplane in the landing configuration and attitude.
OPS 1.415
Journey log
A commander shall ensure that the Journey log is completed.
OPS 1.420
Occurrence reporting
|
(a) |
Terminology
|
|
(b) |
Incident reporting. An operator shall establish procedures for reporting incidents taking into account responsibilities described below and circumstances described in sub-paragraph (d) below.
|
|
(c) |
Accident and Serious Incident Reporting. An operator shall establish procedures for reporting accidents and serious incidents taking into account responsibilities described below and circumstances described in sub-paragraph (d) below.
|
|
(d) |
Specific Reports. Occurrences for which specific notification and reporting methods must be used are described below:
|
OPS 1.425
Reserved
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.270
Stowage of baggage and cargo
Procedures established by an operator to ensure that hand baggage and cargo is adequately and securely stowed must take account of the following:
|
(1) |
Each item carried in a cabin must be stowed only in a location that is capable of restraining it; |
|
(2) |
Mass limitations placarded on or adjacent to stowages must not be exceeded; |
|
(3) |
Underseat stowages must not be used unless the seat is equipped with a restraint bar and the baggage is of such size that it may adequately be restrained by this equipment; |
|
(4) |
Items must not be stowed in toilets or against bulkheads that are incapable of restraining articles against movement forwards, sideways or upwards and unless the bulkheads carry a placard specifying the greatest mass that may be placed there; |
|
(5) |
Baggage and cargo placed in lockers must not be of such size that they prevent latched doors from being closed securely; |
|
(6) |
Baggage and cargo must not be placed where it can impede access to emergency equipment; and |
|
(7) |
Checks must be made before take-off, before landing, and whenever the fasten seat belts signs are illuminated or it is otherwise so ordered to ensure that baggage is stowed where it cannot impede evacuation from the aircraft or cause injury by falling (or other movement) as may be appropriate to the phase of flight. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.305
Re/defuelling with passengers embarking, on board or disembarking
An operator must establish operational procedures for re/defuelling with passengers embarking, on board or disembarking to ensure the following precautions are taken:
|
(1) |
One qualified person must remain at a specified location during fuelling operations with passengers on board. This qualified person must be capable of handling emergency procedures concerning fire protection and fire-fighting, handling communications and initiating and directing an evacuation; |
|
(2) |
A two-way communication shall be established and shall remain available by the aeroplane's inter-communication system or other suitable means between the ground crew supervising the refuelling and the qualified personnel on board the aeroplane; |
|
(3) |
Crew, staff and passengers must be warned that re/defuelling will take place; |
|
(4) |
“Fasten Seat Belts” signs must be off; |
|
(5) |
“NO SMOKING” signs must be on, together with interior lighting to enable emergency exits to be identified; |
|
(6) |
Passengers must be instructed to unfasten their seat belts and refrain from smoking; |
|
(7) |
Sufficient qualified personnel must be on board and be prepared for an immediate emergency evacuation; |
|
(8) |
If the presence of fuel vapour is detected inside the aeroplane, or any other hazard arises during re/defuelling, fuelling must be stopped immediately; |
|
(9) |
The ground area beneath the exits intended for emergency evacuation and slide deployment areas must be kept clear; and |
|
(10) |
Provision is made for a safe and rapid evacuation. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.375
In-flight fuel management
|
(a) |
In-flight fuel checks
|
|
(b) |
In-flight fuel management.
|
SUBPART E
ALL WEATHER OPERATIONS
OPS 1.430
Aerodrome Operating Minima — General
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.430)
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish, for each aerodrome planned to be used, aerodrome operating minima that are not lower than the values given in Appendix 1. The method of determination of such minima must be acceptable to the Authority. Such minima shall not be lower than any that may be established for such aerodromes by the State in which the aerodrome is located, except when specifically approved by that State. Note: The above paragraph does not prohibit in-flight calculation of minima for a non planned alternate aerodrome if carried out in accordance with an accepted method. |
|
(b) |
In establishing the aerodrome operating minima which will apply to any particular operation, an operator must take full account of:
|
|
(c) |
The aeroplane categories referred to in this Subpart must be derived in accordance with the method given in Appendix 2 to OPS 1.430 (c). |
OPS 1.435
Terminology
Terms used in this Subpart have the following meaning:
|
(1) |
Circling. The visual phase of an instrument approach to bring an aircraft into position for landing on a runway which is not suitably located for a straight-in approach. |
|
(2) |
Low Visibility Procedures (LVP). Procedures applied at an aerodrome for the purpose of ensuring safe operations during Category II and III approaches and Low Visibility Take-Offs. |
|
(3) |
Low Visibility Take-Off (LVTO). A take-off where the Runway Visual Range (RVR) is less than 400 m. |
|
(4) |
Flight control system. A system which includes an automatic landing system and/or a hybrid landing system. |
|
(5) |
Fail-Passive flight control system. A flight control system is fail-passive if, in the event of a failure, there is no significant out-of-trim condition or deviation of flight path or attitude but the landing is not completed automatically. For a fail-passive automatic flight control system the pilot assumes control of the aeroplane after a failure. |
|
(6) |
Fail-Operational flight control system. A flight control system is fail-operational if, in the event of a failure below alert height, the approach, flare and landing, can be completed automatically. In the event of a failure, the automatic landing system will operate as a fail-passive system. |
|
(7) |
Fail-operational hybrid landing system A system which consists of a primary fail-passive automatic landing system and a secondary independent guidance system enabling the pilot to complete a landing manually after failure of the primary system. Note: A typical secondary independent guidance system consists of a monitored head-up display providing guidance which normally takes the form of command information but it may alternatively be situation (or deviation) information. |
|
(8) |
Visual approach. An approach when either part or all of an instrument approach procedure is not completed and the approach is executed with visual reference to the terrain. |
OPS 1.440
Low visibility operations — General operating rules
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.440)
|
(a) |
An operator shall not conduct Category II or III operations unless:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall not conduct low visibility take-offs in less than 150 m RVR (Category A, B and C aeroplanes) or 200 m RVR (Category D aeroplanes) unless approved by the Authority. |
OPS 1.445
Low visibility operations — Aerodrome considerations
|
(a) |
An operator shall not use an aerodrome for Category II or III operations unless the aerodrome is approved for such operations by the State in which the aerodrome is located. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall verify that Low Visibility Procedures (LVP) have been established, and will be enforced, at those aerodromes where low visibility operations are to be conducted. |
OPS 1.450
Low visibility operations — Training and Qualifications
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.450)
An operator shall ensure that, prior to conducting Low Visibility Take-Off, Category II and III operations:
|
(1) |
Each flight crew member:
|
|
(2) |
The training and checking is conducted in accordance with a detailed syllabus approved by the Authority and included in the Operations Manual. This training is in addition to that prescribed in Subpart N; and |
|
(3) |
The flight crew qualification is specific to the operation and the aeroplane type. |
OPS 1.455
Low visibility operations — Operating Procedures
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.455)
|
(a) |
An operator must establish procedures and instructions to be used for Low Visibility Take-Off and Category II and III operations. These procedures must be included in the Operations Manual and contain the duties of flight crew members during taxiing, take-off, approach, flare, landing, roll-out and missed approach as appropriate. |
|
(b) |
The commander shall satisfy himself/herself that:
|
OPS 1.460
Low visibility operations — Minimum equipment
|
(a) |
An operator must include in the Operations Manual the minimum equipment that has to be serviceable at the commencement of a Low Visibility Take-off or a Category II or III approach in accordance with the AFM or other approved document. |
|
(b) |
The commander shall satisfy himself/herself that the status of the aeroplane and of the relevant airborne systems is appropriate for the specific operation to be conducted. |
OPS 1.465
VFR Operating minima
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.465)
An operator shall ensure that:
|
(1) |
VFR flights are conducted in accordance with the Visual Flight Rules and in accordance with the Table in Appendix 1 to OPS 1.465. |
|
(2) |
Special VFR flights are not commenced when the visibility is less than 3 km and not otherwise conducted when the visibility is less than 1,5 km. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.430
Aerodrome Operating Minima
|
(a) |
Take-off Minima
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(b) |
Non-Precision approach
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(c) |
Precision approach — Category I operations
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(d) |
Precision approach — Category II operations
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(e) |
Precision approach — Category III operations
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(f) |
Circling
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(g) |
Visual Approach. An operator shall not use an RVR of less than 800 m for a visual approach. |
|
(h) |
Conversion of Reported Meteorological Visibility to RVR
|
||||||||||||||||||
Appendix 2 to OPS 1.430 (c)
Aeroplane categories — All Weather Operations
|
(a) |
Classification of aeroplanes The criteria taken into consideration for the classification of aeroplanes by categories is the indicated airspeed at threshold (VAT) which is equal to the stalling speed (VSO) multiplied by 1,3 or VS1G multiplied by 1,23 in the landing configuration at the maximum certificated landing mass. If both VSO and VS1G are available, the higher resulting VAT shall be used. The aeroplane categories corresponding to VAT values are in the Table below:
The landing configuration which is to be taken into consideration shall be defined by the operator or by the aeroplane manufacturer. |
|
(b) |
Permanent change of category (maximum landing mass)
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.440
Low Visibility Operations — General Operating Rules
|
(a) |
General. The following procedures apply to the introduction and approval of low visibility operations. |
|
(b) |
Operational Demonstration. The purpose of the operational demonstration is to determine or validate the use and effectiveness of the applicable aircraft flight guidance systems, training, flight crew procedures, maintenance programme, and manuals applicable to the Category II/III programme being approved.
|
|
(c) |
Data Collection For Operational Demonstrations. Each applicant must develop a data collection method (e.g. a form to be used by the flight crew) to record approach and landing performance. The resulting data and a summary of the demonstration data shall be made available to the Authority for evaluation. |
|
(d) |
Data Analysis. Unsatisfactory approaches and/or automatic landings shall be documented and analysed. |
|
(e) |
Continuous Monitoring
|
|
(f) |
Transitional periods
|
|
(g) |
Maintenance of Category II, Category III and LVTO equipment. Maintenance instructions for the on-board guidance systems must be established by the operator, in liaison with the manufacturer, and included in the operator's aeroplane maintenance programme prescribed in OPS 1.910 which must be approved by the Authority. |
|
(h) |
Eligible Aerodromes and Runways
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.450
Low Visibility Operations — Training & Qualifications
|
(a) |
General: An operator must ensure that flight crew member training programmes for Low Visibility Operations include structured courses of ground, Flight Simulator and/or flight training. The operator may abbreviate the course content as prescribed by sub-paragraphs (2) and (3) below provided the content of the abbreviated course is acceptable to the authority.
|
|
(b) |
Ground Training. An operator must ensure that the initial ground training course for Low Visibility Operations covers at least:
|
|
(c) |
Flight Simulator training and/or flight training
|
|
(d) |
Conversion Training Requirements to conduct Low Visibility Take-off and Category II and III Operations. An operator shall ensure that each flight crew member completes the following Low Visibility Procedures training if converting to a new type or variant of aeroplane in which Low Visibility Take-off and Category II and III Operations will be conducted. The flight crew member experience requirements to undertake an abbreviated course are prescribed in sub-paragraphs (a)(2) and (a)(3), above:
|
|
(e) |
Type and command experience. Before commencing Category II/III operations, the following additional requirements are applicable to commanders, or pilots to whom conduct of the flight has been delegated, who are new to the aeroplane type:
|
|
(f) |
Low Visibility Take-Off with RVR less than 150/200 m
|
|
(g) |
Recurrent Training and Checking — Low Visibility Operations
Note: Recency for LTVO and Category II/III based upon automatic approaches and/or auto-lands is maintained by the recurrent training and checking as prescribed in this paragraph. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.455
Low Visibility Operations — Operating procedures
|
(a) |
General. Low Visibility Operations include:
Note 1: A hybrid system may be used with any of these modes of operations. Note 2: Other forms of guidance systems or displays may be certificated and approved. |
|
(b) |
Procedures and Operating Instructions
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.465
Minimum Visibilities for VFR Operations
|
Airspace class |
|
A B C D E [Note 1] |
F G |
|||||||
|
|
Above 900 m (3 000 ft) AMSL or above 300 m (1 000 ft) above terrain, whichever is the higher |
At and below 900 m (3 000 ft) AMSL or 300 m (1 000 ft) above terrain, whichever is the higher |
||||||||
|
Distance from cloud |
|
1 500 m horizontally 300 m (1 000 ft) vertically |
Clear of cloud and in sight of the surface |
|||||||
|
Flight visibility |
8 km at and above 3 050 m (10 000 ft) AMSL (Note 2) 5 km below 3 050 m (10 000 ft) AMSL |
5 km (Note 3) |
||||||||
|
||||||||||
SUBPART F
PERFORMANCE GENERAL
OPS 1.470
Applicability
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that multi-engine aeroplanes powered by turbo propeller engines with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9 or a maximum take-off mass exceeding 5 700 kg, and all multi-engine turbojet powered aeroplanes are operated in accordance with Subpart G (Performance Class A). |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that propeller driven aeroplanes with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of 9 or less, and a maximum take-off mass of 5 700 kg or less are operated in accordance with Subpart H (Performance Class B). |
|
(c) |
An operator shall ensure that aeroplanes powered by reciprocating engines with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9 or a maximum take-off mass exceeding 5 700 kg are operated in accordance with Subpart I (Performance Class C). |
|
(d) |
Where full compliance with the requirements of the appropriate Subpart cannot be shown due to specific design characteristics (e.g. supersonic aeroplanes or seaplanes), the operator shall apply approved performance standards that ensure a level of safety equivalent to that of the appropriate Subpart. |
OPS 1.475
General
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the mass of the aeroplane:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that the approved performance Data contained in the Aeroplane Flight Manual is used to determine compliance with the requirements of the appropriate Subpart, supplemented as necessary with other data acceptable to the Authority as prescribed in the relevant Subpart. When applying the factors prescribed in the appropriate Subpart, account may be taken of any operational factors already incorporated in the Aeroplane Flight Manual performance data to avoid double application of factors. |
|
(c) |
When showing compliance with the requirements of the appropriate Subpart, due account shall be taken of aeroplane configuration, environmental conditions and the operation of systems which have an adverse effect on performance. |
|
(d) |
For performance purposes, a damp runway, other than a grass runway, may be considered to be dry. |
|
(e) |
An operator shall take account of charting accuracy when assessing compliance with the take-off requirements of the applicable subpart. |
OPS 1.480
Terminology
|
(a) |
The following terms used in Subparts F, G, H, I and J, have the following meaning:
|
|
(b) |
The terms “accelerate-stop distance”, “take-off distance”, “take-off run”, “net take-off flight path”, “one engine inoperative en-route net flight path” and “two engines inoperative en-route net flight path” as relating to the aeroplane have their meanings defined in the airworthiness requirements under which the aeroplane was certificated, or as specified by the Authority if it finds that definition inadequate for showing compliance with the performance operating limitations. |
SUBPART G
PERFORMANCE CLASS A
OPS 1.485
General
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that, for determining compliance with the requirements of this Subpart, the approved performance data in the Aeroplane Flight Manual is supplemented as necessary with other data acceptable to the Authority if the approved performance Data in the Aeroplane Flight Manual is insufficient in respect of items such as:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that, for the wet and contaminated runway case, performance data determined in accordance with applicable requirements on certification of large aeroplanes or equivalent acceptable to the Authority is used. |
OPS 1.490
Take-off
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the take-off mass does not exceed the maximum take-off mass specified in the Aeroplane Flight Manual for the pressure altitude and the ambient temperature at the aerodrome at which the take-off is to be made. |
|
(b) |
An operator must meet the following requirements when determining the maximum permitted take-off mass:
|
|
(c) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (b) above, an operator must take account of the following:
|
OPS 1.495
Take-off obstacle clearance
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the net take-off flight path clears all obstacles by a vertical distance of at least 35 ft or by a horizontal distance of at least 90 m plus 0,125 × D, where D is the horizontal distance the aeroplane has travelled from the end of the take-off distance available or the end of the take-off distance if a turn is scheduled before the end of the take-off distance available. For aeroplanes with a wingspan of less than 60 m a horizontal obstacle clearance of half the aeroplane wingspan plus 60 m, plus 0,125 × D may be used. |
|
(b) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above, an operator must take account of the following:
|
|
(c) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above:
|
|
(d) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above for those cases where the intended flight path does not require track changes of more than 15°, an operator need not consider those obstacles which have a lateral distance greater than:
|
|
(e) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above for those cases where the intended flight path does require track changes of more than 15°, an operator need not consider those obstacles which have a lateral distance greater than:
|
|
(f) |
An operator shall establish contingency procedures to satisfy the requirements of OPS 1.495 and to provide a safe route, avoiding obstacles, to enable the aeroplane to either comply with the en-route requirements of OPS 1.500, or land at either the aerodrome of departure or at a take-off alternate aerodrome. |
OPS 1.500
En-route — One Engine Inoperative
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the one engine inoperative en-route net flight path data shown in the Aeroplane Flight Manual, appropriate to the meteorological conditions expected for the flight, complies with either sub-paragraph (b) or (c) at all points along the route. The net flight path must have a positive gradient at 1 500 ft above the aerodrome where the landing is assumed to be made after engine failure. In meteorological conditions requiring the operation of ice protection systems, the effect of their use on the net flight path must be taken into account. |
|
(b) |
The gradient of the net flight path must be positive at least 1 000 ft above all terrain and obstructions along the route within 9,3 km (5 nm) on either side of the intended track. |
|
(c) |
The net flight path must permit the aeroplane to continue flight from the cruising altitude to an aerodrome where a landing can be made in accordance with OPS 1.515 or 1.520 as appropriate, the net flight path clearing vertically, by at least 2 000 ft, all terrain and obstructions along the route within 9,3 km (5 nm) on either side of the intended track in accordance with sub-paragraphs (1) to (4) below:
|
|
(d) |
When showing compliance with OPS 1.500, an operator must increase the width margins of subparagraphs (b) and (c) above to 18,5 km (10 nm) if the navigational accuracy does not meet the 95 % containment level. |
OPS 1.505
En-route — Aeroplanes With Three Or More Engines, Two Engines Inoperative
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that at no point along the intended track will an aeroplane having three or more engines be more than 90 minutes, at the all-engines long range cruising speed at standard temperature in still air, away from an aerodrome at which the performance requirements applicable at the expected landing mass are met unless it complies with sub-paragraphs (b) to (f) below. |
|
(b) |
The two engines inoperative en-route net flight path data must permit the aeroplane to continue the flight, in the expected meteorological conditions, from the point where two engines are assumed to fail simultaneously, to an aerodrome at which it is possible to land and come to a complete stop when using the prescribed procedure for a landing with two engines inoperative. The net flight path must clear vertically, by at least 2 000 ft all terrain and obstructions along the route within 9,3 km (5 nm) on either side of the intended track. At altitudes and in meteorological conditions requiring ice protection systems to be operable, the effect of their use on the net flight path data must be taken into account. If the navigational accuracy does not meet the 95 % containment level, an operator must increase the width margin given above to 18,5 km (10 nm). |
|
(c) |
The two engines are assumed to fail at the most critical point of that portion of the route where the aeroplane is more than 90 minutes, at the all engines long range cruising speed at standard temperature in still air, away from an aerodrome at which the performance requirements applicable at the expected landing mass are met. |
|
(d) |
The net flight path must have a positive gradient at 1 500 ft above the aerodrome where the landing is assumed to be made after the failure of two engines. |
|
(e) |
Fuel jettisoning is permitted to an extent consistent with reaching the aerodrome with the required fuel reserves, if a safe procedure is used. |
|
(f) |
The expected mass of the aeroplane at the point where the two engines are assumed to fail must not be less than that which would include sufficient fuel to proceed to an aerodrome where the landing is assumed to be made, and to arrive there at least 1 500 ft directly over the landing area and thereafter to fly level for 15 minutes. |
OPS 1.510
Landing — Destination And Alternate Aerodromes
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the landing mass of the aeroplane determined in accordance with OPS 1.475 (a) does not exceed the maximum landing mass specified for the altitude and the ambient temperature expected for the estimated time of landing at the destination and alternate aerodrome. |
|
(b) |
For instrument approaches with a missed approach gradient greater than 2,5 % an operator shall verify that the expected landing mass of the aeroplane allows a missed approach with a climb gradient equal to or greater than the applicable missed approach gradient in the one-engine inoperative missed approach configuration and speed (see applicable requirements on certification of large aeroplanes). The use of an alternative method must be approved by the Authority. |
|
(c) |
For instrument approaches with decision heights below 200 ft, an operator must verify that the expected landing mass of the aeroplane allows a missed approach gradient of climb, with the critical engine failed and with the speed and configuration used for go-around of at least 2,5 %, or the published gradient, whichever is the greater (see CS AWO 243). The use of an alternative method must be approved by the Authority. |
OPS 1.515
Landing — Dry Runways
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the landing mass of the aeroplane determined in accordance with OPS 1.475 (a) for the estimated time of landing at the destination aerodrome and at any alternate aerodrome allows a full stop landing from 50 ft above the threshold:
|
|
(b) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above, an operator must take account of the following:
|
|
(c) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above, it must be assumed that:
|
|
(d) |
If an operator is unable to comply with sub-paragraph (c)(1) above for a destination aerodrome having a single runway where a landing depends upon a specified wind component, an aeroplane may be despatched if 2 alternate aerodromes are designated which permit full compliance with sub-paragraphs (a), (b) and (c). Before commencing an approach to land at the destination aerodrome the commander must satisfy himself/herself that a landing can be made in full compliance with OPS 1.510 and sub-paragraphs (a) and (b) above. |
|
(e) |
If an operator is unable to comply with sub-paragraph (c)(2) above for the destination aerodrome, the aeroplane may be despatched if an alternate aerodrome is designated which permits full compliance with sub-paragraphs (a), (b) and (c). |
OPS 1.520
Landing — Wet and contaminated runways
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that when the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or a combination thereof, indicate that the runway at the estimated time of arrival may be wet, the landing distance available is at least 115 % of the required landing distance, determined in accordance with OPS 1.515. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that when the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or a combination thereof, indicate that the runway at the estimated time of arrival may be contaminated, the landing distance available must be at least the landing distance determined in accordance with sub-paragraph (a) above, or at least 115 % of the landing distance determined in accordance with approved contaminated landing distance data or equivalent, accepted by the Authority, whichever is greater. |
|
(c) |
A landing distance on a wet runway shorter than that required by sub-paragraph (a) above, but not less than that required by OPS 1.515 (a), may be used if the Aeroplane Flight Manual includes specific additional information about landing distances on wet runways. |
|
(d) |
A landing distance on a specially prepared contaminated runway shorter than that required by sub-paragraph (b) above, but not less than that required by OPS 1.515 (a), may be used if the Aeroplane Flight Manual includes specific additional information about landing distances on contaminated runways. |
|
(e) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraphs (b), (c) and (d) above, the criteria of OPS 1.515 shall be applied accordingly except that OPS 1.515 (a)(1) and (2) shall not be applied to sub-paragraph (b) above. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.495 (c)(3)
Approval of increased bank angles
|
(a) |
For the use of the increased bank angles requiring special approval, the following criteria shall be met:
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.515 (a)(3)
Steep Approach Procedures
|
(a) |
The Authority may approve the application of Steep Approach procedures using glide slope angles of 4,5° or more and with screen heights of less than 50 ft but not less than 35 ft, provided that the following criteria are met:
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.515 (a)(4)
Short Landing Operations
|
(a) |
For the purpose of OPS 1. 515 (a)(4), the distance used for the calculation of the permitted landing mass may consist of the usable length of the declared safe area plus the declared landing distance available. The Authority may approve such operations in accordance with the following criteria:
|
Appendix 2 to OPS 1.515 (a)(4)
Airfield Criteria for Short Landing Operations
|
(a) |
The use of the safe area must be approved by the airport authority. |
|
(b) |
The useable length of the declared safe area under the provisions of 1.515 (a)(4), and this Appendix, must not exceed 90 meters. |
|
(c) |
The width of the declared safe area shall not be less than twice the runway width or twice the wing span, whichever is the greater, centred on the extended runway centre line. |
|
(d) |
The declared safe area must be clear of obstructions or depressions which would endanger an aeroplane undershooting the runway and no mobile object shall be permitted on the declared safety area while the runway is being used for short landing operations. |
|
(e) |
The slope of the declared safety area must not exceed 5 % upward nor 2 % downward in the direction of landing. |
|
(f) |
For the purpose of this operation, the bearing strength requirement of OPS 1.480 (a)(5) need not apply to the declared safe area. |
SUBPART H
PERFORMANCE CLASS B
OPS 1.525
General
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate a single-engine aeroplane:
Note: Limitations on the operation of single-engine aeroplanes are covered by OPS 1.240 (a)(6). |
|
(b) |
An operator shall treat two-engine aeroplanes which do not meet the climb requirements of Appendix 1 to OPS 1.525 (b) as single-engine aeroplanes. |
OPS 1.530
Take-off
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the take-off mass does not exceed the maximum take-off mass specified in the Aeroplane Flight Manual for the pressure altitude and the ambient temperature at the aerodrome at which the take-off is to be made. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that the unfactored take-off distance, as specified in the Aeroplane Flight Manual does not exceed:
|
|
(c) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (b) above, an operator shall take account of the following:
|
OPS 1.535
Take-off Obstacle Clearance — Multi-Engined Aeroplanes
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the take-off flight path of aeroplanes with two or more engines, determined in accordance with this sub-paragraph, clears all obstacles by a vertical margin of at least 50 ft, or by a horizontal distance of at least 90 m plus 0,125 × D, where D is the horizontal distance travelled by the aeroplane from the end of the take-off distance available or the end of the take-off distance if a turn is scheduled before the end of the take-off distance available except as provided in sub-paragraphs (b) and (c) below. For aeroplanes with a wingspan of less than 60 m a horizontal obstacle clearance of half the aeroplane wingspan plus 60 m, plus 0,125 × D may be used. When showing compliance with this sub-paragraph it must be assumed that:
|
|
(b) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above for those cases where the intended flight path does not require track changes of more than 15°, an operator need not consider those obstacles which have a lateral distance greater than:
|
|
(c) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above for those cases where the intended flight path requires track changes of more than 15°, an operator need not consider those obstacles which have a lateral distance greater than:
|
|
(d) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above, an operator must take account of the following:
|
OPS 1.540
En-Route — Multi-engined aeroplanes
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the aeroplane, in the meteorological conditions expected for the flight, and in the event of the failure of one engine, with the remaining engines operating within the maximum continuous power conditions specified, is capable of continuing flight at or above the relevant minimum altitudes for safe flight stated in the Operations Manual to a point 1 000 ft above an aerodrome at which the performance requirements can be met. |
|
(b) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above:
|
OPS 1.542
En-Route — Single-engine aeroplanes
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the aeroplane, in the meteorological conditions expected for the flight, and in the event of engine failure, is capable of reaching a place at which a safe forced landing can be made. For landplanes, a place on land is required, unless otherwise approved by the Authority. |
|
(b) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above:
|
OPS 1.545
Landing — Destination and Alternate Aerodromes
An operator shall ensure that the landing mass of the aeroplane determined in accordance with OPS 1.475 (a) does not exceed the maximum landing mass specified for the altitude and the ambient temperature expected for the estimated time of landing at the destination and alternate aerodrome.
OPS 1.550
Landing — Dry runway
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the landing mass of the aeroplane determined in accordance with OPS 1.475 (a) for the estimated time of landing allows a full stop landing from 50 ft above the threshold within 70 % of the landing distance available at the destination aerodrome and at any alternate aerodrome.
|
|
(b) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above, an operator shall take account of the following:
|
|
(c) |
For despatching an aeroplane in accordance with sub-paragraph (a) above, it must be assumed that:
|
|
(d) |
If an operator is unable to comply with sub-paragraph (c)(2) above for the destination aerodrome, the aeroplane may be despatched if an alternate aerodrome is designated which permits full compliance with sub-paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) above. |
OPS 1.555
Landing — Wet and Contaminated Runways
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that when the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or a combination thereof, indicate that the runway at the estimated time of arrival may be wet, the landing distance available is equal to or exceeds the required landing distance, determined in accordance with OPS 1.550, multiplied by a factor of 1,15. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that when the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or a combination thereof, indicate that the runway at the estimated time of arrival may be contaminated, the landing distance, determined by using data acceptable to the Authority for these conditions, does not exceed the landing distance available. |
|
(c) |
A landing distance on a wet runway shorter than that required by sub-paragraph (a) above, but not less than that required by OPS 1.550 (a), may be used if the Aeroplane Flight Manual includes specific additional information about landing distances on wet runways. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.525 (b)
General — Take-off and Landing Climb
(The requirements of this Appendix are based on JAR-23.63 (c)(1) and JAR-23.63 (c)(2), effective 11 March 1994)
|
(a) |
Take-off Climb
|
|
(b) |
Landing Climb
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.535 (b)(1) & (c)(1)
Take-off Flight Path — Visual Course Guidance Navigation
In order to allow visual course guidance navigation, an operator must ensure that the weather conditions prevailing at the time of operation, including ceiling and visibility, are such that the obstacle and/or ground reference points can be seen and identified. The Operations Manual must specify, for the aerodrome(s) concerned, the minimum weather conditions which enable the flight crew to continuously determine and maintain the correct flight path with respect to ground reference points, so as to provide a safe clearance with respect to obstructions and terrain as follows:
|
(a) |
The procedure must be well defined with respect to ground reference points so that the track to be flown can be analysed for obstacle clearance requirements; |
|
(b) |
The procedure must be within the capabilities of the aeroplane with respect to forward speed, bank angle and wind effects; |
|
(c) |
A written and/or pictorial description of the procedure must be provided for crew use; and |
|
(d) |
The limiting environmental conditions must be specified (e.g. wind, cloud, visibility, day/night, ambient lighting, obstruction lighting). |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.550 (a)
Steep Approach Procedures
|
(a) |
The Authority may approve the application of Steep Approach procedures using glide slope angles of 4,5° or more, and with screen heights of less than 50 ft but not less than 35 ft, provided that the following criteria are met:
|
Appendix 2 to OPS 1.550 (a)
Short Landing Operations
|
(a) |
For the purpose of OPS 1.550 (a)(2), the distance used for the calculation of the permitted landing mass may consist of the usable length of the declared safe area plus the declared landing distance available. The Authority may approve such operations in accordance with the following criteria:
|
SUBPART I
PERFORMANCE CLASS C
OPS 1.560
General
An operator shall ensure that, for determining compliance with the requirements of this Subpart, the approved performance Data in the Aeroplane Flight Manual is supplemented, as necessary, with other Data acceptable to the Authority if the approved performance Data in the Aeroplane Flight Manual is insufficient.
OPS 1.565
Take-off
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the take-off mass does not exceed the maximum take-off mass specified in the Aeroplane Flight Manual for the pressure altitude and the ambient temperature at the aerodrome at which the take-off is to be made. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that, for aeroplanes which have take-off field length data contained in their Aeroplane Flight Manuals that do not include engine failure accountability, the distance from the start of the take-off roll required by the aeroplane to reach a height of 50 ft above the surface with all engines operating within the maximum take-off power conditions specified, when multiplied by a factor of either:
|
|
(c) |
An operator shall ensure that, for aeroplanes which have take-off field length data contained in their Aeroplane Flight Manuals which accounts for engine failure, the following requirements are met in accordance with the specifications in the Aeroplane Flight Manual:
|
|
(d) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraphs (b) and (c) above, an operator must take account of the following:
|
OPS 1.570
Take-off Obstacle Clearance
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the take-off flight path with one engine inoperative clears all obstacles by a vertical distance of at least 50 ft plus 0,01 × D, or by a horizontal distance of at least 90 m plus 0,125 × D, where D is the horizontal distance the aeroplane has travelled from the end of the take-off distance available. For aeroplanes with a wingspan of less than 60 m a horizontal obstacle clearance of half the aeroplane wingspan plus 60 m, plus 0,125 × D may be used. |
|
(b) |
The take-off flight path must begin at a height of 50 ft above the surface at the end of the take-off distance required by OPS 1.565 (b) or (c) as applicable, and end at a height of 1 500 ft above the surface. |
|
(c) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a), an operator must take account of the following:
|
|
(d) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above, track changes shall not be allowed up to that point of the take-off flight path where a height of 50 ft above the surface has been achieved. Thereafter, up to a height of 400 ft it is assumed that the aeroplane is banked by no more than 15°. Above 400 ft height bank angles greater than 15°, but not more than 25° may be scheduled. Adequate allowance must be made for the effect of bank angle on operating speeds and flight path including the distance increments resulting from increased operating speeds. |
|
(e) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above for those cases which do not require track changes of more than 15°, an operator need not consider those obstacles which have a lateral distance greater than:
|
|
(f) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above for those cases which do require track changes of more than 15°, an operator need not consider those obstacles which have a lateral distance greater than:
|
|
(g) |
An operator shall establish contingency procedures to satisfy the requirements of OPS 1.570 and to provide a safe route, avoiding obstacles, to enable the aeroplane to either comply with the en-route requirements of OPS 1.580, or land at either the aerodrome of departure or at a take-off alternate aerodrome. |
OPS 1.575
En-Route — All Engines Operating
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the aeroplane will, in the meteorological conditions expected for the flight, at any point on its route or on any planned diversion therefrom, be capable of a rate of climb of at least 300 ft per minute with all engines operating within the maximum continuous power conditions specified at:
|
OPS 1.580
En-Route — One Engine Inoperative
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the aeroplane will, in the meteorological conditions expected for the flight, in the event of any one engine becoming inoperative at any point on its route or on any planned diversion therefrom and with the other engine or engines operating within the maximum continuous power conditions specified, be capable of continuing the flight from the cruising altitude to an aerodrome where a landing can be made in accordance with OPS 1.595 or OPS 1.600 as appropriate, clearing obstacles within 9,3 km (5 nm) either side of the intended track by a vertical interval of at least:
|
|
(b) |
The flight path shall have a positive slope at an altitude of 450 m (1 500 ft) above the aerodrome where the landing is assumed to be made after the failure of one engine. |
|
(c) |
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph the available rate of climb of the aeroplane shall be taken to be 150 ft per minute less than the gross rate of climb specified. |
|
(d) |
When showing compliance with this paragraph, an operator must increase the width margins of sub-paragraph (a) above to 18,5 km (10 nm) if the navigational accuracy does not meet the 95 % containment level. |
|
(e) |
Fuel jettisoning is permitted to an extent consistent with reaching the aerodrome with the required fuel reserves, if a safe procedure is used. |
OPS 1.585
En-Route — Aeroplanes With Three Or More Engines, Two Engines Inoperative
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that, at no point along the intended track, will an aeroplane having three or more engines be more than 90 minutes at the all-engine long range cruising speed at standard temperature in still air, away from an aerodrome at which the performance requirements applicable at the expected landing mass are met unless it complies with sub-paragraphs (b) to (e) below. |
|
(b) |
The two-engines inoperative flight path shown must permit the aeroplane to continue the flight, in the expected meteorological conditions, clearing all obstacles within 9,3 km (5 nm) either side of the intended track by a vertical interval of at least 2 000 ft, to an aerodrome at which the performance requirements applicable at the expected landing mass are met. |
|
(c) |
The two engines are assumed to fail at the most critical point of that portion of the route where the aeroplane is more than 90 minutes, at the all engines long range cruising speed at standard temperature in still air, away from an aerodrome at which the performance requirements applicable at the expected landing mass are met. |
|
(d) |
The expected mass of the aeroplane at the point where the two engines are assumed to fail must not be less than that which would include sufficient fuel to proceed to an aerodrome where the landing is assumed to be made, and to arrive there at an altitude of a least 450 m (1 500 ft) directly over the landing area and thereafter to fly level for 15 minutes. |
|
(e) |
For the purpose of this sub-paragraph the available rate of climb of the aeroplane shall be taken to be 150 ft per minute less than that specified. |
|
(f) |
When showing compliance with this paragraph, an operator must increase the width margins of sub-paragraph (a) above to 18,5 km (10 nm) if the navigational accuracy does not meet the 95 % containment level. |
|
(g) |
Fuel jettisoning is permitted to an extent consistent with reaching the aerodrome with the required fuel reserves, if a safe procedure is used. |
OPS 1.590
Landing — Destination and Alternate Aerodromes
An operator shall ensure that the landing mass of the aeroplane determined in accordance with OPS 1.475 (a) does not exceed the maximum landing mass specified in the Aeroplane Flight Manual for the altitude and, if accounted for in the Aeroplane Flight Manual, the ambient temperature expected for the estimated time of landing at the destination and alternate aerodrome.
OPS 1.595
Landing — Dry Runways
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the landing mass of the aeroplane determined in accordance with OPS 1.475 (a) for the estimated time of landing allows a full stop landing from 50 ft above the threshold within 70 % of the landing distance available at the destination and any alternate aerodrome. |
|
(b) |
When showing compliance with sub-paragraph (a) above, an operator must take account of the following:
|
|
(c) |
For despatching an aeroplane in accordance with sub-paragraph (a) above it must be assumed that:
|
|
(d) |
If an operator is unable to comply with sub-paragraph (c)(2) above for the destination aerodrome, the aeroplane may be despatched if an alternate aerodrome is designated which permits full compliance with sub-paragraphs (a), (b) and (c). |
OPS 1.600
Landing — Wet and Contaminated Runways
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that when the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or a combination thereof, indicate that the runway at the estimated time of arrival may be wet, the landing distance available is equal to or exceeds the required landing distance, determined in accordance with OPS 1.595, multiplied by a factor of 1,15. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that when the appropriate weather reports or forecasts, or a combination thereof, indicate that the runway at the estimated time of arrival may be contaminated, the landing distance determined by using data acceptable to the Authority for these conditions, does not exceed the landing distance available. |
SUBPART J
MASS AND BALANCE
OPS 1.605
General
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.605)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that during any phase of operation, the loading, mass and centre of gravity of the aeroplane complies with the limitations specified in the approved Aeroplane Flight Manual, or the Operations Manual if more restrictive. |
|
(b) |
An operator must establish the mass and the centre of gravity of any aeroplane by actual weighing prior to initial entry into service and thereafter at intervals of 4 years if individual aeroplane masses are used and 9 years if fleet masses are used. The accumulated effects of modifications and repairs on the mass and balance must be accounted for and properly documented. Furthermore, aeroplanes must be reweighed if the effect of modifications on the mass and balance is not accurately known. |
|
(c) |
An operator must determine the mass of all operating items and crew members included in the aeroplane dry operating mass by weighing or by using standard masses. The influence of their position on the aeroplane centre of gravity must be determined. |
|
(d) |
An operator must establish the mass of the traffic load, including any ballast, by actual weighing or determine the mass of the traffic load in accordance with standard passenger and baggage masses as specified in OPS 1.620. |
|
(e) |
An operator must determine the mass of the fuel load by using the actual density or, if not known, the density calculated in accordance with a method specified in the Operations Manual. |
OPS 1.607
Terminology
|
(a) |
Dry Operating Mass. The total mass of the aeroplane ready for a specific type of operation excluding all usable fuel and traffic load. This mass includes items such as:
|
|
(b) |
Maximum Zero Fuel Mass. The maximum permissible mass of an aeroplane with no usable fuel. The mass of the fuel contained in particular tanks must be included in the zero fuel mass when it is explicitly mentioned in the Aeroplane Flight Manual limitations. |
|
(c) |
Maximum Structural Landing Mass. The maximum permissible total aeroplane mass upon landing under normal circumstances. |
|
(d) |
Maximum Structural Take Off Mass. The maximum permissible total aeroplane mass at the start of the take-off run. |
|
(e) |
Passenger classification.
|
|
(f) |
Traffic Load. The total mass of passengers, baggage and cargo, including any non-revenue load. |
OPS 1.610
Loading, mass and balance
An operator shall specify, in the Operations Manual, the principles and methods involved in the loading and in the mass and balance system that meet the requirements of OPS 1.605. This system must cover all types of intended operations.
OPS 1.615
Mass values for crew
|
(a) |
An operator shall use the following mass values to determine the dry operating mass:
|
|
(b) |
An operator must correct the dry operating mass to account for any additional baggage. The position of this additional baggage must be accounted for when establishing the centre of gravity of the aeroplane. |
OPS 1.620
Mass values for passengers and baggage
|
(a) |
An operator shall compute the mass of passengers and checked baggage using either the actual weighed mass of each person and the actual weighed mass of baggage or the standard mass values specified in Tables 1 to 3 below except where the number of passenger seats available is less than 10. In such cases passenger mass may be established by use of a verbal statement by, or on behalf of, each passenger and adding to it a predetermined constant to account for hand baggage and clothing (The procedure specifying when to select actual or standard masses and the procedure to be followed when using verbal statements must be included in the Operations Manual. |
|
(b) |
If determining the actual mass by weighing, an operator must ensure that passengers' personal belongings and hand baggage are included. Such weighing must be conducted immediately prior to boarding and at an adjacent location. |
|
(c) |
If determining the mass of passengers using standard mass values, the standard mass values in Tables 1 and 2 below must be used. The standard masses include hand baggage and the mass of any infant below 2 years of age carried by an adult on one passenger seat. Infants occupying separate passenger seats must be considered as children for the purpose of this sub-paragraph. |
|
(d) |
Mass values for passengers — 20 seats or more
|
||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(e) |
Mass values for passengers — 19 seats or less.
|
|
(f) |
Mass values for baggage
|
|
(g) |
If an operator wishes to use standard mass values other than those contained in Tables 1 to 3 above, he must advise the Authority of his reasons and gain its approval in advance. He must also submit for approval a detailed weighing survey plan and apply the statistical analysis method given in Appendix 1 to OPS 1.620 (g). After verification and approval by the Authority of the results of the weighing survey, the revised standard mass values are only applicable to that operator. The revised standard mass values can only be used in circumstances consistent with those under which the survey was conducted. Where revised standard masses exceed those in Tables 1-3, then such higher values must be used. |
|
(h) |
On any flight identified as carrying a significant number of passengers whose masses, including hand baggage, are expected to exceed the standard passenger mass, an operator must determine the actual mass of such passengers by weighing or by adding an adequate mass increment. |
|
(i) |
If standard mass values for checked baggage are used and a significant number of passengers check in baggage that is expected to exceed the standard baggage mass, an operator must determine the actual mass of such baggage by weighing or by adding an adequate mass increment. |
|
(j) |
An operator shall ensure that a commander is advised when a non-standard method has been used for determining the mass of the load and that this method is stated in the mass and balance documentation. |
OPS 1.625
Mass and balance documentation
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.625)
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish mass and balance documentation prior to each flight specifying the load and its distribution. The mass and balance documentation must enable the commander to determine that the load and its distribution is such that the mass and balance limits of the aeroplane are not exceeded. The person preparing the mass and balance documentation must be named on the document. The person supervising the loading of the aeroplane must confirm by signature that the load and its distribution are in accordance with the mass and balance documentation. This document must be acceptable to the commander, his/her acceptance being indicated by countersignature or equivalent. (See also OPS 1.1055 (a)(12)). |
|
(b) |
An operator must specify procedures for Last Minute Changes to the load. |
|
(c) |
Subject to the approval of the Authority, an operator may use an alternative to the procedures required by paragraphs (a) and (b) above. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.605
Mass and Balance — General
(See OPS 1.605)
|
(a) |
Determination of the dry operating mass of an aeroplane
|
|
(b) |
Special standard masses for the traffic load. In addition to standard masses for passengers and checked baggage, an operator can submit for approval to the Authority standard masses for other load items. |
|
(c) |
Aeroplane loading
|
|
(d) |
Centre of gravity limits
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.620 (f)
Definition of the area for flights within the European region
For the purposes of OPS 1.620 (f), flights within the European region, other than domestic flights, are flights conducted within the area bounded by rhumb lines between the following points:
|
— |
N7200 |
E04500 |
|
— |
N4000 |
E04500 |
|
— |
N3500 |
E03700 |
|
— |
N3000 |
E03700 |
|
— |
N3000 |
W00600 |
|
— |
N2700 |
W00900 |
|
— |
N2700 |
W03000 |
|
— |
N6700 |
W03000 |
|
— |
N7200 |
W01000 |
|
— |
N7200 |
E04500 |
as depicted in Figure 1 below:
Figure 1
European region
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.620 (g)
Procedure for establishing revised standard mass values for passengers and baggage
|
(a) |
Passengers
|
|
(b) |
Checked baggage. The statistical procedure for determining revised standard baggage mass values based on average baggage masses of the minimum required sample size is basically the same as for passengers and as specified in sub-paragraph (a)(1). For baggage, the relative confidence range (accuracy) amounts to 1 %. A minimum of 2 000 pieces of checked baggage must be weighed. |
|
(c) |
Determination of revised standard mass values for passengers and checked baggage
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.625
Mass and Balance Documentation
|
(a) |
Mass and balance documentation
|
|
(b) |
Computerised systems. Where mass and balance documentation is generated by a computerised mass and balance system, the operator must verify the integrity of the output data. He must establish a system to check that amendments of his input data are incorporated properly in the system and that the system is operating correctly on a continuous basis by verifying the output data at intervals not exceeding 6 months. |
|
(c) |
Onboard mass and balance systems. An operator must obtain the approval of the Authority if he wishes to use an onboard mass and balance computer system as a primary source for despatch. |
|
(d) |
Datalink. When mass and balance documentation is sent to aeroplanes via datalink, a copy of the final mass and balance documentation as accepted by the commander must be available on the ground. |
SUBPART K
INSTRUMENTS AND EQUIPMENT
OPS 1.630
General introduction
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that a flight does not commence unless the instruments and equipment required under this Subpart are:
|
|
(b) |
Instruments and equipment minimum performance standards are those prescribed in the applicable European Technical Standard Orders (ETSO) as listed in applicable Specifications on European Technical Standard Orders (CS-TSO), unless different performance standards are prescribed in the operational or airworthiness codes. Instruments and equipment complying with design and performance specifications other than ETSO on the date of OPS implementation may remain in service, or be installed, unless additional requirements are prescribed in this Subpart. Instruments and equipment that have already been approved do not need to comply with a revised ETSO or a revised specification, other than ETSO, unless a retroactive requirement is prescribed. |
|
(c) |
The following items shall not be required to have an equipment approval:
|
|
(d) |
If equipment is to be used by one flight crew member at his/her station during flight, it must be readily operable from his/her station. When a single item of equipment is required to be operated by more than one flight crew member it must be installed so that the equipment is readily operable from any station at which the equipment is required to be operated. |
|
(e) |
Those instruments that are used by any one flight crew member shall be so arranged as to permit the flight crew member to see the indications readily from his/her station, with the minimum practicable deviation from the position and line of vision which he/she normally assumes when looking forward along the flight path. Whenever a single instrument is required in an aeroplane operated by more than 1 flight crew member it must be installed so that the instrument is visible from each applicable flight crew station. |
OPS 1.635
Circuit protection devices
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in which fuses are used unless there are spare fuses available for use in flight equal to at least 10 % of the number of fuses of each rating or three of each rating whichever is the greater.
OPS 1.640
Aeroplane operating lights
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless it is equipped with:
|
(a) |
For flight by day:
|
|
(b) |
For flight by night, in addition to equipment specified in paragraph (a) above:
|
OPS 1.645
Windshield wipers
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum certificated take-off mass of more than 5 700 kg unless it is equipped at each pilot station with a windshield wiper or equivalent means to maintain a clear portion of the windshield during precipitation.
OPS 1.650
Day VFR operations — Flight and navigational instruments and associated equipment
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane by day in accordance with Visual Flight Rules (VFR) unless it is equipped with the flight and navigational instruments and associated equipment and, where applicable, under the conditions stated in the following sub-paragraphs:
|
(a) |
A magnetic compass; |
|
(b) |
An accurate timepiece showing the time in hours, minutes, and seconds; |
|
(c) |
A sensitive pressure altimeter calibrated in feet with a sub-scale setting, calibrated in hectopascals/millibars, adjustable for any barometric pressure likely to be set during flight; |
|
(d) |
An airspeed indicator calibrated in knots; |
|
(e) |
A vertical speed indicator; |
|
(f) |
A turn and slip indicator, or a turn coordinator incorporating a slip indicator; |
|
(g) |
An attitude indicator; |
|
(h) |
A stabilised direction indicator; and |
|
(i) |
A means of indicating in the flight crew compartment the outside air temperature calibrated in degrees Celsius. |
|
(j) |
For flights which do not exceed 60 minutes duration, which take off and land at the same aerodrome, and which remain within 50 nm of that aerodrome, the instruments prescribed in sub-paragraphs (f), (g) and (h) above, and sub-paragraphs (k)(4), (k)(5) and (k)(6) below, may all be replaced by either a turn and slip indicator, or a turn co-ordinator incorporating a slip indicator, or both an attitude indicator and a slip indicator. |
|
(k) |
Whenever two pilots are required the second pilot's station shall have separate instruments as follows:
|
|
(l) |
Each airspeed indicating system must be equipped with a heated pitot tube or equivalent means for preventing malfunction due to either condensation or icing for:
|
|
(m) |
Whenever duplicate instruments are required, the requirement embraces separate displays for each pilot and separate selectors or other associated equipment where appropriate. |
|
(n) |
All aeroplanes must be equipped with means for indicating when power is not adequately supplied to the required flight instruments; and |
|
(o) |
All aeroplanes with compressibility limitations not otherwise indicated by the required airspeed indicators shall be equipped with a Mach number indicator at each pilot's station. |
|
(p) |
An operator shall not conduct Day VFR operations unless the aeroplane is equipped with a headset with boom microphone or equivalent for each flight crew member on flight deck duty. |
OPS 1.652
IFR or night operations — Flight and navigational instruments and associated equipment
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in accordance with Instrument Flight Rules (IFR) or by night in accordance with Visual Flight Rules (VFR) unless it is equipped with the flight and navigational instruments and associated equipment and, where applicable, under the conditions stated in the following sub-paragraphs:
|
(a) |
A magnetic compass; |
|
(b) |
An accurate time-piece showing the time in hours, minutes and seconds; |
|
(c) |
Two sensitive pressure altimeters calibrated in feet with sub-scale settings, calibrated in hectopascals/millibars, adjustable for any barometric pressure likely to be set during flight; These altimeters must have counter drum-pointer or equivalent presentation. |
|
(d) |
An airspeed indicating system with heated pitot tube or equivalent means for preventing malfunctioning due to either condensation or icing including a warning indication of pitot heater failure. The pitot heater failure warning indication requirement does not apply to those aeroplanes with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of 9 or less or a maximum certificated take-off mass of 5 700 kg or less and issued with an individual Certificate of Airworthiness prior to 1 April 1998; |
|
(e) |
A vertical speed indicator; |
|
(f) |
A turn and slip indicator; |
|
(g) |
An attitude indicator; |
|
(h) |
A stabilised direction indicator; |
|
(i) |
A means of indicating in the flight crew compartment the outside air temperature calibrated in degrees Celsius; and |
|
(j) |
Two independent static pressure systems, except that for propeller driven aeroplanes with maximum certificated take-off mass of 5 700 kg or less, one static pressure system and one alternate source of static pressure is allowed. |
|
(k) |
Whenever two pilots are required the second pilot's station shall have separate instruments as follows:
|
|
(l) |
Those aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass in excess of 5 700 kg or having a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9 seats must be equipped with an additional, standby attitude indicator (artificial horizon), capable of being used from either pilot's station, that:
except for aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of 5 700 kg or less, already registered in a Member State on 1 April 1995, equipped with a standby attitude indicator in the left-hand instrument panel. |
|
(m) |
In complying with sub-paragraph (l) above, it must be clearly evident to the flight crew when the standby attitude indicator, required by that sub-paragraph, is being operated by emergency power. Where the standby attitude indicator has its own dedicated power supply there shall be an associated indication, either on the instrument or on the instrument panel, when this supply is in use. |
|
(n) |
A chart holder in an easily readable position which can be illuminated for night operations. |
|
(o) |
If the standby attitude instrument system is certificated according to CS 25.1303(b)(4) or equivalent, the turn and slip indicators may be replaced by slip indicators. |
|
(p) |
Whenever duplicate instruments are required, the requirement embraces separate displays for each pilot and separate selectors or other associated equipment where appropriate; |
|
(q) |
All aeroplanes must be equipped with means for indicating when power is not adequately supplied to the required flight instruments; and |
|
(r) |
All aeroplanes with compressibility limitations not otherwise indicated by the required airspeed indicators shall be equipped with a Mach number indicator at each pilot's station. |
|
(s) |
An operator shall not conduct IFR or night operations unless the aeroplane is equipped with a headset with boom microphone or equivalent for each flight crew member on flight deck duty and a transmit button on the control wheel for each required pilot. |
OPS 1.655
Additional equipment for single pilot operation under IFR or at night
An operator shall not conduct single pilot IFR operations unless the aeroplane is equipped with an autopilot with at least altitude hold and heading mode.
OPS 1.660
Altitude alerting system
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate a turbine propeller powered aeroplane with a maximum certificated take-off mass in excess of 5 700 kg or having a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9 seats or a turbojet powered aeroplane unless it is equipped with an altitude alerting system capable of:
|
OPS 1.665
Ground proximity warning system and terrain awareness warning system
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate a turbine powered aeroplane having a maximum certificated take-off mass in excess of 5 700 kg or a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9 unless it is equipped with a ground proximity warning system that includes a predictive terrain hazard warning function (Terrain Awareness and Warning System — TAWS). |
|
(b) |
The ground proximity warning system must automatically provide, by means of aural signals, which may be supplemented by visual signals, timely and distinctive warning to the flight crew of sink rate, ground proximity, altitude loss after take-off or go-around, incorrect landing configuration and downward glide slope deviation. |
|
(c) |
The terrain awareness and warning system must automatically provide the flight crew, by means of visual and aural signals and a Terrain Awareness Display, with sufficient alerting time to prevent controlled flight into terrain events, and provided a forward looking capability and terrain clearance floor. |
OPS 1.668
Airborne Collision Avoidance System
An operator shall not operate a turbine powered aeroplane having a maximum certificated take-off mass in excess of 5 700 kg or a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 19 unless it is equipped with an airborne collision avoidance system with a minimum performance level of at least ACAS II.
OPS 1.670
Airborne weather radar equipment
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate:
|
|
(b) |
For propeller driven pressurised aeroplanes having a maximum certificated take-off mass not exceeding 5 700 kg with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration not exceeding 9 seats the airborne weather radar equipment may be replaced by other equipment capable of detecting thunderstorms and other potentially hazardous weather conditions, regarded as detectable with airborne weather radar equipment, subject to approval by the Authority. |
OPS 1.675
Equipment for operations in icing conditions
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in expected or actual icing conditions unless it is certificated and equipped to operate in icing conditions. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in expected or actual icing conditions at night unless it is equipped with a means to illuminate or detect the formation of ice. Any illumination that is used must be of a type that will not cause glare or reflection that would handicap crew members in the performance of their duties. |
OPS 1.680
Cosmic radiation detection equipment
An operator shall ensure that aeroplanes intended to be operated above 15 000 m (49 000 ft) are equipped with an instrument to measure and indicate continuously the dose rate of total cosmic radiation being received (i.e. the total of ionizing and neutron radiation of galactic and solar origin) and the cumulative dose on each flight.
OPS 1.685
Flight crew interphone system
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane on which a flight crew of more than one is required unless it is equipped with a flight crew interphone system, including headsets and microphones, not of a handheld type, for use by all members of the flight crew.
OPS 1.690
Crew member interphone system
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum certificated take-off mass exceeding 15 000 kg or having a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 19 unless it is equipped with a crew member interphone system except for aeroplanes first issued with an individual certificate of airworthiness before 1 April 1965 and already registered in a Member State on 1 April 1995. |
|
(b) |
The crew member interphone system required by this paragraph must:
|
OPS 1.695
Public address system
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 19 unless a public address system is installed. |
|
(b) |
The public address system required by this paragraph must:
|
OPS 1.700
Cockpit voice recorders-1
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane first issued with an individual Certificate of Airworthiness, on or after 1 April 1998, which:
|
|
(b) |
The cockpit voice recorder shall be capable of retaining information recorded during at least the last 2 hours of its operation except that, for those aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of 5 700 kg or less, this period may be reduced to 30 minutes. |
|
(c) |
The cockpit voice recorder must start automatically to record prior to the aeroplane moving under its own power and continue to record until the termination of the flight when the aeroplane is no longer capable of moving under its own power. In addition, depending on the availability of electrical power, the cockpit voice recorder must start to record as early as possible during the cockpit checks prior to engine start at the beginning of the flight until the cockpit checks immediately following engine shutdown at the end of the flight. |
|
(d) |
The cockpit voice recorder must have a device to assist in locating that recorder in water. |
OPS 1.705
Cockpit voice recorders-2
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate any multi-engined turbine aeroplane first issued with an individual Certificate of Airworthiness, on or after 1 January 1990 up to and including 31 March 1998 which has a maximum certificated take-off mass of 5 700 kg or less and a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9, unless it is equipped with a cockpit voice recorder which records:
|
|
(b) |
The cockpit voice recorder shall be capable of retaining information recorded during at least the last 30 minutes of its operation. |
|
(c) |
The cockpit voice recorder must start to record prior to the aeroplane moving under its own power and continue to record until the termination of the flight when the aeroplane is no longer capable of moving under its own power. In addition, depending on the availability of electrical power, the cockpit voice recorder must start to record as early as possible during the cockpit checks, prior to the flight until the cockpit checks immediately following engine shutdown at the end of the flight. |
|
(d) |
The cockpit voice recorder must have a device to assist in locating that recorder in water. |
OPS 1.710
Cockpit voice recorders-3
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate any aeroplane with a maximum certificated take-off mass over 5 700 kg first issued with an individual certificate of airworthiness, before 1 April 1998 unless it is equipped with a cockpit voice recorder which records:
|
|
(b) |
The cockpit voice recorder shall be capable of retaining information recorded during at least the last 30 minutes of its operation. |
|
(c) |
The cockpit voice recorder must start to record prior to the aeroplane moving under its own power and continue to record until the termination of the flight when the aeroplane is no longer capable of moving under its own power. |
|
(d) |
The cockpit voice recorder must have a device to assist in locating that recorder in water. |
OPS 1.715
Flight data recorders-1
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.715)
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate any aeroplane first issued with an individual Certificate of Airworthiness on or after 1 April 1998 which:
unless it is equipped with a flight data recorder that uses a digital method of recording and storing data and a method of readily retrieving that data from the storage medium is available. |
|
(b) |
The flight data recorder shall be capable of retaining the data recorded during at least the last 25 hours of its operation except that, for those aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of 5 700 kg or less, this period may be reduced to 10 hours. |
|
(c) |
The flight data recorder must, with reference to a timescale, record:
|
|
(d) |
Data must be obtained from aeroplane sources which enable accurate correlation with information displayed to the flight crew. |
|
(e) |
The flight data recorder must start automatically to record the data prior to the aeroplane being capable of moving under its own power and must stop automatically after the aeroplane is incapable of moving under its own power. |
|
(f) |
The flight data recorder must have a device to assist in locating that recorder in water. |
|
(g) |
Aeroplanes first issued with an individual Certificate of Airworthiness on or after 1 April 1998, but not later than 1 April 2001 may not be required to comply with OPS 1.715(c) if approved by the Authority, provided that:
|
OPS 1.720
Flight data recorders-2
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.720)
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate any aeroplane first issued with an individual certificate of airworthiness on or after 1 June 1990 up to and including 31 March 1998 which has a maximum certificated take-off mass over 5 700 kg unless it is equipped with a flight data recorder that uses a digital method of recording and storing data and a method of readily retrieving that data from the storage medium is available. |
|
(b) |
The flight data recorder shall be capable of retaining the data recorded during at least the last 25 hours of its operation. |
|
(c) |
The flight data recorder must, with reference to a timescale, record:
|
|
(d) |
For those aeroplanes having a maximum certificated take-off mass of 27 000 kg or below, if acceptable to the Authority, parameters 14 and 15b of Table A of Appendix 1 to OPS 1.720 need not be recorded, when any of the following conditions are met:
|
|
(e) |
For those aeroplanes having a maximum certificated take-off mass over 27 000 kg, if acceptable to the Authority, the following parameters need not be recorded: 15b of Table A of Appendix 1 to OPS 1.720, and 23, 24, 25, 26, 27, 28, 29, 30 and 31 of Table B of Appendix 1, if any of the following conditions are met:
|
|
(f) |
Individual parameters that can be derived by calculation from the other recorded parameters, need not to be recorded if acceptable to the Authority. |
|
(g) |
Data must be obtained from aeroplane sources which enable accurate correlation with information displayed to the flight crew; |
|
(h) |
The flight data recorder must start to record the data prior to the aeroplane being capable of moving under its own power and must stop after the aeroplane is incapable of moving under its own power. |
|
(i) |
The flight data recorder must have a device to assist in locating that recorder in water. |
OPS 1.725
Flight data recorders-3
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.725)
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate any turbine-engined first issued with an individual Certificate of Airworthiness, before 1 June 1990 which has a maximum certificated take-off mass over 5 700 kg unless it is equipped with a flight data recorder that uses a digital method of recording and storing data and a method of readily retrieving that data from the storage medium is available. |
|
(b) |
The flight data recorder shall be capable of retaining the data recorded during at least the last 25 hours of its operation. |
|
(c) |
The flight data recorder must, with reference to a timescale, record:
|
|
(d) |
Individual parameters that can be derived by calculation from the other recorded parameters, need not to be recorded if acceptable to the Authority. |
|
(e) |
Data must be obtained from aircraft sources which enable accurate correlation with information displayed to the flight crew. |
|
(f) |
The flight data recorder must start to record the data prior to the aeroplane being capable of moving under its own power and must stop after the aeroplane is incapable of moving under its own power. |
|
(g) |
The flight data recorder must have a device to assist in locating that recorder in water. |
OPS 1.727
Combination Recorder
|
(a) |
Compliance with Cockpit Voice recorder and flight data recorder requirements may be achieved by:
|
|
(b) |
A combination recorder is a flight recorder that records:
|
OPS 1.730
Seats, seat safety belts, harnesses and child restraint devices
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless it is equipped with:
|
|
(b) |
All safety belts with shoulder harness must have a single point release. |
|
(c) |
A safety belt with a diagonal shoulder strap for aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass not exceeding 5 700 kg or a safety belt for aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass not exceeding 2 730 kg may be permitted in place of a safety belt with shoulder harness if it is not reasonably practicable to fit the latter. |
OPS 1.731
Fasten Seat belt and No Smoking signs
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in which all passenger seats are not visible from the flight deck, unless it is equipped with a means of indicating to all passengers and cabin crew when seat belts shall be fastened and when smoking is not allowed.
OPS 1.735
Internal doors and curtains
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless the following equipment is installed:
|
(a) |
In an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 19 passengers, a door between the passenger compartment and the flight deck compartment with a placard “crew only” and a locking means to prevent passengers from opening it without the permission of a member of the flight crew; |
|
(b) |
A means for opening each door that separates a passenger compartment from another compartment that has emergency exit provisions. The means for opening must be readily accessible; |
|
(c) |
If it is necessary to pass through a doorway or curtain separating the passenger cabin from other areas to reach any required emergency exit from any passenger seat, the door or curtain must have a means to secure it in the open position; |
|
(d) |
A placard on each internal door or adjacent to a curtain that is the means of access to a passenger emergency exit, to indicate that it must be secured open during take off and landing; and |
|
(e) |
A means for any member of the crew to unlock any door that is normally accessible to passengers and that can be locked by passengers. |
OPS 1.745
First-Aid Kits
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless it is equipped with first-aid kits, readily accessible for use, to the following scale:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that first-aid kits are:
|
OPS 1.755
Emergency Medical Kit
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 30 seats unless it is equipped with an emergency medical kit if any point on the planned route is more than 60 minutes flying time (at normal cruising speed) from an aerodrome at which qualified medical assistance could be expected to be available. |
|
(b) |
The commander shall ensure that drugs are not administered except by qualified doctors, nurses or similarly qualified personnel. |
|
(c) |
Conditions for carriage
|
OPS 1.760
First-aid oxygen
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate a pressurised aeroplane at altitudes above 25 000 ft, when a cabin crew member is required to be carried, unless it is equipped with a supply of undiluted oxygen for passengers who, for physiological reasons, might require oxygen following a cabin depressurisation. The amount of oxygen shall be calculated using an average flow rate of at least 3 litres Standard Temperature Pressure Dry (STPD)/minute/person and provided for the entire flight after cabin depressurisation at cabin pressure altitudes of more than 8 000 ft for at least 2 % of the passengers carried, but in no case for less than one person. There shall be a sufficient number of dispensing units, but in no case less than two, with a means for cabin crew to use the supply. |
|
(b) |
The amount of first-aid oxygen required for a particular operation shall be determined on the basis of cabin pressure altitudes and flight duration, consistent with the operating procedures established for each operation and route. |
|
(c) |
The oxygen equipment provided shall be capable of generating a mass flow to each user of at least four litres per minute, STPD. Means may be provided to decrease the flow to not less than two litres per minute, STPD, at any altitude. |
OPS 1.770
Supplemental oxygen — pressurised aeroplanes
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.770)
|
(a) |
General
|
|
(b) |
Oxygen equipment and supply requirements
|
OPS 1.775
Supplemental oxygen — Non-pressurised aeroplanes
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.775)
|
(a) |
General
|
|
(b) |
Oxygen supply requirements
|
OPS 1.780
Crew Protective Breathing Equipment
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate a pressurised aeroplane or an unpressurised aeroplane with a maximum certificated take-off mass exceeding 5 700 kg or having a maximum approved seating configuration of more than 19 seats unless:
|
|
(b) |
PBE intended for flight crew use must be conveniently located on the flight deck and be easily accessible for immediate use by each required flight crew member at their assigned duty station. |
|
(c) |
PBE intended for cabin crew use must be installed adjacent to each required cabin crew member duty station. |
|
(d) |
An additional, easily accessible portable PBE must be provided and located at or adjacent to the hand fire extinguishers required by OPS 1.790 (c) and (d) except that, where the fire extinguisher is located inside a cargo compartment, the PBE must be stowed outside but adjacent to the entrance to that compartment. |
|
(e) |
PBE while in use must not prevent communication where required by OPS 1.685, OPS 1.690, OPS 1.810 and OPS 1.850. |
OPS 1.790
Hand fire extinguishers
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless hand fire extinguishers are provided for use in crew, passenger and, as applicable, cargo compartments and galleys in accordance with the following:
|
(a) |
The type and quantity of extinguishing agent must be suitable for the kinds of fires likely to occur in the compartment where the extinguisher is intended to be used and, for personnel compartments, must minimise the hazard of toxic gas concentration; |
|
(b) |
At least one hand fire extinguisher, containing Halon 1211 (bromochlorodifluoro-methane, CBrCIF2), or equivalent as the extinguishing agent, must be conveniently located on the flight deck for use by the flight crew; |
|
(c) |
At least one hand fire extinguisher must be located in, or readily accessible for use in, each galley not located on the main passenger deck; |
|
(d) |
At least one readily accessible hand fire extinguisher must be available for use in each Class A or Class B cargo or baggage compartment and in each Class E cargo compartment that is accessible to crew members in flight; and |
|
(e) |
At least the following number of hand fire extinguishers must be conveniently located in the passenger compartment(s):
When two or more extinguishers are required, they must be evenly distributed in the passenger compartment. |
|
(f) |
At least one of the required fire extinguishers located in the passenger compartment of an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of at least 31, and not more than 60, and at least two of the fire extinguishers located in the passenger compartment of an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of 61 or more must contain Halon 1211 (bromochlorodi-fluoromethane, CBrCIF2), or equivalent as the extinguishing agent. |
OPS 1.795
Crash axes and crowbars
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum certificated take-off mass exceeding 5 700 kg or having a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9 seats unless it is equipped with at least one crash axe or crowbar located on the flight deck. If the maximum approved passenger seating configuration is more than 200 an additional crash axe or crowbar must be carried and located in or near the most rearward galley area. |
|
(b) |
Crash axes and crowbars located in the passenger compartment must not be visible to passengers. |
OPS 1.800
Marking of break-in points
An operator shall ensure that, if designated areas of the fuselage suitable for break-in by rescue crews in emergency are marked on an aeroplane, such areas shall be marked as shown below. The colour of the markings shall be red or yellow, and if necessary they shall be outlined in white to contrast with the background. If the corner markings are more than 2 metres apart, intermediate lines 9 cm × 3 cm shall be inserted so that there is no more than 2 metres between adjacent marks.
OPS 1.805
Means for emergency evacuation
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with passenger emergency exit sill heights:
|
|
(b) |
Such equipment or devices need not be provided at over wing exits if the designated place on the aeroplane structure at which the escape route terminates is less than 1,83 metres (6 feet) from the ground with the aeroplane on the ground, the landing gear extended, and the flaps in the take off or landing position, whichever flap position is higher from the ground. |
|
(c) |
In aeroplanes required to have a separate emergency exit for the flight crew and:
|
OPS 1.810
Megaphones
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 60 and carrying one or more passengers unless it is equipped with portable battery-powered megaphones readily accessible for use by crew members during an emergency evacuation, to the following scales:
|
OPS 1.815
Emergency lighting
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate a passenger carrying aeroplane which has a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 9 unless it is provided with an emergency lighting system having an independent power supply to facilitate the evacuation of the aeroplane. The emergency lighting system must include:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall not, by night, operate a passenger carrying aeroplane which has a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of 9 or less unless it is provided with a source of general cabin illumination to facilitate the evacuation of the aeroplane. The system may use dome lights or other sources of illumination already fitted on the aeroplane and which are capable of remaining operative after the aeroplane's battery has been switched off. |
OPS 1.820
Automatic Emergency Locator Transmitter
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane first issued with an individual certificate of airworthiness on or after 1 January 2002 unless it is equipped with an automatic Emergency Locator Transmitter (ELT) capable of transmitting on 121,5 MHz and 406 MHz. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane first issued with an individual Certificate of Airworthiness before 1 January 2002 unless it is equipped with any type of ELT capable of transmitting on 121,5 MHz and 406 MHz. |
|
(c) |
An operator shall ensure that all ELTs that are capable of transmitting on 406 MHz shall be coded in accordance with ICAO Annex X and registered with the national agency responsible for initiating Search and Rescue or another nominated agency. |
OPS 1.825
Life Jackets
|
(a) |
Land aeroplanes. An operator shall not operate a land aeroplane:
|
|
(b) |
Seaplanes and amphibians. An operator shall not operate a seaplane or an amphibian on water unless it is equipped with life jackets equipped with a survivor locator light, for each person on board. Each life jacket must be stowed in a position easily accessible from the seat or berth of the person for whose use it is provided. Life jackets for infants may be substituted by other approved flotation devices equipped with a survivor locator light. |
OPS 1.830
Life-rafts and survival ELTs for extended overwater flights
|
(a) |
On overwater flights, an operator shall not operate an aeroplane at a distance away from land, which is suitable for making an emergency landing, greater than that corresponding to:
|
|
(b) |
Sufficient life-rafts to carry all persons on board. Unless excess rafts of enough capacity are provided, the buoyancy and seating capacity beyond the rated capacity of the rafts must accommodate all occupants of the aeroplane in the event of a loss of one raft of the largest rated capacity. The life-rafts shall be equipped with:
|
|
(c) |
At least two survival Emergency Locator Transmitters (ELT (S)) capable of transmitting on the distress frequencies prescribed in ICAO Annex X, Volume V, Chapter 2. |
OPS 1.835
Survival equipment
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane across areas in which search and rescue would be especially difficult unless it is equipped with the following:
|
(a) |
Signalling equipment to make the pyrotechnical distress signals described in ICAO Annex II; |
|
(b) |
At least one ELT (S) is capable of transmitting on the distress frequencies prescribed in ICAO Annex X, Volume V, Chapter 2; and |
|
(c) |
Additional survival equipment for the route to be flown taking account of the number of persons on board except that the equipment specified in sub-paragraph (c) need not be carried when the aeroplane either:
|
OPS 1.840
Seaplanes and amphibians — Miscellaneous equipment
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate a seaplane or an amphibian on water unless it is equipped with:
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.715
Flight data recorders — 1 — List of parameters to be recorded
Table A1 — Aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of over 5 700 kg
Note: Thee number in the left hand column reflect the Serial Numbers depicted in EUROCAE document ED55
|
NO. |
PARAMETER |
|
1 |
TIME OR RELATIVE TIME COUNT |
|
2 |
PRESSURE ALTITUDE |
|
3 |
INDICATED AIRSPEED |
|
4 |
HEADING |
|
5 |
NORMAL ACCELERATION |
|
6 |
PITCH ATTITUDE |
|
7 |
ROLL ATTITUDE |
|
8 |
MANUAL RADIO TRANSMISSION KEYING |
|
9 |
PROPULSIVE THRUST/POWER ON EACH ENGINE AND COCKPIT THRUST/POWER LEVER POSITION IF APPLICABLE |
|
10 |
TRAILING EDGE FLAP OR COCKPIT CONTROL SELECTION |
|
11 |
LEADING EDGE FLAP OR COCKPIT CONTROL SELECTION |
|
12 |
THRUST REVERSE STATUS |
|
13 |
GROUND SPOILER POSITION AND/OR SPEED BRAKE SELECTION |
|
14 |
TOTAL OR OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE |
|
15 |
AUTOPILOT, AUTOTHROTTLE AND AFCS MODE AND ENGAGEMENT STATUS |
|
16 |
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION (BODY AXIS) |
|
17 |
LATERAL ACCELERATION |
Table A2 — Aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of 5 700 kg or below
Note: The number in the left hand column reflect the Serial Numbers depicted in EUROCAE document ED55
|
NO. |
PARAMETER |
|
1 |
TIME OR RELATIVE TIME COUNT |
|
2 |
PRESSURE ALTITUDE |
|
3 |
INDICATED AIRSPEED |
|
4 |
HEADING |
|
5 |
NORMAL ACCELERATION |
|
6 |
PITCH ATTITUDE |
|
7 |
ROLL ATTITUDE |
|
8 |
MANUAL RADIO TRANSMISSION KEYING |
|
9 |
PROPULSIVE THRUST/POWER ON EACH ENGINE AND COCKPIT THRUST/POWER LEVER POSITION IF APPLICABLE |
|
10 |
TRAILING EDGE FLAP OR COCKPIT CONTROL SELECTION |
|
11 |
LEADING EDGE FLAP OR COCKPIT CONTROL SELECTION |
|
12 |
THRUST REVERSE STATUS |
|
13 |
GROUND SPOILER POSITION AND/OR SPEED BRAKE SELECTION |
|
14 |
TOTAL OR OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE |
|
15 |
AUTOPILOT/AUTOTHROTTLE ENGAGEMENT STATUS |
|
16 |
ANGLE OF ATTACK (IF A SUITABLE SENSOR IS AVAILABLE) |
|
17 |
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION (BODY AXIS) |
Table B — Additional parameters for aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of over 27 000 kg
Note: The number in the left hand column reflect the Serial Numbers depicted in EUROCAE document ED55
|
NO. |
PARAMETER |
|
18 |
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS — CONTROL SURFACE POSITION AND/OR PILOT INPUT (PITCH, ROLL, YAW) |
|
19 |
PITCH TRIM POSITION |
|
20 |
RADIO ALTITUDE |
|
21 |
VERTICAL BEAM DEVIATION (ILS GLIDE PATH OR MLS ELEVATION) |
|
22 |
HORIZONTAL BEAM DEVIATION (ILS LOCALISER OR MLS AZIMUTH) |
|
23 |
MARKER BEACON PASSAGE |
|
24 |
WARNINGS |
|
25 |
RESERVED (NAVIGATION RECEIVER FREQUENCY SELECTION IS RECOMMENDED) |
|
26 |
RESERVED (DME DISTANCE IS RECOMMENDED) |
|
27 |
LANDING GEAR SQUAT SWITCH STATUS OR AIR/GROUND STATUS |
|
28 |
GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM |
|
29 |
ANGLE OF ATTACK |
|
30 |
LOW PRESSURE WARNING (HYDRAULIC AND PNEUMATIC POWER) |
|
31 |
GROUNDSPEED |
|
32 |
LANDING GEAR OR GEAR SELECTOR POSITION |
Table C — Aeroplanes equipped with electronic display systems
Note: The number in the centre column reflect the Serial Numbers depicted in EUROCAE document ED55 table A1.5
|
NO. |
NO. |
PARAMETER |
|
33 |
6 |
SELECTED BAROMETRIC SETTING (EACH PILOT STATION) |
|
34 |
7 |
SELECTED ALTITUDE |
|
35 |
8 |
SELECTED SPEED |
|
36 |
9 |
SELECTED MACH |
|
37 |
10 |
SELECTED VERTICAL SPEED |
|
38 |
11 |
SELECTED HEADING |
|
39 |
12 |
SELECTED FLIGHT PATH |
|
40 |
13 |
SELECTED DECISION HEIGHT |
|
41 |
14 |
EFIS DISPLAY FORMAT |
|
42 |
15 |
MULTI FUNCTION/ENGINE/ALERTS DISPLAY FORMAT |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.720
Flight data recorders — 2 — List of parameters to be recorded
Table A — Aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of over 5 700 kg
|
NO. |
PARAMETER |
|
1 |
TIME OR RELATIVE TIME COUNT |
|
2 |
PRESSURE ALTITUDE |
|
3 |
INDICATED AIRSPEED |
|
4 |
HEADING |
|
5 |
NORMAL ACCELERATION |
|
6 |
PITCH ATTITUDE |
|
7 |
ROLL ATTITUDE |
|
8 |
MANUAL RADIO TRANSMISSION KEYING UNLESS AN ALTERNATE MEANS TO SYNCHRONISE FDR AND CVR RECORDINGS IS PROVIDED |
|
9 |
POWER ON EACH ENGINE |
|
10 |
TRAILING EDGE FLAP OR COCKPIT CONTROL SELECTION |
|
11 |
LEADING EDGE FLAP OR COCKPIT CONTROL SELECTION |
|
12 |
THRUST REVERSE POSITION (FOR TURBOJET AEROPLANES ONLY) |
|
13 |
GROUND SPOILER POSITION AND/OR SPEED BRAKE SELECTION |
|
14 |
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE OR TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE |
|
15a |
AUTOPILOT ENGAGEMENT STATUS |
|
15b |
AUTOPILOT OPERATING MODES, AUTOTHROTTLE AND AFCS SYSTEMS ENGAGEMENT STATUS AND OPERATING MODES |
Table B — Additional parameters for aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass over 27 000 kg
|
NO. |
PARAMETER |
|
16 |
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION |
|
17 |
LATERAL ACCELERATION |
|
18 |
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS — CONTROL SURFACE POSITION AND/OR PILOT INPUT (PITCH, ROLL AND YAW) |
|
19 |
PITCH TRIM POSITION |
|
20 |
RADIO ALTITUDE |
|
21 |
GLIDE PATH DEVIATION |
|
22 |
LOCALISER DEVIATION |
|
23 |
MARKER BEACON PASSAGE |
|
24 |
MASTER WARNING |
|
25 |
NAV 1 AND NAV 2 FREQUENCY SELECTION |
|
26 |
DME 1 AND DME 2 DISTANCE |
|
27 |
LANDING GEAR SQUAT SWITCH STATUS |
|
28 |
GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM |
|
29 |
ANGLE OF ATTACK |
|
30 |
HYDRAULICS, EACH SYSTEM (LOW PRESSURE) |
|
31 |
NAVIGATION DATA |
|
32 |
LANDING GEAR OR GEAR SELECTOR POSITION |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.725
Flight data recorders — 3 — List of parameters to be recorded
Table A — Aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of over 5 700 kg
|
NO. |
PARAMETER |
|
1 |
TIME OR RELATIVE TIME COUNT |
|
2 |
PRESSURE ALTITUDE |
|
3 |
INDICATED AIRSPEED |
|
4 |
HEADING |
|
5 |
NORMAL ACCELERATION |
Table B — Additional parameters for aeroplanes with a maximum certificated take-off mass of over 27 000 kg
|
NO. |
PARAMETER |
|
6 |
PITCH ATTITUDE |
|
7 |
ROLL ATTITUDE |
|
8 |
MANUAL RADIO TRANSMISSION KEYING UNLESS AN ALTERNATE MEANS TO SYNCHRONISE THE FDR AND CVR RECORDINGS IS PROVIDED |
|
9 |
POWER ON EACH ENGINE |
|
10 |
TRAILING EDGE FLAP OR COCKPIT CONTROL SELECTION |
|
11 |
LEADING EDGE FLAP OR COCKPIT CONTROL SELECTION |
|
12 |
THRUST REVERSE POSITION (FOR TURBOJET AEROPLANES ONLY) |
|
13 |
GROUND SPOILER POSITION AND/OR SPEED BRAKE SELECTION |
|
14 |
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE OR TOTAL AIR TEMPERATURE |
|
15a |
AUTOPILOT ENGAGEMENT STATUS |
|
15b |
AUTOPILOT OPERATING MODES, AUTOTHROTTLE AND AFCS, SYSTEMS ENGAGEMENT STATUS AND OPERATING MODES |
|
16 |
LONGITUDINAL ACCELERATION |
|
17 |
LATERAL ACCELERATION |
|
18 |
PRIMARY FLIGHT CONTROLS — CONTROL SURFACE POSITION AND/OR PILOT INPUT (PITCH, ROLL AND YAW) |
|
19 |
PITCH TRIM POSITION |
|
20 |
RADIO ALTITUDE |
|
21 |
GLIDE PATH DEVIATION |
|
22 |
LOCALISER DEVIATION |
|
23 |
MARKER BEACON PASSAGE |
|
24 |
MASTER WARNING |
|
25 |
NAV 1 AND NAV 2 FREQUENCY SELECTION |
|
26 |
DME 1 AND DME 2 DISTANCE |
|
27 |
LANDING GEAR SQUAT SWITCH STATUS |
|
28 |
GROUND PROXIMITY WARNING SYSTEM |
|
29 |
ANGLE OF ATTACK |
|
30 |
HYDRAULICS, EACH SYSTEM (LOW PRESSURE) |
|
31 |
NAVIGATION DATA (LATITUDE, LONGITUDE, GROUND SPEED AND DRIFT ANGLE) |
|
32 |
LANDING GEAR OR GEAR SELECTOR POSITION |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.770
Oxygen — Minimum Requirements for Supplemental Oxygen for Pressurised Aeroplanes during and following Emergency Descent
Table 1
|
(a) |
(b) |
||||||||||
|
SUPPLY FOR: |
DURATION AND CABIN PRESSURE ALTITUDE |
||||||||||
|
Entire flight time when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 13 000 ft and entire flight time when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 10 000 ft but does not exceed 13 000 ft after the first 30 minutes at those altitudes, but in no case less than:
|
||||||||||
|
Entire flight time when cabin pressure altitude exceeds 13 000 ft but not less than 30 minutes (Note 2), and entire flight time when cabin pressure altitude is greater than 10 000 ft but does not exceed 13 000 ft after the first 30 minutes at these altitudes |
||||||||||
|
Entire flight time when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 15 000 ft but in no case less then 10 minutes (Note 4). |
||||||||||
|
Entire flight time when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 14 000 ft but does not exceed 15 000 ft |
||||||||||
|
Entire flight time when the cabin pressure altitude exceeds 10 000 ft but does not exceed 14 000 ft after the first 30 minutes at these altitudes |
||||||||||
|
|||||||||||
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.775
Supplemental Oxygen for non-pressurised Aeroplanes
Table 1
|
(a) |
(b) |
||
|
SUPPLY FOR: |
DURATION AND PRESSURE ALTITUDE |
||
|
Entire flight time at pressure altitudes above 10 000 ft |
||
|
Entire flight time at pressure altitudes above 13 000 ft and for any period exceeding 30 minutes at pressure altitudes above 10 000 ft but not exceeding 13 000 ft. |
||
|
Entire flight time at pressure altitudes above 13 000 ft. |
||
|
Entire flight time after 30 minutes at pressure altitudes greater than 10 000 ft but not exceeding 13 000 ft |
||
|
|||
SUBPART L
COMMUNICATION AND NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT
OPS 1.845
General introduction
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that a flight does not commence unless the communication and navigation equipment required under this Subpart is:
|
|
(b) |
Communication and navigation equipment minimum performance standards are those prescribed in the applicable European Technical Standard Orders (ETSO) as listed in applicable specifications on European Technical Standard Orders (CS-TSO), unless different performance standards are prescribed in the operational or airworthiness codes. Communication and navigation equipment complying with design and performance specifications other than ETSO on the date of OPS implementation may remain in service, or be installed, unless additional requirements are prescribed in this Subpart. Communication and navigation equipment which has already been approved does not need to comply with a revised ETSO or a revised specification, other than ETSO, unless a retroactive requirement is prescribed. |
OPS 1.850
Radio Equipment
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless it is equipped with radio required for the kind of operation being conducted. |
|
(b) |
Where two independent (separate and complete) radio systems are required under this Subpart, each system must have an independent antenna installation except that, where rigidly supported non-wire antennae or other antenna installations of equivalent reliability are used, only one antenna is required. |
|
(c) |
The radio communication equipment required to comply with paragraph (a) above must also provide for communications on the aeronautical emergency frequency 121,5 MHz. |
OPS 1.855
Audio Selector Panel
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane under IFR unless it is equipped with an audio selector panel accessible to each required flight crew member.
OPS 1.860
Radio equipment for operations under VFR over routes navigated by reference to visual landmarks
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane under VFR over routes that can be navigated by reference to visual landmarks, unless it is equipped with the radio communication equipment necessary under normal operating conditions to fulfil the following:
|
(a) |
Communicate with appropriate ground stations; |
|
(b) |
Communicate with appropriate air traffic control facilities from any point in controlled airspace within which flights are intended; and |
|
(c) |
Receive meteorological information. |
OPS 1.865
Communication and Navigation equipment for operations under IFR, or under VFR over routes not navigated by reference to visual landmarks
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane under IFR, or under VFR over routes that cannot be navigated by reference to visual landmarks, unless the aeroplane is equipped with radio communication and SSR transponder and navigation equipment in accordance with the requirements of air traffic services in the area(s) of operation. |
|
(b) |
Radio Equipment. An operator shall ensure that radio equipment comprises not less than:
|
|
(c) |
Navigation equipment. An operator shall ensure that navigation equipment
|
|
(d) |
An operator may operate an aeroplane that is not equipped with an ADF or with the navigation equipment specified in sub-paragraph(s) (c)(1)(vi) and/or (c)(1)(vii) above, provided that it is equipped with alternative equipment authorised, for the route being flown, by the Authority. The reliability and the accuracy of alternative equipment must allow safe navigation for the intended route. |
|
(e) |
An operator shall ensure that VHF communication equipment, ILS Localiser and VOR receivers installed on aeroplanes to be operated in IFR are of a type that has been approved as complying with the FM immunity performance standards. |
OPS 1.866
Transponder equipment
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless it is equipped with:
|
OPS 1.870
Additional navigation equipment for operations in MNPS airspace
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane in MNPS airspace unless it is equipped with navigation equipment that complies with minimum navigation performance specifications prescribed in ICAO Doc 7030 in the form of Regional Supplementary Procedures. |
|
(b) |
The navigation equipment required by this paragraph must be visible and usable by either pilot seated at his/her duty station. |
|
(c) |
For unrestricted operation in MNPS airspace an aeroplane must be equipped with two independent Long Range Navigation Systems (LRNS). |
|
(d) |
For operation in MNPS airspace along notified special routes an aeroplane must be equipped with one Long Range Navigation System (LRNS), unless otherwise specified. |
OPS 1.872
Equipment for operation in defined airspace with Reduced Vertical Separation Minima (RVSM)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that aeroplanes operated in RVSM airspace are equipped with:
|
SUBPART M
AEROPLANE MAINTENANCE
OPS 1.875
General
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane unless it is maintained and released to service by an organisation appropriately approved/accepted in accordance with Part 145 except that pre-flight inspections need not necessarily be carried out by the Part 145 organisation. |
|
(b) |
Aeroplane maintenance requirements needed to comply with the operator certification requirements in OPS 1.180 are those set up in Part M. |
SUBPART N
FLIGHT CREW
OPS 1.940
Composition of Flight Crew
(See Appendices 1 & 2 to OPS 1.940)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(b) |
Minimum flight crew for operations under IFR or at night. For operations under IFR or at night, an operator shall ensure that:
|
JAR-OPS 1.943
Initial Operator's Crew Resource Management (CRM) training
|
(a) |
When a flight crew member has not previously completed initial Operator's Crew Resource Management (CRM) training (either new employees or existing staff), then the operator shall ensure that the flight crew member completes an initial CRM training course. New employees shall complete initial Operator's CRM Training within their first year of joining an operator. |
|
(b) |
If the flight crew member has not previously been trained in Human Factors then a theoretical course, based on the human performance and limitations programme for the ATPL (see the requirements applicable to the issue of Flight Crew Licences) shall be completed before the initial Operator's CRM training or combined with the initial Operator's CRM training. |
|
(c) |
Initial CRM training shall be conducted by at least one CRM trainer acceptable to the Authority who may be assisted by experts in order to address specific areas. |
|
(d) |
Initial CRM training is conducted in accordance with a detailed course syllabus included in the Operations Manual. |
OPS 1.945
Conversion Training and checking
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.945)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(b) |
In the case of changing aeroplane type or class, the check required by OPS 1.965(b) may be combined with the type or class rating skill test under the requirements applicable to the issue of Flight Crew Licences. |
|
(c) |
The operator's conversion course and the Type or Class Rating course required for the issue of Flight Crew Licences may be combined. |
OPS 1.950
Differences Training and Familiarisation Training
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that a flight crew member completes:
|
|
(b) |
The operator shall specify in the Operations Manual when such differences training or familiarisation training is required. |
OPS 1.955
Nomination as commander
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that for upgrade to commander from co-pilot and for those joining as commanders:
|
|
(b) |
The command course required by sub-paragraph (a)(2) above must be specified in the Operations Manual and include at least the following:
|
OPS 1.960
Commanders holding a Commercial Pilot Licence
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that:
|
OPS 1.965
Recurrent Training and Checking
(See Appendices 1 & 2 to OPS 1.965)
|
(a) |
General. An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(b) |
Operator Proficiency Check
|
|
(c) |
Line Check. An operator shall ensure that each flight crew member undergoes a line check on the aeroplane to demonstrate his/her competence in carrying out normal line operations described in the Operations Manual. The period of validity of a line check shall be 12 calendar months, in addition to the remainder of the month of issue. If issued within the final 3 calendar months of validity of a previous line check the period of validity shall extend from the date of issue until 12 calendar months from the expiry date of that previous line check. |
|
(d) |
Emergency and Safety Equipment training and checking. An operator shall ensure that each flight crew member undergoes training and checking on the location and use of all emergency and safety equipment carried. The period of validity of an emergency and safety equipment check shall be 12 calendar months in addition to the remainder of the month of issue. If issued within the final 3 calendar months of validity of a previous emergency and safety check, the period of validity shall extend from the date of issue until 12 calendar months from the expiry date of that previous emergency and safety equipment check. |
|
(e) |
CRM. An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(f) |
Ground and Refresher training. An operator shall ensure that each flight crew member undergoes ground and refresher training at least every 12 calendar months. If the training is conducted within 3 calendar months prior to the expiry of the 12 calendar months period, the next ground and refresher training must be completed within 12 calendar months of the original expiry date of the previous ground and refresher training. |
|
(g) |
Aeroplane/STD training. An operator shall ensure that each flight crew member undergoes aeroplane/STD training at least every 12 calendar months. If the training is conducted within 3 calendar months prior to the expiry of the 12 calendar months period, the next aeroplane STD training must be completed within 12 calendar months of the original expiry date of the previous aeroplane/STD training. |
OPS 1.968
Pilot qualification to operate in either pilot's seat
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.968)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that:
|
OPS 1.970
Recent experience
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(b) |
The 90-day period prescribed in sub-paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) above may be extended up to a maximum of 120 days by line flying under the supervision of a Type Rating Instructor or Examiner. For periods beyond 120 days, the recency requirement is satisfied by a training flight or use of a Flight Simulator or the aeroplane type to be used. |
OPS 1.975
Route and Aerodrome Competence Qualification
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that, prior to being assigned as commander or as pilot to whom the conduct of the flight may be delegated by the commander, the pilot has obtained adequate knowledge of the route to be flown and of the aerodromes (including alternates), facilities and procedures to be used. |
|
(b) |
The period of validity of the route and aerodrome competence qualification shall be 12 calendar months in addition to the remainder of:
|
|
(c) |
Route and aerodrome competence qualification shall be revalidated by operating on the route or to the aerodrome within the period of validity prescribed in sub-paragraph (b) above. |
|
(d) |
If revalidated within the final 3 calendar months of the validity of the previous route and aerodrome competence qualification, the period of validity shall extend from the date of revalidation until 12 calendar months from the expiry date of that previous route and aerodrome competence qualification. |
OPS 1.978
Advanced Qualification Programme
|
(a) |
The periods of validity of OPS 1.965 and 1.970 may be extended, where the Authority has approved an Advanced Qualification Programme established by the operator. |
|
(b) |
The Advanced Qualification Programme must contain training and checking which establishes and maintains a proficiency that is not less than the provisions prescribed in OPS 1.945, 1.965 and 1.970. |
OPS 1.980
Operation on more than one type or variant
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.980)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that a flight crew member does not operate on more than one type or variant unless the flight crew member is competent to do so. |
|
(b) |
When considering operations of more than one type or variant, an operator shall ensure that the differences and/or similarities of the aeroplanes concerned justify such operations, taking account of the following:
|
|
(c) |
An Operator shall ensure that a flight crew member operating more than one type or variant complies with all of the requirements prescribed in Subpart N for each type or variant unless the Authority has approved the use of credit(s) related to the training, checking and recent experience requirements. |
|
(d) |
An operator shall specify appropriate procedures and/or operational restrictions, approved by the Authority, in the Operations Manual, for any operation on more than one type or variant covering:
|
OPS 1.981
Operation of helicopter and aeroplane
|
(a) |
When a flight crew member operates both helicopters and aeroplanes:
|
OPS 1.985
Training Records
|
(a) |
An operator shall:
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.940
In-flight relief of flight crew members
|
(a) |
A flight crew member may be relieved in flight of his/her duties at the controls by another suitably qualified flight crew member. |
|
(b) |
Relief of the Commander
|
|
(c) |
Minimum requirements for a pilot relieving the commander:
|
|
(d) |
Relief of the co-pilot
|
|
(e) |
Minimum requirements for Cruise Relief Co-Pilot
|
|
(f) |
Relief of the system panel operator. A system panel operator may be relieved in flight by a crew member who holds a Flight Engineer's licence or by a flight crew member with a qualification acceptable to the Authority. |
Appendix 2 to OPS 1.940
Single pilot operations under IFR or at night
|
(a) |
Aeroplanes referred to in OPS 1.940(b)(2) may be operated by a single pilot under IFR or at night when the following requirements are satisfied:
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.945
Operator's Conversion Course
|
(a) |
An operator's conversion course shall include:
|
|
(b) |
The conversion course shall be conducted in the order set out in sub-paragraph (a) above. |
|
(c) |
Following completion of a Zero Flight Time Conversion Course a pilot shall:
|
|
(d) |
Elements of Crew Resource Management shall be integrated into the conversion course, and conducted by suitably qualified personnel. |
|
(e) |
When a flight crew member has not previously completed an operator's conversion course, the operator shall ensure that in addition to sub-paragraph (a) above, the flight crew member undergoes general first aid training and, if applicable, ditching procedures training using the equipment in water. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.965
Recurrent training and checking — Pilots
|
(a) |
Recurrent Training. Recurrent training shall comprise:
|
|
(b) |
Recurrent checking. Recurrent checking shall comprise:
|
Appendix 2 to OPS 1.965
Recurrent training and checking — System Panel Operators
|
(a) |
The recurrent training and checking for System Panel Operators shall meet the requirements for pilots and any additional specific duties, omitting those items that do not apply to System Panel Operators. |
|
(b) |
Recurrent training and checking for System Panel Operators shall, whenever possible, take place concurrently with a pilot undergoing recurrent training and checking. |
|
(c) |
A line check shall be conducted by a commander nominated by the operator and acceptable to the Authority or by a System Panel Operator Type Rating Instructor or Examiner. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.968
Pilot qualification to operate in either pilot's seat
|
(a) |
Commanders whose duties also require them to operate in the right-hand seat and carry out the duties of co-pilot, or commanders required to conduct training or examining duties from the right-hand seat, shall complete additional training and checking as specified in the Operations Manual, concurrent with the operator proficiency checks prescribed in OPS 1.965(b). This additional training must include at least the following:
|
|
(b) |
When engine-out manoeuvres are carried out in an aeroplane, the engine failure must be simulated. |
|
(c) |
When operating in the right-hand seat, the checks required by OPS for operating in the left-hand seat must, in addition, be valid and current. |
|
(d) |
A pilot relieving the commander shall have demonstrated, concurrent with the operator proficiency checks prescribed in OPS 1.965(b), practice of drills and procedures, which would not, normally, be the relieving pilot's responsibility. Where the differences between left and right seats are not significant (for example because of use of autopilot) then practice may be conducted in either seat. |
|
(e) |
A pilot other than the commander occupying the left-hand seat shall demonstrate practice of drills and procedures, concurrent with the operator proficiency checks prescribed in OPS 1.965(b), which would otherwise have been the commander's responsibility acting as pilot non-flying. Where the differences between left and right seats are not significant (for example because of use of autopilot) then practice may be conducted in either seat. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.980
Operation on more than one type or variant
|
(a) |
When a flight crew member operates more than one aeroplane class, type or variant listed according to applicable flight crew licensing requirements but not within a single licence endorsement, an operator must comply with the following:
|
|
(b) |
When a flight crew member operates more than one aeroplane type or variant within one or more licence endorsement as defined by Flight Crew Licensing (type — multi-pilot), an operator shall ensure that:
Note: In cases where more than one licence endorsement is involved, see sub-paragraphs (c) and (d) below. |
|
(c) |
When a flight crew member operates more than one aeroplane type or variant listed in Flight Crew Licensing (type single pilot and type multi pilot), but not within a single licence endorsement, an operator must comply with the following:
|
|
(d) |
When a flight crew member operates more than one aeroplane type or variant listed in Flight Crew Licensing (type — multi pilot), but not within a single licence endorsement, an operator must comply with the following:
|
|
(e) |
When a flight crew member operates combinations of aeroplane types or variants as defined in Flight Crew Licensing (class — single pilot and type — multi pilot) an operator must demonstrate that specific procedures and/or operational restrictions are approved in accordance with OPS 1.980(d). |
SUBPART O
CABIN CREW
OPS 1.988
Applicability
An operator shall ensure that all cabin crew members comply with the requirements of this Subpart and any other safety requirements applicable to cabin crew.
For the purpose of this Regulation, “cabin crew member” means any crew member, other than a flight crew member, who performs, in the interests of safety of passengers, duties assigned to him/her by the operator or the commander in the cabin of an aeroplane.
OPS 1.989
Identification
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that all cabin crew members wear the operator's cabin crew uniform and are clearly identifiable to the passengers as a cabin crew member. |
|
(b) |
Other personnel, such as medical staff, security staff, child minders, escorts, technical staff, entertainers, interpreters, who undertake tasks in the cabin, shall not wear a uniform which might identify them to passengers as a cabin crew member, unless they comply with the requirements of this Subpart and any other applicable requirements of this Regulation. |
OPS 1.990
Number and composition of Cabin Crew
|
(a) |
An operator shall not operate an aeroplane with a maximum approved passenger seating configuration of more than 19, when carrying one or more passengers, unless at least one cabin crew member is included in the crew for the purpose of performing duties, specified in the Operations Manual, in the interests of the safety of passengers. |
|
(b) |
When complying with sub-paragraph (a) above, an operator shall ensure that the minimum number of cabin crew is the greater of:
|
|
(c) |
The Authority may under exceptional circumstances require an operator to include in the crew additional cabin crew members. |
|
(d) |
In unforeseen circumstances the required minimum number of cabin crew may be reduced provided that:
|
|
(e) |
An operator shall ensure that when engaging the services of cabin crew members who are self-employed and/or working on a freelance or part-time basis, the requirements of subpart O are complied with. In this respect, particular attention must be paid to the total number of aircraft types or variants that a cabin crew member may fly for the purposes of commercial air transportation, which must not exceed the requirements prescribed in OPS 1.1030, including when his/her services are engaged by another operator. |
OPS 1.995
Minimum requirements
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member:
|
(a) |
is at least 18 years of age. |
|
(b) |
has passed a medical examination or assessment at regular intervals as required by the Authority so as to check the medical fitness to discharge his/her duties. |
|
(c) |
has successfully completed initial training in accordance with OPS 1.1005 and holds an attestation of safety training. |
|
(d) |
has completed the appropriate conversion and/or differences training covering at least the subjects listed in OPS 1.1010. |
|
(e) |
shall undergo recurrent training in line with the provisions of OPS 1.1015. |
|
(f) |
is competent to perform his/her duties in accordance with procedures specified in the Operations Manual. |
OPS 1.1000
Senior cabin crew members
|
(a) |
An operator shall nominate a senior cabin crew member whenever more than one cabin crew member is assigned. For operations when more than one cabin crew member is assigned, but only one cabin crew member is required, the operator shall nominate one cabin crew member to be responsible to the commander. |
|
(b) |
The senior cabin crew member shall have responsibility to the commander for the conduct and coordination of normal and emergency procedure(s) specified in the Operations Manual. During turbulence, in the absence of any instructions from the flight crew, the senior cabin crew member shall be entitled to discontinue non-safety related duties and advise the flight crew of the level of turbulence being experienced and the need for the fasten seat belt signs to be switched on. This should be followed by the cabin crew securing the passenger cabin and other applicable areas. |
|
(c) |
Where required by OPS 1.990 to carry more than one cabin crew member, an operator shall not appoint a person to the post of senior cabin crew member unless that person has at least one year's experience as an operating cabin crew member and has completed an appropriate course covering the following as a minimum:
|
|
(d) |
An operator shall establish procedures to select the next most suitably qualified cabin crew member to operate as senior cabin crew member in the event of the nominated senior cabin crew member becoming unable to operate. Such procedures must be acceptable to the Authority and take account of a cabin crew member's operational experience. |
|
(e) |
CRM Training: The operator shall ensure that all relevant elements in Appendix 2 to OPS 1.1005/1.1010/1.1015 Table 1, Column (a) are integrated into the training and covered to the level required by Column (f), Senior Cabin Crew Course. |
OPS 1.1002
Single cabin crew member operations
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member who does not have previous comparable experience completes the following, before operating as a single cabin crew member:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure, before a cabin crew member is assigned to operate as a single cabin crew member, that this cabin crew member is competent to perform his/her duties in accordance with the procedures specified in the Operations Manual. Suitability for single cabin crew operations shall be addressed in the criteria for cabin crew selection, recruitment, training and assessment of competence. |
OPS 1.1005
Initial Safety Training
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1005)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member has, before undertaking conversion training, successfully completed initial safety training covering at least the subjects listed in Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1005. |
|
(b) |
Training courses shall, at the discretion of the Authority, and subject to its approval, be provided: either
|
|
(c) |
The programme and structure of the initial training courses shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements and shall be subject to prior approval of the Authority. |
|
(d) |
At the discretion of the Authority, the Authority, the operator or the approved training organisation providing the training course, shall deliver an attestation of safety training to a cabin crew member after he/she has completed the initial safety training and successfully passed the check referred to in OPS 1.1025. |
|
(e) |
Where the Authority authorises an operator or an approved training organisation to deliver the attestation of safety training to a cabin crew member, such attestation shall clearly state a reference to the approval of the Authority. |
OPS 1.1010
Conversion and Differences training
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1010)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member has completed appropriate conversion and differences training, in accordance with the applicable rules and at least the subjects listed in Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1010. The training course shall be specified in the Operations Manual. The programme and structure of the training course shall be subject to prior approval by the Authority.
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall determine the content of the conversion and differences training taking account of the cabin crew member's previous training as recorded in the cabin crew member's training records required by OPS 1.1035. |
|
(c) |
Without prejudice to OPS 1.995 (c), related elements of both initial training (OPS 1.1005) and conversion and differences training (OPS 1.1010) may be combined. |
|
(d) |
An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(e) |
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member before being first assigned to duties completes the Operator's CRM Training and Aeroplane Type Specific CRM, in accordance with Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1010 (j). Cabin crew who are already operating as cabin crew members with an operator, and who have not previously completed the Operator's CRM Training, shall complete this training by the time of the next required recurrent training and checking in accordance with Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1010 (j), including Aeroplane Type Specific CRM, as relevant. |
OPS 1.1012
Familiarisation
An operator shall ensure that, following completion of conversion training, each cabin crew member completes familiarisation prior to operating as one of the minimum number of cabin crew required by OPS 1.990.
OPS 1.1015
Recurrent training
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1015)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member undergoes recurrent training, covering the actions assigned to each crew member in normal and emergency procedures and drills relevant to the type(s) and/or variant(s) of aeroplane on which they operate in accordance with Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1015. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that the recurrent training programme approved by the Authority includes theoretical and practical instruction, together with individual practice, as prescribed in Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1015. |
|
(c) |
The period of validity of recurrent training and the associated checking required by OPS 1.1025 shall be 12 calendar months in addition to the remainder of the month of issue. If issued within the final 3 calendar months of validity of a previous check, the period of validity shall extend from the date of issue until 12 calendar months from the expiry date of that previous check. |
OPS 1.1020
Refresher Training
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1020)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member who has been absent from all flying duties for more than 6 months and still remains within the period of the previous check required by OPS 1.1025 (b)(3) completes refresher training specified in the Operations Manual as prescribed in Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1020. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that when a cabin crew member has not been absent from all flying duties, but has not, during the preceding 6 months, undertaken duties on a type of aeroplane as a cabin crew member required by OPS 1.990 (b), before undertaking such duties on that type, the cabin crew member either:
|
OPS 1.1025
Checking
|
(a) |
At the discretion of the Authority, the Authority, the operator or the approved training organisation providing the training course shall ensure that during or following completion of the training required by OPS 1.1005, 1.1010, 1.1015 and 1.1020, each cabin crew member undergoes a check covering the training received in order to verify his/her proficiency in carrying out normal and emergency safety duties. At the discretion of the Authority, the Authority, the operator or the approved training organisation providing the training course shall ensure that the personnel performing these checks shall be suitably qualified. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member undergoes checks as follows:
|
OPS 1.1030
Operation on more than one type or variant
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member does not operate on more than three aeroplane types except that, with the approval of the Authority, the cabin crew member may operate on four aeroplane types, provided that for at least two of the types:
|
|
(b) |
For the purposes of sub-paragraph (a) above, variants of an aeroplane type are considered to be different types if they are not similar in all the following aspects:
|
OPS 1.1035
Training records
An operator shall:
|
(1) |
Maintain records of all training and checking required by OPS 1.1005, 1.1010, 1.1015, 1.1020 and 1.1025; and |
|
(2) |
Keep a copy of the attestation of safety training; and |
|
(3) |
Keep the training records and records of medical examinations or assessments up to date, showing in the case of the training records the dates and contents of the conversion, differences and recurrent training received; and |
|
(4) |
Make the records of all initial, conversion and recurrent training and checking available, on request, to the cabin crew member concerned. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1005
Initial Safety Training
The subjects that must be covered as a minimum by a course of initial safety training referred to in OPS 1.1005 are:
|
(a) |
Fire and smoke training:
|
|
(b) |
Water survival training. The actual donning and use of personal flotation equipment in water. Before first operating on an aeroplane fitted with life-rafts or other similar equipment, training must be given on the use of this equipment, as well as actual practice in water. |
|
(c) |
Survival training. Survival training shall be appropriate to the areas of operation (e.g. polar, desert, jungle or sea). |
|
(d) |
Medical aspects and first aid:
|
|
(e) |
Passenger handling:
|
|
(f) |
Communication. During training, emphasis shall be placed on the importance of effective communication between cabin crew and flight crew including technique, common language and terminology. |
|
(g) |
Discipline and responsibilities:
|
|
(h) |
Crew resource management.
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1010
Conversion and Differences training
|
(a) |
General: An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(b) |
Fire and smoke training: An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(c) |
Operations of doors and exits: An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(d) |
Evacuation slide training: An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(e) |
Evacuation procedures and other emergency situations: An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(f) |
Crowd control. An operator shall ensure that training is provided on the practical aspects of crowd control in various emergency situations, as applicable to the aeroplane type. |
|
(g) |
Pilot incapacitation. An operator shall ensure that, unless the minimum flight crew is more than two, each cabin crew member is trained in the procedure for flight crew member incapacitation and shall operate the seat and harness mechanisms. Training in the use of flight crew members' oxygen system and use of the flight crew members' check lists, where required by the operator's SOP's, shall be conducted by a practical demonstration. |
|
(h) |
Safety equipment. An operator shall ensure that each cabin crew member is given realistic training on, and demonstration of, the location and use of safety equipment including the following:
|
|
(i) |
Passenger briefing/safety demonstrations. An operator shall ensure that training is given in the preparation of passengers for normal and emergency situations in accordance with OPS 1.285. |
|
(j) |
Crew Resource Management. An operator shall ensure that:
|
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1015
Recurrent training
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that recurrent training is conducted by suitably qualified persons. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that every 12 calendar months the programme of practical training includes the following:
|
|
(c) |
An operator shall ensure that, at intervals not exceeding 3 years, recurrent training also includes:
|
|
(d) |
An operator shall ensure that all appropriate requirements of Annex III, OPS 1 are included in the training of cabin crew members. |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1020
Refresher training
An operator shall ensure that refresher training is conducted by suitable qualified persons and, for each cabin crew member, includes at least the following:
|
(1) |
Emergency procedures including pilot incapacitation; |
|
(2) |
Evacuation procedures including crowd control techniques; |
|
(3) |
The operation and actual opening of all normal and emergency exits for passenger evacuation in an aeroplane or representative training device; |
|
(4) |
Demonstration of the operation of all other exits including flight deck windows; and |
|
(5) |
The location and handling of emergency equipment, including oxygen systems, and the donning of lifejackets, portable oxygen and protective breathing equipment. |
Appendix 2 to OPS 1.1005/1.1010/1.1015
Training
|
1. |
The CRM training syllabi, together with CRM methodology and terminology, shall be included in the Operations Manual. |
|
2. |
Table 1 indicates which elements of CRM shall be included in each type of training. Table 1 — CRM Training
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
SUBPART P
MANUALS, LOGS AND RECORDS
OPS 1.1040
General Rules for Operations Manuals
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the Operations Manual contains all instructions and information necessary for operations personnel to perform their duties. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that the contents of the Operations Manual, including all amendments or revisions, do not contravene the conditions contained in the Air Operator Certificate (AOC) or any applicable regulations and are acceptable to, or, where applicable, approved by, the Authority. |
|
(c) |
Unless otherwise approved by the Authority, or prescribed by national law, an operator must prepare the Operations Manual in the English language. In addition, an operator may translate and use that manual, or parts thereof, into another language. |
|
(d) |
Should it become necessary for an operator to produce new Operations Manuals or major parts/volumes thereof, he must comply with sub-paragraph (c) above. |
|
(e) |
An operator may issue an Operations Manual in separate volumes. |
|
(f) |
An operator shall ensure that all operations personnel have easy access to a copy of each part of the Operations Manual which is relevant to their duties. In addition, the operator shall supply crew members with a personal copy of, or sections from, Parts A and B of the Operations Manual as are relevant for personal study. |
|
(g) |
An operator shall ensure that the Operations Manual is amended or revised so that the instructions and information contained therein are kept up to date. The operator shall ensure that all operations personnel are made aware of such changes that are relevant to their duties. |
|
(h) |
Each holder of an Operations Manual, or appropriate parts of it, shall keep it up to date with the amendments or revisions supplied by the operator. |
|
(i) |
An operator shall supply the Authority with intended amendments and revisions in advance of the effective date. When the amendment concerns any part of the Operations Manual which must be approved in accordance with OPS, this approval shall be obtained before the amendment becomes effective. When immediate amendments or revisions are required in the interest of safety, they may be published and applied immediately, provided that any approval required has been applied for. |
|
(j) |
An operator shall incorporate all amendments and revisions required by the Authority. |
|
(k) |
An operator must ensure that information taken from approved documents, and any amendment of such approved documentation, is correctly reflected in the Operations Manual and that the Operations Manual contains no information contrary to any approved documentation. However, this requirement does not prevent an operator from using more conservative data and procedures. |
|
(l) |
An operator must ensure that the contents of the Operations Manual are presented in a form in which they can be used without difficulty. The design of the Operations Manual shall observe Human Factors principles. |
|
(m) |
An operator may be permitted by the Authority to present the Operations Manual or parts thereof in a form other than on printed paper. In such cases, an acceptable level of accessibility, usability and reliability must be assured. |
|
(n) |
The use of an abridged form of the Operations Manual does not exempt the operator from the requirements of OPS 1.130. |
OPS 1.1045
Operations Manual — structure and contents
(See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1045)
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that the main structure of the Operations Manual is as follows:
|
|
(b) |
An operator shall ensure that the contents of the Operations Manual are in accordance with Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1045 and relevant to the area and type of operation. |
|
(c) |
An operator shall ensure that, the detailed structure of the Operations Manual is acceptable to the Authority. |
OPS 1.1050
Aeroplane Flight Manual
An operator shall keep a current approved Aeroplane Flight Manual or equivalent document for each aeroplane that it operates.
OPS 1.1055
Journey log
|
(a) |
An operator shall retain the following information for each flight in the form of a Journey Log:
|
|
(b) |
An operator may be permitted not to keep an aeroplane journey log, or parts thereof, by the Authority if the relevant information is available in other documentation. |
|
(c) |
An operator shall ensure that all entries are made concurrently and that they are permanent in nature. |
OPS 1.1060
Operational flight plan
|
(a) |
An operator must ensure that the operational flight plan used and the entries made during flight contain the following items:
|
|
(b) |
Items which are readily available in other documentation or from another acceptable source or are irrelevant to the type of operation may be omitted from the operational flight plan. |
|
(c) |
An operator must ensure that the operational flight plan and its use are described in the Operations Manual. |
|
(d) |
An operator shall ensure that all entries on the operational flight plan are made concurrently and that they are permanent in nature. |
OPS 1.1065
Document storage periods
An operator shall ensure that all records and all relevant operational and technical information for each individual flight, are stored for the periods prescribed in Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1065.
OPS 1.1070
Operator's continuing airworthiness management exposition
An operator shall keep a current approved continuing airworthiness e management exposition as prescribed in Part M, paragraph M.A.704.
OPS 1.1071
Aeroplane Technical Log
An operator shall keep an aeroplane technical log as prescribed in OPS 1.915.
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1045
Operations Manual Contents
An operator shall ensure that the Operations Manual contains the following:
A. GENERAL/BASIC
0. ADMINISTRATION AND CONTROL OF OPERATIONS MANUAL
0.1. Introduction
|
(a) |
A statement that the manual complies with all applicable regulations and with the terms and conditions of the applicable Air Operator Certificate. |
|
(b) |
A statement that the manual contains operational instructions that are to be complied with by the relevant personnel. |
|
(c) |
A list and brief description of the various parts, their contents, applicability and use. |
|
(d) |
Explanations and definitions of terms and words needed for the use of the manual. |
0.2. System of amendment and revision
|
(a) |
Details of the person(s) responsible for the issuance and insertion of amendments and revisions. |
|
(b) |
A record of amendments and revisions with insertion dates and effective dates. |
|
(c) |
A statement that handwritten amendments and revisions are not permitted except in situations requiring immediate amendment or revision in the interest of safety. |
|
(d) |
A description of the system for the annotation of pages and their effective dates. |
|
(e) |
A list of effective pages. |
|
(f) |
Annotation of changes (on text pages and, as far as practicable, on charts and diagrams). |
|
(g) |
Temporary revisions. |
A description of the distribution system for the manuals, amendments and revisions.
1. ORGANISATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES
|
1.1. |
Organisational structure. A description of the organisational structure including the general company organigram and operations department organigram. The organigram must depict the relationship between the Operations Department and the other Departments of the company. In particular, the subordination and reporting lines of all Divisions, Departments, etc., which pertain to the safety of flight operations, must be shown. |
|
1.2. |
Nominated postholders. The name of each nominated postholder responsible for flight operations, the maintenance system, crew training and ground operations, as prescribed in OPS 1.175(i). A description of their function and responsibilities must be included. |
|
1.3. |
Responsibilities and duties of operations management personnel. A description of the duties, responsibilities and authority of operations management personnel pertaining to the safety of flight operations and the compliance with the applicable regulations. |
|
1.4. |
Authority, duties and responsibilities of the commander. A statement defining the authority, duties and responsibilities of the commander. |
|
1.5. |
Duties and responsibilities of crew members other than the commander. |
2. OPERATIONAL CONTROL AND SUPERVISION
|
2.1. |
Supervision of the operation by the operator. A description of the system for supervision of the operation by the operator (see OPS 1.175(g)). This must show how the safety of flight operations and the qualifications of personnel are supervised. In particular, the procedures related to the following items must be described:
|
|
2.2. |
System of promulgation of additional operational instructions and information. A description of any system for promulgating information which may be of an operational nature but is supplementary to that in the Operations Manual. The applicability of this information and the responsibilities for its promulgation must be included. |
|
2.3. |
Accident prevention and flight safety programme. A description of the main aspects of the flight safety programme. |
|
2.4. |
Operational control. A description of the procedures and responsibilities necessary to exercise operational control with respect to flight safety. |
|
2.5. |
Powers of the Authority. A description of the powers of the Authority. and guidance to staff on how to facilitate inspections by Authority personnel. |
3. QUALITY SYSTEM
A description of the quality system adopted including at least:
|
(a) |
Quality policy; |
|
(b) |
A description of the organisation of the Quality System; and |
|
(c) |
Allocation of duties and responsibilities. |
4. CREW COMPOSITION
|
4.1. |
Crew Composition. An explanation of the method for determining crew compositions taking account of the following:
|
|
4.2. |
Designation of the commander. The rules applicable to the designation of the commander. |
|
4.3. |
Flight crew incapacitation. Instructions on the succession of command in the event of flight crew incapacitation. |
|
4.4. |
Operation of more than one type. A statement indicating which aeroplanes are considered as one type for the purpose of:
|
5. QUALIFICATION REQUIREMENTS
|
5.1. |
A description of the required licence, rating(s), qualification/competency (e.g. for routes and aerodromes), experience, training, checking and recency for operations personnel to conduct their duties. Consideration must be given to the aeroplane type, kind of operation and composition of the crew. |
|
5.2. |
Flight crew
|
|
5.3. |
Cabin crew.
|
|
5.4. |
Training, checking and supervision personnel.
|
|
5.5. |
Other operations personnel |
6. CREW HEALTH PRECAUTIONS
|
6.1. |
Crew health precautions. The relevant regulations and guidance to crew members concerning health including:
|
7. FLIGHT TIME LIMITATIONS
|
7.1. |
Flight and Duty Time Limitations and Rest Requirements. The scheme developed by the operator in accordance with applicable requirements. |
|
7.2. |
Exceedances of flight and duty time limitations and/or reductions of rest periods. Conditions under which flight and duty time may be exceeded or rest periods may be reduced and the procedures used to report these modifications. |
8. OPERATING PROCEDURES
8.1. Flight Preparation Instructions. As applicable to the operation:
|
8.1.1. |
Minimum Flight Altitudes. A description of the method of determination and application of minimum altitudes including:
|
|
8.1.2. |
Criteria and responsibilities for the authorisation of the use of aerodromes taking into account the applicable requirements of Subparts D, E, F, G, H, I and J. |
|
8.1.3. |
Methods for establishing of aerodrome operating minima. The method for establishing aerodrome operating minima for IFR flights in accordance with OPS 1 Subpart E. Reference must be made to procedures for the determination of the visibility and/or runway visual range and for the applicability of the actual visibility observed by the pilots, the reported visibility and the reported runway visual range. |
|
8.1.4. |
En-route Operating Minima for VFR Flights or VFR portions of a flight and, where single engined aeroplanes are used, instructions for route selection with respect to the availability of surfaces which permit a safe forced landing. |
|
8.1.5. |
Presentation and Application of Aerodrome and En-route Operating Minima |
|
8.1.6. |
Interpretation of meteorological information. Explanatory material on the decoding of MET forecasts and MET reports relevant to the area of operations, including the interpretation of conditional expressions. |
|
8.1.7. |
Determination of the quantities of fuel, oil and water methanol carried. The methods by which the quantities of fuel, oil and water methanol to be carried are determined and monitored in flight. This section must also include instructions on the measurement and distribution of the fluid carried on board. Such instructions must take account of all circumstances likely to be encountered on the flight, including the possibility of in-flight replanning and of failure of one or more of the aeroplane's power plants. The system for maintaining fuel and oil records must also be described. |
|
8.1.8. |
Mass and Centre of Gravity. The general principles of mass and centre of gravity including:
|
|
8.1.9. |
ATS Flight Plan. Procedures and responsibilities for the preparation and submission of the air traffic services flight plan. Factors to be considered include the means of submission for both individual and repetitive flight plans. |
|
8.1.10. |
Operational Flight Plan. Procedures and responsibilities for the preparation and acceptance of the operational flight plan. The use of the operational flight plan must be described including samples of the operational flight plan formats in use. |
|
8.1.11. |
Operator's Aeroplane Technical Log. The responsibilities and the use of the operator's Aeroplane Technical Log must be described, including samples of the format used. |
|
8.1.12. |
List of documents, forms and additional information to be carried. |
8.2. Ground Handling Instructions
|
8.2.1. |
Fuelling procedures. A description of fuelling procedures, including:
|
|
8.2.2. |
Aeroplane, passengers and cargo handling procedures related to safety. A description of the handling procedures to be used when allocating seats and embarking and disembarking passengers and when loading and unloading the aeroplane. Further procedures, aimed at achieving safety whilst the aeroplane is on the ramp, must also be given. Handling procedures must include:
|
|
8.2.3. |
Procedures for the refusal of embarkation. Procedures to ensure that persons who appear to be intoxicated or who demonstrate by manner or physical indications that they are under the influence of drugs, except medical patients under proper care, are refused embarkation. This does not apply to medical patients under proper care. |
|
8.2.4. |
De-icing and Anti-icing on the ground. A description of the de-icing and anti-icing policy and procedures for aeroplanes on the ground. These shall include descriptions of the types and effects of icing and other contaminants on aeroplanes whilst stationary, during ground movements and during take-off. In addition, a description of the fluid types used must be given including:
|
8.3. Flight Procedures
|
8.3.1. |
VFR/IFR Policy. A description of the policy for allowing flights to be made under VFR, or of requiring flights to be made under IFR, or of changing from one to the other. |
|
8.3.2. |
Navigation Procedures. A description of all navigation procedures relevant to the type(s) and area(s) of operation. Consideration must be given to:
|
|
8.3.3. |
Altimeter setting procedures including use, where appropriate, of
|
|
8.3.4. |
Altitude alerting system procedures |
|
8.3.5. |
Ground Proximity Warning System/Terrain Avoidance Warning System. Procedures and instructions required for the avoidance of controlled flight into terrain, including limitations on high rate of descent near the surface (the related training requirements are covered in D.2.1). |
|
8.3.6. |
Policy and procedures for the use of TCAS/ACAS |
|
8.3.7. |
Policy and procedures for in-flight fuel management |
|
8.3.8. |
Adverse and potentially hazardous atmospheric conditions. Procedures for operating in, and/or avoiding adverse and potentially hazardous atmospheric conditions including:
|
|
8.3.9. |
Wake Turbulence. Wake turbulence separation criteria, taking into account aeroplane types, wind conditions and runway location. |
|
8.3.10. |
Crew members at their stations. The requirements for crew members to occupy their assigned stations or seats during the different phases of flight or whenever deemed necessary in the interest of safety and also include procedures for controlled rest on the flight deck. |
|
8.3.11. |
Use of safety belts for crew and passengers. The requirements for crew members and passengers to use safety belts and/or harnesses during the different phases of flight or whenever deemed necessary in the interest of safety. |
|
8.3.12. |
Admission to Flight Deck. The conditions for the admission to the flight deck of persons other than the flight crew. The policy regarding the admission of Inspectors from the Authority must also be included. |
|
8.3.13. |
Use of vacant crew seats. The conditions and procedures for the use of vacant crew seats. |
|
8.3.14. |
Incapacitation of crew members. Procedures to be followed in the event of incapacitation of crew members in flight. Examples of the types of incapacitation and the means for recognising them must be included. |
|
8.3.15. |
Cabin Safety Requirements. Procedures covering:
|
|
8.3.16. |
Passenger briefing procedures. The contents, means and timing of passenger briefing in accordance with OPS 1.285. |
|
8.3.17. |
Procedures for aeroplanes operated whenever required cosmic or solar radiation detection equipment is carried. Procedures for the use of cosmic or solar radiation detection equipment and for recording its readings including actions to be taken in the event that limit values specified in the Operations Manual are exceeded. In addition, the procedures, including ATS procedures, to be followed in the event that a decision to descend or re-route is taken. |
|
8.3.18 |
Policy on the use of Autopilot and Auto throttle. |
|
8.4. |
All Weather Operations. A description of the operational procedures associated with All Weather operations (See also OPS Subpart D and E). |
|
8.5. |
ETOPS. A description of the ETOPS operational procedures. |
|
8.6. |
Use of the Minimum Equipment and Configuration Deviation List(s) |
8.7. Non revenue flights. Procedures and limitations for:
|
(a) |
Training flights; |
|
(b) |
Test flights; |
|
(c) |
Delivery flights; |
|
(d) |
Ferry flights; |
|
(e) |
Demonstration flights; and |
|
(f) |
Positioning flights, including the kind of persons who may be carried on such flights. |
8.8. Oxygen Requirements
|
8.8.1. |
An explanation of the conditions under which oxygen must be provided and used. |
|
8.8.2. |
The oxygen requirements specified for:
|
9. DANGEROUS GOODS AND WEAPONS
|
9.1. |
Information, instructions and general guidance on the transport of dangerous goods including:
|
|
9.2. |
The conditions under which weapons, munitions of war and sporting weapons may be carried. |
10. SECURITY
|
10.1. |
Security instructions and guidance of a non-confidential nature which must include the authority and responsibilities of operations personnel. Policies and procedures for handling and reporting crime on board such as unlawful interference, sabotage, bomb threats, and hijacking must also be included. |
|
10.2. |
A description of preventative security measures and training. Note: Parts of the security instructions and guidance may be kept confidential. |
11. HANDLING, NOTIFYING AND REPORTING OCCURENCES
Procedures for the handling, notifying and reporting occurrences. This section must include:
|
(a) |
Definitions occurrences and of the relevant responsibilities of all persons involved; |
|
(b) |
Illustrations of forms used for reporting all types of occurrences (or copies of the forms themselves), instructions on how they are to be completed, the addresses to which they should be sent and the time allowed for this to be done; |
|
(c) |
In the event of an accident, descriptions of which company departments, Authorities and other organisations that have to be notified, how this will be done and in what sequence; |
|
(d) |
Procedures for verbal notification to air traffic service units of incidents involving ACAS RAs, bird hazards, dangerous goods and hazardous conditions; |
|
(e) |
Procedures for submitting written reports on air traffic incidents, ACAS RAs, bird strikes, dangerous goods incidents or accidents, and unlawful interference; |
|
(f) |
Reporting procedures to ensure compliance with OPS 1.085(b) and 1.420. These procedures must include internal safety related reporting procedures to be followed by crew members, designed to ensure that the commander is informed immediately of any incident that has endangered, or may have endangered, safety during flight and that he/she is provided with all relevant information. |
12. RULES OF THE AIR
Rules of the Air including:
|
(a) |
Visual and instrument flight rules; |
|
(b) |
Territorial application of the Rules of the Air; |
|
(c) |
Communication procedures including COM-failure procedures; |
|
(d) |
Information and instructions relating to the interception of civil aeroplanes; |
|
(e) |
The circumstances in which a radio listening watch is to be maintained; |
|
(f) |
Signals; |
|
(g) |
Time system used in operation; |
|
(h) |
ATC clearances, adherence to flight plan and position reports; |
|
(i) |
Visual signals used to warn an unauthorised aeroplane flying in or about to enter a restricted, prohibited or danger area; |
|
(j) |
Procedures for pilots observing an accident or receiving a distress transmission; |
|
(k) |
The ground/air visual codes for use by survivors, description and use of signal aids; and |
|
(l) |
Distress and urgency signals. |
13. LEASING
A description of the operational arrangements for leasing, associated procedures and management responsibilities.
B. AEROPLANE OPERATING MATTERS — TYPE RELATED
Taking account of the differences between types, and variants of types, under the following headings:
0. GENERAL INFORMATION AND UNITS OF MEASUREMENT
|
0.1. |
General Information (e.g. aeroplane dimensions), including a description of the units of measurement used for the operation of the aeroplane type concerned and conversion tables. |
1. LIMITATIONS
|
1.1. |
A description of the certified limitations and the applicable operational limitations including:
|
2. NORMAL PROCEDURES
|
2.1. |
The normal procedures and duties assigned to the crew, the appropriate check-lists, the system for use of the check-lists and a statement covering the necessary coordination procedures between flight and cabin crew. The following normal procedures and duties must be included:
|
3. ABNORMAL AND EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
|
3.1. |
The abnormal and emergency procedures and duties assigned to the crew, the appropriate check-lists, the system for use of the check-lists and a statement covering the necessary coordination procedures between flight and cabin crew. The following abnormal and emergency procedures and duties must be included:
|
4. PERFORMANCE
|
4.0. |
Performance data must be provided in a form in which it can be used without difficulty. |
|
4.1. |
Performance data. Performance material which provides the necessary data for compliance with the performance requirements prescribed in OPS 1 Subparts F, G, H and I must be included to allow the determination of:
|
|
4.1.1. |
Supplementary data covering flights in icing conditions. Any certificated performance related to an allowable configuration, or configuration deviation, such as anti-skid inoperative, must be included. |
|
4.1.2. |
If performance Data, as required for the appropriate performance class, is not available in the approved AFM, then other data acceptable to the Authority must be included. Alternatively, the Operations Manual may contain cross-reference to the approved Data contained in the AFM where such Data is not likely to be used often or in an emergency. |
|
4.2. |
Additional Performance Data. Additional performance data where applicable including:
|
5. FLIGHT PLANNING
|
5.1. |
Data and instructions necessary for pre-flight and in-flight planning including factors such as speed schedules and power settings. Where applicable, procedures for engine(s)-out operations, ETOPS (particularly the one-engine-inoperative cruise speed and maximum distance to an adequate aerodrome determined in accordance with OPS 1.245) and flights to isolated aerodromes must be included. |
|
5.2. |
The method for calculating fuel needed for the various stages of flight, in accordance with OPS 1.255. |
6. MASS AND BALANCE
Instructions and data for the calculation of the mass and balance including:
|
(a) |
Calculation system (e.g. Index system); |
|
(b) |
Information and instructions for completion of mass and balance documentation, including manual and computer generated types; |
|
(c) |
Limiting masses and centre of gravity for the types, variants or individual aeroplanes used by the operator; and |
|
(d) |
Dry Operating mass and corresponding centre of gravity or index. |
7. LOADING
Procedures and provisions for loading and securing the load in the aeroplane.
8. CONFIGURATION DEVIATION LIST
The Configuration Deviation List(s) (CDL), if provided by the manufacturer, taking account of the aeroplane types and variants operated including procedures to be followed when an aeroplane is being despatched under the terms of its CDL
9. MINIMUM EQUIPMENT LIST
The Minimum Equipment List (MEL) taking account of the aeroplane types and variants operated and the type(s)/area(s) of operation. The MEL must include the navigational equipment and take into account the required performance for the route and area of operation.
10. SURVIVAL AND EMERGENCY EQUIPMENT INCLUDING OXYGEN
|
10.1. |
A list of the survival equipment to be carried for the routes to be flown and the procedures for checking the serviceability of this equipment prior to take-off. Instructions regarding the location, accessibility and use of survival and emergency equipment and its associated check list(s) must also be included. |
|
10.2. |
The procedure for determining the amount of oxygen required and the quantity that is available. The flight profile, number of occupants and possible cabin decompression must be considered. The information provided must be in a form in which it can be used without difficulty. |
11. EMERGENCY EVACUATION PROCEDURES
|
11.1. |
Instructions for preparation for emergency evacuation including crew co-ordination and emergency station assignment. |
|
11.2. |
Emergency evacuation procedures. A description of the duties of all members of the crew for the rapid evacuation of an aeroplane and the handling of the passengers in the event of a forced landing, ditching or other emergency. |
12. AEROPLANE SYSTEMS
A description of the aeroplane systems, related controls and indications and operating instructions.
C. ROUTE AND AERODROME INSTRUCTIONS AND INFORMATION
|
1. |
Instructions and information relating to communications, navigation and aerodromes including minimum flight levels and altitudes for each route to be flown and operating minima for each aerodrome planned to be used, including:
|
D. TRAINING
|
1. |
Training syllabi and checking programmes for all operations personnel assigned to operational duties in connection with the preparation and/or conduct of a flight. |
|
2. |
Training syllabi and checking programmes must include: |
|
2.1. |
For flight crew. All relevant items prescribed in Subpart E and N; |
|
2.2. |
For cabin crew. All relevant items prescribed in Subpart O; |
|
2.3. |
For operations personnel concerned, including crew members:
|
|
2.4. |
For operations personnel other than crew members (e.g. dispatcher, handling personnel etc.). All other relevant items prescribed in OPS pertaining to their duties. |
|
3. |
Procedures |
|
3.1. |
Procedures for training and checking. |
|
3.2. |
Procedures to be applied in the event that personnel do not achieve or maintain the required standards. |
|
3.3. |
Procedures to ensure that abnormal or emergency situations requiring the application of part or all of abnormal or emergency procedures and simulation of IMC by artificial means are not simulated during commercial air transportation flights. |
|
4. |
Description of documentation to be stored and storage periods (See Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1065). |
Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1065
Document storage periods
An operator shall ensure that the following information/documentation is stored in an acceptable form, accessible to the Authority, for the periods shown in the Tables below.
Note: Additional information relating to maintenance records is prescribed in Part-M.
Table 1
Information used for the preparation and execution of a flight
|
Information used for the preparation and execution of the flight as described in OPS 1.135 |
|
|
Operational flight plan |
3 months |
|
Aeroplane Technical log |
36 months after the date of the last entry, in accordance with Part M M.A.306(c) |
|
Route specific NOTAM/AIS briefing documentation if edited by the operator |
3 months |
|
Mass and balance documentation |
3 months |
|
Notification of special loads including dangerous goods |
3 months |
Table 2
Reports
|
Reports |
|
|
Journey log |
3 months |
|
Flight report(s) for recording details of any occurrence, as prescribed in OPS 1.420, or any event which the commander deems necessary to report/record |
3 months |
|
Reports on exceedances of duty and/or reducing rest periods |
3 months |
Table 3
Flight crew records
|
Flight Crew Records |
|
|
Flight, Duty and Rest time |
15 months |
|
Licence |
As long as the flight crew member is exercising the privileges of the licence for the operator |
|
Conversion training and checking |
3 years |
|
Command course (including checking) |
3 years |
|
Recurrent training and checking |
3 years |
|
Training and checking to operate in either pilot's seat |
3 years |
|
Recent experience (OPS 1.970 refers) |
15 months |
|
Route and aerodrome competence (OPS1.975 refers) |
3 years |
|
Training and qualification for specific operations when required by OPS (e.g. ETOPS CATII/III operations) |
3 years |
|
Dangerous Goods training as appropriate |
3 years |
Table 4
Cabin crew records
|
Cabin Crew Records |
|
|
Flight, Duty and Rest time |
15 months |
|
Initial training, conversion and differences training (including checking) |
As long as the cabin crew member is employed by the operator |
|
Recurrent training and refresher (including checking) |
Until 12 months after the cabin crew member has left the employ of the operator |
|
Dangerous Goods training as appropriate |
3 years |
Table 5
Records for other operations personnel
|
Records for other operations personnel |
|
|
Training/qualification records of other personnel for whom an approved training programme is required by OPS |
Last 2 training records |
Table 6
Other records
|
Other Records |
|
|
Records on cosmic and solar radiation dosage |
Until 12 months after the crew member has left the employ of the operator |
|
Quality System records |
5 years |
|
Dangerous Goods Transport Document |
3 months after completion of the flight |
|
Dangerous Goods Acceptance Checklist |
3 months after completion of the flight |
SUBPART Q
FLIGHT AND DUTY TIME LIMITATIONS AND REST REQUIREMENTS
OPS 1.1090
Objective and scope
|
1. |
An operator shall establish a flight and duty time limitations and rest scheme (FTL) for crew members. |
|
2. |
An operator shall ensure that for all its flights: |
|
2.1. |
The flight and duty time limitations and rest scheme is in accordance with both:
|
|
2.2. |
Flights are planned to be completed within the allowable flight duty period taking into account the time necessary for pre-flight duties, the flight and turn-around times. |
|
2.3. |
Duty rosters will be prepared and published sufficiently in advance to provide the opportunity for crew members to plan adequate rest. |
|
3. |
Operators' responsibilities |
|
3.1. |
An operator shall nominate a home base for each crew member. |
|
3.2. |
Operators shall be expected to appreciate the relationship between the frequencies and pattern of flight duty periods and rest periods and give due consideration to the cumulative effects of undertaking long duty hours interspersed with minimum rest. |
|
3.3. |
Operators shall allocate duty patterns which avoid such undesirable practices as alternating day/night duties or the positioning of crew members so that a serious disruption of established sleep/work pattern occurs. |
|
3.4. |
Operators shall plan local days free of duty and notify crew members in advance. |
|
3.5. |
Operators shall ensure that rest periods provide sufficient time to enable crew to overcome the effects of the previous duties and to be well rested by the start of the following flight duty period. |
|
3.6. |
Operators shall ensure flight duty periods are planned to enable crew members to remain sufficiently free from fatigue so they can operate to a satisfactory level of safety under all circumstances. |
|
4. |
Crew Members' responsibilities |
|
4.1. |
A crew member shall not operate an aeroplane if he/she knows that he/she is suffering from or is likely to suffer from fatigue or feels unfit, to the extent that the flight may be endangered. |
|
4.2. |
Crew members should make optimum use of the opportunities and facilities for rest provided and plan and use their rest periods properly. |
|
5. |
Responsibilities of Civil Aviation Authorities |
|
5.1. |
Variations |
|
5.1.1. |
Subject to the provisions of Article 8, the Authority may grant variations to the requirements in this Subpart in accordance with applicable laws and procedures within the Member States concerned and in consultation with interested parties. |
|
5.1.2. |
Each operator will have to demonstrate to the Authority, using operational experience and taking into account other relevant factors such as current scientific knowledge, that its request for a variation produces an equivalent level of safety. |
Such variations will be accompanied with suitable mitigation measures where appropriate.
OPS 1.1095
Definitions
For the purposes of this Regulation, the following definitions shall apply:
|
1.1. |
Augmented flight crew: A flight crew which comprises more than the minimum number required for the operation of the aeroplane and in which each flight crew member can leave his/her post and be replaced by another appropriately qualified flight crew member. |
|
1.2. |
Block Time: The time between an aeroplane first moving from its parking place for the purpose of taking off until it comes to rest on the designated parking position and all engines or propellers are stopped. |
|
1.3. |
Break: A period free of all duties, which counts as duty, being less than a rest period. |
|
1.4. |
Duty: Any task that a crew member is required to carry out associated with the business of an AOC holder. Unless where specific rules are provided for by this Regulation, the Authority shall define whether and to what extent standby is to be accounted for as duty. |
|
1.5. |
Duty period: A period which starts when a crew member is required by an operator to commence a duty and ends when the crew member is free from all duties. |
|
1.6. |
Flight Duty Period: A Flight Duty Period (FDP) is any time during which a person operates in an aircraft as a member of its crew. The FDP starts when the crew member is required by an operator to report for a flight or a series of flights; it finishes at the end of the last flight on which he/she is an operating crew member. |
|
1.7. |
Home base: The location nominated by the operator to the crew member from where the crew member normally starts and ends a duty period or a series of duty periods and where, under normal conditions, the operator is not responsible for the accommodation of the crew member concerned. |
|
1.8. |
Local Day: A 24 hour period commencing at 00:00 local time. |
|
1.9. |
Local Night: A period of 8 hours falling between 22:00 hours and 08:00 hours local time. |
|
1.10. |
A Single Day Free of Duty: A single day free of duty shall include two local nights. A rest period may be included as part of the day off. |
|
1.11. |
Operating crew member: A crew member who carries out his/her duties in an aircraft during a flight or during any part of a flight. |
|
1.12 |
Positioning: The transferring of a non-operating crew member from place to place, at the behest of the operator, excluding travelling time. Travelling time is defined as:
|
|
1.13. |
Rest Period: An uninterrupted and defined period of time during which a crew member is free from all duties and airport standby. |
|
1.14. |
Standby: A defined period of time during which a crew member is required by the operator to be available to receive an assignment for a flight, positioning or other duty without an intervening rest period. |
|
1.15. |
Window of Circadian Low (WOCL): The Window of Circadian Low (WOCL) is the period between 02:00 hours and 05:59 hours. Within a band of three time zones the WOCL refers to home base time. Beyond these three time zones the WOCL refers to home base time for the first 48 hours after departure from home base time zone, and to local time thereafter. |
OPS 1.1100
Flight and duty limitations
|
1.1. |
Cumulative Duty Hours An operator shall ensure that the total duty periods to which a crew member is assigned do not exceed:
|
|
1.2. |
Limit on total block times An operator shall ensure that the total block times of the flights on which an individual crew member is assigned as an operating crew member does not exceed
|
OPS 1.1105
Maximum daily flight duty period (FDP)
|
1.1. |
This OPS does not apply to single pilot operations and to emergency medical service operations. |
|
1.2. |
An operator shall specify reporting times that realistically reflect the time for safety related ground duties as approved by the Authority. |
|
1.3. |
The maximum basic daily FDP is 13 hours. |
|
1.4. |
These 13 hours will be reduced by 30 minutes for each sector from the third sector onwards with a maximum total reduction of two hours. |
|
1.5. |
When the FDP starts in the WOCL, the maximum stated in point 1.3 and point 1.4 will be reduced by 100 % of its encroachment up to a maximum of two hours. When the FDP ends in or fully encompasses the WOCL, the maximum FDP stated in point 1.3 and point 1.4 will be reduced by 50 % of its encroachment. |
|
2. |
Extensions: |
|
2.1. |
The maximum daily FDP can be extended by up to one hour. |
|
2.2. |
Extensions are not allowed for a basic FDP of 6 sectors or more. |
|
2.3. |
Where an FDP encroaches on the WOCL by up to two hours extensions are limited to up to four sectors. |
|
2.4. |
Where an FDP encroaches on the WOCL by more than two hours extensions are limited to up to two sectors. |
|
2.5. |
The maximum number of extensions is two in any 7 consecutive days. |
|
2.6. |
Where an FDP is planned to use an extension pre and post flight minimum rest is increased by two hours or post flight rest only is increased by four hours. Where the extensions are used for consecutive FDPs the pre and post rest between the two operations shall run consecutively. |
|
2.7. |
When an FDP with extension starts in the period 22:00 to 04:59 hours the operator will limit the FDP to 11,45 hours. |
|
3. |
Cabin Crew |
|
3.1. |
For cabin crew being assigned to a flight or series of flights, the FDP of the cabin crew may be extended by the difference in reporting time between cabin crew and flight crew, as long as the difference does not exceed one hour. |
|
4. |
Operational Robustness |
|
4.1. |
Planned schedules must allow for flights to be completed within the maximum permitted flight duty period. To assist in achieving this operators will take action to change a schedule or crewing arrangements at the latest where the actual operation exceeds the maximum FDP on more than 33 % of the flights in that schedule during a scheduled seasonal period. |
|
5. |
Positioning |
|
5.1. |
All the time spent on positioning is counted as duty. |
|
5.2. |
Positioning after reporting but prior to operating shall be included as part of the FDP but shall not count as a sector. |
|
5.3. |
A positioning sector immediately following operating sector will be taken into account for the calculation of minimum rest as defined in OPS 1.1110 points 1.1 and 1.2 below. |
|
6. |
Extended FDP (Split Duty) |
|
6.1. |
The Authority may grant approval to an operation based on an extended FDP including a break, subject to the provisions of Article 8. |
|
6.2. |
Each operator will have to demonstrate to the Authority, using operational experience and taking into account other relevant factors, such as current scientific knowledge, that its request for an extended FDP produces an equivalent level of safety. |
OPS 1.1110
Rest
|
1. |
Minimum rest |
|
1.1. |
The minimum rest which must be provided before undertaking a flight duty period starting at home base shall be at least as long as the preceding duty period or 12 hours whichever is the greater; |
|
1.2. |
The minimum rest which must be provided before undertaking a flight duty period starting away from home base shall be at least as long as the preceding duty period or 10 hours whichever is the greater; when on minimum rest away from home base, the operator must allow for an 8 hour sleep opportunity taking due account of travelling and other physiological needs; |
|
1.3. |
An operator will ensure that effects on crew members of time zone differences will be compensated by additional rest, as regulated by the Authority subject to the provisions of Article 8. |
|
1.4.1. |
Notwithstanding 1.1 and 1.2 and subject to the provisions of Article 8, the Authority may grant reduced rest arrangements. |
|
1.4.2. |
Each operator will have to demonstrate to the Authority, using operational experience and taking into account other relevant factors, such as current scientific knowledge, that its request for reduced rest arrangements produces an equivalent level of safety. |
|
2. |
Rest periods |
|
2.1. |
An operator shall ensure that the minimum rest provided as outlined above is increased periodically to a weekly rest period, being a 36-hour period including two local nights, such that there shall never be more than 168 hours between the end of one weekly rest period and the start of the next. As an exception to OPS 1.1095 point 1.9, the Authority may decide that the second of those local nights may start from 20:00 hours if the weekly rest period has a duration of at least 40 hours. |
OPS 1.1115
Extension of flight duty period due to in-flight rest
|
1. |
Subject to the provisions of Article 8 and providing each operator demonstrates to the Authority, using operational experience and taking into account other relevant factors such as current scientific knowledge, that its request produces an equivalent level of safety: |
|
1.1. |
Flight Crew Augmentation the Authority shall set the requirements in connection with the augmentation of a basic flight crew for the purpose of extending the flight duty period beyond the limits in OPS 1.1105 above; |
|
1.2. |
Cabin crew the Authority shall set the requirements in connection with the minimum in-flight rest by cabin crew member(s) when the FDP goes beyond the limitations in OPS 1.1105 above; |
OPS 1.1120
Unforeseen circumstances in actual flight operations — commander's discretion
|
1. |
Taking into account the need for careful control of these instances implied underneath, during the actual flight operation, which starts at the reporting time, the limits on flight duty, duty and rest periods prescribed in this Subpart may be modified in the event of unforeseen circumstances. Any such modifications must be acceptable to the commander after consultation with all other crew members and must, in all circumstances, comply with the following: |
|
1.1. |
The maximum FDP referred to in OPS 1.1105 point 1.3 above may not be increased by more than two hours unless the flight crew has been augmented, in which case the maximum flight duty period may be increased by not more than 3 hours; |
|
1.1.2. |
If on the final sector within a FDP unforeseen circumstances occur after take off that will result in the permitted increase being exceeded, the flight may continue to the planned destination or alternate; |
|
1.1.3. |
In the event of such circumstances, the rest period following the FDP may be reduced but never below the minimum rest defined in OPS 1.1110 point 1.2 of this Subpart; |
|
1.2. |
The Commander shall, in case of special circumstances, which could lead to severe fatigue, and after consultation with the crew members affected, reduce the actual flight duty time and/or increase the rest time in order to eliminate any detrimental effect on flight safety; |
|
1.3. |
An operator shall ensure that: |
|
1.3.1. |
The Commander submits a report to the operator whenever a FDP is increased by his/her discretion or when a rest period is reduced in actual operation and |
|
1.3.2. |
Where the increase of a FDP or reduction of a rest period exceeds one hour, a copy of the report, to which the operator must add his comments, is sent to the Authority no later than 28 days after the event. |
OPS 1.1125
Standby
|
1. |
Airport Standby |
|
1.1. |
A crew member is on airport standby from reporting at the normal report point until the end of the notified standby period. |
|
1.2. |
Airport standby will count in full for the purposes of cumulative duty hours. |
|
1.3. |
Where airport standby is immediately followed by a flight duty, the relationship between such airport standby and the assigned flight duty shall be defined by the Authority. In such a case, airport standby shall be added to the duty period referred to in OPS 1.1110 under points 1.1 and 1.2 for the purposes of calculating minimum rest. |
|
1.4. |
Where the airport standby does not lead to assignment on a flight duty, it shall be followed at least by a rest period as regulated by the Authority. |
|
1.5. |
While on airport standby the operator will provide to the crew member a quiet and comfortable place not open to the public. |
|
2. |
Other forms of standby (including standby at hotel) |
|
2.1. |
Subject to the provisions of Article 8, all other forms of standby shall be regulated by the Authority, taking into account the following: |
|
2.1.1. |
All activity shall be rostered and/or notified in advance. |
|
2.1.2. |
The start and end time of the standby shall be defined and notified in advance. |
|
2.1.3. |
The maximum length of any standby at a place other than a specified reporting point shall be determined. |
|
2.1.4. |
Taking into account facilities available for the crew member to rest and other relevant factors, the relationship between the standby and any assigned flight duty resulting from the standby shall be defined. |
|
2.1.5. |
The counting of standby times for the purposes of cumulative duty hours shall be defined. |
OPS 1.1130
Nutrition
A meal and drink opportunity must occur in order to avoid any detriment to a crew member's performance, especially when the FDP exceeds 6 hours.
OPS 1.1135
Flight duty, duty and rest period records
|
1. |
An operator shall ensure that crew member's records include:
and are maintained to ensure compliance with the requirements of this Subpart; copies of these records will be made available to the crew member upon request. |
|
2. |
If the records held by the operator under paragraph 1 do not cover all of his/her flight duty, duty and rest periods, the crew member concerned shall maintain an individual record of his/her
|
|
3. |
A crew member shall present his/her records on request to any operator who employs his/her services before he/she commences a flight duty period. |
|
4. |
Records shall be preserved for at least 15 calendar months from the date of the last relevant entry or longer if required in accordance with national laws. |
|
5. |
Additionally, operators shall separately retain all aircraft commander's discretion reports of extended flight duty periods, extended flight hours and reduced rest periods for at least six months after the event. |
SUBPART R
TRANSPORT OF DANGEROUS GOODS BY AIR
OPS 1.1150
Terminology
|
(a) |
Terms used in this Subpart have the following meanings:
|
OPS 1.1155
Approval to Transport — Dangerous Goods
An operator shall not transport dangerous goods unless approved to do so by the Authority.
OPS 1.1160
Scope
|
(a) |
An operator shall comply with the provisions contained in the Technical Instructions on all occasions when dangerous goods are carried, irrespective of whether the flight is wholly or partly within or wholly outside the territory of a State. |
|
(b) |
Articles and substances which would otherwise be classed as dangerous goods are excluded from the provisions of this Subpart, to the extent specified in the Technical Instructions, provided:
|
|
(c) |
Articles and substances intended as replacements for those in (b)(1) and (b)(2) above shall be transported on an aeroplane as specified in the Technical Instructions. |
OPS 1.1165
Limitations on the Transport of Dangerous Goods
|
(a) |
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that articles and substances that are specifically identified by name or generic description in the Technical Instructions as being forbidden for transport under any circumstances are not carried on any aeroplane. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that articles and substances or other goods that are identified in the Technical Instructions as being forbidden for transport in normal circumstances are only transported when:
|
OPS 1.1170
Classification
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that articles and substances are classified as dangerous goods as specified in the Technical Instructions.
OPS 1.1175
Packing
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that dangerous goods are packed as specified in the Technical Instructions.
OPS 1.1180
Labelling and Marking
|
(a) |
An operator shall take all reasonable measures to ensure that packages, overpacks and freight containers are labelled and marked as specified in the Technical Instructions. |
|
(b) |
Where dangerous goods are carried on a flight which takes place wholly or partly outside the territory of a State, labelling and marking must be in the English language in addition to any other language requirements. |
OPS 1.1185
Dangerous Goods Transport Document
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that, except when otherwise specified in the Technical Instructions, dangerous goods are accompanied by a dangerous goods transport document. |
|
(b) |
Where dangerous goods are carried on a flight which takes place wholly or partly outside the territory of a State, the English language must be used for the dangerous goods transport document in addition to any other language requirements. |
OPS 1.1195
Acceptance of Dangerous Goods
|
(a) |
An operator shall not accept dangerous goods for transport until the package, overpack or freight container has been inspected in accordance with the acceptance procedures in the Technical Instructions. |
|
(b) |
An operator or his handling agent shall use an acceptance check list. The acceptance check list shall allow for all relevant details to be checked and shall be in such form as will allow for the recording of the results of the acceptance check by manual, mechanical or computerised means. |
OPS 1.1200
Inspection for Damage, Leakage or Contamination
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that:
|
OPS 1.1205
Removal of Contamination
|
(a) |
An operator shall ensure that:
|
OPS 1.1210
Loading Restrictions
|
(a) |
Passenger Cabin and Flight Deck. An operator shall ensure that dangerous goods are not carried in an aeroplane cabin occupied by passengers or on the flight deck, unless otherwise specified in the Technical Instructions. |
|
(b) |
Cargo Compartments. An operator shall ensure that dangerous goods are loaded, segregated, stowed and secured on an aeroplane as specified in the Technical Instructions. |
|
(c) |
Dangerous Goods Designated for Carriage Only on Cargo Aircraft. An operator shall ensure that packages of dangerous goods bearing the “Cargo Aircraft Only” label are carried on a cargo aircraft and loaded as specified in the Technical Instructions. |
OPS 1.1215
Provision of Information
|
(a) |
Information to Ground Staff. An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(b) |
Information to Passengers and Other Persons
|
|
(c) |
Information to Crew Members. An operator shall ensure that information is provided in the Operations Manual to enable crew members to carry out their responsibilities in regard to the transport of dangerous goods, including the actions to be taken in the event of emergencies arising involving dangerous goods. |
|
(d) |
Information to the Commander. An operator shall ensure that the commander is provided with written information, as specified in the Technical Instructions. (See Table 1 of Appendix 1 to OPS 1.1065 for the document storage period). |
|
(e) |
Information in the Event of an Aeroplane Incident or Accident
|
OPS 1.1220
Training programmes
|
(a) |
An operator shall establish and maintain staff training programmes, as required by the Technical Instructions, which shall be approved by the Authority. |
|
(b) |
Operators not holding a permanent approval to carry dangerous goods. An operator shall ensure that:
|
|||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|
(c) |
Operators holding a permanent approval to carry dangerous goods. An operator shall ensure that:
|
|
(d) |
An operator shall ensure that all staff who receive training undertake a test to verify understanding of their responsibilities. |
|
(e) |
An operator shall ensure that all staff who require dangerous goods training receive recurrent training at intervals of not longer than 2 years. |
|
(f) |
An operator shall ensure that records of dangerous goods training are maintained for all staff trained in accordance with sub-paragraph (d) above and as required by the Technical Instructions. |
|
(g) |
An operator shall ensure that his handling agent's staff are trained in accordance with the applicable column of Table 1 or Table 2. Table 2
|
||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
OPS 1.1225
Dangerous Goods Incident and Accident Reports
|
(a) |
An operator shall report dangerous goods incidents and accidents to the Authority. An initial report shall be despatched within 72 hours of the event unless exceptional circumstances prevent this. |
|
(b) |
An operator shall also report to the Authority undeclared or misdeclared dangerous goods discovered in cargo or passengers' baggage. An initial report shall be despatched within 72 hours of the discovery unless exceptional circumstances prevent this. |
SUBPART S
SECURITY
OPS 1.1235
Security requirements
An operator shall ensure that all appropriate personnel are familiar, and comply, with the relevant requirements of the national security programmes of the State of the operator.
OPS 1.1240
Training programmes
An operator shall establish, maintain and conduct approved training programs which enable the operator's crew members to take appropriate action to prevent acts of unlawful interference such as sabotage or unlawful seizure of aeroplanes and to minimize the consequences of such events should they occur. The training programme shall be compatible with the National Aviation Security programme. Individual crew member shall have knowledge and competence of all relevant elements of the training programme.
OPS 1.1245
Reporting acts of unlawful interference
Following an act of unlawful interference on board an aeroplane the commander or, in his/her absence the operator, shall submit, without delay, a report of such an act to the designated local authority and the Authority in the State of the operator.
OPS1.1250
Aeroplane search procedure checklist
An operator shall ensure that there is on board a checklist of the procedures to be followed in search of a bomb or Improvised Explosive Device (IED) in case of suspected sabotage and for inspecting aeroplanes for concealed weapons, explosives or other dangerous devices where a well founded suspicion exists that the aeroplane may be the object of an act of unlawful interference. The checklist shall be supported by guidance on the appropriate course of action to be taken should a bomb or suspicious object be found and information on the least-risk bomb location specific to the aeroplane where provided by the Type Certificate holder.
OPS 1.1255
Flight crew compartment security
|
(a) |
In all aeroplanes which are equipped with a flight crew compartment door, this door shall be capable of being locked, and means or procedures acceptable to the Authority shall be provided or established by which the cabin crew can notify the flight crew in the event of suspicious activity or security breaches in the cabin. |
|
(b) |
All passenger-carrying aeroplanes of a maximum certificated take-off mass in excess of 45 500 kg or with a Maximum Approved Passenger Seating Configuration greater than 60 shall be equipped with an approved flight crew compartment door that is capable of being locked and unlocked from each pilot's station and designed to meet the applicable retroactive airworthiness operational requirements. The design of this door shall not hinder emergency operations, as required in applicable retroactive airworthiness operational requirements. |
|
(c) |
In all aeroplanes which are equipped with a flight crew compartment door in accordance with sub-paragraph (b):
|
P6_TA(2006)0300
Shipments of radioactive waste and nuclear spent fuel *
European Parliament legislative resolution on the proposal for a Council directive on the supervision and control of shipments of radioactive waste and nuclear spent fuel (COM(2005)0673 — C6-0031/2006 — 2005/0272(CNS))
(Consultation procedure)
The European Parliament,
|
— |
having regard to the Commission proposal to the Council (COM(2005)0673) (1), |
|
— |
having regard to Articles 31(2) and 32 of the Euratom Treaty, pursuant to which the Council consulted Parliament (C6-0031/2006), |
|
— |
having regard to Rule 51 of its Rules of Procedure, |
|
— |
having regard to the report of the Committee on Industry, Research and Energy (A6-0174/2006); |
|
1. |
Approves the Commission proposal as amended; |
|
2. |
Calls on the Commission to alter its proposal accordingly, pursuant to Article 119, second paragraph, of the Euratom Treaty; |
|
3. |
Calls on the Council to notify Parliament if it intends to depart from the text approved by Parliament; |
|
4. |
Asks the Council to consult Parliament again if it intends to amend the Commission proposal substantially; |
|
5. |
Instructs its President to forward its position to the Council and Commission. |
|
(1a) |
By Council Decision 2005/84/Euratom of 24 January 2005 (2), the European Atomic Energy Community acceded to the Joint Convention on the Safety of Spent Fuel Management and on the Safety of Radioactive Waste Management. |
|
(6) |
Lack of a Community common fuel cycle policy , each Member State remains responsible for the choice of its own policy on the management of the nuclear waste and spent fuel that are under its jurisdiction; the provisions of this Directive should therefore be without prejudice to the right of Member States to export their spent fuel for reprocessing and to their right to refuse the entry into their territory of radioactive waste for final treatment or disposal , except in the case of reshipment. |
|
(6) |
Each Member State remains responsible for the choice of its own policy on the management of the nuclear waste and spent fuel that are under its jurisdiction, some considering spent fuel as a usable resource that can be reprocessed, others electing to dispose of it ; the provisions of this Directive should therefore be without prejudice to the right of Member States of origin to export their spent fuel for reprocessing and to the right of Member States of destination to refuse the entry into their territory of (i) radioactive waste for final treatment, except in the case of reshipment, and (ii) spent fuel for final disposal . |
|
(8) |
Simplification of the existing procedure should not hamper the existing rights of the Member States to object to or set conditions to a shipment of radioactive waste which require their approval . Objections should not be arbitrary and should be founded on relevant national or international provisions that can be easily identified . Relevant legislation is not limited to sectoral transport legislation. This Directive should be without prejudice to the rights and obligations of Member States under international law, and in particular to the exercise, by ships and aircraft of maritime, river and air navigation rights and freedoms, as provided for in international law. |
|
(8) |
Simplification of the existing procedure should not hamper the existing rights of the Member States to object to or set conditions to a shipment of radioactive waste which require their consent . Objections should not be arbitrary and should be founded on relevant national, Community or international provisions as set out in this Directive . Relevant legislation is not limited to sectoral transport legislation. This Directive should be without prejudice to the rights and obligations of Member States under international law, and in particular to the exercise, by ships and aircraft of maritime, river and air navigation rights and freedoms, as provided for in international law. |
|
(8a) |
Each Member State remains fully responsible for the management of radioactive waste and spent fuel under its jurisdiction; nothing in this Directive should imply that a Member State of destination must accept shipments of radioactive waste and spent fuel for final treatment or disposal except where the waste or fuel is for reshipment. Any refusal of such shipments should be justified on the basis of the criteria set out in this Directive. |
3a. This Directive is without prejudice to rights and obligations under international law, including, but not limited to, the right of innocent passage and right of transit passage enshrined in the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS).
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
The competent authorities of the Member States involved shall take the necessary measures to ensure that all information regarding shipments covered by this Directive is handled with due care and protected against any misuse.
Article 5a
Acknowledgment of receipt of the application by the competent authorities
Not later than 15 calendar days from the date of the receipt of the application by the competent authorities of the Member State of destination and of any Member State of transit, those authorities shall:
|
(a) |
send an acknowledgement of receipt of the application to the competent authorities of the Member State of origin, provided that the application is duly completed in compliance with the provisions of Article 14; or |
|
(b) |
where the application is not duly completed as set out in point (a), request the missing information from the competent authorities of the Member State of origin and inform the competent authorities of the Member State of destination and other Member States of transit, if any, of such request. A copy of that request shall be transmitted to the holder. The sending of such a request shall have the effect of suspending the time-limit for issuing an acknowledgement of receipt. The missing information shall be sent by the competent authorities of the Member State of origin to the competent authorities of the Member States concerned without undue delay. Not later than seven calendar days after the date of receipt of the missing information, the competent authorities of the Member State of destination or transit by which it had been requested shall send an acknowledgement of receipt of the duly completed application to the competent authorities of the Member State of origin. |
1. Not later than one month from the date of receipt of the duly completed application by the competent authorities of the Member State of destination and of any Member State of transit, they shall issue an acknowledgement of receipt.
Not later than three months from the date of receipt of the duly completed application the competent authorities of the Member State of destination and of any Member State of transit shall notify the competent authorities of the country of origin of their consent or of the conditions which they consider necessary or of their refusal to grant consent.
However, the competent authorities of the Member State of destination or of any Member State of transit may request a further period of not more than one month in addition to the period referred to in the second subparagraph to make their position known.
1. Not later than two months from the date of the acknowledgement of receipt the competent authorities of the Member State of destination and of any Member State of transit shall notify the competent authorities of the Member State of origin of their consent or of the conditions which they consider necessary for granting consent or of their refusal to grant consent.
However, the competent authorities of the Member State of destination or of any Member State of transit may request a further period of not more than one month in addition to the period referred to in the first subparagraph to make their position known.
2. If upon expiry of the periods referred to in the second and third subparagraphs of paragraph 1 no reply has been received from the competent authorities of the Member State of destination and/or the intended Member States of transit, those countries shall be deemed to have given their consent for the shipment requested provided that the acknowledgement of receipt referred to in paragraph 1 has been received from those countries.
2. If upon expiry of the periods referred to in the first or second subparagraph of paragraph 1 no reply has been received from the competent authorities of the Member State of destination and/or the intended Member States of transit, those countries shall be deemed to have given their consent for the shipment requested.
|
b) |
for the Member State of destination, on relevant legislation applicable to the management of radioactive waste or spent fuel and on relevant national, Community or international legislation applicable to transport of radioactive material. |
|
b) |
for the Member State of destination, on relevant legislation applicable to the management of radioactive waste or spent fuel or on relevant national, Community or international legislation applicable to transport of radioactive material. |
The same consent and refusal procedure shall be applied for both shipments of radioactive waste and shipments of spent fuel for disposal.
2. Where a shipment cannot be completed or if the conditions for shipment are not complied with in accordance with the provisions of this Directive, the competent authorities of the Member State of origin shall ensure that the radioactive waste or the spent fuel in question is taken back by the holder, unless an alternative safe arrangement can be made. They shall ensure that the person responsible for the shipment takes corrective safety measures where necessary.
2. Where a shipment cannot be completed or if the conditions for shipment are not complied with in accordance with the provisions of this Directive, the competent authorities of the Member State of origin shall ensure that the radioactive waste or the spent fuel in question is taken back by the holder, unless an alternative safe arrangement can be made on the basis of the applicable legislation on the management of spent fuel and radioactive waste . They shall ensure that the person responsible for the shipment takes corrective safety measures where necessary.
3. The holder shall be liable for costs arising in cases where the shipment cannot or may not be completed.
3. Where the shipment cannot or may not be completed for the reasons referred to in paragraph 1, the holder shall be primarily liable for costs arising, unless otherwise provided for either in any applicable legislation or in any contractual arrangement between the holder and any other person involved in the shipment.
The consignee shall be liable for costs arising in cases where the shipment cannot or may not be completed.
deleted
5. The Member State of destination or any Member State of transit may decide that the shipment may not be completed if the conditions for shipment are no longer complied with in accordance with the provisions of this Directive, or are not in accordance with the authorisations or consents issued pursuant to this Directive. Such Member State shall forthwith inform the competent authorities of the country of origin of this decision. The consignee will be liable for costs arising in cases where the shipment cannot or may not be completed .
5. The Member State of destination or any Member State of transit may decide that the shipment may not be completed if the conditions for shipment are no longer complied with in accordance with the provisions of this Directive, or are not in accordance with the authorisations or consents issued pursuant to this Directive. Such Member State shall forthwith inform the competent authorities of the country of origin of this decision.
Where the shipment cannot or may not be completed for the reasons referred to in the first subparagraph, the consignee shall be primarily liable for costs arising, unless otherwise provided for either in any applicable legislation or in any contractual arrangement between the consignee and any other person involved in the shipment.
5. A Member State of transit may decide that the shipment may not be completed if the conditions for shipment are no longer complied with in accordance with the provisions of this Directive, or are not in accordance with the authorisations or consents issued pursuant to this Directive. Such Member State shall forthwith inform the competent authorities of the country of origin of this decision. The responsible person referred to in paragraph 1 shall be liable for costs arising in cases where the shipment cannot or may not be completed.
5. A Member State of transit may decide that the shipment may not be completed if the conditions for shipment are no longer complied with in accordance with the provisions of this Directive, or are not in accordance with the authorisations or consents issued pursuant to this Directive. Such Member State shall forthwith inform the competent authorities of the country of origin of this decision.
Where the shipment cannot or may not be completed for the reasons referred to in the first subparagraph, the responsible person referred to in paragraph 1 shall be primarily liable for costs arising, unless otherwise provided for either in any applicable legislation or in any contractual arrangement between that person and any other person involved in the shipment.
5. The Member State of origin or any Member State of transit may decide that the shipment may not be completed if the conditions for shipment are no longer complied with in accordance with the provisions of this Directive, or are not in accordance with the authorisations or consents issued pursuant to this Directive. Such Member State of transit shall forthwith inform the competent authorities of the Member State of origin of this decision. Article 9, paragraph 2, applies. The holder will be liable for costs arising in cases where the shipment cannot or may not be completed.
5. The Member State of origin or any Member State of transit may decide that the shipment may not be completed if the conditions for shipment are no longer complied with in accordance with the provisions of this Directive, or are not in accordance with the authorisations or consents issued pursuant to this Directive. Such Member State of transit shall forthwith inform the competent authorities of the Member State of origin of this decision. Article 9, paragraph 2, applies.
Where the shipment cannot or may not be completed for the reasons referred to in the first subparagraph, the holder shall be primarily liable for costs arising, unless otherwise provided for either in any applicable legislation or in any contractual arrangement between the holder and any other person involved in the shipment.
1. Member States shall promote agreements in order to facilitate the safe management, including the final disposal, of radioactive waste from countries that produce it in small quantities and where the establishment of appropriate facilities would not be justified from the radiological point of view.
1. Member States shall promote agreements in order to facilitate the safe management, including the final disposal, of radioactive waste from countries that produce it in small quantities and where the establishment of appropriate facilities would not be justified from the radiological , economic, environmental and safety points of view. Such agreements shall be concluded subject to the condition that each Member State retains the right to refuse entry into its territory of spent fuel or radioactive waste for final processing or disposal, with the exception of reshipments.
(1) Not yet published in OJ.
P6_TA(2006)0301
More research and innovation — investing for growth and employment
European Parliament resolution on implementing the Community Lisbon Programme: more research and innovation — investing for growth and employment: A common approach (2006/2005(INI))
The European Parliament,
|
— |
having regard to the Commission Communication entitled ‘Implementing the Community Lisbon Programme: More Research and Innovation — Investing for growth and employment: A common approach’ (COM(2005)0488) and the accompanying Commission Staff Working Documents (SEC(2005)1253 and SEC(2005)1289), |
|
— |
having regard to the Presidency Conclusions of the Lisbon European Council of 23 and 24 March 2000, which resolved to make the Union the most competitive and dynamic knowledge-based economy in the world, |
|
— |
having regard to the Presidency Conclusions of the Brussels European Council of 22 and 23 March 2005, |
|
— |
having regard to the Presidency Conclusions of the Brussels European Council of 23 and 24 March 2006, |
|
— |
having regard to the Council Recommendation 2005/601/EC of 12 July 2005 on the broad guidelines for the economic policies of the Member States and the Community (2005 to 2008) (1), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission Communication entitled ‘Investing in research: an action plan for Europe’ (COM(2003)0226), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission Communication to the Spring European Council entitled ‘Working together for growth and jobs — A new start for the Lisbon Strategy’ (COM(2005)0024), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission Communication entitled ‘Common Actions for Growth and Employment: The Community Lisbon Programme’ (COM(2005)0330), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission's annual report on research and technological development activities of the European Union in 2004 (COM(2005)0517), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission proposal for a decision of the European Parliament and of the Council concerning the seventh framework programme of the European Community for research, technological development and demonstration activities (2007 to 2013) (COM(2005)0119), as amended by the European Parliament in its position of 15 June 2006 (2), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission proposal for a decision of the European Parliament and of the Council establishing a Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme (2007-2013) (COM(2005)0121), as amended by the European Parliament in its position of 1 June 2006 (3), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission Communication entitled ‘Implementing the renewed partnership for growth and jobs — Developing a knowledge flagship: the European Institute of Technology’ (COM(2006)0077), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission Staff Working Document entitled ‘European Competitiveness Report 2004’ (SEC(2004)1397), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission Staff Working Document entitled ‘Benchmarking Enterprise Policy: Results from the 2004 Scoreboard’ (SEC(2004)1427), |
|
— |
having regard to the European Innovation Scoreboard 2005 — Comparative Analysis of Innovation Performance which clearly shows that the United States and Japan are leaders in terms of innovation, |
|
— |
having regard to the Expert Group Report of July 2004 entitled ‘Improving institutions for the transfer of technology from science to enterprises’, |
|
— |
having regard to the Expert Group Report of 2004 entitled ‘Management of intellectual property in publicly-funded research organisations: Towards European Guidelines’, |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission report of September 2005 entitled ‘Employment in Europe 2005 — Recent Trends and Prospects’, |
|
— |
having regard to the report of January 2006, drawn up by the Independent Expert Group on R&D and Innovation appointed following the Hampton Court Summit, entitled ‘Creating an Innovative Europe’ (‘the Aho-report’), |
|
— |
having regard to its resolution of 10 March 2005 on science and technology — Guidelines for future European Union policy to support research (4), |
|
— |
having regard to its resolution of 19 January 2006 on implementing the European Charter for Small Enterprises (5), |
|
— |
having regard to its resolution of 14 March 2006 on a European information society for growth and employment (6), |
|
— |
having regard to Rule 45 of its Rules of Procedure, |
|
— |
having regard to the report of the Committee on Industry, Research and Energy and the opinions of the Committee on Culture and Education and the Committee on Employment and Social Affairs (A6-0204/2006), |
|
A. |
whereas Europe lags behind the United States and Japan in terms of growth, research and productivity, failing to capitalise on Information and Communication Technologies (ICT) application or to attract R&D investment into Europe, |
|
B. |
whereas increasing the resources available for R&D is a prerequisite for the successful innovation needed for economic growth and the creation of jobs, |
|
C. |
whereas reports from the Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (OECD) show that R&D grants help firms with strategic change and organisational routines, and improve attitudes towards technology, |
|
D. |
whereas while Europe's best companies invest at world class levels, the private sector must make a greater effort in the area of R&D, |
|
E. |
whereas the contributions of small and middle-sized enterprises (SMEs) to the development of new technology-based products and services and markets are dependent upon their capacities to innovate, increase their research efforts, outsource research, extend their networks, better exploit research results and acquire technological know-how, |
|
F. |
whereas market innovation could benefit those European sectors which directly affect Member States' citizens and account for the highest levels of GDP, |
|
G. |
whereas support organisations such as training and research centres, financial institutions, innovation and intellectual property consultants and local and regional development agencies can help to maximise firms' creative business potential, |
|
H. |
whereas Europe's weak labour market performance, inefficient use of human resources, market fragmentation and reduced labour mobility largely explain the poor progress made towards the Lisbon and Stockholm objectives, |
|
I. |
whereas structural barriers and insufficient incentives prevent greater mobility of established researchers, |
|
J. |
whereas European Technology Transfer Institutions and Innovation Relay Centres, allow faster commercialisation, a better dissemination of new technologies, the improved management of intellectual property, a better implementation of research results and better coordination with existing national and regional schemes, |
|
K. |
whereas adoption of the ‘Open Innovation’ approach would boost R & D capacity in the EU, |
|
L. |
whereas the Commission's proposed research budget should not be back-loaded within the Financial Framework, |
|
M. |
whereas a critical mass of EU budget resources for financial instruments is necessary, to enhance SME financing, tackle market failures and optimise Community resources, leveraging public and private capital, |
|
N. |
whereas researchers need pre-seed finance in order to conduct market assessments, develop pilot and demonstration projects and working prototypes, for company start-ups and to commercialise new research products, and whereas venture capital is needed for subsequent company growth, |
|
O. |
whereas State aid provisions should be simple, transparent and effective, used only as a last resort where the market fails, and granted on a temporary basis; |
|
1. |
Urges Member States to promote entrepreneurship from the early stages of education onwards and to strengthen their support for life-long learning by actively encouraging ICT training amongst both employed and unemployed persons; |
|
2. |
Notes the Union's delays in implementing the Lisbon Strategy in the area of education and training; appeals to the Member States to take it on themselves to relaunch the Lisbon Strategy; |
|
3. |
Stresses the need to raise the profile of scientific career paths and to promote existing incentives and awards such as the Descartes, Aristotle and young scientist's awards; |
|
4. |
Calls for greater support to be given to the best European researchers, especially early-stage researchers, in the form of more attractive working conditions, the reduction of legal, administrative and geographical barriers and the equal treatment of European researchers with their foreign counterparts; |
|
5. |
Firmly supports the necessary objective of a single market for researchers, as set out by the Commission in its abovementioned communication on ‘Implementing the Community Lisbon Programme: More Research and Innovation — Investing for growth and employment: A common approach’; |
|
6. |
Acknowledges that incentives to improve employment conditions for scientists and researchers and the ongoing training of the workforce are essential to encourage the sharing of scientific knowledge; |
|
7. |
Believes that training establishments can make a major contribution in this respect and is convinced that, firstly, contact with science and research should commence at school, and secondly, it is necessary to promote creative collaboration between university research staff and the business sector; further considers that obstacles to researchers' mobility should be eliminated by improving their status and career development, objectives which cannot be achieved without improving cooperation between Member States on taxation and the transfer of certain social benefits; |
|
8. |
Supports the European Charter for Researchers and Code of Conduct for the Recruitment of Researchers, since these initiatives may encourage more European students to take up research at university while serving as an incentive to the best foreign researchers, who should be encouraged to pursue their research careers in Europe, either permanently, or temporarily as part of a cooperation agreement through a specific policy of granting short term visas; |
|
9. |
Calls on the EU to combat effectively its brain drain and to put in place all appropriate measures to attract excellence to its territory, among other things by promoting exchange programmes with third countries — Erasmus Mundus, for example — aimed at students, researchers, and teachers; takes the view that a European qualifications framework would be important for helping to establish a European labour market open to researchers, and supports efforts to reduce obstacles to the latter's mobility; |
|
10. |
Notes the importance of fostering a culture which celebrates innovation; urges Member States to allow innovation policy to penetrate all areas of research; |
|
11. |
Stresses the fundamental role of universities in creating and spreading knowledge and strongly recommends that their importance be enhanced by developing synergies between higher education, research, lifelong learning and the productive sectors within the economy; will therefore pay attention to the Commission report on higher education; |
|
12. |
Urges the Commission and the Member States to institute and promote European prizes for innovation; |
|
13. |
Stresses the importance of promoting the integration of products, processes and knowledge-based services and the introduction of different support systems into non-technological sectors; draws attention in this connection to the fact that non-technological innovation also encompasses social innovation and institutional innovation; |
|
14. |
Proposes offering selected SMEs which show a particular flair for innovation and business creation limited additional research support for their ventures; |
|
15. |
Recommends paying particular attention to ensuring the adequate participation of SMEs in R&D by taking concrete measures such as earmarking a portion of research funding for SMEs; |
|
16. |
Points to the need to support SMEs with regard to their research capacity; |
|
17. |
Urges Member States to create an innovation-friendly market for citizens and businesses, ensuring better regulation, standards, public procurement and intellectual property rights; urges the Commission to provide information on the protection of the intellectual property rights; |
|
18. |
Takes note of the Commissions' view that the EU must acquire a cost-effective, legally watertight and user-friendly system of intellectual property protection so as to attract technologically advanced companies; considers that the protection of intellectual property must not interfere with open access to public goods and public knowledge; urges the Commission to promote a socially inclusive knowledge-based society by supporting, for example, free and open source software and licensing concepts like the General Public License (GPL) and the Public Documentation Licence (PDL); |
|
19. |
Notes the need for regional info-points for the coordination of relevant information regarding research and innovation; |
|
20. |
Proposes the revised use of standard-setting powers to demand high technical performance levels and quickly reach agreement on new standards; |
|
21. |
Proposes the Europeanization of national clusters, conglomerates, co-operatives and consortia to increase competitive power and critical mass, including multidisciplinary research, mature industries and start-ups; |
|
22. |
Recognises the importance of creating poles and zones of innovation at regional level and of their networking with corresponding structures in other regions and Member States or third countries; |
|
23. |
Urges clear target setting in the creation of centres of excellence, all of which should have creativity labs; |
|
24. |
Notes the need for a Community patent and trademark, and for improved reciprocity between the European, United States' and Japanese patent systems; stresses that an integrated Community patent system based on democratic legal standards must be part of an innovation strategy, in which it is essential to ensure a balance between protection of industrial property, dissemination of technical knowledge and free and unrestricted competition; underlines that the purpose of the protection provided by a patent is the safeguarding of an invention and not the controlling of market sectors; |
|
25. |
Asks the Council to end the stalemate over the proposed Community patent as far as the language regime is concerned; |
|
26. |
Draws the attention of the Commission and the Member States to the recent changes concerning the protection and dissemination of scientific know-how, to the success of scientific reviews published with free access and to the ‘Science Commons’ licence; |
|
27. |
Urges the Commission to create a general reporting system to monitor indicators such as revenues from contract research, patents filed and granted, licences and revenues from licensing, the number of active contracts, the number of client enterprises (including SMEs) and the number and development of spin-offs, with qualitative interpretation; |
|
28. |
Urges Member States to help put institutes for applied research in closer contact with industry, incubators and neighbouring science or industrial parks, enabling them to achieve critical mass; |
|
29. |
Notes that key European sectors continue to suffer from poor coordination and integration, bottlenecks, and poor knowledge management; notes that more SME involvement in European technology platforms would help address these issues; |
|
30. |
Stresses the need to support researchers in accessing pre-seed financing which would enable them to fund activities aimed at proving to investors that a new technology has a certain level of commercial and technical viability; |
|
31. |
Expresses its concern that, even if the vital importance of promoting technological research and innovation is recognised at European level, results obtained within the EU will be limited in terms of funding, performance and capacity utilisation; |
|
32. |
Notes the importance of creating spin-offs as a means to commercialise research results, and, in particular, the importance of providing credit facilities for this purpose; |
|
33. |
Stresses the need for a more developed system of public-private partnerships to improve the quality of research by providing up-to-date equipment, infrastructure and services; |
|
34. |
Welcomes the important role of business angels in providing otherwise unavailable investment to innovative firms, especially SMEs; |
|
35. |
Notes that eco-innovation, in particular methods of boosting energy efficiency, offers competitive advantages to European companies; |
|
36. |
Notes that individually negotiated loans and grants, where the precise form of the instrument is determined in close contact with customers, will lead to the effective use of funds in terms of volume and time-to-market, focused on real needs; |
|
37. |
Notes that adequate venture capital is necessary for the creation, growth, boosting and bringing together of research and innovation amongst new entrepreneurial firms; |
|
38. |
Urges the Commission, in cooperation with the Member States, to provide SMEs with a framework of structural assistance to upgrade their knowledge management and technological resources, enabling them to play an active role in a demand-led innovation market and become actively involved in technological research and development; |
|
39. |
Observes that it is necessary to provide SMEs with improved access to funding; |
|
40. |
Supports the idea, endorsed by the March 2006 Brussels European Council, of easier and wider access to loans from the European Investment Bank for businesses, particularly SMEs which are most in need of encouragement in the field of innovation and research; |
|
41. |
Proposes that structural funds should be seen as a key means of supporting research and innovation capacity, especially in the pursuit of cohesion; proposes a trebling of the amount of structural funds to be spent on research and innovation; |
|
42. |
Notes that using public procurement to foster research and innovation is key but that it should not distort competition or favour major market players; |
|
43. |
Considers that public procurement should not be limited to providing private investment inducements but should play a strategic role, inspiring companies to promote innovation and acquire fresh know-how; |
|
44. |
Recognises, that networking between SMEs and large contractors from both the private and the public sector can play an important role in reinforcing innovation; emphasises that public provision of innovative products at both national and Community level can help to fill gaps in the market and promote innovative products and services in general; |
|
45. |
Commends the sweeping reform of the EU's State aid rules, shifting subsidies from big, ailing companies to small and innovative businesses; |
|
46. |
Notes that flexibility and transparency are prerequisites for innovation; |
|
47. |
Considers it necessary to find a wider range of ways to secure investment in research equipment; |
|
48. |
Proposes the implementation of a tax credit system to encourage the service sector to take an interest in research findings and their implementation; |
|
49. |
Proposes a ‘single fund structure’ to avoid the double taxation of investors located in one Member State investing through a fund in another; |
|
50. |
Emphasises the need to examine whether the current structures and mechanisms with particular expertise in innovation are adequate to ensure a broad approach to innovation and able to promote it by contributing to a better coordination of action and policies; |
|
51. |
Asks the Council to report annually to the European Parliament on the trends in investment from national budgets in public research (the objective being 1 % of GDP); |
|
52. |
Notes that the objective of investing 3 % of EU GDP in research by 2010 will probably not be achieved; regrets that at the March 2006 Brussels European Council the Member States did not make firmer commitments in favour of research and innovation; regrets that they did not fix a minimum target for increasing public aid in 2010; |
|
53. |
Believes that Community instruments such as the i2010 strategy, the seventh Framework Programme for research, technological development and demonstration activities and the Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme can contribute to bridging the gap between research findings and financial gain; |
|
54. |
Stresses that improved research and innovation policies must contribute to new employment opportunities through sustainable development, with a focus on eco-innovation and sustainable production (e.g. solar-hydrogen technologies, wind energy, fuel cells, biomass, plant based chemical industry), eco-efficient services (energy conservation, mobility services, re-use and recycling) and sustainable engineering and management methods (e.g. bionics, Integrated Product Policy); |
|
55. |
Welcomes the Commission's recommendation that within the framework of the ‘Better Regulation’ initiative, the impact assessment should include assessments of the effects of recommendations in the field of research and innovation; |
|
56. |
Calls on the Member States to make better use of the European funds allocated to them and draws attention to those Member States which have put job creation at the heart of their plans by investing more than 35 % of the appropriations from the European Social Fund in the modernisation of their education and training systems; |
|
57. |
Instructs its President to forward this resolution to the Council, the Commission, and to the governments of the Member States. |
(1) OJ L 205, 6.8.2005, p. 28.
(2) Text Adopted, P6_TA(2006)0265.
(3) Texts Adopted, P6_TA(2006)0230.
(4) OJ C 320 E, 15.12.2005, p. 259.
(5) Texts Adopted, P6_TA(2006)0022.
(6) Texts Adopted, P6_TA(2006)0079.
P6_TA(2006)0302
Towards a more integrated approach for industrial policy
European Parliament resolution on a policy framework to strengthen EU manufacturing — towards a more integrated approach for industrial policy (2006/2003(INI))
The European Parliament,
|
— |
having regard to the communication from the Commission entitled ‘Implementing the Community Lisbon Programme: A policy framework to strengthen EU manufacturing — towards a more integrated approach for industrial policy’ (COM(2005)0474), |
|
— |
having regard to the Commission Staff Working Documents accompanying that communication (SEC(2005)1215, SEC(2005)1216 and SEC(2005)1217), |
|
— |
having regard to the conclusions of the Competitiveness Council of 28 November 2005, |
|
— |
having regard to the Presidency conclusions of the Brussels European Council of 23 and 24 March 2006, |
|
— |
having regard to the opinion of the European Economic and Social Committee to the aforementioned Commission communication (INT/288 — CESE 595/2006), |
|
— |
having regard to Rule 45 of its Rules of Procedure, |
|
— |
having regard to the report of the Committee on Industry, Research and Energy and the opinion of the Committee on Employment and Social Affairs (A6-0206/2006), |
|
A. |
whereas the abovementioned Commission communication outlines, on the basis of a detailed screening of the competitiveness of 27 individual sectors, a work programme for industrial policy in manufacturing industries for the coming years, |
|
B. |
whereas a dynamic and highly competitive industrial sector and high social and environmental standards are the ingredients of the European model of economic development, |
|
C. |
whereas the EU manufacturing industry provides around 20 % of EU output and employs some 34 million people more than half of which work in small and medium-sized enterprises (SMEs), |
|
D. |
whereas the Council recognises the importance of the manufacturing industry as a generator of new and innovative products, |
|
1. |
Welcomes the Commission communication, which sets out a policy framework and an enhanced work programme for the manufacturing industries for the coming years; considers this communication a major building-block for shaping a sound and balanced industrial policy by combining concrete sectoral actions with cross-sectoral policy initiatives; |
|
2. |
Recognises the important role of the manufacturing industries in the EU; points out that manufacturing, services and trade are strongly and increasingly interlinked in the modern business environment; strongly supports, therefore, the development of a coherent industrial policy at European level to tackle the challenges of globalisation; |
|
3. |
Recalls that the EU must aspire to remain a major industrial power, and not merely confine itself to developing its services sector; |
|
4. |
Considers that the EU should take care to ensure the joint development of competitiveness strategies in the industrial and service sectors and promote good practice as regards the entrepreneurial environment and entrepreneurship, including corporate social responsibility and equal opportunities for men and women; |
|
5. |
Recalls that the objectives of the Lisbon strategy are minimum objectives which the Member States should commit themselves to upholding; notes that, recently, several Member States adopted national policies to strengthen manufacturing industries; believes that isolated national policies could hamper the development of a European industrial policy and that better coordination between actions taken by the Member States and Community actions could strengthen both; therefore urges the Commission and the Member States to devise mechanisms to effectively coordinate actions in this field, involving governments, industry and stakeholders at European, national and regional level; |
|
6. |
Notes that, without government action, it will be impossible to establish a framework for industry which is stable and attractive and affords legal certainty; points out that the work of a modern public sector is vital for dealing with infrastructure and fostering both education and innovation; |
|
7. |
Considers that the Community policy of aid and support for national industrial policies must aim to develop European Flagships for Excellence, creating synergies between the skills of local labour markets and research centres, without neglecting a political and macroeconomic environment which is geared to development, and as a means of promoting greater investment and creating wealth and high-quality jobs with rights; welcomes the fact that the Commission communication gives a definition of a European industrial policy; stresses, however, that this approach must not be purely horizontal but that there is also a need to think in sector-specific terms; |
|
8. |
Reminds the Commission of the need to mainstream energy-saving and efficiency measures in all policy areas; notes that energy costs are a major factor in many industries and calls, therefore, on the Commission to propose specific measures and programmes in this respect as part of its industrial policy; |
|
9. |
Supports the initiatives set out in the Commission communication; welcomes the detailed analysis of the 27 sectors and the clear focus in the recommendations; sees, however, the concrete implementation of the initiatives as the current challenge; believes that, to guarantee coherent implementation in the long term, the initiatives proposed will need to be coordinated within one directorate-general, the Directorate-General for Enterprise and Industry, and one Council configuration, the ‘Competitiveness’ configuration; in this respect, calls on the Commission to inform the European Parliament of the progress achieved in relation to the initiatives before the end of 2006; calls on the Commission also to consider the possibility of a systematic evaluation and regular assessment of the benefits and added value of initiatives such as high-level groups, innovation panels and working parties in those sectors in which they operate; |
|
10. |
Encourages the Commission to pay adequate attention to all sectors of the manufacturing industries and, where necessary, to fill in the gaps, both with regard to the analysis of certain sectors and to the actions to be taken, bearing in mind the high degree of regional concentration existing in some industries; |
|
11. |
Recognises the need for increased competitiveness in manufacturing industries; welcomes the fact that the Commission stresses the social responsibility of business and the need for sustainable development; calls on the Commission to accord the same weight to the working environment and to the health and safety of workers as to ensuring the creation of more and better jobs; |
|
12. |
Recognises that, to pursue a European industrial policy in sectors of strategic interest to Member States' economies, it is essential to strengthen existing industries, to keep the internal market open, to regulate as and where necessary, and to allow for factors related to competitiveness which could affect employment levels in many Member States, as well as supporting the modernisation of all European industry that is already competitive or could become competitive; |
|
13. |
Is convinced that the future of Europe's manufacturing industries lies in increased added value and better quality; is therefore concerned that overall EU trade is still concentrated in sectors with medium-high technologies and low to intermediate labour skills; believes that education and training at all levels are key issues, both in terms of improving labour force qualifications and facilitating structural change; regrets the fact that the Commission communication does not pay enough attention to education, lifelong learning and training; urges the Member States to increase their efforts to attract more young students into technical and scientific studies; |
|
14. |
Welcomes the Commission's recognition of the fact that a well-trained and flexible labour force is the EU's most important resource and competitiveness factor; calls on the EU to concentrate on enhancing skills development for workers at all levels, particularly unskilled workers; |
|
15. |
Takes a positive view, furthermore, of the Commission's proposals to address the shortage of special skills facing industry through policies to promote transparency and the transfer and recognition of qualifications and to identify current needs for skills per sector and where skills shortages lie; |
|
16. |
Points out that more clear-cut investment is needed to improve the skill levels of the work force, for instance by way of training-related operational programmes for science and technology aimed at guaranteeing the quality of, and diversifying, training opportunities in the various Member States; |
|
17. |
Calls on undertakings to ensure the best possible training conditions for workers by providing ongoing training for their employees, with undertakings drawing up skills plans and taking responsibility in a general way for lifelong learning and the continuing training of their workers; |
|
18. |
Considers that the transfer of knowledge and the application of research results in new products and processes is still too weak in the manufacturing industries, and especially in SMEs; in this respect, sees a clear need to bridge the current gap between the research community and the market sector; is convinced that special attention must be given to jointly tackling this problem and urges the Commission and the Member States to swiftly come forward with concrete measures to solve it; to this end stresses that the possibilities offered by the Competitiveness and Innovation Framework Programme should be utilised rationally and as effectively as possible; |
|
19. |
Believes that consideration should be given to the specific needs of micro and small businesses, since the problems they face cannot be compared with those facing large enterprises; |
|
20. |
Recognises that schemes need to be devised to provide direct support for research activities carried out in consortia, involving companies and research units or university teams, thus enabling skills and technologies to be transferred more rapidly; |
|
21. |
Emphasises, in line with the 2006 Report of the Independent Expert Group on R&D and Innovation, entitled ‘Creating an Innovative Europe’, that State aid to companies other than SMEs is appropriate when it is granted for the purpose of encouraging cooperation with other companies, SMEs, academic institutions in ‘open innovation clusters’, poles of excellence, and collaborative R&D programmes; |
|
22. |
Points out that the EU's prosperity depends on developing world-class innovative European industries; |
|
23. |
Welcomes the concept of Technology Platforms which will provide a boost to developing lines of research which will meet the requirements of the market; believes, however, that more funding is needed for applied research leading to innovative products; in this respect, welcomes the European Investment Bank's (EIB) intention to increase substantially the financing available for growth-enhancing investments in R&D and SMEs; recalls the conclusions of the abovementioned Brussels' European Council, expecting up to 30 billion Euro in venture capital and guaranteed bank loans to support innovation and to reinforce action in R&D; encourages the Commission and the EIB, together with the private sector, to give follow-up to these conclusions in practical terms; |
|
24. |
Stresses the major potential of nano-sciences and nano-technologies and urges the manufacturing industry to keep up to date with technological progress and the provisions of the 2005 to 2009 European programme of action in this field so as to be in a position to take advantages of the opportunities and new perspectives opening up for each of its sectors; |
|
25. |
Stresses the problem of access to finance and venture capital, especially for innovative start-ups and SMEs; therefore, asks the Commission to closely involve the EIB and the European Investment Fund in the work of the sectoral initiatives; |
|
26. |
Considers that it might be very useful to set up a high-level group to ensure that legislation concerning industry, energy, and the environment is consistent with the aim of improving sustainability and competitiveness; points out that, as well as the electricity market, the market in natural gas likewise needs to be analysed, bearing in mind that both entail far-reaching implications for some manufacturing industries; |
|
27. |
Points out that the manufacturing industries are often marked by regional concentration; therefore urges regional and national authorities, working in close collaboration with economic and social players, to draw up local strategy plans for areas which are, or have the potential to become, centres of innovative manufacturing clusters; to this end, calls for local strategy plans to be targeted at making the best possible use of the primary wealth producing sector, research potential and any comparative benefits offered by each region; calls on Member States to make full use of the possibilities in the Structural Funds in this respect; |
|
28. |
Points out that future European industrial policy measures must allow not just for the sectoral dimension, but also for the territorial dimension; notes that areas with a high concentration of manufacturing industry have to have industrial and economic policies geared to their specific needs; calls on the Commission, therefore, to follow up the proposals announced in its communication by bringing further consideration to bear on the questions whether cooperation should be intensified among regions facing similar problems and challenges and how manufacturing companies in those regions might be encouraged to set up networks within which to pursue and coordinate the necessary industrial and economic policies; |
|
29. |
Welcomes the Commission proposal to integrate and coordinate industrial policy with other policies, including cohesion, environmental, R&D, and energy policies; notes that cohesion policy and industrial policy are interrelated, given that infrastructure and human resources are needed to enable industrial policy to succeed and to enhance the significant role of the European Works Councils, and hence that it is essential to bring policies into a coherent relationship and secure a high degree of involvement within society; |
|
30. |
Believes that sectors facing fierce international competition should jointly adopt measures to facilitate their restructuring and modernization; in this respect, cites a number of initiatives, such as LeaderSHIP 2015, CARS21 and the High-Level Group on textiles and clothing, as good examples; in view of the urgent need for action in those sectors, calls on the Commission to submit concrete proposals by Autumn 2006 with a view to their adoption by the Council, following an opinion from the European Parliament, before the end of 2006; welcomes the intention of the Commission to set up such sector-specific initiatives for the pharmaceutical, chemical, defence, space and mechanical engineering industries; |
|
31. |
Is of the opinion that, as far as individual sectors are concerned, workers' trade unions, consumer associations, and employers' organisations must be involved in the debate so as to help ensure that industrial policy solutions will be better suited to their purpose and more comprehensive; |
|
32. |
Stresses the importance of establishing a dialogue with all the parties concerned, and welcomes the creation of the High-Level Group on Competitiveness, Energy and the Environment; |
|
33. |
Welcomes the European Globalisation Adjustment Fund; insists that it focus on helping workers made redundant due to globalisation to find new jobs, mainly by improving and adapting their qualifications; |
|
34. |
Maintains that no Community aid should be granted to companies which, after receiving such support in a Member State, transfer their manufacturing operations to another country without completely fulfilling the agreements entered into with the Member State concerned; |
|
35. |
Calls for the rights of workers to be protected when manufacturing companies are restructured and hence for information to be made fully available to workers' representative bodies; |
|
36. |
Points out that dialogue between management and workers has a key role to play in matters related to modernisation and in coming up with ways to anticipate and to implement the changes needed for sectors to remain or become competitive; |
|
37. |
Calls on the Commission to make an in-depth analysis of the current situation of the manufacturing industries in the new Member States and the challenges ahead and to ensure that Community legislation is properly enforced; this will make it possible to obtain aggregated data for the 25 Member States and, on the basis of those data, to analyse the various sectors and draw up recommendations to guide industrial policy; |
|
38. |
Calls on the Commission to take further measures in support of exporting companies and those which invest on the largest scale in research and innovation projects; |
|
39. |
Urges the Commission to focus on the area of market surveillance and the fight against unfair competition and counterfeiting; invites the Commission to come forward before the end of 2006 with concrete proposals in the area of protection and enforcement of intellectual property rights; in this regard, considers that efforts need to be intensified with a view to hunting out imported counterfeit products from non-member countries and that, to unearth practices of this kind, Member States should exchange information and employ more advanced technology applications at the points where goods enter the EU; |
|
40. |
Calls on the Commission to monitor and record the extent to which imported products comply with European environmental and consumer health protection legislation and affect the competitiveness of European products; |
|
41. |
Stresses the importance of market access for the manufacturing industries; urges the Commission to continue its efforts, working in tandem with the sectors affected, to identify international practices which can adversely affect the competitiveness of European undertakings, particularly regulations and subsidies, and tackle barriers to trade and investment that are in breach of international rules; sees in bilateral agreements a good opportunity to overcome these challenges in a fair, transparent and forward-thinking manner and hence to make the principle of reciprocity the general rule in the Union's trading relations; |
|
42. |
Stresses that legislation seeking to include environmental matters in economic policies and strategies should allow the Member States scope for flexibility in the choice of economic and financial instruments; |
|
43. |
Believes that, as regards the measures to be taken, especially in the WTO, it is necessary to allow for the context obtaining in, and the specific characteristics of, each sector, the opportunities and challenges that may arise, and the difficulties posed for individual Member States; |
|
44. |
Calls on the Member States and the Commission to pursue sustainable development objectives by bringing economic, social, and environmental aspects into an even balance; |
|
45. |
Instructs its President to forward this resolution to the Council and Commission, and to the governments and parliaments of the Member States. |